CR-IR344 - 03E-FCR 5501D & 5501DPlus PDF

0.
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY
CR-IR344 (FCR5501D)
CR-IR344P (FCR5501D plus)
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milli-roentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

and µC/kg (microcoulomb/kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation,
is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 µC/kg
FCR® is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright© 1999-2003 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
Document No. 003-352-03
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
1st Edition - Aug. 31, 1999
permission of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Miyanodai Technology Development
Revised Edition - Jun. 20, 2003
Center.
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual 0.1

06.20.2003 FM4017
How Service Manual Is Organized 0.2 How Service Manual Is Organized 0.3
■ Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Getting Started
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
have been inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
■ Scope If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR344 and CR-IR344P.
The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
For the console (hereinafter abbreviated as CSL), reference should be made to the Service Inspection/calibration procedures should be performed in accordance with the inspection/
Manual for ID-T741 or CR-IR348CL. calibration manuals described in the ECN Information.
◆ NOTES ◆
● Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration
• Differences between the CR-IR344 and CR-IR344P are as follows.
The CR-IR344 may be connected to the ID-T741. Name Inspection Calibration Inspection/calibration manual No.
The CR-IR344P may be connected to the CR-IR348CL and ID-T741.
• Units with serial number #5001 or later are called “CR-IR344P”. Dosimeter – ❍
Steel rule (150mm) ❍ –
■ Notational Conventions Steel rule (300mm) ❍ –

ECO No. FCR-A016
In this manual, some conventions for unit symbols, cautions, warnings, etc. are followed to Digital tester ❍ ❍
provide a simple, easy-to-read layout. ❍ (✻) –
Calipers
Push-pull gauge ❍ ❍
● Notation of unit symbols
✻: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
TR4H0001.EPS
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI)
are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but are permit-
ted in the Measurement Law are used partially.
● Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.

The notation formats of “warning,” “caution,” “note,” “supplementary note,” and “reference”
are shown below.
WARNING
Used when physical injury or death may occur if the instruction is not observed.
CAUTION
Used when a minor physical injury may be incurred or the machine may suffer serious damage
if the instruction is not observed.
◆ NOTE ◆
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur if the
instruction is not observed.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Used to supply information that is not related directly to the work flow but may be useful if known.
Used to indicate the section you should refer to.
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual 0.2 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual 0.3
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Safety Precautions 0.4 Safety Precautions 0.5
■ Other General Precautions

Safety Precautions
• To avoid hazards and prevent damage to components, do not remove or install any
part while the machine is powered. When performing checks and adjustments under
Observe the following safety precautions to avoid possible hazards and accidents during the powered condition, exercise care against electric shock.
servicing.
• Use care not to touch the erasure lamp by hand, because it remains at high
temperature immediately after power is turned OFF.
1. General Precautions • Since some components, such as the photomultiplier, are not sufficiently discharged
■ Power Supply after power is turned OFF, exercise due care to avoid electric shock. (Do not touch
any exposed parts, such as connectors and terminals, by bare hand inadvertently.)
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing. If servicing is performed while the power
• When servicing any printed circuit board or LD assembly (light source unit), be sure
remains ON, you may experience electric shock, burn, or machine malfunction. Since some
to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure proper grounding. If not, static electricity
parts are not fully discharged (such as the photomultiplier) or remain at high temperature
built on the human body may cause damage to electronic parts mounted on the
(such as the lamp) even after power OFF, exercise due care not to touch them.
board or LD assembly .
If servicing procedures (such as voltage measurement) that cannot be performed under
• Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number indica-
power-OFF condition are to be performed, use due care to avoid electric shock and other
tions, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put another
hazards, as instructed in this manual.
label over them.
■ Check on Drive Mechanisms • To avoid physical hazards, do not put your hand on or into any rotating part. Also use
care not to get your hand, foot, hairs, or clothes entangled in the machine.
For your safety, be sure to turn OFF the power before proceeding with inspection or adjust-
ment. If inspection or adjustment that cannot be performed under power-OFF condition is to • Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put the protective housings, retaining
be made, use due care, as instructed in this manual. screws, and cover grounding back exactly where they were, and secure them in
place.
■ Heavy Objects
Get an assistant to help you during installation and removal of heavy objects. Also use
suitable gear or machinery when appropriate.
■ Safety Devices
For safety devices, such as fuses, breakers, interlock switches, panels, and covers, their
safety features should always be enabled. Do not make any alternation or modification that
may impair their functionality.
■ Precautions for Optical Parts

Observe the following rules for all the optical parts. Otherwise, the image quality may be
degraded.
• Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the
machine is powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be
damaged.
• Never touch the surface of optical parts.
• Do not attempt to remove dust or soil with procedures other than those specified.
• Remove optical parts in a clean environment. When removing protective housings to
replace optical parts, use care to avoid saliva from spattering around. Accordingly, it
is desirable to wear a mask.
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Safety Precautions 0.6 Safety Precautions 0.7
2. Safety Against Laser Radiation BLANK PAGE
As indicated by the Certification and Identification Label attached on the elevation unit left-
hand side cover (rear side) for overseas use, the machine complies with the U.S. Federal
Regulations concerning laser safety. The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum
output of 60 mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but
you will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in this manual.
■ Precautions Against Laser Exposure

Observe the following rules to avoid laser exposure.
● Ensuring that the covers are closed during machine operations
While the machine is operating, do not remove the top cover or right-hand inner cover from
the exposure unit. Unlike its predecessors, the CR-IR343 has an upright optical system (a
laser beam scan occurs in a horizontal direction) so that the laser beam is more likely to
enter the eye. Therefore, a safety feature is incorporated so that removing a cover causes a
“system down” error and shuts down the laser system.
If it is necessary to turn ON the power with a cover removed, observe the instructions set
forth in this manual and exercise due care to avoid laser radiation exposure.
● Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure

When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in
this manual to avoid laser exposure.
• Turning the power ON to initiate IP conveyance with covers open
• Remove and restore the scanning optics unit.
• Replace the semiconductor laser unit.
• Replace or clean subscanning unit parts.
After the procedures are completed, put the protective housings and retaining screws back
exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine.
● Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

Observe the following rules during servicing to avoid laser exposure.
• Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because
you may be exposed to laser beam radiation.
• Do not position your fingers or other part of your body in the laser beam path.
• Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
• Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
• While the laser is turned ON, do not remove scanner parts (scanning optics unit,
laser, light-collecting guide, light-collecting mirror, or dustproof duct).
• When you open a cover to check for IP conveyance, do not stare at the secondary
scattered laser light. Also, you must wear safety goggles.
• Never attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconduc-
tor laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.
● Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
In order to keep the machine in compliance with laser safety standards, perform preventive
maintenance programs described in Preventive Maintenance Volume at intervals specified.
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Machine Description 0.8 Contents Machine Description 0.9
CR-IR344 Service Manual – Contents
Machine Description (MD) 8. Mechanical Control Flows ........................................................................................... MD 8-1

8.1 How to Use the Control Flows .......................................................................... MD 8-1
1. Machine Components and Their Names .................................................................... MD 1-1 8.2 Routine (Normal Conveyance) Operations...................................................... MD 8-2
1.1 Machine External Views ................................................................................... MD 1-1 8.2.1 IP Conveyance Operation Overview ................................................... MD 8-3
1.2 Component Names ............................................................................................ MD 1-2 8.2.2 Details of IP Conveyance Operation ................................................... MD 8-4
1.3 Maintenance Space............................................................................................ MD 1-3 8.3 Utility Processing............................................................................................. MD 8-29

8.4 Initialization Processing .................................................................................. MD 8-32
2. Features of Machine .................................................................................................... MD 2-1
8.4.1 Initialization Operation Overview ...................................................... MD 8-32
2.1 Mechanical Features.......................................................................................... MD 2-1
8.4.2 Initialization Processing ..................................................................... MD 8-33
2.2 Image Network Interface Option ....................................................................... MD 2-1
8.5 Error Code Index .............................................................................................. MD 8-42
3. New Parts with Better Serviceability .......................................................................... MD 3-1
9. Machine Position Information ..................................................................................... MD 9-1
3.1 E-ringless Housings Employed ........................................................................ MD 3-1
9.1 Unit Locations .................................................................................................... MD 9-1
3.2 Snap-fit Pinion Gears Employed ...................................................................... MD 3-2
9.2 Roller Arrangement ........................................................................................... MD 9-2
3.3 Sensors Requiring No Mounting Position Adjustments ................................ MD 3-3
9.3 Home Position Values ....................................................................................... MD 9-3
4. System Block Diagram ................................................................................................ MD 4-1 9.4 Grip Spring Data ................................................................................................ MD 9-6
5. I/O Arrangement and Function Descriptions ............................................................ MD 5-1 10. Board LED Illumination Information ......................................................................... MD 10-1
5.1 I/O Arrangement Diagram ................................................................................. MD 5-1
11. Interlock Conditions .................................................................................................. MD 11-1
5.2 Sensor List ......................................................................................................... MD 5-2
11.1 Interlock Related to Laser Safety ................................................................... MD 11-1
5.3 Actuator List ....................................................................................................... MD 5-4
11.2 Interlock Related to Patient Safety ................................................................. MD 11-2
6. IP Flow ........................................................................................................................... MD 6-1 11.3 Interlock for Machine Protection .................................................................... MD 11-3
6.1 Timing Chart (Handling of One IP) ................................................................... MD 6-1 11.4 Elevation Operation Interlock Control Flow .................................................. MD 11-5
7. Descriptions of Operations ......................................................................................... MD 7-1 12. Initialization Self-diagnostic Check Step and Shutdown Procedure
7.1 IP Positioning Unit ............................................................................................. MD 7-1 Descriptions ............................................................................................................... MD 12-1
7.2 Path Changeover Conveyor .............................................................................. MD 7-4
7.3 Subscanning Unit .............................................................................................. MD 7-5
7.4 Scanner After-reading Conveyor...................................................................... MD 7-8
7.5 Erasure Conveyor .............................................................................................. MD 7-9
7.6 Image Data Flow............................................................................................... MD 7-11
7.6.1 Scanner Unit Image Data Flow .......................................................... MD 7-13
7.6.2 Controller Data Flow ........................................................................... MD 7-14
7.7 Function of Each Board .................................................................................. MD 7-17
7.8 General Description of Scanning Optics System ......................................... MD 7-39
7.9 Elevation Unit ................................................................................................... MD 7-41
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Troubleshooting 0.10 Contents Troubleshooting 0.11
Troubleshooting (MT) 03C5 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-145

03CA ............................................................................................................ MT 2-146
03CD ............................................................................................................ MT 2-147
1. Document Map ............................................................................................................. MT 1-1
03CE ............................................................................................................ MT 2-148
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Error Codes ............................................... MT 2-1 03E1 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-149
2.1 How to Understand Error Log........................................................................... MT 2-1 0532, 2542 ....................................................................................................... MT 2-150
2.2 How to Understand Error Code ........................................................................ MT 2-2 0534, 1533, 2543, 2544 ................................................................................... MT 2-151
2.3 Error Codes List ................................................................................................. MT 2-3 0536, 2535, 2545, 2546 ................................................................................... MT 2-152
2.4 Format of Detail Information ........................................................................... MT 2-91 0537, 2547 ....................................................................................................... MT 2-153
0538, 2530, 2548 ............................................................................................. MT 2-154
2.4.1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information ......................... MT 2-116
0551, 0552, 0553, 0557 ................................................................................... MT 2-155
2.4.2 Format of Abort Code ....................................................................... MT 2-117
0563, 2560, 2561, 2564 ................................................................................... MT 2-156
2.4.3 Network Error Status ........................................................................ MT 2-118
2.5.2 Cable Check Flow ............................................................................. MT 2-157
2.5 Troubleshooting Flow ................................................................................... MT 2-119
2.5.3 Board Check Flow............................................................................. MT 2-158
2.5.1 Error Code Analysis Flows .............................................................. MT 2-119
2.5.4 HDD Check Flow ............................................................................... MT 2-159
03A0, 03BD ..................................................................................................... MT 2-119
03A2 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-120 3. Checking the Voltages ................................................................................................. MT 3-1
03A4 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-121 3.1 Checking the Board Test Pin (Connector) Voltages....................................... MT 3-1
03A5 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-122 3.2 Checking the Power Supply Unit Voltages...................................................... MT 3-5
03A6 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-123
4. Checking the Fuses ..................................................................................................... MT 4-1
03A7, 03C6, 03E2 ........................................................................................... MT 2-124
4.1 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type ................................................................ MT 4-1
03A8 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-125
4.2 Sensor Fuses ..................................................................................................... MT 4-3
03A9, 03C3, 03E3 ........................................................................................... MT 2-126
03AB ............................................................................................................ MT 2-127 4.3 Motor Fuses........................................................................................................ MT 4-5
03AC, 03C0 ..................................................................................................... MT 2-128 4.4 Erasure Lamp Fuses.......................................................................................... MT 4-9
03AD ............................................................................................................ MT 2-129 4.5 Scanner Fuses ................................................................................................. MT 4-11
03AF ............................................................................................................ MT 2-130 4.6 Other Fuses ...................................................................................................... MT 4-15
03B0, 03B8, 03CC........................................................................................... MT 2-131 5. Checking the Sensors ................................................................................................. MT 5-1
03B1 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-132
5.1 Checking the SA1, SA2, SA3, SB1, SB2, and SB3 .......................................... MT 5-1
03B2 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-133
5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3 ........................................... MT 5-3
03B3, 03B5 ...................................................................................................... MT 2-134
5.3 XXXXX ................................................................................................................. MT 5-5
03B4 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-135
5.4 Checking the SH1 and SH2 ............................................................................... MT 5-7
03B6 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-136
03B7 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-137 6. Checking the Motors and Lamps ................................................................................ MT 6-1
03B9, 03BC ..................................................................................................... MT 2-138 6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, and MA3 ................................................................... MT 6-1
03BA ............................................................................................................ MT 2-139 6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3 ................................................................... MT 6-3
03BB, 03CB, 03E0 .......................................................................................... MT 2-140 6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, and MZ2 .......................................................... MT 6-5
03BE ............................................................................................................ MT 2-141
6.4 Checking the MZ1 .............................................................................................. MT 6-7
03BF, 23BD ..................................................................................................... MT 2-142
6.5 Checking the LAMP1-8 ...................................................................................... MT 6-9
03C2 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-143
03C4, 03C9 ...................................................................................................... MT 2-144
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Troubleshooting 0.12 Contents Troubleshooting 0.13
7. Checking the Scanner I/Os .......................................................................................... MT 7-1 17. Initialization Self-diagnostic Check Step and Shutdown Procedure
7.1 Checking the Polygon (POL) ............................................................................ MT 7-1 Descriptions ............................................................................................................... MT 17-1
7.2 Checking the Laser (LDD) ................................................................................. MT 7-3 Appendix 1. Supplementary Information ............................................................................ MT_A1-1
7.3 Checking the Start Point Detector (SYN) ......................................................... MT 7-5 Appendix 1.1 Setting of Error Code to be Captured for IO Trace............... MT_A1-1
7.4 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMT08C) ......................................................... MT 7-7
7.5 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMR08C) ......................................................... MT 7-9
7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08C) ........................................................................... MT 7-11
7.7 XXXXX ............................................................................................................... MT 7-13
8. Machine Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................. MT 8-1
9. Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram .............................................................. MT 9-1
10. Startup Failure Analysis ............................................................................................ MT 10-1

10.1 Locations to be First Checked When Trouble Occurs Immediately After
Startup .............................................................................................................. MT 10-1
11. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities ............................................................... MT 11-1
11.1 Making Analyses in Accordance with Error Codes ...................................... MT 11-1
11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image Generation Mode ............................. MT 11-1
11.3 Main Numerical Values Used for Troubleshooting ....................................... MT 11-9
11.4 Reference Data - Typical Image Abnormalities ........................................... MT 11-10
11.5 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MT 11-18
12. IP Jam Handling Procedures .................................................................................... MT 12-1
13. Checking for Improper IP Conveyance .................................................................... MT 13-1
14. Machine Position Information ................................................................................... MT 14-1

14.1 Unit Locations .................................................................................................. MT 14-1
14.2 Roller Arrangement ......................................................................................... MT 14-1
14.3 Home Position Values ..................................................................................... MT 14-2
14.4 Grip Spring Data .............................................................................................. MT 14-3
15. Interlock Conditions .................................................................................................. MT 15-1
15.1 Interlock Related to Laser Safety ................................................................... MT 15-1
15.2 Interlock Related to Patient Safety ................................................................. MT 15-1
15.3 Interlock for Machine Protection .................................................................... MT 15-2
15.4 Elevation Operation Interlock Control Flow .................................................. MT 15-3
16. Analysis Procedures for Exposure Unit Spontaneous Descent and Oil Leak ..... MT 16-1
16.1 Examples of Spontaneous Descent Phenomenon and Measurement
Method .............................................................................................................. MT 16-1
16.2 Exposure Unit Spontaneous Descent and Oil Leak Analysis Flow ............ MT 16-3
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts 0.14 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts 0.15
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 6. Erasure Conveyor ........................................................................................................ MC 6-1
6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor ............................................. MC 6-1
1. Document Map ............................................................................................................. MC 1-1 6.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Entry IP Sensor (SF1) ....................... MC 6-5
2. Common Procedures for Parts Inspection, Replacement, and Adjustment ........... MC 2-1 6.3 XXXXX ................................................................................................................. MC 6-6
2.1 Removing, Loading, Inspecting, and Cleaning the IPs .................................. MC 2-1 6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6) ....................... MC 6-7
2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON ............................................... MC 2-8 6.5 Replacing the Temperature Control Switch (TSWF2/TSWF8) ....................... MC 6-8
2.3 Turning ON the Machine with its Covers Removed........................................ MC 2-9 6.6 Replacing the Initialization Temperature Control Switch (TSWF5) ............. MC 6-10
2.4 Inspecting the Sensors ................................................................................... MC 2-10 6.7 Replacing the Illumination Failure Sensors (LSDN1-LSDN8) ...................... MC 6-11
2.5 Clearing the Backup Memory ......................................................................... MC 2-14 6.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MF1) ................................................... MC 6-11
2.6 Setting the Date and Time ............................................................................... MC 2-15 6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-LAMP8) ................. MC 6-12
2.7 Adjusting the LCD Panel ................................................................................. MC 2-16 6.10 Replacing the Erasure Cooling Fans (FANF1-FANF4, FANH6-FANH8) ...... MC 6-14
2.8 Inspecting the Pulse Motors ........................................................................... MC 2-18 6.11 Replacing the Erasure Conveyor Timing Belts ............................................. MC 6-16
3. Removing and Installing the Covers .......................................................................... MC 3-1 6.12 Replacing the Rubber Rollers......................................................................... MC 6-17
6.13 Replacing the Sockets..................................................................................... MC 6-18
4. IP Positioning Unit ....................................................................................................... MC 4-1
4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit ............................................ MC 4-1 7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit ............................................................ MC 7-1
4.2 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Positioning Home Position Sensor (SA1) MC 4-4 8. Scanning Optics Unit ................................................................................................... MC 8-1
4.3 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Lift Home Position Sensor (SA2) .............. MC 4-5 8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width........................................ MC 8-1
4.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Bucky Home Position Sensor (SA3) ............. MC 4-6 8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections ............................................................... MC 8-6
4.5 XXXXX ................................................................................................................. MC 4-7 8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit...................................... MC 8-13
4.6 Replacing the IP Positioning Drive Motor (MA1) ............................................ MC 4-8 8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit .......................................... MC 8-17
4.7 Replacing the IP Lift Drive Motor (MA2) .......................................................... MC 4-9 8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly ........................................ MC 8-21
4.8 Replacing the Bucky Drive Motor (MA3)........................................................ MC 4-10 8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08A Board............................................... MC 8-27
4.9 XXXXX ............................................................................................................... MC 4-11 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board ............................... MC 8-31
4.10 Replacing the IP Positioning Unit Timing Belts ............................................ MC 4-12 9. Subscanning Unit ......................................................................................................... MC 9-1
4.11 Removing and Installing the Carbon Plate .................................................... MC 4-15 9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide ............................................................... MC 9-1
4.12 XXXXX ............................................................................................................... MC 4-17 9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
4.13 Replacing the Tray Assembly ......................................................................... MC 4-18 (PMT08C Side) ....................................................................................... MC 9-2
5. Path Changeover Conveyor ........................................................................................ MC 5-1 9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
(PMR08C Side) ...................................................................................... MC 9-5
5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor ............................. MC 5-1
9.1.3 Inspecting the Light-Collecting Guide ................................................ MC 9-7
5.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Positioning Unit Entry IP Sensor (SB1) ........ MC 5-4
9.1.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide ................................................... MC 9-8
5.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Path Changeover Unit IP Sensor (SB2) ........ MC 5-5
9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide ............................................... MC 9-10
5.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Confluence Unit IP Sensor (SB3) .................. MC 5-6
9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/PMR08C Board ............................... MC 9-13
5.5 XXXXX ................................................................................................................. MC 5-7
9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board............................................... MC 9-17
5.6 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB1) ..................................................... MC 5-8
9.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light-Collecting Mirror ................................. MC 9-21
5.7 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB2) ..................................................... MC 5-9
9.5 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Leading-edge Sensor (SZ1/SED08C) ...... MC 9-25
5.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB3) ................................................... MC 5-10
9.6 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Grip Release Home Position
5.9 XXXXX ............................................................................................................... MC 5-11
Sensor (SZ2) ..................................................................................................... MC 9-29
5.10 Replacing and Adjusting the Path Changeover Conveyor Timing Belts.... MC 5-12
9.7 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Reading IP Sensor (SZ3).................. MC 9-30
5.11 Replacing the Rubber Rollers......................................................................... MC 5-15
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ............................ MC 9-31 12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation Assembly................. MC 12-25
9.9 Replacing the Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) .............................................. MC 9-33 12.15 Inspecting and Replacing the Emergency Stop Switch (ESH1) ................ MC 12-32
9.10 Inspecting and Replacing the Rubber Belt.................................................... MC 9-34 12.16 Replacing the Heat Sink ................................................................................ MC 12-34
9.11 Replacing the Timing Belt ............................................................................... MC 9-35 12.17 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MC 12-36
9.12 Inspecting and Replacing the Kapton® Belt, Tensioner, and Flywheel ..... MC 9-36 12.18 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MC 12-36
9.13 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Unit Rubber Rollers............... MC 9-39 13. Power Supply Units .................................................................................................... MC 13-1
9.14 Replacing the Subscanning Unit Guide......................................................... MC 9-41 13.1 Replacing the JPS-3 ........................................................................................ MC 13-1
9.15 Replacing the Vibration-Proof Rubbers......................................................... MC 9-41 13.2 Replacing the JPS-7 ........................................................................................ MC 13-4
10. Scanner After-Reading Conveyor ............................................................................. MC 10-1 13.3 Replacing the JPS-3 Fuses ............................................................................. MC 13-7
10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor ................. MC 10-1 13.4 Replacing the JPS-7 Fuses ............................................................................. MC 13-9
10.2 Inspecting and Replacing the After-Reading IP Sensor (SD1) .................... MC 10-3 13.5 Replacing the Power Supply Unit (JPS-7) Fans .......................................... MC 13-12
10.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Release Home Position Sensor (SD2) MC 10-5 14. HDD ............................................................................................................................. MC 14-1
10.4 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MD1) ................................................... MC 10-7 14.1 Replacing the HDD........................................................................................... MC 14-1
10.5 Replacing the Grip Release Motor (MD2) ...................................................... MC 10-8 14.2 Replacing the HDD (ST318416N/WED4550-003/WED9100-003) ................... MC 14-5
10.6 Replacing and Adjusting the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor Timing 14.3 Replacing the HDD Cooling Fan (FANH10) ................................................. MC 14-17
Belt .................................................................................................................... MC 10-9 15. FDD .............................................................................................................................. MC 15-1
10.7 Replacing the Rubber Rollers....................................................................... MC 10-10 15.1 Replacing the FDD ........................................................................................... MC 15-1
11. Before-Erasure Conveyor .......................................................................................... MC 11-1 16. Removing and Installing the Control Rack .............................................................. MC 16-1
11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor .............................. MC 11-1 17. Elevation Unit ............................................................................................................. MC 17-1
11.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Erasure Entry IP Sensor (SE1) ........ MC 11-3 17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure ................................................................... MC 17-1
12. Enclosure .................................................................................................................... MC 12-1 17.2 Pulling Out the Pump Assemblies ................................................................. MC 17-3
12.1 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH1)............ MC 12-1 17.3 Replacing the Elevation Drive Cooling Fan (FANH5) ................................... MC 17-6
12.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH2)............ MC 12-3 17.4 Pulling Out the Valve Assembly ..................................................................... MC 17-7
12.3 XXXXX ............................................................................................................... MC 12-5 17.5 Replacing the Valve Coils ............................................................................... MC 17-9
12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention 17.6 Checking for Oil Leaks .................................................................................. MC 17-10
Interlock Switches (MSH1-MSH4) ................................................................... MC 12-6 17.7 Replacing the Elevation Drive Hydraulic Pump Motor (MH1) .................... MC 17-12
12.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Handle Interference Prevention Interlock 17.8 Replacing the Capacitor ................................................................................ MC 17-14
Interlock Switch (MSH5) ................................................................................ MC 12-10 17.9 Replacing the TLB08A Board ....................................................................... MC 17-15
12.6 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Grip Handle Upper-/ 17.10 Checking the Descent Speed........................................................................ MC 17-16
Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSH6/MSH7)................................................ MC 12-13
17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed.......................................................................... MC 17-18
12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/Lower-Limit
17.12 Replacing the Cylinder .................................................................................. MC 17-19
Interlock Switch (MSH8/MSH9) ..................................................................... MC 12-15
18. Adjustment Procedure for the Gonad Protector ..................................................... MC 18-1
12.8 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH1) ................................................. MC 12-17
12.9 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH3) ................................................. MC 12-18 19. Tools ............................................................................................................................ MC 19-1
12.10 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH4) ................................................. MC 12-19 19.1 Standard Tools ................................................................................................. MC 19-1
12.11 Replacing the Grid Handle Drive Motor (MH2) ............................................ MC 12-20 19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments .................................................... MC 19-5
12.12 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MC 12-22 19.3 Special Consumables ...................................................................................... MC 19-6
12.13 Replacing the Air Filters................................................................................ MC 12-23 19.4 Semi-Standard Tools ....................................................................................... MC 19-7
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
20. Boards ......................................................................................................................... MC 20-1

20.1 Board Arrangement Diagrams ........................................................................ MC 20-1
20.2 MTH08B Board ................................................................................................. MC 20-2
20.3 MTH08E Board ................................................................................................. MC 20-3
20.4 CPU90E Board.................................................................................................. MC 20-4
20.5 IMG07B Board .................................................................................................. MC 20-6
20.6 IMG08A Board .................................................................................................. MC 20-7
20.7 IMG08B/H Board............................................................................................... MC 20-8
20.8 DMC08A Board ................................................................................................. MC 20-9
20.9 HCP08A Board ............................................................................................... MC 20-10
20.10 CPU90F Board ................................................................................................ MC 20-11
20.11 LAN90B/D Board ............................................................................................ MC 20-12
20.12 DRV08B Board ............................................................................................... MC 20-13
20.13 SNS08B Board................................................................................................ MC 20-14
20.14 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MC 20-15
20.15 XPC08A Board................................................................................................ MC 20-16
20.16 BSP08A Board................................................................................................ MC 20-17
20.17 Other Boards .................................................................................................. MC 20-18
20.18 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type ............................................................ MC 20-19
21. Checking Interlock ..................................................................................................... MC 21-1
22. Hydraulic circuit diagram .......................................................................................... MC 22-1
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Maintenance Utility 0.20 Contents Maintenance Utility 0.21
Maintenance Utility (MU) 8. 3. TEST MODE: Operation Setup ................................................................................. MU 8-1

8.1 1. Routine: Setting Operation Mode of Routine Processing.......................... MU 8-1
1. Functional Organization of Service Utility ................................................................. MU 1-1 8.2 2. AUTO MODE: Conveyance Test Operation Mode and Conveyance Route
Setup ................................................................................................................... MU 8-1
2. Maintenance Utility Mode Transition Diagrams ......................................................... MU 2-1
9. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY: Electrical Diagnostics ....................................................... MU 9-1
3. Starting and Exiting the M-Utility ............................................................................... MU 3-1
9.1 1. ERASURE LAMP TEST: Erasure Lamp Turn-On Test ................................ MU 9-1
3.1 Activating M-Utility ............................................................................................ MU 3-1
9.2 2. IMAGE MEMORY TEST: Image Memory Test .............................................. MU 9-1
3.2 Exiting M-Utility ................................................................................................ MU 3-10
9.3 3. DSP TEST: Self Diagnostics of Image Processing Board.......................... MU 9-1
4. Common Operating Procedures for M-Utility ............................................................ MU 4-1 9.4 4. LAN: LAN Test................................................................................................ MU 9-2
4.1 Selecting a menu ............................................................................................... MU 4-1 9.5 5. HDD: HDD Test ............................................................................................... MU 9-3
4.2 Quitting a menu.................................................................................................. MU 4-1 9.6 6. FDD: FDD Test................................................................................................ MU 9-4
4.3 Entering a Numerical Value .............................................................................. MU 4-2
10. 5. SCANNER UTILITY: Scanner Diagnostics and Setting ....................................... MU 10-1
5. Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility ......................................................................................... MU 5-1 10.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initial Setting of Main-Scan System ....................................... MU 10-1
5.1 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility during Normal Operation ................................... MU 5-1 10.2 2. POLYGON: Turning ON/OFF the Polygon ................................................. MU 10-1
5.2 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error.. MU 5-8 10.3 3. LASER: Laser ON/OFF ................................................................................ MU 10-2
6. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY: Error Log Utility .................................................................. MU 6-1 10.4 4. HV: Turning ON/OFF the HV Switch ........................................................... MU 10-2
6.1 1. LIST: Displaying Error Log ........................................................................... MU 6-1 10.5 5. HV DATA: High-Voltage Setting ................................................................. MU 10-3
6.2 2. CLEAR: Clearing Error Log........................................................................... MU 6-2 10.6 6. FORMAT: Setting the Read Start Position and Read Width .................... MU 10-4
6.3 3. SAVE TO FD: Saving Error Log to Floppy Disk .......................................... MU 6-3 10.7 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY: Setting Shading and Sensitivity Correction
6.4 4. SAVE TO HD: Saving Error Log to HD ......................................................... MU 6-4 Data ................................................................................................................... MU 10-7
10.8 8. DATA MANAGEMENT: Displaying Data Setup Values and Writing to
7. 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING: Configuration Utility ................................................ MU 7-1
HD .................................................................................................................... MU 10-10
7.1 Editing Configuration File ................................................................................. MU 7-2
10.9 9. DIAGNOSTIC: Executing Diagnostics Item ............................................. MU 10-13
7.2 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)........................................................................................ MU 7-4
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image Signal Virtual Generation
7.3 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) .................................................................................... MU 7-17 Mode................................................................................................................ MU 10-14
7.4 Network-Related Setup Items ......................................................................... MU 7-26 10.11 11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL: Addition Execution Control ..................... MU 10-16
7.5 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) ................................................................. MU 7-27
7.6 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) ....................................................................................... MU 7-28
7.7 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) ................................................................. MU 7-31
7.8 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) ....................................................... MU 7-32
7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) ............................................................................ MU 7-34
7.10 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) .......................................................................... MU 7-36
7.11 ROUTING (ROUTE) .......................................................................................... MU 7-37
7.12 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) ............................................................................... MU 7-38
7.13 DICOM (Base on DICOM)................................................................................. MU 7-39
7.14 Backing Up Configuration File ....................................................................... MU 7-41
7.15 Network-Related Setup Example .................................................................... MU 7-43
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Maintenance Utility 0.22 Contents Maintenance Utility 0.23
11. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY: Mechanical Diagnostics ................................................ MU 11-1 13. 8. BACKUP MEMORY: Backing Up Memory ............................................................. MU 13-1
11.1 INITIALIZE: Initializing the Motors, Actuators, and Sensors ....................... MU 11-1 14. 9. HV ON/OFF: High-Voltage Switch (Software Switch) .......................................... MU 14-1
11.2 1. MOTOR: Operation Tests on Motor............................................................ MU 11-2
15. 10. IP UTILITY: IP Operation ...................................................................................... MU 15-1
11.3 2. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Erasure Lamp, FFM ............................. MU 11-6
15.1 1. DISPLAY: Displaying IP Information .......................................................... MU 15-1
11.4 3. SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors...................................................... MU 11-7
15.2 2. SETTING: Setting IP Information ................................................................ MU 15-1
11.5 4. UNIT: 1. IP POSITIONING UNIT: Operation Tests on Exposure Unit
15.3 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE: IP Change Setup.................................................. MU 15-1
Guide Mechanism ............................................................................................ MU 11-9
15.4 4. USE OVEREXPOSURE-IP MODE: Setting Overexposure
11.6 4. UNIT: 2. IP MOVING-UP UNIT: Operation Tests on Exposure Unit IP
Degeneration Cancel ....................................................................................... MU 15-2
Moving-Up Mechanism .................................................................................. MU 11-11
11.7 XXXXX ............................................................................................................. MU 11-11 16. 11. SYSTEM UTILITY: Conveyance Count Setup ..................................................... MU 16-1
11.8 4. UNIT : 3. BUCKY UNIT: Operation Tests on Exposure Unit Bucky 17. 12. SET ERASURE LAMP OFF/SET REGULAR ERASURE LAMP CONTROL:
Mechanism ..................................................................................................... MU 11-12 No-Erasure Mode Selection ...................................................................................... MU 17-1
11.9 4. UNIT: 4. SUBSCANNING GRIP: Operation Tests on Subscanning
18. Software Installation Procedures ............................................................................. MU 18-1
Grip Mechanism ............................................................................................. MU 11-12
11.10 4. UNIT: 5. AFTER-READING GRIP: Operation Tests on After-Reading 18.1 Installing the Software (Application).............................................................. MU 18-1
Conveyor Grip Mechanism ........................................................................... MU 11-13 18.2 Formatting the Hard Disk ................................................................................ MU 18-5
12. 7. FILE UTILITY: File Operation ................................................................................. MU 12-1 19. List of Software Files ................................................................................................. MU 19-1
12.1 1. FORMAT FD: Formatting FD ....................................................................... MU 12-1 19.1 SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ MU 19-1
12.2 2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION: Formatting HD Image Storage Partition .. MU 12-2 19.2 LOG ................................................................................................................... MU 19-7
12.3 3. BACKUP: Backing Up Various Data........................................................... MU 12-3
12.4 4. RESTORE: Restoring Various Data............................................................ MU 12-8
12.5 5. EDR DATA: Saving EDR Calculation to FD ............................................. MU 12-13
12.6 6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE: Reverting Back to Previous
Version of System Software ......................................................................... MU 12-15
12.7 7. EXECUTION: Loading and Executing File ............................................... MU 12-16
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Service Parts List 0.24 Contents Service Parts List 0.25
Service Parts List (SP) 15B CONTROLLER 2 ....................................................................................................... SP-72

16A OPTION 1 (CASSETTE HOLDER KIT) .................................................................... SP-74
How to Use the Service Parts List ...................................................................................... SP-2 16B OPTION 2 (HANDLE KIT) ......................................................................................... SP-76
01A FRAME 1 ..................................................................................................................... SP-8 16C OPTION 3 (GONAD PROTECTOR) ......................................................................... SP-78
01B FRAME 2 ................................................................................................................... SP-10 16D OPTION 4 (PHTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) ........................................................ SP-80
02A COVER 1 ................................................................................................................... SP-12 16E OPTION 5 .................................................................................................................. SP-82
02B COVER 2 ................................................................................................................... SP-14 16F OPTION 6 (GRIP HANDLE) ...................................................................................... SP-84
02C COVER 3 ................................................................................................................... SP-16 16G OPTION 7 .................................................................................................................. SP-86
03A COVER (ELEVATION) 1 ........................................................................................... SP-18 16H OPTION 8 (COMET PHOTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) ........................................ SP-88
03B COVER (ELEVATION) 2 ........................................................................................... SP-20 17 CABLE ...................................................................................................................... SP-90
04 ELEVATION UNIT LIFTER ....................................................................................... SP-22 18 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ........................................................................................ SP-94
05 ELEVATION UNIT SHUTTER ................................................................................... SP-24 19 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ............................................................................. SP-102
06A IP SET UNIT 1 ........................................................................................................... SP-26 20 TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS .................................. SP-112
06B IP SET UNIT 2 ........................................................................................................... SP-28 21 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS ....................................................................... SP-113
06C IP SET UNIT 3 ........................................................................................................... SP-30
07A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 .......................................................................................... SP-32
07B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 .......................................................................................... SP-34
07C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 .......................................................................................... SP-36
07D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 .......................................................................................... SP-40
08A SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 1 ...................................................................... SP-42
08B SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 2 ...................................................................... SP-44
09 BEFORE-ERASURE CONVEYOR ........................................................................... SP-46
10A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ........................................................................................ SP-48
10B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ........................................................................................ SP-50
10C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ........................................................................................ SP-52
11A PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 1 .................................................................................. SP-54
11B PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 2 .................................................................................. SP-56
11C PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 3 .................................................................................. SP-58
11D PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 4 .................................................................................. SP-60
12 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ........................................................................................ SP-62
13 WIRING UNIT ............................................................................................................ SP-64
14 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................................................................ SP-66
15A CONTROLLER 1 ....................................................................................................... SP-68
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Preventive Maintenance 0.26 Contents Preventive Maintenance 0.27
BLANK PAGE
Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. Preventive Maintenance Program List .......................................................................... PM-2
2. Overview of Preventive Maintenance Programs Performed at Various Intervals ...... PM-3
3. Details of Maintenance Procedures .............................................................................. PM-6

3.1 Checking the Error Log ........................................................................................ PM-6
3.2 Checking for Image Problems ............................................................................. PM-7
3.3 Turning OFF the High-voltage Switch (Software Switch) ............................... PM-12
3.4 Removing the IPs ................................................................................................ PM-13
3.5 Removing the Covers ......................................................................................... PM-16
3.6 Replacing the Air Filters..................................................................................... PM-20
3.7 Greasing the IP Positioning Unit Carbon Plate Leaf Spring and IP Lift
Movable Shaft...................................................................................................... PM-22
3.8 Replacing the Erasure Lamps and Cleaning the Erasure Filter and
Reflection Plates ................................................................................................. PM-23
3.9 Replacing the Cleaning Rollers ......................................................................... PM-27
3.10 Inspecting the Shock Absorber Cloths (POS50, #3922 Textile) ..................... PM-28
3.10a Replacing the Shock-Absorber-Cloth-Attached Guide Plates, Pipes,
and Bracket in the Subscanning Unit ............................................................... PM-33
3.10b Increasing Grease on the Cylinder................................................................. PM-37.2
3.11 Checking the Oil Tank Oil Level and Hydraulic Hoses.................................... PM-38
3.12 Checking the Solenoid Valves ........................................................................... PM-40
3.13 Lubricating the Rod End .................................................................................... PM-41
3.14 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.............................................................................. PM-42
3.15 Inspecting the Kapton® Belt .............................................................................. PM-43
3.16 Inspecting the Vibration-proof Rubbers ........................................................... PM-44
3.17 Installing and Cleaning the Covers ................................................................... PM-45
3.18 Setting the Date and Time .................................................................................. PM-46
3.19 Inspecting the Interlocks.................................................................................... PM-47
3.20 Clearing the Error Log ........................................................................................ PM-50
3.21 Turning ON the High-voltage Switch (Software Switch) ................................. PM-50
3.22 Cleaning the IPs .................................................................................................. PM-51
3.23 Loading the IPs ................................................................................................... PM-55
3.24 Checking for Image Problems ........................................................................... PM-57
3.25 Checking for a Motor-Driven Grip Handle Inclination ..................................... PM-57
4. XXXXX ............................................................................................................................ PM-58
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Installation 0.28 Contents Installation 0.29
Installation (IN) 5. Unloading, Transfer, and Unpacking Procedures and Precautions ............................ IN-60
5.1 Unloading .............................................................................................................. IN-61
1. How Installation Volume Is Organized ............................................................................. IN-2 5.2 Transfer.................................................................................................................. IN-65
5.3 Unpacking.............................................................................................................. IN-65
2. System Configuration ....................................................................................................... IN-8
5.4 Temporary Placement Procedures...................................................................... IN-65
2.1 Connectable Peripherals and Software Versions ................................................ IN-8
5.5 Checking the Items Supplied ............................................................................... IN-66
2.2 Information on Optional Boards for CR-IR344 ................................................... IN-10
5.5.1 Machine main body.................................................................................. IN-66
2.3 System Configuration Examples ......................................................................... IN-11
5.5.2 Separately packed items ......................................................................... IN-67
2.3.1 Connecting the console to the CPU90E ................................................ IN-13
5.5.3 Options ..................................................................................................... IN-68
2.3.2 Connecting the console to the CPU90F ................................................. IN-14
2.3.3 Patterns for Connecting the CL to the CPU90F ................................. IN-15.1 6. Installation Procedures .................................................................................................. IN-70
6.1 Installation Procedure Overview ......................................................................... IN-70
3. Determining the Configuration Information ................................................................. IN-16
6.2 Checking the Voltage and Connecting the Power Supply ................................ IN-71
3.1 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)........................................................................................... IN-18
6.2.1 Removing the Controller Cover .............................................................. IN-71
3.1.1 List of SYSTEM Setup Items (IRSET.CFG) ............................................ IN-19
6.2.2 Setting the Power Supply ........................................................................ IN-72
3.1.2 SYSTEM Settings to Be Changed for Second and Subsequent
Units ....................................................................................................... IN-25.6 6.2.3 Connecting the Machine Power Supply ................................................. IN-73
3.2 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ...................................................................................... IN-25.7 6.2.4 Running a Power Supply Short-Circuit Check and Connecting to
Distribution Switchboard ........................................................................ IN-74
3.2.1 Setup Items of PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG)................................................ IN-25.8
6.2.5 Turning OFF the Battery Backup Switches of the CPU90E Board ...... IN-76
3.3 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) ...................................................................... IN-34
6.3 Anchoring the Machine ..................................................................................... IN-77.2
3.4 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) ............................................................................................ IN-35
6.4 Removing the Covers ........................................................................................... IN-78
3.5 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) ...................................................................... IN-37
6.5 Removing the Clamps and Installing the Separately Packed Items ................ IN-80
3.6 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) ............................................................ IN-38
6.5.1 Procedure to Be Performed at the IP Positioning Unit ......................... IN-81
3.7 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) ................................................................................. IN-40
6.5.2 Procedure to Be Performed at Scanner Unit ......................................... IN-83
3.8 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) ............................................................................... IN-42
6.5.3 Procedure to Be Performed at Erasure Conveyor ................................ IN-93
3.9 ROUTING (ROUTE) ............................................................................................... IN-43
6.6 Setting and Installing the Boards ........................................................................ IN-97
3.10 NETMASKS (NETMASKS) ................................................................................. IN-43.1
6.6.1 MTH08B Board ......................................................................................... IN-97
3.11 DICOM (Base on DICOM)................................................................................... IN-43.3
6.6.2 MTH08E Board ......................................................................................... IN-99
3.12 List of Setup Items Related to Network and Setup Examples .......................... IN-44
6.6.3 CPU90E Board........................................................................................ IN-100
4. Preparing the Installation Environment ........................................................................ IN-52
6.6.4 IMG07B Board ........................................................................................ IN-102
4.1 Machine Specifications ........................................................................................ IN-52
6.6.5 BSP08A Board........................................................................................ IN-103
4.2 Machine Relocation and Anchorage ................................................................... IN-54
6.6.6 IMG08A Board ........................................................................................ IN-104
4.3 Environmental Conditions ................................................................................... IN-55
6.6.7 IMG08B/H Board ..................................................................................... IN-105
4.4 Electrical Specifications....................................................................................... IN-56
6.6.8 XPC08A Board........................................................................................ IN-106
4.5 Tool List ................................................................................................................. IN-57
6.6.9 DMC08A Board or HCP08A Board (Optional)...................................... IN-108
4.6 Preliminary Work .................................................................................................. IN-59
6.6.10 CPU90F Board ..................................................................................... IN-109.1
6.6.11 LAN90B Board..................................................................................... IN-109.3
6.6.12 MMC90A Board or DIM08A board ...................................................... IN-109.5
6.6.13 SNS08B Board and SCN08C/SCR08C Board ...................................... IN-110
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Contents Installation 0.30 Contents Installation 0.31
6.7 Checking for REMOTE/LOCAL Switch.............................................................. IN-112 Appendix 7. Installing the Photo-timer................................................................................. IN_A7-1
6.8 Reinstalling the Covers ...................................................................................... IN-113 Appendix 7.1 Photo-timer for Toshiba .......................................................... IN_A7-2
7. Connecting and Checking the Console ...................................................................... IN-114 Appendix 7.2 Photo-timer for Hitachi........................................................... IN_A7-11
7.1 Connecting the Console..................................................................................... IN-114 Appendix 7.3 Photo-timer for Shimadzu I.................................................... IN_A7-16
7.1.1 Installing the CR-IR344 and Console for the First Time ..................... IN-115 Appendix 7.4 Photo-timer for Shimadzu II................................................... IN_A7-21
7.1.2 Introducing the CR-IR344 into the Existing System ........................... IN-127 Appendix 8. Installing the Grip Handle ................................................................................ IN_A8-1
7.2 Checking for Improper Fan Operations ............................................................ IN-142
Appendix 9. Installing the Side Grip Handles ...................................................................... IN_A9-1
7.3 Clearing the Backup Memory ............................................................................ IN-143
Appendix 10. Installing the Gonad Protector .................................................................... IN_A10-1
7.4 Setting the Date and Time .................................................................................. IN-144
7.5 Checking the Voltages ....................................................................................... IN-145 Appendix 11. Installing the Cassette Exposure Kit........................................................... IN_A11-1
7.6 Installing the Options ......................................................................................... IN-147 Appendix 12. Installing the Up-down Foot Switch ............................................................ IN_A12-1
7.7 Connecting the X-Ray Switch Cable ................................................................. IN-150
Appendix 13. General Information about M-Utility ............................................................ IN_A13-1
7.8 Cable Connection Diagram ................................................................................ IN-152
Appendix 13.1 Activating M-Utility ............................................................... IN_A13-2
8. Settings on Units Interfaced ........................................................................................ IN-154 Appendix 13.2 Exiting M-Utility .................................................................. IN_A13-10
8.1 Settings on DMS Unit ......................................................................................... IN-154 Appendix 13.3 Common Operating Procedures for M-Utility .................. IN_A13-10
9. Final Adjustment/Checkout Procedures to be Performed at the End of Appendix 13.3.1 Selecting a Menu ................................................ IN_A13-10
Installation ..................................................................................................................... IN-156 Appendix 13.3.2 Quitting a Menu .................................................. IN_A13-10
9.1 Checking for Improper Elevation ...................................................................... IN-156 Appendix 13.3.3 Entering a Numerical Value ............................... IN_A13-11
9.2 Checking for Improper IP Conveyance ............................................................. IN-158 Appendix 14. Requirements Regarding Locally Obtained Parts ..................................... IN_A14-1
9.3 Adjusting the Bucky Timer ................................................................................ IN-165
Appendix 15. *** .................................................................................................................... IN_A15-1
9.4 Checking the Interface Operation ..................................................................... IN-168
Appendix 16. Network System Setup Administration Sheet ............................................ IN_A16-1
9.5 Checking the Image Quality and Adjusting the Imaging Conditions ............. IN-169
9.6 Confirming and Clearing the Error Log during Setup ..................................... IN-173 Appendix 17. Setting Configuration File ............................................................................ IN_A17-1
9.7 Verifying the Machine Power OFF Sequence ................................................... IN-173 Appendix 17.1 Backing Up the Configuration Files.................................... IN_A17-2
9.8 Cleaning the Covers ........................................................................................... IN-173 Appendix 17.2 Editing the Configuration Files ........................................... IN_A17-5
Appendix 1. Worksheet for Determination of System Configuration ................................ IN_A1-1 Appendix 17.3 Installing Configuration File ................................................ IN_A17-8
Appendix 18. Installing the Optional Software .................................................................. IN_A18-1
Appendix 2. For Determination of Configuration Information ........................................... IN_A2-1
Appendix 2.1 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) .............................................................. IN_A2-1 Appendix 19. Adjusting the Exposure/Reader Unit Descent Speed................................ IN_A19-1
Appendix 2.2 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ........................................................... IN_A2-14 Appendix 20. Turntable ........................................................................................................ IN_A20-1
Appendix 3. Installing the Console Bracket ........................................................................ IN_A3-1 Appendix 21. Procedures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL) .................... IN_A21-1
Appendix 4. Connecting the X-ray Tube Interlock (Size) .................................................... IN_A4-1
Appendix 5. Connecting the X-ray Tube Interlock (Up/Down) ............................................ IN_A5-1

Performance check (PC)
Appendix 6. Supplementary Information on X-ray Controller ............................................ IN_A6-1
Installation of the FCR 5501D - Checklist ..................................................................... PC-2
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Paper Manual
How Service Manual Is Organized
The Service Manual consists of the following seven volumes.
<Machine Description Volume>
■ Scope Describes the summary of the machine.
This Service Manual is available in two forms: electronic manual and paper manual. The <Troubleshooting Volume>
contents described are the same, but how to access the information is different. See either
“■ Electronic Manual” or “■ Paper Manual” for their respective interface, depending on the Describes the troubleshooting methods and servicing procedures.
media you refer to. <Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Volume>
Describes the procedures for servicing in steps.
■ Electronic Manual (Not Available at Present)
<Maintenance Utility Volume>
An electronic version of the manual is supplied in the form of PDF data. Before consulting
Describes the functional organization of Service Utility.
the electronic manual, familiarize yourself with the following matters.
<Service Parts Volume>
● About PDF Describes the service part lists and exploded views, as well as how to read the
An electronic version of the manual is distributed as a PDF (Portable Document Format) file. service parts lists.
PDF is an electronic document file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc., and can be <Preventive Maintenance Volume>
read with a commercially available PDF viewer. Describes the procedures for preventive maintenance.
● About Acrobat Reader <Installation Volume>
The CD-ROM that contains electronic manuals also contains Adobe Systems’ Acrobat Describes the specifications of the machine, installation requirements and proce-
Reader as a their PDF viewer. dures, and checkpoints after installation, which are required for installation prepara-
tion and installation.
To view an electronic manual, use Acrobat Reader bundled. If any PDF viewer other than
Acrobat Reader is used, the image displayed on screen or printed out may differ from the ■ How to Search
original.
● Refer to the table of contents and document map.
The recommended operating environments for running Acrobat Reader alone are as follows.
In order to facilitate efficient search for a desired item in the paper version of the
• Version: Acrobat Reader 3.0 or later
manual, a document map is provided in addition to the table of contents.
• CPU: Pentium 133 MHz or faster processor
The document map is illustratively organized so that you can visually find a location
• OS: Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 where your desired information is described.
• Free memory: at least 16MB of RAM after startup of Windows NT ● Open a desired chapter by referring to the chapter icon on the header.
(at least 32 MB of RAM recommended) The header contains “chapter icons” to indicate the chapter where the current page is
• Display: at least 800x600 dots, with color depth of at least 256 colors located; the highlighted number corresponds to the chapter number for each volume.
• CD-ROM drive: at least 4x speed (8x or higher speed recommended) On the hardcopy version of the manual, you can browse pages with reference to the
“chapter icon” to access your desired chapter quickly.
• Disk capacity: at least 5MB of free space after startup of Windows NT
On the electronic version of the manual, you can skip pages with reference to the
● Installing Acrobat Reader “chapter icon” to access your desired chapter quickly.
For installation of Acrobat Reader, see the “Read Me” file in the CD-ROM that contains ● Section number on the footer
electronic manual. In the footer, a section number for that page is indicated.
If the version of Acrobat Reader is older than 3.0, the electronic manual cannot be viewed or, On the hardcopy version of the manual, you can browse pages with reference to the
if it can be viewed, its specific features may not be guaranteed. Referring to the “Read Me” footer to access your desired section quickly.
file, install a proper version of Acrobat Reader. On the electronic version of the manual, you can skip pages with reference to the
“chapter icon” to access your desired section quickly.
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Organizational Differences from Preceding Manuals 9000 series CR-IR344 Remarks

The CR-IR344 service manual substantially differs from the preceding (9000 Series and
Chapter Z7 Circuit Diagrams
other) manuals in organizational structure. Structural changes have been made for the
following three purposes. Appendix 1 Mechanical Control Flows Compiled as one “Machine
Machine Description volume: Description volume” article.
• To provide increased compactness. 7. Descriptions of Operaions
• To provide increased handling ease. Appendix 2 Troubleshooting Flows 8. Mechanical Control Flow
Compiled as one “Troubleshooting
• To furnish additional information for reducing the downtime. Troubleshooting volume: volume” article.
Appendix 3 Error Messages
As a result of the structural changes, the service manual is now divided into the following 8. Machine Circuit Diagram
11. Troubleshooting Procedures Compiled as one “Machine
seven volumes.
Appendix 4 Descriptions of Mechanism Based on Abnormal Images Description volume” article.
“Machine Description volume”, “Troubleshooting volume”, “Checks, Replacement, and Operations Electrical system and scanner
Adjustment of Parts volume”, “Maintenance Utility volume”, “Service Parts List volume”, operations are also given.
“Preventive Maintenance volume”, “Installation volume” Appendix 5 Problems and Remedies
The structural changes are detailed below. TR1B1002.EPS
9000 series CR-IR344 Remarks
Chapter A Installation Planning Installation volume:

1. How Installation Volume Is Organized
Chapter B Installation 2. System Configuration
3. Determination of System Configuration
Chapter C Setting to Work Information Compiled in a single volume
4. Preparation for Installation
Environment entitled “Installation volume”.
5. Unloading, Transfer, and Unpacking Instructions are given on the
Procedures and Precautions presumption that they are
6. Installation Procedures sequentially followed.
7. Connecting and Checking
Chapter D Acceptance the Console
8. Settings on Units Interfaced
9. Final Adjustment/Checkout
Procedures to Be Performed
at the End of Installation
Compiled as an independent
chapter in “Preventive Maintenance
Chapter E Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance volume: volume”. Instructions are given on
the presumption that they are
sequentially followed.
Chapter F1 Error Code Troubleshooting volume:
Compiled in “Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting Procedures
volume”. Software files are listed
Chapter F2 Image Troubleshooting Based on Error Codes
under “17. List of Software Files”
11. Troubleshooting Procedures
in “Maintenance Utility volume”.
Chapter F3 Abnormal Events Based on Abnormal Images
Chapter F4 Mechanical Parts (Checks/

Replacement/Adjustment)
Chapter F5 Electrical Parts (Checks/ The checks, adjustment, and
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment replacement procedures are
Replacement/Adjustment) of Parts volume:
described in the form of reference
Chapter F6 Scaning Optics Parts information.
(Checks/Replacement/
Adjustment)
Chapter F7 Service Modes Maintenance Utility volume The details of functions are given.
Troubleshooting volume:
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Compiled as one “Troubleshooting
Chapter F8 IP Jams Based on Error Codes volume” article.
12. IP Jam Handling Procedures
Chapter P Parts List Service Parts List Volume: Consumables and search table are
added.
Checks, Adjustment, and Replacement Compiled as one “Checks,

Chapter Z1 Tool List of Parts volume: Adjustment, and Replacement of
19.Tools Parts volume” article.
Installation volume:
Chapter Z2 Cable Connection 7. Connecting and Checking the Console
Diagrams
7.8 Cable Wiring Diagram
Chapter Z3 I/O Layout Drawings Machine Description volume:
Chapter Z4 Covers and Units Removal Checks, Adjustment, and Replacement

and Reinstallation of Parts volume:
Chapter Z5 Interlock
Installation volume:
6. Installation Procedures
Chapter Z6 Board Settings Checks, Adjustment, and Replacement
of Parts volume:
20. Boards
TR1B1001.EPS
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ How to Consult Service Manual upon Occurrence of Trouble ● Remedies based on mechanical control flows
When a failure (error) occurs in the machine, take appropriate remedial action depending on “8. Mechanical Control Flows” in the “Machine Description” volume
the purpose. The “Mechanical Control Flows” section furnishes flowcharts to detail the machine
• To achieve prompt machine recovery operations and describe the error occurrence timing. Note the mechanical control
flowcharts to determine the machine operations performed at the time of error occur-
“● Remedies based on troubleshooting flows”
rence and investigate the error cause.
• To analyze the error cause or prevent an error recurrence
“● Remedies based on mechanical control flows” SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When initiating a troubleshooting operation in accordance with the generated error code, refer
• To check for improper operations
to the “8.5 Index of Error Codes” in the “Machine Decsription” volume.
“● Remedies based on descriptions of operations”
● Remedies based on descriptions of operations
● Remedies based on troubleshooting flows
“7. Descriptions of Operations” in the “Machine Description” volume
“1. Document Map” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
The “Descriptions of Operations” section furnishes diagrams to explain about the
The “Troubleshooting Flows” section enables you to restore the machine to normal by
normal operations and functions of various machine components. Read the relevant
performing the procedures indicated by the flowchart that is related to the encountered
descriptions of operations to check whether the machine normally operates.
error (error code).
The steps to be performed are outlined below.
(1) Confirm the generated error code.
Note the error code displayed on the operation panel.
(2) Search the table of contents for the displayed error code.
Error codes are basically listed in ascending order. However, errors calling for the
execution of the same remedial action are listed together. It means that not all the
error codes are listed in ascending order.
(3) Estimate the cause of the error, with reference to the “Cause” in the “Troubleshooting
Flows.”
The “Troubleshooting Flows” describe the following information.
• Cause
• Error-related I/O locations
• Error-related system block diagram
(4) Restore the machine to normal in compliance with the flowcharts set forth under
“Troubleshooting Flowcharts”.
When replacing or adjusting parts, refer to the following sections.
• Replacement parts confirmation
“Service Parts List Volume”
• Parts replacement and adjustment
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Volume”
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
• If the machine cannot be restored to normal by performing the specified procedures, report
the employed procedures and results to the Service Headquarters to make a request for
analysis.
• Even if the machine has been restored to normal by performing procedures other than those
which are set forth in the “Troubleshooting Flows,” report the employed procedures, progress,
and results to the Service Headquarters. Such reports will be utilized for future service
manual improvement and machine serviceability enhancement.
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Safety Labels 0.38 Safety Labels 0.39
Safety Labels EN60825-1: 1996

warning label
1. Laser Precaution Labels
■ Label Attachment Locations

Below are illustrated the protective housings and laser precaution labels specified in Part 1-
J, Federal Regulations Code “Title 21” issued by the FDA of the U.S.
EN60825-1: 1996 Scanning optics unit
Class 3B panel label FR1B1071.EPS
HHS label #1
■ List of Labels
● HHS Certification and Identification Label

CR-IR344 CR-IR344P
HHS label #2
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD. FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU, 26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU,
TOKYO 106-8620, JAPAN TOKYO 106-8620, JAPAN
MODEL CR-IR 344 MODEL CR-IR 344P

SERIAL No. 2381001 SERIAL No. 2381001
MANUFACTURED August , 1998 MANUFACTURED August , 1998
HHS label #1
EN60825-1: 1996 FPE FPE
Class 3B panel label This product complies with This product complies with
21 CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J. 21 CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J.
FR1B1002.EPS FR4B1201.EPS
● HHS Label #1
DANGER
Laser radiation when open
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
FR1B1004.EPS
T
ON
FR
HHS Label#2 ● HHS Label #2
DANGER
Laser radiation
when open external cover
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
FR1B1005.EPS
HHS certification and identification label
T
ON
FR
HHS label #1
EN60825-1: 1996
Class 1 product label
EN60825-1: 1996
Class 3B panel label
HHS label #2
FR4B1001.EPS
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Safety Labels 0.40 Safety Labels 0.41
● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 1 Product Label 2. Labels
■ Label Attachment Locations
T
ON
FR
Caution Label
Stop Label
FR4B1003.EPS
● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label

Ratings Indication Label
Manufacturer Label
Acceptance Label
T
ON
FR
FR1B1033E.EPS
■ List of Labels
● Ratings Indication Label

CR-IR344 CR-IR344P
FR4B1202E.EPS
FR4B1034E.EPS
FR4B1008.EPS ● Manufacturer Label

● EN 60825-1: 1996 Warning Label
FR1B1007.EPS
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Safety Labels 0.42 Protective Housings for Laser Radiation Exposure Prevention 0.43
● Acceptance Label
Protective Housings for Laser Radiation Exposure
EXAMINED
GOOD
Prevention
Even if you remove the protective housings, the laser beam will not possibly leak out of the
FUJI KIKI
machine unless you intentionally change the laser beam optical path. However, if the optical
FR1B1036.EPS
path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation, the installation personnel or
other persons near the machine may be exposed to laser radiation.
● Caution Label
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while observing
the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation, thoroughly restore
Make sure to stop operating this unit at least 9 minutes
CAUTION if it had been moving up and down continuously for
every removed protective housing to its original state.
1 minute.
Stoppen Sie den Betrieb das Gerätes für mindestens ■ Machine Main Body Protective Housing
VORSICHT 9 Minuten, wenn es kontinuierlich 1 Minute lang auf und
ab bewegt wuregt wurde.
The protective housing for laser radiation exposure prevention consists of three covers that
Arrêtez toute opération au moins 9 minutes si
ATTENTION un va-et-vient vertical continu de cette unité a
are marked in the figure below.
été constaté pendant 1 minute.
Exposure unit top cover
Assicurarsi di interrompere il funzionamento
per almeno 9 minuti se questo apparecchio si
PRECAUZIONE e spostato in alto e in basso in modo continuo
per 1 minuto.
Exposure unit rear cover
Asegúrese de detener ta operación par lo
menos durante 9 minutos si esta unidad ha
PRECAUCION estado moviéndose continuamente hacia
arriba y abajo durante 1 minuto.
Stop betjening i mindst 9 minutter, når denne HHS Label#2

FORSIGTIG enhed er blevet bevæget op og ned uden
afbrydelser i 1 minut.
Pysäytä laitteen käyttö ainakin 9 minuutiksi, jos
HUOMAUTUS se on liikkunut ylös ja alas jatkuvasti 2 minuutin
ajan.
Se till att du sluta använda denna enhet i minst 9 minuter Elevation unit front cover
OBSERVERA om den har rört sig upp och ned kontinuerligt under
1 minut.
Exposure unit right-hand
Chin
FR1B1010.EPS inner cover
support
cover
● Stop Label Exposure unit
right-hand side
cover
T HHS Label#2
ON
FR
Exposure unit bottom cover FR1B1008.EPS

FR1B1009.EPS
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Protective Housings for Laser Radiation Exposure Prevention 0.44 Protective Housings for Laser Radiation Exposure Prevention 0.45
■ Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit BLANK PAGE

Scanning optics unit cover
Scanning optics unit

FR1B1014.EPS
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Machine Description (MD) Control Sheet MD - 1
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
10/15/99 00 New release (FM2600) All pages
07/05/2001 01 Corrections (FM3073) MD-1, 46-48, 50, 55-62
08/30/2001 02 Support for “plus” (FM3115) Volume cover only
06/20/2003 03 Addition of board information, changes to All pages
page numbers, corrections for mistypes
(FM4017)
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P
Service Manual
Machine Description (MD)
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MD - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD 1 - 1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD 1 - 2
1. Machine Components and Their Names 1.2 Component Names

Machine front view Machine right side view
1.1 Machine External Views Elevation unit Exposure/reader unit
T
ON
FR
Control rack
Power supply unit

(JPS-3)
Pump unit
T
ON
FR
FR1H2001.EPS B:
Path changeover
conveyor
F: Erasure conveyor
A: IP positioning
unit Scanning optics unit
Board
Light-collecting rack
guide assembly
(PMR08C)
Light-collecting guide
assembly (PMT08C)
E:
Before-erasure
D: Scanner conveyor
after-reading Z: Subscanning unit
conveyor
Power supply unit (JPS-7)
The alphabetical letters (A, B, D, E, F, and Z) attached to the unit names are unit symbols.
For units other than the IP conveyor and reader units, the symbol is H (enclosure).
FR1H2002.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MD 1 - 1 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MD 1 - 2

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
1.3 Maintenance Space BLANK PAGE
Since the CR-IR344 is fastened to the floor surface, the required maintenance space is the
same as the required installation space.
50.0mm or more
400.0 mm 900.0mm
or more or more
Top of machine
23.5mm
1800.0mm IP location
X-ray tube
Front of machine
2800 mm or more
(or 2000 mm
or more without
the grip handle)
FR1B1016.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MD 2 - 1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MD 2 - 2
2. Features of Machine BLANK PAGE
The CR-IR344 is a small-size, low-cost, high-quality, upright image reader that incorporates
increased-width-compliant two EuIPs.
2.1 Mechanical Features
■ The image quality is enhanced by the use of the dual-surface light-gathering

technology and high-power LD.
The IP dual-surface light-gathering technology is employed to make the image quality level
about 1.3 times higher than that of the CR-IR343, which uses a single-surface light-
gathering system. Therefore, the CR-IR344 uses dual-surface light-gathering type IPs and
incorporates a high-power LD that yields a higher output than the counterpart in the CR-
IR343.
■ Parts in the scanning optics unit can be replaced on an individual basis.

The scanning optics unit is constructed so that its incorporated polygon assembly and LD
assembly can be replaced on an individual basis.
2.2 Image Network Interface Option

The CR-IR344 comes standard with the ID Network Ethernet interface. It can also incorpo-
rate a high-speed image network interface option for image networking.
● Hardware specification
IEEE802.3 (10Base-TX), IEEE802.3u (100Base-TX) automatic detection/changeover
● Hardware
Compression/decompression board (HCP08A), network interface board (CPU90F)
● Software specification
FINP (Fuji integrated network protocol)
Base on Dicom (OEM network protocol)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MD 3 - 2
3. New Parts with Better Serviceability 3.2 Snap-fit Pinion Gears Employed
The employed pinion gears can be easily installed and removed without using clamps or
The CR-IR344 employs new parts that offer increased serviceability. They are to be handled tools.
differently from the preceding ones. When you service the CR-IR344 for the first time, you
should confirm the sections where mechanisms with such new parts are employed. Each pinion gear has two claws. The protrusions of the claws lodge in the shaft grooves for
retention purposes. To remove the pinion gear, you have to pull it out with its two claws
opened outward. To mount the pinion gear, slowly install it over the shaft until the claw
3.1 E-ringless Housings Employed protrusions lodge in the shaft grooves.
◆ NOTE ◆
The employed housings (bearing incorporated) can be secured to side plates without E-
rings, which inconvenience installation and removal operations. When installing the pinion gear over the shaft, ensure that it is properly oriented. If you
install it over the shaft while it is improperly oriented, its lock claws become damaged.
FRONT
E-ringless housing Shaft Pinion gear
Path changeover
conveyor Pinion gear
Erasure conveyor
Claw Shaft
Claw
: Place of use
OK NG
FR1H1494.EPS
Snap-fit pinion gear FRONT
FR1H2004.EPS
Path changeover
conveyor
Claws Erasure conveyor
: Place of use
FR1H2003.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MD 3 - 4
3.3 Sensors Requiring No Mounting Position Adjustments BLANK PAGE
The employed sensors are structured so that their four claws fasten the sensors to their
brackets. When compared to a preceding type that is to be screwed down, these new
sensors are not likely to be displaced. The use of these new sensors will facilitate position-
ing operations.
Although the claws may not easily fit into their positions when you install a sensor, you can
press a 150 mm rule against the claws to facilitate sensor installation.
CAUTION
Exercise care not to break the sensor claws.
Sensor
Steel rule
Claw
FR1H2007.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
06.20.2003 FM4017
003-352-03
4.
CONTENTS
Elevation unit JPS-7
Inverter
System current
ON signal
System Block Diagram

ACIN1 DCOUT5 DCOUT3 DCOUT6 CN4 DCOUT4 DCOUT2 CN6 DCOUT1 DCOUT8 ACOUT1 ACOUT2 CN1
1
FANH6 FANH7 FANH8
4 12 12 +24V Lamp cooling
+5V +15V +5V ±15V +24V FAN +15V
AC200V +5V 8 fan
H1
CN4 CN6 CN7 CNA1 12
CN9 SCN08C SCN cooling fan CNF5 12
CN7 SA1 CN1 CNF4
50 CNA2 CNF6 CNF7
52P 4 CN4 CN1
CN5 MA1
2
RS485 CN12 CN3 CNH91 SA2
SCR08C Laser safty
CN8 CN5 SH1 CNA3
40P
CN6 SNS08B SA3 CN6 MA2
SYN08A CN2 CN1 SH2 CNB1
CNZ3 CN4 CN2
SZ1 SB1
CN1CN3 CN6 CN5 MA3
DRV08B TSWF3
3
PNL08A SB2
LD1
CN1 CN2 CN3
LD2
CN2
CN1
CN1 CN4
CN2 CN3
CN2
CN1
Exposure unit CN5
SB3
CN7 MB1
LDD POL
08C DRV CN4 CN6 CN7 CN4 CNF1 TSWF1 TSWF6
PDA08A CN5 MB3
SF1 TSWF2 TSWF8
PMT08C PHV08C PMR08C
+5 V CND1
4
CN1 CN2 CN8 SD1 CN8 MB2 Erasure
8P 16P CND2 FAN F1 conveyor
FFM CNZ2 SD2
(MZ1) CN3 CN9 MD1
6P CNZ1 CND3 FAN F2
SE1
Grip handle Patient protection CNE1 CN10 MD2
4 16 32
5
interference descent prevention switch (N.C x4) SZ2 CNF3 FAN F3 Photo-timer
prevention Side grip CN11 MF1
MSH5 handle SZ3
switch 60 CNZ4 FAN F4
2 N.C CN2 CN2
(N.C x2) SWT08B CN12 MZ2
CR-IR344 Service Manual
CN2 CN3 40 Lamp cooling

CN3 CNZ5 CNF2 fan Erasure lamps Erasure lamps
CN10 CN11 2
6
CNH51 CN1 2 TSWF5 LAMP1-LAMP4 LAMP5-LAMP8
CNH54 CNH59 CN12
FG FG CNH55 CNH53 CNH52 Ambient temperature detection
CN102 CNH58
PNL08B 3 8
CN101
6
FG
7
Potentiometer
CNH31
ACOUT1 CN11 CN12
8
DCOUT2 3 Buck
CN2 +5 V,+24 V (Shot, Rdy, Go) MTH08E
2 CN7 PC for maintenance
DCOUT3 PT1,PT2,PT3 CN18 CN17
SWT08B CN1 +5 V
8
CN6
9
Emargency Monitor
switch CN1 CN2 TB1 TB2,3,4 DIM08A
(any commercially
N.C ACOUT2 available item)
TLB08A
CN10 CN15 CN3 CN4
MSH6
Grip handle N.C System power supply
10
upper-/lower- ON signal
limit switches MSH7
N.C 10
CN3
CNMSH6/7
CN9 4 52 16 32 LP 40 50 MODEM
N.C 50 34 4 2
Exposure unit MSH8
CR Console DMS/HIC
upper-/lower-limit
switches N.C
MSH9 JPS-3 CN10 CN3
Elevation unit CN2 15
CN4
2 CN3 CN7 CN6 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN3 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 VGA90E
FAN CN4
Hydraulic pump DMC08A 2
H5 CN13 +5 V CNJ2
cooling fan or CN18 AC100 V
CPU90F, FDD
4 LAN90B/D HCP08A XPC08A IMG08B/H IMG08A 34 (in Japan)
SV BSP08A IMG07B CPU90E CNJ1
Solenoid valve (Option) (Option) (Option) CN8
H2
CN3
CNN08B
SV TB1 CN50 CN20 CN16 CN15 CN14 CN13 CN12 CN11 CN10 CN9 CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Solenoid valve TB3 CN22 50
H1 CNJ1
+5V HDD
CN27
CN1 3 DCOUT1 CN25 4
MTH08B CNJ2
Hydraulic pump MH1 +12 V CN18 CN17
motor CN8 +12 V
CNMH2 5 CN29 CN28 +5 V
Brake-attached MH2 CN14
CN2CN1CN4CN5 MMC90A MMC90A
AC motor
Controller
MD 4 - 1
TB1
FR1H2008.EPS
MD 4 - 1
(Grip handle) Rack fan HDD cooling fan

FANH4 FANH10
Remote ON Foot switch

AC200 V EXT IDT4 IDT
Current loop
Other FCR5501
5. I/O Arrangement and Function Descriptions 5.2 Sensor List

Unit Symbol Name State Type Function/remarks
5.1 I/O Arrangement Diagram IP positioning SA1 IP positioning home Positioning unit IP PI (5mm)
unit (A) position sensor conveyance position:
Close (1)
SA2 IP lift home position IP storage side: PI (5mm)
sensor Closed (1)
MSH8
SA3 Bucky home position Bucky stop position PI (5mm)
ESH1 sensor during exposure: Close (1)
MSH6 Path changeover SB1 Positioning unit entry IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
conveyor (B) IP sensor
HDD SB2 Path changeover unit IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
IP sensor
SB3 Confluence unit IP IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
FDD sensor
MSH11 MSH10 Scanner after- SD1 After-reading IP sensor IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
reading conveyor SD2 Grip release home Grip down: Close (1) PI (5mm)
FANH10 MSH9 (D) position sensor
FANH3 MSH7
Before-erasure SE1 Before-erasure entry IP IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
MH2 conveyor (E) sensor
FANH4
Erasure conveyor SF1 Erasure entry IP sensor IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
MH1 (F) TSWF1, 3 Thermostatic switch Thermostatic Safety switch against
FANH5 switch overheat (75°C)
SVH1,2
TSWF2 Temperature control switch Thermostatic Switch for lamp tube wall
SH2 SB2 FANH9 FANH6–8 switch temperature stabilization
MB2 MB3
SH1 MB1 TSWF5 Initialization temperature Thermostatic Switch for lamp ambient
SH3 SB3 SB4 MB4 temperature maintenance
MH3 control switch switch
SB1 TSWF3
TSWF6 LDSN1–4 Illumination failure sensor
FANH1
TSWF2 LAMP Subscanning unit SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor IP detected: Close (1) SED08C IP conveyance sensor
1-4 (Z) SZ2 Subscanning grip release Grip down: Close (1) PI (5mm)
TSWF8
LAMP home position sensor
5-8 SZ3 Before-reading IP sensor IP detected: Close (1) PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
SA1 SZ3
MZ2 Enclosure SH1 Laser safety interlock switch PI (19mm)
THF1 MA2 MZ1 FANF1 (exposure) SH2 Laser safety interlock switch PI (19mm)
SA4 SZ2 SZ1 (H)
MA4 MSH1–4 Patient protection descent Microswitch N.C
MA1 prevention interlock switch
SF2
MSH5 Grip handle interference Microswitch N.C
SA2 prevention interlock switch
SD2
SF1 Enclosure MSH6 Grip handle upper-limit Microswitch N.C
SA3 MA3 MF1 (elevation) interlock switch
MSH3, 4 SD1 SE1 MD1 (H) MSH7 Grip handle lower-limit Microswitch N.C
MD2 interlock switch
MSH1, 2 MSH8 Elevation upper-limit Microswitch N.C
interlock switch
MSH9 Elevation lower-limit Microswitch N.C
NOTE: The I/O symbol has the following meaning. interlock switch
MSH10, 11 Patient protection descent Microswitch N.C
SB2 prevention (for side grip
Serial number handle)
TR1H1001.EPS
Unit symbol (A, B, D-F, H, Z)
Example) B: Path changeover conveyor
The unit symbol may sometimes be omitted.
I/O type
S: Sensor
M: Motor
TSW: Thermal switch
MSH: Microswitch
FAN: Fan
SV: Solenoid valve
and more
FR8H2012 EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Models of Sensors and Parts Codes 5.3 Actuator List
Code No. MS/PS Model Relevant sensor symbols Unit name
(Unit symbol) Symbol Name Type Function/remarks
104N0043 PS OJ-380331-701 (5mm Type I) SA1
IP positioning MA1 IP positioning drive motor Pulse motor IP transport to exposure position
104N0044 PS OJ-380331-702 (5mm Type L) SA2, 3, SD2, SZ2 unit (A) MA2 IP lift drive motor Pulse motor IP ejection from IP positioning unit
113Y1038 PS 19mm Type I SB1-3, SF1, SH1, 2, SZ3 MA3 Bucky drive motor Pulse motor Bucky drive
113Y1039 PS 19mm Type I SD1, SE1
113Y1566 PS Reflective type SZ1 Path changeover MB1 IP conveyance motor Pulse motor IP conveyance
conveyor (B) MB2 IP conveyance motor Pulse motor IP conveyance
115S0069 5003F 70°C 4UL TSW F8
MB3 IP conveyance motor Pulse motor IP conveyance
115S0094 05EP 3253 65°C TSWF1, 3
115S0095 05EP 3253 70°C TSWF6
Scanner after- MD1 IP conveyance motor Pulse motor IP conveyance
115S0116 5003F 75°C 4UL TSWF2 reading conveyor MD2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Roller grip/release
115S0117 5003F 25°C 4UL UR TSWF5 (D)
128Y0257 MS N.C. MSH8, 9 Erasure conveyor MF1 IP conveyance motor Pulse motor IP conveyance
128Y0490 MS N.C. MSH1-4 (F) LAMP1–8 Erasure lamp Fluorescent lamp Erasure light source
TR1H2003.EPS FANF1–4 Erasure cooling fan DC fan
■ Sensor ON/OFF Subscanning unit MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM6 IP conveyance

(Z) MZ2 Subscanning grip motor Pulse motor Subscanning grip/release
● Transmission sensor ● Reflective sensor (SZ1)
Enclosure FANH1 Board cooling fan DC fan SCN cooling
(exposure)
Enclosure FANH3 Board cooling fan DC fan Rack cooling
(elevation) FANH4 Board cooling fan DC fan Power supply cooling
(H)
FANH5 Elevation drive cooling fan DC fan Elevation drive cooling
OFF(0): OPEN ON(1): CLOSE FANH6–8 Erasure cooling fan DC fan
FR1H1215.EPS
(rear side)
OFF (0) : OPEN ON (1) : CLOSE FANH10 HDD cooling fan DC fan
FR1H2164.EPS MH1 Elevation drive hydraulic Hydraulic pump
pump motor
● Microswitch MH2 Grip handle drive motor AC motor
SVH1 Solenoid valve
SVH2 Solenoid valve
TR1H1002.EPS
ON OFF
FR1H2165.EPS
■ Sensor Monitoring Screen Under Idle Condition (two IPs loaded)

SA1 - 3 : 0 1 1
SB1 - 3 : 0 0 0
SD1 - 2 : 0 1
SE1 : 0
SF1 : 1
SZ2 - 3 : 0 0
TSWF5-6 : 0 0
LDSN1-8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0:QUIT

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MD 6 - 1
MD 6 - 1
165825ns 168300ns 170775ns 173250ns 175725ns
MA1
MA2
MA3
MB1
MB2
MB3
MD1
MD2
10
MF1
FFM
MZ2
9
SA01
SA02
SA03
8
SB01
SB02
SB03
7
SD01
SD02
SE01
6
SF01
SZ02
SZ03
LAMP1-4ENB
5
LAMP1-4_ON
TSW05
LDSN01
4
LDSN02
LDSN03
LDSN04
3
FFM_ST
FFM_ST_LC
SHOT
2
K1
STOP_RD
HALT_BD
TIP_DETECT
1
IMAGE_END
IP Flow
Timing Chart (Handling of One IP)
FR1H9069.EPS
CONTENTS
6.
6.1
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Exposure Unit Lift Mechanism
7. Descriptions of Operations
The MA2 drive is transmitted to the arm so that the IP lift bracket ascends and descends.
7.1 IP Positioning Unit Home positioning is achieved when the SA2 closes upon detection.
When initialization is effected, the IP lift bracket is placed in the lowermost position (home
position).
■ Exposure Unit Guide Mechanism
When the tray moves to the IP unloading position (SA1 closed), the MA2 is driven to raise
The MA1 drive is transmitted to the pinion gear so that the tray moves to the IP loading/ the IP lift bracket to the uppermost position.
unloading position and exposure position.
Home positioning is achieved when the SA1 closes upon detection.
When initialization is effected, the tray accomplishes home positioning and then moves to
the exposure position. IP positioning unit
When the machine receives a shot signal while the tray is in the exposure position, the tray
moves to the IP unloading position.
IP Shaft A
SA1 sensor
light-shielding
plate MA2
SA1 IP lift bracket
SA2
Shaft A
IP
Tray assembly
Pinion gear
MA2
FR1H2301.EPS
MA1
IP loading position/unloading position Exposure position (setting position)

FR1H2300.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Exposure Unit Bucky Mechanism 7.2 Path Changeover Conveyor
The Bucky grid operation is performed to eliminate secondary X-rays (scattered rays).
The MA3 is driven to rotate the arm so that the roller bearing mounted on the arm moves the
■ Path Changeover Guide
grid frame to the right and left.
The path changeover guide provides the following two different IP conveyance operations.
Home positioning is achieved when the SA3 closes upon detection.
A. IP positioning unit → path changeover conveyor → subscanning unit
When initialization is effected, the grid is placed on the left-hand side (in the home position).
B. Erasure conveyor → path changeover conveyor → IP positioning unit
When the machine receives the X-ray SHOT button ON signal, the MA3 is driven to slide the
grid frame to the right and left so that the SA3 repeatedly opens and closes. Path changeover for the above conveyance operations is effected by the path changeover
guide.
The MA3 stops when the SA3 closes for the first time after the receipt of the SHOT button
OFF signal. The path changeover guide is normally placed in the IP conveyance operation A position.
When IP conveyance operation B is performed, the traveling IP depresses the path
Top view
changeover guide. After completion of IP passage, the depressed path changeover guide is
Grid frame returned to the IP conveyance operation A position by spring action.
A: IP positioning unit → Path changeover conveyor → Subscanning unit
SA3
IP positioning unit
Path changeover conveyor
Center
Roller bearing
MA3
Spring
Path changeover guide
IP positioning unit Subscanning unit Erasure conveyor

Center
FR1H2158.EPS
B: Erasure conveyor → path changeover conveyor → IP positioning unit

FR1H2157.EPS
IP
Spring
Path changeover guide
IP positioning unit Subscanning unit Erasure conveyor
FR1H2302.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.3 Subscanning Unit ● Shock absorber attached pipe grip/grip release

When the shock absorber attached pipe is in the home position, it is gripped by spring
■ Subscanning Grip Mechanism action.
The MZ2 drive is transmitted to the arm via the timing belt.
The MZ2 is driven to perform the following two differing grip operations.
• Rubber roller grip/grip release The arm is pushed upward to rotate the shaft. The roller bearing installed over the shaft
pushes the shock absorber attached pipe to release the grip.
• Shock absorber attached pipe grip/grip release
As is the case with the rubber roller, the grip is left released until the IP is conveyed to the
Home positioning is achieved when the SZ2 closes upon detection. SZ3 position. The IP is gripped when it is conveyed for IP reading.
When initialization is effected, the grip mechanism is placed in the grip release (grip up)
Gripped Grip released
state.
● Rubber roller grip/grip release

Outside of subscanning unit
When the rubber roller is in the home position, it is gripped by spring action.
The MZ2 drive is transmitted to the arm in the subscanning unit via the timing belt to move Arm Shaft serving
the grip arm. When the grip arm moves, the rubber roller is released. MZ2
as the center
The grip is left released until the IP is conveyed to the SZ3 position. The IP is gripped when Roller bearing
it is conveyed for IP reading. SZ2
Timing belt

Actuator Shaft serving
Pipe as the center
Grip arm
MZ2 SZ3
Rubber roller
SZ2 FR1H2160.EPS
Timing belt
Actuator Rotates to
this position.
Inside of subscanning unit
The center of this arm is

in alignment with the center
of the timing belt pulley shaft.
Rotation occurs around this
arm. FR1H2159.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ MZ1 Drive Force Transmission 7.4 Scanner After-reading Conveyor
The MZ1 drive is transmitted to the Kapton® belt and used to rotate the drive shaft.
The rotation of the drive shaft causes the driven shaft to rotate via the rubber belt.
■ After-reading Grip Mechanism
The MD2 drive is transmitted to the arm and then the guide mounted on the arm releases
the grip roller grip.
Home positioning is achieved when the SD2 closes upon detection.
When initialization is effected, the after-reading conveyor grip mechanism is placed in the
IP home position and the grip roller is gripped. The grip is released when IP reading convey-
Driven shaft ance starts. The IP is gripped when the reading conveyance sequence ends.
Rubber belt
MZ1 MD2 Gear
Grip roller
Driving shaft
Kapton® belt
FR
ON
T Shaft A
FR1H2161.EPS
Guide Fixed
Gear
SD2
Shaft A
Actuator
FR1H2162.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.5 Erasure Conveyor BLANK PAGE
■ IP Erasure
While the IP is conveyed to the erasure conveyor, the IP image data is erased by the erasure
lamps.
Eight twin parallel fluorescent lamps are used for IP image data erasure.
To make preparations to assure adequate light intensity for data erasure, the erasure lamp
illumination sequence starts before IP reading conveyance.
Filter
Filter
Erasure conveyor
Lamp assembly
Erasure lamps
T Erasure lamps
ON
FR
FR1H2163.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.6 Image Data Flow MTH08B/E board: Motherboard

CPU90F board: Network board
This section shows how the image read from the IP flows in the scanner unit and controller. HCP08A board: Image data compression board
IMG08B/H board: High-speed multi-objective frequency processing (MFP) board
■ PC Board Function Overview
IMG08A board: Printer interface board
Controller BSP08A board: Dual-surface image addition board
NETWORK CPU90F MTH08B/E IMG07B board: CRT image/EDR image reduction board
LAN90B/D CPU90E board: Overall control board
DMC08A VGA90E board: CRT board
HCP08A
PMT08C board: Front-surface image photomultiplier board
IMG08B/H PMR08C board: Back-surface image photomultiplier board
(MFP)
PHV08C board: Front-/back-surface image logarithmic amplifier board
PRINTER IMG08A SCN08C board: Scanner control/front-surface image board
Scanner unit SCR08C board: Back-surface image board
Scanning
optics unit
Front-surface
image
PMT08C SCN08C
PHV08C BSP08A
PMR08C SCR08C
Back-surface
image
IMG07B HDD
CPU90E
CRT VGA90E
FR1H2318.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.6.1 Scanner Unit Image Data Flow 7.6.2 Controller Data Flow
Start-point MTH08B/E board
Laser (LDD)
detection (SYN) ■ For Direct-Connected System
Shared
memory HDD
(MMC90A MTH08B/E
DIM08A)
Scanning direction
HDD (3)
SCN08C
board IMG07B board IMG08A
PRINTER
(5)
EDR image
reduction
Scanning
Polygon fq lens optics unit IMG08B/H
(POL) Front-surface image
Front-/back-surface
image addition process PMT08C SCN08C (4)
Long lens BSP08A board

BSP08A
Controller
Scanner unit PHV08C
Front-surface (1)
image data MMC90A/
DIM08A
fq lens Scanning Long lens IMG07B
Polygon (POL) optics unit (shared
PMR08C SCR08C (2) memory)
PMT08C board
Back-surface image
SCR08C board
CPU90E
IP leading edge detection (SED)
Front-surface • IMG08A: LP interface board

photomultiplier • BSP08A: Dual-surface addition process board
IP
• IMG07B: EDR/CRT image reduction process board FR1H2320.EPS
Back-surface
image data (1) The front-/back-surface image data fed from the scanner is subjected to an addition
Back-surface process on the BSP08A board.
photomultiplier (2) The image data derived from the addition process is subjected to an EDR/CRT image
reduction process on the IMG07B board and written into the shared memory.
: Flow of read image data
(3) The image data in the shared memory is saved onto the HDD.
: Flow of image data derived from
addition processing (4) The image data in the HDD is subjected to high-speed multi-frequency processing.
PMR08C board FR1H2319.EPS
(5) Pixel density conversion processing, basic image processing, and enlargement/
reduction processing for the LP are performed on the data, which is then outputted to
the PRINTER.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ For Network-Connected System ■ For Image Monitor Display
MTH08B/E MTH08B/E
(3), (5)
(4)
HDD (6)
Scanning
optics unit
CPU90F
LAN90B/D Front-surface
Network image
PMT08C SCN08C
Scanning BSP08A
optics unit HCP08A
Front-surface image PHV08C MMC90A/
(1)
PMT08C SCN08C DIM08A
(shared
IMG07B (2) memory)
BSP08A
PMR08C SCR08C
PHV08C
(1) Back-surface
image
MMC90A/
DIM08A VGA90E CPU90E
IMG07B (3)
(shared
PMR08C SCR08C memory) Image
(2)
monitor
Back-surface image
• BSP08A: Dual-surface addition process board
• IMG07B: EDR/CRT image reduction process board FR1H2322.EPS
CPU90E
(1) The front-/back-surface image data fed from the scanner is subjected to an addition
process on the BSP08A board.
• CPU90F: Ethernet board, 100BaseTX Intelligent LAN board (2) The image data derived from the addition process is subjected to an EDR/CRT image
• HCP08A: Compression/decompression process board
• BSP08A: Dual-surface addition process board
reduction process on the IMG07B board.
• IMG07B: EDR/CRT image reduction process board FR1H2321.EPS (3) The image data is displayed on the image monitor via the CPU90E board and VGA90E
board.
(1) The front-/back-surface image data fed from the scanner is subjected to an addition
process on the BSP08A board.
(2) The image data derived from the addition process is subjected to an EDR/CRT image
reduction process on the IMG07B board and written into the shared memory.
(4) The image data on the HDD is compressed by the HCP08A board and then written
into the shared memory.
(6) The image data on the HDD is subjected to network processing on the CPU90F board
and then output to the network.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.7 Function of Each Board Board name Supplementary title Functional description
Functions as a motherboard, and supplies power to the boards
MTH08B/E Motherboard
This section describes the functions of the standard and optional boards with reference to connected to it.
block diagrams. CPU90F*
Network board
Performs communication with upper-level hosts and LAN control.
LAN90B*/D* “■ CPU90F Board”
Controller Performs normalization, pixel density conversion processing, and
DMC08A* Image data compression board accumulation to the DMS.
NETWORK CPU90F MTH08B/E “■ DMC08A Board”
LAN90B/D Performs normalization, pixel density conversion processing,
HCP08A* Image data compression board and compression/decompression processing.
DMC08A “■ HCP08A Board”
Elevation unit HCP08A Performs LCD display control, size designation control, X-ray
XPC08A Operation panel interface board exposure unit size control, under control of the CPU90E board.
PNL08A XPC08A “■ XPC08A Board”
PNL08B High-speed multi-frequency
IMG08B*/H* Performs high-speed multi-frequency processing.
processing board
IMG08B/H
Functions as a printer I/F to perform pixel density conversion processing,
(MFP)
IMG08A* Printer I/F board basic image processing, and enlargement/reduction processing for the LP.
“■ IMG08A Board”
PRINTER IMG08A
Performs addition on the front-side and back-side image data
Scanner unit BSP08A Both-side image addition board scanned from the scanner.
“■ BSP08A Board”
Scanning Performs EDR reduction processing and CRT display image reduction.
IMG07B CRT/EDR image reduction board
“■ IMG07B Board”
optics unit
Provides support for FDD control and VGA monochrome monitor,
Front-surface CPU90E Overall control board in addition to overall control functionality.
image PMT08C “■ CPU90E Board”
SCN08C
Displays the image data from the scanner onto the image monitor via the
VGA90E CRT board
CPU90E board.
Performs I/O control under control of the host CPU.
SNS08B Sensor/motor-related control board
PHV08C “■ SNS08B Board”
BSP08A
Upon receipt of the control signal from the SNS08B board, directly
SNS08B DRV08B Motor-related drive board drives the actuator.
Sensor, etc
“■ DRV08B Board”
Performs polygon driver/laser/HV control. It also captures the front-side
PMR08C SCR08C DRV08B Scanner control/front-side image analog image data from the PMT08C board and converts it to digital
Motor, etc SCN08C
Back-surface board image data.
image “■ SCN08C Board”
An add-on board for the SCN08C board; it controls the back-side
IMG07B scanner unit and SNS08B board. It also captures the back-side analog
SCR08C Back-side image processing board image data from the PMR08C board and converts it to digital image data.
“■ SCR08C Board”
CPU90E A log amp board for the front-side image.
PMT08C Front-side photomultiplier board
“■ PMT08C/PMR08C Board”
CRT VGA90E A log amp board for the back-side image.
PMR08C Back-side photomultiplier board
FR1H2323.EPS
“■ PMT08C/PMR08C Board”
Front-side/back-side image log A log amp board for the front-side/back-side images, having a
PHV08C high-voltage power supply.
amp board
“■ PHV08C Board”
IP leading-edge detection sensor A sensor is located above the beam scan line, so that the IP over the
SED08C
board scan line is detected by the transmitted beam light.
*: Optional board TR4H7001.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ CPU90E Board
The 68EN360 (25 MHz), available from Motorola, is used as a CPU, with 16 MB of DRAM as
main memory, 1 MB of EPPROM and FEPROM, and 128 KB of SRAM.
The SRAM contents, as well as the date and time, are backed up by a battery (lithium ion
cell).
A µPD72070 floppy disk controller (FDC) is used to control the floppy disk drive (FDD).
The 128KB SRAM contains gamma correction values.
In addition, the CRT controller supports a VGA monochrome monitor.

With VRAM (4M bits, x3), an image plane is displayed with 640 x 480 pixels (12 bits), while a
text plane is displayed with 640 x 480 pixels (4 bits).
When an image is displayed on the monitor, gamma correction is performed. Thus, in order
to achieve gamma correction quickly, the monitor screen goes blank, and an image is then
displayed after gamma correction.
Image memory bus I/F
Expansion slot bus I/F
CPU90E Block Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ CPU90F Board (Optional) ■ IMG07B Board
A 133MHz Pentium CPU is used to perform I/O initialization within the board, communication This board performs EDR reduction processing and CRT display image reduction.
with an upper-layer host, and control of the LAN.
Image processing board (IMG07B)
16 MB of main memory (two 8 MB SIMMs) is installed.
Its LAN controller supports IEEE 802.3-compliant 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, and auto-negoti-
External
ates the speed for automatic switching; as such, only one RJ-45 connector is provided. memory
128kw
On this board, eight software control LEDs and six LAN communication status indication
LEDs are located. DSP
56303 Address/data bus
Of them, the LAN communication status indication LEDs and their block diagram are illus- (80MHz) Interrupt B
trated below.
Interrupt A
Pixel BUS Pixel BUS

CPU90F Block Diagram counter CON counter CON
HOST i/f Input i/f Output i/f
circuit register circuit register circuit
Image data Image data
input output
CPU BUS CON (output) BUS CON (input)
To motherboard
FR1H2333.EPS
• DSP: Image processing engine for the machine.

• HOST I/F circuit: Comprised of the bus transceiver, address decoder, etc.
• BUS CON I/F circuit: Functions only via the DSP and register.
FR1H1102.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ IMG08A Board (Optional) ■ XPC08A Board
The IMG08A, which is an LP interface board, is responsible for normalization (Sk/Gp conver- Being under CPU90E board control, the XPC08A board exercises LCD display control, size
sion) and pixel density conversion processing, basic image processing (frequency/gradation designation control, and X-ray exposure apparatus size control.
processing, DR compression, 1-D USM), and image enlargement/reduction for the LP. For It notifies the CPU of the IP size and exposure standard selected by the PNL08A board. It
image processing, it contains a 128K-word (24-bit) SRAM and a 1M-word (16-bit) DRAM. also informs the X-ray exposure apparatus of the IP size and other information, and controls
the machine message display LCD.
The main functions are summarized below.
Image processing board (IMG08A)
• Size/standard selection : Size/standard selection LED (x9)

External External External External LP
SRAM DRAM DRAM SRAM Size selection key (x7)
i/f
circuit Standard changeover key (x2)
Out- • LED control : Ready/Call/Error indicator LED (x3)
Address/ Input Input/
put Address/ • X-ray tube control : Relay contact output report (x14)
data bus output data bus
register
Interrupt B DSP Interrupt A • LCD control : HD64646FS (x1)
Interrupt A i/f circuit Interrupt B (LCD controller)
HM62256BLFP (32KB x2)
BUS Pixel Pixel BUS
CON counter counter CON
(SRAM)
i/f i/f
HOST i/f circuit Input Output circuit
circuit HOST i/f
register register register register circuit
Image data Image data VRAM
input output
Host bus interface

BUSCON (output) BUSCON (input)
To motherboard VRAM
access
control
IMG08A Block Diagram
LCDC LVDS
driver
Decording
To PNL08A
circuit
Size/
standard
control
X-ray tube Relay

control To TLB08A
LED
control To LED08A
XPC08A Block Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ DMC08A Board (Optional) ■ HCP08A Board (Optional)
The DMC08A, which is a DMS interface (I/F) board, outputs data to the E I/F. It also per- The HCP08A board, which supports Fuji Protocol (FINP) during network connection, per-
forms normalization (Sk/Gp conversion) and pixel density conversion processing, and forms normalization (Sk/Gp conversion) and pixel density conversion processing, and
accumulation to and reoutput from the DMS compression/decompression processing.
For image processing, it contains a 128K-word (24-bit) SRAM and a 1M-word (16-bit) It supports compression ratios of 1/2, 1/5, 1/10, and 1/20 and JPEG-compliant compression
DRAM. functions.
The data that is image-processed by the IMG board is written to the HDD and then read
from the HDD for output to the E I/F at high or standard resolution. CPU bus
High resolution or standard resolution is judged in an image transfer reservation response

from the output destination.
This information is stored for each DMS after boot-up.
Input image bus Input data
It should be noted that when a break status is detected on the line, the E I/F clear its
memory.
Image processing board (DMC08A)

Image output
Output data register
DMS External multiplexer
i/f SRAM
circuit
Output image bus
Address/
data bus Arithmetic
Compression/ FIFO
Interrupt B
Interrupt A decompression
gate array
BUS Pixel BUS Pixel

CON counter CON counter HCP08A Block Diagram
i/f i/f
HOST i/f circuit Input circuit Output
circuit register register register register
Image data Image
input data
output
BUSCON (output) BUSCON (input)
To motherboard

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ BSP08A Board ■ SNS08B Board
The BSP08A board performs an addition process for the front and back surface image data The SNS08B board controls I/O operations under host CPU control.
read by the scanner. Control from the host CPU is exercised via the host interface bus.
Sensor input related control is directly provided by the SNS08B board. However, drive
From SCN08C system I/O control is exercised by way of the DRV08B board driver, which is described later,
and the SNS08B board merely generates associated control signals.
Front image data The main functions are enumerated below.

• Host bus interface : x1
• Sensor input (x26)
Transmission photosensor (5 mm gap) : x6
Transmission photosensor (19 mm gap) : x6
From SCR08C
Initialization temperature control switch : x2
Multiplexer Illumination failure detection input: : x8
Back image data Controller Auxiliary input : x4
image • Drive system (x15)
data bus
Pulse motor control : x10
Subscanning motor : x1
DSP(56303) Erasure lamp ON/OFF : x2
+ Auxiliary output: : x2
Work RAM
Adder
Sensor input
Address signal circuit
Data signal Host bus interface
Control signal
DSP(56303) Interlock control
+
Work RAM
Pulse motor
Photocoupllerinterface
control circuit DRV08B
board
Auxiliary sensor
input Auxiliary input
4-bit Power-down
to SCR08C solenoid control
circuit
One FPGA Auxiliary output Auxiliary output Subscanning

2-bit
Photocoupllerinterface
motor control FFM board
+5V circuit x1 (FFM)
FR1H1103.EPS
Bucky control
Erasure inverter
Erasure
interface circuit x2
BSP08A Block Diagram inverter
Initialization
temperature
control switch x2
+ 5V power supply
Circuit breaker
SNS08B Block Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ DRV08B Board BLANK PAGE
The DRV08B board is capable of directly driving an actuator in the machine upon receipt of
a control signal from the sensor board named SNS08B.
The control signal from the SNS08B board is transmitted via the photocoupler interface.
The DRV08B board has ten driver (24 V) circuits for pulse motor drive.
SNS08B Pulse motor

Pulse train control Pulse motor driver
board signal
x10 circuits
Photocoupler interface circuit
Power-down signal Power-down control

circuit
DC-DC converter
DRV08B Block Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ SCN08C Board ● Shading correction
The SCN08C board, which is located between the MTH board and scanning optics/scanner
Shading correction is implemented in hardware to achieve high-speed processing.
unit, controls each I/O of the scanning optics/scanner unit in accordance with an instruction
from the MTH board. Analog image data sent from the PMT08A board (log amp board) is corrected for shading.
Polygon driver/laser/HV control is performed so that a start-point detection signal detected Shading correction compensates for differences in beam-collecting efficiency of the light-
by the SYN08A board and a leading-edge detection signal detected by the SED08C board collecting/scanning optics system in the main-scan direction.
are acquired as sync signals to control the image acquisition timing. Furthermore, as its self-
diagnostic function, image quasi-read control is implemented to generate a quasi-read LED ● Filtering
output voltage.
The image signal response is adjusted to achieve sharpness balance between main scan-
ning and subscanning.
For image acquisition, an analog image signal is inputted from the PMT08C board (log amp
board), and after shading correction and filtering, it is analog-to-digital (A/D) converted for
output to the IMG08A board (image processing board) as digital image data.
● Image signal acquisition

A block diagram, from input of an analog signal from the PMT08C board (log amp board) to
A/D conversion for output to the IMG08A board (image processing board), is illustrated
below. The digital image data acquired is transferred to the IMG08A board at high speed.
Quasi-reading
Input buffer Filter Output buffer
IMG board
Shading correction A/D conversion
Laser
PMT board Light-collecting guide
Scan over IP
Accelerated phosphorescence light is guided to PMT

Output level
by the light-collecting guide
PMT output signal in main-scan direction
Image Signal Acquisition Block Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● A/D converter ● Laser diode (LD) control
An analog image signal filtered is converted to a digital image by an A/D converter. Beam-intensity detection is performed for two lasers, so that if it is less than half the nominal
level, it is judged as a failure.
● Erasure level detection If either of the lasers experiences a light-emitting failure, it is reported as “insufficient laser
An erasure level signal is outputted from the PMT08C board and inputted into the SCN08C intensity” (user notification warning); if both of the lasers experience light-emitting failures,
board, where a maximum value within one screen is detected. they are handled as “laser error” (system down).
Because this signal is nonlinear, it is eventually converted to a dose by software-based table ● Error detection
correction.
The IP erasure time is determined according to this dose detected. The SCN08C board detects errors related to the polygon, LD, image signal, etc.
● HV control Error detection item Monitoring

Polygon A lock signal of the polygon motor (indicating that it rotates at a constant rate)
HV can artificially control the turn-ON/OFF of the output by use of a software switch of the is monitored.
Maintenance Utility and a slide switch (S1) located on the SCN08C board. Laser beam intensity The beam intensity of two LDs is monitored.
Start-point detection It is checked to see that a signal is generated at nominal timings.
This information is reported to the CPU, so that when HV is OFF, a dialog indicative of the Leading-edge detection
HV OFF status is displayed on the monitor. (during self-diagnostics) It is checked to see that a signal is detected upon incident laser beam.
The HV control signal is routed from the SCN08C to the PMT08C board. Leading-edge detection During a series of reading sequences, the time from the activation of
(during reading timeout) the subscanning motor to the generation of a leading-edge detection signal
This signal is outputted at an analog level of 0 (= OFF) – 10 V. (until the IP reaches its laser scanning position) is monitored.
The resulting output, multiplied by 100 (i.e., 0 V to -1000 V), is outputted as HV. End-of-screen timeout During a series of reading sequence, the time from the leading-edge
detection to the generation of an end signal is monitored.
● Quasi-read control HV power supply The output voltage and noise of the high-voltage power supply provided to
the PMT is monitored.
A troubleshooting signal is generated when an image anomaly occurs. It is checked if the power supply to the PMT08C board is normal.
PMT analog power supply
It is used to distinguish probable causes of the failure into either of scanning optics section,
light-collecting section (PMT/log amp), or scanner control board.
By selecting this mode and scanning an unexposed IP, a quasi-image signal can be gener-
ated from each selected point to check if a normal image is obtained.
“11. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
• With LIGHT, a fixed amount of light can be inputted to LED on the PMT board of the
light-collecting section to check if a normal solid image is obtained.
• With LOGAMP, a fixed amount of current can be inputted to the log amp on the PMT
board to check if a normal solid image is obtained.
• With SCN08INPUT, a fixed amount of voltage can be inputted to the scanner control
board to check if a normal solid image is obtained.
● Polygon control
After power-ON, the polygonal mirror is rotated.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ SCR08C Board
HVON (HV ON LED)
The board acts as an add-on board for the SCN08C board; it controls the back-side scanner This LED lights when both the hardware SW switch
unit and SNS08B board according to the commands from the SCN board. (S1 on the SCN08C board) and the software SW switch
are ON. The LED remains extinguished during a read operation.
The SCR08C board also captures the back-side analog image data from the PMR08C board
via the PHV08C board, and performs shading correction, filtering, and other processes on it SCN08C SOH (leading-edge detection check LED)
This LED is extinguished while an IP is at the SZ1 (IP leading-
before converting it to digital image data. edge sensor) position. If the LED goes off or comes on while
The board has nine LEDs mounted on it, so the signals can be visually observed. no IP is at the SZ1 position, check the lasers and SZ1.
S1
◆ NOTE ◆ SOS (start point detection check LED)
D23
SCR08C This LED lights to indicate that the start point detection signal is
The LEDs, other than D23 (HVON), are disabled unless HV (high-voltage switch) is normally generated. If the LED blinks (at long intervals) or remains
HVON extinguished, check the lasers and start point detection board.
turned OFF.
D15 SOH POLLOCK (polygon lock LED)
This LED lights to indicate that the polygon normally rotates
D14 SOS at a constant speed. If the LED remains extinguished or blinks,
check the polygon.
D13 POL LOCK PCLK (pixel clock check LED)
This LED lights to indicate that pixel clocks are generated
D12 PCLK during a read operation. If the LED remains extinguished,
check the lasers and SCN08C board.
D11 LCLK
LCLK (line clock check LED)
D10 FCLK This LED lights to indicate that line clocks are generated
during a read operation. If the LED remains extinguished,
D9 LD2OK check the lasers and SCN08C board.
D8 LD1OK
FCLK (frame clock check LED)
This LED lights to indicate that the lasers are performing a scan
for reading purposes. If the LED remains extinguished
when the IP leading-edge is detected (the leading-edge detection
check LED is extinguished), check the lasers and SCN08C board.
LD2OK (second laser check LED)

This LED lights to indicate that the second laser is normal.
If the LED is extinguished, check the second laser.
LD1OK (first laser check LED)

This LED lights to indicate that the first laser is normal.
If the LED is extinguished, check the first laser.
SCN08C
board
SCR08C board
FR1H2324.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ PMT08C/PMR08C Board ■ PHV08C Board
The PMT08C board is a logarithmic amplifier board for the front-side image. The PHV08C board is a logarithmic amplifier board for the front-side/back-side images, and
The PMR08C board is a logarithmic amplifier board for the back-side image. has a high-voltage power supply mounted on it.
These boards do not have a high-voltage power supply mounted on them, but include PHV08C
Bleeder (front)
pseudo-illumination (blue-color LED) function and pseudo-current input function. POUT1 HG 15VH/HG
HV1/HG HVSH1/L1
HV1
±12V/ ±15V/ LED
LEDH1L1 HVOKH1/L1
AGND Power supply AGND HV diagnostic
section PMT08C LEDONH1/L1 S
LED drive C
Power supply LEDSIGH1/L1
(front) N
diagnostic section 15V OKH/L
VIONH1/L1 VIONH1/L1
Anode output
15VOKH1/L1 15VOKH1/L1
50 Ω AG
LOG ERSH/L
coaxial drive PMTH
converter ERSH/L
section
±15V/AG ±15V/AG
Regulator
On-board analog circuit (±12V/AG)
Photomultiplier R1848-07
AGND VIONH2/L2 VIONH2/L2

AG
Erasure 15VOKH2/L2
ERSH 15VOKH2/L2
level signal
Offset current section PMT08C LEDONH2/L2 S
generator LEDH2/L2
LED drive C
(back) LEDSIGH2/L2 R
HV diagnostic
VIONH/L LED HVOKH2/L2
15VH2/HG2
HV2/HG
HV2
Bleeder circuit
POUT2 HG HVSH2/L2
HV Bleeder (back)
Power
supply
for HV
HG
FR1H2335.EPS
HG
LEDH
Blue-color
LED
LEDL
FR1H2334.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.8 General Description of Scanning Optics System Accelerated phosphorescence light emitted from a latent image due to laser beam irradiated
onto the latent image on the IP surface is collected by the light-collecting mirror, and the
IP excited light (660 nm laser light) is cut off by the filter mounted on the photomultiplier section,
and the resulting light is guided to the photomultiplier (PMT).
Heat sink duct
Scanner board Light source
Video board The dust-shield guide prevents dust deposits onto an area between the light-collecting
(POR laser)
Polygon
guide/mirror section and scanning optics unit.
Leading end sensor
(Reflection type) Laser light
Light-collecting mirror
Front surface
Optical base plate Light-collecting guide
Compact photomultiplier Light-collecting mirror

(rear surface)
IP surface
Accelerated Phosphorescence Light
Optics
Subscanning
(FFM located behind this) Light-collecting guide
Subscanning grip roller Photomultiplier Back surface
Compact photomultiplier Light-collecting guide FR4H7005.EPS
(front surface) FR1H2166.EPS
Accelerated Phosphorescence Light

Laser Irradiation
The laser beam reflected by the polygonal mirror passes through fθ lenses, and the laser
beam is irradiated by the reflective mirror onto the IP surface under the scanning optics unit.
Fθ lens
CYL
CYM Main-scan direction
Sub-scan direction
Direction of
subscanning
IP conveyance
Light-collecting
mirror
IP surface Front surface
Light-collecting guide IP leading end
Back surface
FR4H1104.EPS
Laser Irradiation onto IP

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.9 Elevation Unit ■ Oil piping diagram
■ Hydraulic circuit diagram

Cylinder
Cylinder
Down safety valve
Installed load
220kgf Down safety valve
Pump
FR
ON
T
Throttle valve
Solenoid valve
Relief valve Pump

65kgf/cm2 Solenoid valve
Solenoid
valve
assembly
Accumulators
Check valve
18 18
Accumulator Solenoid Oil tank
18kgf/cm2 valve
Relief valve
Pump Solenoid valve assembly
FR4H1216.EPS
Oil tank
Filter
FR4H1210.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Exposure Unit Ascent ■ Exposure Unit Descent
• Pump: ON • Solenoid pump: ON
• Solenoid valve: OFF • Pump: OFF
The cylinder ascends when the pump turns ON. To avoid drastic load application to the When the solenoid valve turns ON, the oil is delivered to the tank via the solenoid valve. The
cylinder, the accumulator cushions the shock that is caused upon pump ON. throttle valve positioned between the solenoid valve and tank adjusts the oil flow rate so that
the cylinder slowly descends.
up
Cylinder down
Cylinder
Down safety valve

Down safety valve
Installed load
220kgf Installed load
220kgf
Throttle valve
Throttle valve
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
ON
Relief valve
Relief valve
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
ON
Check valve
Check valve
18 18
18 18
Accumulator STOP
Accumulator
Pump
Pump
Oil tank
Oil tank
Filter
Filter
FR4H1211.EPS
FR4H1212.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Relief Valve Function ■ Sudden Cylinder Descent due to Abnormality (Joint or Hose Disconnection, etc.)
• Keeps the hydraulic pump pressure constant. If the cylinder begins to descend rapidly due, for instance, to joint or hose disconnection, the
• Functions so that the oil partly returns to the oil tank via the relief valve when the oil pres- down safety valve works to block the oil path, thereby causing the descending cylinder to
sure rises above 65 kgf/cm2. stop.
• Assures that the oil is supplied to the cylinder under a constant pressure. If the down safety valve actuates, locate and eliminate the cause of abnormality, and raise
the exposure/reader unit. When you move the exposure/reader unit upward, the down safety
Cylinder valve resets, thereby permitting the cylinder to descend.
Cylinder
Down safety valve
Installed load Down safety valve

220kgf ON
Installed load
220kgf
Throttle valve (Example)

Joint or hose
Solenoid valve Throttle valve disconnection
or other abnormality
Solenoid valve
Relief valve
Solenoid valve
ON Relief valve
Solenoid valve
Check valve
Check valve
18 18
Accumulator
18 18
Accumulator
Pump
Pump
Oil tank
Oil tank
Filter
FR4H1213.EPS
Filter
FR4H1214.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8. Mechanical Control Flows 8.2 Routine (Normal Conveyance) Operations

There are up to two IPs within the CR-IR344. While no conveyance operation is performed,
This section explains about mechanical control flows during normal IP conveyance, utility one IP is in the exposure position with the other one placed in the erasure standby position.
processing, and initialization.
If any abnormality occurs in the machine, note the displayed error code, refer to the associ-
ated flow in this chapter, and troubleshoot the machine from the viewpoint of mechanical
control.
This chapter is divided into the following subsections.
Exposure position Erasure
• Routine (normal conveyance) operations standby
position
• Utility processing
• Initialization processing
8.1 How to Use the Control Flows

START : Start of sequence
: Normal processing
: IP FR1H2316.EPS
: Normal processing, Timer start (Timeout detection start point) This section mainly describes the conveyance of an IP in the exposure position.
: Parallel operation
N : Decision block
Y
: Subroutine name
: Message display
XXXX : Occurrence of error
END : End of sequence
TA11 : Timer value or timeout value

Number (serial number)
Unit number (A, B, D through F, Z)
NA51 : Retry value

Unit number (A, D, Z)
PA11 : Control parameter for pulse motor

Unit number (A, B, D, F, Z)
FR1H2147.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.2.1 IP Conveyance Operation Overview 8.2.2 Details of IP Conveyance Operation

The IP conveyance operation is outlined below. The IP in the exposure position is referred to
as the first IP, whereas the IP in the erasure standby position is referred to as the second IP. ● Fig. 1-02 Operation 1 in IP positioning unit
The IP positioning unit guide (tray) is lowered from the exposure position to the conveyance
● Fig. 1-01 Flow of IP conveyance operation
position.
START Normal conveyance (first IP)
Exposure (SHOT) START From "● Fig. 01"
(1) The guide (tray) of the IP positioning unit is lowered end signal
from the exposure position to the conveyance Operation 1 in IP positioning unit Z From "● Fig. 1-12"
position. "● Fig. 1-02 Operation 1 in IP positioning unit" Upon receipt of
the exposure end Is the exposure end signal received?
(2) An IP is lifted up to the conveyance roller position and signal, N
Conveyance to scanner unit
then conveyed to the scanner unit by the conveyance IP conveyance
Y
rollers. "● Fig. 1-04 Conveyance to scanner unit" Verification of Bucky Home Position
starts.
Is the Bucky in home position (SA3 closed)?
(3) The IP reading Verification of N
Reading conveyance Y
conveyance operation is performed. Bucky home
"● Fig. 1-05 Reading conveyance" positioning Bucky home positioning
(4) The IP is conveyed to the scanner after-reading "● Fig. 1-03"
conveyor. Scanner after-reading conveyance
"● Fig. 1-07 Scanner after-reading conveyance"
IP positioning unit guide open
(5) The IP is conveyed to the before-erasure
Before-erasure conveyor and erasure conveyor
conveyor and then to the erasure conveyor.
"● Fig. 1-08 Before-erasure conveyor and The MA1 is driven by PA11 (-655 pulses).
erasure conveyor"
(6) The erasure conveyance operation
Erasure conveyance
is performed for the IP. Is the IP positioning unit guide in home position (SA1 closed)?
"● Fig. 1-09 Erasure conveyance" The MA1 is driven N
to lower the IP Y
(7) The erasure standby conveyance positioning unit
Erasure standby conveyance
operation is performed for the IP. guide from the
"● Fig. 1-10 Erasure standby conveyance" exposure IP positioning unit guide home
(8) The IP is conveyed to the IP positioning unit. position to the positioning
Conveyance to IP positioning unit conveyance position. "● Fig. 1-13"
"● Fig. 1-11 Conveyance to IP positioning unit"
(9) The IP positioning unit guide is raised from
Operation 2 in IP positioning unit
the conveyance position to the exposure
position. "● Fig. 1-12 Operation 2 in IP positioning unit" Is a signal delivered to indicate
Signaling occurs whether the IP can be ejected from
END
FR1H2100.EPS when the SE1 the IP positioning unit?
closes. N
Y
From "● Fig. 1-18"
The diagram below shows how the IP in the exposure unit is conveyed. Parenthesized
END SA1: IP positioning home position sensor
numbers correlate to the numbers within parentheses in Figure 1-01. SA3: Bucky home position sensor
MA1: IP positioning drive motor
Path changeover
conveyor
SB3 (7) FR1H1209.EPS
<IP positioning unit guide movement>

(8) IP positioning unit guide
SB1 SB2 home position
(2) Exposure position (SA1 closed)
(9)
(1)
Erasure SA1
SZ3 conveyor
Scanner
(3) unit
IP Guide IP
IP positioning
unit SZ1
SF1
(6)
(4)
MA1
SE1
Scanner after-reading (5) SD1 Before-erasure
conveyor conveyor FR1H2010.EPS Guide
FR1H2303.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-03 Bucky home positioning ● Fig. 1-04 Conveyance to scanner unit
Bucky home positioning From "● Fig. 02" The IP is lifted to the conveyance roller position.
The conveyance rollers transport the IP to the scanner unit.
The MA3 (Bucky) is driven by PA31 (0x7FFFFF pulses).
Conveyance to scanner From "● Fig. 1-01"
Is the Bucky in home position (SA3 opened → closed)?
N
Y
If the SA3 does not close within TA31 (1.16 sec),
The MA3 (Bucky) is electrically stopped. the MA3 (Bucky) is stopped by software. The MB1 and MB2 are driven by PB11 (2320 pulses) and PB21 The MA2 is driven by PA21
(37120 pulses), respectively, for IP conveyance. (400 pulses) to lift the IP from
03BD the IP positioning unit to the
Is the IP conveyed from the IP positioning unit to the path
IP conveyance roller position.
Is the SA3 closed? SA3: Bucky home position changeover conveyor (SB1 closed)?
N N
Y sensor Y
MA3: Bucky drive motor If the IP is not conveyed within TB11 (1.39 sec)
03A0 (SB1 does not close), the MB1 and MB2 are stopped
END
FR1H2128.EPS by software.
MB2 operation monitoring starts.
SHOT permitted SHOT end notification
ID information acquisition Conveyance start If the MB2 stops
03A2
during this period
SHOT Ready
SHOT button OFF Is the IP conveyed to the scanner unit
SHOT button ON (SZ3 closed)?
N
Y
SHOT Go after
STOP STOP If the IP is not conveyed to the scanner unit within TZ31
hardware delay
(software management) time-out
MOVE (1.55 sec) (SZ3 does not close), the MB1 and MB2
Motor drive stop interrupt The MB1 and MB2 are stopped by software.
OFF
are stopped
X-ray SHOT
(electrical management) When the SA3 closes for the first time by software. MB2 operation monitoring ends.
ON
after SHOT OFF, the hardware brings
the MA3 to a LIMIT stop.
03A4
LIMIT (software/electrical STOP
Motor drive soft start Motor drive hard start The hardware LIMIT stop is canceled Is the IP really conveyed to the scanner unit
management) MOVE The motor does not actually rotate. The motor actually rotates. by software.
The IP is conveyed from (SZ3 closed)?
N
the IP positioning unit to Y
ACTIVE
MA3 the path changeover conveyor The MB1 and MB2 are driven by PB13 (8000 pulses)
STOP and scanner unit. and PB23 (18000 pulses), respectively, to convey the IP
again to the scanner unit.
CLOSE
SA3 Open
23E1
Bucking operation timing diagram FR1H2145.EPS

Is the IP conveyed to the scanner unit
(SZ3 closed)?
N
Y
<Bucky mechanism> If the IP is not conveyed
to the scanner unit within
The IP conveyance TZ13 (20.00 sec) (SZ3
(MB1 and MB2) to the scanner does not close), the MB7
IP positioning unit and MB2 are stopped
unit is stopped.
by software.
When SA3 is closed CMOS information: IP present in scanner unit
03E1
Grid
SA3
The IP conveyance (MB1 and MB2)
MA3
to the scanner unit is stopped.
Is the IP lift mechanism of the IP positioning unit

in the home position (SA2 closed)?
N
Y
Grid IP lift home positioning SA2: IP lift home position sensor
"● Fig. 1-14" SB1: Positioning unit entry IP sensor
FR1H2304.EPS
SZ3: Before-reading IP sensor
A A signal is issued to indicate that the IP can be conveyed to MA2: IP lift drive motor
the IP positioning unit. MB1: IP conveyance motor
To "● Fig. 1-10/1-11" MB2: IP conveyance motor
END
FR1H1200.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
<IP conveyance> ● Fig. 1-05 Reading conveyance
MB2
MB1 The reading conveyance operation is performed for the IP.
SB1
Reading conveyance From "● Fig. 01"
After-reading conveyance
Subscanning grip descent grip ascent
The MZ2 is driven by PZ22 (110 pulses). The MD2 is driven by PD21
IP positioning unit (-114 pulses) to release the
For reading conveyance, Is the subscanning grip roller in home scanner after-reading
SZ3 the IP is nipped by the position (SZ2 closed)? conveyor grip.
subscanning unit grip roller. N
Y
The scanner after-reading
conveyor grip is released
Subscanning grip home to accept the IP.
positioning
"● Fig. 1-16"
Is a signal delivered to indicate whether

a scanner read operation can be
: IP performed? Signal indicating that
N
FR1H2305.EPS Y B the SE1 is now open
From "● Fig. 1-09"
<IP lift mechanism of IP positioning unit> To "● Fig. 1-09" C The erasure lamps are extinguished. Reading
MB2/1-2 phase forced zero return
IP positioning unit The MB2 is driven by PB22

(1698 pulses) to convey the IP. The MZ1 is driven to convey the IP.
IP Shaft A
MB2/1-2 phase Is an interrupting signal fed from the scanner board to indicate
forced zero return that an IP is conveyed to the SZ1 position (SZ1 closed)
MA2 and is an IP conveyed to the scanner after-reading conveyor
(SD1 opened → closed)?
N N
IP lift bracket Y
The MZ1 is stopped by software
If the SD1 does not if an interrupting signal is not fed
close within TD11 to indicate SZ1 closure
(12.56 sec), the MZ1 within TZ11 (13.06 sec).
SA2 is stopped by software.
Shaft A
03A5 03A6
Wait for processing for

TZ12 (1.00 sec)
MA2
Screen end interrupt
(Interruption from scanner board)
W.F. monitoring
"● Fig. 1-06"
FR1H2306.EPS
Wait for processing for TZ14 (0.00 sec)
The MZ1 is stopped by software to end the IP reading conveyance.
END
SD1: After-reading IP sensor
SE1: Before-erasure entry IP sensor
SZ1: IP leading-edge sensor
The path changeover conveyor and subscanning MB2: IP conveyance motor
unit (scanner unit) motors are driven to perform MD2: Grip release motor
the IP reading conveyance operation. MZ1: Subscanning motor
MZ2: Subscanning grip motor
FR1H1201.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
<Subscanning grip mechanism (grip operation)> <After-reading grip mechanism (grip release operation)>
Grip released Gripped Gripped Grip released
MD2 Gear
MZ3 Grip roller
Rubber rollers
Grip arms
SZ2
Shaft A
Timing belt
Actuator Guide Retained

Rotates to
this position.
Gear
SD2
Shaft A
Actuator
FR1H2173.EPS
<IP reading conveyance>

MB2

the center of the timing belt
pulley shaft. Rotation occurs
around this arm.
FR1H2172.EPS
Scanner unit
MZ1
SZ1
SD1
: IP
FR1H2307.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-06 W.F. monitoring ● Fig. 1-07 Scanner after-reading conveyance
W.F. monitoring From "● Fig. 05" The IP is transported to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
W.F. monitoring latch reset Scanner after-reading conveyance From "● Fig. 1-01"
(to SNS board) After-reading conveyance grip down
Timer START
The MD2 is driven by PD22 (114 pulses).
The IP is nipped by the
scanner after-reading
W.F. abnormal? conveyor grip roller to Is the after-reading conveyor grip roller in home position (SD2 closed)?
N convey it into the N
Y Y After-reading conveyor grip home
(from SNS board) scanner after-reading positioning
conveyor. "● Fig. 1-15"
Timer data recording
FFM drive W.F. hunting Error log only Subscanning grip up

To prepare for the
W.F. monitoring latch reset subsequent IP The MZ2 is driven by PZ21 (-110 pulses)
(to SNS board) acceptance, the to release the subscanning unit grip.
subscanning unit grip
roller grip is released.
Screen end interrupt? After-reading conveyance
N
Y
MD1 operation monitoring starts.
END If the MD1 The MD1 is driven by PD11 (0x7FFFFF pulses) to convey the IP
FR1H1202.EPS
stops during to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
this period
Is the IP conveyed to the scanner after-reading conveyor (SD1 opened)?
N
Y
The IP is conveyed
to the scanner The MD1 is stopped by hardware to stop the IP If the SD1 does not open
after-reading conveyor. conveyance operation. within TD12 (3.00 sec),
Wait for processing for PD11 (0x7FFFFF pulses). the MD1 is stopped
by software.
The MD1
is stopped 03A7
by software. MD1 operation monitoring ends.
Is the IP really conveyed to the scanner

after-reading conveyor (SD1 opened)?
N
Y
The MD1 is driven by PD13 (4800 pulses) to convey
the IP again to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
23E2
Is the IP conveyed to the scanner after-reading

conveyor (SD1 opened)?
N
Y If the IP is not conveyed
to the scanner
after-reading conveyor
The IP conveyance (MD1) to within TD13 (12.00 sec)
the scanner after-reading (SD1 does not open),
conveyor is stopped. the MD1 is stopped
by software.
03E2
END SD1: After-reading IP sensor

MD1: IP conveyance motor
MD2: Grip release motor
MZ2: Subscanning grip motor
FR1H1203.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
<Subscanning grip mechanism (grip release operation)> <After-reading grip mechanism (grip operation)>
Gripped Grip released Grip released Gripped
MD2 Gear
Grip arms Grip roller

MZ3 SZ3
Rubber rollers
SZ2
Shaft A
Timing belt
Guide Retained
Actuator Rotates to
this position.
Gear
SD2
Shaft A
Actuator
FR1H2175.EPS
<IP conveyance>

the center of the timing belt
pulley shaft. Rotation occurs
around this arm.
FR1H2174.EPS
Scanner
after-reading
conveyance
MD1
SD1
: IP
FR1H2308.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-08 Before-erasure conveyor and erasure conveyor <IP conveyance>
The IP is transported to the before-erasure conveyor and erasure conveyor.
Before-erasure conveyor and erasure conveyor From "● Fig. 1-01"

Erasure conveyor
Is a signal delivered to indicate whether the IP can be
conveyed to the erasure conveyor? MF1
D N Scanner
Y
From "● Figure 1-11" Conveyance to erasure unit after-reading SF1
conveyor
MF1 operation monitoring starts. Before-erasure
conveyor
Upon receipt of the "conveyance to positioning unit" PF15 end signal,
the MD1 and MF1 are driven by PD12 (-2784 pulses) Section A
If the MF1 and PF12 (7424 pulses), respectively, to convey the IP
stops during to the before-erasure conveyor.
this period
Is the IP conveyed to the before-erasure conveyor (SE1 closed)? MD1
N
Y SE1
: IP
FR1H2309.EPS
To "● Fig. 1-02" If the SE1 does not close
CMOS information: IP present in erasure unit
within TE11 (1.46 sec),
the MD1 and MF1 are stopped
by software.
Positioning unit conveyance = True
03A8
The IP is conveyed
from the scanner
after-reading
conveyor to Is the IP conveyed to the erasure conveyor (SF1 closed)?
the before-erasure N
Y
conveyor and
erasure conveyor. The MF1 is stopped to stop the IP conveyance operation. If the SF1 does not close within
TF13 (1.20 sec), the MD1 and
The MD1 is stopped to stop the IP conveyance operation. MF1 are stopped by software.
The MF1
is stopped 03A9
by software. MF1 operation monitoring ends.
Is the IP really conveyed to the erasure

conveyor (SF1 closed)?
N
Y
The MD1 and MF1 are driven by PD14 (-1432 pulses)
The SE1 is monitored and PF16 (10000 pulses), respectively, to convey the IP again
during this period to the erasure conveyor.
(retry process)
to perform the 23E3
Section A Is the IP conveyed to the erasure conveyor

process in a parallel (SF1 closed)?
N
manner. Y
If the IP is not conveyed
to the erasure conveyor
The IP conveyance within TF14 (20.00 sec)
(MD1 and MF1) to the erasure (SF1 does not close), the MD1
conveyor is stopped. and MF1 are stopped
by software.
03E3
END SE1: Before-erasure entry IP sensor

SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
MF1: IP conveyance motor
FR1H1204.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-09 Erasure Conveyance ● Fig. 1-10 Erasure standby conveyance
The erasure conveyance operation is performed for the IP. The erasure standby conveyance operation is performed for the IP.
Erasure standby
While the erasure lamps are illuminated, Erasure From "● Fig. 01" conveyance
From "● Fig. 01"
the IP is conveyed to erase the IP image data. Erasure Is a signal delivered to indicate that the IP can be conveyed
to the IP positioning unit?
MB3/2W1-2 phase forced zero return To "● Fig. 1-11" F Y A
N
From "● Fig. 1-04"
MF1/2W1-2 phase forced zero return
Erasure standby conveyance

Erasure lamps lit
The MB3 and MF1 are driven by Wait for processing for TF12 (0.10 sec)
N or erasure conveyance
Y PB33 (10736 pulses) and PF13
is finished? N
(21472 pulses), respectively, to perform Y The MB3 and MF1 are driven by PB34 (-716 pulses) and
Has the IP passed If the IP cannot be conveyed PF14 (-1432 pulses), respectively, to put the IP on standby
Erasure conveyance the IP erasure conveyance operation. through the entry to the IP positioning unit due, within the erasure conveyor.
is finished. of erasure conveyor for instance, to the presence
Is the IP conveyed to the path Wait for processing for PF14 (-1432 pulses)
(SE1 closed → of another IP in the IP
changeover conveyor (SB2 closed)? opened)? positioning unit, it is returned Is the IP present at the erasure conveyor entry
N (SF1 closed)?
Y to the erasure standby position. N
The erasure lamps are extinguished. Y
MB3/2-phase forced zero return 03AB Read start signal 03AD
transmission
B
03AC MF1/2-phase forced zero return
To "● Fig. 05"
END SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
Wait for processing for TF11 (1.46 sec)
MB3: IP conveyance motor
Are the erasure lamps illuminated?
C N
Y FR1H1206.EPS
From "● Fig. 05"
The erasure lamps are extinguished. <IP conveyance to erasure standby position>
MB3
END
SB2: Path changeover unit IP sensor
MF1: IP conveyance motor Erasure conveyor
FR1H1205.EPS
IP: Erasure standby
position
<Erasure conveyance> Path changeover conveyor MF1
MB3
SF1
SB2
Erasure lamp
Erasure conveyor
MF1
Scanner
after-reading : IP FR1H2311.EPS
conveyance
: IP FR1H2310.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-11 Conveyance to IP positioning unit ● Fig. 1-12 Operation 2 in IP positioning unit
The IP is conveyed to the IP positioning unit. The IP positioning unit guide is raised from the conveyance position to the exposure position.
Conveyance to IP positioning unit From "● Fig. 01"

Operation 2
START in IP positioning unit
From "● Fig. 01"
Normal conveyance (second IP)
IP positioning unit guide closed

Is a signal delivered to indicate that the IP can be conveyed
to the IP positioning unit?
N A Wait for processing for TA55 (0.20 sec)
Y
From "● Fig. 1-04"
When the IP is conveyed to
F the IP positioning unit, The MA1 is driven by PA12 (655 pulses)
From "● Fig. 1-10" Conveyance to IP positioning unit the guide is raised to the to shift the IP positioning unit from the
exposure position. exposure position to the conveyance position.
Wait for processing for TB14 (0.10 sec)
Z
To "● Fig. 1-02"
The MF1 is driven
The MB3 and MB1 are driven by PB35 (0x7FFFFF pulses) by PF15 END
and PB15 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, to convey the IP (848 pulses)
to the IP positioning unit.
to convey the IP
to the IP positioning
Is IP conveyance to IP positioning unit started (SB3 closed → opened)? unit. Exposure (SHOT) permitted
N
Y
If the SB3 does not open within
The IP is conveyed TB12 (2.29 sec), the MB1 and SA1: IP positioning home position sensor
the IP positioning CMOS information: IP present MB3 are stopped by software. MA1: IP positioning drive motor
unit. in positioning unit
03AF
FR1H1208.EPS
Is IP conveyance to IP positioning unit

completed (SB1 closed → opened)?
N <Exposure unit guide mechanism>
Y
If the SB1 does not open within SA1 sensor light-shielding plate
TB13 (1.64 sec), the MB1 and
D A signal is issued to indicate that the IP MB3 are stopped by software.
can be conveyed. SA1
To "● Fig. 1-08"
The MB1 and MB3 are stopped by 03B0
software.
END SB1: Positioning unit entry IP sensor

MB3: IP conveyance motor IP
SB3: Confluence unit IP sensor
FR1H1207.EPS Pinion gear
<IP conveyance>
MB1 SB3 MB3
SB1
MA1
IP positioning unit
MF1
FR1H2313.EPS
: IP
FR1H2312.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Home Positioning <Positioning unit guide home positioning>
Home position detection preliminary
● Fig. 1-13 Positioning unit guide home positioning IP positioning unit side plate advance
Positioning unit guide Actuator

home positioning From “● Fig. 1-02”
SA1 center
Motor/2-phase forced zero return
The MA1 is subjected to 2-phase 1-pulse drive by PA50 (1 pulse) for driver initialization.
Motor/2W1-2 phase forced zero return Side SA1

plate
Wait for processing for TA51 (0.50 sec)
SA1 open?
N
Y
Home position detection preliminary advance Home position detection preliminary
The MA1 is driven by PA53 (0xFFFFFF pulses) backing
to advance toward the home position.
SA1 closed?
N
Y SA1 center
If the SA1 does not close MA1
The MA1 is stopped within TA53 (3.60 sec),
by software. the MA1 is stopped by software.
Wait for processing 23B5
for TA51 (0.50 sec)
Home position detection preliminary backing
The MA1 is driven by PA51 (0x7FFFFF pulses)

to get back toward the home position.
Home position detection
SA1 opened?
N
Y
The MA1 is stopped by software
The MA1 is stopped if the SA1 does not open SA1 center
by software. within TA52 (1.10 sec).
Wait for processing 23B6
for TA51 (0.50 sec)
The MA1 is driven by PA52 (-1 pulse).
SA1 closed within TA54 (15.00 sec)? FR1H2176.EPS

Y
N
If the SA1 is closed, the motor
is subjected to 2-phase forced
zero return.
Wait for processing for TA51
(0.50 sec)
The MA1 is driven by PA54
(-15 pulses) to reach the home
position.
(0.50 sec)
SA1 close?
N
Y SA1: IP positioning home
position sensor
MA1: IP positioning drive motor
23B4
Preselected retry count (NA51: 3)

N exceeded?
Y
END 03B4
FR1H2112.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-14 IP lift home positioning <IP lift home positioning>
IP lift home positioning From “● Fig. -04”

Home position detection preliminary
advance
The MA2 is subjected to 2-phase 1-pulse drive by PA60 (-1 pulse) for driver initialization. SA2
Motor/2W1-2 phase forced zero return

SA2 center
Wait for processing for TA61 (0.50 sec)
SA2 open?
N
Y Home position detection preliminary advance Actuator
Shaft A
The MA2 is driven by PA63 (0x7FFFFF pulses)
to advance toward the home position.
IP positioning unit
SA2 closed?
N Home position detection preliminary
Y
The MA2 is stopped by software Shaft A backing
The MA2 is stopped if the SA2 does not close IP
by software. within TA63 (6.80 sec). SA2 SA2 center
Wait for processing
for TA61 (0.50 sec) 23B2
IP lift bracket
The MA2 is driven by PA61 (0xFFFFFF pulses) MA2

to get back toward the home position.
SA2 opened? SA2

N
Y
The MA2 is stopped The MA2 is stopped by software Shaft A
by software. if the SA2 does not open
within TA62 (1.10 sec). SA2
Actuator
Wait for processing
'for TA61 (0.50 sec) 23B3
MA2 SA2 center
The MA2 is subjected to 1-pulse drive by PA62 (1 pulse).
SA2 closed within TA64 (15.00 sec)?

Y FR1H2177.EPS
N
If the SA2 is closed, the motor
zero return.
(0.50 sec)
The MA2 is driven by PA64
(3 pulses) to reach the home
position.
(0.50 sec)
SA2 close?
N
Y
SA2: IP lift home position sensor

23B1 MA2: IP lift drive motor
Preselected retry count

N
Y (NA61: 3) exceeded?
END 03B1
FR1H2116.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-15 After-reading conveyor grip home positioning <After-reading conveyor grip home positioning>
Home position detection preliminary advance
After-reading conveyor
grip home positioning From “● Fig. -07”
The MD2 is subjected to 2-phase 1-pulse drive by PD60 (-1 pulse) for driver initialization.

SD2
SD2 center
Wait for processing for TD61 (0.50 sec)
SD2 open? Actuator

N
Y
The MD2 is driven by PD63 (0x7FFFFF pulses) to advance

toward the home position.
SD2 closed? Scanner
N
Y after-reading
conveyor Home position detection preliminary backing
The MD2 is stopped by software
The MD2 is stopped
if the SD2 does not close
by software.
within TD63 (1.80 sec).
Wait for processing
for TD61 (0.50 sec) 23B8
The MD2 is driven by PD61 (0xFFFFFF pulses) to get back

SD2 opened?
N
Y
The MD2 is stopped by software

The MD2 is stopped
if the SD2 does not open
by software. Home position detection
within TD62 (1.10 sec).
Wait for processing
for TD61 (0.50 sec) 23B9
The MD2 is subjected to 1-pulse drive by PD62 (1 pulse).
SD2 closed within TD64 (15.00 sec)?

Y
N
If the SD2 is closed, the motor
zero return.
FR1H2178.EPS
Wait for processing for TD61
(0.50 sec)
The MD2 is driven by PD64
position.
Wait for processing for TD61
(0.50 sec)
SD2 close?
N
Y
SD2: Grip release home position
sensor
23B7
MD2: Grip release motor
N
Y Preselected retry count (ND61: 3)
exceeded?
END 03B7
FR1H2120.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 1-16 Subscanning grip home positioning <Subscanning grip home positioning>
Subscanning grip From “● Fig. -05” SZ2 SZ2 center
home positioning
Actuator
The MZ2 is subjected to 2-phase 1-pulse drive by PZ60 (-1 pulse) for driver initialization.
SZ2 opened?
N
Y Home position detection preliminary advance
The MZ2 is driven by PZ63 (0x7FFFFF pulses) to advance
SZ2 closed?
N
Y
The MZ2 is stopped by software
The MZ2 is stopped
if the SZ2 does not open
by software.
within TZ63 (2.60 sec).
Wait for processing
for TZ61 (0.50 sec) 23BB
T
Home position detection preliminary backing ON
FR
The MZ2 is driven by PZ61 (0xFFFFFF pulses) to get back Scanner unit
SZ2 opened?
N
Y
The MZ2 is stopped The MZ2 is stopped by software

by software. if the SZ2 does not open
within TZ62 (1.10 sec).
Wait for processing
for TZ61 (0.50 sec) 23BC
FR1H2179.EPS
The MZ2 is subjected to 1-pulse drive by PZ62 (1 pulse).
SZ2 closed within TZ64 (15.00 sec)?

Y
N
If the SZ2 is closed, the motor
zero return.
Wait for processing for TZ61
(0.50 sec)
The MZ2 is driven by PZ64
position.
Wait for processing for TZ61
(0.50 sec)
SZ2 close?
N
Y
SZ2: Subscanning grip release
home position sensor
23BA MZ2: Subscanning grip motor
N Preselected retry count (NZ61: 3)

Y exceeded?
END 03BA
FR1H2124.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.3 Utility Processing ■ IP change

In “conveyance to scanner” during the primary erasure process, IP checkout is performed
according to SB1 detection.
■ Primary erasure
The same operation is performed as for normal conveyance except that no image output is ● Fig. 2-02 IP change
generated. IP change
■ Overdose degeneration conveyance Wait for processing for TA11 (0.50 sec)
The same operation is performed as for normal conveyance.
The MA1 is driven by PA13 (-73 pulses) to
Since no image output is generated, a high-speed conveyance operation is performed in the place the positioning unit at the IP loading position.
scanner unit without performing any read operation, and a conveyance operation is per-
formed in the erasure conveyor at the same speed as secondary erasure without illuminating IP change completion input from user?
N
the erasure lamps. Y
The MA1 is driven by PA14 (73 pulses) to place

● Fig. 2-01 Reading (overdose degeneration conveyance) the IP change guide in the home position.
Reading (overdose
degeneration conveyance) Wait for processing for PA14 (-73 pulses)
Primary erasure process (see note below)

MB2/1-2 phase forced zero return "■ Primary erasure"
The MB2 is driven Two IPs changed?

The MZ1 is driven at high speed to perform a reading N
conveyance operation. by PB22 (424 pulses) Y MA1: IP positioning drive motor
to perform a reading
conveyance operation. END
IP conveyed to the scanner after-reading MB2/1-2 phase forced

conveyor (SD1 closed)? zero return NOTE: If the “TB11 out” condition occurs in the “Conveyance to scanner (● Fig. 1-04)” sequence
N for primary erasure process, an error (03A2) does not occur but the machine continuously performs
Y the process while concluding that no IP is in the target position. Further, the machine transports
If the SD1 does not close within the IP in the erasure conveyor to the IP positioning unit.
TD11 (6.85 sec), the MZ1 is FR1H2133.EPS
stopped by software.
03A5
The MZ1 is stopped to halt IP conveyance.

Wait for processing for TZ15 (0.30 sec) MB2: IP conveyance motor
MZ1: Subscanning motor
END
FR1H2134.EPS
■ Continuous primary erasure

The same operation as for primary erasure is continuously performed.
■ Continuous secondary erasure

The same operation as for overdose degeneration conveyance is continuously performed.
Erasure lamp ON/OFF can be user-controlled. The timing of lamp control to be exercised
when the erasure lamps are ON is the same as for normal conveyance.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Transition to cassette exposure and restoration to normal conveyance 8.4 Initialization Processing
● Fig. 2-03 Transition to cassette exposure This section explains about the operations performed for initialization upon machine startup.
This process is performed in the cassette exposure mode (optional).
When the user makes an entry to designate the cassette exposure mode, the IP in the 8.4.1 Initialization Operation Overview
exposure position is conveyed to the scanner unit (before-reading position). The IP in the
erasure standby position is not conveyed. For initialization purposes, the following processes are performed.
Transition to cassette
❍ Home positioning of individual mechanisms
exposure ❍ Erasure lamp temperature control
The IP in the positioning unit is conveyed to ❍ IP search
the scanner unit (the first IP is stopped just ❍ IP position information confirmation
before being read in normal process and the
second IP remains on erasure standby). ❍ Residual IP erasure
Transition to cassette exposure
● Fig. 3-01 Details of initialization operations
END
FR1H2136.EPS
Initialization
● Fig. 2-04 Restoration to normal conveyance
When the user makes an entry to exit the cassette exposure mode, the IP in the erasure Subscanning grip home
positioning Erasure lamp illumination
standby position is conveyed to the exposure position. The IP in the scanner unit is sub- “● Fig. 1-16”
jected to the primary erasure process and conveyed to the erasure standby position. After-reading conveyor
grip home positioning Wait for processing for TF51 (5.00 sec)
Restoration to normal “● Fig. 1-15”
conveyance Positioning unit guide “8.2.2 Details of IP
home positioning Conveyance Operation
The IP in the erasure unit is conveyed “● Fig. 1-13” ■ Home Positioning" Illumination failure detected
to the positioning unit. The IP in the or temperature control switch
scanner unit is conveyed to the erasure Bucky home positioning (TSWF2) turned OFF?
unit. However, processing is performed “● Fig. 1-03”
in the primary erasure mode.
The IPs are interchanged in the primary BRS IP search The TSWF2 The TSWF2 did not Illumination failure
erasure mode. “● Fig. 3-02” turned OFF. turn OFF within TF52 detected.
The system returns to the normal (80.00 sec).
BRS IP position information confirmation
conveyance mode. “● Fig. 3-11”
END BRS IP position restoration
FR1H2137.EPS
“● Fig. 3-12”
The MZ2 is driven by PZ21 (-110 pulses) Erasure lamp Erasure lamp
to release the subscanning unit grip. extinguishment extinguishment
Operation 2 in positioning unit 03C0

“● Fig. 1-12”
Continuous primary erasure (of two IPs) (see note below)

“8.3 Utility Processing”
END MZ2: Subscanning grip motor
NOTE: The scanner, electrical, and laser systems must be completely initialized.
FR1H2138.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.4.2 Initialization Processing ● Fig. 3-03 Erasure unit IP search

The path changeover conveyor-to-erasure conveyor IP transport sequence is performed to
● Fig. 3-02 IP search check whether the IP is conveyed to the erasure conveyor.
This sequence is performed to confirm the IP locations in the machine. Erasure unit
From “● Fig. 3-02”
IP search
BRS IP search From "● Fig. 3-01" The MB3 is driven by PB73 (0x7FFFFF pulses)
for IP conveyance to the erasure conveyor.
Is the IP missing from the SF1 or SE1
position (SF1 and SE1 both open)?
N IP conveyed to the erasure conveyor
Y (SF1 opened → closed)?
N
Is the IP missing from the SB2 or SB3 Y
Erasure unit
N position (SB2 and SB3 both open)? IP search
Y The MB3 is stopped If the SF1 does not close within TB53 (1.02 sec),
Erasure unit IP by software. the MB3 is stopped by software.
Erasure unit IP search transport
"● Fig. 3-03" "● Fig. 3-04"
IP present No IP
Is the missing from the SD1 and SZ3 in the erasure unit in the erasure unit
positions (SD1 and SZ3 both open)?
Y SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
N
Reader unit MB3: IP conveyance motor
Reader unit IP IP transport END
Switchback unit IP search transport
"● Fig. 3-05" "● Fig. 3-06" FR1H2167.EPS
Is the missing from the SB1 and SB3

positions (SB1 and BS3 both open)?
N
Y
Confluence unit IP search

"● Fig. 3-07"
Patch
N Is the IP missing from the SF1 position (SF1 open)? changeover
Y conveyor
Is the missing from the SB2 and SB3 IP search
positions (SB2 and SB3 both open)?
N
Y
Confluence unit IP transport

"● Fig. 3-08"
Is the IP missing from the SB1 position (SB1 open)?

N
Y
IP positioning unit IP search
"● Fig. 3-09"
IP found
No IP found IP
IP lift home positioning positioning
"● Fig. 1-14" unit IP
IP lift home positioning search
IP positioning unit IP transport
"● Fig. 1-14" "● Fig. 3-10"
END
SB2: Path changeover unit IP sensor

SB3: Confluence unit IP sensor
SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
FR1H2139.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 3-04 IP conveyance to erasure unit ● Fig. 3-05 Switchback unit IP search
The scanner after-reading conveyor-to-erasure conveyor IP transport sequence is performed The scanner after-reading conveyor IP entry sequence is performed to check whether the IP
to check whether the IP is transported to the erasure conveyor. is conveyed to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
IP conveyance
to erasure unit From “● Fig. 3-02” Switchback unit IP search From “● Fig. 3-02”
IP present at the scanner after-reading conveyor entry The MD1 is driven by PD53 (0xFFFFFF pulses)
(SD1 closed)? to convey the IP to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
Y
N
IP conveyed to the scanner after-reading conveyor
The MB3 and MF1 are driven by PB71 The MB3, MF1, and MD1 are driven by PB71 (SD1 open → closed)?
(0x7FFFFF pulses) and PF51 (0x7FFFFF (0x7FFFFF pulses), PF51 (0x7FFFFF pulses), N
pulses), respectively, to convey the IP and PD51 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, Y
to the erasure conveyor. to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor.
The MD1 is stopped by software. If the SD1 does not close
within TD51 (1.33 sec),
Has the IP passed through the erasure conveyor entry
the MD1 is stopped
(SF1 opened → closed)?
N by software.
Y
IP present No IP
in the reader unit in the reader unit
The MB3, MF1, and MD1 are stopped If the SF1 does not open within TF54
by software. (6.43 sec), the MB3, MF1, and MD1
are stopped by software.
END
03C3 MD1: IP conveyance motor
Initialization erasure standby conveyance FR1H2141.EPS
Wait for processing for TF12 (0.10 sec)
The MB3 and MF1 are driven by PB72 (0xFFFFFF pulses)

and PF52 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, to return the IP
to the SF1 position.
IP returned to the SF1 position

(SF1 closed)?
N
Y
The MB3 and MF1 are stopped by software. If the SF1 does not close
within TF55 (1.33 sec),
the MB3 and MF1 are stopped
by software.
03C4
IP present SD1: After-reading IP sensor

in the erasure unit SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
END
FR1H2169.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 3-06 IP conveyance to reader unit ● Fig. 3-07 Confluence unit IP search
The path changeover conveyor-to-scanner after-reading conveyor IP transport sequence is The path changeover conveyor-to-scanner unit IP transport sequence is performed to check
performed to check whether the IP is positioned in the scanner after-reading conveyor. whether the IP is transported to the scanner unit.
IP conveyance
to reader unit
From “● Fig. 3-02” After the IP is conveyed to the scanner unit (and its presence is confirmed), it is forwarded to
Subscanning grip ascent
the exposure position (IP positioning unit).
The MZ2 is driven by PZ21 (-110 pulses)
Confluence unit
to release the subscanning unit grip. IP search
From “● Fig. 3-02”
The MD2 and MZ1 are subjected to PB62 (0x7FFFFF pulse) The MB1 and MB2 are driven by PB51 (0x7FFFFF pulses)
drive and high-speed V0 drive, respectively, to convey the IP and PB61 (0x7FFFFF pulses), respectively, to convey the IP
to the scanner unit. to the scanner unit.
IP conveyed to the SZ3 position (SZ3 opened → closed)?

Wait for processing for TB54 (2.00 sec)
N
The MB2 and MZ1 are stopped by software. Y
Subscanning grip descent
The MB1 and MB2 are stopped by software. If the SZ3 does not close
The MZ2 is driven by PZ22 (110 pulses). Return to positioning unit within TZ81 (2.41 sec),
the MB1 and MB2 are stopped
Subscanning grip roller in home position (SZ2 closed)? by software.
N Wait for processing for TZ82 (0.10 sec)
Y
Subscanning grip home positioning
“● Fig. 1-16” The MB1 and MB2 are driven by PB53 (0xFFFFFF pulses)
and PB63 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, to convey the IP
to the IP positioning unit.
IP conveyed to the SB1 position (SB1 closed)?

The MB2, MZ1, and MD1 are subjected to PB62 (0x7FFFFF pulse) drive, N
high-speed V0 drive, and PD52 (0x7FFFFF pulse) drive, respectively, Y
to convey the IP from the scanner unit to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
The MB1 and MB2 are stopped If the SB1 does not close
Has the IP passed the SD1 position by software. within TB51 (2.28 sec),
(SD1 closed → opened)? the MB1 and MB2 are stopped
N by software.
Y
03CA
The MB2, MZ1, and MD1 are stopped If the SD1 does not open within TD52 (10.06 sec),
by software. the MB2, MZ1, and MD1 are stopped by software.
Wait for processing for PD52
(0x7FFFFF pulses)
IP present No IP
Subscanning grip roller released in the positioning unit in the positioning unit
(SZ2 open)? Subscanning grip ascent
N
Y
The MZ2 is driven by PZ21 (-110 pulses)
to release the subscanning unit grip. END
SB1: Positioning unit entry IP sensor
SZ3: Before-reading IP sensor
Subscanning grip roller 03C5 MB2: IP conveyance motor
gripped (SZ2 closed)?
N Subscanning grip descent FR1H2171.EPS
Y
The MZ2 is driven by PZ22 (110 pulses).
Subscanning grip roller in home position (SZ2 closed)?

N
Y
Subscanning grip home positioning
“● Fig. 1-16”
Reading standby conveyance
The MD1 is driven by PD54 (0xFFFFFF pulses) to transport

the IP from the scanner unit to the scanner after-reading conveyor.
IP transported from the scanner after-reading conveyor

to the scanner unit (SD1 opened → closed)?
N
Y
The MD1 is stopped by software. If the SD1 does not close MB2: IP conveyance motor
within TD51 (1.33 sec), MD1: IP conveyance motor
the MD1 is stopped
by software. MD2: Grip release motor
IP present MZ1: Subscanning motor
in the reader unit
03C6 MZ2: Subscanning grip motor
END
FR1H2170.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 3-08 IP conveyance to confluence unit ● Fig. 3-10 IP conveyance to positioning unit
The path changeover conveyor-to-erasure conveyor IP transport sequence is performed to The path changeover conveyor-to-IP positioning unit IP transport sequence is performed to
check whether the IP is transported to the erasure conveyor. check whether the IP is transported to the IP positioning unit.
IP conveyance IP conveyance
to confluence unit
From “● Fig. 3-02” to positioning unit
From “● Fig. 3-02”
IP present in the SB1 and BS2 positions IP missing from the erasure conveyor (SF1 open)?
N
(SB1 and SB2 both closed)? Y
N
Y
The MB3, MB2, and MB1 are driven The MB2 and MB1 are driven
The MB3 and MF1 are driven by PB74 The MB1, MB3, and MF1 are driven by PB35 (0x7FFFFF pulses), by PB25 (0xFFFFFF pulses)
(0xFFFFFF pulses) and PF54 by PB54 (0x7FFFFF pulses), PB25 (0xFFFFFF pulses), and PB15 (0xFFFFFF pulses),
(0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, PB74 (0xFFFFFF pulses), and PB15 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, to transport the IP
to transport the IP to the erasure conveyor. and PF54 (0xFFFFFF pulses), respectively, to transport the IP to the IP positioning unit.
respectively, to transport the IP to the IP positioning unit.
to the erasure conveyor.
IP transported to the SF1 position IP conveyed to the IP positioning unit

(SF1 opened → closed)? (SB1 closed → opened)?
N N
Y Y
The MB1, MB3, and MF1 are stopped If the SF1 does not close Wait for processing for TB53 (0.30 sec) If the SB1 does not open
by software. within TF56 (5.59 sec), the MB1, within TB52 (1.85 sec),
MB2, and MF1 are stopped The MB1, MB2, and MB3 are stopped the MB1, MB2, and MB3
by software. by software. are stopped by software.
IP present IP present
in the erasure unit 03C9 in the positioning unit
03C2
END END
SB1: Positioning unit entry IP sensor
SB1: Positioning unit entry IP
SB2: Path changeover unit IP sensor sensor
SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor SF1: Erasure entry IP sensor
MB1: IP conveyance motor MB1: IP conveyance motor
MB3: IP conveyance motor MB2: IP conveyance motor
FR1H2150.EPS
FR1H2168.EPS
● Fig. 3-09 Positioning unit IP search ● Fig. 3-11 BRS IP position information confirmation
The IP lift sequence is performed within the IP positioning unit to check for an IP in the IP The IP position confirmed as indicated in “● Fig. 3-02” is compared with the IP position
positioning unit. information recorded in CMOS. If the compared items of information do not match, an error
Positioning unit
message appears on the display.
IP search
From “● Fig. 3-02”
BRS IP position
information confirmation
From “● Fig. 3-01”
The CMOS information is compared with the IP information derived from a search.
The MB1 is driven by PB11 (2320 pulses) The MA2 is driven by PA21
to perform an IP conveyance operation. (650 pulses) to lift the IP
in the IP positioning unit. The CMOS information IP presence is indicated by IP absence is indicated by
coincides with the CMOS the CMOS but IP presence
IP transported from the IP positioning unit but not by the search result is indicated by the search result.
to the path changeover conveyor (SB1 opened → closed)? the search result.
N
Y 13C7 13C8
The MB1 is stopped by software. If IP conveyance is not accomplished

(the SB1 does not close) Message display Message display
within TB11 (1.39 sec), “There may be an IP jam.” “There may be an IP jam.”
the MB1 is stopped by software.
User selection User selection
IP present No IP
in the positioning unit in the positioning unit Process continuation Process continuation
System down System down
Assuming Assuming
END that there is no IP that there is an IP
SB1: Positioning unit entry 03C7 03C8
IP sensor
MA2: IP lift drive motor
END
FR1H2142.EPS
FR1H2140.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Fig. 3-12 BRS IP position restoration 8.5 Error Code Index
The IPs whose positions were confirmed as indicated in “● Fig. 3-02” are conveyed to the
exposure position (positioning unit) and erasure standby position (erasure unit). If there is ■ Error Code Index (1/2)
only one IP, it is conveyed to the exposure position.
Error Error name
BRS IP position restoration From “● Fig. 3-01” code Reference drawing
IP present in the positioning unit 03A0 Bucky operation error "● Fig. 1-03"
IP present in the reader unit Erasure unit IP transport
No IP in the erasure unit “● Fig. 3-04”
N END 03A2 IP lifting error "● Fig. 1-04"
Y
No IP in the positioning unit Conveyance to positioning unit 03A4 Scanner unit carry-in error "● Fig. 1-04"
IP present in the reader unit Portion enclosed by Erasure unit IP transport
IP present in the erasure unit a broken line in “● Fig. 1-11” “● Fig. 3-04” 03A5 Conveyance error (Reading conveyer) "● Fig. 1-05", "● Fig. 2-01"
Two
N END remaining IPs
Y
IP present in the positioning unit

03A6 Reading IP edge detection error "● Fig. 1-05"
No IP in the reader unit
IP present in the erasure unit 03A7 Conveyance error (Post-conveyer) "● Fig. 1-07"
N END
Y
03A8 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer 1) "● Fig. 1-08"
IP present in the positioning unit
No IP in the reader unit
No IP in the erasure unit 03A9 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer 2) "● Fig. 1-08"
N END
Y 03AB Conveyance error (Erasure conveyer) "● Fig. 1-09"
No IP in the positioning unit Conveyance to positioning unit
IP present in the reader unit Erasure unit IP transport Portion enclosed by 03AC Erasure lamp error "● Fig. 1-09"
No IP in the erasure unit “● Fig. 3-04” a broken line in “● Fig. 1-11” One
N END
Y
remaining IP 03AD Conveyance error (Erasure stand-by conveyer) "● Fig. 1-10"
No IP in the positioning unit Conveyance to positioning unit
No IP in the reader unit Portion enclosed by
03AF Conveyance error (Path selector conveyer) "● Fig. 1-11"
IP present in the erasure unit a broken line in “● Fig. 1-11”
N END 03B0 Conveyance error (setting conveyer) "● Fig. 1-11"
Y
FR1H2143.EPS
03B1 IP lifting operation error "● Fig. 1-14"
03B4 Setting guide operation error "● Fig. 1-13"
03B7 Post-conveyer grip operation error "● Fig. 1-15"
03BA Sub-scanning grip operation error "● Fig. 1-16"
03BD Bucky H.P. detection error "● Fig. 1-03"

03C0 Erasure lamp error "● Fig. 3-01"
03C2 Setting unit remaining IP conveyer error "● Fig. 3-10"
03C3 Erasure unit remaining IP conveyer error "● Fig. 3-04"
03C4 Erasure stand-by conveyer error "● Fig. 3-04"
03C5 Scanner unit remaining IP conveyer error "● Fig. 3-06"

03C6 Reading stand-by conveyer error "● Fig. 3-06"
03C7 IP position information error "● Fig. 3-11"
03C8 IP position information error "● Fig. 3-11"
03C9 Path selector conveyer error "● Fig. 3-08"
03CA Setting unit returning conveyance error "● Fig. 3-07"
03E1 Scanner unit carry-in error 2 "● Fig. 1-04"
03E2 Conveyance error (Post-conveyer 2) "● Fig. 1-07"
03E3 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer3) "● Fig. 1-08"

TR1H2001.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Error Code Index (2/2) BLANK PAGE
Error Error name
code Reference drawing
13C7 IP position information error “● Fig. 3-11”
13C8 IP position information error “● Fig. 3-11”
23B1 IP lift home position detection retry “● Fig. 1-14”
23B2 IP moving-up HP detection preparation positioning retry “● Fig. 1-14”
23B3 IP moving-up HP detection preparation return retry “● Fig. 1-14”
23B4 IP positioning unit guide HP detection retry “● Fig. 1-13”
IP positioning unit guide HP detection preparation
23B5 “● Fig. 1-13”
positioning retry
IP positioning unit guide HP detection preparation
23B6 “● Fig. 1-13”
return retry
23B7 After-reading conveyance grip HP detection retry “● Fig. 1-15”
After-reading conveyance grip HP detection preparation
23B8 “● Fig. 1-15”
positioning retry
After-reading conveyance grip HP detection preparation
23B9 “● Fig. 1-15”
return retry
23BA Subscanning grip HP detection retry “● Fig. 1-16”
23BB Subscanning grip HP detection preparation positioning “● Fig. 1-16”

retry
23BC Subscanning grip HP detection preparation return retry “● Fig. 1-16”
23E1 IP hardware halt NG retry “● Fig. 1-04”
TR1H2002.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9. Machine Position Information 9.2 Roller Arrangement

Machine right side view
9.1 Unit Locations Exposure/reader unit
B: Path changeover
: Rubber roller conveyor
■ Subscanning Unit
Ensure that the distance between the frame and subscanning unit lug guide plate is 70±0.5
mm.
Z: Subscanning unit
70±0.5mm
F: Erasure conveyor
Frame
D: Scanner
after-reading
Lug guide plate conveyor
FR1H4021.EPS
T
ON
FR
FR1H1402.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.3 Home Position Values ■ Scanner After-Reading Conveyor

When the distance between the cam leading end and roller bearing center is 4 ± 0.5 mm,
ensure that the SD2 is flush with the actuator end face.
■ IP Positioning Unit
Temporarily retain the SA1 bracket in such a position that the distance between the side
plate and SA1 bracket end face is 24 mm.
Flush
Adjust the SA1 bracket position so that the distance between the side plate and IP entry
guide end face is 10 ± 1 mm when home positioning is accomplished up power ON.
IP positioning unit side plate

SD2
24mm
Actuator
Side plate SA1

SA1 4 ± 0.5mm
bracket
10 ± 1mm
Scanner Cam Roller bearing

after-reading
IP entry conveyor FR1H2315.EPS
guide
Side plate
FR1H2314.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Subscanning Unit 9.4 Grip Spring Data
When home positioning is accomplished upon power ON, the SZ2 must be flush with the
actuator end face while the screws at the lever fulcrums are visible through side plate holes Machine right side view Exposure/reader unit
A, B, and C. Further, when the grip roller is released, the screws at the lever fulcrums must B: Path changeover
be visible through side plate holes D and E. 388N2418 conveyor
Home positioning completed (grip roller activated) (front/rear)
Hole A
Lever 388N2418 (front/rear)
388N2404 Z: Subscanning unit
Hole D (front/rear)
Flush F: Erasure conveyor
SZ2
388N2418 (front/rear)
Lever
Actuator Hole C D: Scanner
after-reading
conveyor 388N2401 (front/rear)
Grip roller 388N2401: φ0.8 OD x φ10 (mm); free length: 33.3 mm

388N2404: φ1.0 OD x φ9 (mm); free length: 44.9 mm
388N2418: φ0.5 OD x φ4 (mm); free length: 93.35mm FR1H2011.EPS
Hole E
T
ON
FR
Scanner unit
Hole B Lever
FR1H2317.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ CPU90F Board (Network Interface Board)
10. Board LED Illumination Information
CN2 CN1
■ CPU90E Board (CPU Board)

LED1
CN2 CN1 LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7 LED5 LED3 LED1
LED6 LED4 LED2 LED0

FR1H2326.EPS
D6 D8 D9 (Reserved) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
• When network data is transmitted : LED1 glows.
• When network data is received : LED2 glows.
FR1H2325.EPS
■ LAN90B/D Board (Network Interface Board)

• When network data is transmitted : LED D6 glows.
• When network data is received : LED D8 glows.
• When a collision is detected : LED D9 glows. CN2 CN1
• During system initialization : LED D0 glows.

• During OS kernel initialization : LEDs D0 and D1 glow. D10
• During system clock initialization : LED D2 glows. D13
• During monitor initialization : LEDs D0 and D2 glow. D12

• During system task initialization : LEDs D1 and D2 glow. D11
CN7
• During boot ROM task initialization : LEDs D0, D1, and D2 glow.
• During DMA initialization : LED D3 glows.
FR1H2327.EPS
• During boot device (SCSI/FD) initialization : LEDs D0 and D3 glow.
• During a system code read : LEDs D1 and D3 glow. • When network data is transmitted : LED D13 glows.
• Upon system code startup : LEDs D0, D1, and D3 glow. • When network data is received : LED D12 glows.
• During an idle state : LEDs D0 to D7 sequentially come on.
• When an error occurs : LEDs D0 to D7 simultaneously blink.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ HCP08A Board (Compression/Decompression Board) ■ IMG07B Board (EDR Reduction/CRT Reduction Board)
CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
D2 D1
FR1H2330.EPS
LED3 LED2 LED1 • During an idle state : LEDs D1 and D2 alternately come on.
FR1H2328.EPS
• When an error occurs : LEDs D1 and D2 simultaneously blink.

• During an idle state : LED1, LED2, and LED3 sequentially come on.
• When an error occurs : LED1, LED2, and LED3 simultaneously blink. ■ IMG08A Board (Image processing board)
■ DMC08A Board (DMS I/F Board) CN2 CN1
CN2 CN1
CN3
D3 D4 D2 D1
CN3
D2 D1 FR1H2331.EPS
FR1H2329.EPS • During an idle state : LEDs D1, D2, D3, and D4 sequentially come on.
• When an error occurs : LEDs D1, D2, D3, and D4 simultaneously blink.
• During an idle state : LEDs D1 and D2 alternately come on.
• When an error occurs : LEDs D1 and D2 simultaneously blink.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ BSP08A Board (EDR Reduction/CRT Reduction Board) BLANK PAGE
CN2 CN1
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 FR1H2332.EPS
• During an idle state : D1, D2, and D3 sequentially come on.

D4, D5, and D6 sequentially come on.
• When an error occurs : LEDs D1, D2, D3, D4, D5 and D6 simultaneously
blink.
■ SCR08C Board (Scanner System Board)

“7.7 Function of Each Board ■ SCR08C board”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 MD 11 - 1 CONTENTS 11 12
MD 11 - 2
11. Interlock Conditions 11.2 Interlock Related to Patient Safety

This interlock is a human body protection mechanism that directly shuts off the drive output
11.1 Interlock Related to Laser Safety power supply under specific conditions.
This interlock is a laser safety assurance mechanism that forces the laser system to turn
■ Drive output to be interlocked
OFF when you turn ON the power with the machine uncovered.
Elevation unit solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2)
The laser safety interlock switches (SH1 and SH2) are monitored before laser beam
generation. If either the SH1 or the SH2 is open (cover open), the system is rendered
inoperative. ■ Drive output control by interlock
When the safety device beneath the exposure/reader unit or side grip handles (optional)
Actuator Exposure unit top cover actuates, the interlock switches (MSH1-MSH4) in the safety device turn OFF. If any of such
switches turns OFF, the power supply to the descent control solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2) is
directly shut off to prevent the exposure/reader unit from moving downward.
SH2
Actuator
SH1
Exposure unit right-hand inner cover FR1H1218.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MD 11 - 4
11.3 Interlock for Machine Protection BLANK PAGE
This interlock is a machine protection mechanism that stops drive output operations under
specific conditions.
■ Drive outputs to be interlocked
● Elevation drive hydraulic pump motor (MH1)

When the MH1 is ON with the SVH1/SVH2 turned OFF, the exposure/reader unit ascends.
● Elevation unit solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2)

When the SVH1/SVH2 is ON with the MH1 turned OFF, the exposure/reader unit descends.
● Grip handle (optional) drive motor (MH2)

When the MH2 turns ON, the grip handle ascends.
■ Drive output control by interlock
● MH1
When the elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH8) or the grip handle interference
prevention interlock switch (MSH5) turns ON, the MH1 power supply is directly shut off to
prevent the exposure/reader unit from moving upward.
● SVH1/SVH2
When the elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH9) turns ON, the SVH1/SVH2 power
supply is directly shut off to prevent the exposure/reader unit from moving downward.
● MH2
When the grip handle upper-/lower-limit interlock switch (MSH6/MSH7) turns ON, the MH2
power supply is directly shut off to prevent the grip handle from ascending/descending.
If the grip handle interference prevention interlock switch (MSH5) turns ON during a grip
handle descent, the MH2 power supply is directly shut off to stop the grip handle descent.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
06.20.2003 FM4017
003-352-03
11.4 Elevation Operation Interlock Control Flow
CONTENTS 11
Elevation switch
operation
12
ON ON
Interlock Interlock switch Interlock
LED OFF Independent ON/OFF Independent LED ON
operation operation
Elevation switch Elevation switch Grip handle Grip handle

Elevation switch UP Elevation switch DOWN
UP DOWN switch UP switch DOWN
Interlock Interlock Elevation

ON Elevation ON Grip handle ON Elevation unit ON ON Grip handle
MSH1-4/MSH9 LED OFF LED OFF MSH1-4/MSH9
MSH6 ON/OFF MSH6 ON/OFF MSH7 ON/OFF
ON Elevation unit ON/OFF ON/OFF
MSH8 ON/OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
Elevation Grip handle OFF Elevation OFF
ON Grip handle ON Grip handle Interference Interference
unit DOWN UP unit DOWN
MSH6 ON/OFF MSH7 ON/OFF MSH5 ON/OFF MSH5 ON/OFF
ON Interference
Exposure MSH5 ON/OFF
unit ascent stop OFF OFF ON ON
(MH1 OFF)
OFF
Exposure unit Exposure unit
Grip handle
descent ON Interference stop (MH2 OFF)
ascent stop Timer
Elevation (SVH1/SVH2 OFF) MSH5 ON/OFF (MH1 OFF)
Grip handle
unit UP stop (MH2 OFF)
OFF
Grip handle
Grip handle Grip handle DOWN
Exposure unit UP DOWN
ascent stop
(MH1 OFF)
FR1H1217.EPS

Grip handle Grip handle Grip handle stop
ascent stop descent stop
stop (MH2 OFF) stop (MH2 OFF) (MH2 OFF)
(MH1 OFF) (SVH1/SVH2 OFF)
MD 11 - 5
MD 11 - 5
MD 12 - 2
BLANK PAGE
12. Initialization Self-diagnostic Check Step and
Shutdown Procedure Descriptions
General descriptions of initialization self-diagnostic steps and shutdown operation are
provided below.
■ Initialization Self-Diagnostic Steps

When the machine starts up, step numbers appear on the operation to indicate the sub-
systems that are being initialized. If the machine hangs up during initialization, you can
locate a troubled subsystem by noting the displayed step number.
• Step 99: Panel control
• Step 95: Log information control
• Step 90: Conveyance control
• Step 80: Read control
• Step 70: DMS FINP output control
• Step 65: ID information input control
• Step 60: CSL control
• Step 55: Image distribution control
• Step 40: LP output control
• Step 35: DMS E-IF control
• Step 30: DMS FINP input control
• Step 15: Base on DICOM output control
• Step 5: Image management system control
■ Shutdown operation
Information required by each subsystem when power is turned ON next time is written to the
backup memory or HD.
Control of the remote power supply unit is also executed as needed.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Troubleshooting (MT) Control Sheet MT - 1
Control Sheet
05/30/2002 02 Support for software version A03 MT - 10, 12, 45, 47, 62, 86, 90
(FM3433) 190-203, 203.1–203.2, 231
06/20/2003 03 Corrections for error codes, corrections All pages
for detail information formats, changes to
paragraph numbers, changes to page
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P numbers, corrections for mistypes

(FM4017)
Service Manual
Troubleshooting (MT)
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MT - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 1 - 1
1. Document Map
When the machine experiences any trouble, troubleshoot it based on error codes, abnormal images, abnormal phenomena, and so forth to take remedial measures as appropriate.
Trouble occurred
Error code is displayed Check components Image is abnormal Operation is improper Startup Failure
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Based Component check flows 11. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities 12. IP Jam Handling 10. Startup Failure Analysis
on Error Codes Procedures
“2.5.2 Cable Check Flow” “11.1 Making Analyses in Accordance with Error “10.1 Locations to be First
13. Checking for Improper IP
“2.1 How to Understand Error Log” “2.5.3 Board Check Flow” Codes” Checked When Trouble Occurs
“2.5.4 HDD Check Flow” Conveyance
“2.2 How to Understand Error Code” “11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image Immediately After Startup”
“2.3 Error Codes List” “3. Checking the Voltages” 14. Machine Position
Generation Mode” Information
“2.4 Format of Detail Information” “4. Checking the Fuses” “11.3 Main Numerical Values Used for
“2.5.1 Error Code Analysis Flows” “5. Checking the Sensors” 16. Analysis Procedures for
Troubleshooting” Exposure Unit Spontaneous
“6. Checking the Motors “11.4 Reference Data - Typical Image Abnormalities”
and Lamps” Descent and Oil Leak
“7. Checking the Scanner I/Os”
Trouble Not Fixed
See “Machine Description 8. Mechanical Control Flows.”
FR4H2344.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MT 1 - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 1 - 2
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 1
2. Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Error Codes

2.1 How to Understand Error Log
When an error code is displayed, check the error log.
■ How to Understand the Error Log List

When multiple errors occurred, the error at the beginning that occurred at the same time (with a margin of about 2-4 minutes) is the most likely cause that is directly responsible for the trouble.
Check the error log to see which is the error at the beginning.
● Error log format
Error code Occurrence date
CODE DATE
03EF 2000.10.18 17:13
001000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------
--.1.0.0.9.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000
23EB 2000.10.18 17:13
111000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------
--.1.0.0.9.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000
FR8H2347.EPS
● How to identify the error code at the beginning

In the error log example shown below, those denoted by “A” and “B” are errors that occurred at the same time (with a margin of about 2 minutes), the error at the beginning for “A” is “23EB”.
Error codes displayed on the screen

CODE DATE
03EF 2000.10.18 17:13
001000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------ Error code that occurred last
--.1.0.0.9.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000
23EB 2000.10.18 17:13
111000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------ Error code that
--.1.0.0.9.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000 occurred third
A 23EB 2000.10.18 17:13
111000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------ Error code that
--.1.0.0.9.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000 occurred second
23EB 2000.10.18 17:13
111000000000000001-0-0-011-0000101101.------ Error code at the beginning:
--.1.0.0.9.8.8.8.0000.0000.0000 It should be analyzed first.
23E1 2000.10.18 16:55
1110000000000000000000001101000110010.------
--.1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000
B 13A8 2000.10.18 16:55
11110000000000000000-0001110000110010.------
--.1.0.0.6.3.1.0.0000.0000.0000
03C2 2000.10.18 16:24
11100000000000000100-0001001000111010.000001
40.1.5.0.A.0.0.1.0000.0000.0000
13B8 2000.10.18 16:07
001000000000000001-0-0-011-1000101111.------
--.1.5.0.0.0.0.0.0000.0000.0000
0.END 1.NEXT 2.BEFORE (DEFAULT=1) : FR8H2348.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 2
2.2 How to Understand Error Code

An example of error code format is presented below.
Indicates the reference volume
abbreviation and section number.
Code Name Significance/Occurrence Condition Probable Cause/Remedy Detail
[During initialization/normal processing]

Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 failed to close, • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for
allowing the maximum retry count (ND51) to be exceeded. Error 03BC (MT-2.4.1).
• Check the MD1 (MU-11.2/MC-8.5).
03BC Side-positioning HP • Check the SD1 (MC-8.2).
<I/O name> D-5
operation error • Check the side-positioning conveyor
• MD1; Side-positioning motor
• SD1; Side-positioning mechanism home position sensor mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-8).
• Check the DRV08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-16.12).
<Reference> • Check the SNS08A board (MT-2.4.3/MC-16.13).
MD-8.2.5
Indicates the reference volume

abbreviation and section number. See “Section 2.4,
The checks to be performed are listed in random Format of Detail Information”.
XYZZ Hexadecimal notation order. Judge the target machine condition and
change the order of checks as needed to begin
by checking on the most probable error cause.
00-FF: Reference number according to error classification

0-9, A-F: Error classification
0-3: Error level
X: Error level Y: Error classification
• FATAL error: 0 0: OS (operating system software), CPU, library 8: Printer interface control
Error where the normal processing cannot be resumed. 1: Overall control, information gathering function, 9: DMS interface control
It is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action immediately. output destination control function A: ID information setup function
• WARNING: 1, 2, 3 2: Panel control B: Network output image processing
Errors where the processing may be resumed by performing retry 3: Conveyor-related control C: FINP control
operation, etc. 4: Image processing related (reading) D: DICOM control
This category includes an error that is merely logged as history information 5: Scanner control E: Undefined
and an error where the processing is resumed but its error code is displayed 6: Undefined F: Other (software install, version update, etc.)
on screen. 7: IDT interface control
ZZ: Reference number

Managed according to the error classification FR8H1316.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 3
2.3 Error Codes List
Probable Cause/Remedy Applicable Machine
Code Name Significance/Occurrence Condition Detail
(in no special order) 343 344 348RU
[During initialization] • Check the board insertion location (MC-20).

0100 Board insertion position error The board insertion slot position was found to be abnormal when it • Check for improper board setup (MC-20). A-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
was checked. • Check the board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).

• The ID information control system (IMM) was found to be
abnormal. • Check for an improper software update (MU-18.2).
• An error was detected because the software was directly • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
0101 ID information control system
initialization error
updated from version A00 or earlier to version A04 or later • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). F ❍ ❍ ❍
(CR-IR344). • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
• An error was detected because the software was directly • Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-18).
updated from version A04 or earlier to version A08 or later
(CR-IR343).
• Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

0102 Common data control system
[During initialization]
An error was detected in the common data control system (CDM).
• Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
• Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
F ❍ ❍ ❍
• Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-18).

0110 Image
error
control system initialization [During initialization/normal processing]
An error was detected in the image control system (IDM).
F ❍ ❍ ❍

0111 HD image display area
An error was detected in the HD image display area.
F ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6).

• Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).
• Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9).
• An error was detected when shared memory allocation was
• Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10).
0112 No output option attempted for option configuration.
F ❍ ❍ ❍
• There was no board for the external device (printer, DMS, etc.),
or an error was detected.
• Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).

0120 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
configuration file (NETMASKS).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
CR-IR344 Service Manual [ 2.3 ] MT 2 - 3
MT 2 - 4

0121 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

0122 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

0123 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(NETMASKS).

A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
configuration file (HOSTS ADDRESS).

A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

0132 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

0133 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file (HOSTS
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
ADDRESS).

0134 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration file
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(HOSTS ADDRESS).
0140 Boot line-related error An error was detected in the backup memory data.
• Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 5

0141 Routing information-related error An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration file
F ❍ ❍ ❍
(ROUTING/HOSTS ADDRESS).

0160 Shared memory insufficient (less
than 48MB)
The shared memory was found to be insufficient.
F ❍ ❍ ❍

0161 Shared memory allocation error An error was detected when shared memory allocation was
F ❍ ❍ ❍
attempted.
0162 Equip File setting value error An error was detected in the configuration file (EQUIPMENT) setup • Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F ❍ ❍ ❍
value.
0163 System file setting error An error was detected in the configuration file (irset.cft) setup value.
• Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F ❍ ❍ ❍
[During initialization] • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

0165 No BSP08A board It was found that the BSP08A board was not inserted. • Check the BSP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.16).
F ❍ ❍

01A0 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
D ❍ ❍ ❍
information.

01A1 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to update ID
D ❍ ❍ ❍
information.

01A2 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an
D ❍ ❍ ❍
image data file.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 6

01A3 EQUIP file format error An error was found in the format contained in a configuration file
- ❍ ❍ ❍
(EQUIPMENT).

[During U-Utility mode]
0200 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to delete an
- ❍ ❍ ❍
image queued for processing.
[During normal processing] • Restart the machine.

0240 ID information read error An HDD error was detected. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
L-6 ❍
[During normal processing] • Restart the machine.

0241 Image data read close error An HDD error was detected. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
L-6 ❍

D-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
conveyance-related parameter file on the HDD.

0302 File format error An error was detected in the data format of the conveyance-related
D-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
parameter file on the HDD.

0303 File setting value error An error was detected in the data setup value of the conveyance
D-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
-related parameter file on the HDD.

• Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).
Although a pulse motor drive request or stop request was issued,
0312 Motor stop time-out a timeout occurred because the target pulse motor could not be
• Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343). D-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
driven or stopped.
• Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14) (348RU).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 7

Although the MA3 turned ON, the SA3 did not close. • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A0 (MT-2.5.1).
• Check the SA3 (MT-5.1/MC-4.4).
X-1
<I/O name> • Check the MA3 (MT-6.1/MC-4.8).
(348RU)
03A0 Bucky operation error • MA3; Bucky drive motor • Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SA3; Bucky home position sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
(344/343)
<Reference> • Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).
MD-8.2.2
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03A2 (MT-2.5.1).

[During normal processing]
• Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2).
Although the MA2/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SB1 did not close.
• Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
• Check the MA2 (MT-6.1/MC-4.7).
<I/O name> X-1
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12) (348RU).
• MA2; IP lift drive motor (348RU)
03A2 IP lifting error • MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18) (348RU).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4).
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
• Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).
MD-8.2.2

[During normal processing] • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
Although the MB1/MB2/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. • Check the MB2 (MT-6.2/MC-5.7).
X-1
(348RU)
03A3 Setting unit discharge error <I/O name> • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MB1/MB2/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
(344/343)
conveyor) • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor • Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).

• Check the SZ3 (MT-5.2/MC-9.7).
Scanner unit carry-in error Although the MB1 and MB2 turned ON, the SZ3 did not close.
(344/343) <I/O name>
• Check the MB2 (MT-6.2/MC-5.7). X-1
• Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). (348RU)
03A4 • MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
• Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SZ3; Before-reading IP sensor
Scanner unit carry-in error 1 • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). (344/343)
(348RU) <Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 8

• Check the SD1 (MT-5.2/MC-10.2).
Although the MB2/MZ1 turned ON, the SZ1 and SD1 did not close.
• Check the MZ1 (MT-6.4/MC-9.8).
• Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
Although the MB2 and MZ1 turned ON, the SD1 did not close.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
X-1
03A5 Conveyance error
(Reading conveyer)
<I/O name>
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9).
• MZ1; Subscanning motor (344/343)
• Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4).
• SZ1; IP leading-edge sensor
• Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (348RU/344).
• SD1; After-reading IP sensor
• Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (343).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.3

[During normal processing] • Check the SZ1 (MT-7.6/MC-9.5).
• Although the MB2/MZ1 turned ON, the SZ1 and SD1 did not • Check the SH2 (MT-5.4/MC-12.2).
close. • Check the MZ1 (MT-6.4/MC-9.8).
• The SH2 opened. • Check the MB2 (MT-6.2/MC-5.7).
<I/O name> (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344). X-1
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-4) (348RU)
03A6 Reading IP edge detection error • MZ1; Subscanning motor (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SZ1; IP leading-edge sensor • Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9). (344/343)
• SD1; After-reading IP sensor • Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4).
• SH2; Laser safety interlock switch • Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (348RU/344).
• Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (343).
<Reference> • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
MD-8.2.2 • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).

Conveyance error Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not open.
(Post-conveyer) (344/343) <I/O name>
• Check the MD1 (MT-6.3/MC-10.4). X-1
• Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4). (348RU)
03A7 • MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
• Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
Conveyance error • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU). (344/343)
(Post-conveyer 1) (348RU) <Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 9

• Check the SE1 (MT-5.2/MC-11.2).
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the SE1 did not close.
• Check the MD1 (MT-6.3/MC-10.4).
• Check the MF1 (MT-6.3/MC-6.8).
<I/O name> X-1
03A8 Conveyance
conveyer 1)
error (Pre-erasure • MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor)
• Check the before-erasure conveyor mechanism (MC-11).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6).
• SE1; Before-erasure entry IP sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

• Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2).
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close.
<I/O name> X-1
03A9 Conveyance
conveyer 2)
error (Pre-erasure • MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
[During initialization/normal processing] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03AB (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MB3 and MF1 turned ON, the SB2 did not close. • Check the SB2 (MT-5.1/MC-5.3).
<I/O name> • Check the MF1 (MT-6.3/MC-6.8). X-1
03AB Conveyance
conveyer)
error (Erasure • MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
• Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). (344/343)
MD-8.2.2 • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 10
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03AC (MT-2.5.1).

• Check the LAMP1-8 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9) (348RU/344).
• Check the LAMP1-4 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9) (343).
• Check the THF1/TSWF2/3/6/8 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (348RU).
• Check the TSWF1/2/3/5/6/8 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (344).
• Check the TSWF1/2/3/5 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (343).
An attempt was made to delete the IP image data, but the erasure X-1
• Check the FANF1 (MC-6.10) (348RU).
lamp did not light. (348RU)
03AC Erasure lamp error • Check the FANF14 (MC-6.10) (344/343).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the fuse (F1/F2 <Fluorescent lamp 36W/55W invertor>,
<Reference> (344/343)
F4/F5) for the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-4/MC-13.4)
MD-8.2.2
(348RU/344).
• Check the fuse (F1 <Fluorescent lamp invertor>, F4/F5)
for the power supply (JPS-4) (MT-4/MC-13.4) (343).
• Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13) (344/343).
[During normal processing] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03AD (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. • Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2).
<I/O name> • Check the MF1 (MT-6.3/MC-6.8). X-1
03AD Conveyance error (Erasure
stand-by conveyer)
• MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). (344/343)

Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB3 did not open.
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03AF (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB2 did not open (348RU).
03AF Conveyance
conveyer)
error (Path selector <I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MB3/MB1; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
• Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). (344/343)
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor
• SB3; Confluence unit IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 11
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B0 (MT-2.5.1).

[During initialization/normal processing] • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2).
Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
X-1
<I/O name> • Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12) (348RU).
03B0 Conveyance
conveyer)
error (setting • MB3/MB1; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18) (348RU).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
(344/343)
<Reference> • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).
MD-8.2.2 • Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).

Although the MA2 turned ON, the SA2 failed to open or close (its
home position could not be detected), allowing the retry count
(NA61) to be exceeded.
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12) (348RU). X-1
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18) (348RU). (348RU)
03B1 IP lifting operation error <I/O name>
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MA2; IP lift drive motor
• SA2; IP lift home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SB1 failed to close,
allowing the retry count (1) to be exceeded.
<I/O name>
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12) (348RU).
03B2 IP lifting error • MA4; IP lift drive motor
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18) (348RU).
X-1 ❍
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor
<Reference>
• Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).
MD-8.2.2

Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SZ3 did not close.
<I/O name>
03B3 Scanner unit carry-in error 1 • MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor)
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4). X-1 ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 12

Although the MA1 turned ON, the SA1 failed to open or close
(its home position could not be detected), allowing the retry
count (NA51) to be exceeded.
• Check the SA4 (MT-5.3/MC-4.5) (348RU).
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to open or close
(its home position could not be detected), allowing the retry X-1
• Check the MA4 (MT-6.1/MC-4.9) (348RU).
count (NA61) to be exceeded (348RU). (348RU)
03B4 Setting guide operation error • Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<I/O name> (344/343)
• MA1; IP positioning drive motor
• SA1; IP positioning home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped
before the SZ3 closed; thus, MB1 and MB2 turned ON again,
but SZ3 did not close.
<I/O name>
03B5 Scanner unit carry-in error 2 • MA4; IP lift drive motor
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4). X-1 ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
[During normal processing] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B6 (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MF1/MB1/MB3 turned ON, the SB2 did not open. • Check the SB2 (MT-5.1/MC-5.3).
<I/O name> • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
Conveyance error (Stand-by • MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the MB3 (MT-6.2/MC-5.8).
03B6 reverse conveyance) • MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) • Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6).
X-1 ❍
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
<Reference> • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 13

Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to open or close
count (ND61) to be exceeded.
03B7 Post-conveyer
error
grip operation <I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MD2; Grip release motor
• Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU). (344/343)
• SD2; Grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

• Although the MB1/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03B8 (MT-2.5.1).
• Although the MB1/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2).
03B8 Conveyance error (Stand-by
reverse conveyance)
<I/O name>
X-1 ❍
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
<Reference> • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
MD-8.2.2

Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB3 did not open.
[During initialization] • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2).
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. • Check the SB3 (MT-5.1/MC-5.4).
03B9 Conveyance error (Stand-by
high-speed conveyance)
<I/O name>
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover
X-1 ❍
conveyor) • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
• SB3; Confluence unit IP sensor • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2/8.4.2

Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 failed to open or close
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BA (MT-2.5.1).
count (NZ61) to be exceeded.
• Check the MZ2 (MT-6.3/MC-9.9). X-1
• Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9). (348RU)
03BA Sub-scanning grip operation error <I/O name> • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MZ2; Subscanning grip motor
• SZ2; Subscanning grip release home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 14
[During normal processing] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BB (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SF2 did not close. • Check the SF2 (MT-5.3/MC-6.3).
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover • Check the MB4 (MT-6.2/MC-5.9).
03BB Conveyance error (Stand-by unit) conveyor) • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
X-1 ❍
• SF2; After-erasure standby IP sensor • Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6).
• Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14).

• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BC (MT-2.5.1).
<I/O name>
03BC Conveyance
unit)
error (Path changing • MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover
conveyor)
• Check the MB4 (MT-6.2/MC-5.9). X-1 ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BD (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MA3 turned ON, the SA3 did not close.
• Check the MA3 (MT-6.1/MC-4.8). X-1
<I/O name>
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4). (348RU)
03BD Bucky H.P. detection error • MA3; Bucky drive motor
• SA3; Bucky home position sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BE (MT-2.5.1).

<I/O name>
03BE Conveyance error (Between
stand-by unit and setting unit)
conveyor)
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12). X-1 ❍
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 15
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03BF (MT-2.5.1).

[During normal processing] • Check the SA4 (MT-5.3/MC-4.5).
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to close, allowing • Check the MA4 (MT-6.1/MC-4.9).
the retry count (NA61) to be exceeded. • Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12).
03BF IP lifting operation error • Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18). X-1 ❍
<I/O name> • Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4).
• MA4; IP lift drive motor • Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14).
• SA4; IP lift home position sensor • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C0 (MT-2.5.1).

• Check the LAMP1-8 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9) (348RU/344).
• Check the LAMP1-4 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9) (343).
• Check the THF1/TSWF2/3/6/8 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (348RU).
• Check the TSWF1/2/3/5/6/8 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (344).
[During initialization] • Check the TSWF1/2/3/5 (MC-6.4/MC-6.5/MC-6.6) (343).
X-1
The erasure lamp did not light. • Check the FANF1 (MC-6.10) (348RU).
(348RU)
03C0 Erasure lamp error • Check the FANF14 (MC-6.10) (344/343).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference> • Check the fuse (F1/F2 <Fluorescent lamp 36W/55W invertor>,
(344/343)
MD-8.4.1 F4/F5) for the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-4/MC-13.4)
(348RU/344).
• Check the fuse (F1 <Fluorescent lamp invertor>, F4/F5) for
the power supply (JPS-4) (MT-4/MC-13.4) (343).
• Although the MB1/MB2/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not open.
• Although the MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SB1 did not open.
<I/O name>
03C2 Setting unit remaining IP
conveyer error
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
conveyor)
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 16
• Although the MB3/MF1/MD1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open
(344/343).
• Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C3 (MT-2.5.1).
(344/343). • Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2).
• Although the MF1/MD1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open • Check the MD1 (MT-6.3/MC-10.4).
(348RU). • Check the MF1 (MT-6.3/MC-6.8).
X-1
• Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open (348RU). • Check the MB3 (MT-6.2/MC-5.8).
03C3 Erasure unit remaining IP
conveyer error
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<I/O name> • Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4).
(344/343)
• MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) • Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2
• Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close
(344/343).
• Although the MB1/MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close
(348RU).
• Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close (348RU). X-1
(348RU)
03C4 Erasure stand-by conveyer error <I/O name>
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) (344/343)
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2

[During initialization] • Check the SZ2 (MT-5.2/MC-9.6).
Although the MB2/MZ1/MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not open • Check the MB2 (MT-6.2/MC-5.7).
(the SZ2 opened). • Check the MZ1 (MT-6.4/MC-9.8).
<I/O name> • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
X-1
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
03C5 Scanner unit remaining IP
conveyer error
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-4)
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MZ1; Subscanning motor (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(344/343)
• SD1; After-reading IP sensor • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
• SZ2; Subscanning grip release home position sensor • Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9).
<Reference> • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
MD-8.4.2 • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (348RU).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 17
Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not close.
<I/O name>
• Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4). (348RU)
03C6 Reading stand-by conveyer error • MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2
• Reset after clearing the backup memory (MC-2.5).

• Allow the IP to be ejected automatically by powering OFF and
back ON, and reset after clearing the backup memory (MC-2.5).
Because the CMOS information (IP found) of the machine did
• Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2). X-1
not agree with the remaining IP search result (IP not found),
• Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2). (348RU)
03C7 IP position information error the system went down by user selection.
• Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6). (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2

back ON, and reset after clearing the backup memory (MC-2.5).
Because the CMOS information (IP not found) of the machine did
• Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2). X-1
not agree with the remaining IP search result (IP found),
• Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2). (348RU)
03C8 IP position information error the system went down by user selection.
• Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6). (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.4.2
[During initialization] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03C9 (MT-2.5.1).
• Although the MB3 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. • Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2).
• Although the MB1/MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
X-1
<I/O name> • Check the MF1 (MT-6.3/MC-6.8).
(348RU)
03C9 Path selector conveyer error • MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) • Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6).
(344/343)
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 18
[During initialization] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03CA (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MB1 and MB2 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2).
X-1
03CA Setting
error
unit returning conveyance • MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(344/343)
[During initialization] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03CB (MT-2.5.1).
03CB Move error of the IP remaining in
the stand-by unit
conveyor)
X-1 ❍
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03CC (MT-2.5.1).
03CC Conveyance error of the IP that is • MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover
in the stand-by unit conveyor)
X-1 ❍
MD-8.4.2

Although the MH3 turned ON, the SH3 failed to open or close
(its home position could not be detected), allowing the retry • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03CD (MT-2.5.1).
count (NH61) to be exceeded. • Check the SH3 (MT-5.3/MC-12.3).
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12).
03CD Shutter operation error <I/O name> • Check the shutter mechanism (MD-7.6). X-1 ❍
• MH3; Shutter drive motor • Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14).
• SH3; Shutter sensor • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 19
Although the MB4 turned ON, the SB4 did not open. • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03CE (MT-2.5.1).
03CE Low-speed move error of the IP
remaining in the stand-by unit
• MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1 ❍
• SB4; After-erasure standby confluence unit IP sensor • Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14).
MD-8.4.2
[During initialization] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03E0 (MT-2.5.1).
03E0 Standby unit recovery
conveyance error
conveyor)
X-1 ❍
[During normal processing] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03E1 (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MA2/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped • Check the SZ3 (MT-5.2/MC-9.7).
before the SZ3 closed; thus, MB1 and MB2 turned ON again, • Check the MA2 (MT-6.1/MC-4.7).
but SZ3 did not close. • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6).
<I/O name> • Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4). (348RU)
03E1 Scanner unit carry-in error 2 • MA2; IP lift drive motor • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) • Check the subscanning unit mechanism (MD-7.3/MC-9). (344/343)
• SZ3; Before-reading IP sensor • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).

Although an attempt was made to convey the IP to the scanner
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03E2 (MT-2.5.1).
after-reading conveyor, the MD1 stopped before the SD1 opened;
thus, the MD1 turned ON again, but the SD1 did not open.
03E2 Conveyance
2)
error (Post-conveyer <I/O name> • Check the scanner after-reading conveyor mechanism (MD-7.4).
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 20

• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 03E3 (MT-2.5.1).
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the MF1 stopped
before the SF1 closed; thus, MD1 and MF1 turned ON again,
but SF1 did not close.
X-1
03E3 Conveyance
conveyer 3)
error (Pre-erasure <I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
subsystem file (IMG).

0401 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (IMG). • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

0402 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a subsystem file
E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG).

E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
0410 DSP4 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
DSP4 device (IMG07B board).
0411 DSP4 device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
DSP4 device (IMG07B board).

0412 DSP4 micro program boot error An error was detected when an attempt was made to boot a
• Check the IMG07B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.5).
E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program for the DSP4 device (IMG07B board) from the HDD.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 21

0413 DSP4 micro program load error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a
E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP4 device (IMG07B board).
[During initialization] • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

0414 DSP4 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSP4 device (IMG07B board). • Check the IMG07B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.5).

0415 DSP4 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
[During initialization/normal processing] • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

0420 DSP4 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
[During normal processing] • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

0421 DSP4 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

• Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).
An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device
0422 DSP4 image processing error 1 (IMG07B board) when image data was being read from the
• Check the cable (MT-2.5.2). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
scanner.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
• Check the MZ1/MZ2 (MC-9.8/MC-9.9).
• Check the MD1/MD2 (MC-6.3/MC-10.4/MC-10.5).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 22

[During normal processing] • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
0423 DSP4 image processing error 2 An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device • Check the cable (MT-2.5.2). E-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG07B board) after an image data read from the scanner. • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
• Check the MD1/MD2 (MT-6.3/MC-10.4/MC-10.5).
0425 DSP1 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍
the DSP1 device (BSP08A board).
0426 DSP1 device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍
DSP1 device (BSP08A board).

• Check the BSP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.16).
E-2 ❍ ❍
micro program for the DSP1 device (BSP08A board) from the HDD.

E-2 ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP1 device (BSP08A board).

0429 DSP1 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍
the DSP1 device (BSP08A board). • Check the BSP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.16).

0430 DSP1 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍

0435 DSP1 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 23

0436 DSP1 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read the • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍
DSP1 device (BSP08A board). • Check the BSP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.16).

0437 DSP1 image processing error 1 An image processing error was found in the DSP1 device (BSP08A • Check the cable (MT-2.5.2). E-2 ❍ ❍
board) when image data was being read from the scanner. • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
0440 DSP2 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍
the DSP2 device (BSP08A board).
0441 DSP2 device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-2 ❍ ❍
DSP2 device (BSP08A board).

E-2 ❍ ❍
micro program for the DSP2 device (BSP08A board) from the HDD.

E-2 ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP2 device (BSP08A board).

0444 DSP2 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍

0445 DSP2 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 24
0450 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
DMA device (CPU90E board).

0451 Reading DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer
E-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data from the scanner to the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

[During normal processing] • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0452 Rotating DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to DMA- • Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9). E-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
transfer 24 x 30 mammographic image data for rotation. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).

0460 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write read
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.

An error was detected when an attempt was made to write • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0461 Monitor image write error monitored image data from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
HDD. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).

An error was detected when an attempt was made to write • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0462 EDR data write error EDR-reduced image data from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
the HDD. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).

0463 ID information write error 1 An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
information from the MMC90A/DIM08A board onto the HDD.

0464 File close error 1 An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a file
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
that was opened in the read image write mode.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 25

0465 File close error 2 An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a file
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
that was opened in the read mode.

0466 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
information.

0467 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
information.

0468 Monitor image read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a
E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
monitored image.
[During normal processing] • Output the stored image data.

An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
0469 Image file open error image data file for the purpose of retrying an image data write • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
E-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
onto the HDD. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
[During reoutput]
When an attempt was made to reoutput an image, an error was
046A Image lock or unlock error detected because U-Utility's image lock or unlock setup was
• Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
abnormal.

0470 DSP2 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍

0471 DSP2 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read the • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-2 ❍ ❍
DSP2 device (BSP08A board). • Check the BSP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.16).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 26

An image processing error was found in the DSP2 device
0472 DSP2 image processing error 1 (BSP08A board) when image data was being read from the
• Check the cable (MT-2.5.2). E-2 ❍ ❍
scanner.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 0532 (MT-2.5.1).

• Check the polygon assembly (MD-8.2/MC-8.5).
[During initialization] • Check the fuse (F3) for the power supply (JPS-4)
0532 Polygon mirror error 1 A polygon motor lock signal error was detected when the (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
polygon status was checked upon laser power ON. • Check the fuse (F3) for the power supply (JPS-7)
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
• Check the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-3.2/MT-9/MC-13.2)
(348RU/344).

0534 Laser power error 1 An error was detected when the laser status was checked.
• Check the LD assembly (MD-8.2.2/MC-8.4). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).

[During initialization] • Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (348RU/344).
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0536 Analog power supply error 1 PMT08A board (343). • Check the PMT08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the • Check the PMT08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (348RU/344).
PMT08C board (front photomultiplier) (348RU/344). • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-4)
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 27

• Check the SYN08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.6).
[During initialization] • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
0537 Start point detection error 1 An error was detected when the start point detection status was (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
checked. • Check the polygon assembly (MD-8.2/MC-8.5).
• Check the LD assembly (MD-8.2.2/MC-8.4).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).

(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
0538 IP leading edge detection
error 1
The IP leading edge detection signal was found to be abnormal
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
when the leading edge detection status was checked.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).

• Check the SYN08A board (MD-2.5.3/MT-2.5.3/MC-8.6).
0549 Image quit error An image quit interrupt was not executed within the specified time.
• Check the CPU90F board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍

• Check the exposure unit ceiling cover/exposure unit right-hand
side cover (MC-3).
[During initialization] • Check the SH1 (MT-5.4/MC-12.1).
0551 Laser power error (Cover open) An error was detected when the laser power status was checked • Check the SH2 (MT-5.4/MC-12.2). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(the cover was opened). • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 28

side cover (MC-3).
0552 Start
open)
point detection error (Cover An error was detected when the start-point detection status • Check the SH2 (MT-5.4/MC-12.2). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
was checked (the cover was opened). • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).

side cover (MC-3).
0553 IP leading edge detecting error
(Cover open)
An error was detected when the leading-edge detection status • Check the SH2 (MT-5.4/MC-12.2). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
was checked (the cover was opened). • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).

side cover (MC-3).
[During normal processing] • Check the SH1 (MT-5.4/MC-12.1).
0557 Image quit error (Cover open) An image quit interrupt does not occur during reading • Check the SH2 (MT-5.4/MC-12.2). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(the cover is opened). • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).

• Check the SCN08C (SCR08C) board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).
• Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).
0563 Analog power supply error 1 An analog power supply voltage error was detected on the
E-3 ❍ ❍
PMR08C board (rear photomultiplier).
• Check the PMR08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).
• Check the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-3.2/MT-9/MC-13.2).
0701 Standard LAN initial setting error An error was detected during CPU90E board initialization.
• Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). H ❍ ❍ ❍
0703 System file setting value error An error was found in the configuration (SYSTEM) settings.
• Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F ❍ ❍ ❍
0704 No effective IDT An error was found in the configuration settings • Check the configuration settings (MU-7). F ❍ ❍ ❍
(EQUIPMENT/HOSTS ADDRESS).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 29

I-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
subsystem file (LIF).

0801 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (LIF). • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
I-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

0802 File setting value error An error was found in the settings contained in a subsystem file
I-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(LIF).

0803 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
I-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
information into the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0804 Image file close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an
I-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data file.

0805 Image file read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read an
I-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
image file.
[During normal processing (film reoutput)] • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
• An error was found in the HDD format information. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0806 Format information search error • The format information about the battery backup memory • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
I-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
was found to be abnormal. • Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-18).

0807 Format number acquisition error An error was detected when the combination of IP read size and • Check the IP. I-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
format information was checked.
0809 DMA device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a device • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). I-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
driver (DMA).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 30

080A DMA transfer error A DMA image transfer to the IMG board failed.
• Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).
080B Memory area securing error An error was detected when memory area allocation was
I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
attempted.

0810 DSP10 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSP10 device (IMG08A board).

I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP10 (IMG08A board).

0812 DSP10 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data into the DSP10 device (IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

0813 DSP10 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data from the DSP10 device (IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

0814 DSP10 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSP10 device (IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6).

0815 DSP10 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 31

0816 DSP10 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP10 device • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSP11 device (IMG08A board).

I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP11 device (IMG08A board).

image data into the DSP11 device (IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

081A DSP11 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data from the DSP11 device (IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

081B DSP11 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

081C DSP11 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 32

081D DSP11 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP11 device • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08A board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

081E DSP20 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board).

081F DSP20 micro program load error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program into the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board). • Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

image data into the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

image data from the DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

0822 DSP20 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

0823 DSP20 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 33

(IMG08B/H board). • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

0826 DSP21 micro program load error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍



I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

082A DSP21 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 34

082B DSP21 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP21 device • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

082C DSP22 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

082D DSP22 micro program load error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

082E DSP22 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

082F DSP22 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

0831 DSP22 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 35


I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

0849 DSP23 micro program load error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a • Check the IMG08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

084A DSP23 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

084B DSP23 memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

084C DSP23 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

084D DSP23 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on
I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 36

084E DSP23 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP23 device • Check the IMG08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.6). I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

• Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0930 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load ID
D ❍ ❍
information into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0931 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read
D ❍ ❍
image data into the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0932 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). D ❍ ❍
image data file. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).

0933 DPS0 memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). B ❍ ❍
memory write into the DSP0 device (DMC08A board). • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

[During normal processing] • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0934 DSP0 image processing error 1 An error was detected when an image process (DSP application • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8). B ❍ ❍
startup) was performed. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).

0935 DSP0 image processing error 2 An error was detected when an image process (DSP application • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
execution) was performed.

0936 DSP0 image processing error 3 An error was detected when an image process (DSP command • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
cancel) was performed.

0937 DMA transfer error A DMC08A board error was detected when a DMA transfer was • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8). C ❍ ❍
performed. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 37

0950 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID
D ❍ ❍
information onto the HDD.

0951 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write
D ❍ ❍
image data onto the HDD.

0952 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). D ❍ ❍

0953 DSP0 memory write error An error was detected when the CPU90E board issued an • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). B ❍ ❍
instruction for writing image data into the MMC90A/DIM08A board. • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

0954 DSP0 image processing error 1 An error was detected when an image process (DSP application • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8). B ❍ ❍
startup) was performed. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).

0955 DSP0 image processing error 2 An error was detected when an image process (DSP application • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
execution) was performed.

0956 DSP0 image processing error 3 An error was detected when an image process (DSP command • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
cancel) was performed.

0957 DMA transfer error A DMC08A board error was detected when a DMA transfer was • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8). C ❍ ❍
performed. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
0980 DSP0 device initialization error An error was detected when an attempt was made to initialize • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). C ❍ ❍
the DSP device (CPU90E board).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 38

0981 DSP0 micro program boot error An error was detected when an attempt was made to load a
B ❍ ❍
dspLoad micro program into the DMC08A board.
0982 Output DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
the output DMA device (CPU90E board).
0983 Input DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). B ❍ ❍
the input DMA device (CPU90E board).

A-1 ❍ ❍
dspLoad micro program file into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a • Check the MTH08B/H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
0986 File read error dspWrite micro program file into the CPU memory (CPU90E • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
A-1 ❍ ❍
board). • Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-18).

B ❍ ❍
dspWrite micro program into the DMC08A board.

0B00 Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14). L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
image data file.

0B01 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
information into the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0B02 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID
L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 39

0B03 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read
L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍

0B04 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write
L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
image data onto the HDD.

0B05 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍

0B06 Image data write close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
0B10 DSPH device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
DSPH device (HCP08A board).

0B11 DSPH
error
micro program file open An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a DSPH
L-3+ ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program file on the HDD.

0B12 DSPH
error
micro program file read An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). L-3+ ❍ ❍ ❍
DSPH micro program into the CPU memory (CPU90E board). • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).

0B13 DSPH
error
micro program file boot An error was detected when an attempt was made to boot a • Check the HCP08A (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9) (348RU). L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
micro program for the DSPH device (HCP08A board). • Check the HCP08A/DMC08A (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8) (344/343).

0B14 DSPH memory write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a
• Check the HCP08A (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9) (348RU).
L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
DSPH memory write into the DSPH device (HCP08A board).
• Check the HCP08A/DMC08A (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8) (344/343).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 40

0B15 DSPH memory read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to perform a
L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
DSPH memory load into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0B16 DSPH checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for
L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSPH device (HCP08A board).

0B17 DSPH self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on
L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
the DSPH device (HCP08A board).

• An error was found in a compression/decompression process.
0B18 DSPH image processing error • A timeout occurred because image data could not be read
L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍
from the HDD.
• An image data communication was aborted.
0B20 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). L-4+ ❍ ❍ ❍
the DMA device (CPU90E board).

• An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer
0B21 DMA transfer error image data to the HCP08A board.
L-4+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D board
image data to the MMC90A/DIM08A board.
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
0C00 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). M-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
the DMA device (CPU90E board).

0C01 DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
M-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data to the CPU90F/LAN90B board.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 41

0C10 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

0C11 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read image
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
data into the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0C12 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
0C80 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). M-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
DMA device (CPU90E board).

[During normal processing] • Check the CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D board
0C81 DMA transfer error An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
M-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data to the MMC90A/DIM08A board. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).

0C90 ID information write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write ID
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

0C91 Image data read close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

0C92 Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14). M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
image data file.

0C93 Image data write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write image
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
data onto the HDD.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 42

0C94 Image data write close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
received input image data file. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).

0C95 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

0C96 ID information update error An error was detected when an attempt was made to update
M-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
the ID information delivered to the HDD.

0D10 Image data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read
D ❍ ❍ ❍

0D11 ID information read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read ID
D ❍ ❍ ❍

0D12 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). D ❍ ❍ ❍

0D13 Image data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). D ❍ ❍ ❍

0D14 EDR data read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read EDR
D ❍ ❍ ❍
data into the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0D15 EDR data close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close an • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). D ❍ ❍ ❍
EDR data file. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
0D30 DMA device open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). C ❍ ❍ ❍
DMA device driver.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 43

0D31 DMA transfer error image data to the CPU90F board/LAN90B/D board.
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
C ❍ ❍ ❍
image data to the MMC90A/DIM08A board.

0D42 Image data transmission error The DICOM transmission process for the LAN board could not
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
be continued.

0D60 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a
I+ ❍ ❍ ❍
subsystem file (DOT).

0D61 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a
I+ ❍ ❍ ❍
file into the CPU memory (CPU90E board).

0D62 File format error A format error was found in a file that was loaded into the CPU
I+ ❍ ❍ ❍
memory (CPU90E board).

0D70 File format error An error was found in the settings contained in a configuration
J+ ❍ ❍ ❍
file (SYSTEM).

104A Image file access timeout
(for analysis)
• A timeout was found in an image file access. Design analysis error code e-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
• A timeout was detected in the HDD's read/write response.

104B Image file access timeout
(for SCSI analysis)

104C Image file access timeout
(for IMM analysis)
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 44
This error is ignored in the following cases.

1103 Backup memory corruption An error was found in a backup memory check.
• The machine is started immediately after the S2 on the CPU90E F ❍ ❍ ❍
board is turned OFF and back ON.
• The machine is started while the S2 on the CPU90E board is
turned OFF.

[During initialization] • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
1113 HD image area uninitialized An error was found in the format data about the HDD image area.
F ❍ ❍ ❍
This error is ignored in the following case.
• The machine is started immediately after the HDD is formatted.

X-2
• Because the number of IPs in the machine was not two,
1341 Internal
display
IP count warning window the internal IP count warning window was displayed (344/343). • Set IPs in the machine to fulfill the shortage.
(348RU)
D-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Because the number of IPs in the machine was not three,
(344/343)
the internal IP count warning window was displayed (348RU).

• Output the residual image data.
1342 HD full warning window display As the image area on the HDD became full, the HD full warning
• Delete the residual unnecessary images.
- ❍ ❍ ❍
window was displayed.
• Leave the overdose degeneration IP alone for about 16 hours,

and then execute primary erasure before using it. (After 16 hours
[During initialization] have passed, the degeneration is reset.) X-2
1343 Overdose degeneration IP count
warning window display
When transitioning from initialization to routine, an overdose
degeneration IP was found, so that the overexposed IP count
• If you want to immediately use the IP recognized as overexposed,
select the overdose reset command in the U-Utility.
(348RU)
D-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
warning window was displayed. • If an overexposure detection error recurs even when the IP (344/343)
re-exposed with an appropriate dose is used, check the PMT08A
board (343)/PMT08C board (348RU/344) (MT-2.5.3/MC-9.2).

[During initialization] back ON, and reset after clearing the backup memory (MC-2.5).
The CMOS information (IP found) of the machine did not agree with • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2). X-1
the remaining IP search result (IP not found). • Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2). (348RU)
13C7 IP position information error • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference> • Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6). (344/343)
MD-8.4.2 • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 45

[During initialization] back ON, and reset after clearing the backup memory (MC-2.5).
The CMOS information (IP not found) of the machine did not • Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2). X-1
agree with the remaining IP search result (IP found). • Check the SF1 (MT-5.2/MC-6.2). (348RU)
13C8 IP position information error • Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5). X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference> • Check the erasure conveyor mechanism (MD-7.5/MC-6). (344/343)
MD-8.4.2 • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).

1490 Menu unregistration error It was found that the image reading parameter menu was not • Upload (IDT Utility) the menu into the image reader. E-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
registered for the IDT.

• Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (344/348RU).
1533 Insufficient laser power error 1 An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked.
• Check the LD assembly (MD-8.2.2/MC-8.4). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
• Check the the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-3.2/MT-9/MC-13.2)
(348RU/344).

side cover (MC-3).
• Check the SH1 (MT-5.4/MC-12.1).
1554 Laser power error 2 (Cover open) An error was detected when the laser power status was checked
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
during reading (the cover was opened).

side cover (MC-3).
1555 Start point detection error 2
(Cover open)
An error was detected when the start-point detection status was
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
checked during reading (the cover was opened).

side cover (MC-3).
1556 IP leading edge detecting error 2
(Cover open)
An error was detected when the leading-edge detection status was
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
checked during reading (the cover was opened).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 46
cannot be outputted due to [During normal processing]

193A Image
HDF full
An image output request was rejected because the HDD in the
• Output the image data that is stored on the HDD in the external
device (DMS).
F ❍ ❍
external device was full.

193B DMS cannot output image due to
ODF full
An image output request was rejected because the OD in the • Change the OD. F ❍ ❍
external device was full.

193C DMS cannot output image due to
no ODF
The DMS's image output request was rejected because the ODF • Insert an OD into the ODF. F ❍ ❍
did not have an OD for filing.

1980 DMS output request received
when the DMS is invalid
Although a DMS output request was received while the DMC08A
- ❍ ❍
board was not mounted, no DMS output could be generated.
• Check the CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/

MC-20.11).
• Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9) (348RU).
1D01 Option invalidated A DICOM output generation failure was detected.
• Check the HCP08A/DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8) F+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(344/343).
1FF0 ISC message error An ISC message with an unknown destination is queued. Design analysis error code B+ ❍ ❍
1FFF Null transmission to ISC Null data is sent during ISC message transmission. Design analysis error code C+ ❍ ❍ ❍
If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error, use the

following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2000 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A ❍ ❍ ❍
trace data file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2001 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write into • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A ❍ ❍ ❍
a trace data file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 47

2002 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A ❍ ❍ ❍


a trace data file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).


[During initialization] following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2040 Format information error It was found that the management information in the HDD e-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
image area was damaged. • Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).

Abnormal image management information was detected when
2041 Backup data error an attempt was made to load the backup of HDD image
e-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).
management information.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 48

[During initialization/M-Utility mode]
2042 HD cannot be formatted A HDD access error was detected when an attempt was made e-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
to reformat the HDD image area.

2043 Insufficient shared memory The shared memory was found to be insufficient when the e-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
optional functionality was checked. • Check the MMC90A/DIM08A board (MT-2.5.3/IN-6.6.7).
• Check the configuration of installed boards.

[During normal processing] following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2044 HD access error A HDD access error was detected when an attempt was made e-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
to read the format information or image management • Format the image area of the HDD (MU-12.2).
information in the HDD image region. • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).


2049 Illegal option selection An error was detected when the incorporated optional functions
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
e-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
were checked.
• Check the HCP08A/DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

204A Image file access error • An error was detected when an image file was accessed. • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). e-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
• A HDD reset was performed. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

204B SCSI reset error A SCSI reset error or HDD reset error was detected. • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
e-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 49

204C Image file access retry over • The maximum retry count for image file access was exceeded. • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). e-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
• An error was found in a request for HDD access. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

configuration file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2061 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file.
• Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A ❍ ❍ ❍

2062 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file.
• Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A ❍ ❍ ❍

2063 File size error The size of a configuration file was found to be abnormal. • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
A ❍ ❍ ❍

a configuration file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 50

configuration file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2080 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
image processing parameter file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
[During initialization] If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error, use the
• An error was found in the format of an image processing following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
parameter file.
• An error was detected because the software was directly • Check for an improper software update (MU-18.2).
2081 File format error updated from version A00 or earlier to version A04 or later • Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(CR-IR344). • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
• An error was detected because the software was directly • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
updated from version A04 or earlier to version A08 or later • Check the HDD (MT-2.5.4/MC-14).
(CR-IR343). • Format the HDD and reinstall the software (MU-18).

2082 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in an image processing • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
parameter file. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
[During normal processing] • Design analysis error code

• When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was • Ignored when the software version of the HIC654 is A11 or earlier
2083 FINP data error detected and therefore replaced by the default value. (the error is not logged when HIC654 software version update is
A-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
• The software version of the HIC654 is A11 or earlier. executed).

2084 FINP data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
detected but could not be replaced by the default value.

2085 Serial ID information data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
detected and therefore replaced by the default value.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 51

2086 Image processing table is
inappropriate
An error was found in an image processing table.
A-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the external device (DMS).

2087 FINP data error 2 When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-4 ❍ ❍ ❍

2088 Serial ID information data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-5 ❍ ❍ ❍

2089 E-I/F image data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-6 ❍ ❍

208A E-I/F image data error When image ID information was set up, an illegal value was Design analysis error code A-6 ❍ ❍

[During a software update process]
208B File write error Files could not be written onto the HDD. • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2150 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
configuration file (REMOTE SWITCH). • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2151 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 52

2152 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2153 File format error An error was found in the format of a configuration file • Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(REMOTE SWITCH). • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

2154 File setting value error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file • Check the configuration settings (MU-7). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(REMOTE SWITCH). • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4).

2160 MTH board error When the PC boards were checked, the MTH08B/E board was F ❍ ❍ ❍
found to be abnormal. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2161 SCN board error When the PC boards were checked, the SCN08B/C board was • Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (348RU/344). F ❍ ❍ ❍
found to be abnormal. • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).

2162 SNS board error When the PC boards were checked, the SNS08B/D board was • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13). F ❍ ❍ ❍
found to be abnormal. • Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14) (348RU).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 53

2163 HCP board error When the PC boards were checked, the HCP08A board was
• Check the HCP08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.9).
F ❍ ❍ ❍
found to be abnormal.

2170 Energy subtraction exposure
option disabled
Because the IIP connection option was disabled and the energy
subtraction exposure option was enabled, the energy subtraction
Check the settings of the IIP connection option and energy
subtraction exposure option.
F ❍
exposure option was disabled.

21B3 No output destination host
description
An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file
E-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(HOSTS ADDRESS).

21B4 Protocol error An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file E-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(NETWORK HOST INTERFACE).

21B5 Failure to acquire output
destination IP address
An error was found in the setting data in a configuration file
E-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(HOSTS ADDRESS).
Replacing an energy-subtracted, [During normal processing]

Although an energy subtraction exposure was executed,
21B6 low-voltage exposure image with the high-voltage image could not be read; thus, the low-voltage
Execute an energy subtraction exposure again. F ❍
a regular image image was replaced by a regular exposure image.

21D0 HD open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
core dump file.

21D1 HD write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
abnormality information into a core dump file.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 54

21D2 HD close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
core dump file after abnormality information was written into it.

[During the power OFF sequence]
21E0 HD open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
trace data file.

21E1 HD write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
trace data into a trace data file.

21E2 HD close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a
A-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
trace data file after trace data was written into it.
2221 Connection establishment NG When an error is returned upon connection establishment. Nothing is done. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
2222 Transmission of screen display

request command
When transmission of a screen display request command fails. Nothing is done. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
2223 Received data illegal When the status of the key input notification message is improper. Nothing is done. L-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
2224 Error at time of reception When an error is returned upon an end-of-receive event. Nothing is done. L-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
2225 Error at time of socket

preparation
When socket preparation fails. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
2231 Illegal command received When an out-of-spec command is received. The connection is disconnected. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
When an error is returned during connection establishment upon

2232 Connection establishment NG size notification.
Nothing is done. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 55
2233 Received data illegal When the data received through FINP is illegal. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
When ACCEPT is issued and its response is returned but the

2234 End-of-accept notification error returned value is improper.
ACCEPT is issued again. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
When a timeout occurs while waiting for a response to the size

2235 Receive timeout notification command.
The connection is disconnected. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
End-of-transmission notification
2236 error (during menu When a menu acknowledgment notification is transmitted. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
acknowledgment transmission)
2237 error (during transmission of When a menu clear response is transmitted. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
menu clear response)
2238 error (during transmission of size When a size notification request is transmitted. Nothing is done. L-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
notification request)
2239 error (during transmission of size When a size notification response is transmitted. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
notification response)
223B error (during transmission of IP When an IP retreat/release response is transmitted. Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
retreat/release response)
223C Illegal
received
transmission event When the socket number is unknown during end-of-transmission
notification.
Nothing is done. L-3 ❍ ❍ ❍

and a retry operation was performed.
<I/O name>
23A2 IP lifting retry • MA2; IP lift drive motor If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03A2. X-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 56

Although the MA2 turned ON, the SA2 failed to close, and a retry
operation was performed.
X-1
23B1 IP lift home position detection
retry
<I/O name>
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03B1.
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SA2; IP lift home position sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

X-1
23B2 IP moving-up HP detection
preparation positioning retry
<I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MA2 turned ON, the SA2 failed to open, and a retry
X-1
23B3 IP moving-up HP detection
preparation return retry
<I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

operation was performed (348RU). X-1
23B4 IP positioning unit guide HP
detection retry <I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MA1; IP positioning drive motor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 57

IP positioning unit guide HP operation was performed (348RU). X-1
(348RU)
23B5 detection preparation positioning <I/O name>
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
retry • MA1; IP positioning drive motor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

operation was performed (348RU). X-1
23B6 IP positioning unit guide HP
detection preparation return retry <I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MA1; IP positioning drive motor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to close, and a retry
X-1
23B7 After-reading conveyance grip
HP detection retry
<I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SD2; Grip release home position sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 58

Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to close, and a retry
After-reading conveyance grip X-1
<I/O name> (348RU)
23B8 HP detection preparation • MD2; Grip release motor
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
positioning retry • SD2; Grip release home position sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to open, and a retry
After-reading conveyance grip X-1
<I/O name> (348RU)
23B9 HP detection preparation return • MD2; Grip release motor
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
retry • SD2; Grip release home position sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 failed to close, and a retry
X-1
23BA Subscanning
retry
grip HP detection <I/O name>
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03BA.
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• SZ2; Subscanning grip release home position sensor (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 failed to close, and a retry
X-1
23BB Subscanning grip HP detection
<I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 59

Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 failed to open, and a retry
X-1
23BC Subscanning grip HP detection
<I/O name>
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
• Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 23BD (MT-2.5.1).

[During initialization/normal processing] • Check the SA4 (MT-5.3/MC-4.5).
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to close, and a retry • Check the MA4 (MT-6.1/MC-4.9).
operation was performed. • Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12).
23BD IP lift home position detection
retry
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18). X-1 ❍
<I/O name> • Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4).
• MA4; IP lift drive motor • Check the SNS08D board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.14).
• SA4; IP lift home position sensor • Check the DRV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12).

When the SNS08B board checked the drive status of the MZ1,
the motor rotating speed signal was found to be abnormal. • Check the MZ1 (MT-6.4/MC-9.8).
X-1
(348RU)
23BE FFM drive W.F. disorder <I/O name> • Check the SNS08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.13).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
MZ1; Subscanning motor • Check the DRV08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.12) (344/343).
(344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
During erasure conveyance, the detected temperature status of the
• Check the THF1 (MC-6.6).
THF1 was unexpected.
• Check the LAMP1-10 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9).
• Check the FANF1 (MC-6.10).
23C1 Temperature status error <I/O name>
• Check the fuse (F1/F2 <Fluorescent lamp 36W/55W invertor>)
X-1 ❍
THF1; Initialization temperature control lamp temperature sensor
for the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-4/MC-13.4).
<Reference>
MD-8.4.1
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 60
The temperature measured by the THF1 during erasure
• Check the THF1 (MC-6.6).
conveyance was found to be abnormal.
• Check the LAMP1-10 (MT-6.5/MC-6.9).
• Check the FANF1 (MC-6.10).
23CF Thermistor error <I/O name>
• Check the fuse (F1/F2 <Fluorescent lamp 36W/55W invertor>)
X-1 ❍
THF1; Initialization temperature control lamp temperature sensor
for the power supply (JPS-7) (MT-4/MC-13.4).
<Reference>
MD-8.4.1

Although the MA2/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped before
the SZ3 closed. Therefore, the SZ3 failed to close, and a retry
X-1
<I/O name>
(348RU)
23E1 IP hardware halt NG retry • MA2; IP lift drive motor If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03E1.
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
(344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

• Although an attempt was made to convey the IP to the scanner
after-reading conveyor, the MD1 stopped before the SD1
opened. Therefore, the SD1 failed to open, and a retry
• If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error
03E2.
• A timeout occurred in SB1 close during IP conveyance from the
• Check the SB1 (MT-5.1/MC-5.2) (348RU).
setting unit to the scanner. Therefore, a retry operation was X-1
• Check the MA4 (MT-6.1/MC-4.9) (348RU).
performed (348RU). (348RU)
23E2 IP hardware halt NG retry • Check the MB1 (MT-6.2/MC-5.6) (348RU).
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the IP positioning unit mechanism (MD-7.1/MC-4)
<I/O name> (344/343)
(348RU).
• Check the path changeover conveyor mechanism (MD-7.2/MC-5)
(348RU).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 61

Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the MF1 stopped before the
SF1 closed. Therefore, the SF1 failed to close, and a retry
X-1
<I/O name> (348RU)
23E3 IP hardware halt NG retry • MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor)
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03E3.
X-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) (344/343)
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

• Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped
before the SZ3 closed. Therefore, the SZ3 failed to close,
• Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to close, and a
retry operation was performed.
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03B4
23E4 IP hardware halt NG retry <I/O name>
or 03B5.
X-1 ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

X-1
23E5 IP moving-up HP detection
(348RU)
X-1+ ❍
<I/O name>
(344/343)

23E6 IP moving-up HP detection

<I/O name>
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03B4. X-1 ❍
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 62

Although the MH3 turned ON, the SH3 failed to close, and a retry
<I/O name>
23E7 Shutter HP detection retry • MH3; Shutter drive motor
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 03CD. X-1 ❍
• SH3; Shutter sensor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MH3 turned ON, the SH3 failed to close, and a retry
23E8 Shutter HP detection preparation

positioning retry
<I/O name>
• MH3; Shutter drive motor
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

Although the MH3 turned ON, the SH3 failed to open, and a retry
23E9 Shutter HP detection preparation

return retry
<I/O name>
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2

<I/O name>
23EA IP lifting retry • MA4; IP lift drive motor
• Check the MH3 (MT-6.3/MC-12.12).
X-1 ❍
• Check the shutter assembly (MC-12.18).
<Reference>
MD-8.2.2
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 63

2400 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(CRT test pattern display or like file). • Check the MTH08E/B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
2403 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0403. E-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2423 DSP4 image processing error 2 An image processing error was found in the DSP4 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0423. E-2 ❍
(IMG07B board) after image data was read from the scanner.

2437 DSP1 image processing error 1 An image processing error was found in the DSP1 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0437. E-2 ❍ ❍
(BSP08A board) after image data was read from the scanner.

2472 DSP2 image processing error 1 An image processing error was found in the DSP2 device (BSP08A If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0472. E-2 ❍ ❍
board) after image data was read from the scanner.
If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,

2480 EDR data transmission
designation error
An error was detected when an attempt was made to transfer
use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
E-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
the EDR backup data about a read image.
• Check the IP address (MU-7.2).

use the following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2481 Connection establishment error A connection establishment error was detected when an attempt
E-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
was made to transfer the EDR backup data about a read image.
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).

2482 EDR data transmission error A connection error was detected while the EDR backup data
E-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
about a read image was being transferred.
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 64

Although the barcode information and menu were entered via If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error,
the IDT in accordance with the message after the image was use the following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2490 Menu replacement error read without being registered via the IDT, no associated menu
E-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
was found in the image reader. Therefore, the menu code was • Upload (IDT Utility) the menu into the image reader.
replaced with the default one.

• The energy subtraction exposure was selected, but the energy
2491 Function change subtraction processing could not be performed on the reading E-4 ❍
side.
• Only one IP was set in the machine.


[During scanner self-diagnosis]
2530 Interrupt diagnosis error 1
(leading-edge detection)
It was found that a leading-edge detection interrupt could not be
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
initiated.
• Check the SZ1 (SED08A board) (MC-9.5).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).

2531 Interrupt
screen)
diagnosis error 2 (end of [During scanner self-diagnosis]
It was found that an end-of-screen interrupt could not be initiated.
• Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍


• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of
the high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal
• Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (348RU/344).
2535 HV voltage error 1 (343).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of
• Check the PMT08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).
the high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal
• Check the PMT08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (348RU/344).
(front photomultiplier) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 65


2542 Polygon mirror error 2 When the polygon status was checked, the lock signal for the
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
polygon motor was found to be abnormal.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).


[During normal processing] • Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (348RU/344).
2543 Insufficient laser power error 2 An error was detected when the laser power status was checked. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).


[During normal processing] • Check the SCN08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-8.7) (348RU/344).
2544 Laser power error 2 An error was detected when the laser status was checked. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 66


• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage
of the high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal
2545 HV voltage error 2 (343).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage
of the high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal
(front photomultiplier) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).


• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the
2546 Analog power supply error 2 PMT08A board (343).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the
PMT08C board (front photomultiplier) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).


2547 Start point detection error 2 An error was detected when the start point detection status was
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
checked.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 67


[During normal processing] • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7)
2548 IP leading-edge detection
error 2
The IP leading edge detection signal was found to be abnormal (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
when the leading edge detection status was checked. • Check the SZ1 (SED08A board) (MC-9.5).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).

2549 Image quit error (retry) An image quit interrupt was executed, but a timeout occurred.
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0549. E-3 ❍

• Allow the IP recognized as an overexposed IP to be degenerated

and leave it alone for about 16 hours. Then, execute primary
[During normal processing] erasure before using it. (After 16 hours have passed, the
2550 Overexposure detection An overexposure (dosage of higher than 400 mR) was detected. degeneration is reset.)
E-9 ❍ ❍ ❍
• If you want to immediately use the IP recognized as overexposed,
select the overdose reset command in the U-Utility.
• If an overexposure detection error recurs even when the IP
re-exposed with an appropriate dose is used, check the PMT08A
board (343)/PMT08C board (348RU/344) (MT-2.5.3/MC-9.2).

When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the
2560 HV voltage error 1 high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal (rear
• Check the SCN08C (SCR08C) board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20). E-3 ❍ ❍
• Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).
photomultiplier).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 68

When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 2561 (MT-2.5.1).
2561 HV voltage error 2 high-voltage power supply was found to be abnormal (rear • Check the SCN08C (SCR08C) board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20). E-3 ❍ ❍
photomultiplier). • Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).

[During initialization] • Perform the troubleshooting procedure for Error 2564 (MT-2.5.1).
2564 Analog power supply error 2 An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMR08C • Check the SCN08C (SCR08C) board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20). E-3 ❍ ❍
board (rear photomultiplier). • Check the PHV08C board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20).


[During image read error occurrence]
When the polygon status was checked in the event of an image
2570 Polygon mirror error 3 read error, the lock signal for the polygon motor was found to be
• Check the fuse (F3) for the power supply (JPS-7) E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
abnormal.
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
(348RU/344).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 69


2571 Insufficient laser power error 3 An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked.
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).


2572 Laser power error 3 An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked.
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).


[During normal processing] • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).
2573 Insufficient laser power error 4 The laser status was found to be abnormal when it was checked • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
before image reading. • Check the LD assembly (MD-8.2.2/MC-8.4).
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).


[During normal processing] • Check the SCN08B board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20) (343).
2574 Laser power error 4 The laser status was found to be abnormal when it was checked • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3). E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
before image reading. • Check the LD assembly (MD-8.2.2/MC-8.4).
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 70


2575 Start-point detection error 3 An abnormality was detected when the start-point detection • Check the fuse (F2) for the power supply (JPS-7) E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
status was checked in the event of a read error. (MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).


(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (348RU/344).
2576 IP leading-edge detection error 3 An abnormality was detected when the leading-edge detection
• Check the SZ1 (SED08A board) (MC-9.5).
E-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
status was checked in the event of a read error.
(348RU/344).
(MT-4/MT-9/MC-13.4) (343).

[During initialization/normal processing] following suggested remedial action as a guide:
2714 Serial line test error An error was detected when a line test was conducted.
F ❍ ❍ ❍

2716 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to access
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(open/write/close) a device driver (SMCU) file.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 71

[During initialization/normal processing] • Check the CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D board

2723 Unexpected command received The network received an illegal command. (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
H ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the external device (IDT).
• Check the network-connected equipment.

[During initialization/normal processing (ID deletion mode)]
2725 Connection establishment error An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
H ❍ ❍ ❍
the connection with the IDT.

[During initialization/normal processing (IDT-Utility mode)]
2726 Connection establishment error An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish • Check the CPU90F/LAN90B/LAN90D board H ❍ ❍ ❍
the connection with the IDT. (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).

2727 Connection establishment error An error was detected when an attempt was made to establish
(MT-2.5.3/MC-20.10/MC-20.11).
H ❍ ❍ ❍
the connection for command reception.

2751 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
subsystem file (IIF). • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 72

2752 File format error An error was found in the format of a subsystem file (IIF).
• Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2753 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2754 File read error An error was detected when an attempt was made to read a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2755 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍

2756 Image
error
processing parameter An error was found in the checksum on an image processing
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
parameter file.

2757 Image
error
processing parameter An error was found in the format of an image processing parameter
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
file.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 73

2758 Image
error
processing parameter An error was found in the setting data in an image processing
A-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
parameter file.

When a line test was conducted, it was found that the character
2800 Serial line test error string transmitted was inconsistent with the character string
I-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Check the external device (LP).
received.
• Check the external device (LP) cable.

[During initialization/normal processing] following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2801 Undefined/unexpected
received
command An undefined or unexpected command was received from the I-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
external device (LP). • Check the external device (LP).

2802 No response from LP The external device (LP) did not respond to a transmission.
I-8 ❍ ❍ ❍

2803 LP receive command parameter
error
Although external device (LP) command parameter information was I-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
received, an error was found in the received text. • Check the external device (LP).

2804 Old I/F 14" x 17"/B4 unit
judgement error
The film used in the external device (LP) could not be identified.
I-8 ❍ ❍ ❍

2805 HYPER-DRC+USM
processing ignored
image Although image parameter data (MFP) was entered, an image
process could not be performed because the IMG08B/H board
I-9 ❍ ❍ ❍
was not detected.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 74

2806 HYPER-USM
ignored
image processing Although image parameter data (MFP) was entered, an image
process could not be performed because the IMG08B/H board
I-9 ❍ ❍ ❍
was not detected.
[During normal processing] If this error frequently occurs or is followed by a fatal error, use the
Although image parameter data (PEM) was entered, an image following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2807 PEM image processing ignored process could not be performed because the IMG08H board was
I-9 ❍ ❍ ❍
not detected. • Check the IMG08H board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.7).

A request for 4-image output was issued in relation to B4 film.
2808 Output warning 1 However, the requested image will be converted to a single image Design analysis error code I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
and then generated after the output of all the other currently
requested films.
In response to a request for 4-image output, the requested image is

2809 Output warning 2 converted to a single image and is now being generated.
Design analysis error code I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
280B No UID at time of DST output

reservation designation
The UID corresponding to the number of frames was not found. Design analysis error code I-10 ❍ ❍ ❍
• When initialization was effected immediately after software

update, the backup memory was cleared because the backup
memory data was changed by the software update. If this error frequently occurs, check the CPU90E board (it is
280C LIF backup memory clear • The backup memory was cleared when initialization was conceivable that the backup memory battery may be exhausted).
- ❍ ❍ ❍
effected immediately after the CPU90E board was replaced
due to backup memory destruction.
The connected printer is applicable to 14" x 14" film only (including

280D Printer
film
connected only for 14x14 the cases where this action was taken because of degeneration).
Film output cannot be achieved unless the connected printer is set
for B4 film or 14" x 17" film.
2814 DSP10 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0814. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
DSP10 device (IMG08A board).
2815 DSP10 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0815. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 75

2816 DSP10 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP10 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0816. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08A board).
281B DSP11 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 081B. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
281C DSP11 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 081C. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

281D DSP11 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP11 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 081D. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08A board).
DSP20 device (IMG08B/H board).

(IMG08B/H board).
282A DSP21 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 082A. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

282B DSP21 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP21 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 082B. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08B/H board).
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 76

(IMG08B/H board).
284C DSP23 checksum error An error was found in the checksum on the micro program for the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 084C. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
284D DSP23 self-diagnosis error An error was detected in the micro program self-diagnosis on the If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 084D. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍

284E DSP23 image processing error An image processing error was found in the DSP23 device If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 084E. I-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
(IMG08B/H board).
Design analysis error code.

An image was not successfully transferred to the external device
2850 Failure to transfer image to LP (LP).
• Reoutput takes place after the generation of all the I-11 ❍ ❍ ❍
previously requested film outputs.

2912 Unexpected command received An undefined command was received when the DMS line G ❍ ❍
connection was established. • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

2922 Unexpected command received An undefined command was received while an operation was G ❍ ❍
stopped. • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

2940 SMCU transmission error A command was not successfully transmitted to the DMS while E ❍ ❍
image output was in progress.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 77

2941 Receive line break detection A receive line break-ON signal was received while image output F ❍ ❍
was in progress.

2942 Unexpected command received An undefined command was received while image output was in G ❍ ❍
progress. • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

2943 SMCU receive error A command was not successfully received from the DMS while E ❍ ❍
image output was in progress.

2944 Image output terminated Because an image input termination notification was received from F ❍ ❍
the DMS, the image output operation was aborted.

2945 Output interrupted by abort
instruction
An image output operation was interrupted by an abort instruction.
F ❍ ❍
• Turn ON the power.

2946 DSP application execution error A timeout occurred when a DSP application was started.
B ❍ ❍

2947 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image transfer reservation response • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
was awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2948 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image information transfer request • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 78

2949 Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer standby • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
response was awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

294A Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer completion • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
report was awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

294B Image data output error A timeout occurred when an image output completion response • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍

294C Image data output error An error was found in the image transfer completion status.
• Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍

294D Image transfer not allowed The DMS refused to output an image.
d ❍ ❍
294E High-resolution
outputted
image cannot be A high-resolution image could not be output because the DMS
was in the standard resolution mode. Therefore, the DMS stored
F ❍ ❍
image data at the standard resolution. • Check the external device (DMS).
cannot be outputted due to [During normal processing]

294F Image
use by another system
The DMS refused to output an image because it was used by In use by another system. F ❍ ❍
another system.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 79

2950 DSP application execution error A warning was detected by a DSP application.
E ❍ ❍

2960 SMCU transmission error A command was not successfully transmitted to the DMS.
E ❍ ❍

2961 Receive line break detection A receive line break-ON signal was received.
F ❍ ❍

2962 Unexpected command received An undefined command was received.
G ❍ ❍

2963 SMCU receive error A command was not successfully received from the DMS.
E ❍ ❍

2964 Image data input error An image output termination notification was received from the • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
DMS. Or, the DMS issued an image output termination notification. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2965 Input interrupted by abort
instruction
An output operation was interrupted by an abort instruction from the
F ❍ ❍
MFC.
• Turn ON the power.

2966 DSP application execution error A timeout occurred when a DSP application was started.
B ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 80

2967 Image data input error A timeout occurred when an image data transfer preparation • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
request was awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2968 Image data input error A timeout occurred when image data output completion was • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

2969 Image data input error A timeout occurred when image information transmission was • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
awaited. • Check the MTH08B/E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.2/MC-20.3).

296A Image data input error An error was found in an image data output completion notification.

296B Image data input error A timeout occurred when an image input termination response • Check the CPU90E board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.4). F ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 81

296C Image data input error An error occurred in an input image size check that was conducted.

296D Image information FINP
conversion is improper
Although an illegal value was found in input data, an error was
detected when an attempt was made to replace the illegal value
F ❍ ❍
with a default one. • Check the DMC08A board (MT-2.5.3/MC-20.8).

296E Failure
setting
in FINP information It was found that FINP information setting data was outside the
F ❍ ❍
acceptable range.

296F Image data open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open an D ❍ ❍
image data file.

2970 DSP application execution error A warning was detected by a DSP application.
E ❍ ❍

2980 File setting value error An error occurred in a file setting check (siosetup.idt) that was A-1 ❍ ❍
conducted.

2991 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a log A-1 ❍ ❍
file.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 82

2992 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a log A-1 ❍ ❍
file.

2993 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a log A-1 ❍ ❍
file.

2994 SMCU error A DMC08A board error was detected.
E ❍ ❍

2B18 DSPH image processing error A compression/decompression process error was detected.
If this error frequently occurs, refer to the instructions for Error 0B18. L-2+ ❍ ❍ ❍

2B30 Compressed/decompressed
image left
A compression/decompression process came to an end although
L-1+ ❍ ❍ ❍
image data was left to be compressed or decompressed.
• Check the external device (online-connected unit).

2C40 Unexpected command received An unexpected command was received.
M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍

2C41 Image transfer error An error was detected while image data was being transferred.
M-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Since an error was found in the CPU90F board, the
initialization process was continuously performed with
the board changed to the CPU90E board.
2C42 Connection
CPU90E
LAN type changed to
M-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
• Although the CPU90E board was installed, the CPU90F board
was selected in accordance with the configuration setup.
Therefore, the initialization process was continuously
performed with the board changed to the CPU90E board.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 83

2CC0 Unexpected command received An unexpected command was received.
M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍

2CD0 20 line/mm image acceptance A 20 line/mm image input from an external device was rejected - ❍ ❍ ❍
(FIN).

2D00 SCU-related information is illegal It was found that there was no DICOM information for the local host G-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
(DICOM Storage Service SCU). • Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2D02 SCP-related information is illegal It was found that there was no DICOM information for the output G-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
destination host (DICOM Storage Service SCP). • Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2D03 PRINT output not allowed It was found that the output destination attribute in the device G-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
information was PRINT only.
It was found that the output destination host defined in the DICOM following suggested remedial actions as a guide:
2D05 SOP class designation is illegal information file did not agree with the DICOM soft key in SOP class
G-1 ❍ ❍ ❍
designation. • Check the configuration settings (MU-7).

2D06 Older version of HCP board It was found that the installed HCP08A board was an old version, F+ ❍ ❍ ❍
which does not support 11-bit output.
• Replace the HCP08A board with version G or later (MC-20.9).

2D41 Compressed
accepted
image cannot be The external device refused to receive the transmission of a
G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
compressed image.

2D43 HD full It was found that the HDD of the external device was full.
G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 84

2D44 Improper DICOM setup The negotiation for association with the output destination failed.
G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

2D45 Image data transmission error An error was detected in an image data transmission.
G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍

2D50 File open error An error was detected when an attempt was made to open a file.
A ❍ ❍ ❍

2D51 File write error An error was detected when an attempt was made to write a A ❍ ❍ ❍

2D52 File close error An error was detected when an attempt was made to close a A ❍ ❍ ❍
[During software update]

The MPM code for user setup standard gamma parameter data
3080 User setup standard gamma
parameter resetting
coincidence did not exist. Therefore, the user setup standard Design analysis error code A-7 ❍ ❍ ❍
gamma parameter data was replaced with the standard parameter
data having a different MPM code.
30A0 LAN analysis information An error was found in a LAN task (main side or LAN side). Design analysis error code E-1++ ❍ ❍ ❍
30C0 Setup function error An error was found in the setup for SMCU. Design analysis error code A+ ❍ ❍
30C1 Break reset error A break reset error was detected. Design analysis error code A+ ❍ ❍
30C2 Break setup error A break setup error was detected. Design analysis error code A+ ❍ ❍
30C3 Send error An error was found in a transmission process. Design analysis error code A+ ❍ ❍
30C4 Receive error An error was found in a reception process. Design analysis error code A+ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 85

3200 Information about communication
with CSL display software
Inconsistency was detected in the communication with the CSL Design analysis error code L-5 ❍ ❍ ❍
display software.
3728 Network reception error Data reception over the network failed. Design analysis error code H ❍ ❍ ❍
• A timeout occurred when an ID deletion response to the

3729 Error detection during ID delete
response wait
network IDT was awaited.
• An error was detected in the content of the data received
Design analysis error code H ❍ ❍ ❍
from the network IDT.
Although an ID acquisition request was issued to the network IDT,

372B Network transmission error a transmission completion notification error was detected.
Although an ID deletion request was issued to the network IDT, a

372C Network transmission error transmission completion notification error was detected.
Although IDT utility information was transmitted to the network IDT,

372D Network transmission error a transmission completion notification error was detected.
3800 Receive line break detection A receive line break was detected. Design analysis error code I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
3801 LP status error A line error was found in an external device (LP). Design analysis error code I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
3802 LP level 0 error The system of an external device (LP) was found to be down. Design analysis error code I-6 ❍ ❍ ❍
An external device (LP) failed in its attempt to achieve error

3803 LP error recovery failure recovery.
3804 Character
error
string transmission Although a character string was transmitted to an external device
(LP), a transmission completion error was detected.
3805 No FINP ID ID information (Finp) was not found. Design analysis error code I-12 ❍ ❍ ❍
3806 Board insertion error The IMG08M board (for 5000MA) was installed in the machine. Design analysis error code - ❍ ❍ ❍
[While the line was established]

3910 SMCU transmission error An error was found in a command transmission to the DMS.
Design analysis error code E ❍ ❍

Design analysis error code F ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 86

[During an idle state]

3920 SMCU transmission error An error was found in an SMCU transmission.

Design analysis error code F ❍ ❍

3A01 Acceptance error The connection with the IDT failed. Design analysis error code K-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
3A02 Control
error
information transmission Although a communication with the image adjustment screen was
made, an error was detected in the transmission result.
Design analysis error code K-8 ❍ ❍ ❍
3A03 Data reception error An error was detected in the data received from the IDT. Design analysis error code K-9 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C60 Socket acquisition function error An error was found in the socket acquisition function (js_socket). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C61 Connect function error An error was found in the connect function (js_connect). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C62 BIND function error An error was found in the BIND function (js_bind). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C63 LISTEN function error An error was found in the LISTEN function (js_listen). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C64 ACCEPT function error An error was found in the ACCEPT function (js_accept). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C65 Connect error An error was found in a request for control line connection. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C66 Transmission completion error An error was found in a transmission of the FINP command. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C67 Reception completion error An error was found in a data reception from an external device. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function

3C68 Socket number zero (js_socket) was zero.
Design analysis error code - ❍ ❍ ❍
3C69 Not
task
transferable to transmission A message could not be transferred to a transmission task due to
an illegal socket number.
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
MT 2 - 87
3C6A Error on the receiving end An error occurred in an external device. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
3C70 LAN initialization timeout The CPU90F/LAN90B/D board did not respond. Design analysis error code - ❍ ❍ ❍
A board program could not be loaded from the CPU90E board

3C71 LAN board initialization error because the CPU90F/LAN90B/D board did not start up.
Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE0 Socket acquisition function error An error was found in the socket acquisition function (js_socket). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE1 Connect function error An error was found in the connect function (js_connect). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE2 BIND function error An error was found in the BIND function (js_bind). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE3 LISTEN function error An error was found in the LISTEN function (js_listen). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE4 ACCEPT function error An error was found in the ACCEPT function (js_accept). Design analysis error code M-4 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE5 Connect error An error was found in a request for data line connection. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE6 Transmission completion error An error was found in a transmission of the FINP command. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
3CE7 Reception completion error An error was found in a data reception from an external device. Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function

3CE8 Socket number zero (js_socket) was zero.
A message could not be transferred to a reception task due to an

3CE9 Not transferable to reception task illegal socket number.
In a multi-frame image reception sequence, more than 90 seconds

3CEA Multi-frame timeout elapsed between the reception of the data of a frame and the Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍
reception of the data of the next frame.
The reception process came to an end although the image data to

3CEB All image data not received be received was not completely received for all sizes.
Design analysis error code M-3 ❍ ❍ ❍

3D40 Line error A network line error was detected.
Design analysis error code G-2 ❍ ❍ ❍
003-352-03
06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 88
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 89
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 90
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 91
2.4 Format of Detail Information
Description of Each Parameter

Type Format
Form Notation Name Significance/Description
AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of
BBBBBBBB variable length File name
(up to 8 characters)
A AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
CCC Character string of fixed
Extension Blank if there is no extension.
length (3 characters)
“_ _ _ _” is used if line number cannot be obtained

DDDD Four decimal digits Line number as with a binary file.
A+ AAAA.BBB.CCCC BBB 3 digit character string Subsystem name Requesting subsystem
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Error status Return value from a driver (for analysis)
Character string of
A-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
Character string of fixed
CCC Extension Blank if there is no extension.

DDDD Four decimal digits Line number
as with a binary file.
Character string of
A-1+ AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC BBBBBBBB variable length
File name
CCC Character string of fixed Extension Blank if there is no extension.

TR8H1501.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 92

Type Format
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)

A-2 AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DDDD.EEEE.F-F
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits FINP data length (For analysis)
Character string of
EEEE FCR image ID “_ _ _ _” is used if there is no FCR image ID.
fixed length (4 characters)
Hexadecimal dump Original data

F-F “_ _” is used if the data length is 0.
of variable length
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits Coordinate point count (left) *1 “_ _ _ _” if pixels do not exist or are normal. (for analysis)
FFFF Four hexadecimal digits Coordinate point count (right) *1 “_ _ _ _” if pixels do not exist or are normal. (for analysis)
AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DDDD.EEEE.FFFF.
A-3 GGGG.HHHH.IIII.JJJJJJJJJJ. GGGG Four hexadecimal digits Unsharp mask value (left) “_ _ _ _” if an unsharp mask value does not exist or
KKKKKKKKKK is normal.
HHHH Four hexadecimal digits Unsharp mask value (right) “_ _ _ _” if an unsharp mask value does not exist or
is normal.
Character string of
IIII fixed length (4 characters) FCR image ID “_ _ _ _” if an FCR image ID does not exist.
Character string of
JJJJJJJJJJ fixed length Patient ID “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if a patient ID does not exist.
(10 characters)
Character string of
KKKKKKKKKK fixed length Exposure date YYYY.MM.DD
(10 characters) “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if an exposure date does not exist.
TR8H1502.EPS
*1 • The “coordinate point count” is the number of coordinate points for image processing parameter table (line/curve) creation.
• The parenthesized words “left” and “right”, which are positioned to the right of “coordinate point count”, relate to the left- and right-hand side images obtained in the two-image output mode.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 93

Type Format
AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DDDD.EEEE. Character string of “_ _ _ _” if an FCR image ID does not exist or cannot

EEEE FCR image ID
fixed length (4 characters) be acquired.
A-4 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF.
GGGGGGGGGG.H-H Character string of
FFFFFFFFFFF- fixed length Patient ID “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if a patient ID does not exist or
FFFFF (16 characters) cannot be acquired.
Character string of YYYY.MM.DD

GGGGGGGG- Exposure date
fixed length (10 characters) “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if an exposure date does not exist
GG
or cannot be acquired.
H-H Variable-length Original data “_ _” when the data length is 0.

hexadecimal number dump
A-5 AAAA.BBBB.CC___CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Data start position (For analysis)
CC___CC Variable-length Original data “_ _” when the data length is 0. (for analysis)
Character string of “_ _ _ _” if an FCR image ID does not exist or cannot

BBBB FCR image ID
fixed length (4 characters) be acquired.
Character string of “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if a patient ID does not exist.

AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCCCCC. CCCCCCCCCC fixed length (10 characters) Patient ID
A-6 DDDDDDDDDD.EEEE.FF___FF
Character string of YYYY.MM.DD
DDDDDDDDDD fixed length (10 characters) Exposure date “_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” if an exposure date does not exist
or cannot be acquired.
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits Data start position (For analysis)
FF___FF Variable-length Original data “_ _” when the data length is 0. (for analysis)
TR8H1503.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 94

Type Format

A-7 AAAA.BBBB
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits MPM code

A-8 AAAA.B
B One hexadecimal digit Slot number (For analysis)
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number 00: DSP0 (DMC08A board)
AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDDDD.EEEEEE. 0000: Ended normally

B FFFFFF.GGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII.JJJJJJ.
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits
Function or end-of-message 0006: Aborted by cancel
KKKKKK status 0008: Timeout
(For analysis)
DDDDDD-
Hexadecimal DSP detail code (For analysis)
KKKKKK

B+ AAAA.BBBBBBB
Character string of
BBBBBBB Error detection function name
variable length
1: ch1
B One hexadecimal digit DMA channel number 2: ch2
(For analysis)
C AAAA.B.CCCC
0000: Ended normally
Function or end-of-message 0006: Aborted by cancel
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits
status 0008: Timeout
(For analysis)
Character string of Error message (For analysis)

C+ AAAA.BB___BB.CC___CC BB___BB
variable length
Character string of Receive message (For analysis)
CC___CC
variable length
TR8H1504.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 95

Type Format
Image UID (unique number for

D AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits
image management)
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor (For analysis)
Character string of
D-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
Character string of fixed Extension Blank if there is no extension.
CCC
_ _ _ _ is used if line number cannot be obtained


D-6 AAAA.BB
BB Two hexadecimal digits IP number IP number where error was detected.
D-7 AAAA.BBBB.CCC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits FPMC error status
CCC 3-digit character string Motor name
B One hexadecimal digit Film output unit status

d AAAA.BCD
C One hexadecimal digit Temporary storage device status
D One hexadecimal digit Permanent storage device status

TR8H1505.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 96

Type Format

E AAAA.BBBB
Function or end-of-message
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
status
Character string of
E-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
Character string of
B One hexadecimal digit Output information ID number

E-1+ AAAA.B.C.DDDD.EEEE.FFFF.GGGG
C One hexadecimal digit Image UID count
DDDD-GGGG Four hexadecimal digits Image UID (for each image UID)
Character string of
BBB Subsystem name Command-requesting subsystem
CCCCCCCC Character string of Command name Requested command

AAAA.BBB.CCCCCCCC. fixed length (8 characters)
E-1++ DDDDDDDD.EEEEEEEE.
FFFFFFFF DDDDDDDD Eight hexadecimal digits Error detail code (See the Detail Code Table.)
Socket number
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits Socket number
Task ID for a DICOM process.
OS error code or DICOM common software error

FFFFFFFF Eight hexadecimal digits errno
code (for analysis)
TR8H1506.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 97

Type Format
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number

AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDDDD.EEEEEE.
E-2 FFFFFF.GGGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII.
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status (For analysis)
JJJJJJ.KKKKKK
DDDDDD “_ _ _ _ _ _” is used if it cannot be obtained
Six hexadecimal digits DSP internal detail information
-KKKKKK (for analysis)
BB Two hexadecimal digits Scanner status port 1 (For analysis)
CC Two hexadecimal digits Scanner status port 2 (For analysis)
The time from the start of reading (leading-edge

DDDD Four decimal digits Error detection timing detection) to the detection of error, measured
in 10 msec. If it cannot be obtained, “_ _ _ _” is used.
E-3 AAAA.BB.CC.DDDD.E.F.G
“_”: Used when it cannot be obtained.
E One hexadecimal digit SD3 sensor status
Irrelevant to the CR-IR343/344.
G: ST
Character-string of fixed
F Reading mode R: HR
length (1 character)
_: Used when it cannot be obtained.
G One hexadecimal digit IP size '_' is used when it cannot be obtained.
E-4 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
E-5 AAAA.B.CCCC B One hexadecimal digit DMA channel number (For analysis)

TR8H1507.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 98

Type Format
E-6 AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor (For analysis)
E-7 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCC BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Socket number (For analysis)

E-8 AAAA.BBBB
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Menu code

e-1 AAAA.BB
BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number (For analysis)
e-2 AAAA.BB.CCCC BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number (For analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID Error image UID
BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number (For analysis)

e-3 AAAA.BB.CC.DDDD
CC Two hexadecimal digits Amount of shared memory Amount of shared memory installed (MWord)
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits Option Request option value
e-4 AAAA.BB.C BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number (For analysis)
C One hexadecimal digit Internal error code (For analysis)

TR8H1508.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 99

Type Format
BBB Fixed-length (3-character) Requested subsystem

string
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits HDD restart count

AAAA.BBB.CCCC.DDDD.EEEE.FF-FF.
e-5 GG-GG.HHHH
EEEE Four hexadecimal digits HDD restart count per image
Fixed-length
F-F SCSI task status (For analysis)
(16-character) string
Fixed-length
G-G IMM I/O task status (For analysis)
(16-character) string
Number of requests issued to
HHHH Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
IMM I/O task
e-6 AAAA.BB___BB
Character string of Error occurrence function name,
BB–BB (For analysis)
variable length trace information, etc.
F AAAA. AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
F+ AAAA.BBB Character string of

BBB variable length Receive command
G AAAA.BBB Two hexadecimal digits

BBB or character string of Receive command (For analysis)
variable length
G-1 AAAA.BBBB
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
TR8H1509.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 100

Type Format
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Output destination IP address

AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCC.DDDDDDDD.
G-2 EEEEEEEE
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
DDDDDDDD Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status Detail code of LAN task (for analysis)
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits Execution result for Base on (For analysis)
DICOM common software
“_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _” is used when the destination IP

BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address
H AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCC address cannot be obtained.
Socket number or command

CCCC Four hexadecimal digits (For analysis)
number

I AAAA.BBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits

Character string of
I+ AAAA.BBBBBBBBBBBB.CCCC BBBBBB
variable length File name
BBBBBB
CCCC Four decimal digits Line number “_ _ _ _” is used for OPEN error.
Character string of
I-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
Character string of fixed
TR8H1522.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 101

Type Format
I-2 AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID
CC Two hexadecimal digits File Discripter (For analysis)

I-3 AAAA.BBBB
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Format number (For analysis)
B One hexadecimal digit or no digit Abnormality description 1: Search format abnormality
B One hexadecimal digit or no digit Abnormality description 2: B4 format search failure
B One hexadecimal digit or no digit Abnormality description 3: 14"x17" format search failure
AAAA.BBBBBB.CC.DD.EE.FF.GG.HH.II.
I-4 JJ.KK.LLLL.MMMMM.NN.OO
B One hexadecimal digit or no digit Abnormality description 4: Image number search failure
00: B4 film 05: 8"x10" film

CC Two hexadecimal digits Film used 01: 14" x 17" film
02: 14"x14" film
TR8H1510.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 102

Type Format
01: Standard density 10" x 8" 11: High density 10" x 8"
05: Standard density 502 8" x 10" 15: High density 502 8" x 10"
06: Standard density 9.5" x 9.5" 16: High density 9.5" x 9.5"
DD Two hexadecimal digits Read size code 08: Standard density 17" x 17" 18: High density 17" x 17"
09: Standard density 18cm x 43cm 19: High density 18cm x 43cm
0A: Standard density 24cm x 18cm 1A: High density 24cm x 18cm
0B: Standard density 24cm x 30cm 1B: High density 24cm x 30cm
0C: Standard density 35cm x 35cm 1C: High density 35cm x 35cm
0D: Standard density 35cm x 43cm 1D: High density 35cm x 43cm
0E: Standard density 30cm x 15cm 1E: High density 30cm x 15cm
0F: Standard density 24cm x 24cm 1F: High density 24cm x 24cm
AAAA.BBBB.CC.DD.EE.FF.GG.HH.II.
I-4 JJ.KK.LLLL.MMMMM.NN.OO 00: 90-degree rotation OFF
EE Two hexadecimal digits 90-degree rotation flag
01: 90-degree rotation ON
00: S (one-image output)

01: LR (simultaneous output of left and right of one image)
02: L-R (individual output of left or right of one image)
FF Two hexadecimal digits Film format
03: AB (two-image output, with different size or different image number)
04: SS (two-image output, with same size and same image number)
05: ABCD (four-image)
00: No location change

01: Changed (correspond to FC1 of FilmFmt.Cfg)
GG Two hexadecimal digits Film character location 03: Changed (correspond to FC3 of FilmFmt.Cfg)
change 04: Changed (correspond to FC4 of FilmFmt.Cfg)
00: Image area

HH Two hexadecimal digits Area type
01: Film character area
TR8H1511.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 103

Type Format
00: Image area 0 (first frame)

01: Image area 1 (second frame)
02: Image area 2 (third frame)
03: Image area 3 (fourth frame)
10: Character area 0-0 (top of first frame)
11: Character area 0-1 (bottom of first frame)
II Two hexadecimal digits Area number 12: Character area 1-0 (top of second frame)
13: Character area 1-1 (bottom of second frame)
14: Character area 2-0 (top of third frame)
15: Character area 2-1 (bottom of third frame)
16: Character area 3-0 (top of fourth frame)
17: Character area 3-1 (bottom of fourth frame)
AAAA.BBBB.CC.DD.EE.FF.GG.HH.II. 00: 180-degree rotation OFF

I-4 JJ.KK.LLLL.MMMMM.NN.OO JJ Two hexadecimal digits 180-degree rotation flag
01: 180-degree rotation ON
00: S (one-image output)

01: LR (simultaneous output of left and right of one
image)
KK Two hexadecimal digits LR flag 02: L-R (individual output of left or right of one image)
03: AB (two-image output, with different size or
different image number)
04: SS (two-image output, with same size and same
image number)
05: ABCD (four-image)
For LR, a detail determination is made to discriminate
between LR and L-R.
0000–0FFF: B4 format
1000–1FFF: 14"x17" format
LLLL Four hexadecimal digits Format management number
TR8H1512.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 104

Type Format
First digit: Film used
0: B4
1: 14"x17"
2: 14"x14"
5: 8"x10"
Second digit: Reading image size code
Same as the reading size code for DD
Third digit: 90-degree rotation designation
0: 90-degree rotation OFF/90-degree
rotation ON
AAAA.BBBB.CC.DD.EE.FF.GG.HH.II. Character string of Fourth digit: Search format
I-4 JJ.KK.LLLL.MMMMM.NN.OO
MMMMM
5 digits
Format search code
0: S image character, AB character
1: LR/L_R/SS image character, AB image
2: Different-size 18cm-x-43cm AB image character
4: 14"x17" or 8"x10", with ABCD image character
5: Other than 14"x17" or 8"x10", with ABCD
image character
6: 100% magnification 18cm-x-24cm AB image
character
Fifth digit: Film background
0: Transparent
1: Black
TR8H1513.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 105

Type Format
00: One-image normal for B4/8"x10" film

01: Two-image normal for B4
02: One-image 8"x10" landscape for B4/8"x10" film
03: Two-image pantomo for B4
05: Character position change for B4 film
06: Different-size 18cm-x-24cm AB for B4
07: Two-image special for B4 film
10: 14" x 17" film 1-image normal/
NN Two hexadecimal digits Format classification 14" x 14" film 1-image normal
11: 14" x 17" film 2-image normal
12: 14" x 17" film 1-image 8" x 10" landscape
AAAA.BBBB.CC.DD.EE.FF.GG.HH.II.
I-4 JJ.KK.LLLL.MMMMM.NN.OO 13: 14" x 17" film 2-image panoramic tomography
14: 14" x 17" film 4-image
15: Film character position change for 14"x17"/
14"x14"/8"x10"
16: Different-size 18cm-x-24cm AB for 14"x17"
17: Two-image special for 14"x17"
For B4/14"x14"/8"x10" film

01_08
Image number
OO Two hexadecimal digits (Detail number within For 14"x17" film
format classification code)
01_08: 14"x17" area is used.
08_10: B4 area is used.
I-5 AAAA.B.CCCC B One hexadecimal digit Channel number (For analysis)
I-6 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code

TR8H1514.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 106

Type Format
10: DSP10/11: DSP11
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number 20: DSP20/21: DSP21/22: DSP22/23: DSP23
30: DSP30/31: DSP31/32: DSP32/33: DSP33
AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDD DDDDDD Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
DD.EEEEEE.FFFFFF.
I-7 GGGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII. EEEEEE Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
JJJJJJ.KKKKKK
FFFFFF Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
GGGGGG Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
HHHHHH Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
IIIIII Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
JJJJJJ Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)
KKKKKK Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area (For analysis)

I-8 AAAA.BB
BB Two hexadecimal digits SMCU receive command (For analysis)
TR8H1515.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 107

Type Format
C One hexadecimal digit Film used face number 0: One face, 1: Two faces (for analysis)
I-9 AAAA.BBBB.C.D 0: First frame
1: Second frame
D One hexadecimal digit Used frame number
2: Third frame
4: Fourth frame

I-10 AAAA.BBBB
BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Number of frames
AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCCCCC. Character string of

BBBB Image ID number
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD 4 digits
I-11 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Character string of
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD CCCCCCCCCC Barcode number
10 digits
DDDD
Character string of
DDDDDDDD... Patient ID number
64 digits
TR8H1516.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 108

Type Format
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP group number (For analysis)
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number (For analysis)
I-12 AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DDDD.E.F E One hexadecimal digit Film used face number 0: One face, 1: Two faces (for analysis)
0: First frame
1: Second frame
F One hexadecimal digit Used frame number
2: Third frame
4: Fourth frame
J AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCCCCCC BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits Barcode
J+ AAAA.BBBBBBBB Character string of

BBBBBBBB variable length Configuration KEY

K-8 AAAA.BBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status LAN task detail code (for analysis)
K-9 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCCCCCC BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status LAN task detail code (for analysis)
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits LAN task error code (For analysis)
TR8H1517.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 109

Type Format

L-1 AAAA.BBBBBBBB
Four hexadecimal digits Image UID UID of image data to be opened, written, or read
L-1+ AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor File descriptor when the image data is opened
L-2 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCCCCCC BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status LAN task detail code (for analysis)
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits Error number Error number set by the OS (for analysis)
BB Two hexadecimal digits DSP number DSP number (0H) for HCP
AAAA.BB.CCCC.DDDDDD.EEEEEE.
L-2+ FFFFFF.GGGGGG.HHHHHH.IIIIII. CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Status End status for function or message (for analysis)
JJJJJJ.KKKKKK
“_ _ _ _ _ _” is used if detail information internal to
DDDDDD
Six hexadecimal digits DSP detail information DSP cannot be obtained or if there is no meaning
-KKKKKK
(for analysis).
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits File name dsphm1j

L-3 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCC.DDDD
CCC Three hexadecimal digits Extension s24
DDDD Four hexadecimal digits Line number “_ _ _ _”

L-3+ AAAA.BBBBBBBB
Socket number Socket number related to an error occurrence
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits
TR8H1518.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 110

Type Format

L-4 AAAA.BBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Command number PNL-to-OCX communication command number
L-4+ AAAA.B.CCCC B One hexadecimal digit Channel number Channel number used for DMA transfer (for analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status End status for function or message (for analysis)
L-5 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCCCCCC BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Detail code For design analysis
CCCCCCCC Eight hexadecimal digits Parameter For design analysis
L-6 AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID Image UID where HDD access error occurred
CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor File descriptor where HDD access error occurred
M-1 AAAA.B.CCCC B One hexadecimal digit Channel number Channel number used for DMA transfer (for analysis)
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status End status for function or message (for analysis)
M-2 AAAA.BBBB.CC BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID UID for image data to be opened, written, or read
File descriptor when the image data is opened

CC Two hexadecimal digits File descriptor
(for analysis)
TR8H1519.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 111

Type Format
BBBBBBBB Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address IP address of the device connected to the machine
M-3 AAAA.BBBBBBBB.CCCC over the network
Socket number or command number obtained
Socket number or
CCCC Four hexadecimal digits when a connection request is made. “_ _ _ _” is
command number
used when there is no meaning (for analysis).

M-4 AAAA.BBBBBBBB
AAAA.BBBB.CCCCCCCCCC. BBBB Character string of 4 digits FCR image ID

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
M-5 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD CCCCCCCCCC Character string of 10 digits Barcode number
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDD.EEEEEEE DDDDDDDD... Character string of 64 digits Patient ID
EEEEEEEE Eight hexadecimal digits Destination IP address IP address of the device connected to the machine
over the network
M-6 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code
Character string of
O AAAA.BB-BB.CCCC BB-BB variable length File name
CCCC Four decimal digits Line number “_ _ _ _” is used for OPEN error.
P AAAA.BB-BB. Character string of

KEY name in
BB-BB variable length
(up to 8 characters) Configuration Setting
TR8H1520.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 112

Type Format
Indicates the sensor status in the SA1, SA2, SA3,

Error code SA4, SB1, SB2, SB3, SB4, SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1,
AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Sensor status (16 sensors) SF2, SH3, SZ2, and SZ3 order.
0: Open 1: Closed
Indicates the lamp status in the LDSN1 to LDSN8 order.

Lamp status (8 lamps)
0: Illuminated 1: Extinguished
B-B 27 binary digits Indicates the thermistor status in the THERR,
Thermistor status LAMPON, and LAMPOFF order.
(3 thermistors) 0: Normal (THERR) or not requested (LAMPON/LAMPOFF)
1: Abnormal (THERR) or requested (LAMPON/LAMPOFF)
Numbers of the tables that determined the erasure

conveyance speeds for IPs (#1, #2, and #3).
Space (0x20) for no IP.
0: Passage erasure
1: Standard sensitivity 0 to 25 mR/medium-high
sensitivity 0 to 25 mR/high sensitivity 0 to 25 mR
X-1 AAAA.B-B.CCC.D.EEE.FFFFF.GGGG sensitivity 25 to 40 mR/high sensitivity 25 to 40 mR
sensitivity 40 to 63 mR
CCC Three hexadecimal digits Erasure speed table numbers 4: Standard sensitivity 63 to 85 mR/medium-high
6: Standard sensitivity 120 to 200 mR
A: Standard sensitivity 350 to 400 mR/medium-high
sensitivity 120 mR or higher/high sensitivity 40 mR or
higher
B: Standard sensitivity 400 mR or higher
Number of the IP that caused an error (#1 to #3).
D One hexadecimal digit Error occurrence IP number Space (0x20) when the error cause is not related to IPs.
0: #1 1: #2 2: #3
TR8H1521.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 113

Type Format
Subscanning modes for IPs (#1 to #3).

Space (0x20) when no IP is involved.
0: 151.47mm/s (V0)
EEE Three hexadecimal digits Subscanning mode numbers 1: 75.74mm/s (V1)
2: 37.89mm/s (V2)
3: 18.93mm/s (V3)
4: 9.47mm/s (V4)
Numbers of the motors (up to 5 motors are

simultaneously driven) that were driven when an
error occurred.
X-1 AAAA.B-B.CCC.D.EEE.FFFFF.GGGG
Space (0x20) when the error cause is not
related to motors.
0: MA1 7: MB4
FFFFF Five hexadecimal digits Error occurrence motor number 1: MA2 8: MD1
2: MA3 9: MD2
3: MA4 A: MF1
4: MB1 B: MH3
5: MB2 C: MZ2
6: MB3
GGGG Four decimal digits Subscanning motor malfunction time Variable in 10 msec increments.

Indicates the sensor status in the SA1, SA2, SA3,
SB1, SB2, SB3, SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1,SZ2, and
Sensor status (12 sensors)
SZ3 order.
X-1+ AAAA.B-B.CC.D.EE.FFFFF.GGGG
0: Open 1: Closed
B-B 20 binary digits
Indicates the lamp status in the LDSN1 to
Lamp status (8 lamps) LDSN8 order.
0: Illuminated 1: Extinguished
BRS is set only for LDSN1-4.
TR8H1524.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 114

Type Format
Indicates the table number (0 through B) where the

erasure conveyance speed was determined for the IP
number (#1 or #2).
For no IP, space (0x20) is set.
Arranged in the order of IP numbers.
0: Passage erasure
CC Two hexadecimal digits Erasure speed table numbers sensitivity 40 to 63 mR
X-1+ AAAA.B-B.CC.D.EE.FFFF.GGGG 8: Standard sensitivity 250 to 300 mR
A: Standard sensitivity 350 to 400 mR/medium-high
sensitivity 120 mR or higher/high sensitivity 40 mR or
higher
B: Standard sensitivity 400 mR or higher
Indicates the IP number (#1 or #2) for the IP where an
D One hexadecimal digit Error occurrence IP number error occurred. When the error was not caused by the
IP, space (0x20) is set.
0: #1 1: #2
Indicates the subscanning speed mode for the IP
number (#1 or #2).
For no IP, space (0x20) is set.
Set in the order of IP numbers.
EE Two hexadecimal digits Subscanning mode numbers 0: 151.47mm/s (V0)
1: 75.74mm/s (V1)
2: 37.89mm/s (V2)
3: 18.93mm/s (V3)
4: 9.47mm/s (V4)
TR8H1525.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 115

Type Format
Indicates the number of the motor that was driven
upon occurrence of an error.
When the error was not caused by the IP, space
(0x20) is set.
Error occurrence motor 0: MA1 6: MD1
FFFF Four hexadecimal digits
X-1+ AAAA.B-B.CC.D.EE.FFFF.GGGG number 1: MA2 7: MD2
2: MA3 8: MF1
3: MB1 9: MZ2
4: MB2 A: MZ1
5: MB3
Subscanning motor
GGGG Four decimal digits Variable in 10 msec increments.
malfunction time

X-2 AAAA.BB
BB Two hexadecimal digits IP number IP number where error was detected
TR8H1526.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 116
2.4.1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information
■ Sensor Number Correspondence Table (Applicable to Type: “X-1+”, Format Symbol “B”) MSH8
ESH1
No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name No. Sensor name MSH6
1 SA1 6 SB3 11 SZ2 16 LDSN4 HDD
FDD
2 SA2 7 SD1 12 SZ3 17 LDSN5
MSH11 MSH10
3 SA3 8 SD2 13 LDSN1 18 LDSN6 MSH9
MSH7
4 SB1 9 SE1 14 LDSN2 19 LDSN7 FANH3
FANH4 MH2
5 SB2 10 SF1 15 LDSN3 10 LDSN8
MH1
TR4H1300.EPS FANH5
SVH1, 2
SH2 FAN6–8
MB2
■ Motor Number Correspondence Table (Applicable to Type: “X-1 ”, Format Symbols “F”, +
SB1 SB3 SB2
MB1 MB3
“G”, “H”, and “I”) SH1 TSWF6 TSWF1, 3

FANH1
TSWF2
No. Motor name No. Motor name TSWF8
LAMP1–4
0 MA1 5 MB3 SA1 SZ3 MZ2 LAMP5–8
TSWF5 MA1 MZ1
1 MA2 6 MD1 SZ2 SZ1
MA3 FANF1–4
2 MA3 7 MD2 SA3 MA2
SD2
3 MB1 8 MF1 SA2
SF1
MSH3,4 MF1
SD1 SE1 MD1
4 MB2 9 MZ2
MD2
TR4H1301.EPS
MSH1, 2
NOTE: The I/O symbol has the following meaning.

SB2
Serial number
Unit symbol (A, B, D-F, H, Z)

Example) B: Path changeover conveyor
The unit symbol may sometimes be omitted.
I/O type
S: Sensor
M: Motor
TSW: Thermal switch
MSH: Microswitch
FAN: Fan
SV: Solenoid valve
and more
FR4H2012.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 117
2.4.2 Format of Abort Code

If any trouble occurs on the machine with an abort code displayed on the machine’s display panel,
take remedial action in accordance with the following procedures.
■ Example of Abort Code

Abort message Abort code Significance Probable cause
CDM:CdmInit:Could not allocate
memory for config data. 02120000 Failure to reserve the machine configuration area Insufficient main memory
matrix_select:Undefined event Matrix
=AAAAAAAA EVENT=BBBBBBBB 02010001 Undefined event received Illegal function call
"Memory overflow." 05050001 Failure to reserve memory Insufficient main memory
TR8H1326.EPS
■ Remedy
(1) Write down the top three lines of the message displayed, and notify them to the Service
Headquarters.
(2) Reset the machine.
■ Abort code list
Abort message Abort code Significance Probable cause

PNL:MEMORY ALLOC FAILED 5020000 Insufficient memory The available memory was not
adequate for object generation or
other purpose.
The file was not found on the HDD,
the file on the HDD was damaged, or
PNL:FONT FILE ERROR 5020002 Font file load error the hard disk drive was faulty.
A physical screen could not be
generated due to queue creation
PNL:VCWindow ERROR 5020003 Physical screen generation error failure, etc.
PNL:MESSAGE FILE LOAD FAILED 5020004 Message file load error the hard disk drive was faulty.
PNL:BITMAP FILE LOAD FAILED 5020007 Bitmap file error the hard disk drive was faulty.
TR8H5106.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 118
2.4.3 Network Error Status

In general, the network-related error status is either of the following two:
Status Description
0xfffffb49 When a reception request/transmission request was
being made, the line was disconnected by the
distant party.
0xfffffb4a An error occurred with the OS-supplied function
(ZbufSockRecv).
TR8H2301.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 119
2.5 Troubleshooting Flow ■ Preparation

1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the exposure unit front cover.
2.5.1 Error Code Analysis Flows
■ Analysis Flow
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
“■ I/O Locations” is described using the CR-IR348RU by way of example.
To check the I/O locations for the applicable machine, see its Machine Description Volume. Note the error log with the
“5. I/O Arrangement” in the “Machine Description” volume M-Utility.
“2.1 How to View the Error Log”
03A0, 03BD 1
N
Is the sensor (SA3) normal? Replace the sensor (SA3).
■ Error Occurrence Conditions
Y “5.1 Checking the SA1, SA2, SA3, SB1, SB2, and SB3”
03A0 Bucky operation error
N
[During initialization/normal processing] Is the motor (MA3) normal? Replace the motor (MA3).
Although the MA3 turned ON, the SA3 did not close. Y “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4”
<I/O name>
N
• MA3; Bucky drive motor Does the error recur? 1
• SA3; Bucky home position sensor
Y
03BD Bucky H.P. detection error
[During initialization/normal processing] Replace the components in the order indicated below:
1. SNS08B board
Although the MA3 turned ON, the SA3 did not close.
2. DRV08C board (CR-IR348RU)/DRV08B board (CR-IR344/343)
<I/O name> 3. MTH08B/E board
• MA3; Bucky drive motor “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
• SA3; Bucky home position sensor of Parts” volume. FR8H2300.EPS
■ I/O Locations
Path changeover
conveyor
IP positioning unit
MA3
SA3
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2450.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 120
03A2 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
When turning ON the power with a cover removed, ensure that the high-voltage switch (S1) is OFF.
Turning ON the machine with a cover removed causes photomultiplier damage.
03A2 IP lifting error
[During normal processing] 1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the machine covers and lead cover.
Although the MA2/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
3. With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
• MA2; IP lift drive motor and SH2).
• MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor positioning unit, rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit.
If the IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ I/O Locations
■ Analysis Flow
MB2
MB1
Path changeover
Note the error log with the
SB1
conveyor M-Utility.

IP positioning unit
1
MA2
N
Is the sensor (SB1) normal? Replace the sensor (SB1).
Is the motor (MA2, MB1, N

Replace the motor (MA2, MB1, MB2).
MB2) normal?
Y “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4” (CR-IR348RU)

(Example: CR-IR348RU) :IP FR8H2451.EPS
“6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, and MA3” (CR-IR344/343)
“6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)
“6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3” (CR-IR344/343)
N
Does the error recur? 1
Y
Replace the components in the order indicated below:

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
“20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts” volume. FR8H2301.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 121
CAUTION
03A4 Scanner unit carry-in error 1 (CR-IR348RU)/Scanner unit carry-in error (CR-IR344/
343)
1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the machine covers and lead cover.
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
Although the MB1 and MB2 turned ON, the SZ3 did not close.
<I/O name> and SH2).
• MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP
• SZ3; Before-reading IP sensor positioning unit, rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP
positioning unit. If the IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ I/O Locations
MB2
■ Analysis Flow
MB1
Path changeover Note the error log with the
conveyor
M-Utility.

1
SZ3
N
Is the sensor (SZ3) normal? Replace the sensor (SZ3).
Y “5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3”
Is the motor (MB1, MB2) N

Subscanning unit Replace the motor (MB1, MB2).
normal?
Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)

(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2452.EPS “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3” (CR-IR344/343)
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 122
CAUTION
03A5 Conveyance error (Reading conveyer)
[During initialization/normal processing] 1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the machine covers and lead cover.
Although the MB2/MZ1 turned ON, the SZ1 and SD1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
Although the MB2 and MZ1 turned ON, the SD1 did not close. and SH2).
<I/O name> 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and scanner
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) unit, rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
• MZ1; Subscanning motor
• SZ1; IP leading-edge sensor ■ Analysis Flow
■ I/O Locations M-Utility.
MB2 “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
Path changeover 1
conveyor
N
Is the sensor (SD1) normal? Replace the sensor (SD1).
MZ1 N
Is the motor (MB2, MZ1)
Replace the motor (MB2, MZ1).
normal?
Erasure
conveyor Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)
Subscanning unit “6.4 Checking the MZ1”
SD1
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 123
CAUTION
03A6 Reading IP edge detection error
• Although the MB2/MZ1 turned ON, the SZ1 and SD1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
• The SH2 opened.
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and scanner unit,
• MZ1; Subscanning motor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
• SZ1; IP leading-edge sensor
• SD1; After-reading IP sensor ■ Analysis Flow
• SH2; Laser safety interlock switch
■ I/O Locations M-Utility.
MB2
Path changeover
conveyor
1
Is the sensor (SZ1, SD1) N
Replace the sensor (SZ1/SD1).
normal?
Y “7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08C)” (CR-IR348RU/344)

MZ1
“7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08A)” (CR-IR343)
SZ1 “5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3”
Is the motor (MB2, MZ1) N

Replace the motor (MB1, MZ1).
Subscanning unit
normal?

“6.4 Checking the MZ1”
N
Y

1. SNS08D board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 124
03A7, 03C6, 03E2 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03A7 Conveyance error (Post-conveyer 1) (CR-IR348RU)/Conveyance error (Post-
conveyer) (CR-IR344/343)
1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the machine covers and lead cover.
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not open.
• SD1; After-reading IP sensor ■ Analysis Flow
03C6 Reading stand-by conveyer error Note the error log with the
M-Utility.
Although the MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not close. “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
<I/O name>
1
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) N
03E2 Conveyance error (Post-conveyer 2)
N
[During normal processing] Is the motor (MD1) normal? Replace the motor (MD1).
Although an attempt was made to convey the IP to the scanner after-reading conveyor, the MD1
Y “6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3” (CR-IR348RU)
stopped before the SD1 opened; thus, the MD1 turned ON again, but the SD1 did not open.
“6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, and MZ2” (CR-IR344/343)
<I/O name>
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) N
Y
■ I/O Locations
1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
Scanner after-
reading conveyor
MD1
SD1
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP
FR8H2455.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 125
CAUTION
03A8 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer 1)
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the SE1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) and SH2).
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) 4. Pull out the scanner unit.
• SE1; Before-erasure entry IP sensor 5. Take out the IP, if any, from the scanner unit. If the IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, re-
place the IP.
■ I/O Locations
■ Analysis Flow

M-Utility.

Erasure conveyor 1
Scanner after- MF1 N
reading conveyor Is the sensor (SE1) normal? Replace the sensor (SE1).
Erasure before-
reading conveyor
Is the motor (MD1, MF1) N
MD1 Replace the motor (MD1, MF1).
normal?
SE1
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2456.EPS Y “6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3” (CR-IR348RU)
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 126
03A9, 03C3, 03E3 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03A9 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer 2)
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
03C3 Erasure unit remaining IP conveyer error 3. With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
and SH2).
4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the erasure conveyor and before-erasure conveyor,
• Although the MB3/MF1/MD1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open (344/343). rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor or the after-
• Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open (344/343). scanner unit. If the IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
• Although the MF1/MD1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open (348RU).
■ Analysis Flow
• Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not open (348RU).
03E3 Conveyance error (Pre-erasure conveyer 3) M-Utility.
Although the MD1 and MF1 turned ON, the MF1 stopped before the SF1 closed; thus, MD1 and 1
MF1 turned ON again, but SF1 did not close.
N
■ I/O Locations Is the sensor (SF1) normal? Replace the sensor (SF1).
<I/O name>
• MB3; IP conveyance motor (path
changeover conveyor) Is the motor (MD1, MF1) N
Replace the motor (MD1, MF1).
• MD1; IP conveyance motor normal?
(scanner after-reading conveyor)
Erasure conveyor Y “6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3” (CR-IR348RU)
• MF1; IP conveyance motor
(erasure conveyor)
Scanner after- MF1
reading conveyor • SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor N
SF1
Y
MD1
1. SNS08B board
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2457.EPS 2. DRV08C board (CR-IR348RU)/DRV08B board (CR-IR344/343)
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 127
03AB ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03AB Conveyance error (Erasure conveyer)
Although the MB3 and MF1 turned ON, the SB2 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) and SH2).
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) 4. If an IP is located over the erasure conveyor, rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ I/O Locations ■ Analysis Flow

SB2
MB3 Note the error log with the
M-Utility.
Path changeover
conveyor
1
N
Erasure conveyor Is the sensor (SB2) normal? Replace the sensor (SB2).
MF1
Is the motor (MB3, MF1) N

Replace the motor (MB3, MF1).
normal?

(Example: CR-IR348RU)
“6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3” (CR-IR348RU)
: IP FR8H2458.EPS
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 128
03AC, 03C0 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03AC Erasure lamp error
An attempt was made to delete the IP image data, but the erasure lamp did not light. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
03C0 Erasure lamp error 3. With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
and SH2).
The erasure lamp did not light. ■ Analysis Flow
■ Analysis Flow Note the error log with the

M-Utility.

LAMP
1
1-4 N • Replace the lamp (Lamp1-8) (CR-IR348RU/344).
LAMP Is the lamp normal?
5-8
• Replace the lamp (Lamp1-4) (CR-IR343).
Y “6.5 Checking the LAMP1-8” (CR-IR348RU/344)
Erasure “6.5 Checking the LAMP1-4” (CR-IR343)
conveyor
• Replace the thermal switch (TSWF2/3/6/8) or thermistor (THF1)
Is the thermal switch/ N (CR-IR348RU).
MF1 thermistor normal? • Replace the thermal switch (TSWF1/2/3/5/6/8) (CR-IR344).
• Replace the thermal switch (TSWF1/2/3/5) (CR-IR343).
Y
N • Replace the fan (FANF1) (CR-IR348RU).
Is the fan normal?
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP • Replace the fan (FANF1-4) (CR-IR344/343).
FR8H2459.EPS
N
Y
1. Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7) (CR-IR348RU/344)

Replace the power supply unit (JPS-4) (CR-IR343)
“13. Power Supply Units” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume.
2. SNS08D board (CR-IR348RU)/SNS08 board (CR-IR344/343)
“20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume. FR8H2309.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 129
03AD ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03AD Conveyance error (Erasure stand-by conveyer)
Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) and SH2).
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and erasure conveyor,
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the path changeover conveyor. If the
IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ I/O Locations
■ Analysis Flow
MB3
conveyor
M-Utility.

Erasure conveyor 1
MF1
N
Is the sensor (SF1) normal? Replace the sensor (SF1).
SF1
Is the motor (MB3, MF1) N
Replace the motor (MB3, MF1).
normal?

(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2460.EPS “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3” (CR-IR344/343)
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/H board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 130
03AF ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03AF Conveyance error (Path selector conveyer)
Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB3 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB2 did not open (348RU). and SH2).
<I/O name> 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and erasure conveyor,
• MB3/MB1; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor
5. Remove the PC board box from the top of the path changeover conveyor.
■ Analysis Flow
■ I/O Locations
MB1 SB3 MB3 Note the error log with the
Path changeover M-Utility.
conveyor
1
N

Replace the motor (MB1, MB3).
normal?

(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2461.EPS N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 131
03B0, 03B8, 03CC ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03B0 Conveyance error (setting conveyer)
Although the MB3/MB1 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB3/MB1; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) and SH2).
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
03B8 Conveyance error (Stand-by reverse conveyance) (CR-IR348RU) scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ Analysis Flow
• Although the MB1/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. Note the error log with the
<I/O name> M-Utility.
• MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor 1
03CC Conveyance error of the IP that is in the stand-by unit (CR-IR348RU) N
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB1 did not close.
<I/O name> Is the motor (MB1, MB3, N • Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MB4) (CR-IR348RU).
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) MB4) normal? • Replace the motor (MB1, MB3) (CR-IR344/343).
■ I/O Locations
MB1 MB3 N
SB1 Path changeover
conveyor Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
“20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment FR8H2312.EPS
of Parts” volume.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 132
03B1 ■ Preparation
■ Error Occurrence Conditions ■ Analysis Flow

03B1 IP lifting operation error Note the error log with the
[During initialization/normal processing] M-Utility.
Although the MA2 turned ON, the SA2 failed to open or close (its home position could not be “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
detected), allowing the retry count (NA61) to be exceeded.
1
<I/O name>
• MA2; IP lift drive motor N
Is the sensor (SA2) normal? Replace the sensor (SA2).
■ I/O Locations N
Is the motor (MA2) normal? Replace the motor (MA2).

IP positioning unit
N
MA2 Y
SA2
1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
FR8H2463.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 133
03B2 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03B2 IP lifting error (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SB1 failed to close, allowing the retry count (1) to be 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
exceeded.
• MA4; IP lift drive motor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.

MB2
MB1
SB1 conveyor

IP positioning unit
1
N
MA4 Y “5.1 Checking the SA1, SA2, SA3, SB1, SB2, and SB3”

MB2) normal?
Y “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4”

“6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4”
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 134
03B3, 03B5 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03B3 Scanner unit carry-in error 1 (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the SZ3 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MA4; IP lift drive motor and SH2).
• MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
03B5 Scanner unit carry-in error 2 (CR-IR348RU)
■ Analysis Flow
Although the MA4/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped before the SZ3 closed; thus, MB1 and Note the error log with the
MB2 turned ON again, but SZ3 did not close. M-Utility.
<I/O name>
• MA4; IP lift drive motor 1
N
• SZ3; Before-reading IP sensor Is the sensor (SZ3) normal? Replace the sensor (SZ3).
■ I/O Locations Y “5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2 SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3”
MB2
MB1 Is the motor (MA4, MB1, N
Path changeover Replace the motor (MA4, MB1, MB2).
conveyor MB2) normal?
Y “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4”

IP positioning unit “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4”
SZ3 N
MA4 Y

Subscanning unit 1. SNS08B board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2465.EPS “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 135
03B4 ■ Preparation

03B4 Setting guide operation error Note the error log with the
[During initialization/normal processing] M-Utility.
Although the MA1 turned ON, the SA1 failed to open or close (its home position could not be “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
detected), allowing the retry count (NA51) to be exceeded.
1
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to open or close (its home position could not be Is the sensor (SA1, SA4) N • Replace the sensor (SA4) (CR-IR348RU).
detected), allowing the retry count (NA61) to be exceeded (348RU). normal? • Replace the sensor (SA1).
<I/O name>
• MA1; IP positioning drive motor
• SA1; IP positioning home position sensor N
Is the motor (MA1, MA4) • Replace the motor (MA4) (CR-IR348RU).
• MA4; IP lift drive motor normal? • Replace the motor (MA1).
■ I/O Locations “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, and MA3” (CR-IR344/343)
N
SA1 Does the error recur? 1
Y
IP positioning unit

1. SNS08B board
MA1
3. MTH08B/E board
of Parts” volume.
FR8H2466.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 136
CAUTION
03B6 Conveyance error (Stand-by reverse conveyance) (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MF1/MB1/MB3 turned ON, the SB2 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
3. With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1 and
• MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) SH2).
• MF1; IP conveyance motor (erasure conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and erasure conveyor,
• SB2; Path changeover unit IP sensor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
■ I/O Locations
■ Analysis Flow
MB3
MB1 SB2
conveyor M-Utility.

Erasure conveyor
1
N
MF1 Is the sensor (SB2) normal? Replace the sensor (SB2).
Is the motor (MB1, MB3, N

Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MF1).
MF1) normal?
Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4”

“6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3”
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 137
CAUTION
03B7 Post-conveyer grip operation error
Although the MD2 turned ON, the SD2 failed to open or close (its home position could not be 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
detected), allowing the retry count (ND61) to be exceeded.
<I/O name> SH2).
• SD2; Grip release home position sensor ■ Analysis Flow
■ I/O Locations Note the error log with the

M-Utility.

1
N
Scanner after- N
reading conveyor Is the motor (MD2) normal? Replace the motor (MD2).
MD2
SD2 N
: IP
FR8H2468.EPS
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 138
03B9, 03BC ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03B9 Conveyance error (Stand-by high-speed conveyance) (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB3 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. and SH2).
<I/O name> 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and erasure conveyor,
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
5. Remove the PC board box from the top of the path changeover conveyor.
■ Analysis Flow
03BC Conveyance error (Path changing unit) (CR-IR348RU)
[During normal processing] Note the error log with the
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB3 did not open. M-Utility.
<I/O name> “2.1 How to View the Error Log”

• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 1
Is the sensor (SB1, SB3) N
Replace the sensor (SB1, SB3).
■ I/O Locations normal?
SB3 MB3
MB1 Y “5.1 Checking the SA1, SA2, SA3, SB1, SB2, and SB3”
MB4
Path changeover
conveyor Is the motor (MB1, MB3, N
MB4) normal? Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MB4).

N
Y

1. SNS08B board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2469.EPS “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 139
03BA ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03BA Sub-scanning grip operation error
Although the MZ2 turned ON, the SZ2 failed to open or close (its home position could not be 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
detected), allowing the retry count (NZ61) to be exceeded.
<I/O name> SH2).
• SZ2; Subscanning grip release home position sensor ■ Analysis Flow

M-Utility.

1
N
Is the sensor (SZ2) normal? Replace the sensor (SZ2).
SZ2
MZ2 Y “5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3”
N
Is the motor (MZ2) normal? Replace the motor (MZ2).
Subscanning unit
N
FR8H2470.EPS

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 140
03BB, 03CB, 03E0 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03BB Conveyance error (Stand-by unit) (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SF2 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) and SH2).
• SF2; After-erasure standby IP sensor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and standby unit,
03CB Move error of the IP remaining in the stand-by unit (CR-IR348RU) scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
■ Analysis Flow
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SF2 did not close.
<I/O name> Note the error log with the
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) M-Utility.
• SF2; After-erasure standby IP sensor “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
1
03E0 Standby unit recovery conveyance error (CR-IR348RU)
N
Is the sensor (SF2) normal? Replace the sensor (SF2).
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SF2 did not close.
Y “5.3 Checking the SA4, SB4, SF2, and SH3”
<I/O name>
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) Is the motor (MB1, MB3, N
MB4) normal? Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MB4).
• SF2; After-erasure standby IP sensor
■ I/O Locations Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4”
MB3 N
MB1 MB4
Y

Erasure conveyor
1. SNS08D board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board
SF2 “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 141
03BE ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03BE Conveyance error (Between stand-by unit and setting unit) (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MB1/MB3/MB4 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB1/MB3/MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) SH2).
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and standby unit,
■ I/O Locations scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
MB3
MB1
MB4 ■ Analysis Flow
SB1
Path changeover
M-Utility.
conveyor
1
N
N
Is the motor (MB1, MB3, Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MB4).
MB4) normal?
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2472.EPS Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4”
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 142
03BF, 23BD ■ Preparation


03BF IP lifting operation error (CR-IR348RU) Note the error log with the
[During normal processing] M-Utility.
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to close, allowing the retry count (NA61) to be “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
exceeded. 1
<I/O name>
N
• MA4; IP lift drive motor Is the sensor (SA4) normal? Replace the sensor (SA4).
23BD IP lift home position detection retry (CR-IR348RU) N
Is the motor (MA4) normal? Replace the motor (MA4).
Although the MA4 turned ON, the SA4 failed to close, and a retry operation was performed. Y “6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4”
<I/O name>
N
• MA4; IP lift drive motor Does the error recur? 1
Y
■ I/O Locations
1. SNS08D board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board
IP positioning unit “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
MA4
SA4
FR8H2473.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 143
03C2 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03C2 Setting unit remaining IP conveyer error
[During initialization] 1. Turn OFF the power and then remove the machine covers and lead cover.
• Although the MB1/MB2/MB3 turned ON, the SB1 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name> SH2).
• MB1/MB2/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
■ I/O Locations
■ Analysis Flow
MB2 MB3
MB1
SB1 conveyor M-Utility.
IP positioning unit
1
N

Replace the motor (MB1, MB2, MB3).
MB3) normal?

N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 144
03C4, 03C9 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03C4 Erasure stand-by conveyer error
• Although the MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close (344/343). 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
• Although the MB1/MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close (348RU).
• Although the MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close (348RU). SH2).
<I/O name> 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
• SF1; Erasure entry IP sensor ■ Analysis Flow
03C9 Path selector conveyer error Note the error log with the
[During initialization] M-Utility.
• Although the MB3 and MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. “2.1 How to View the Error Log”
• Although the MB1/MB3/MF1 turned ON, the SF1 did not close. 1
<I/O name>
N
• MB1/MB3; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) Is the sensor (SF1) normal? Replace the sensor (SF1).
■ I/O Locations MF1) normal?
Replace the motor (MB1, MB3, MF1).
MB3
MB1 Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)
Path changeover
conveyor “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3” (CR-IR344/343)
Erasure conveyor “6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, and MZ2” (CR-IR344/343)
N
MF1 Y
SF1
1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
(Example: CR-IR348RU) : IP FR8H2475.EPS of Parts” volume. FR8H2325.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 145
03C5 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03C5 Scanner unit remaining IP conveyer error
Although the MB2/MZ1/MD1 turned ON, the SD1 did not open (the SZ2 opened). 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) SH2).
• MD1; IP conveyance motor (scanner after-reading conveyor) 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and scanner unit,
• MZ1; Subscanning motor rotate the conveyance rollers by hand to convey the IP to the IP positioning unit. If the IP is
5. Pull out the scanner unit.
• SZ2; Subscanning grip release home position sensor
■ Analysis Flow
■ I/O Locations
MB2 Note the error log with the
conveyor
1
MZ1 N
SZ2 Is the sensor (SD1, SZ2) Replace the sensor (SD1, SZ2).
normal?
Scanner after-
reading conveyor
Subscanning unit
Is the motor (MB2, MD1, N

MZ1) normal? Replace the motor (MB2, MD1, MZ1).
SD1 Y “6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)
“6.4 Checking the MZ1”
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 146
03CA ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03CA Setting unit returning conveyance error
Although the MB1 and MB2 turned ON, the SB1 did not close. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB1/MB2; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) SH2).
• SB1; Positioning unit entry IP sensor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
MB2
MB1 ■ Analysis Flow
Path changeover
SB1 conveyor
M-Utility.

1
N

Replace the motor (MB1, MB2).
normal?

N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 147
03CD ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03CD Shutter operation error (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MH3 turned ON, the SH3 failed to open or close (its home position could not be 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
detected), allowing the retry count (NH61) to be exceeded.
• SH3; Shutter sensor ■ Analysis Flow

M-Utility.
SH3 Path changeover
conveyor
MH3 “2.1 How ato View the Error Log”
1
IP positioning unit
N
Is the sensor (SH3) normal? Replace the sensor (SH3).
N
Is the motor (MH3) normal? Replace the motor (MH3).
Y “6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, MZ2, and MH3”

N
: IP
Y
(Example: CR-IR348RU) FR8H2478.EPS

1. SNS08D board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 148
03CE ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03CE Low-speed move error of the IP remaining in the stand-by unit (CR-IR348RU)
Although the MB4 turned ON, the SB4 did not open. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
<I/O name>
• MB4; IP conveyance motor (path changeover conveyor) SH2).
• SB4; After-erasure standby confluence unit IP sensor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and standby unit,
MB4
■ Analysis Flow
SB4
Path changeover
conveyor Note the error log with the
M-Utility.
“2.1 How ato View the Error Log”

1
Erasure conveyor
N
N
Is the motor (MB4) normal? Replace the motor (MB4).

N
Y

1. SNS08D board
2. DRV08C board
3. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 149
03E1 ■ Preparations
CAUTION
03E1 Scanner unit carry-in error 2
Although the MA2/MB1/MB2 turned ON, the MB2 stopped before the SZ3 closed; thus, MB1 and 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN board.
MB2 turned ON again, but SZ3 did not close.
<I/O name> SH2).
• MA2; IP lift drive motor 4. If an IP lies across the boundary between the path changeover conveyor and IP positioning unit,
• SZ3; Before-reading IP sensor scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.

MB2
MB1
conveyor
“2.1 How ato View the Error Log”
IP positioning unit
1
N
SZ3 Is the sensor (SZ3) normal? Replace the sensor (SZ3).
MA2

MB2) normal?
Subscanning unit
“6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, MB3, and MB4” (CR-IR348RU)
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
3. MTH08B/E board
of Parts” volume.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 150
0532, 2542 ■ Analysis Flow

Note the error log with
the M-Utility.
Is the displayed error recorded N Note the error code table to
0532 Polygon mirror error 1 at the beginning of the error log? confirm the error at the beginning.
[During initialization] Y "2.1 How to View the Error Log" "2.3 Error Codes List"
A polygon motor lock signal error was detected when the polygon status was checked upon laser
power ON. 1
• Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7)
2542 Polygon mirror error 2 Are the SCN board voltages N (CR-IR348RU/344).
normal? • Replace the power supply unit (JPS-4)
(CR-IR343).
When the polygon status was checked, the lock signal for the polygon motor was found to be Y "3.1 Checking the Board
abnormal. Test Pin (Connector) Voltages"
N
Is the polygon (POL) normal? Replace the polygon assembly.
Y "7.1 Checking the Polygon (POL)"
N
Is the ground normal? Repair the ground.
Y "7.7 Checking the Ground Connection" (CR-IR348RU/344)
N
Y
Reseat the boards in the order indicated below to check for the error.
If the error is detected, replace the board that is the cause of the error.
1. SCN08C board (CR-IR348RU/344)/SCN08B board (CR-IR343)
"8. Scanning Optics Unit" in the "Checks, Replacement, and
Adjustment of Parts" volume
2. MTH08B/E board
"20. Boards" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume
FR8H2331.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 151
0534, 1533, 2543, 2544 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
Is the displayed error recorded N Note the error code table to confirm
0534 Laser power error 1 at the beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
An error was detected when the laser status was checked.
1
1533 Insufficient laser power error 1 • Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7)
Are the SCN board voltages N
[During initialization] (CR-IR348RU/344).
An abnormality was detected when the laser status was checked. (CR-IR343).
Y "3.1 Checking the Board
Test Pin (Connector) Voltages"
2543 Insufficient laser power error 2 N
Is the laser (LDD) normal? Replace the LD assembly.
Y “7.2 Checking the Laser (LDD)”
An error was detected when the laser power status was checked.
N
2544 Laser power error 2 Is the ground normal? Repair the ground.
[During normal processing] Y "7.7 Checking the Ground Connection" (CR-IR348RU/344)

An error was detected when the laser status was checked.
N
Y
2. MTH08B/E board
Parts" volume
FR8H2332.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 152
0536, 2535, 2545, 2546 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
0536 Analog power supply error 1 at the beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08A board (343).
1
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08C board (front photomultiplier)
(348RU/344). • Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7)
Are the SCN board voltages N
(CR-IR348RU/344).
2535 HV voltage error 1
Y "3.1 Checking the Board (CR-IR343).
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply N • Replace the PMT08C board (CR-IR348RU/344).
was found to be abnormal (343). Is the PMT board normal? • Replace the PMT08A board (CR-IR343).
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply Y "7.4 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMT08C)" (CR-IR348RU/344)
was found to be abnormal (front photomultiplier) (348RU/344). "7.4 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMT08A)" (CR-IR343)
2545 HV voltage error 2 N

[During normal processing] Y "7.7 Checking the Ground Connection" (CR-IR348RU/344)
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply
was found to be abnormal (343). N
• When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply
was found to be abnormal (front photomultiplier) (348RU/344). Y
2546 Analog power supply error 2 Reseat the boards in the order indicated below to check for the error.
[During normal processing] 1. SCN08C board (CR-IR348RU/344)/SCN08B board (CR-IR343)
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08A board (343). "8. Scanning Optics Unit" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume
• An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMT08C board (front photomultiplier)
2. PHV08C board (CR-IR348RU/344)
(348RU/344). "9. Subscanning Unit" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume
3. MTH08B/E board
"20. Boards" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
FR8H2333.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 153
0537, 2547 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
0537 Start point detection error 1 at the beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
An error was detected when the start point detection status was checked.
1
2547 Start point detection error 2 • Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7)
Are the SCN board voltages N (CR-IR348RU/344).
An error was detected when the start point detection status was checked. (CR-IR343).
Y "3.1 Checking the Board
Is the start point detector (SYN) N

Replace the start point detector (SYN).
normal?
Y "7.3 Checking the Start Point Detector (SYN)"
N
N
Y
2. MTH08B/E board
Parts" volume
FR8H2334.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 154
0538, 2530, 2548 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
0538 IP leading edge detection error 1 at the beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
The IP leading edge detection signal was found to be abnormal when the leading edge detection
status was checked. 1
N • Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7)
2530 Interrupt diagnosis error 1 (leading-edge detection) Are the SCN board voltages (CR-IR348RU/344).
[During scanner self-diagnosis]
Y "3.1 Checking the Board (CR-IR343).
It was found that a leading-edge detection interrupt could not be initiated.
N
2548 IP leading-edge detection error 2 Is the SZ1 normal? Replace the SZ1.
[During normal processing] Y “7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08C)” (CR-IR348RU/344)
The IP leading edge detection signal was found to be abnormal when the leading edge detection “7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08A)” (CR-IR343)
status was checked.
N
N
Y
2. MTH08B/E board
Parts" volume
FR8H2335.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 155
0551, 0552, 0553, 0557 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
Is the displayed error at the N Note the error code table to confirm
0551 Laser power error (Cover open) beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
An error was detected when the laser power status was checked (the cover was opened).
1
0552 Start point detection error (Cover open)
[During initialization] Is the exposure unit top cover N Install the exposure unit top cover
or right-hand inner cover
An error was detected when the start-point detection status was checked (the cover was opened). and right-hand inner cover.
installed?
Y
0553 IP leading edge detecting error (Cover open)
[During initialization] N
Is the sensor (SH1, SH2)
An error was detected when the leading-edge detection status was checked (the cover was Replace the SH1, SH2.
normal?
opened).
Y “5.4 Checking the SH1, SH2”
0557 Image quit error (Cover open) N
Y
An image quit interrupt does not occur during reading (the cover is opened).
Replace the following boards in order named.

1. SCR08C board (CR-IR348RU/344)/TIF08B board (CR-IR343)
"8. Scanning Optics Unit" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume
3. MTH08B/E board
FR8H2336.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 156
0563, 2560, 2561, 2564 ■ Analysis Flow

the M-Utility.
0563 Analog power supply error 1 (CR-IR348RU/344) at the beginning of the error log? the error at the beginning.
An analog power supply voltage error was detected on the PMR08C board (rear photomultiplier).
1
2560 HV voltage error 1 (CR-IR348RU/344) Are the SCN08C board N
Replace the power supply unit (JPS-7).
[During initialization] voltages normal?
When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply was Y "3.1 Checking the Board
found to be abnormal (rear photomultiplier). Test Pin (Connector) Voltages"
N
Is the PMR08C board normal? Replace the PMR08C board.
2561 HV voltage error 2 (CR-IR348RU/344)
Y “7.5 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMR08C)”
When the HV voltage status was checked, the output voltage of the high-voltage power supply was N
found to be abnormal (rear photomultiplier). Is the ground normal? Repair the ground.
Y "7.7 Checking the Ground Connection" (CR-IR348RU)
2564 Analog power supply error 2 (CR-IR348RU/344)
N
[During initialization] Does the error recur? 1
An analog power supply voltage error was found on the PMR08C board (rear photomultiplier). Y
1. SCN08C (SCR08C) board
2. PHV08C board
"9. Subscanning Unit" in the "Checks, Replacement, and
3. MTH08B/E board
Parts" volume
FR8H2337.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 157
2.5.2 Cable Check Flow ■ Checking Whether the Cable Is in a Short Circuit or Ground Fault Condition
Make measurements between all connector pins and frame.
■ Analysis Flow Machine
Cable
Connector
START
Is the cable conducting electricity? N Replace the cable.

Y “17. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS” in the
“Service Parts List” volume Frame
Is the cable in a short circuit or N

Replace the cable.
ground fault condition?
“17. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS” in the
Y “Service Parts List” volume
Digital tester FR8H2506.EPS

OK
FR8H2508.EPS
Check that the measured values are greater than 1 Ω.

■ Checking the Cable for Continuity
Make measurements at all connector pins. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The cable is said to be in a ground fault condition when its conductor is in contact with the frame due to cable
Machine covering breakage. In this situation, there is electrical continuity between the frame and cable connector pins.
Cable
Connector
Cable
Torn
Machine
covering
Cable
Connector
Frame

Frame
Check that the measured values are not greater than 1 Ω.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 158
2.5.3 Board Check Flow ■ Board Arrangement Diagrams
■ Analysis Flow HHS Label #2

DRV08C
LDD08C
START SCN08C/SCR08C
PNL08B SNS08B/SNS08D
PNL08A
N SYN08A
Are board switch settings normal? Adjust the board switch settings.
SWT08B
Y “20. Boards” in the “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume Polygon driver (POL-DRV)
PMT08C
TLB08A
Are the results of board self-
N
diagnostic checks normal? An error is found with self-diagnostics of the M-Utility,
With “4. ELECTRICAL” of M-Utility, or the board cannot be self-diagnosed.
perform self-diagnostic checks of the
T
following boards. ON
FR
Y N
Are the board switch settings normal? Adjust the board switch settings.
PHV08C
Y “20. Boards” in the
PMR08C
“Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume HHS Label
#2
N Replace the fuse on the board.
Are board fuses normal?
Or, replace the board as a whole.
Y “4. Checking the Fuses” “20. Boards” in the SWT08B
“Checks, Replacement, and
Adjustment of Parts” volume
N LAN90B/D
Are normal output voltages delivered to
Check the power supply unit.
the boards? NT
“3.2 Checking the Power Supply FRO
Y “9. Power Supply Related Fuse Unit Voltages” CPU90F
Block Diagram” ETH90F
Are the cables connected to the boards N HCP08A

Check the cables.
normal? MTH08B/E
“2.5.2 Cable Check Flow”
Y
XPC08A
Disconnect and reconnect the boards
and connectors. IMG08B/H
Y
IMG08A
Does the machine operate normally after N MMC90A
Replace boards as needed. or
its restart?
“20. Boards” in the DIM08A
Y BSP08A
“Checks, Replacement, and
IMG07B
OK FR8H2509.EPS
CPU90E
VGA90E
FR1H1770.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 159
2.5.4 HDD Check Flow
■ Analysis Flow
START
Are the HDD short pins properly set? N

Set the HDD short pins properly.
“14.1 Setting the HDD” in the
Y “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Are the HDD test results normal? N Is +5 V present between the HDD
With “4. ELECTRICAL” of M-Utility, CNJ2-3 and CNJ 2-4?
perform a HDD test.
Y N “9. Power Supply Fuse Related Block Diagram”
Y
Is the cable between the HDD CNJ2 N Replace the cable.

and MTH08B/E board CN25 normal?
Y “2.5.2 Cable Check Flow” “Service Parts List” volume
Check the MTH08B/E board.

“2.5.3 Board Check Flow”
Is the cable between the HDD CNJ1 N Replace the cable.

and MTH08B/E board CN22 normal?
Y “Service Parts List” volume
“2.5.2 Cable Check Flow”
Format the HDD and install the

software.
Y “18. Installing Software” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
Does the machine operate normally N

Replace the HDD.
after its restart?
“14. HDD” in the “Checks, Replacement,
Y and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Does the machine operate normally N

To START
after its restart? OK
Y
OK
FR8H2510.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 2 - 160
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 3 - 1
[2] SNS08B board voltage check

3. Checking the Voltages
3.1 Checking the Board Test Pin (Connector) Voltages
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock hazards from high voltage, observe the following precautions:
• Do not touch the power supply terminals.
• When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probes (metal portions) of the employed
tester. CN4
1 2
3 4
CAUTION
When turning ON the power with a cover removed, ensure that the high-voltage switch is OFF. Re-
moving a cover with the machine turned ON causes photomultiplier damage.
[1] Analysis Flow

START Voltage Standard value Measurement point
+5V +4.75-5.25V CN4 1-3

Turn OFF the CL power and machine power. FR8H2372.EPS
Remove the following covers:

• Exposure unit front cover
• Exposure unit top cover
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover
[3] SNS08D board voltage check
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch.
With tape or other light shield, block the light paths of the SH1 and SH2.
Turn ON the machine power and CL power.
Are board test pin N Are power supply unit N Are power supply unit N
voltages normal? (JPS-7) voltages normal? (JPS-3) voltages normal? Replace the power supply unit (JPS-3).
“13.1 Replacing the JPS-3”
Y [2], [3], [4], [5], [6] Y “3.2 Checking the Y “3.2 Checking the in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Power Supply Unit Voltages” Power Supply Unit Adjustment of Parts” volume
Voltages”
Turn OFF the power. N Replace the Replace the power supply (JPS-7).
Are cables normal?
cables. “13.2 Replacing the JPS-7”
Remove the tape or other light Y in the “Checks, Replacement, and
shield from the SH1 and SH2. Adjustment of Parts” volume
Turn ON the high-
voltage switch. Are the board fuses N Replace the fuse on the board. CNH92
normal? Or, replace the board as a whole.
Install the removed
covers Y CN1
“4. Checking the Fuses”
Replace the PC boards on which an error occurred.

• SNS08B • SCN08C Voltage Standard value Measurement point
END • SNS08D • SCR08C
Return to the error code analysis flow. • DRV08C FR8H2371.EPS
+5V +4.75-5.25V CNH92 1-3
FR8H2373.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 3 - 2
[4] DRV08B board voltage check [5] SCN08C/SCR08C board voltage check
TP1 TP7 TP29 TP4
TP28 TP8 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP2 TP1 TP2 TP8 TP28 TP5 TP27
CN3
GND(CH5) SCN08C board
24V(CH1)
SCR08C board
CN2
5V
CN1
TP38
TP3
Voltage Standard value Measurement point FR8H2375.EPS
+24V +22.8 – +25.2V CH1 - CH5 (GND)

● SCN08C
FR4H2374.EPS
Voltage Standard value Measurement point
+5V +4.75 – +5.25V TP1 (VCC) - TP2 (GND)
+15V +14.25 – +15.75V TP4 (+15AS) - TP28 (ASG)
-15V -15.75 – -14.25V TP8 (-15AS) - TP28 (ASG)
+24V +22.8 – +25.2V TP3 (+24PS) - TP38 (PGND)
TP5 (+5AS) - TP28 (ASG)

+5V +4.75 – +5.25V
TP27 (+5AS2) - TP28 (ASG)
TP7 (-5AS) - TP28 (ASG)

-5V -5.25 – -4.75V
TP29 (-5AS2) - TP28 (ASG)
FR8H2376.EPS
● SCR08C
+5V +4.75 – +5.25V TP1 (VCC) - TP2 (GND)
+15AS +14.25 – +15.75V TP4 (+15AS) - TP28 (ASG)
-15AS -15.75 – -14.25V TP8 (-15AS) - TP28 (ASG)
FR8H2377.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 3 - 3
[6] PHV08C board voltage check
TP10 TP14
TP9
TP13
TP4 TP2
TP3 TP8 TP5
TP7 TP6 TP15 TP1
TP11
TP12
T
ON HHS Label #2
FR
+15V +14.25 – +15.75V TP13 (+15A) - TP7 (GNA)
+5V -15.75 – -14.25V TP14 (-15A) - TP7 (GNA)
+12V +11.4 – +12.6V TP3 (+12V) - TP7 (GNA)
-12V -12.6 – -11.4V TP4 (-12V) - TP7 (GNA)
+15VH +14.25 – +15.75V TP15 (+15VH) - TP1 (HG)

FR8H2378.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 3 - 4
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 3 - 5
3.2 Checking the Power Supply Unit Voltages [2] JPS-3 voltage checks
Measure the voltages at the following measurement points. If the measured voltages do not
comply with the standard values, make adjustments by rotating the associated voltage adjustment
WARNING trimmers.
To avoid electrical shock hazards from high voltage, observe the following precautions: Measurement point Standard value Adjustment trimmer
• Do not touch the power supply terminals.
Between MTH08B/E board TB1-1 and TB1-3 +5.1V+0 JPS3 +5V ADJ.
• When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probes (metal portions) of the employed -0.1
tester. Between hard disk drive CNJ2-1 and CNJ2-2 +12V±0.4 JPS3 +12V ADJ.
Between JPS-3 fan connector pin 2 and JPS-3 +24V±0.5 JPS3 +24V ADJ.
CN12 pin 2
CAUTION
When turning ON the power with a cover removed, ensure that the high-voltage switch is OFF. 1
Removing a cover with the machine turned ON causes photomultiplier damage. TB1 2
3
4
MTH08B/E board
[1] Analysis Flow T

ON
FR
START
Turn OFF the CL power and machine power.
Remove the following covers:

• Exposure unit front cover HDD/FDD rear view
• Exposure unit bottom cover CNJ1 CNJ2
• Controller cover 1 2 3 4
HDD
Turn ON the machine power and CL power.
FDD
Are power supply unit N Are power supply unit N

(JPS-7) voltages normal? (JPS-3) voltages normal? Replace the power supply unit (JPS-3).
“13.1 Replacing the JPS-3”
Y [3] Y [2] in the “Checks, Replacement, and
JPS-3 front view JPS-3 rear view
Replace the power supply (JPS-7).
“13.2 Replacing the JPS-7” +5V ADJ.
END 1 Fan
2
in the “Checks, Replacement, and +12V ADJ. connector
Return to the error code analysis flow. Adjustment of Parts” volume FR8H2379.EPS
+24V ADJ.
1
2
CN12
FR8H2380.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 3 - 6
[3] JPS-7 voltage checks
DRV08B board (+24 VDC and +5 VDC checks)
Measure the voltages at the following measurement points. If the measured voltages do not
comply with the standard values, make adjustments by rotating the associated voltage adjustment SNS08B board (+5 VDC check)
trimmers.
Measurement point Standard value Adjustment trimmer CN3 CN2
CN8
• Between DRV08B board check pins 24 V and 0 V +24V±1.0V JPS-7 +24V ADJ. 0V
0V
• Between SNS08B board check pins +5 VS and 0 V +5V±0.1V JPS-7 +5V ADJ. 24V(CH1)
CN2 CN5
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP43 +4.50V– +5.50V JPS-3 +5V ADJ. 5V
CN1
and TP41 and between SCR08C board check
5V CN4
pins TP43 and TP41
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP1 +5V±0.1V JPS-7 +5V ADJ.
and TP2 and between SCR08C board check
pins TP1 and TP2
SCN08C/SCR08C board
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP4 and +15V±0.5V JPS-7 +15VA ADJ.
TP28 and between SCR08C board check pins TP1 TP7 TP29 TP4
TP4 and TP28 TP28 TP8 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP2 TP1 TP2 TP8 TP28 TP5 TP27
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP8 and -15V±0.5V JPS-7 -15VA ADJ.
TP28 and between SCR08C board check pins
SCN08C board
TP8 and TP28 TP43
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP3 and TP38 +24V±1.0V JPS-7 +24V ADJ. TP41 SCR08C board
• Between JPS-7 DCOUT5 pins 1 and 3 (pin 1: plus) +15V±0.5V JPS-7 +15V ADJ.
• Between JPS-7 DCOUT4 pins 1 and 2 (pin 1: plus) +15V±0.5V JPS-7 +15VH ADJ.
TP38
◆ NOTE ◆ TP3
+0
When making adjustments with the JPS-3 +5 V ADJ. trimmer, ensure that a voltage of +5.1V -o.1 is
present between pins 1 and 3 of the MTH08B/E board TB1 terminal block.
JPS-7 (+15 VDC check)
JPS-7
DCOUT3 ACOUT2
4 8 CN6
1 3 DCOUT8
DCOUT1
1 5 DCOUT4
2 4
1 3 DCOUT5 DCOUT6
ACOUT1
+15V +15VH +15VA -15VA +5V +24V
3 6 ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ACIN1
1 4
CN4 CN1
DCOUT2
FR8H2381.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 1
● For detachable fuse
4. Checking the Fuses
◆ NOTE ◆
4.1 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should be
measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the measured
● For no-fuse breaker (NFB) value of the fuse.
The no-fuse breakers are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and must be so at SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration during transit, press You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board is mounted in the
all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they are depressed to ON. machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse is 1 Ω or greater, it is likely that the fuse
is blown.
In such an instance, if the fuse is a detachable type, remove the fuse from the board and check whether the
ON position OFF position fuse is actually blown.
FR8H2512.EPS
(1) Remove the fuse from the board, and measure the resistance value across the fuse by use of
● For directly-mounted fuse
a tester.
◆ NOTE ◆ If there is no continuity, it should be determined that the fuse is blown.
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should be
measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the measured
value of the fuse.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board is mounted in the
machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse is 1 Ω or greater, it is likely that the fuse
is blown. Fuse
In such an instance, if the fuse is a directly-mounted type, remove the board from the machine and check FR8H2514.EPS
whether the fuse is actually blown, using the its board alone.
(1) Remove the board from the machine, and use a tester to measure the resistance value
across the fuse, with its board alone.
If the resulting resistance value is 100 Ω or greater, it should be determined that the fuse is
blown.
Fuse
Tester
FR8H2513.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 2
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 3
4.2 Sensor Fuses [4] Fuse locations
■ SNS08B board
[1] Analysis Flow
START
Are the fuses to be checked N

normal? Replace any abnormal fuses or replace the affected board.
“Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment” volume
Y [2], [4] F2
F1
Are the loads protected by N

the fuses normal? Replace any faulty cable or sensor.

Y
[3], [5]
END
FR8H2340.EPS
[2] Checking the fuses

Check the fuses. No. Fuse ratings
F1 250V/5A
“4.1 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type”
F2 250V/2A
FR8H2481.EPS
[3] Checking the cables

■ JSP-7
Run the following checks on path <A> that is indicated in the block diagram:
1. Check for a short circuit between various pins and GND terminal.
→ The measured resistance must be 2 Ω or greater.
3. Check for a short circuit between various pins.
4. Check for continuity between various pins.
→ The measured resistance must be 1 Ω or smaller.
Transparent filter
F1
JPS-7
Unit 1 main PC board
No. Fuse ratings

F1 250V/15A
FR8H2482.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 4
[5] Block diagrams
<A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 SNS08B
ACOUT 1 CN4 CN5A
F1 1a 5V(SEN)
(AC200V) +5V 1 CNA1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 2a N.C
F1 +5V-GND 3 1 5V(SEN) 1 SA1
L 1 1 L 1 1 +5V 2 VCC 3a SINSA1 N.C
2 2
N 2 2 N 2 2 +5V-GND 4 4a GND SINSA1
F2 3 3
E 3 5a 5V(SEN) GND
Unit 1 4
F1 6a N.C 5 5V(SEN)
GND 7a SINSA2 6 N.C
AC IN DC
200-240V unit 8a GND 7 SINSA2
CN15 CN4 1 SA2
9a 5V(SEN) 8 GND 2
10a N.C 9 5V(SEN) 3
11a SINSA3 10 N.C
12a GND 11 SINSA3
CNH52 13a 5V(SEN) 12 GND
DCOUT2 14a N.C 13 1
15a SINSB1 SA3
14 2
16a GND 15 N.C
6 3 5 2 4 1 3
17a 5V(SEN) 16
+5V 18a N.C
N.C
+5V-GND 19a SINSB2
GND CNB1
+5V 20a
1 5V(SEN) 1
+5V-GND 21a 5V(SEN) SB1
2 N.C 2
22a N.C
3 SINSB1 3
23a SINSB3
MTH08B/E 4 GND 4
24a GND
TB3 5 5V(SEN)
25a
TB1 6 N.C
26a N.C
7 SINSB2 1 SB2
CNH91 CN1 8 GND 3
CN20 9 5V(SEN) 2
10 N.C 4
CN27 SCR08C SINSB3
11
12 GND
CN4 13 1 SB3
DCOUT1 14 3
15 N.C 2
CNH56 16 4
CN3 5V(SEN) CNF1

Signal 1b
CN7 N.C 1 5V(SEN) 1 SF1
system 2b
SINSF1 2 N.C 2
3b
GND 3 SINSF1 3
CN6 4b
4 GND 4
5b 5V(SEN)
SCN08C 6b N.C
CPU90E CND1
7b SINSD1
8b GND 1 5V(SEN) 1 SD1
9b 5V(SEN) 2 N.C 2
10b N.C 3 SINSD1 3
11b SINSD2 4 GND 4
12b GND 5 5V(SEN)
13b 5V(SEN) 6 N.C
14b N.C 7 SINSD2 1 SD2
15b SINSE1 8 GND 2
16b GND 3
17b 5V(SEN)
18b N.C CNZ1 CNE1
19b SINSZ2 1 5V(SEN) 1 5V(SEN) 1 SE1
20b GND 2 N.C 2 N.C 2
21b 5V(SEN) 3 SINSE1 3 SINSE1 3
22b N.C 4 GND 4 GND 4
23b SINSZ3 5 5V(SEN)
24b GND 6 N.C
25b 7 SINSZ2 1 SZ2
26b N.C 8 GND 2
9 5V(SEN) 3
10 N.C
11 SINSZ3
12 GND
13 1 SZ3
2
N.C
20 3
4
FR8H2415.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 5
4.3 Motor Fuses [4] Fuse locations
■ DRV08B
[1] Analysis Flow
FU1
START CN5
FU3
CN6
FU2
CN3
Are the fuses to be checked N CN11
CN9
FU9
Y FU7
[2], [4]
FU10 FU8
CN10 CN2
Replace any faulty cable or motor. CN12 FU4
the fuses normal?
CN1
“Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment” volume FU6 CN7
Y
[3], [5] CN8 FU5
END
FR8H2341.EPS
No. Fuse ratings
F1-10 125V/3.5A FR8H2483.EPS

Check the fuses. ■ JSP-7

Run the following checks on paths <A> and that are indicated in the block diagram:
Transparent filter
F1
Unit 1 main board
No. Fuse ratings F9

F1 250V/15A F8
F7
F6-9 250V/6.3A F6
FR8H2484.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 6
[5] Block diagrams
● Motor block diagram

<A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 DRV08B
ACOUT 1
DCOUT1 CN1 CN5 CNA2 CNMA1
(AC200V) F6
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 1 +24V 1 1 MA1A 1 1
F1 5 +24V-GND 5 FU1
L 1 1 L 1 1 F7 4 VBB(MA1) 4 2
N 2 2 N 2 2 2 +24V 2 2 MA1AL 2 3
E 3 Unit 1 6 +24V-GND 6 5 MA1B 5 4 MA1
F8
3 +24V 3 3 VBB(MA1) 3 5
F1 7 +24V-GND 7 MA1BL
F9 6 6 6
AC IN DC 4 +24V 4
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 8 +24V-GND 8
Unit 2 CN6 CNA3 CNMA2
1 MA2A 1 1
FU2 VBB(MA2)
7 7 2
2 MA2AL 2 3
CNH52 8 MA2B 8 4 MA2
3 VBB(MA2) 3 5
9 MA2BL 9 6
CNMA3

4 MA3A 4 1
FU3
10 VBB(MA3) 10 2
5 MA3AL 5 3 CN9 CND2 CND3 CNMD1
11 MA3B 11 4 MA3 1 MD1A 1 1 1
FU7 4 7 4 2
6 VBB(MA3) 6 5 VBB(MD1)
MTH08B/E SCN08C SNS08B 12 MA3BL 12 6 2 MD1AL 2 2 3
TB3 CN2 MA1
5 MD1B 8 5 4 MD1
TB1 CN2 3 VBB(MD1) 3 3 5
MA2
MA3 6 MD1BL 9 6 6
CN1 MB1
CN7 CNMB1
MB2 CN10 CNMD2
CN3 MB3 1 MB1A 1
CN20 CN7 FU4 1 MD2A 4 1
CN27 7 VBB(MB1) 2 FU8
MD1 2 MB1AL 3 4 VBB(MD2) 10 2
CN3 MD2 8 MB1B 4 MB1 2 MD2AL 5 3
MF1 3 VBB(MB1) 5 5 MD2B 11 4 MD2
DCOUT1 MZ2 9 MB1BL 6 3 VBB(MD2) 6 5
6 MD2BL 12 6
CNMB3
CN3 4 MB3A 1 CN11 CNF3 CNMF1
Signal FU5 VBB(MB3) 1 MF1A 1 1
10 2
system FU9 4 4 2
5 MB3AL 3 VBB(MF1)
CN6 CN4 11 MB3B 4 MB3 2 MF1AL 2 3
6 VBB(MB3) 5 5 MF1B 5 4 MF1
12 MB3BL 6 3 VBB(MF1) 3 5
CPU90E SCR08C 6 MF1BL 6 6
CN8 CNMB2
1 MB2A 1 CN12 CNZ4 CNZ5 CNMZ2
FU6 1 1 1 1
4 VBB(MB2) 2 MZ2A
2 MB2AL 3 FU10 4 VBB(MZ2) 4 2 2
5 MB2B 4 MB2 2 MZ2AL 2 3 3
3 VBB(MB2) 5 5 MZ2B 5 4 4 MZ2
6 MB2BL 6 3 VBB(MZ2) 3 5 5
6 MZ2BL 6 6 6
DRV08B FR8H2416.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 7
● Subscanning motor block diagram
JPS-3 JPS-7 SNS08B <A>

CN2
ACOUT 1 CN4 CN2 1
F1 CN8
(AC200V) +5V 1 2
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 1 1 N.C
F1 F1 +5V-GND 3 3
L 1 1 L 1 1 2 2 N.C
+5V 2 VCC 4
N 2 2 N 2 2 3 3 SUP MZ1
+5V-GND 4 5
E 3 F2 4 4 OK(L) (FFM)
Unit 1 6
CN 5 5 SUP
F1 6 6 START(L) 7
15 GND
AC IN DC CN4 8
7 7 SUP
200-240V unit
CNH52 8 8 CW(L)
9 9 CN3
1 SUP 1
3 10 10
11 11 M0(L) 2
2 SUP 3
+15V 12 12
+5V 4 M1(L) 4
DCOUT5 13 13
14 14 SUP 5
DCOUT2 M2(L) 6
15 15
16 16 N.C
CN1
6 3 5 2 4 1
N.C +5V Signal

+5V-GND system
+5V CN1
+5V-GND (+15V/+5V)
1 +15V 1
2 +15V-GND 2
3 +5V 3
MTH08B/E 4 +5V-GND 4
TB3 SCR08C
TB1 CNZ3
CN20 CN4
CN27
DCOUT1
CNH56
CN3 CN7
Signal
system
CN6
CPU90E SCN08C FR8H2419.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 8
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 9
4.4 Erasure Lamp Fuses [4] Fuse locations
■ Fluorescent lamp (55 W/36 W) inverter fuses

[1] Analysis Flow
F2
START F1
F2
F1
normal? Replace any abnormal fuses.

Y [2], [4] (36W)
Are the loads protected by N (55W)

Replace any faulty cable or erasure lamp.
the fuses normal? JPS-7
Y
[3], [5] Fluorescent lamp (55 W) Fluorescent lamp (36 W)
inverter inverter
No. Fuse ratings No. Fuse ratings
END
FR8H2342.EPS F1 250V/20A F1 250V/20A
F2 250V/4A F2 250V/4A
[2] Checking the fuses FR8H2485.EPS
Check the fuses.


Run the following checks on path <A> that is indicated in the block diagram:

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 10
[5] Block diagrams
<A>
JPS-3 JPS-7
Erasure conveyor
L1-1
ACOUT 1 1
L1-2
(AC200V) 2
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 L1-3 LAMP1
F1 3
L 1 1 L 1 1 F1 L1-4
4
N 2 2 N 2 2 Unit 2
E 3
Unit 1 L2-1 1
F1 L2-2 2
DC ACOUT1 CNF7 L2-3 LAMP2
3
unit L2-4
1 L1-1 1 4
CN15 CN4 7 L1-2 7
Fluorescent lamp 2 L2-1 2 L3-1
8 L2-2 8 1
(55 W) inverter board L3-2
3 L3-1 3 2
L3-3 LAMP3
CNH52 9 L3-2 9 3
L3-4 4
4 L4-1 4
F1 10 L4-2 10
F2 5 L1-3, L2-3 5 L4-1 1
11 L1-4, L2-4 11 L4-2 2
6 L3-3, L4-3 6 L4-3 LAMP4
3
12 L3-4, L4-4 12 L4-4 4
L5-1 A
L5-2 B
L5-3 LAMP5
C
L5-4 D
TB3 L6-1 A
L6-2 B
ACOUT2 CNF11 L6-3 LAMP6
C
1 L5-1 1 L6-4 D
8 L5-2 8
2 L6-1 2 L7-1
DCOUT1 A
Fluorescent lamp 9 L6-2 9 L7-2
3 L7-1 3 B
(36 W) inverter board L7-3 LAMP7
10 L7-2 10 C
CN3 L7-4 D
4 L8-1 4
11 L8-2 11
F1 5 L5-3, L6-3 5 L8-1 A
F2 12 L5-4, L6-4 12 L8-2 B
6 L7-3, L8-3 6 L8-3 LAMP8
C
13 L7-4, L8-4 13 L8-4 D
7 7
14 N.C 14 N.C
FR8H2511.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 11
4.5 Scanner Fuses [4] Fuse locations
■ SCN08C board/SCR08C board

[1] Analysis Flow
START
SCN08C board


Y [2], [4]

Replace any faulty cable or otherwise abnormal parts. SCR08C board
the fuses normal?
Y
[3], [5]
F1
F10 F6 F9
END
FR8H2343.EPS

F7
Check the fuses. F8
F5
[3] Checking the cables F3 F1 F4 F2
Run the following checks on paths <A>, , <C>, <D>, and <E> that are indicated in the block SCN08C board SCR08C board
diagram:
No. Fuse ratings No. Fuse ratings
1. Check for a short circuit between various pins and GND terminal. F1-4 48V/2A F1 48V/1A
→ The measured resistance must be 2 Ω or greater. F5-10 48V/1A
FR8H2486.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 12
■ JSP-7
Transparent filter
F1
JPS-7
Unit 1 main board
Unit 2 main board F3

F2
Unit
No. Fuse ratings
F1 250V/15A
F2 250V/1A
F3 250V/3.15A
FR8H2487.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 13
[5] Block diagrams
● Leading edge sensor (SED)/start point detector (SYN)/laser (LDD)/polygon (POL)

block diagram
SCN08C <A>
CN4 CNZ11
JPS-3 JPS-7 1 GND 1 1
F8 VCC 2 +5DS 2 2
DCOUT3 SZ1 (SED08C)
3 SED 3 3
Unit 2
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3 CN9
1 +5V 1 +5VD 1
A
TB1 NFB1
(AC200V)
CNH51 AC IN1 +5V
5 +5V-GND 5 GND 5 GND
 SYN08A
F1 2 +15VA 2 +15VA 2
L 1 1 L 1 1 +15V CN2
6 +15VA-GND 6 ASG 6 CNZ13 CNZ14 CN1
N 2 2 N 2 2 F9 +15AS 1
3 -15VA 3 -15VA 3 +15AS 1 1 1
E 3 F1 -15V
Unit 1 7 -15VA-GND 7 ASG 7 2 ASG 2 2 2
DC 4 +24V 4 +24VP 4 F6 +5AS 3
+24V +5AS 3 3 3
unit 8 +24V-GND 8 PGND 8 4 ASG 4 4 4
AC IN F3
GND F10 -15AS +15AS
200-240V 5 5 5 5
6 ASG 6 6 6
F7 VCC +5DS 7 7 7
GND 7
8 GND 8 8 8
B 9 SSH 9 9 9
10 SSL 10 10 10
MTH08B/E
TB3 TB1 A
1 +5V 1 CN50 CN12 <C>
2 +5V 2 1 1 LDD08C
3 +5V-GND 3 3 2 CNZ12
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 2 3 CN1 1 +15AS 1 1 CN1
F3
4 4 +15AS 2 ASG 2 2 CN2
3 +15AS 3 3 1 AG 1
1 +12V 1 TP8 F1
F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7 4 ASG 4 4 2 +VLD 2 LDA08B
2 +12V-GND 2 LD1
DC
3 +12V 3 1a 1a 1a A 5 +15AS 5 5 3 LDKTD 3
4 +12V-GND 4 CN27 2a 2a 2a 6 ASG 6 6
OUT1 7 +15AS 7 7
13b 13b 13b 8 ASG 8 8
14b 14b 14b -15AS 9 -15AS 9 9
CPU90E 10 ASG 10 10 CN3
F3
11 -15AS 11 11 1 AG 1
21b 21b 21b 12 ASG 12 12 2 +VLD 2
22b 22b 22b LDA08B LD2
13 LD1IDH 13 13 3 LDKTD 3
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b 14 LD1IDL 14 14
25b 25b 25b
26b 26b 26b 17 LD1ONH 17 17
18 LD1ONL 18 18
N.C CN4
21 LD1OKH 21 21 1 1 CN1
A +VLD
22 LD1OKL 22 22 2 PDAND1 2
PDA08A
3 PDAND2 3
26 NC 26 26
<D>
CN1
F5 CN3 1 1
+24PS
2 PGND 2
3 POKL 3 POL-
A 4 PONL 4 DRV
POL
5 PGND 5
6 PIDXL 6
A B
<E>
F1
CN5
1 +5V(SEN) 1 SH1
2 SDVSH1L 3
3 SINSH1L 2
4 GND 4
5
6
7 +5V(SEN) 1 SH2
8 SDVSH2L 3
SINSH2L 2
GND 4
Error detection signals: SSH and SSL 16
N.C
: For board operation
: Regulator (15 V → 5 V)
SCR08C FR8H2417.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 14
● Photomultiplier (PMT/PMR) block diagram
<D> <C>
JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C PHV08C PMT08C
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3 CN9 CN5 CN1 CN2 CN1
(AC200V) 1 1 1 HVOKH 1 1 15VOKH1 1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 5 5
F1 2 HVOKL 2 2 15VOKL1 2
L 1 1 1 2 +15VA 2 3 15VOKH 3 3 +15AS
6 6 3
N 2 2 2 +15V 4 15VOKL 4 4 ASG 4
E 3 3 -15VA 3
F1 Unit 1 7 7 5 HVH 5 5 +15AS 5
-15V TP4
DC 4 4 6 HVL 6 6 ASG 6
unit 8 8 +15AS 7 +15AS 7 7 +15AS 7
AC IN
200-240V +15V F2 8 ASG 8 8 ASG 8
A 9 +15AS 9 9 -15AS 9
DCOUT4 10 ASG 10 10 ASG 10
11 +15AS 11 11 -15AS 11
12 ASG 12 12 ASG 12
13 +15AS 13 13 -15AS 13
14 ASG 14 14 ASG 14
15 +15AS 15 15 ERSH2 15
16 ASG 16 16 ERSL2 16
17 +15AS 17 17 VIONH1 17
18 ASG 18 18 VIONL1 18
19 +15AS 19 19 LEDH1 19
20 ASG 20 20 LEDL1 20
-15AS 21 -15AS 21
F4 22 ASG 22
23 -15AS 23
TP8 24 ASG 24
25 -15AS 25
26 ASG 26
27 ERSH 27
28 ERSL 28
29 LEDSIGH 29
30 LEDSIGL 30
31 LEDONH 31
32 LEDONL 32
33 VIONH 33
34 VIONL 34
MTH08B/E
TB1 <A>
TB3 +5V 1 SCR08C PMR08C
CN50 CN12
+5V 2 1 1 CN1 CN4 CN3 CN1
+5V-GND 3 3 2
+5V-GND 4 TP7 1 HVOKH2 1 1 15VOKH2 1
F3 2 3 2 HVOKL2 2 15VOKL2
4 4 2 2
3 15VOKH2 3 3 +15AS 3
+12V 1 TP8 F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7 4 15VOKL2 4 4 ASG 4
+12V-GND 2 1a 1a 1a 5 HVH2 5 5 +15AS 5
+12V 3 2a 2a 2a 6 HVL2 6 6 ASG 6
+12V-GND 4 CN27
7 LEDSIGH2 7 7 +15AS 7
DCOUT1 8 LEDSIGL2 8 8 ASG 8
13b 13b 13b
14b 14b 14b 9 LEDONH2 9 9 -15AS 9
10 LEDONL2 10 10 ASG 10
CPU90E VIONH2 11 -15AS 11
11 11
21b 21b 21b 12 VIONL2 12 12 ASG 12
22b 22b 22b
13 NC 13 13 -15AS 13
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b 14 NC 14 14 ASG 14
25b 25b 25b 15 ERSH3 15
26b 26b 26b 16 ERSL3 16
17 VIONH2 17
N.C 18 VIONL2 18
 19 LEDH2 19
20 LEDL2 20
DCOUT4 CNZ16 CN5
1 2 HG 1
A 2 1 +15VH 2
Error detection signals: HVOKH, HVOKL,15VOKH, 15VOKL,
VIONH, VIONL
: LED <E>
FR8H2418.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 15
4.6 Other Fuses [2] JPS-7 fuse locations
■ Fuses F1 to F9 on unit 1 and unit 2 main boards

[1] JPS-3 fuse locations
■ Fuses other than DC unit fuse F1
Isolation transformer
F2
Sequence unit
F1
Unit 3 main board
Transparent filter
F1
F2
Elevation unit F1
board
F1 F4
F5
JPS-3 cover
Elevation unit board Sequence unit Isolation transformer Unit 1 main board
No. Fuse ratings No. Fuse ratings No. Fuse ratings
F9
F1 250V/1A F1-2 250V/2A F1 250V/8A JPS-7 F8
F2 250V/2.5A F3 F7
FR8H2489.EPS Unit 2 main board F6
F2
■ DC unit fuse F1
JPS-3 No. Fuse ratings
F1 250V/15A
F2 250V/1A
F1 F3 250V/3.15A
Cover F4 250V/2A
DC unit
F5 250V/1A
F6-9 250V/6.3A
FR8H2492.EPS
No. Fuse ratings

F1 250V/2.5A
FR8H2490.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 16
[3] Other board fuse locations ■ XPC08A board
■ MTH08B/E board
F5 F4 F1 F5 F6 F1 F1
MTH08B board MTH08E board
F2
F2 F3
F2
F3 F3 No. Fuse ratings

F1 125V/2A
F2-3 125V/1A
FR8H2497.EPS
No. Fuse ratings No. Fuse ratings ■ CPU90F board

F1-5 125V/2A F1-3 125V/2A CN2 CN1
F4 125V/5A F5 125V/4A
F6 125V/5A
FR8H2493.EPS
F1
■ BSP08A board
ETH90F board
F2
F1 No. Fuse ratings

F1 125V/1A
F2 125V/3A
FR8H2495.EPS
No. Fuse ratings

■ CPU90E board
F1 125V/3A
FR8H2496.EPS
F4
VGA90E CPU90E
F3
F1
F2
No. Fuse ratings

F1-3 125V/1A
F4 125V/2A FR8H2494.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 17
[4] Fuse list Name Fuse number Rating Qty. Use
Name Fuse number Rating Qty. Use 9 Board <XPC08A> N OKI product 1
1 Power supply <JPS-3> 1 Fuse F1 125V, 2A 1 For XPC08A board (+5 V)
Circuit protector NFB1 250V, 15A 1 For JPS-3 AC input F2 125V, 1A 2 For PNL08A board (+5 V)
F3 For PNL08B board (+5 V)
Fuse ● F2 (isolation transformer) 250V T, 2.5A 2 For sequence board (+7 V)
10 Board <CPU90F> 1
● F1 (DC unit) For DC unit board (200 V)
Fuse F1 125V, 1A 1 For CPU90F board cooling fan (+12 V)
● F1 (sequence unit) 250V T, 2A 2 For sequence board (+5 V)
● F2 (sequence unit) For elevation unit board (+5 V) and DC unit board (relay) F2 125V, 3A 1 For ETH90F board (+5 V)
● F1 (elevation unit board) 250V T, 1A 1 For hydraulic pump cooling fan 11 Board <CPU90E> 1
● F1 (isolation transformer) 250V T, 8A 1 For elevation unit AC actuator Fuse F1 125V, 1A 3 For floppy disk drive (+5 V)
2 Power supply <JPS-7> 1 F2 Not connected
Fuse ● F1 (unit 1) 250V , 15A 1 For JPS-7 AC input F3 Not connected
● F2 (unit 2) 250V T, 1A 2 For FFM power supply (+5 V), SCN08C board (+5 V), and F4 125V, 2A 1 For VGA90E board (+5 V)
SNS08B (+5 V)
● F5 (unit 2) For erasure unit internal thermostatic switch ● mark: Replaceable fuses
● F4 (unit 2) 250V T, 2A 1 For erasure unit cooling fan power supply (+24 V) *1: With the SCR08C board of ver. F or later, the fuse is replaceable.
● F1 (fluorescent lamp inverter 1) 250V T, 20A 2 For erasure lamp (55 W) inverter power supply (+24 V) *2: With the SCN08C board of ver. J or later, the fuse is replaceable. TR8H2302.EPS
● F1 (fluorescent lamp inverter 2) For erasure lamp (36 W) inverter power supply (+24 V)
● F3 (unit 2) 250V T, 3.15A 1 For power supply internal fan power supply, SCN08C board
(+24 V) power supply, and SCN08C (SNS08B) board cooling fan
power supply
● F6 (unit 2) 250V T, 6.3A 4 For DRV08B board (+24 V)
● F7 (unit 2) For DRV08B board (+24 V)
● F2 (fluorescent lamp inverter 1) 250V T, 4A 2 For erasure lamp (55 W) inverter power supply (+24 V)
● F2 (fluorescent lamp inverter 2) For erasure lamp (36 W) inverter power supply (+24 V)
3 Board <MTH08B> 1
Fuse F1 125V, 2A 4 For hard disk drive (+5 V)
F2 For SCN08C board (+5 V)
F3 Not connected [for scanner bus (+5 V)]
F5 For hard disk drive (+5 V)
F4 125V, 5A 1 For controller cooling fan (+12 V), and hard disk drive (+12V)
3 Board <MTH08E> 1
Fuse ● F1 125V, 2A 3 For hard disk drive (+5 V)
● F2 For SCN08C board (+5 V)
● F3 Not connected [for scanner bus (+5 V)]
● F5 125V, 4A 1 For hard disk drive (+5 V)
● F6 125V, 5A 1 For controller cooling fan (+12 V), and hard disk drive (+12V)
4 Board <DRV08B> 1
Fuse FU1-FU10 125V, 3.5A 10 For motor (+24 V)
5 Board <SNS08B> 1
Fuse F1 125V, 5A 1 For SNS08B (+5 V)
F2 125V, 2A 1 For sensor (+5 V)
6 Board <SCR08C> 1
Fuse *1 ● F1 48V, 1A 1 For sensor (+5 V)
7 Board <SCN08C> 1
Fuse *2 ● F5 48V, 1A 6 For POLDRV (+24 V)
● F6 For SYN08A (+5 V)
● F7 For SYN08A (+5 V)
● F8 For sensor (+5 V)
● F9 For SYN08A (+15 V)
● F10 For SYN08A (-15 V)
● F1 48V, 2A 4 For LDD08C board (+15 V)
● F2 For PHV08C board (+15 V)
● F3 For LDD08C board (-15 V)
● F4 For PHV08C board (-15 V)
8 Board <BSP08A> 1
Fuse F1 125V, 3A 1 For SCN08C board (+5 V), SCR08C board (+5 V)
TR8H2300.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 4 - 18
[5] Block diagram
JPS-3 DC unit (200) (200) JPS-7
(200) F1 (5)(12) Fluorescent lamp F1 F2 Lamps LAMP1- LAMP4
NFB1 Unit 1 inverter 1
Sequence unit F1 Lamps LAMP5- LAMP8
Fluorescent lamp F1 F2
F2 inverter 2
F1 F2 AC actuator Fans FANF1-4, FANH6-8
SVH1, SVH2 (24)
Elevation unit (115)
Unit 2 F3 F4 Thermostatic switch TSWF2, TSWF8
F1 MH1, MH2
(24)
F1 (115) F5
AC actuator
Thermostatic switch TSWF3, TSWF6, TSWF1
FANH5
(24) DRV08B F1 – F10

(24) Motors
F6 – F9
MA1 – MA3,
MB1 – MB3,
F2
MD1 – MD2,
(5)
FFM (MZ1) MF1, MZ2
SNS08B
(5) (5)
F1 F2 Sensors
SA1– SA3
SB1– SB3
SF1, SD1
SD2, SE1
SZ2, SZ3
(24)
Fan FANH1
(5) SCR08C (5)

Sensors
F1 SH1, SH2
24
SCN08C POLDRV
F5
(5) (5)
F6
MTH08B (5)
SYN08A
(24) (5) (±15) F7
(5) BSP08A (5) (+15)
F9
(12)(15) F1 (-15)
F10
(5)(12) (5)
(5) F8
F1 Sensor
(5) HDD (+15) SZ1
F5 F1
(12) (-15) LDD08C
MTH08E F3
(5)
F2 (+15)
(5) F2
BSP08A (12)(15) (-15) PHV08C
(12)(15) F4
F3
(12) Fan
(5) F4
F1 FANH4
(5) HDD
F5
(12) Fan
(12)
FANH10
(5)
F2 XPC08A
SCN08C (5)
(5)
F3 F1 F2 PNL08A
(5)(12)
(12) (5)
F6 Fan (15) F3 PNL08B
FANH4
Fan CPU90F (12)

(12) FANH10 (5)(12)
F1 Fan
(5)
(15) F2 ETH90F
XPC08A CPU90E (5)

(5)(12) F2 F1 FDD
(5)
F3 F4 VGA90E
CPU90F
CPU90E
FR8H2420.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 5 - 1
[2] Checking with the M-Utility
5. Checking the Sensors
◆NOTE◆
5.1 Checking the SA1, SA2, SA3, SB1, SB2, and SB3 Monitor the target sensors with MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility.
“ 11.4 3.SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
“ 2.4 Inspecting the Sensors” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
[1] Analysis Flow 1. Check that the sensor is “open” when its light path is not blocked.
2. Check that the sensor is “closed” when its light path is blocked.
START
A [3] Checking the sensors

• SA1 replacement
Does the M-Utility N Are the SNS08B N Are the power supply N Are the fusesNfor the N
indicate that the sensor board voltages unit (JPS-7) power supply unit
“4.2 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Positioning Home Position Sensor (SA1)” in the
operation is normal? normal? voltages normal? (JPS-7) normal? “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Y [2] Y "3.1 Checking the Board Y "3.2 Checking Y "4.2 Sensor • SA2 replacement
Test Pin (Connector) the Power Supply Fuses"
Voltages Unit Voltages"
Replace any “4.3 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Lift Home Position Sensor (SA2)” in the “Checks,
blown fuse.
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Is the SNS08B N • SA3 replacement
Return to the error board fuse normal?
code analysis flow. Replace the power “4.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Bucky Home Position Sensor (SA3)” in the “Checks,
Y supply unit (JPS-7). Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
"4.2 Sensor
Fuses" Replace the
entire board.
• SB1 replacement
“5.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Positioning Unit Entry IP Sensor (SB1)” in the
N “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Are the cables normal? Replace any faulty cable.
• SB2 replacement
Y [5], [6]
“5.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Path Changeover Unit IP Sensor (SB2)” in the
N
Is the mechanism normal? Repair the mechanism. “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Y • SB3 replacement
N “5.4 Inspecting and Replacing the confluence Unit IP Sensor (SB3)” in the “Checks,
Is the sensor normal? Replace the sensor.
Y [3]
[4] List of compatible sensors

Remove and reinstall the
CPU90E board and ● 104N0044
connectors.
• SA2, 3
N • SD2
Does the error recur? A • SZ2
Y
● 113Y1038
Replace the boards in the following order: • SB1-3
1. SNS08B board
2. CPU90E board
• SF1
3. MTH08B/E board • SH1, 2
4. SCR08C board • SZ3
5. SCN08C board
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board" in the "Checks, Replacement,
and Adjustment of Parts" volume
FR4H2350.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 5 - 2
[5] Block diagrams


JPS-3 JPS-7
ACOUT 1 DCOUT2
(AC200V) 1 +5V
AC IN1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51
F1 4 +5V-GND <A>
L 1 1 L 1 1 SNS08B
2 +5V
N 2 2 N 2 2
5 +5V-GND CN5A
E 3 F1 CN4
Unit 1 3 F1 1a 5V(SEN)
DC 1 CNA1
6 N.C 2a N.C
unit 3 1 5V(SEN) 1 SA1
AC IN 2 3a SINSA1
VCC 2 N.C 2
200-240V CN15 CN4 4a GND
4 3 SINSA1 3
F2 5a 5V(SEN)
3 3 4 GND
6a N.C 5 5V(SEN)
GND 7a SINSA2 6 N.C
CN1 8a GND SINSA2
CNH52 7 1
9a 5V(SEN) SA2
8 GND 2
10a N.C 9 5V(SEN) 3
11a SINSA3 10 N.C
12a GND 11 SINSA3
13a 5V(SEN) 12 GND
100 N.C
14a 13 1
15a SINSB1 SA3
14 2
16a GND 15 N.C 3
17a 5V(SEN) 16
<C> 18a N.C
MTH08B/E 50 19a SINSB2
GND CNB1
TB3 20a
1 5V(SEN) 1
TB1 21a 5V(SEN) SB1
4
CNH91 2 N.C 2
22a N.C
3 SINSB1 3
23a SINSB3
50 4 GND 4
CN20 24a GND
5 5V(SEN)
SCR08C 25a
CN27 6 N.C
4 26a N.C
7 SINSB2 1
CN4 SB2
8 GND 3
52
9 5V(SEN) 2
DCOUT1 10 N.C 4
CNH56 11 SINSB3
12 GND
13 1
CN7 SB3
CN3 14 3
Signal 52 15 N.C 2
10 system
16 4
CN6

Run the following checks on paths <A>, , and <C> that are indicated in the block diagram:
1. Check that the connectors are properly connected.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 5 - 3
5.2 Checking the SD1, SD2, SE1, SF1, SZ2, and SZ3 [2] Checking with the M-Utility
◆NOTE◆
[1] Analysis Flow Monitor the target sensors with MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility.
“ 11.4 3.SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
“ 2.4 Inspecting the Sensors” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
START
1. Check that the sensor is “open” when its light path is not blocked.
A 2. Check that the sensor is “closed” when its light path is blocked.
Does the M-Utility N Are the SNS08B N Are the power supply N Are the powerN supply N
indicate that the sensor board voltages unit (JPS-7) unit (JPS-7) [3] Checking the sensors
operation is normal? normal? voltages normal? voltages normal?
Y Y Y Y
• SD1 replacement
[2] "3.1 Checking the Board "3.2 Checking "4.2 Sensor
Test Pin (Connector) the Power Supply Fuses" Replace any “10.2 Inspecting and Replacing the After-Reading IP Sensor (SD1)” in the
Voltages Unit Voltages" blown fuse.
“Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Is the SNS08B N • SD2 replacement
Return to the error board fuse normal?
code analysis flow. Replace the power “10.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Release Home Position Sensor (SD2)” in the
Y
"4.2 Sensor supply unit (JPS-7). “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Fuses" Replace the • SE1 replacement
entire board.
“11.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Erasure Entry IP Sensor (SE1)” in the
N “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
• SF1 replacement
Y [5], [6]
“6.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Entry IP Sensor (SF1)” in the “Checks,
N Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Is the mechanism normal? Repair the mechanism.
Y • SZ2 replacement
N “9.6 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Grip Release Home Position
Sensor (SZ2)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Y [3]
• SZ3 replacement
“9.7 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Reading IP Sensor (SZ3)” in the “Checks,
Remove and reinstall the Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
CPU90E board and
connectors.
[4] List of compatible sensors
N
Does the error recur? A ● 104N0044
Y
• SA2, 3
Replace the boards in the following order:
• SD2
1. SNS08B board • SZ2
2. CPU90E board
3. MTH08B/E board ● 113Y1038
4. SCR08C board • SB1-3
5. SCN08C board
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board" in the "Checks, Replacement, • SF1
FR4H2351.EPS
• SH1, 2
• SZ3
● 113Y1039
• SD1
• SE1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 5 - 4
[5] Block diagrams


JPS-3 JPS-7
ACOUT 1 DCOUT2
(AC200V) 1 +5V
AC IN1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51
F1 4 +5V-GND <A>
L 1 1 L 1 1 SNS08B
2 +5V
N 2 2 N 2 2
5 +5V-GND
E 3 Unit 1 CN4 CN5B
3 F1 CNF1
1 1b 5V(SEN)
F1 6 N.C 1 5V(SEN) 1 SF1
3 2b N.C
AC IN DC 2 N.C 2
2 VCC 3b SINSF1
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 3 SINSF1 3
4 4b GND
F2 4 GND 4
3 3 5b 5V(SEN)
6b N.C
GND 7b SINSD1 CND1
CN1
8b GND 1 5V(SEN) 1 SD1
CNH52
9b 5V(SEN) 2 N.C 2
10b N.C 3 SINSD1 3
11b SINSD2 4 GND 4
12b GND 5 5V(SEN)
13b 5V(SEN) 6 N.C
100 7 SINSD2
14b N.C 1 SD2
15b SINSE1 8 GND 2
16b GND 3
17b 5V(SEN)
<C> 18b N.C CNZ1 CNE1
MTH08B/E 50 19b SINSZ2 1 5V(SEN) 1 5V(SEN) 1 SE1
TB3 20b GND 2 N.C 2 N.C 2
TB1 CNH91 5V(SEN) 3 SINSE1 3 SINSE1 3
4 21b
22b N.C 4 GND 4 GND 4
50 23b SINSZ3 5 5V(SEN)
CN20 24b GND 6 N.C
SCR08C 7 SINSZ2 1 SZ2
CN27 25b
4 26b N.C 8 GND 2
CN4 9 5V(SEN) 3
52 10 N.C
DCOUT1 11 SINSZ3
12 GND
CNH56
13 1 SZ3
14 2
CN7 15 3
CN3 Signal
system 52 16 4
10 17 N.C
18
CN6 19
20


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 5 - 5
5.3 XXXXX

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 5 - 6
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 5 - 7
5.4 Checking the SH1 and SH2 [3] Checking the sensors
• SH1 replacement
“12.1 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH1)” in the “Checks,
[1] Analysis Flow
START • SH2 replacement
A “12.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH2)” in the “Checks,
N N
Is the mechanism Are the SCN08C/ N Are the power Are the fusesNfor the N
normal? SCR08C board supply unit (JPS-7) power supply unit
voltages normal? voltages normal? (JPS-7) normal? [3] List of compatible sensors
Y [2]
Y Y
Y "3.1 Checking the Board "3.2 Checking
the Power Supply
"4.2 Sensor
Fuses" ● 113Y1038
Test Pin (Connector)
Voltages Unit Voltages" Replace any
Return to the error • SB1-3
code analysis flow. N blown fuse.
Is the SCR08C
board fuse normal? Replace the power • SF1
supply unit (JPS-7).
Y "4.2 Sensor • SH1-2
Fuses"
Replace the • SZ3
entire board.
N
Y [4], [5]
N
Y [2]

CPU90E board and
connectors.
N
Does the error recur? A
Y

1. CPU90E board
2. MTH08B/E board
3. SCR08C board
4. SCN08C board
FR4H2339.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MT 5 - 8
[4] Block diagrams


JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C
ACOUT 1
(AC200V) DCOUT3 CN9
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1
F1
L 1 1 L 1 1 1 +5V 1
N 2 2 N 2 2 5 GND 5
E 3 Unit 1 2 2
6 6
F1
3 3
AC IN DC
7 7
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 4 4
3 3 8 8
CN7
CNH52
<A>
F1
52 CN5
1 +5V(SEN) 1 SH1
2 SDVSH1L 3
MTH08B/E
TB3 3 SINSH1L 2
TB1 4 GND 4
4 5
6
CN20 CNH56 7 +5V(SEN) 1 SH2
8 SDVSH2L 3
CN27 9 SINSH2L 2
4
52 10 GND 4
11
12
DCOUT1 N.C
13
14
<C> 15
16
CN3 Signal
10
system
CN6
CPU90E SCR08C FR4H2413.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 1
6. Checking the Motors and Lamps
◆ CHECK ◆
6.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, and MA3 With MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility, check that the motors (MA1, MA2, and MA3) run and
stop.
“11.2 1. MOTOR: Operation Tests on Motor” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
[1] Analysis Flow
START [3] Checking the motors

A • Check the motors.
“2.8 Inspecting the Pulse Motors” in the “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts”
Does the M-Utility Are the DRV08B Are the power supply Are the fuses for the
N N N N volume
indicate that the motor board voltages unit (JPS-7) voltages power supply unit
operation is normal? normal? normal? (JPS-7) normal? • MA1 replacement
Y [2] Y "3.1 Checking the Y "3.2 Checking Y "4.3 Motor “4.6 Replacing the IP Positioning Drive Motor (MA1)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Board Test Pin the Power Supply Fuses" Replace any Adjustment of Parts” volume
(Connector) Unit Voltages" blown fuse.
Return to the error Voltages" • MA2 replacement
code analysis flow.
Replace the power
“4.7 Replacing the IP Lift Drive Motor (MA2)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
N • MA3 replacement
Y [5], [6] “4.8 Replacing the Bucky Drive Motor (MA3)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
N
Y [4] List of compatible motors

N
Is the motor normal? Replace the motor. ● 118SX162
Y [3]
• MB2
Remove and reinstall the • MD1, 2
CPU90E board and
connectors. ● 118SX164
N • MA1, 2
Y • MB1, 3
• MF1
Replace the boards in the following order: • MZ 2
1. DRV08B board
2. SNS08B board
3. CPU90E board
4. MTH08B/E board
5. SCR08C board
6. SCN08C board
FR4H2353.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 2
[5] Block diagrams
 <A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 DRV08B
ACOUT 1 CN5
DCOUT1 CN1 CNA2 CNMA1
(AC200V) F6
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 1 +24V 1 1 MA1A 1 1
F1 5 +24V-GND 5 F1
L 1 1 L 1 1 F7 4 VBB(MA1) 4 2
N 2 2 N 2 2 2 +24V 2 2 MA1AL 2 3
E 3 Unit 1 6 +24V-GND 6 5 MA1B 5 4 MA1
F8
3 +24V 3 3 VBB(MA1) 3 5
F1 7 +24V-GND 7
F9 6 MA1BL 6 6
AC IN DC 4 +24V 4
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 8 +24V-GND 8
CN6 CNA3 CNMA2
3 3 Unit 2
1 MA2A 1 1
F2
7 VBB(MA2) 7 2
2 MA2AL 2 3
CNH52 8 MA2B 8 4 MA2
3 VBB(MA2) 3 5
9 MA2BL 9 6
4 MA3A 4
F3
10 VBB(MA3) 10 CNMA3
5 MA3AL 5
1
11 MA3B 11
2
6 VBB(MA3) 6
3
12 MA3BL 12
4 MA3
5
MTH08B/E SCN08C SNS08B 6
TB3 TB1 CN2
CN2
4 60 MA1
CN1 MA2
MA3
CN7
CN27 CN20 52 52
40
4 CN3
CN3
CNH56
DCOUT1 100
CN3 Signal
10 system 50 50
CN6 CN4
CNH91
CPU90E SCR08C
<C> FR4H2403.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 3
6.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MB3 [2] Checking with the M-Utility
◆ CHECK ◆
[1] Analysis Flow With MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility, check that the motors (MB1, MB2, and MB3) run and
stop.
START
A
Does the M-Utility
[3] Checking the motors
N Are the DRV08B N Are the power supply N Are the fuses for the N
indicate that the motor board voltages unit (JPS-7) voltages power supply unit • Check the motors.
operation is normal? normal? normal? (JPS-7) normal?
Y
[2] Y
Y "3.1 Checking the Y "3.2 Checking "4.3 Motor volume
Board Test Pin the Power Supply Fuses" Replace any
(Connector) Unit Voltages" blown fuse. • MB1 replacement
Return to the error Voltages"
code analysis flow. “5.6 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB1)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Replace the power
supply unit (JPS-7). Adjustment of Parts” volume
• MB2 replacement
N
“5.7 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB2)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Y [5], [6] Adjustment of Parts” volume
N
Repair the mechanism.
• MB3 replacement
Is the mechanism normal?
Y
“5.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB3)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
N
Is the motor normal? Replace the motor.
Y [3] [4] List of compatible motors
● 118SX162
CPU90E board and
connectors.
• MB2
• MD1, 2
N
● 118SX164
Y
• MA1, 2
1. DRV08B board
• MB1, 3
2. SNS08B board • MF1
3. CPU90E board
4. MTH08B/E board • MZ 2
5. SCR08C board
6. SCN08C board
and Adjustment of Parts" volume FR4H2354.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 4
[5] Block diagrams
 <A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 DRV08B
ACOUT 1 CN7
DCOUT1 CN1 CNMB1
(AC200V) F6
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 1 +24V 1 1 MB1A 1
F1 5 +24V-GND 5 F4
L 1 1 L 1 1 F7 7 VBB(MB1) 2
N 2 2 N 2 2 2 +24V 2 2 MB1AL 3
E 3 6 +24V-GND 6 8 MB1B 4 MB1
Unit 1 F8
3 +24V 3 3 VBB(MB1) 5
F1 7 +24V-GND 7
F9 9 MB1BL 6
AC IN DC 4 +24V 4 4 MB3A
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 8 +24V-GND 8 F5
10 VBB(MB3) CNMB3
3 3 Unit 2 5 MB3AL
1
11 MB3B
2
6 VBB(MB3)
3
12 MB3BL
CNH52 4 MB3
5
6
CN8 CNMB2
1 MB2A 1
F6
4 VBB(MB2) 2
2 MB2AL 3
5 MB2B 4 MB2
3 VBB(MB2) 5
MTH08B/E SCN08C SNS08B 6 MB2BL 6
TB3 TB1 CN2 CN2
4 60 MB1
CN1 MB2
MB3
CN7
CN27 CN20 52 52
40
4 CN3
CN3
CNH56
DCOUT1 100
CN3 Signal
system
10 50 50
CN6 CN4
CNH91
CPU90E SCR08C
<C> FR4H2404.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 5
6.3 Checking the MD1, MD2, MF1, and MZ2 [2] Checking with the M-Utility
◆ CHECK ◆
[1] Analysis Flow With MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility, check that the motors (MD1, MD2, MF1, and MZ2) run
and stop.
START
A
Does the M-Utility
[3] Checking the motors
N Are the DRV08B N Are the power supply N Are the fuses for the N
indicate that the motor board voltages unit (JPS-7) voltages power supply unit • Check the motors.
operation is normal? normal? normal? (JPS-7) normal?
Y
[2] Y
Y "3.1 Checking the Y "3.2 Checking "4.3 Motor volume
(Connector) Unit Voltages" blown fuse. • MD1 replacement
code analysis flow. “10.4 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MD1)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Replace the power
supply unit (JPS-7). Adjustment of Parts” volume
• MD2 replacement
N
“10.5 Replacing the Grip Release Motor (MD2)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
Y [5], [6] Adjustment of Parts” volume
N
Repair the mechanism.
• MF1 replacement
Is the mechanism normal?
Y
“6.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MF1)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
N
• MZ2 replacement
Y [3] “9.9 Replacing the Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2)” in the “Checks, Replacement, and
CPU90E board and
connectors.
[4] List of compatible motors
N ● 118SX162
Y • MB2
• MD1, 2
1. DRV08B board ● 118SX164
2. SNS08B board
3. CPU90E board
4. MTH08B/E board • MA1, 2
5. SCR08C board
• MB1, 3
6. SCN08C board • MF1
and Adjustment of Parts” volume FR4H2355.EPS
• MZ2

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 6
[5] Block diagrams
 <A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 DRV08B
ACOUT 1
DCOUT1 CN1 CN9 CND2 CND3 CNMD1
(AC200V) F6
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 1 +24V 1 1 MD1A 1 1 1
F1 5 +24V-GND 5 F7 4 7 4 2
L 1 1 L 1 1 F7 VBB(MD1)
N 2 2 N 2 2 2 +24V 2 2 MD1AL 2 2 3
E 3
Unit 1 F8
6 +24V-GND 6 5 MD1B 8 5 4 MD1
3 +24V 3 3 VBB(MD1) 3 3 5
F1 7 +24V-GND 7 6 9 6 6
F9 MD1BL
AC IN DC 4 +24V 4
200-240V unit CN15 CN4 8 +24V-GND 8
CN10 CNMD2
3 3 Unit 2 1 MD2A 4 1
F8 4 2
VBB(MD2) 10
2 MD2AL 5 3
CNH52 5 MD2B 11 4 MD2
3 VBB(MD2) 6 5
6 MD2BL 12 6
CN11 CNF3 CNMF1

1 MF1A 1 1
F9 4 4 2
VBB(MF1)
2 MF1AL 2 3
5 MF1B 5 4 MF1
3 VBB(MF1) 3 5
MTH08B/E SCN08C SNS08B 6 MF1BL 6 6
TB3 TB1 CN2 CN2
4 60 CN12 CNZ4 CNZ5 CNMZ2
CN1 1 MZ2A 1 1 1
F10 4 4 2 2
CN7 VBB(MZ2)
CN3 2 MZ2AL 2 3 3
CN27 CN20 52 52
4
40 MD1 5 MZ2B 5 4 4 MZ2
MD2 3 VBB(MZ2) 3 5 5
CN3 MF1 6 MZ2BL 6 6 6
CNH56 MZ2
DCOUT1 100
CN3 Signal
system
10 50 50
CN6 CN4
CNH91
CPU90E SCR08C
<C> FR4H2405.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 7
6.4 Checking the MZ1 [2] Checking with the M-Utility

◆ CHECK ◆
[1] Analysis Flow With MECHANICAL UTILITY of the M-Utility, check that the MZ1 runs and stops.
“11.3 2. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Erasure Lamp, FFM in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
START
A [3] Checking the motor

Does the M-Utility N Are the power supply Are the fuses for the
• MZ1 replacement
Are the motor (MZ1) N N N
indicate that the motor unit (JPS-7) voltages power supply unit
operation is normal? voltages normal? “9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1)” in the “Checks,
normal? (JPS-7) normal?
Y [2] Y
Y "3.1 Checking the Y "3.2 Checking "4.3 Motor
(Connector) Unit Voltages" blown fuse.
code analysis flow.
Replace the power
N
Y [4], [5]
N
Y
N
Y [3]

CPU90E board and
connectors.
N
Y

1. SNS08B board
2. CPU90E board
3. MTH08B/E board
4. SCR08C board
5. SCN08C board
FR4H2356.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 8
[4] Block diagrams

JPS-3 JPS-7 SNS08B
CN2
ACOUT 1 DCOUT2 CN4 CNZ2 1
(AC200V) F1 CN8
AC IN1 1 +5V 1 N.C 2
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 1 1
F1 4 +5V-GND 3 N.C 3
L 1 1 L 1 1 2 2
2 +5V 2 VCC 4
N 2 2 N 2 2 3 3 SUP MZ1
5 +5V-GND 4 5
E 3
Unit 1
F2 4 4 OK(L) (FFM)
3 6
CN15 5 5 SUP
F1 6 N.C 7
3 3
GND
6 6 START(L)
AC IN DC CN4 8
7 7 SUP
200-240V unit
8 8 CW(L)
CNH52 9 9 CN3
1 DCOUT5 SUP 1
3 10 10
11 11 M0(L) 2
2 SUP 3
+15V 12 12
+5V 4 M1(L) 4
13 13
14 14 SUP 5
M2(L) 6
15 15
16 16 N.C
CN1
100
Signal
50 system
<C> CN1
CNH91
(+15V/+5V)
1 +15V 1
2 +15V-GND 2
3 +5V 3
MTH08B/E <A> 4 +5V-GND 4
TB3 50
TB1 SCR08C CNZ3
4
CN20 CN4
CN27
4
DCOUT1 52
CNH56
CN3 CN7
Signal
10 52
system
CN6
CPU90E SCN08C
<D> FR4H2412.EPS

Run the following checks on paths <A>, , <C>, and <D> that are indicated in the block
diagram:

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 9
6.5 Checking the LAMP1-8 [2] Checking with the M-Utility

◆ CHECK ◆
Using ELECTRICAL UTILITY of M-Utility, check whether the lamp (LAMP1-8) is lit.
[1] Analysis Flow “9.1. 1. ERASURE LAMP TEST: Erasure Lamp Turn-On Test” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
“11.3 2. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Erasure Lamp, FFM in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
START
[3] Checking the erasure lamps
A ◆ CHECK ◆
N
Measure the resistance across the electrodes of the erasure lamp to check whether the resulting
Is the lamp lit in Is the lamp (LAMP1-8) N
M-Utility? normal?
Replace the erasure lamp. value is 2 ±0.5 Ω.
Lamp
Y [2] Y [3]
N
Is the socket normal? Replace the socket.
Return to the error
Y [3] FR8H2599.EPS
code analysis flow.
Are the power supply unit N Are the fuses for the power N • LAMP1-8 replacement
(JPS-7) voltages normal? supply unit (JPS-7) normal? “6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-LAMP8)” in the “Checks,
Y Y "4.4 Erasure Lamp
"3.2 Checking the
Power Supply Unit Voltages" Fuses" • Replace the socket.
Replace any “6.13 Replacing the Sockets” in the “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
blown fuse. [4] Checking the sensors
Replace the power • TSWF3 replacement
supply unit (JPS-7). “6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6)” in the “Checks,
• TSWF6 replacement
Y [6], [7] “6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6)” in the “Checks,
Is the sensor normal? Replace the sensor. • TSWF1 replacement
Y
“6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6)” in the “Checks,
[4]
N • TSWF2 replacement
“6.5 Replacing the Temperature Control Switch (TSWF2/TSWF8)” in the “Checks, Replace-
Y [5] ment, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
• TSWF8 replacement
“6.5 Replacing the Temperature Control Switch (TSWF2/TSWF8)” in the “Checks, Replace-
Remove and reinstall the ment, and Adjustment of Parts” volume
CPU90E board and • TSWF5 replacement
connectors. “6.6 Replacing the Initialization Temperature Control Switch (TSWF5)” in the “Checks,
N
Does the error recur? A [5] Checking the motors
Y • FANF1 replacement
“6.10 Replacing the Erasure Cooling Fans (FANF1 to FANF4, FANH6 to FANH8)” in the
Replace the boards in the following order: • FANF2 replacement
1. SNS08B board
2. CPU90E board
"20. Boards" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume • FANF3 replacement
FR4H2502.EPS
• FANF4 replacement

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 10
[6] Block diagrams 1/2
<A>
JPS-3 JPS-7 Erasure conveyor
ACOUT 1
(AC200V)
F1
L 1 1 L 1 1 L1-1
N 2 2 N 2 2
1
L1-2 2
E 3 Unit 1 L1-3 LAMP1
3
CN15 L1-4
F1 3 3
4
DC CN4
unit L2-1
CNH52 1
L2-2 2
3
1 L1-1 1 L2-4 4
7 L1-2 7
2 L2-1 2 L3-1
Fluorescent lamp 8 L2-2 8 1
L3-2 2
(55 W) inverter board 3 L3-1 3 LAMP3
L3-3 3
9 L3-2 9 L3-4
4 L4-1 4 4
F1
F2 10 L4-2 10
5 L1-3, L2-3 5 L4-1 1
11 L1-4, L2-4 11 L4-2 2
6 L3-3, L4-3 6 L4-3 LAMP4
3
12 L3-4, L4-4 12 L4-4 4
L5-1 A
L5-2 B
TB3 LAMP5
Unit 2 L5-3 C
L5-4 D
L6-1 A
L6-2 B
DCOUT1 C
1 L5-1 1 L6-4 D
8 L5-2 8
2 L6-1 2 L7-1
9 L6-2 9 A
L7-2 B
Fluorescent lamp 3 L7-1 3 L7-3 LAMP7
(36 W) inverter board 10 L7-2 10 C
L7-4 D
4 L8-1 4
F1 11 L8-2 11
F2 5 L5-3, L6-3 5 L8-1 A
12 L5-4, L6-4 12 L8-2 B
6 L7-3, L8-3 6 L8-3 LAMP8
C
13 L7-4, L8-4 13 L8-4 D
7 7
14 N.C 14 N.C
FR4H2503 .EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 11
[6] Block diagrams 2/2

JPS-3 JPS-7 Erasure conveyor
ACOUT 1
(AC200V)
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 CN1 CNF4 TSWF1
F1 F5
L 1 1 L 1 1 1 TSWF1-H 1
N 2 2 N 2 2 4 TSWF1-L 3
E 3 Unit 1 2 TSWF2-H 2 TSWF3
CN15 5 TSWF2-L 4
F1 3 3
CN4 3
DC
6 N.C
unit CNF8 TSWF6
CNH52 1
3
2
4 N.C
DCOUT8 CNF5 TSWF2

F4
1 +24V 1
3 +24V-GND 2
2 +24V
4 +24V-GND CNFANF1
CNF6
1 1
3 2 FANF1
<D> 2
4 N.C CNFANF2
1
DCOUT2 2 FANF2
1 +5V
TB3 4 +5V-GND CNFANF3
2 +5V 1
5 +5V-GND 2 FANF3
Unit 2 3
6 N.C
CNFANF4
1
DCOUT1 2 FANF4
TSWF5
CNF9 TSWF8
1
2
1 2
CNH60 CNFANH6 CNF2

1 1
3 2 FANH6
2
4 CNFANH7
1
2 FANH7
CN4 SNS08B CNFANH8
+5V 1
3 1
+5V-GND
2 2 FANH8
+5V
+5V-GND 4 CN11
1 TSWF5-1
2 GND
CN12
1 TSWF5-2
2 GND
<C> FR4H2504 .EPS

Run the following checks on paths <A>, , <C>, and <D> that are indicated in the block
diagram:

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 6 - 12
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 1
[3] LED indication
7. Checking the Scanner I/Os SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
To check the LED display, block the laser safety interlock switch (SH1) by use of tape or the like. While only
7.1 Checking the Polygon (POL) the covers are removed, the interlock is activated, so that the laser will not turn ON.
[1] Analysis Flow

[GOOD result indication]
START
Illuminated Extinguished
Does the M-Utility indicate N
that the polygon operates
normally when it is turned
ON? D16 HVON SCN08C
Y [2], [3] Turn OFF the power.
S1
1 SCR08C
Are the SCN08C board fuses N Replace the SCN08C board.
normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the
END SCN08C/SCR08C Board" in the "Checks, D15 SOH
Y "4.5 Scanner Fuses" Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
D14 SOS
N
Are the cables normal? Replace any faulty cable. D13 POL LOCK
Y [4], [5] D12 PCLK
N D11 LCLK
Does the error recur? 1 D10 FCLK
Y
D9 LD2OK
D8 LD1OK
1. Polygon assembly T
ON
"8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly" in the FR
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
2. SCN08C board FR8H2364.EPS
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board"
in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
3. CPU90E board
[NG result indication]
4. MTH08B/E board
"20. Boards" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment An LED indication other than the GOOD result indication
of Parts" volume
FR8H2357.EPS

◆ CHECK ◆
Confirm the displayed M-Utility diagnostic check result and LED indication.
• Turn ON the polygon.

[5] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
• Turn ON the laser.
[0] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
• RESULT - OK
• RESULT - LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT → The laser power is insufficient.
• RESULT - LASER POWER ERROR → The laser power is abnormal.
06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 2
[4] Block diagrams

SCN08C
JPS-3 JPS-7 CN9
1 1
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3 5 5
(AC200V)
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 CN1
F1 F3 F5 CN3 1
L 1 1 L 1 1 4 +24VP 4 +24PS 1
N 2 2 N 2 2 8 8 2 PGND 2
E 3 GND PGND TP3 3 POKL 3
F1 Unit 1 Unit 2
DC 4 PONL 4 POL-
GND 5 PGND 5 POL
unit DRV
AC IN PIDXL 6
6
200-240V
POLLOCK
MTH08B/E
TB3 TB1
1 +5V 1 CNH501
2 +5V 2 CN50 1 CN12
3 +5V-GND 3 1 3 1
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 3 2 2 <A>
F3 2 4 3
4 4
1 +12V 1 TP8
F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7
3 +12V-GND 3
2 +12V 2 1a 1a 1a
4 +12V-GND 4 CN27 2a 2a 2a
DCOUT1
13b 13b 13b
14b 14b 14b
CPU90E
21b 21b 21b
22b 22b 22b
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b
25b 25b 25b
26b 26b 26b
N.C
<C>
Error detection signals: PONL, POKL, PIDXL
: LED FR8H2406.EPS

◆ NOTES ◆
• Make sure that the power is OFF.
• For power supply checkout purposes, check paths and <C> that are indicated in the block
diagram.
06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 3
7.2 Checking the Laser (LDD) [3] LED indication

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
[1] Analysis Flow To check the LED display, block the laser safety interlock switch (SH1) by use of tape or the like. While only
the covers are removed, the interlock is activated, so that the laser will not turn ON.
START

that the Laser operates
Illuminated Extinguished
ON?
Y [2], [3] Turn OFF the power. D16 HVON SCN08C
1
Are the SCN08C board fuses N Replace the SCN08C board.
normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCR08C
END SCN08C/SCR08C Board" in the "Checks,
D15 SOH
N
Are the cables normal? Replace any faulty cable. D14 SOS
Y [4], [5] D13 POL LOCK
N D12 PCLK
D11 LCLK
Y
D10 FCLK
Reseat the boards in the order indicated below to check for the error. D9 LD2OK
1. LD assembly D8 LD1OK
"8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit" in the
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume T
ON
2. SCN08C board FR
FR8H2365.EPS
3. CPU90E board
4. MTH08B/E board
"20. Boards" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
of Parts" volume [NG result indication]
FR8H2358.EPS
An LED indication other than the GOOD result indication

◆ CHECK ◆

[5] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
[0] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
• RESULT - OK

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 4
[4] Block diagrams

JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C CNZ12 LDD08C
DCOUT3 CN9 CN1 1 1 1 CN1
ACOUT 1
(AC200V) 1 1 TP4 +15AS 2 2 2 CN2 LD1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 5 5 3 3 3 1 AG 1 1
F1 2 +15VA F1
L 1 1 L 1 1 2 4 4 4 2 +VLD 2 2 LDA08B
6 6 LD1
N 2 2 N 2 2 +15V ASG 5 5 5 3 LDKTD 3 3
E 3 3 -15VA 3 6 6
F1 Unit 1 7 7 6
DC -15V 7 7 7
4 4
unit 8 DGND 8 TP8 TP28 8 8 8
AC IN -15AS
GND 9 9 9
200-240V CN3 LD2
F3 10 10 10
11 11 11 1 AG 1 1
GND 12 12 12 2 +VLD 2 2
LDA08B LD2
13 LD1IDH 13 13 3 LDKTD 3 3
14 LD1IDL 14 14
MTH08B/E 17 LD1ONH 17 17
TB1 18 LD1ONL 18 18
TB3 1 +5V 1 CN4
2 +5V 2 CN50 CNH501 CN12 CN1
LD1OK 21 LD1OKH 21 21 1 +VLD 1
3 +5V-GND 3 F3 1 1 1
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 3 3 2 22 LD1OKL 22 22 2 PDAND1 2
PDA08A
2 2 3 3 PDAND2 3
4 4 4
1 +12V 1 TP8
F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7
3 +12V-GND 3
2 +12V 2 1a 1a 1a
DC 2a 2a 2a
4 +12V-GND 4 CN27
OUT1
13b 13b 13b <A>

14b 14b 14b
CPU90E
21b 21b 21b
22b 22b 22b
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b
25b 25b 25b
26b 26b 26b
N.C
<C>
Error detection signals: LD1IDH, LD1IDL, LD1ONH,
LD1ONL, LD1OKH, LD1OKL
: LED FR8H2407.EPS

◆ NOTES ◆
diagram.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 5
7.3 Checking the Start Point Detector (SYN) [3] LED indication
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
[1] Analysis Flow To check the LED display, block the laser safety interlock switch (SH1) by use of tape or the like. While only
the covers are removed, the interlock is activated, so that the laser will not turn ON.
START

that the Laser operates Illuminated Extinguished
ON?
Y [2], [3] D16 HVON SCN08C
Turn OFF the power.
1
Are the SCN08C board fuses N Replace the SCN08C board. SCR08C
normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the
D15 SOH
N
Are the cables normal? Replace any faulty cable. D14 SOS
Y [4], [5] D13 POL LOCK

D12 PCLK
N
Does the error recur? 1 D11 LCLK
Y
D10 FCLK
D9 LD2OK
If the error is detected, replace the board that is the cause of the error. D8 LD1OK
1. Start Point Detector (SYN)
"8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08A Board" in the T
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume ON
FR
2. SCN08C board
FR8H2366.EPS
3. CPU90E board
of Parts" volume [NG result indication]
FR8H2359.EPS An LED indication other than the GOOD result indication

◆ CHECK ◆

[5] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
[0] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
• RESULT - OK

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 6
[4] Block diagrams

JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C
DCOUT3
ACOUT 1 CN9
(AC200V) 1 +5VD 1
AC IN1 +5V SYN08A
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 5 GND 5 GND
F1 2 +15VA 2
L 1 1 L 1 1 +15V CN2
6 ASG 6 CNZ13 CNZ14 CN1
N 2 2 N 2 2 F9 +15AS 1
3 -15VA 3 +15AS 1 1 1
E 3 -15V
F1 7 ASG 7 2 ASG 2 2 2
DC Unit 1 F6
Unit 2 4 4 +5AS 3 +5AS 3 3 3
unit 8 8 4 ASG 4 4 4
AC IN
GND F10 -15AS 5 -15AS
200-240V 5 5 5
6 ASG 6 6 6
F7 VCC 7 +5DS 7 7 7
GND
8 GND 8 8 8
9 SSL 9 9 9
10 SSH 10 10 10
MTH08B/E
TB3 TB1 CNH501
1 +5V 1 CN50 1 CN12
1 1 SOS
2 +5V 2 3
3 +5V-GND 3 3 2 2 <A>
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 2 4 3
F3
4 4
1 +12V 1 TP8
F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7
3 +12V-GND 3
2 +12V 2 1a 1a 1a
DC 2a 2a 2a
4 +12V-GND 4 CN27
OUT1
13b 13b 13b

14b 14b 14b
CPU90E
21b 21b 21b
22b 22b 22b
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b
25b 25b 25b
26b 26b 26b
N.C
<C>
Error detection signals: SSH, SSL
: LED
■ : Regulator (15 V → 5 V) FR8H2408.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 7
7.4 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMT08C) [2] Checking with the M-Utility
◆ CHECK ◆
[1] Analysis Flow Confirm the displayed M-Utility diagnostic check result.
START • Execute the scanner self-diagnostic check function.

[5] [ENT] → [9] [ENT]
Does the M-Utility indicate N • RESULT - OK
that the diagnostic check
operation is normal? [NG result indication]
Y • RESULT - START POINT DETECTION ERROR → A start-point detection error occurred.
[2] Turn OFF the power.
• RESULT - EDGE DETECTION ERROR → A leading-edge detection error occurred.
1 • RESULT - HV ERROR → The high-voltage power supply is faulty.
N • RESULT - ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR → The analog power supply is faulty.
Are the SCN08C board Replace the SCN08C board.
fuses normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the • RESULT - POLYGON MIRROR ERROR → The polygon is faulty.
Y "4.5 Scanner Fuses" • RESULT - LASER POWER ERROR → The laser power is abnormal.
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
N
Y [3], [4]
N
Y
1. PMT08C board
"9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/PMR08C Board"
2. SCN08C board
3. PHV08C board
"9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board" in the
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
4. CPU90E board
5. MTH08B/E board
"20. Boards" in the “Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
of Parts" volume FR8H2360.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 8
[3] Block diagrams
<C>
JPS-3 JPS-7
 <A>
SCN08C PHV08C PMT08C
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3 CN9 CN5 CNZ17 CN1 CN2 CN1
(AC200V) 1 1 1 HVOKH 1 1 1 15VOKH1 1
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 5 5
F1 2 HVOKL 2 2 2 15VOKL1 2
L 1 1 L 1 1 2 +15VA 2 3 15VOKH 3 3 3 +15AS
6 6 3
N 2 2 N 2 2 +15V 4 15VOKL 4 4 4 ASG 4
E 3 3 -15VA 3
F1 Unit 1 7 7 5 HVH 5 5 5 +15AS 5
DC -15V TP4 6
4 4 6 HVL 6 6 6 ASG
unit 8 8 F2 +15AS
AC IN +15V 7 +15AS 7 7 7 +15AS 7
200-240V A 8 ASG 8 8 8 ASG 8
DCOUT4 9 +15AS 9 9 9 -15AS 9
10 ASG 10 10 10 ASG 10
11 +15AS 11 11 11 -15AS 11
12 ASG 12 12 12 ASG 12
13 +15AS 13 13 13 -15AS 13
14 ASG 14 14 14 ASG 14
15 +15AS 15 15 15 ERSH2 15
16 ASG 16 16 16 ERSL2 16
17 +15AS 17 17 17 VIONH1 17
18 ASG 18 18 18 VIONL1 18
19 +15AS 19 19 19 LEDH1 19
20 ASG 20 20 20 LEDL1 20
F4 -15AS 21 -15AS 21 21
22 ASG 22 22
MTH08B/E 23 -15AS 23 23
TP8 24 ASG 24 24
TB3 TB1 CNH501
1 +5V 1 CN50 1 CN12 25 -15AS 25 25
2 +5V 2 1 3 1 26 ASG 26 26
3 +5V-GND 3 3 2 2 27 ERSH 27 27
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7
2 4 3 28 ERSL 28 28
F3 4 4 29 LEDSIGH 29 29
1 +12V 1 TP8 CN20 CNH56 CN7 30 LEDSIGL 30 30
F2
3 +12V-GND 3 1a 1a 1a 31 LEDONH 31 31
2 +12V 2 2a 2a 2a 32 LEDONL 32 32
DC 4 +12V-GND 4 CN27 33 VIONH 33 33
OUT1
34 VIONL 34 34
13b 13b 13b
14b 14b 14b
CPU90E CNZ16 CN5
21b 21b 21b 1 1 HG 1
22b 22b 22b
23b 23b 23b A 2 2 +15VH 2
24b 24b 24b
25b 25b 25b DCOUT4
26b 26b 26b
N.C
Error detection signals: HVOKH, HVOKL, 15VOKH, 15VOKL,

<D>
VIONH, VIONL
: LED
: Regulator (15 V → 5 V) FR8H2409.EPS

◆ NOTES ◆
• For power supply checkout purposes, check paths <C> and <D> that are indicated in the block
diagram.
Run the following checks on paths <A>, , <C>, and <D> that are indicated in the block diagram:
06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 9
7.5 Checking the Photomultiplier (PMR08C) [2] Checking with the M-Utility
◆ CHECK ◆
[1] Analysis Flow Confirm the displayed M-Utility diagnostic check result.
START • Execute the scanner self-diagnostic check function.

[5] [ENT] → [9] [ENT]
Does the M-Utility indicate N • RESULT - OK
that the diagnostic check
operation is normal? [NG result indication]
Y [2] • RESULT - START POINT DETECTION ERROR → A start-point detection error occurred.
Turn OFF the power.
• RESULT - EDGE DETECTION ERROR → A leading-edge detection error occurred.
1 • RESULT - HV ERROR → The high-voltage power supply is faulty.
Are the SCN08C board N Replace the SCN08C board. • RESULT - ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR → The analog power supply is faulty.
fuses normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the • RESULT - POLYGON MIRROR ERROR → The polygon is faulty.
N • RESULT - LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT → The laser power is insufficient.
Y [3], [4]
N
Y
1. PMR08C board
"9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/PMR08C Board"
2. PHV08C board
"9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board"
3. SCR08C board
4. SCN08C board
5. CPU90E board
6. MTH08B/E board

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 10
[3] Block diagrams [4] Checking the cables
<E> <D> <C> ◆ NOTES ◆
JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C PHV08C PMT08C • Make sure that the power is OFF.
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3 CN9 CN5 CNZ17 CN1 CN2 CN1 • For power supply checkout purposes, check paths <E> and <F> that
(AC200V) 1 1 1 HVOKH 1 1 1 15VOKH1 1
F1
5 5 2 HVOKL 2 2 2 15VOKL1 2
are indicated in the block diagram.
L 1 1 L 1 1 2 +15VA 2 3 15VOKH 3 3 3 +15AS
6 6 3
N 2 2 N 2 2 +15V 4 15VOKL 4 4 4 ASG 4
E 3 3 -15VA 3
F1 Unit 1 7 7 5 HVH 5 5 5 +15AS 5
DC -15V
4 4
TP4
6 HVL 6 6 6 ASG 6 Run the following checks on paths <A>, , <C>, <D>, <E>, and
+15AS 7
AC IN
unit 8 8 +15AS 7 7 7 +15AS 7 <F> that are indicated in the block diagram:
200-240V +15V F2 8 ASG 8 8 8 ASG 8
A 9 +15AS 9 9 9 -15AS 9 1. Check that the connectors are properly connected.
DCOUT4 10 ASG 10 10 10 ASG 10
11 +15AS 11 11 11 -15AS 11 2. Check for a short circuit between various pins and GND terminal.
12
13
ASG
+15AS
12
13
12
13
12
13
ASG
-15AS
12
13
14 ASG 14 14 14 ASG 14 3. Check for a short circuit between various pins.
15 +15AS 15 15 15 ERSH2 15
16 ASG 16 16 16 ERSL2 16 → The measured resistance must be 2 Ω or greater.
17 +15AS 17 17 17 VIONH1 17
18 ASG 18 18 18 VIONL1 18 4. Check for continuity between various pins.
19
20
+15AS
ASG
19
20
19
20
19
20
LEDH1
LEDL1
19
20
-15AS 21 -15AS 21 21
F4 22 ASG 22 22
23 -15AS 23 23
TP8 24 ASG 24 24
25 -15AS 25 25
26 ASG 26 26
27 ERSH 27 27
28 ERSL 28 28
29 LEDSIGH 29 29
30 LEDSIGL 30 30
31 LEDONH 31 31
32 LEDONL 32 32
33 VIONH 33 33
34 VIONL 34 34
MTH08B/E
TB3 TB1 <A>
1 +5V 1 CN50 CNH501 CN12 SCR08C PMR08C
2 +5V 2 1 1 1 CN1 CNZ18 CN4 CN3 CN1
3 +5V-GND 3 3 3 2
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 1 HVOKH2 1 1 1 15VOKH2 1
F3 2 2 3 2 HVOKL2 2 15VOKL2
4 4 4 2 2 2
3 15VOKH2 3 3 3 +15AS 3
1 +12V 1 TP8 F2 CN20 CNH56 CN7 4 15VOKL2 4 4 4 ASG 4
3 +12V-GND 3 1a 1a 1a 5 HVH2 5 5 5 +15AS 5
2 +12V 2 2a 2a 2a 6 HVL2 6 6 6 ASG 6
DC 4 +12V-GND 4 CN27
OUT1 7 LEDSIGH2 7 7 7 +15AS 7
13b 13b 13b 8 LEDSIGL2 8 8 8 ASG 8
14b 14b 14b 9 LEDONH2 9 9 9 -15AS 9
10 LEDONL2 10 10 10 ASG 10
CPU90E VIONH2 11 11 -15AS 11
11 11
21b 21b 21b 12 VIONL2 12 12 12 ASG 12
22b 22b 22b
13 NC 13 13 13 -15AS 13
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b 14 NC 14 14 14 ASG 14
25b 25b 25b 15 ERSH3 15
26b 26b 26b 16 ERSL3 16
17 VIONH2 17
N.C 18 VIONL2 18
 19 LEDH2 19
20 LEDL2 20
<F> DCOUT4 CNZ16 CN5
1 1 HG 1
A 2 2 +15VH 2
Error detection signals: HVOKH, HVOKL, 15VOKH, 15VOKL,

VIONH, VIONL
: For PC board operation
: LED
FR8H2410.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 11
7.6 Checking the SZ1 (SED08C) [2] LED indication

[1] Analysis Flow
START Illuminated Extinguished [Check] LED
D16 HVON SCN08C

Is the operation normal in N
the erasure conveyance
mode?
Y SCR08C
[2] Turn OFF the power.
1 D15 SOH
N D14 SOS
Are the SCN08C board Replace the SCN08C board.
fuses normal? "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the D13 POL LOCK
Y "4.5 Scanner Fuses" D12 PCLK
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume
D11 LCLK
N
Are the cables normal? Replace any faulty cable. D10 FCLK
Y [3], [4] D9 LD2OK
D8 LD1OK
N
T
ON
Y FR
FR8H2363.EPS
1. IP leading-edge sensor (SED08C)
"9.5 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Leading-edge Sensor
(SZ1/SED08C)" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment ◆ CHECK ◆
of Parts" volume
2. SCN08C board
Conduct an IP conveyance operation in the erasure conveyance mode. With an IP positioned so as to
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board" block the light path for the leading-edge sensor (SED08C), check whether the “SOH” LED is illumi-
in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume nated.
3. CPU90E board • Light path blocked → The LED comes on.
4. MTH08B/E board • Light path not blocked → The LED goes out.

An LED indication other than the GOOD result indication

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 12
[3] Block diagrams

JPS-3 JPS-7 SCN08C
ACOUT 1 DCOUT3
(AC200V)
TB1 NFB1 CNH51 AC IN1 CN9
F1
L 1 1 L 1 1 1 +5V 1
+5V
N 2 2 N 2 2 5 GND 5
E 3 F1 CN4 CNZ11
Unit 1
DC 4 4 1 DG 1 1
unit 8 8 F8 2
AC IN VCC +5DS 2 2
SZ1
200-240V 3 SED 3 3
GND
(SED08C)
MTH08B/E <A>
SOH
TB3 TB1
TB3 1 +5V 1 CNH501
2 +5V 2 CN50 1 CN12
3 +5V-GND 3 1 3 1
4 +5V-GND 4 TP7 3 2 2
F3 2 4 3
DC 4 4
OUT1 1 +12V 1 TP8 CN20 CNH56 CN7
3 +12V-GND 3 F2
2 +12V 2 1a 1a 1a
DCOUT1 4 +12V-GND 4 CN27 2a 2a 2a
13b 13b 13b

14b 14b 14b
CPU90E
21b 21b 21b
22b 22b 22b
23b 23b 23b
24b 24b 24b
25b 25b 25b
26b 26b 26b
N.C
Error detection signals: SED

<C>
: LED FR8H2411.EPS

◆ NOTES ◆
diagram.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 7 - 13
7.7 XXXXX

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 1
8. Machine Circuit Diagram
BRN
Distribution switchboard Light blue BLK YEL
(200 VAC) WHT WHT
Green/yellow spiral
Green/ GRN/YEL
yellow spiral
(Elevation unit (Housing near the (Housing near (Housing near

bottom surface) JPS- 3 housing) the duct) the duct)
Units used
outside Japan
(Housing near the (Housing near the duct)
JPS- 3 housing)
BRN
RED RED
Light blue
YEL YEL
Green/yellow spiral
BLK BLK
Distribution switchboard
(200 to 240 VAC)
Green/ (Housing near (Housing near
yellow spiral the duct) the duct)
(Elevation unit
bottom surface)
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
Light brown – BLK Light brown – BLK
Light brown – RED Light brown – RED
YEL – BLK YEL – BLK (Floor- side positioning rack) (Board rack top plate)
YEL – RED YEL – RED
GRN – BLK GRN – BLK
RED RED
GRN – RED GRN – RED
BLK BLK
GRAY – BLK GRAY – BLK
ORN ORN
GRAY – RED GRAY – RED
BLK BLK
WHT – BLK WHT – BLK
WHT – RED WHT – RED
(Floor- side positioning rack)
(Housing near the
JPS- 3 housing)
RED RED
BLK BLK
BRN BRN ORN ORN
RED RED BLK BLK
(Housing near the JPS- 3 housing) (Elevation unit front stanchion)

(IDT housing)
(2nd unit)
RED RED
RED RED BLK BLK
BLK BLK
(Housing near the JPS- 3 housing) (Elevation unit front stanchion)

(Housing near the (Housing near the
JPS- 3 housing) JPS- 3 housing)
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
Elevation foot BLU BLU Emergency stop
switch ORN ORN (Foot switch)
GRN GRN
(Units used
in Japan) BRN BRN
(Units used
MTH08B: #2109 or earlier
outside Japan)
MTH08E: #5001 or later Model Unit
(Housing near the Sup. name
JPS- 3 housing) Name Circuit Diagram
(Optional)
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1700.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 2
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK
Grip handle interference
BLK BLK prevention
(Rear side cable bracket)

(Housing near the duct) (Housing near the duct)
RED RED RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK RED Patient protection
descent prevention
RED
(Housing near the duct) (Housing near the duct) RED Patient protection
descent prevention
RED RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK RED RED Patient protection
descent prevention
RED
Standard.
RED Patient protection
Optional.
The CNH50 connector marked *3 has the same name as some other connectors descent prevention
but differs from the others in gender (male/ female).
Therefore, it cannot possibly be erroneously connected.
BLK RED
BLK BLK
RED RED RED

BLK RED Patient protection
(Housing near (Elevation unit descent prevention
the JPS- 3) front stanchion)
RED
RED Patient protection
descent prevention
RED RED
BRN BRN RED
(Elevation unit) RED
BLU BLU
RED BLK Patient protection
GRN GRN
descent prevention
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
ORN ORN
RED RED
BLK BLK
BLK BLK Patient protection
descent prevention
(Housing near the JPS- 3) (Elevation unit

front stanchion)
BLK RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
(Front right- hand side housing)

BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN
BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT
ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
(Housing near the duct) (Housing near the duct) (Front right- hand side housing)
Model Unit
Name Circuit Diagram Sup. name
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1701.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 3
RED BLK BLK BLK

BLK RED RED RED Grip handle upper-limit
RED BLK BLK BLK

BLK RED RED RED Grip handle lower-limit
YEL YEL WHT WHT

WHT WHT BLK BLK
ORN ORN RED RED
Grip handle drive
RED RED ORN ORN
BLK BLK ORN ORN
Grip handle (Optional)
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK Elevation upper-limit
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK Elevation lower-limit
YEL YEL YEL YEL

ORN ORN ORN ORN WHT/YEL
WHT WHT WHT
WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT YEL YEL
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT YEL YEL
YEL YEL BLK BLK

WHT WHT BLK BLK
(Elevation unit)
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1702.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 4
BRN BRN
Signal name Signal name
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN
ORN
YEL
YEL
GRN
GRN
BLU
BLU
BRN
RED BRN
ORN RED
YEL ORN
YEL
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
BLK
BLK
(Housing near the JPS-7)
RED BLK BLK BLK

BLK RED RED RED
Board cooling
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1703.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 5
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
RED RED Model Unit

BLK BLK
BLK BLK Name Circuit Diagram Sup. name
RED RED Corresponded

Code
Code
Page
FR4H1704.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 6
Light brown – BLK Light brown – BLK BRN BRN Signal name Signal name
Light brown – RED Light brown – RED RED RED
YEL – BLK YEL – BLK ORN ORN
YEL – RED YEL – RED YEL YEL YEL
(Elevation unit
bottom surface)
YEL – BLK YEL – BLK ORN ORN
YEL – RED YEL – RED YEL YEL
Light green – BLK Light green – BLK GRN GRN
Light green – RED Light green – RED BLU BLU
GRAY – BLK GRAY – BLK PUR PUR
GRAY – RED GRAY – RED GRAY GRAY
WHT – BLK WHT – BLK WHT WHT
WHT – RED WHT – RED BLK BLK
WHT – BLK WHT – BLK WHT WHT

WHT – RED WHT – RED BLK BLK
Light brown – BLK Light brown – BLK BRN BRN
Light brown – RED Light brown – RED RED RED
(Housing (Housing near

near the rack) the duct)
BLK RED RED RED

RED BLK BLK BLK
BLK ORN RED RED
ORN BLK BLK BLK
(Housing (Elevation unit (Housing near

near the rack) bottom surface) the duct)
BLK
RED HDD cooling
BLK
RED
Board cooling
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1705.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 7
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK BRN BRN Signal name Signal name
Light BRN - RED Light BRN - RED RED RED
YEL - BLK YEL - BLK ORN ORN
YEL - RED (Elevation unit YEL - RED YEL YEL
bottom surface)
GRAY - BLK GRAY - BLK PUR PUR
GRAY - RED GRAY - RED GRAY GRAY
WHT - BLK WHT - BLK WHT WHT
WHT - RED WHT - RED BLK BLK
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK BRN BRN
YEL - RED YEL - RED YEL YEL

(Housing near the JPS-3) (Housing near the duct)
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK BRN BRN Signal name Signal name
(Elevation unit
bottom surface)
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK BRN BRN

(Housing near the JPS-3) (Housing near the duct)
BLK
RED RED BLK
RED BLK BLK RED
(Housing near the JPS-3) (Elevation unit (Housing near the duct)
bottom surface)
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1706.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 8
(Optional)
BRN BRN YEL YEL YEL (Potentiometer)

RED RED BLK BLK BLK
ORN ORN RED RED RED
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT RED RED RED
(Bucky)
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
WHT WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK
GRN GRN GRN
BRN BRN
BLK BLK BLK
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL (Elevation unit (Housing near the duct)
bottom surface)
BRN BRN (X-ray controller)

RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL (X-ray controller)
(Elevation unit bottom surface) (Housing near the duct)
(X-ray controller)
(X-ray controller)
RED RED Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
BLK BLK
ORN ORN
BLK BLK
(Housing near the JPS-3) (Elevation unit

front stanchion)
(+5V display)
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1707.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 9
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK Signal name Signal name
Light BRN - RED Light BRN - RED

YEL-BLK YEL-BLK
YEL-RED YEL-RED
YEL - BLK YEL - BLK

YEL - RED YEL - RED
GRN - BLK GRN - BLK
GRN - RED GRN - RED
GRAY - BLK GRAY - BLK

GRAY - RED GRAY - RED
WHT - BLK WHT - BLK
WHT - RED WHT - RED
WHT - BLK WHT - BLK

WHT - RED WHT - RED
Light BRN - BLK Light BRN - BLK
Light BRN - RED Light BRN - RED
(Housing near the JPS-3) (Elevation unit front stanchion)
ORN/RED ORN/RED
ORN/BLK ORN/BLK
GRAY/RED GRAY/RED
GRAY/BLK GRAY/BLK
GRAY/RED GRAY/RED
GRAY/BLK GRAY/BLK
WHT/RED WHT/RED
WHT/BLK WHT/BLK
(Housing near the JPS-3) (Elevation unit front stanchion)
(Elevation unit front stanchion) (Panel case)
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1708.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 10
BLK
RED
RED
RED
RED RED
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
RED
ORN RED
BLK
(Controller bottom surface) (FDD/HDD Bracket)
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
RED RED
Model Unit
BLK BLK
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1709.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 11
BRN BRN Signal name Signal name

RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL Laser safety
GRN GRN
BLU BLU
PUR PUR
Laser safety
GRAY GRAY
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1710.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 12
BRN BRN Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
BRN BRN
RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT
BLK BLK
Twin photo-timer (Exposure unit)

Notes on photo-timer
(optional)
Photo-timer
(Toshiba)
Single photo-timer (Exposure unit)

(optional)
Photo-timer Select the Toshiba, Shimadzu, (Use the junction wire of the selected
manufacturer.) Photo-timer
(Toshiba) or Hitachi photo-timer and
connect the junction wire
(Shimadzu)
of the selected manufacturer.
Select the Toshiba, Shimadzu,
or Hitachi photo-timer and Photo-timer
connect the junction wire (Use the junction wire of the selected (Shimadzu)
of the selected manufacturer. manufacturer.)
Photo-timer
Photo-timer
(Hitachi)
(Hitachi)
(Aut housing) (Aut housing)
Model Unit
Notes on photo-timer wiring Name Circuit Diagram Sup. name
Corresponded
Code
Photo-timer wiring is to be performed by the local service personnel.
For photo-timer wiring, use the junction wire of the selected manufacturer. Code
Page
FR4H1711.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 13
RED RED RED

RED RED RED Thermal switch
RED
RED
Thermal switch
RED RED
RED RED Thermal switch
RED RED WHT

BLK RED WHT Temperature control switch
RED
BLK
RED RED RED BLK BLK
BLK BLK BLK RED RED Erasure cooling
RED BLK BLK

BLK RED RED Erasure cooling
RED BLK BLK

BLK RED RED
Erasure cooling
RED BLK BLK

BLK RED RED Erasure cooling
RED WHT
RED WHT Temperature control switch
BLK BLK BLK BLK

RED RED RED RED Erasure cooling
BLK BLK
RED RED
BLK BLK
RED RED
Erasure cooling
BLK BLK
RED RED Erasure cooling
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1712.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 14
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL
WHT WHT WHT WHT Erasure lamp
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
YEL YEL
WHT WHT Erasure lamp
YEL
WHT
YEL YEL YEL
WHT WHT WHT Erasure lamp
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL
YEL YEL YEL YEL

WHT WHT WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
YEL YEL
WHT WHT Erasure lamp
YEL
WHT
YEL YEL YEL
WHT WHT WHT
Erasure lamp
YEL YEL
WHT WHT
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1713.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 15
(destination indicated on page 17/22)
BRN BRN BRN BRN

RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL Erasure entry
IP detection
(destination indicated on pages 19 and 20/22)
RED RED WHT WHT

BLK BLK WHT WHT Initialization temperature
control switch
RED
BLK
(Reserved)
BLK BLK RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLK BLK BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
BLK BLK BRN BRN WHT WHT IP conveyance motor
BLK BLK ORN ORN ORN ORN
(Not used)
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1714.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 16
BRN BRN BRN BRN

RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN IP positioning home
YEL YEL YEL YEL position detection
GRN GRN GRN GRN

BLU BLU BLU BLU
PUR PUR PUR PUR IP lift home
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY position detection
WHT WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN Bucky home
RED RED RED RED position detection
BLK BLK
(destination indicated on page 19/22) (A-unit side plate) (Tray)

BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU IP positioning
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT drive motor

BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU IP lift drive motor
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT

BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU Bucky drive motor
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1715.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 17
ORN ORN BRN BRN

YEL YEL RED RED
GRN GRN ORN ORN
Positioning unit
BLU BLU YEL YEL
entry IP detection
PUR PUR GRN GRN

GRAY GRAY BLU BLU
WHT WHT PUR PUR
BLK GRAY Path changeover
BLK GRAY
unit IP detection
BRN BRN WHT WHT

RED RED BLK BLK
ORN ORN BRN BRN
Confluence unit
YEL YEL RED RED
IP detection
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLU BLU BLU BLU IP conveyance
BRN BRN WHT WHT motor
ORN ORN ORN ORN
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
YEL YEL YEL YEL
ORN ORN ORN ORN
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
YEL YEL YEL YEL
ORN ORN ORN ORN
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1716.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 18
GRN GRN BRN BRN

BLU BLU RED RED
PUR PUR ORN ORN After-reading
GRAY GRAY YEL YEL IP detection
WHT WHT GRN GRN

BLK BLK BLU BLU
BRN BRN PUR PUR Grip release home
RED RED GRAY GRAY position detection
ORN ORN BRN BRN BRN BRN

YEL YEL RED RED RED RED
GRN GRN ORN ORN ORN ORN Before-erasure
BLU BLU YEL YEL YEL YEL entry IP detection
PUR PUR
BLK BLK
BRN BRN

YEL YEL
BLK BLK RED RED RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
BLK BLK YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLK BLK BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU
BLK BLK BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT IP conveyance motor
BLK BLK ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN
BLK BLK RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLK BLK BLU BLU BLU BLU
BLK BLK BRN BRN WHT WHT Grip release motor
BLK BLK ORN ORN ORN ORN
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1717.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 19
ORN ORN
BLU BLU
PUR PUR GRN GRN

GRAY GRAY BLU BLU
WHT WHT PUR PUR Subscanning grip release
BLK BLK GRAY GRAY home position detection
BRN BRN WHT WHT

RED RED BLK BLK
ORN ORN BRN BRN
Before-reading IP
YEL YEL RED RED detection
BRN BRN BRN BRN

RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLU BLU BLU BLU
PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
Subscanning motor
WHT WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN
RED RED RED RED
ORN ORN ORN ORN
YEL YEL YEL YEL
GRN GRN
BLU BLU
RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK
RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1718.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 20
BRN BRN BRN BRN BLK BLK

ORN ORN ORN ORN BLU BLU
YEL YEL YEL YEL
ORN ORN ORN ORN

YEL YEL YEL YEL BLK BLK
GRN GRN GRN GRN RED RED
RED RED
BLK BLK
YEL YEL

GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN (Scanner unit base) (Subscanning unit side plate)
PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY GRAY
WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT
(Optical base plate cover)

(Subscanning side plate)

RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK
WHT WHT WHT WHT
BLK BLK BLK BLK
GRN GRN GRN GRN
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BLK BLK
BLK BLK
(Subscanning junction bracket) (Shield case)
BLK
(Subscanning junction bracket)
(Subscanning side plate)
RED RED RED RED
BLK BLK BLK BLK
YEL YEL YEL YEL IP leading-edge
detection
BLK BLK RED RED RED RED RED RED

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
BLK BLK YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
BLK BLK BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU Subscanning grip
BLK BLK BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT
BLK BLK ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN ORN
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1786.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 8 - 21

BRN BRN BRN BRN PUR PUR BLK

RED RED RED RED GRAY GRAY
ORN ORN ORN ORN WHT WHT (Board retaining
YEL YEL YEL YEL BLK BLK (Scanner housing)
screw)
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
RED RED RED BLK

BLK BLK BLK RED
BLK
(Housing near the BRN BRN

JPS-7 housing) RED RED
ORN ORN
YEL YEL
BRN BRN BRN BRN PUR PUR

RED RED RED RED GRAY GRAY
ORN ORN ORN ORN WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL BLK BLK
BLK
BRN BRN BRN BRN WHT WHT (Board retaining

(Scanner housing)
RED RED RED RED screw)
ORN ORN ORN ORN
WHT WHT
YEL YEL YEL YEL
Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
Model Unit
Corresponded
Code
Code
Page
FR4H1787.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 9 - 1
9. Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram

Potentio
Meter
5501D (CR-IR344)
CN2
Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram (1/2)
PNL
08A
CN1
CN3
CN102
PNL
08B CN101
C For LAN90B/D board

L Controller
ACOUT1
A CN11
B CN12
D I/F CN2 CN1
+24V LAN90B/D
AC200V
CN7
DCOUT2 +5V,+24V
E TLB08A
Up-Down Unit
+5V CN2 CN1

CN15 CN16 CN15
CN2 DCOUT3 +5V
CN1 CN6
F MTH08B
CN4 CN3
SWT08B CN3
+5V
ACOUT2 115V CN6

ESH1
DMS/IDT I/F
LP I J K
VGA90E
CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN3 CN4 CN5
JPS-3
F4 CN3
CN10 FAN ETH90F F2 F3
MSH6 DMC08A IMG08H CPU90E F3
F1 F2 CPU90F or XPC08A or IMG08A BSP08A IMG07B
MSH7 F1 CNJ2
HCP08A IMG08B F2
CN9 F1
MSH8 FDD
MSH9 F1
H G F1
CN18
CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
CN50 CN20 CN16 CN15 CN14 CN13 CN12 CN11 CN10 CN9 CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
TB3 TB1 F3 F2
+5V F1 CN22
Power Supply
F1
DCOUT1 CN25
Elevation +12V
TP7 F5
Unit
CN27
DC
CN8 F4
DC Unit MTH08B
CN29 CN28 CN18 CN17
F1
FANH4 FANH10 MMC90A MMC90A
CN13
CPU90F DMC08A IMG08H CNN08A
FANH5 115V or or or
SCN08C LAN90B/D HCP08A XPC08A IMG08B IMG08A BSP08A IMG07B CPU90E FDD
SVH2 Sequence Board
F2 +5V CNJ2 CNJ1
115V
SVH1 F1
F3 F2 HDD
MH1 F2
CNN08B
F1
NFB1
MH2 115V CN1 CN2 CN4 CN5 JPS-3 TP5
CN14 TP7 F5
TB1 HDD
F6
AC IN
MTH08E
FSH1
External remote I/F
External remote I/F
CN17
For MTH08E board FANH4 FANH10 DIM08A
IDT I/F
BRS I/F
FR4H2505 .EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 9 - 2
5501D (CR-IR344)
Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram (2/2)
F1
Unit1 Main Board
Unit3 Main Board JPS-7
Fluorescent Lamp Fluorescent Lamp

F2 F3 (55W) Invertor (36W) Invertor
Unit2 Main Board
F6-F9 F4 F1 F2 F1 F2 F5
+5V +15V -15V +5V +15V +5V +5V

+5V,+15V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V
ACIN1 DCOUT5 DCOUT3 DCOUT6 CN4 DCOUT4 DCOUT2 CN6 DCOUT1 DCOUT8 ACOUT1 ACOUT2 CN1
FANH1 FANH6 FANH7 FANH8

A CN9 F
CN7 CN6,7 CN1
G SCN08C
CN12 CN3
H K CN8
CN5
SA1 F1 CN5
CN8 +5V F1 CN5 MA1 LAMP LAMP
I SH1 1-4 5-8
TP6 SA2 F2
CN2 F7 MA2
SH2 CN4
F2
SCR08C SA3 F3 CN6
TSWF2 TSWF8 TSWF3 TSWF6
F9 MA3
TP1 F1
SYN08A F6 CN6 SB1 F4
TP3 MB1 FANF1 TSWF1
CN1
F10 SB2 CN7
F5 F5
TP4
J MB3 FANF2
F2 SB3 F6 CN8
MB2 FANF3
TP8 F4 SF1 F7 CN9
CN4 MD1 FANF4
F8 CN10
SZ1 F1 F3 SD1 F8
MD2
SNS08B SD2 CN11
F9
CN1 CN3 CN6 CN5 MF1 TSWF5
CN1 Erasure Conveyor
SE1 CN12
CN1 F10
MZ2
PMT08C PHV08C PMR08C
LD1 LDA08B SZ2
LDD08C
CN5
LD2 LDA08B SZ3 DRV08B
CN1
PDA08A
POL-DRV
CN12 CN11 CN10
LD Assembly
POL
L
CN1 Polygonal Mirror Assembly
CN2
FFM (MZ1) CN3
MSH1-4
or Exposure Unit
MSH5 MSH3, 4,10,11 (optional) SWT08B
CN2 CN1
: Regulator
B C D E FR4H2506 .EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 10 - 1
■ Troubles during Machine Startup (Initialization) and their Corresponding Priority
10. Startup Failure Analysis Checkpoints (2/3)
10.1 Locations to be First Checked When Trouble Occurs Priority checkpoints

Troubles
Immediately After Startup Connectors Others
0160 The MMC90A/DIM08A board is disconnected.

If an error (fault) occurs when you start up the machine or the elevation unit operations (ascent,
descent, panel indicator illumination, etc.) are abnormal, run the checks indicated in the table 03A4 Subscanning unit: SZ3
below before proceeding to perform the regular troubleshooting procedures. 03A7
Scanner after-reading conveyor: CNMD1, CND3
DRV08B: CN9
■ Troubles during Machine Startup (Initialization) and their Corresponding Priority 03A8 Before erasure conveyor: SE1, CNE1
Checkpoints (1/3) 03A9 Erasure conveyor: CNF1, SF1
Priority checkpoints 03AB Path changeover conveyor: SB2

Troubles
Connectors Others Path changeover conveyor: SB3, CNB1, CNMB3
03AF
DRV08B: CN7
MTH08B/E: TB1, CN22, CN25, CN27
CPU90E: CN6 03B0 Path changeover conveyor: SB1, CNMB1
MTH08B/E: F4, F5
JPS-3: CN3, CN4, TB3, DCOUT1
XPC08A: F1 03B1 IP positioning unit: SA2, CNMA2
The machine does not HDD: CNJ1, CNJ2
start up. JPS-3: Fuse (DC unit, F1)
The console is not connected. IP positioning unit: SA1, CNMA1, CNA1, CNA2
Fuse (Isolation transformer, F2)
The CPU90E board is disconnected. Fuse (sequence unit, F1) 03B4 DRV08B: CN2, CN5
The VGA90E board is disconnected
from the CPU90E board. SNS08B: CN2
The XPC08A board is disconnected. Scanner after-reading conveyor: SD2, CND1,
MTH08B/E: CN20 03B7 CND2, CNMD2
SCN08C: CN7, CN9 DRV08B: CN10
SCR08C: CN4 Subscanning unit: SZ2, CNZ4, CNZ5, CNMZ2
MTH08B/E: F2
SNS08B: CN1, CN4 SNS08B: CN3, CN5
BUS ERROR SNS08B: F1
JPS-3: CN15, ACOUT1 03BA DRV08B: CN1, CN3, CN12 SNS08B: F2
JPS-7: Fuse (DC unit1, F1)
JPS-7: CN4, ACIN1, DCOUT2, DCOUT3
JPS-7: DCOUT1
Junction connector: CNH51, CNH52, CNH56,
Junction connector: CNZ1
CNH91
IP positioning unit: SA3, CNMA3, CNA3
BSP08A: CN3, CN4 03BD
SCN08C: CN8
DRV08B: CN6
Driver error.
SCR08C: CN6 Erasure conveyor: CNF4, CNF7
Junction connector: CNH57, CNH508 SNS08B: CN6, CN7 SNS08B: F2
XPC08A: CN7 JPS-7: CN1, CN6, ACOUT1, ACOUT2 JPS-7: Fuse (DC unit F1 (55W))
03C0
The machine panel shows PNL08A: CN1, CN2 LAMP1-8 Fuse (DC unit F1 (36W))
nothing. PNL08B: CN101 TSWF1, 3, 6 Fuse (DC unit 2 F5)
JPS-3: DCOUT2, DCOUT3 Junction connector: CNF4, CNF8, CNF11
The erasure lamps do not Erasure conveyor: CNF2, TSWF5
go off.
03C2 Path changeover conveyor: SB1
SNS08B: CN11, CN12
The erasure conveyor rear fan Erasure conveyor: CNF6, CNFANF1 – F4 03C3 Erasure conveyor: SF1
does not rotate. JPS-7: DCOUT8
Scanner after-reading conveyor: SD1
Junction connector: CNH60 03C5
The path changeover conveyor Subscanning unit: SZ3
Erasure conveyor: CNFANH6 – H8
fan does not rotate.
JPS-7: DCOUT8 Path changeover conveyor: SB1, CNB1, CNMB1
The PC board rack fan Enclosure: CNFANH1 03C7 DRV08B: CN7
does not rotate. JPS-7: DCOUT6 Erasure conveyor: CNF1
JPS-3: DCOUT3 0400 The BSP08A board is disconnected.
The LED does not light.
PNL08B: CN101
The message "DMS (E-IF) 0410 The IMG07B board is disconnected.
The DMC08A/HCP08A board is disconnected.
added or removed"
appears on the console. DMC08A/HCP08A: CN3 TR1H1305.EPS
The message "LP (E-IF)

The IMG08A board is disconnected.
added or removed"
appears on the console. IMG08A: CN3
The message "MFP (E-IF)

added or removed" The IMG08B/H board is disconnected.
appears on the console.
TR1H1304.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MT 10 - 2
■ Troubles during Machine Startup (Initialization) and their Corresponding Priority ■ Elevation Unit Operation Abnormalities and Preferred Checks
Checkpoints (3/3)
Priority checkpoints
Priority checkpoints Troubles
Troubles Connectors Others
Connectors Others The floppy disk drive does CPU90E: CN8, CN18
not operate. FDD: CNJ1, CNJ2
Path changeover unit: CNMB2
Subscanning unit: SZ1 The control rack fan does
MTH08B/E: CN29
Scanner after-reading conveyor: SD1 not rotate.
MZ1: CN1, CN2 The foot switch does not work. JPS-3: CN8
DRV08B: CN8, CN11 SCN08C: F8
0437/0472
SCN08C: CN4 JPS-7: Fuse (DC unit 2, F2) The exposure/reader unit
SNS08B: CN8 Elevation unit: MSH8, CN1 under the elevation unit
descends but does not ascend.
JPS-7: DCOUT5
Junction connector: CNF3, CNMF1, CNZ2, Elevation unit: MSH9, CN3 under the elevation unit
CNZ3,CNZ11 Enclosure: MSH1, MSH2, MSH3, MSH4
The exposure/reader unit
SWT08B: CN2
SCN08C: CN1, CN3 ascends but does not descend.
JPS-3: CN12
LDD08C: CN1 Junction connectors: CNH21, CNH22, CNH50,
0534/0537 SCN08C: F1, F3, F5 CNH55, CNH505-CNH507
POLDRV: CN1
Junction connector: CNZ12, CNZ15 SWT08B: CN1
The exposure/reader unit
JPS-3: CN7, CN9, CN13 JPS-3: Fuse (sequence unit, F2)
PMT08C: CN1 elevation switch does not work.
Junction connectors: CNH53, CNH59
0536
PHV08C: CN2
The exposure unit does
SCN08C: CN5 not ascend. JPS-3: ACOUT2 JPS-3: Fuse (isolation transformer, F1)
0536/0563 PHV08C: CN1 SCN08C: F2, F4
The exposure unit does
Junction connector: CNZ17 not descend. The grip handle JPS-3: CN11
does not ascend. Junction connector: CNH54
SCN08C: CN2
SCN08C: F6, F7, F9, F10
0537 SYN08A: CN1 The grip handle does not ascend JPS-3: CN10, CN14
JPS-7: Fuse (DC unit 2, F3)
Junction connector: CNZ13, CNZ14 or descend. Junction connectors: CNMSH6, CNMSH7, CNMH2
SCR08C: CN5 The grip handle does not ascend. MSH6
0551/0552
Enclosure: SH1, SH2
The grip handle does not descend. MSH7
SCR08C: CN1
0563
PHV08C: CN3, CN4 The elevation unit elevation switch SWT08B: CN1
PMR08C: CN1 does not work. JPS-3: CN6, CN9
CN2 under the elevation unit
Junction connector: CNZ18
The IP size selection switch lamp XPC08A: CN6
TR10H1306.EPS
on the elevation unit does not light. PNL08A: CN3
The elevation unit fan does Elevation unit: CN4 under the elevation unit
not rotate. JPS-3: Fuse (elevation unit, F1)
The fan next to the pump does

JPS-3: Fuse (elevation unit board, F1)
not rotate.
TR8H2201.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 1
11. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities 11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image Generation Mode
The virtual image generation mode (pseudo-reading) allows you to investigate the cause of an
To analyze an abnormal image, it is necessary to note the features of the image and locate the
image abnormality.
source of abnormality within the machine.
In this mode, pseudo image signals are generated from various scanner components to perform an
To locate the source of abnormality, use the following analysis procedures. If you encounter any
image reading operation. The obtained results can be used to identify the cause of an image
image abnormality, use the following analysis procedures to identify the cause of the abnormality.
abnormality.
• Making analyses in accordance with error codes The image abnormality analysis must be made of one IP surface at a time.
• Making analyses in the virtual image generation mode
“10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image Signal Virtual Generation Mode” in the
If the above procedures do not help, make analyses in accordance with the image abnormality “Maintenance Utility” volume
samples.
Virtual image generation result Abnormality isolation Probable cause
• Optical components (laser included)
11.1 Making Analyses in Accordance with Error Codes The cause of the abnormality
• Light-collecting guide/light-collecting mirror
• Subscanning
existed before the light emitted • X-ray source
(1) Note the error log that was obtained when an image abnormality occurred. “LIGHT” causes no abnormality. from the IP fell on the • IP
photomultiplier (the light emission • Conveyor system
Open the error log and note the detailed error information to check for an error whose from the IP was abnormal). • Erasure failure
occurrence time agrees with the image abnormality occurrence time. • Influence of external noise on laser
• 23BA to 23BC and 23BE: Subscanning mechanism error codes The cause of the abnormality • Photomultiplier
existed between the incidence • High-voltage power supply (on PMT board)
• 2500 to 25FF: Scanner mechanism error codes “LIGHT” causes an abnormality, • Leakage of erasure lamp light or extraneous
of light on the photomultiplier
but “LOG AMP” causes no light
“6.1 1. LIST: Error log display” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume abnormality. and the output of the
photomultiplier current (relative • Optical noise caused by IP static electricity
(2) If an error occurred, note the probable cause and remedy indicated in the error code table, to the PMT board). • Magnetic noise
and take an appropriate remedial action. • PMT/PMR board
“2.3 Error Codes List” The cause of the abnormality • Influence of external electrical noise on
“LIGHT” and “LOG AMP” cause PMT/PMR board (IP static noise, power
an abnormality, but “SCN08 existed between PMT/PMR
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE board input and SCN/SCR supply noise, motor noise, etc.)
INPUT” causes no abnormality. • Cables between PMT/PMR board and
board input.
The detailed information format of an error code contains the information about the timing SCN/SCR board
between the start of image reading and the occurrence of an abnormality. Refer to the • SCN08C/SCR08C board
detailed information format as needed. The cause of the abnormality • Influence of external electrical noise on
“2.4 Detailed Information Format” “LIGHT”, “LOG AMP”, and existed in the image signal SCN08C/SCR08C board (electrical noise,
“SCN08 INPUT” cause an system in the SCN/SCR board motor noise, etc.)
abnormality. image signal input and • Image-related boards (e.g., IMG board)
subsequent sections. positioned after the SCN08/SCR08C board
◆ NOTE ◆ • Cables connected to the above boards
Scanner subscanning mechanism errors (warnings) that do not cause image abnormalities TR8H2203.EPS
should be ignored because they need no analysis or troubleshooting. The image abnormality analysis flowchart is presented below.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 2
■ Image abnormality analysis flowchart in the virtual image generation mode
● Vertical streaks
START Peculiarity checks

• Did the abnormality occur with a specific cassette/IP?
1 • Did the abnormality occur when the other equipment operated?
Check the frequency of occurrence
of abnormal image. • Did the abnormality occur with a specific processing size?
✼ Subsequent check procedures
differ depending on the frequency
of occurrence.
Any peculiar event found when N

abnormal image occurs?
N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y
Specify the surface to be read.
"Maintenance Utility" volume:
10.11 11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL: Addition Execution Control
Troubleshoot the peculiar event.
N Replace the boards in the order named.

Quasi-data output from the
1. SCN08C
SCN08C board normal?
2. MTH08B/E
Y "Maintenance Utility" volume: 3. CPU90E
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume:
Signal Virtual Generation Mode 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
20.2 MTH08B Board
20.3 MTH08E Board
20.4 CPU90E Board

Quasi-data output from the LOG
1. PMT08C
amp on the PHV08C board normal?
2. PMR08C
Y "Maintenance Utility" volume: 3. PHV08C
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image Signal Virtual Generation Mode 4. SCN08C
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume:
9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/PMR08C Board
9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board
Quasi-data output from the LED N Replace the light-collecting guide assembly. 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
lighting on the PMT08C /
PMR08C board normal? "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume:
9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting
Y "Maintenance Utility" volume: Guide Assembly (PMT08C Side)
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image 9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting
Signal Virtual Generation Mode Guide Assembly (PMR08C Side)
Does the abnormality recur after

the photomultipliers (PMT and N
PMR), light-collecting mirror, 1
scanning optics unit, and outlet
glass are cleaned?
Y
Replace the components in the following order:
1. Scanning optics unit
2. SCN08C
3. SCR08C
4. PMT08C
5. PMR08C
6. PHV08C
7. Light-collecting mirror

8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit
8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board FR8H2200.EPS
9.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light-Collecting Mirror

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 3
● Horizontal streaks
START Peculiarity checks

Check the frequency of occurrence • Did the abnormality occur with a specific processing size?
of abnormal image.
of occurrence.

N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y

1. SCN08C
2. MTH08B/E
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image
Signal Virtual Generation Mode
8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
20.2 MTH08B Board
20.3 MTH08E Board
20.4 CPU90E Board
1. PMT08C
2. PMR08C
Quasi-data output from the LED N 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
lighting on the PMT08C/ Replace the light-collecting guide assembly.
Y "Maintenance Utility" volume:
Guide Assembly (PMT08C Side)
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image
Signal Virtual Generation Mode
Guide Assembly (PMR08C Side)
Is the scanner unit conveyance N
mechanism normal? Perform an appropriate corrective procedure.
Y "● Typical image abnormalities caused

by the contact with the scanner unit guides"
N
Y

2. SCN08C

"8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit"
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board" FR8H2201.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 4
● Other image abnormalities
START
Peculiarity checks
Check the frequency of occurrence • Did the abnormality occur with a specific processing size?
of abnormal image.
of occurrence.

N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y

1. SCN08C
2. MTH08B/E
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" volume:
Signal Virtual Generation Mode 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
20.2 MTH08B Board
20.3 MTH08E Board
20.4 CPU90E Board

1. PMT08C
2. PMR08C
Quasi-data output from the LED N 8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
Replace the light-collecting guide assembly.
lighting on the PMT08C /
Y "Maintenance Utility" volume: Guide Assembly (PMT08C Side)
10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image 9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting
Signal Virtual Generation Mode Guide Assembly (PMR08C Side)
N
Is the ground normal? Replace the ground.
N

2. SCN08C
8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit
8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board FR8H2211.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 5
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 6
■ Image abnormalities caused by the contact with the scanner unit guides ● Typical image abnormalities caused by the contact with the scanner unit guides
Image irregularities may occur when the IP comes into contact with the guides in the scanner unit.
When an irregularity occurs, you can determine its cause by measuring the distance between the Main scanning direction <Probable Causes>
image leading end and irregularity. The figure below shows the relationship among image example No. 408 • While an IP reading operation was conducted,
numbers, causes, and associated guides. irregularity (8) the IP leading edge interfered with the lug guide.
● Distances from guide locations and reading positions

• An irregularity occurred at a distance of about
100 mm from the image leading end.
POM spring
No.409
Subscanning unit guide plate B Direction of IP conveyance 100mm

with shock absorber cloth
<Check and Reference>
• Check the lug guide in the subscanning unit.
No.413 340
Guide plate A with shock absorber cloth
Upper pipe with shock absorber cloth Leaf spring
No.414
POM guide Light-collecting
Light- 105
Lower pipe with shock absorber cloth collecting guide assembly 45
Light-collecting guide assembly mirror
Reading position
145
Scanner Bracket with shock
FR8H2203.EPS
after-reading conveyor guide absorber cloth
No.408
Lug guide Main scanning direction <Probable Cause>
185 No. 409 • The IP trailing edge vibrated when it left the
irregularity (9) before-reading conveyor POM spring in the IP
195
No.410 reading sequence.
No.411 230 Unit: mm
No.412 FR8H2202.EPS
125 mm from the image leading end.
● IP image area
45
125mm
Direction of conveyance
• Check the POM spring in the subscanning unit.

Image area 430 510
35
433
16.5 16.5 FR8H2208.EPS
Unit: mm
466 FR8H2207.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 7
<Probable Cause> Main scanning direction <Probable Causes>

Main scanning direction
No. 410 • The IP leading edge vibrated when it left the No. 412 • While an IP reading operation was conducted,
irregularity (10) subscanning unit lug guide in the IP reading irregularity (12) the IP leading edge ran onto a rubber roller in
sequence. the scanner after-reading conveyor.
• The grip release mechanism in the scanner
• An irregularity occurred at a distance of about after-reading conveyor was faulty.
140 mm from the image leading end. • A black streak occurred at a distance of about
185 to 195 mm from the image leading end.
<Checks and References>

• Adjust the mounting position of the scanner
after-reading conveyor.
"10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner
140mm After-Reading Conveyor" in the "Checks,
<Check and Reference> Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts"
• Check the lug guide in the subscanning unit. volume
185- • Adjust the grip release mechanism in the
195mm scanner after-reading conveyor.
"10.5 Replacing the Grip Release Motor
(MD2)" in the "Checks,
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts"
volume
"10.6 Replacing and Adjusting the Scanner
After-Reading Conveyor Timing Belt" in the
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume
FR8H2209.EPS
"10.7 Replacing the Rubber Rollers" in the
"Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
<Probable Cause> Parts" volume
Main scanning direction
No. 411 • While an IP reading operation was conducted,
irregularity (11) the IP leading edge interfered with the guide in FR8H2204.EPS
the scanner after-reading conveyor.
Main scanning direction <Probable Cause>

• An irregularity occurred at a distance of about No.413 • The IP trailing edge vibrated when it left the
150 mm from the image leading end. irregularity (13) before-reading conveyor POM guide in the IP
reading sequence.

66 mm from the image trailing end.
150mm
• Check the scanner after-reading conveyor
mounting position.
"10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner
After-Reading Conveyor" in the "Checks, <Check and Reference>
Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts" • Check the POM guide in the subscanning unit.
volume
66mm
FR8H2210.EPS
FR8H2205.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 8
Main scanning direction <Probable Cause>

No.414 • The IP trailing edge vibrated when it left the
irregularity (14) subscanning unit leaf spring in the IP reading
sequence.

10 mm from the image trailing end.

• Check the leaf spring in the subscanning unit.
10mm
FR8H2206.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 9
11.3 Main Numerical Values Used for Troubleshooting
ST
Logical reading IP size 17"x14" 8"x10"

17"x17" 14"x17" 14"x14" 10"x12" 18x43
landscape portrait
(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (cm)
(inch) (inch)
Main scanning pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Reading
density
Subscanning pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scanner Main scanning pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

output
density Subscanning pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Reading time sec 22.60 22.60 22.60 22.60 22.60 22.60 22.60
After main scanning reduction and pixel density conversion
Standard
pix/mm 5 5 5 5 20/3 10 5
Recording (main and sub)
density High-density
pix/mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
(main and sub)
Main scanning pix 2140 2140 1760 1760 1670 2000 885
Standard
pixel density
Subscanning pix 2140 1760 2140 1760 2010 2510 2140
Main scanning pix 4280 4280 3520 3520 2505 2000 1770
High pixel
density
Subscanning pix 4280 3520 4280 3520 3015 2510 4280
TR8H2202.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 10
11.4 Reference Data - Typical Image Abnormalities

<Probable Causes>
The following image abnormalities may occur.
No. 105 Horizontal streaks (4) • The PMT08C/PMR08C board is faulty.
• The subscanning motor and subscanning
mechanism are faulty.
■ Examples of Abnormal Images • The light source is faulty.
• A horizontal streak is developed randomly. • The polygonal mirror assembly is faulty.
<Probable Causes>
No. 101 Tree ring-like ununiformity • Leaked rays of light from LAMP1 through LAMP8
may be admitted into the scanner unit.
(Improper installation of the covers, damage
on the light-tight member located inside the
• Tree ring-like ununiformity is developed. cover, etc.)
• The PMT08C/PMR08C board is faulty. 70
• The installation of covers to the PMT08C/
PMR08C board is improper.
• Check if a scanner error (2500's) or wow-flutter
error (23BE) occurred when the abnormal image
occurred.
• Use the virtual image generation mode to isolate
<Check and Reference> the cause.
• Check if an error (2545: HV voltage error 2)
occurs concurrently with the abnormal image. "11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image
Note, however, that it will not be detected if the Generation Mode"
noise is minuscule. Unit: mm
FR8H2216.EPS
<Probable Causes>
No. 106 Horizontal streaks (5) • Proper shading correction has not been
performed.
FR8H2214.EPS • "3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION"
is turned OFF.
• The polygonal mirror is soiled.
<Probable Cause> • Horizontal streaks are developed over the entire
No. 102 Horizontal streaks (1) • Leaked rays of light externally coming into the surface at a pitch of 0.6 mm.
machine may fall on the scanner unit. (Improper
installation of covers to the machine, especially
the lower front cover, improper installation of the
light-tight members around the light-collecting
• Banding-like streaks are developed such that guide assembly, etc.)
intermittent thin horizontal streaks appear with
a gradual inclination to the main-scan direction
(from upper left to lower right).

• Perform shading correction properly.
• Set "3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION"
to ON.
• Replace the polygonal mirror.
"8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon
Assembly" in "Checks, Replacement and
FR8H2217.EPS
FR8H2215.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 11
<Probable Causes> <Probable Causes>

No. 107 Blank image • The high-voltage switch (S1) of the SCN08C No. 109 Vertical white streak • Relatively thin streak
board and the software switch are in the OFF Dust deposited on the light-collecting guide or
position. light-collecting mirror may block the laser beam.
• The PMT08C/PMR08C board is faulty. • Relatively thick streak
• A white blank image is generated. • Streaks occur in the subscanning direction. The light-collecting guide is faulty; shading
correction is improper; the lens mirror (especially,
the dust window) of the scanning optics unit is
soiled.
<Check and Reference> <Checks and References>

• Set the SCN08C board’s high-voltage switch • Remove the dust deposits using a blower.
(S1) and the software switch in the ON position. • Clean the light-collecting guide or light-collecting
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/ mirror.
SCR08C Board" in "Checks, Replacement "9.1 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide"
and Adjustment of Parts" volume in "Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
"9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/ of Parts" volume
PMR08C Board" in "Checks, Replacement "9.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light-
and Adjustment of Parts" volume Collecting Mirror" in "Checks, Replacement
Thin streak
Thick streak
• Perform shading correction properly.
FR8H2218.EPS FR8H2220.EPS

No. 108 Uniformly exposed image • The connector (CN2) is not connected to the No. 303 Jitters • The rotation of the polygon is improper.
with midtone PMT08C/PMR08C board. • The incident beam of the SYN08A board is
• The connector (CN5) is not connected to the misaligned.
SCN08C board. • Decrease in the laser power.
• Quasi-reading mode is set. • Sync is misaligned by one or several pixels in the
• A uniformly exposed image with midtone density
(gray) is generated. main-scan direction.
• Such jitters may sometimes occur in the middle
of the scan line.
<Checks and References> <Checks and References>

• Connect the unplugged connector to the • Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
PMT08C/PMR08C board or SCN08C board. and then back ON again, to perform self-
• Cancel the quasi-reading mode. diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate that any
board is faulty, then replace that board.
"8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08A
Board" in "Checks, Replacement and
• If the error (polygon error 2: 2542) occurred
simultaneously, check and replace the polygonal
mirror assembly.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 12
<Probable Causes> <Probable Cause>

No. 201 Improper image (1) • The reading system is faulty. (The high voltage is No.203 Improper image (3) • The IMG08A board is faulty.
not applied; the connector is not connected, etc.)
• The photomultiplier or HV (PMT08C board) is
faulty.
• Although the film characters and border are • Any of the SCN08C/SCR08C, IMG07B, IMG08A, • Although IP conveyance is normal and the film
outputted normally, an image itself is not generated. IMG08H, and MTH08B/E boards is faulty, or the
characters are outputted normally, the image and
HDD and/or image memory is faulty.
border are not generated.
• Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self-
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board.
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/
SCR08C Board" in "Checks, Replacement • Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and Adjustment of Parts" volume and then back ON again, to perform self-diagnostics
• Check connection between each of the SCN08C/ during machine initialization. If the results of the
SCR08C, IMG07B, IMG08A, IMG08H, and self-diagnostics indicate an error, replace the
MTH08B/E boards and their corresponding relevant board.
connectors.
the cause.
"11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image
Generation Mode"
<Probable Cause> <Probable Cause>

No.202 Improper image (2) • The IMG08A board is faulty (the unsharp mask No.204 Improper image (4) • The contents of the memory containing
memory is faulty). enlargement/reduction ratios in the IMG08A
board is corrupted.
• An image with ß=0 is outputted normally. However, • A full image in each size of 14" x 17" (35cm x
the image is disturbed otherwise. 43cm), 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm), and 10" x 12"
(24cm x 30cm), as well as a two-in-one image of
8" x 10" (18cm x 24cm) size, is disturbed.
<Check and Reference> <Check and Reference>

• Reset the machine, or power OFF the • Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
machine and then back ON again, to perform and then back ON again, to perform self-diagnostics
self-diagnostics during machine initialization. during machine initialization. If the results of the
If the results of the self-diagnostics indicate an self-diagnostics indicate an error, replace the
error, replace the relevant board. relevant board.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 13
<Probable Cause> <Probable Cause>

No. 205 Improper image (5) • Any of the SCN08C/SCR08C, IMG07B, IMG08A, No. 207 Improper film characters (2) • The CPU90E board and/or MTH08B/E board is
IMG08H, and MTH08B/E boards is faulty. faulty.
• Although the film characters and border are • Although the film characters, border, and image
outputted normally, the image itself is not are outputted normally, only a portion of film
generated properly, with the same data appearing characters consisting of Japanese text is disturbed.
continuously in the vertical direction.

• Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine • Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self- and then back ON again, to perform self-
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error, results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board. replace the relevant board.
"8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/ "20.4 CPU90E Board" in "Checks, Replacement
SCR08C Board" in "Checks, Replacement and and Adjustment of Parts" volume

No. 206 Improper film characters (1) • The Kanji ROM on the CPU90E board and/or the • Any of the SCN08C/SCR08C, IMG07B, IMG08A,
font file is corrupted.
No. 208 Halos
IMG08H, and MTH08B/E board is faulty or image
• The memory on the IMG08A board is faulty. signal cable on the board is faulty.
• Although the image and border are outputted • Multiple halos are developed outside the proper
normally, the film characters are not generated contour of the image.
properly.

• Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine • Reset the machine, or power OFF the machine
and then back ON again, to perform self- and then back ON again, to perform self-
diagnostics during machine initialization. If the diagnostics during machine initialization. If the
results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error, results of the self-diagnostics indicate an error,
replace the relevant board. replace the relevant board and cable.
"20.4 CPU90E Board" in "Checks, Replacement "8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/
and Adjustment of Parts" volume SCR08C Board" in "Checks, Replacement and
FR8H2227.EPS
FR8H2229.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 14

No.209 Decreased image contrast • In the dual-surface light gathering to image signal No. 302 Black spots or speckles • An IP that has been stored unused outside the
systems, the hardware for one surface is faulty. machine for a long period of time (one week or
The photomultiplier, photomultiplier board, high- longer) might have been used without secondary
voltage board, scanner control board, cables erasure.
• The contrast (density difference) between the bone connected to them, or the power supplies to them • Black spots or speckles are developed randomly
and soft part images is too low. may be abnormal. over the entire image. The black spots come in
• The S value is extremely smaller or greater than • The EDR software is faulty. various sizes, such as those extending over
the normal one. (It could happen to be the same several vertical lines, or as small as one line.
as the normal one.)
Even when the image contrast is low, <Check and Reference>
the L value is clipped at a predetermined "■ Single-Surface Image Signal System
level. Therefore, it is not always Malfunction Causing an Image Contrast
decreased to an unduly low level. Decrease"
FR8H2233.EPS
FR8H2230.EPS
<Probable Causes>
No. 301 White spots or speckles • Electromagnetic noise emitted from the motor,
etc. may be introduced into the image signal.
• Electrostatic or optical noise coming from the IP,
etc.
• One pixel or several pixels in one line have a • Dot defects in the IP.
markedly lower density, so white spots or speckles
are developed.
• Regular patterns of such white spots or speckles
frequently appear.

the cause.
"11.2 Making Analyses in the Virtual Image
Generation Mode"
FR8H2232.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 15

No. 304 Improper format (1) • The position of the scanning optics unit is No. 306 Format slanting • The subscanning unit and side-positioning unit
improper (in the main-scan direction). are misaligned.
• The irradiation field is improper. • The subscanning grip is unbalanced.
• The parameter for adjusting the main-scan format
• The right or left edge of the image is missing. is improper. • The right or left edge of the image is aslant.
<Probable Causes>
No. 305 Improper format (2) • The IP feed by FFM (MZ1) is improper when the
IP is fed into the subscanning unit.
• The IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1) is faulty.
• The rpm of the FFM (MZ1) is improper.
• The irradiation field is improper.
• The bottom or top edge of the image is missing.
FR8H2235.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 16
■ Single-Surface Image Signal System Malfunction Causing an Image Contrast Decrease (2) Start the M-Utility.
If the output film exhibits a decreased image contrast, isolate the cause and take an appropriate “8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Starting and Exiting the M-
remedial action. Utility” in “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
(3) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY” and “11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL”.
● Dual-surface light gathering check (4) Choose “1. FRONT ONLY”.
(1) Expose the entire IP surface to 0.5 to 9.99 mR of radiation. Measure the amount of radiation ➮ The system is then set for front-surface light gathering only.
with a dosimeter. Also, set the tube voltage to 80 kV. If you choose “2. BACK ONLY”, the system is set for back-surface light gathering only.
(5) Exit the M-Utility and return to the routine mode.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
(6) Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation.
The X-ray radiation amount is the one that prevails at the IP center. However, the dosimeter cannot be
positioned at the IP center at the time of entire IP surface exposure. Therefore, measure the amounts (7) Using “Sensitivity” on the console’s test menu, record an image and generate it.
of radiation at the IP center and in the IP periphery beforehand to calculate the difference between (8) Repeat steps (2) through (7) for back-surface light gathering.
them, and then determine the correction dose value according to the calculated difference.
(9) Run the following checks on the output films derived from front-surface light gathering and
back-surface light gathering.
(2) Determine the correction dose value.
• Check that the steel rule is imaged.
Note down the value.
• Check that the S value prevailing on the film surface is within the following range.
(3) Using “Sensitivity” on the test menu of the console, record an image and generate it.
182 ≤ S value x correction dose value ≤ 220
(4) Run the following checks on the resulting output film.
If the following image abnormalities are encountered, perform the procedures set forth below
• Check that the shading in the main scanning direction is corrected.
to identify the problem cause and take an appropriate remedial action.
• Check the polygon planes in the subscanning direction for variations and irregularities.
❍ The single-surface image is without a steel rule image and in a midtone overall.
• Check that the S value prevailing on the film surface is within the following range.
182 ≤ S value x correction dose value ≤ 220 Cause: The image signal (log amplifier output voltage) is ±0 V.
● Single-surface light gathering check ❍ The single-surface image is without a steel rule image and completely clear.
Cause: The image signal (log amplifier output voltage) is +2.5 V.
Perform the following steps to conduct light gathering for one surface at a time (front and back
surfaces) and check that the resulting output film is normal. ❍ The single-surface image is without a steel rule image and completely black.
◆ NOTE ◆ Cause: The image signal (log amplifier output voltage) is -2.5 V.
Even if a single-surface light-gathering process is abnormal, no associated error occurs in the
shading/sensitivity correction process. After shading/sensitivity corrections, therefore, be sure to
run a single-surface light-gathering check.
(1) Attach a steel rule to the exposure unit front cover.

The steel rule must be positioned outside the 10" x 12" area on the exposure unit front cover.
10" x 12" area
Attach
Steel rule
FR8H2231.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 17
● Identifying the cause
Identify and eliminate the problem cause, and then generate an output of one surface at a time for
verification purposes.
❍ When the image signal (log amplifier voltage) is ± 0 V, the probable causes are as
indicated below.
• The cable between the IMG and SCN boards is faulty (✻).
• The PMT/PMR board is faulty (✻).
• The SCN/SCR board is faulty (✻).
• The coaxial harness is disconnected.
• The voltage supply to the PMT/PMR board is 0 V (±15AS line).
A PMT/PMR analog power supply voltage abnormality occurs. Note the logged error
information to check whether a warning is issued.
✻ A combination of two or more causes may exist depending on the problem.
❍ When the image signal (log amplifier voltage) is +2.5 V, the probable causes are as
indicated below.
• The high-voltage harness is disconnected.
• The PMT is faulty.
• The high-voltage power supply is faulty.
A high-voltage power supply voltage abnormality occurs. Note the logged error information
to check whether a warning is issued.
• The voltage supplied to the high-voltage power supply is 0 V (+15VH line).
A high-voltage power supply voltage abnormality occurs. Note the logged error information
to check whether a warning is issued.
• The high-voltage command value is 0 V (the SCN board or cable is faulty).
❍ When the image signal (log amplifier voltage) is -2.5 V, the probable causes are as
indicated below.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 11 - 18
11.5 XXXXX

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 12 - 1
12. IP Jam Handling Procedures
■ Supplementary Information about an IP Jam
● If an IP is jammed near the enclosure guide plate

If an IP is jammed near the enclosure guide plate, check that the lug guide clearance in the
subscanning unit is as indicated below. If not, loosen the lug guide screw and adjust the lug
guide position.
Side view
Jammed IP
Enclosure guide
plate 1.0—1.4mm
Lug guide
Subscanning
unit
Lug guide
T Scanner
ON after-reading
FR
conveyor
FR1H2318.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 13 - 1
13. Checking for Improper IP Conveyance CAUTIONS

• When handling an IP, watch out for burrs on its carbon plates because you may be injured by the
Allow the machine to perform an IP conveyance operation about 10 times to check that no IP jam
burrs. Replace an IP if it is burred.
error occurs.
• Use care not to mix the IPs for the CR-IR348RU or CR-IR344 with the IPs for the CR-IR343. If IPs
that are not compatible with the machine are used, abnormal images are generated. Note the
CAUTION number marking to distinguish between these two types of IPs.
When using IPs, observe the following precautions to avoid scratching or soiling them.
● IP handling precautions Number marking
Do not bring your hands or fingers into contact with the the IP surface and back. Always
use both hands to grasp an IP by its upper and lower carbon plates. • For CR-IR343 • For CR-IR344 (this machine)
FUJI ST J5 ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ FUJI ST W ▲ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
Carbon plate IP surface
Numerical Top Top (J5 ▲ ▲ : lot name; (W ▲ ▲ ▲ : lot name;
marking ■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number) ■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number)
• For CR-IR348RU
FUJI ST W ▲ ▲ ▲ 5 ■ ■ ■
Left Right
IP surface IP back (W ▲ ▲ ▲ : lot name;
Taped 5 ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number)
edge Taped FR8H1901.EPS
edge
Bottom Bottom
Carbon plate
<Holding an IP>
Grasp the carbon plates
■ Inserting IP
with both hands.
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in its lowermost position.
(2) Start the M-Utility.
(3) Sequentially choose “10. IP UTILITY” and “3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE”.
➮ A message appears to indicate that an IP change request is approved.
<Holding an IP for insertion <Holding an IP for insertion 1. 000017 000000 0

into/removal from the machine - 1> into/removal from the machine - 2> 2. - - -
Using both hands Using only one hand A B C
0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY D E F
2. SETTING
3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE 7 8 9
4. USE OVEREXPOSED-IP MODE
IU > 3
4 5 6
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR LOADING OR REMOVING IPs IS SET.
0. QUIT 1 2 3
1. DISPLAY
2. SETTING 0 . SP
With both hands, hold the IP in a Hold the IP in a vertical position Message 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE
vertical position by grasping by grasping the center
the upper carbon plate. of the upper carbon plate. DEL BS ENT
FR1B8008.EPS
IU >
● Precautions to observe when placing an IP on a table or the like

• Handle an IP while exercising care not to bump it against the corner of a table or the like. Caps
• Position an IP on a large, flat, clean surface.

• To avoid bringing the IP surface and back into contact with a table, cover the table with FR1B8011.EPS
the sponge sheet that is packed together with IPs. Before using the sponge sheet, (4) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility.
check that it is not soiled or contaminated with foreign matter deposits.
• Do not stack IPs one on top of the other. ➮ You are then returned to the routine mode.
● General precautions When the IP positioning unit is accessible, the main body panel indication changes as shown
If an IP bumps against or falls down onto anything, be sure to subject it to visual below.
inspection and image output checkout. It is probable that such an IP will cause a
conveyance failure or image abnormality due, for instance, to its damaged edges, burred CHANGING / CLEANING IP
IP#1
carbon plates, or scratched IP surface and back. 17* 17key <- RESETTING IP INFO.
14* 17key <- REMAINING IP INFO.
FR1B8004.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 13 - 2
(5) Remove the chin support cover. ■ Checking for Improper IP Conveyance
Open the right- and left-hand screw covers, remove the screws, and take off the chin support (1) Start the M-Utility.
cover. (2) Sequentially choose “3. TEST MODE”, “2. AUTO MODE”, and “2. PRIMARY ERASURE”.
➮ A message then appears to prompt for the input of a conveyance count.
(3) Set the IP conveyance count to 10.
3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY A B C
Screw cover 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY D E F
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
7 8 9
10. IP UTILITY
Chin support >3
cover 4 5 6
0.QUIT
1.ROUTINE 1 2 3
2.AUTO MODE
TM > 2
0 . SP
0.QUIT
1.READING & ERASURE DEL BS ENT
FR1H4004.EPS 2.PRIMARY ERASURE
3.SECONDARY ERASURE
TM:AM > 2
(6) Load the first IP to the IP positioning unit. INPUT THE NUMBER OF COVEYANCES. Caps
◆ NOTE ◆
0-99999: 10
Insert the IP with its IP surface positioned forward.

FR4H8007.EPS
(7) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key. (4) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility.
(5) You are now returned to the routine process mode.
RESETTING IP ➮ The IP conveyance operation automatically starts. This operation is repeated a
INFO.key
REMAINING IP preselected number of times (10 times) as designated in step (3).
INFO.key (6) Perform the following checks during IP conveyance.
• Check that the machine does not emit any abnormal sound or odor.
• Check that IP conveyance is carried out without causing an error.
(7) After completion of IP conveyance, start the M-Utility again.
(8) Sequentially choose “3. TEST MODE” and “1. ROUTINE”.
(9) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” until the system returns to the U-Utility mode.
FR1B8005.EPS (10) Press the “Back” key.
(8) Load the second IP to the IP positioning unit. ➮ The system returns to the routine processing mode.
(9) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key.
➮ When the second IP is loaded, you are automatically returned to the routine mode screen.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 13 - 3
■ Checking for Flawed IPs (4) Press the REMAINING IP INFO. key.
After completion of IP conveyance, remove all IPs and check that they are not flawed.
RESETTING IP
(1) From the M-Utility main menu, sequentially choose “10. IP UTILITY” and “3. LOAD/REMOVE INFO.key
MODE”. REMAINING IP
INFO.key
➮ A message appears on the console to indicate that an IP change request is approved.
(2) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility.
➮ You are then returned to the routine process mode.
When the IP positioning unit is accessible, the main body panel indication changes as shown
below.
CHANGING / CLEANING IP
IP#1 FR1B8005.EPS
17* 17key <- RESETTING IP INFO.
14* 17key <- REMAINING IP INFO.
FR1B8004.EPS (5) For the second IP, repeat steps (3) and (4).
(3) Take the IPs out of the IP positioning unit and check that they are not scratched or otherwise ➮ When you load the second IP, the system automatically returns to the routine mode screen.
abnormal. Perform the following checks. (6) Install the chin support cover.
• Carbon plate: Check for a burred or peeled carbon plate and peeled base. (7) Press the reset button.
• Taped edge: Check for a peeled base and kink marks. ➮ The machine restarts and becomes ready for use.
• Image surface: Check for scratches, smudges, cracks, and kink marks.
If any IP is smudged, clean it.
If any IP is scratched or otherwise damaged, replace it.
When the IPs are normal, put them back in the IP positioning unit.
<Burred> <Peeled carbon plate>
Whiskery fiber protrusion

from a crack
Separated fiber
layers
Whiskery fiber
protrusion
<Peeled base> <Kink marks>
Carbon plate or taped edge

peeled from the image
surface
Curved or linear
crease-like
deformation or streak
FR1B8009.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 14 - 1
14. Machine Position Information 14.2 Roller Arrangement

14.1 Unit Locations Exposure/reader unit
B: Path changeover
: Rubber roller conveyor
■ Subscanning Unit
Ensure that the distance between the frame and subscanning unit lug guide plate is 70 ± 0.5 mm.
Z: Subscanning unit
70±0.5mm
F: Erasure conveyor
Frame
D: Scanner
Lug guide plate after-reading
conveyor
FR1H4021.EPS
T
ON
FR
FR1H1402.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 14 - 2
14.3 Home Position Values ■ Scanner After-Reading Conveyor

When the distance between the cam leading end and roller bearing center is 4 ± 0.5 mm, ensure
that the SD2 is flush with the actuator end face.
■ IP Positioning Unit
Temporarily retain the SA1 bracket in such a position that the distance between the side plate and
SA1 bracket end face is 24 mm.
Flush
Adjust the SA1 bracket position so that the distance between the side plate and IP entry guide end
face is 10 ± 1 mm when home positioning is accomplished up power ON.
IP positioning unit side plate
SD2
24mm
Actuator
Side plate SA1
SA1 4 ± 0.5mm
bracket
10 ± 1mm
Scanner Cam Roller bearing

after-reading
IP entry conveyor FR1H2315.EPS
guide
Side plate
FR1H2314.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 14 - 3
■ Subscanning Unit 14.4 Grip Spring Data
When home positioning is accomplished upon power ON, the SZ2 must be flush with the actuator
end face while the screws at the lever fulcrums are visible through side plate holes A, B, and C. Machine right side view Exposure/reader unit
Further, when the grip roller is released, the screws at the lever fulcrums must be visible through B: Path changeover
side plate holes D and E. 388N2418 conveyor
(front/rear)
Home positioning completed (grip roller activated)
Hole A
388N2418 (front/rear)
Lever
388N2404 Z: Subscanning unit

(front/rear)
F: Erasure conveyor
Hole D Flush
SZ2 388N2418 (front/rear)

Lever
D: Scanner
Actuator Hole C after-reading
conveyor 388N2401 (front/rear)
Grip roller 388N2401: φ0.8 OD x φ10 (mm); free length: 33.3 mm

388N2404: φ1.0 OD x φ9 (mm); free length: 44.9 mm
388N2418: φ0.5 OD x φ4 (mm); free length: 93.35mm FR1H2011.EPS
Hole E
T
ON
FR
Scanner unit
Hole B Lever
FR1H2317.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 15 - 1
15. Interlock Conditions 15.2 Interlock Related to Patient Safety

This interlock is a human body protection mechanism that directly shuts off the drive output power
15.1 Interlock Related to Laser Safety supply under specific conditions.
This interlock is a laser safety assurance mechanism that forces the laser system to turn OFF
■ Drive output to be interlocked
when you turn ON the power with the machine uncovered.
Elevation unit solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2)
The laser safety interlock switches (SH1 and SH2) are monitored before laser beam generation. If
either the SH1 or the SH2 is open (cover open), the system is rendered inoperative.
Actuator Exposure unit top cover When the safety device beneath the exposure/reader unit or side grip handles (optional) actuates,
the interlock switches (MSH1-MSH4) in the safety device turn OFF. If any of such switches turns
OFF, the power supply to the descent control solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2) is directly shut off to
prevent the exposure/reader unit from moving downward.
SH2
Actuator
SH1
Exposure unit right-hand inner cover FR1H1218.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 15 - 2
15.3 Interlock for Machine Protection

This interlock is a machine protection mechanism that stops drive output operations under specific
conditions.
■ Drive outputs to be interlocked
● Elevation drive hydraulic pump motor (MH1)

When the MH1 is ON with the SVH1/SVH2 turned OFF, the exposure/reader unit ascends.
● Elevation unit solenoid valve (SVH1/SVH2)

When the SVH1/SVH2 is ON with the MH1 turned OFF, the exposure/reader unit descends.
● Grip handle (optional) drive motor (MH2)

When the MH2 turns ON, the grip handle ascends.
● MH1
When the elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH8) or the grip handle interference prevention
interlock switch (MSH5) turns ON, the MH1 power supply is directly shut off to prevent the
exposure/reader unit from moving upward.
● SVH1/SVH2
When the elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH9) turns ON, the SVH1/SVH2 power supply is
directly shut off to prevent the exposure/reader unit from moving downward.
● MH2
When the grip handle upper-/lower-limit interlock switch (MSH6/MSH7) turns ON, the MH2 power
supply is directly shut off to prevent the grip handle from ascending/descending.
If the grip handle interference prevention interlock switch (MSH5) turns ON during a grip handle
descent, the MH2 power supply is directly shut off to stop the grip handle descent.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 15 - 3
15.4 Elevation Operation Interlock Control Flow
Elevation switch
operation
ON ON
Interlock Interlock switch Interlock
LED OFF Interlock ON/OFF Independent LED ON
operation operation
Elevation switch Elevation switch Grip handle Grip handle

Elevation switch UP Elevation switch DOWN
UP DOWN switch UP switch DOWN
Interlock Interlock Elevation

ON Elevation ON Grip handle ON Elevation unit ON ON Grip handle
MSH1-4/MSH9 LED OFF LED OFF MSH1-4/MSH9
MSH6 ON/OFF MSH6 ON/OFF MSH7 ON/OFF
ON Elevation unit ON/OFF ON/OFF
MSH8 ON/OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
Elevation Grip handle OFF Elevation OFF
ON Grip handle ON Grip handle Interference Interference
unit DOWN UP unit DOWN
MSH6 ON/OFF MSH7 ON/OFF MSH5 ON/OFF MSH5 ON/OFF
ON Interference
Exposure MSH5 ON/OFF
unit ascent stop OFF OFF ON ON
(MH1 OFF)
OFF
Grip handle
descent ON Interference stop (MH2 OFF)
ascent stop Timer
Elevation (SVH1/SVH2 OFF) MSH5 ON/OFF (MH1 OFF)
Grip handle
unit UP stop (MH2 OFF)
OFF
Grip handle
Grip handle Grip handle DOWN
Exposure unit UP DOWN
ascent stop
(MH1 OFF)

Grip handle Grip handle Grip handle stop
ascent stop descent stop
stop (MH2 OFF) stop (MH2 OFF) (MH2 OFF)
(MH1 OFF) (SVH1/SVH2 OFF) FR1H1217.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MT 16 - 1
[Example 2]
16. Analysis Procedures for Exposure Unit
The solenoid valve and check valve are not closed, so that oil flows back into the tank, causing the
Spontaneous Descent and Oil Leak exposure unit to descend spontaneously.
However, no oil is deposited in the oil pan.
This section describes typical examples of the exposure unit’s spontaneous descent phenomenon,
and how to analyze and remedy it. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Two solenoid valves and check values are arranged in series, respectively, so that even if one of them fails,
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE the operation continues normally. However, if both two of them fail, the exposure unit descends
The exposure unit may descend spontaneously due to a disconnected pipe, improper operation of an spontaneously.
solenoid valve/check valve, and other factors, in addition to the phenomenon described below.
Air
16.1 Examples of Spontaneous Descent Phenomenon and

Measurement Method
[Example 1]
The oil in the cylinder leaks from the oil sealing into the air chamber, causing the exposure unit to
descend spontaneously.
However, no oil is deposited in the oil pan.
Oil
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
In the cylinder, the oil chamber and air chamber are separated by the oil sealing.
Air
Solenoid valve Check valve
Air chamber Cylinder

Oil tank Pump
Oil sealing
FR8H5103.EPS
Oil chamber
Oil
FR8H5105.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MT 16 - 2
[Example 3] [Measurement Method]
The oil leaks from the rod into the cylinder, causing the exposure unit to descend spontaneously. (1) Position the exposure unit in the center or slightly above, and turn OFF the power.
In this case, the oil leaked is deposited in the oil pan. (2) Attach an eye mark (such as electrical tape) on the exposure unit and elevation unit pillar.
Air
Cylinder Elevation unit

[Attach]
Electrical tape
Oil
Exposure unit
Rod
FR8H5100.EPS
FR8H5104.EPS
(3) While keeping the machine intact, measure the value of spontaneous descent time by time.
Specified values: Within 0.33 mm/h (equivalent to 1 mm/3h, 4 mm/12h, or 8 mm/24h)
If the resulting measured value is outside the specified value, see the analysis flow to take
remedial action as appropriate.
“16.2 Exposure Unit Spontaneous Descent and Oil Leak Analysis Flow”
Elevation unit
[Measure]
Electrical
tape Exposure unit
FR8H5101.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MT 16 - 3
16.2 Exposure Unit Spontaneous Descent and Oil Leak Analysis

Flow
It seems that the exposure
unit is descending.
Power OFF
N
N Is the spontaneous descent
speed within the specified value?
Y → “16.1 Examples of Spontaneous Descent
Power Phenomenon and Measurement Method”
OFF
Is oil deposited in N
No abnormality
the oil pan?
Y
Power
OFF Power
N Is the amount of oil OFF
deposited less than Is there any oil leak N
Greater half the oil pan. in the piping?
than half
Y Less than half Y
Power
OFF Power
ON
Is the oil level in the N
oil tank appropriate? Is the oil level in the N
oil tank appropriate?
Y → “3. Checking the Oil Y → “3. Checking the Oil
Tank Oil Level and Tank Oil Level and
Hydraulic Hoses, Hydraulic Hoses,
in Preventive in Preventive
Maintenance Volume” Power Maintenance Volume”
ON
Is there any abnormality
when the exposure unit is N
moved up to its upper limit?
Y Offensive noise,
vibration, erratic
operation, etc.
Replace the Tighten the oil Replace the Replace the solenoid Replace the
No abnormality Refill oil. leaking section, cylinder. valve assembly. cylinder.
cylinder.
or replace parts.
FR8H5102.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 17 - 1
17. Initialization Self-diagnostic Check Step and

Shutdown Procedure Descriptions
General descriptions of initialization self-diagnostic steps and shutdown operation are provided
below.
■ Initialization Self-Diagnostic Steps

When the machine starts up, step numbers appear on the operation to indicate the subsystems
that are being initialized. If the machine hangs up during initialization, you can locate a troubled
subsystem by noting the displayed step number.
• Step 99: Panel control
• Step 95: Log information control
• Step 90: Conveyance control
• Step 80: Read control
• Step 70: DMS FINP output control
• Step 65: ID information input control
• Step 60: CSL control
• Step 55: Image distribution control
• Step 40: LP output control
• Step 35: DMS E-IF control
• Step 30: DMS FINP input control
• Step 15: Base on DICOM output control
• Step 5: Image management system control
■ Shutdown operation
Information required by each subsystem when power is turned ON next time is written to the
backup memory or HD.
Control of the remote power supply unit is also executed as needed.

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MT 17 - 2
BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017
MT_A1 - 1
Appendix 1. Supplementary Information

Appendix 1.1 Setting of Error Code to be Captured for IO Trace
If there is any error code is be captured for IO trace, it may be set as an error code to be captured
for IO trace
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When an error code to be captured for IO trace (1XXX/2XXX) is set, the IO trace data for the error code so
set is saved in a separate memory when the error occurs.
The IO trace data saved may be written to a floppy disk by selecting “1. ERROR LOG UTILITY” and “3. SAVE
TO FD” of M-Utility in sequence.
How to set an error code to be captured for IO trace is described below.

(2) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive (FDD) of the machine.
(3) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “3. BACKUP”, and “2. CONFIGURATION DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the floppy disk.
• IRSET.ORG • IRSET.OFG
• FILMFMT.ORG • FILMFMT.OFG
• IRSTATUS.ORG • IRSTATUS.CFG
(4) Remove the floppy disk from the FDD of the machine and insert it into the FDD of the
personal computer (PC).
When installing the configuration data that is edited on the PC to the machine, make sure
that software versions of the source and destination are the same.
If the software versions are different, an error may occur during installation.
(5) Using the editor on the PC, edit the IRSTATUS.CFG file.
Example)
To set the error code “1234” as the error code to be captured for IO trace, type in as follows:
IOT_ERROR_CODE=“1234”
(6) Remove the floppy disk containing the edited file from the PC, and insert it into the FDD of
the machine.
(7) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “4. RESTORE”, and “2. CONFIGURATION DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the HDD of the machine.
• IRSET.CFG • FILMFMT.CFG
• IRSTATUS.CFG
(8) Remove the floppy disk from the machine.
(9) Press the RESET button to reboot the machine.
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MT_A1 - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
MT_A1 - 2
BLANK PAGE
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MT_A1 - 2

06.20.2003 FM4017
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Control Sheet MC - 1
Control Sheet
07/05/2001 01 Corrections (FM3073) MC - 1-3, 6, 7, 10, 14, 15, 17, 18,
29, 35, 36, 39, 44, 78, 79, 81, 86,
87, 93, 97, 101, 102, 104, 105,
107, 111-117, 120-123, 123.1-
123.4, 124, 125, 129, 134, 135,
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P 137, 138, 155, 215, 219-228,

231, 234, 236-243, 243.1-243.4,
248, 253-255, 258, 261-263,
Service Manual 08/30/2001 02 Design changes (FM3115)
265-267, 270
MC -3, 97, 101, 105, 107, 111,
113, 114, 119, 125, 137, 152,
153, 214, 215, 215.1-215.4,
243.1, 244, 246-249, 267
06/20/2003 03 Addition of board information, addition of All pages
HDD procedures, changes to section
numbers, changes to page numbers,
corrections for mistypes (FM4017)
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts (MC)
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC 1 - 1
1. Document Map
Common Procedures for All Components
2. Common Procedures for Parts Inspection, 3. Removing and Installing the Covers
Replacement, and Adjustment
2.1 Removing, Loading, Inspecting, and Cleaning the IPs
2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON
2.3 Turning ON the Machine with its Covers Removed 19. Tools
2.4 Inspecting the Sensors 19.1 Standard Tools
2.5 Clearing the Backup Memory 19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
2.6 Setting the Date and Time 19.3 Special Consumables
2.7 Adjusting the LCD Panel 19.4 Semi-Standard Tools
2.8 Inspecting the Pulse Motors
Exposure/Reader Unit Components 5.

5.1
Path Changeover Conveyor
Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor
5.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Positioning Unit Entry IP Sensor
4. IP Positioning Unit (SB1)
4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit 5.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Path Changeover Unit IP Sensor
4.2 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Positioning Home Position (SB2)
Sensor (SA1) 5.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Confluence Unit IP Sensor
4.3 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Lift Home Position Sensor (SB3)
(SA2) 5.6 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB1)
4.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Bucky Home Position Sensor 5.7 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB2)
(SA3) 5.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB3)
4.6 Replacing the IP Positioning Drive Motor (MA1) 5.10 Replacing and Adjusting the Path Changeover Conveyor
4.7 Replacing the IP Lift Drive Motor (MA2) Timing Belts
4.8 Replacing the Bucky Drive Motor (MA3) 5.11 Replacing the Rubber Rollers
4.10 Replacing the IP Positioning Unit Timing Belts
4.11 Removing and Installing the Carbon Plate 20. Boards
4.13 Replacing the Tray Assembly 20.12 DRV08B Board
6. Erasure Conveyor
6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor
6.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Entry IP Sensor (SF1)
8. Scanning Optics Unit 6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6)
8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board 6.5 Replacing the Temperature Control Switch (TSWF2/TSWF8)
6.6 Replacing the Initialization Temperature Control Switch
20. Boards FRONT (TSWF5)
20.13 SNS08B Board 6.7 Replacing the Illumination Failure Sensors (LSDN1-LSDN8)
6.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MF1)
6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-LAMP8)
6.10 Replacing the Erasure Cooling Fans (FANF1-FANF4,
FANH6-FANH8)
6.11 Replacing the Erasure Conveyor Timing Belts
7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit 6.12 Replacing the Rubber Rollers
6.13 Replacing the Sockets
9. Subscanning Unit
9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide
9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide 8. Scanning Optics Unit
Assembly (PMT08C Side) 8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width
9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide 8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections
Assembly (PMR08C Side) 8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit
9.1.3 Inspecting the Light-Collecting Guide 8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit
9.1.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide 8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly
9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide 8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08A Board
9.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light-Collecting Mirror
9.5 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Leading-edge Sensor 11. Before-Erasure Conveyor
(SZ1/SED08C) 11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor
9.6 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Grip Release Home 11.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Erasure Entry IP Sensor
Position Sensor (SZ2) (SE1)
9.7 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Reading IP Sensor (SZ3)
9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1)
9.9 Replacing the Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2)
9.10 Inspecting and Replacing the Rubber Belt
9.11 Replacing the Timing Belt 13. Power Supply Units
9.12 Inspecting and Replacing the Kapton® Belt, Tensioner, 13.2 Replacing the JPS-7
and Flywheel 13.4 Replacing the JPS-7 Fuses
9.13 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Unit Rubber Rollers 13.5 Replacing the Power Supply Unit (JPS-7) Fans
9.14 Replacing the Subscanning Unit Guide
9.15 Replacing the Vibration-Proof Rubbers
10. Scanner After-Reading Conveyor

10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor
10.2 Inspecting and Replacing the After-Reading IP Sensor (SD1)
10.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Release Home Position
Sensor (SD2)
10.4 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MD1)
10.5 Replacing the Grip Release Motor (MD2)
10.6 Replacing and Adjusting the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor
Timing Belt
10.7 Replacing the Rubber Rollers
FR4H6000.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 1 - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC 1 - 2
Elevation Unit Side

14. HDD
14.2 Replacing the HDD (ST318416N/WED4550-003/
WED9100-003)
14.3 Replacing the HDD Cooling Fan (FANH10)
15. FDD
15.1 Replacing the FDD
16. Removing and Installing the Control Rack
20. Boards
20.1 Board Arrangement Diagrams
20.2 MTH08B Board
20.3 MTH08E Board
20.4 CPU90E Board
20.5 IMG07B Board
20.6 IMG08A Board
20.7 IMG08B/H Board
20.8 DMC08A Board
20.9 HCP08A Board
20.10 CPU90F Board
20.11 LAN90B/D Board
20.15 XPC08A Board
20.16 BSP08A Board
20.17 Other Boards
20.18 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type
13. Power Supply Units

13.1 Replacing the JPS-3
13.3 Replacing the JPS-3 Fuses
17. Elevation Unit

17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure
17.2 Pulling Out the Pump Assemblies
17.3 Replacing the Elevation Drive Cooling Fan (FANH5)
17.4 Pulling Out the Valve Assembly
17.5 Replacing the Valve Coils
17.6 Checking for Oil Leaks
17.7 Replacing the Elevation Drive Hydraulic Pump Motor (MH1)
17.8 Replacing the Capacitor
17.9 Replacing the TLB08A Board
17.10 Checking the Descent Speed
17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed
17.12 Replacing the Cylinder
Machine Enclosure
12. Enclosure
12.1 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH1)
12.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH2)
12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switches (MSH1-MSH4)
12.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Handle Interference Prevention
Interlock Switch (MSH5)
12.6 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Grip Handle Upper-/Lower-
Limit Interlock Switch (MSH6/MSH7)
12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/Lower-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH8/MSH9)
12.8 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH1)
12.11 Replacing the Grid Handle Drive Motor (MH2)
12.13 Replacing the Air Filters
12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation Assembly
12.15 Inspecting and Replacing the Emergency Stop Switch (ESH1)
12.16 Replacing the Heat Sink
21 Checking Interlock
18. Adjustment Procedure for the Gonad Protector

FR4H6003.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 1 - 2

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC 2 - 1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MC 2 - 2
● General precautions
2. Common Procedures for Parts Inspection, If an IP bumps against or falls down onto anything, be sure to subject it to visual
Replacement, and Adjustment inspection and image output checkout. It is probable that such an IP will cause a
conveyance failure or image abnormality due, for instance, to its damaged edges,
This section describes the inspection, replacement, and adjustment procedures common to burred carbon plates, or scratched IP surface and back.
all parts.
2.1 Removing, Loading, Inspecting, and Cleaning the IPs CAUTIONS

• When handling an IP, watch out for burrs on its carbon plates because you may be injured by
CAUTION the burrs. Replace an IP if it is burred.
• Do not use CR-IR343 IPs in this machine (CR-IR344). If the IPs for the CR-IR343 are used in
When using IPs, observe the following precautions to avoid scratching or soiling them.
the CR-IR344, abnormal images are generated. Note the number marking to distinguish
● IP handling precautions
between these two types of IPs.
Do not bring your hands or fingers into contact with the IP surface and back.
Always use both hands to grasp an IP by its upper and lower carbon plates.
Number marking
Carbon plate
Numerical Top Top
• For CR-IR343
marking
FUJI ST J5 ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
IP surface
(J5 ▲ ▲ : lot name;
■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number)
Left Right
• For CR-IR344 (this machine)
IP surface IP back FUJI ST W ▲ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
Taped
edge Taped (W ▲ ▲ ▲ : lot name;
edge ■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number)
FR1B1901.EPS
Bottom Bottom
Carbon plate
<Holding an IP>
with both hands. ■ Removal/Loading Procedure
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in its lowermost
position.
“2.4 Inspecting the Sensors, ■ Details of Inspection Procedures, ● Starting the
M-Utility”
<Holding an IP for insertion <Holding an IP for insertion If the M-Utility is already active, verify that its main menu screen is open.
into/removal from the machine - 1> into/removal from the machine - 2>
Using both hands Using only one hand
1. 000017 000000 0
2. - - -
A B C
0.QUIT
1. DISPLAY D E F
2. SETTING
With both hands, hold the IP in a Hold the IP in a vertical position IU > 3
4 5 6
by grasping the center THE SPECIAL MODE FOR LOADING OR REMOVING IPs IS SET.
vertical position by grasping
the upper carbon plate. of the upper carbon plate. 1 2 3
FR1B8008.EPS
0.QUIT
1. DISPLAY
● Precautions to observe when placing an IP on a table or the like 2. SETTING 0 . SP
• Handle an IP while exercising care not to bump it against the corner of a table or Message 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE
the like. IU >
DEL BS ENT

• To avoid bringing the IP surface and back into contact with a table, cover the table
Caps
with the sponge sheet that is packed together with IPs. Before using the sponge
sheet, check that it is not soiled or contaminated with foreign matter deposits.
• Do not stack IPs one on top of the other. IP 5501
FR1B8011.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 2 - 1 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 2 - 2

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility. ■ Inspection/Cleaning Procedure
➮ You are then returned to the routine mode. After IPs are cleaned, use them to perform IP transport checkout.
When the IP positioning unit is accessible, the main body panel indication changes as
shown below. CAUTIONS
• Never use an eraser or a cleaning solvent other than the specified dehydrated ethanol. The
CHANGING / CLEANING IP CHANGING / CLEANING IP
IP#1
use of an improper substance may cause IP deterioration.
or IP#1
• Do not frequently use dehydrated ethanol for IP cleaning because the IP edges may turn
17* 17key <- RESETTING IP INFO. RESETTING IP INFO. -> 17*17key
14* 17key <- REMAINING IP INFO. REMAINING IP INFO. -> 14*17key yellow.
FR4B8004.EPS
• Do not apply any undue force to IPs when cleaning them. Excessive IP cleaning may incur IP
(5) Remove the chin support cover.
performance degradation. If you apply excessive force to the carbon plate edges, kink marks
Open the right- and left-hand screw covers, remove the screws, and take off the chin may be generated.
support cover. • When cleaning the taped edges, do not apply an excessive amount of anhydrous ethanol to
them. An excessive application of dehydrated ethanol may cause solution seepage into
taped edge joints and taped edge separation.
• The dehydrated ethanol to be used must be contained in a brown reagent bottle. After use,
the remaining dehydrated ethanol must be stored in a brown reagent bottle. The dehydrated
ethanol may oxidize depending on the storage condition.
• Exercise care not to press your fingernails against IPs or otherwise scratch them.
Screw cover
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in its lowermost
position.
Chin support
cover (2) Start the M-Utility.
M-Utility”
If the M-Utility is already active, verify that its main menu screen is open.
FR1H4004.EPS
➮ A message appears on the console to indicate that an IP change request is ap-
(6) Remove the first IP from the IP positioning unit. proved.
If you intend to perform IP loading, load the first IP here. (4) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility.
(7) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key. ➮ You are then returned to the routine mode.
RESETTING IP
INFO.key shown below.
REMAINING IP
INFO.key
IP#1 or IP#1
14* 17key <- REMAINING IP INFO. REMAINING IP INFO. -> 14*17key
FR4B8004.EPS

Open the right- and left-hand screw covers, remove the screws, and take off the chin
support cover.
FR1B8005.EPS
(8) Remove the second IP from the IP positioning unit.

If you intend to perform IP loading, load the second IP here.
(9) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key.
➮ When the second IP is removed or loaded, you are automatically returned to the
routine mode screen.
(10) Install the chin support cover.
Open the right- and left-hand screw covers and screw down the chin support cover.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(6) Take the IPs out of the IP positioning unit and check whether they are flawed or other- (8) Perform IP cleaning in the order indicated below.
wise abnormal. Perform the following checks. • Taped edge cleaning
• Carbon plate: Check for a burred or peeled carbon plate and peeled base. • IP surface and back (both sides) cleaning
• Taped edge: Check for a peeled base and kink marks.

from a crack
Separated fiber Taped edge

layers IP surface or back FR1H4003.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
Whiskery fiber When cleaning IPs, observe the following precautions.
protrusion
• Clean the taped edges and then the IP surface and back. If you clean the taped
edges after IP surface and back cleaning, the IP surface and back may be soiled by
<Peeled base> <Kink marks> dirt on the taped edges.
• To avoid bringing the IP surface and back into direct contact with a table or the like,
Carbon plate or taped edge cover the table or the like with the sponge sheet that is packed together with IPs.
peeled from the image Clean the sponge sheet before use. If the sponge sheet is not laid beneath IPs, the
surface IP surface and back may be scratched.
Curved or linear • Wipe the IPs with dry gauze. If the IPs are not thoroughly cleaned by dry gauze,
crease-like
deformation or streak wipe them with gauze moistened with a required minimum amount of dehydrated
ethanol.
• Immediately after an IP is wiped with gauze moistened with dehydrated ethanol,
gently wipe it with dry gauze and allow the IP surface and back to dry completely.
Especially, the taped edges should be wiped with dry gauze without delay because
they are likely to peel if they are left wet.
FR1B8009.EPS
(7) Check the image surfaces (IP surface and back) for scratches, smudges, cracks, and (9) Check the IP surface and back again for scratches, smudges, cracks, and kink marks.
kink marks.
If any abnormality is found when an IP is subjected to an image check, clean the IP
If any abnormality is found when an IP is subjected to an image check, replace the IP. again or replace it.
(10) Press the REMAINING IP INFO. key.
RESETTING IP
INFO.key
REMAINING IP
INFO.key
FR1B8005.EPS
(11) For the second IP, repeat steps (6) and (10).
➮ When you load the second IP, the system automatically returns to the routine mode
screen.
(12) Install the chin support cover.
Open the right- and left-hand screw covers and screw down the chin support cover.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Checking for Improper IP Conveyance 2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON
(2) Sequentially choose “3. TEST MODE”, “2. AUTO MODE”, and “2. PRIMARY ERA-
■ Turning OFF the Software Switch
SURE”.
➮ A message then appears to prompt for the input of a conveyance count.
“2.4 Inspecting the Sensors, ■ Details of Inspection Procedures, ● Starting the M-
(3) Set the IP conveyance count to 10.
Utility”
If the M-Utility is already active, verify that its main menu screen is open.
3. TEST MODE
A B C (2) Choose “9. HV OFF”.
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
D E F
➮ The high-voltage switch (software switch) turns OFF, changing the “9. HV OFF”
7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY indication to the “9. HV ON” indication.
9. HV OFF 7 8 9
10. IP UTILITY
11. SYSTEM UTILITY
4 5 6
■ Turning ON the Software Switch
>3
0.QUIT 1 2 3
1.ROUTINE “2.4 Inspecting the Sensors, ■ Details of Inspection Procedures, ● Starting the M-
2.AUTO MODE
TM > 2
0 . SP
Utility”
0.QUIT
DEL BS ENT If the M-Utility is already active, verify that its main menu screen is open.
1.READING & ERASURE
2.PRIMARY ERASURE
(2) Choose “9. HV ON”.
3.SECONDARY ERASURE
TM:AM > 2
Caps ➮ The high-voltage switch (software switch) turns ON, changing the “9. HV ON” indica-
INPUT THE NUMBER OF COVEYANCES. tion to the “9. HV OFF” indication.
0-99999: 10
IP 5501
FR4B8007.EPS
■ Turning OFF/ON the High-Voltage Switch (S1) on the SCN08C Board
(1) Turn OFF the power in the order indicated below.
• Machine main body circuit breaker
(5) You are now returned to the routine process mode.
• Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
➮ The IP conveyance operation automatically starts.
(2) Remove the following covers in order named.
(6) Perform the following checks during IP conveyance.
• Check that the machine does not emit any abnormal sound or odor.
• Check that IP conveyance is carried out without causing an error.
(7) After completion of IP conveyance, start the M-Utility again.
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
(8) Sequentially choose “3. TEST MODE” and “1. ROUTINE”.
(3) Remove the SCN08C board.
(9) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” until the system returns to the U-Utility mode.
Remove one mounting screw and then pull out the board.
(10) Press the “Back” key.
(4) Turn OFF or ON the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
➮ The system returns to the routine processing mode.
S1HVO
N
OFF position
S1
CN8
SCN08C board
CN7
FR1H6023.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
2.3 Turning ON the Machine with its Covers Removed (5) Turn OFF the power.
(6) Remove the tapes or other materials that have been used to block the light paths of the
Unlike its predecessors, the CR-IR344 has an upright optical system (a laser beam scan sensors (SH1 and SH2).
occurs in a horizontal direction) so that the laser beam is more likely to enter the eye. (7) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
Therefore, a safety feature is incorporated so that removing the exposure unit top cover or
right-hand inner cover shuts down the laser system and makes the machine inoperative. ◆ NOTE ◆
If the shorting connectors (dedicated jigs) have been connected to connector
CAUTIONS (CNH506), be sure to disconnect them. Also, properly make the CNH50 and CNH507
connections. If you do not properly perform these steps, the safety switches do not
• If it is necessary to turn ON the machine with the exposure unit top cover or right-hand inner
operate.
cover removed, be sure to perform the following steps.
• When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the
machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged.
2.4 Inspecting the Sensors
◆ NOTE ◆
If you disconnect the exposure unit front cover connector or right-hand side cover connector ■ Inspection Procedure Overview
(CNH50 or CNH506), the patient protection interlock works so that you cannot move the
exposure/reader unit up or down. If the exposure/reader unit needs to be moved up or down The inspection procedure common to all sensors is described below.
with the connectors disconnected, disconnect the junction connector (CNH507) that is located (1) Block the light paths of the laser safety interlock switch so that you conduct inspection
next to the CNH50, and connect the jig cable to the CNH507. The CNH507 and CNH50, to (with the power ON) while covers are open.
which the jig cable is not connected, may be left disconnected. “2.3 Turning ON the Machine with Its Covers Removed”
“19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments”
“● Starting the M-Utility”
(1) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
(3) With the MECHANICAL UTILITY, see that the sensors can be inspected.
“2.2 Turning the High-voltage Switch OFF and ON”
When inspecting a sensor, see that it can be monitored.
(2) With tapes or the like, block the light paths of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
and SH2). “● Operating the MECHANICAL UTILITY to permit sensor monitoring”
(4) Block the light paths of the sensors to be inspected, and then initiate inspection.
Tape
“● Checking the sensor status (Open/Closed) with a light shield”
(5) Exit the M-Utility.
“● Exiting the M-Utility”
SH2
(6) Free the light paths of the laser safety interlock switches.
HHS Label #2
Tape
SH1
FR1H6024.EPS
(3) Turn ON the power.

(4) Perform necessary maintenance tasks.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Details of Inspection Procedures ● Operating the MECHANICAL UTILITY to permit sensor monitoring
● Starting the M-Utility (1) Sequentially choose “6. MECHANICAL UTILITY” and “3. SENSOR”.
(2) Choose “3. MONITOR ALL”.
(1) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below.
➮ A list of sensor numbers appears on the display.
• Machine main body circuit breaker 0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C
• Console main switch and sub-switch 3. TEST MODE
D E F
(2) Touch the U-Utility button in the routine screen. 5. SCANNER UTILITY
➮ The U-Utility screen opens. 7. FILE UTILITY 7 8 9
8. BACKUP MEMORY
(3) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the U-Utility screen. 9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
4 5 6
➮ The M-Utility starts. 11. SYSTEM UTILITY

>6 1 2 3
Routine screen U-Utility screen 0.QUIT 0 . SP

1.MOTOR
2.ACTUATOR
DELETE UNPROCESSED
REOUTPUT IMAGE SET DATE/TIME 3.SENSOR DEL BS ENT
IMAGE
4.UNIT
MU > 3
SELECT PRINTER USE OVER-EXPOSED IP

0.QUIT
Caps
1.NUMBER
2.MONITOR
3.MONITOR ALL
MU:SEN > 3
USER UTILITY
MU:SEN > 3
QUIT
SA1 - 3 : 0 1 1
IP 5501 SB1 - 3 : 0 0 0 A B C
SD1 - 2 : 0 1
U-Utility button : Area to be touched SE1 : 0
D E F
SF1 : 1
SZ2 - 3 : 0 0
TSWF5 - 6 : 1 1 7 8 9
LDSN1 - 8 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M-Utility screen 0:QUIT
4 5 6
0. QUIT
A B C 1 2 3
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING
3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY D E F
5. SCANNER UTILITY 0 . SP
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 8 9
7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY DEL BS ENT
4 5 6
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
11. SYSTEM UTILITY 1 2 3
>
0 . SP
Caps
DEL BS ENT
Caps FR4H3016.EPS
IP 5501
FR4B4020.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Checking the sensor status (Open/Closed) with a light shield 2.5 Clearing the Backup Memory
(1) Locate the sensor to be inspected. Block its light path with a piece of paper or the like.
➮A message appears on the console panel to indicate that the sensor is closed.
Example: SA1 - - - - > Close
(2) Remove the paper or other light shield.
• Console main switch and sub-switch
➮A message appears on the console panel to indicate that the sensor is open.
Example: SA1 - - - - > Open
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) two or three times to check that the messages are correctly M-Utility
displayed.
(3) Choose “8. BACKUP MEMORY”.
If no message appears or other abnormality exists, replace the sensor and perform the
(4) Choose “1. CLEAR”.
inspection procedure again.
(4) Enter “0 (zero)”. ➮ A message appears, asking you whether you really want to clear the backup
memory.
➮ The system ends the monitoring operation and returns to the “3. SENSOR” menu.
(5) Choose “1. YES”.
● Exiting the M-Utility ➮ The backup memory is then cleared.
(6) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT”.
(1) Choose “0. QUIT”.
➮ You are returned to the U-Utility screen.
➮ The system returns to the “6. MECHANICAL UTILITY” menu.
(2) Choose “0. QUIT”. 0. QUIT
➮ The system returns to the main menu. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY

A B C
3. TEST MODE
(3) Choose “0. QUIT”. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY D E F
➮ The M-Utility exits. 5. SCANNER UTILITY

7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
4 5 6
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
>8
0 . SP
0.QUIT
1.CLEAR
DEL BS ENT
BKM > 1
ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL THE BACKUP MEMORIES?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1
Caps
0.QUIT
1.CLEAR
BKM > 0
IP 5501
FR4B4021.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
2.6 Setting the Date and Time 2.7 Adjusting the LCD Panel
(1) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below. This section describes the contrast and brightness adjustment procedures for the LCD panel
• Distribution switchboard circuit breaker that is mounted on the elevation unit front cover.
■ Adjusting the Contrast
The contrast can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment trimmer that is mounted on the flank
(2) Touch the U-Utility button in the routine screen. of the LCD panel.
(3) Touch “Date/time setup” in the U-Utility screen.
● When viewing the LCD panel from below
➮ The date/time setup screen opens.
Date/time setup key Rotate the adjustment trimmer clockwise (in the direction of arrow A shown in the figure)
U-Utility screen Date/time setup screen
Set the new date and time
in the order of Year, Month,
7 8 9
DELETE UNPROCESSED
IMAGE
REOUTPUT IMAGE SET DATE/TIME Date and Time (military time)
Ex)April 1, 1997.10:15 AM
Input 9704011015 4 5 6
1 2 3
Elevation
9704011015
unit
0 . SP
- BS ENT Horizontal
Adjustment direction
trimmer LCD panel
Viewing
angle
A
A
USER UTILITY SET DATE/TIME
QUIT QUIT
IP IP 5501
FR4B4056.EPS
(4) From the keypad, enter the current date and time.
FR
O NT
(5) After the date and time entry is made, finalize it by pressing the [ENT] key. FR1H6417.EPS
➮ When you finalize your entry, the area below the input field reads “OK”.
● When viewing the LCD panel from above
If you make a wrong entry, press the [BS] (backspace) key to return to the character to
be corrected. Rotate the adjustment trimmer counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow B shown in the
(6) Repeatedly touch the “Back” button. figure)
➮ The routine screen opens.
Elevation
unit
Viewing
Adjustment angle
trimmer LCD panel
Horizontal
direction
B
B
FR
O NT
FR1H6418.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Adjusting the Brightness 2.8 Inspecting the Pulse Motors

The brightness of the LCD panel backlight can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment
trimmer (VR2) with a Phillips screwdriver. Trimmer VR2 is exposed to view when you remove Check for a layer short within a pulse motor by measuring the resistance value of the associ-
the elevation unit front cover. It is mounted on the PNL08A board, which is on the back ated connector connected to the DRV08B board.
surface of the LCD panel. (1) Turn OFF the machine circuit breaker.
● Increasing the backlight brightness (2) Remove the exposure unit top cover.
(3) Locate a connector that is related to the pulse motor to be checked. Disconnect this
Rotate adjustment trimmer VR2 clockwise. connector from the DRV08B board.
Elevation unit front cover

(4) Measure the pin-to-pin resistance values of the disconnected connector (cable end).
Check that the measured resistance value is in agreement with the table below. If not,
replace the pulse motor.
(3)
PNL08B HHS Label #2
CN8
CN7
PNL08A board
CN12
CN10
VR2
DRV08B
CN9
PNL08A board CN11
(Solder surface)
CN6
CN5
FR1H1401.EPS
FR1H6419.EPS
Connector Connector pin numbers Approximate

Pulse motor
● Decreasing the backlight brightness to be disconnected for resistance measurements resistance value (Ω)
Between pins 1 and 4, pins 2 and

Rotate adjustment trimmer VR2 counterclockwise. MA1 CN5 4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6 1.1

Elevation unit front cover MA2 CN6 7, pins 3 and 8, and pins 3 and 9 1.1
Between pins 4 and 10, pins 5

MA3 CN6 and 10, pins 6 and 11, and pins 6 3.3
and 12
PNL08B MB1 CN7 7, pins 3 and 8, and pins 3 and 9 1.1

MB2 CN8 1.4
4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6
PNL08A board
Between pins 4 and 10, pins 5
MB3 CN7 and 10, pins 6 and 11, and pins 6 1.1
and 12
VR2
MD1 CN9 4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6 1.4
PNL08A board Between pins 1 and 4, pins 2 and

(Solder surface) MD2 CN10 4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6 1.4

MF1 CN11 4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6 1.1

MZ2 CN12 4, pins 3 and 5, and pins 3 and 6 1.1
TR1H1400.PCT
FR1H6420.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Elevation Unit Covers

3. Removing and Installing the Covers
• Elevation unit front cover (two M4x8 truss-head screws)
Remove the two screws from the top of the machine. Slightly lift the cover up and out
WARNINGS of its position. Since the cover is retained by a magnet, you have to remove the
cover with due force. You should also note that a cable is attached to the cover.
• To avoid electric shock hazards, turn OFF the circuit breakers on the machine and distribution
Therefore, lean the removed cover against the elevation unit to prevent it from
switchboard before cover removal/installation.
toppling down.
• Before removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage software switch and the high-
voltage switch on the SCN08C board. • Control unit cover (four M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws and three M4x8
“2.2 Turning the High-voltage Switch OFF and ON” truss-head screws)
• When installing the covers, exercise care not to erroneously interchange screw sizes and Before removing this cover, be sure that the elevation unit front cover and interface
types. cable are removed.
• Elevation unit left-hand side cover (two M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws, one
◆ NOTES ◆ M4x8 truss-head screw, and one M5x10 BR screw)
• When removing the exposure/reader unit covers, you should press the elevation panel switch Remove the elevation unit front cover beforehand.
to place the exposure/reader unit in its lowermost position. To remove the exposure unit • Elevation unit lower right-hand side cover (five M4x8 truss-head screws)
bottom cover and elevation unit right-hand side cover, however, you should place the expo-
Raise the exposure/reader unit until the mounting screws are removable. Remove
sure/reader unit in its uppermost position.
the five screws that secure the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover and upper
• If the side grip handles is attached, remove them before exposure unit front cover removal.
right-hand side cover together. Also, remove the elevation unit front cover, loosen
the one front screw, and take off the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover.
■ Exposure/Reader Unit Covers
◆ NOTE ◆
• Exposure unit front cover (upper: two M4x12 truss-head screws; lower: two M4x8
truss-head screws) When the elevation grip handle (optional) is installed, remove its elevation assembly
Slightly displace the cover and then disconnect the connector (CNH50). before elevation unit lower right-hand side cover removal.
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover (two M4x8 truss-head screws) “12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation Assembly”
Disconnect the connector (CNH59, CNH506). Slide the cover slightly rearward and Elevation unit
then take it off. Remove the exposure unit front cover before exposure unit right- left-hand
Exposure unit top cover
side cover
hand side cover removal. In cover installation, the exposure unit right-hand side
cover must be installed prior to the exposure unit front cover.
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover (seven M4x8 truss-head screws)
• Exposure unit top cover (four M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws)
• Exposure unit bottom cover (four M4x10 truss-head screws)
Remove the two front screws and loosen the two rear screws out of a total of six
Exposure unit rear cover
screws. Slide the cover forward and out of its position.
Do not loosen the two central screws because they are not provided for cover reten-
tion. Controller HHS Label #2
cover
◆ NOTE ◆ Exposure unit right-hand
inner cover
If the exposure unit bottom cover has been removed and then installed, be sure to T
ON
inspect the elevation safety interlock switches. FR
“12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Exposure unit
Interlock Switches (MSH1-MSH4)” right-hand side
cover
• Exposure unit rear cover (ten M4x10 cover-attached truss-head screws)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Basically, the exposure unit rear cover need not be removed. CNH59,
CNH506
Exposure unit bottom cover
Elevation unit right-hand bottom cover
CNH50
Elevation unit front cover FR1H6042.EPS
Exposure unit front cover

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Supplementary Information about Cover Installation BLANK PAGE
● Exposure unit bottom cover installation procedure

To install the exposure unit bottom cover, perform the following steps.
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
(2) Lift the exposure/reader unit to its uppermost position.
If necessary, connect the jig cable to the CNH50.
“2.3 Turning ON the Machine with its Covers Removed”
(3) Turn OFF the machine.
(4) Make sure that the rear-end cover mounting screws (2 places) are loosely attached to
the bottom surface of the machine.
(5) Hook the exposure unit bottom cover onto the front bracket of the machine and the two
screws mentioned in step (4) above.
(6) Tighten the two mounting screws on the front end of the exposure unit bottom cover.
Verify that the front end of the exposure unit bottom cover slightly rises, emitting
clicking sounds. If it does not rise in this manner, it means that the elevation safety
interlock switches are inoperative. In such an instance, repeat steps (5) and beyond.
(7) Tighten the two cover mounting screws on the rear end.
(8) Install the exposure unit front cover and check the elevation safety interlock switches.
“12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switches (MSH1-MSH4)”
Exposure/reader unit
(4)
Mounting
screw x2
FRONT
Bracket (5)
Exposure unit bottom cover
(6) Mounting screw x2

(7)
T The front end must slightly rise, Mounting screw x2
ON
FR emitting clicking sounds.
FR1H6099.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(2) When the Toshiba photo-timer is installed, disconnect the cable(s) from the photomulti-
4. IP Positioning Unit plier box.
When the 1-channel photo-timer is used, disconnect one cable. When the 2-channel
This section describes the procedures for removing and installing the IP positioning unit and type is used, disconnect two cables. Also, cut the tie that fastens the photo-timer cable
the procedures for inspecting and replacing the IP positioning unit parts in need of periodic to the exposure/reader unit.
replacement.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the following procedures are prepared on the presump- FR
ON
tion that the exposure unit front cover is removed. T
Photomultiplier box
1-channel type
photomultiplier
4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit box
(2)
■ Removal Procedure Cable
T Sems M3x6 x2
ON
The removal procedure varies depending on whether the IP positioning unit is equipped with FR
the photo-timer (optional).
● When the photo-timer is installed

(1) When the Hitachi/Shimadzu photo-timer is installed, remove it. 2-channel type
photomultiplier box
Cut the tie that fastens the photo-timer cable to the IP positioning unit. FR1H6432.EPS
<When Hitachi/Shimadzu photo-timer is installed>

(3) Disconnect the connectors (CNA1-CNA3).
(4) Remove the four mounting screws.
(5) Rotate the right- and left-hand side pinion gears to raise the tray in a forward direction.
(1) If you attempt to remove the IP positioning unit without raising the tray, the IP delivery
Photo-timer guides come into contact with the frame.
(1)
(6) Remove the IP positioning unit.
Leaf spring x4 Slightly lift the IP positioning unit to unhook it and then remove it.
Sems M3x6 x4
◆ NOTE ◆
When the side grip handles (optional) are installed, remove either one of the lower
shaft brackets before IP positioning unit removal.
IP delivery guide
(6) IP positioning unit
IP delivery guide
IP positioning unit Hook
(4)
Upper screws
T BR M4x8 x2
ON
FR FR1H6431.EPS
(5)
Pinion gear
(3) CNA2, 3 (4)
(3) CNA1 Lower screws
BR M4x8 x2
FR1H6025.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● When no photo-timer is installed 4.2 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Positioning Home Position
Perform steps (3) and beyond under “● When the photo-timer is installed”. Sensor (SA1)
■ Installation Procedure If sensor SA1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly
installed one.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
◆ NOTE ◆ ■ Inspection Procedure
When installing the side grip handle shaft brackets (lower two), screw them down while “2.4 Inspecting the Sensors”
pressing them against the positioning brackets.
■ Replacement Procedure
T
FR
ON (1) Remove the IP positioning unit.
“4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit”
(2) Raise the tray assembly in a forward direction.
(3) Disconnect the connector (SA1).
(4) Remove sensor SA1.
Shaft bracket
BR M4x8 x2 “3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume
Shaft bracket
BR M4x10 x2
(4) SA1
Positioning bracket (2) (3)

Tray assembly Connector
Positioning bracket (SA1)
IP positioning unit
FR1H6192.EPS
FR1H6104.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.3 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Lift Home Position Sensor 4.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Bucky Home Position Sensor
(SA2) (SA3)
If any abnormality is found during inspection, replace sensor SA2 and then inspect the newly If any abnormality is found during inspection, replace sensor SA3 and then inspect the newly
installed one. installed one.
■ Inspection Procedure ■ Inspection Procedure

“2.4 Inspecting the Sensors” “2.4 Inspecting the Sensors”
To check the SA2 open/close status, rotate the IP lift arms on the right- and left-hand sides To check the SA3 open/close status, rotate the MA3 arm to move the grid mounting bracket
of the IP positioning unit to rotate the actuator. (actuator) to the right and left.
■ Replacement Procedure ■ Replacement Procedure

(1) Remove the IP positioning unit. (1) Remove the IP positioning unit.
“4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit” “4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit”
(2) Rotate the shaft to separate the actuator from sensor SA2. (2) Disconnect the connector (SA3).
(3) Disconnect the connector (SA2). (3) Remove sensor SA3.
(4) Remove sensor SA2. “3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in Machine Description Volume
“3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
(3)
Connector
(SA2)
Shaft
(3) SA3
(4)
SA2
(2) Connector
(SA3)
(2)
Actuator FR1H6109.EPS
FR1H6105.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.5 XXXXX 4.6 Replacing the IP Positioning Drive Motor (MA1)

No adjustments need be made after replacement.
(2) Raise the tray assembly in a forward direction.
(3) Disconnect the connector (CNMA1).
(4) Remove motor MA1.
Remove the mounting screws from the side plate and then remove motor MA1 with the
stay attached.
(5) Remove the timing belt pulley and the stay and then replace motor MA1.
(5)
(2) E-ring
Tray assembly (5)
Timing belt
pulley
MA1 (4)
BR M4x8 x3
(5)
Stay x3
(3) CNMA1
(5)
Sems M4x10 x3
FR1H6106.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.7 Replacing the IP Lift Drive Motor (MA2) 4.8 Replacing the Bucky Drive Motor (MA3)
No adjustments need be made after replacement. No adjustments need be made after replacement.

(1) Remove the IP positioning unit. (1) Remove the IP positioning unit.
“4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit” “4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit”
(2) Raise the tray assembly in a forward direction. (2) Disconnect the connector (CNMA3, SA3).
(3) Cut the cable tie. (3) Cut the tie.
(4) Disconnect the connector (CNMA2). (4) Remove motor MA3 and its bracket as an assembly.
(5) Remove motor MA2 with its bracket attached. (5) Remove the bracket and arm, and then replace motor MA3.
(6) Remove the timing belt pulley and the bracket and then replace motor MA2.
(2)CNMA3
(3) Tie
(2) (5)
Tray assembly MA3
(3) Tie
(4) CNMA2 Sems M3x6 x2
(6)
Sems (2)
M4x10 Connector
x2
(SA3)
MA2
(5) (4)
Bracket Setscrew
(6) Bracket
BR M4x8 x2
Timing belt pulley BR M4x8 x2
(6) E-ring (5) Arm
FR1H6108.EPS
FR1H6107.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
When installing the MA3, perform the following checks.
• Check that the arm shaft support is lodged in the Bucky bracket hole.
• Check that the Bucky bracket smoothly moves without coming into contact with the
SA3.
MA3
Bearing
SA3
Bucky
bracket FR1H6145.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.9 XXXXX 4.10 Replacing the IP Positioning Unit Timing Belts
■ Tray Drive Timing Belt Replacement Procedure
❍ Removal
(2) Remove the left-hand pinion gear.
Remove two setscrews and then pull out the pinion gear.
(3) Remove the left-hand shaft support.
(4) Shift the shaft to the right.
(5) Remove the timing belt.
IP positioning unit
(2)
Pinion gear
Setscrew x2
(3) Shaft support
(4) Shaft
(5) Timing belt
FR1H6026.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
❍ Installation ■ IP Lift Timing Belt Replacement Procedure

(1) Install a new timing belt over the timing belt pulley. ❍ Removal
(2) Return the shaft to the left-hand side and then install the left-hand bearing and pinion
gear over the shaft. (1) Remove the IP positioning unit.
(3) Bring down the tray assembly toward the home position, and bring the tray assembly “4.1 Removing and Installing the IP Positioning Unit”
edge into contact with the stay. (2) Remove the right- and left-hand arms.
(3) Remove the shaft.
(4) Remove the timing belt.
Tray assembly
IP positioning unit
(3) Shaft
Stay
(4)
Timing belt
(2) Arm
Retaining screw
(2)
Sems M3x10
FR1H6028.EPS
(4) With the tray assembly edge brought into contact with the stay, tighten the two set- (2) E-ring
screws for the left-hand pinion gear.
(2) Shaft support
(5) Rotate the pinion gear to check that the tray assembly smoothly moves.
T (2) Shaft support

ON
FR
(2) E-ring
(2)
Arm
Retaining screw x2
(2) Sems M3x10 FR1H6031.EPS
❍ Installation
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the right- and left-hand arms, perform the following steps.
(1) Set the shaft in the IP positioning unit and retain both ends of the shaft with bearing
and E-rings.
(2) Mount the right-hand arm in its position and tighten its setscrew.
The setscrew must be driven into the flat-machined surface of the shaft.
(3) Install the left-hand arm over the shaft.
(4) With the right- and left-hand arms aligned, fasten the left-hand arm to the shaft.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.11 Removing and Installing the Carbon Plate ◆ NOTE ◆

When installing the carbon plate, ensure that the leaf springs beneath the carbon plate
are positioned forward of the brackets.
(1) If the photo-timer is installed, remove it.
(2) Remove the two grid mounting guides.
(3) Remove the grid.
Remove two screws and pull out the grid by moving it between the stopper brackets.
(4) Remove the carbon plate.
Remove twelve screws, bring down the tray assembly, and remove the carbon plate
while releasing the bottom hooks.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. Carbon plate
(4)
Carbon plate Leaf spring
(shock absorber attached)
Sems M3x10 x12 Bracket
FR1H4030.EPS

(2)
Guide x 2 Stopper brackets
BR M4x12 x2 Tray assembly
(shock absorber
attached)
(3)
Grid
Truss M3x6 x2
(1)
Leaf spring x4
Sems M3x6 x4
(1) Photo-timer
FR1H4014.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.12 XXXXX 4.13 Replacing the Tray Assembly
■ Removal Procedure
(2) Remove the grid and grid frame.
Remove two screws and pull out the grid by moving it between the stopper brackets.
Remove twelve screws, bring down the tray assembly, and remove the carbon plate
while releasing the bottom hooks.
(3)
Carbon plate
Sems M3x10 x12
Stopper brackets
Guide x2
(2)
Grid
Sems M3x6 x2
(2)
(2) Grid frame
Roller bearing x2
Sems M3x10 x2
FR1H1600.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Disconnect the MA1 connector (CNMA1) and cut the three ties. (7) Disconnect the ground wire.
T
ON
MA1 FR
(4)
Ties x3
(4) CNMA1 Tray

(7)
assembly
FR1H6413.EPS
Ground wire
BR M4x8 x1 FR1H6412.EPS
(5) Remove the right- and left-hand pinion gears.
(8) Remove the two hex socket head bolts that secure the tray assembly.
Tray assembly
(9) Lift the tray assembly up and out.
(5)
Shaft
support
(5)
Pinion gear (9)
Setscrew x2 Tray assembly
FR1H6416 EPS
(6) Remove the right- and left-hand tray support brackets.
Tray assembly
IP positioning unit
(8) Hex socket head bolt M4x10

(6)
Tray support
bracket
BR M4x8
FR1H6411.EPS
(8) Hex socket head bolt M4x10

FR1H6415.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Installation Procedure ◆ NOTE ◆

Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure. For pinion gear installation, perform the following steps.
(1) Set a pinion gear in position and then screw it down.
◆ NOTES ◆ (2) Install the other pinion gear.
• When installing the carbon plate, ensure that the leaf springs beneath the carbon plate are (3) Bring down the tray assembly so that the tray assembly edge comes into contact with
positioned forward of the brackets. the stay.
Tray assembly
Stay
Carbon plate
Leaf spring
Bracket FR1H6028.EPS
FR1H4030.EPS
(4) With the tray assembly edge brought into contact with the stay, tighten the two set-
• When installing the grid frame, make sure that the roller bearing for the MA3 arm is lodged in screws for the left-hand pinion gear.
the grid frame hole. After grid frame (Bucky bracket) installation, rotate the MA3 arm by hand (5) Rotate the pinion gears to make sure that the tray assembly smoothly moves.
to check that the grid frame smoothly moves without coming into contact with the SA3.
MA3
Bearing
SA3
Bucky
bracket FR1H6145.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(2) Remove the lead plate.

5. Path Changeover Conveyor
(3) Remove the shielding plate.
This section describes the procedures for removing and installing the path changeover (4) Disconnect the connectors (CNB1, DRV08B CN1 to CN3 and CN5 to CN12, and SH2).
conveyor and the procedures for inspecting and replacing the path changeover conveyor (5) Remove the two cable covers.
parts in need of periodic replacement. (6) Free the two cable clamps inside the board box.
(7) Remove the board box.
5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor Remove the four mounting screws, and then take out the board box while allowing it to
clear the cables. Also, free the two clamps located next to the board box.
■ Removal Procedure (5)
Cable cover
(1) Remove the following covers in order named. Sems M3x6 x2
(7) Clamps
• Exposure unit front cover (6) Cable clamp x2
• Exposure unit top cover (4) Connector
(3) Shielding plate (SH2) (5) Cable cover
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” BR M4x8 x3 Sems M3x6 x2
(7) Board box

BR M4x8 x4
HHS Label #2
(2)
BR M4x8
(4) CNB1
(2)
(2) Lead plate
BR M4x10 BR M4x12 x2
NK clamp
(4)
CN5
CN6 CN11 CN3

CN9
DRV08B
CN10
CN2
CN12 CN7
CN1
CN8
FR1H6032.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(8) Remove the four mounting screws. 5.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Positioning Unit Entry IP
(9) Remove the path changeover conveyor.
Sensor (SB1)
(8), (9) If any abnormality is found during inspection, replace sensor SB1 and then inspect the newly
Path changeover conveyor installed one.
BR M4x8 x4
(washer attached) ■ Inspection Procedure
“2.4 Inspecting the Sensors”
To check the SB1 Open/Close status, remove the lead cover and block the SB1 light path
with a piece of paper or other light shield.
(2) Remove the lead plate.
(3) Remove the frame cover.
Path changeover conveyor HHS Label #2
FR1H6033.EPS
(2)
BR M4x8
■ Installation Procedure
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the path changeover conveyor, screw it down while pressing it against
the right-hand and rear positioning brackets. (3)
BR M4x8
Top view (3)

(2) Frame cover
(2) Sems M3x6
BR M4x10
Lead plate
NK clamp
Truss M4x12 x2 FR1H6148.EPS
(4) Disconnect the connector (SB1).

(5) Remove the SB1.
FRONT
Path changeover conveyor HHS Label #2
Path changeover
conveyor
(4)
SB1
Sems M3x6 x2
(5)
Positioning Positioning Connector (SB1)
Spacer
bracket bracket
FR1H6115.EPS
FR1H6034.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Path Changeover Unit IP 5.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Confluence Unit IP Sensor
Sensor (SB2) (SB3)
If any abnormality is found during inspection, replace sensor SB2 and then inspect the newly If any abnormality is found during inspection, replace sensor SB3 and then inspect the newly

To check the SB2 open/close status, disconnect the SB2 with the connector left connected To check the SB3 open/close status, remove the lead cover and block the SB3 light path
and then block the SB2 light path with a piece of paper or other light shield. with a piece of paper or other light shield.

(1) Remove the following covers in order named. (1) Remove the following covers in order named.
• Exposure unit front cover • Exposure unit front cover
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover • Exposure unit right-hand side cover
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover • Exposure unit right-hand inner cover
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
(2) Disconnect the connector (SB2). (2) Disconnect the connector (SB3).
(3) Remove sensor SB2. (3) Remove sensor SB3.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
SB3
Sems M3x6 x2
Spacer
SB2 Spacer
Sems M3x6 x2 Connector (SB3)
Path changeover
conveyor
Path changeover Connector (SB2)
conveyor
FR1H6114.EPS
FR1H6113.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.5 XXXXX 5.6 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB1)

“5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor”
(2) Remove the connector (CNMB1) from the side plate.
(3) Remove motor MB1.
This requires removing two screws.
(4) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MB1.
When installing the MB1, engage the timing belt with the timing belt pulley.
CNMB1
Timing belt pulley
MB1
Sems M4x10 x2
E-ring
FR1H6112.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.7 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB2) 5.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MB3)

(1) Remove the path changeover conveyor. (1) Remove the path changeover conveyor.
“5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor” “5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor”
(2) Remove the connector (CNMB2) from the side plate. (2) Remove the connector (CNMB3) from the side plate.
(3) Remove motor MB2. (3) Remove motor MB3.
This requires removing two screws. This requires removing two screws.
(4) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MB2. (4) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MB3.
When installing the MB2, engage the timing belt with the timing belt pulley. When installing the MB3, engage the timing belt with the timing belt pulley.

(4) E-ring
(4) Timing belt pulley
(3) MB3
Sems M4x10 x2
(2) CNMB3
CNMB2
MB2
Sems M4x10 x2
E-ring FRIH6110.EPS
Timing belt pulley

FR1H6111.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.9 XXXXX 5.10 Replacing and Adjusting the Path Changeover Conveyor
Timing Belts
■ Timing Belt A
❍ Replacement procedure
(2) Remove the tensioner.
(3) Remove timing belt A.
(2) Stay
(2) Roller bearing

(3) Timing belt A
(2) Tensioner
(2) Roller bearing

(2) BR M4x30
FR1H6132.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Timing Belts B and C ■ Timing Belt D

No adjustments need be made after replacement. After replacement, be sure to complete the specified adjustment procedure.
❍ Replacement procedure ❍ Replacement procedure

(1) Remove the path changeover conveyor. (1) Remove the path changeover conveyor.
“5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor” “5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor”
(2) Remove timing belt pulley A and then timing belt B. (2) Loosen the tensioner.
(3) Loosen the tensioner. (3) Remove timing belt D.
(4) Remove timing belt C. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
(3) Tensioner
(2) Timing belt B
(2) Timing belt pulley A

(4)
(2) E-ring Tensioner
Timing belt C
FR1H6144.EPS

Timing belt D
◆ NOTE ◆ FR1H6133.EPS
When installing the timing belts, tighten the screws while pressing the tensioner nut
against the elongated hole edge surface. ❍ Adjustment procedure
Nut Elongated hole
edge surface “5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor”
(2) Measure the tension value of timing belt D.
When the belt is depressed with a load of 500 ± 50 g, the resulting belt displacement
must be 9 ± 1mm.
(3) Reposition the tensioner as needed until the timing belt tension is as specified above.
Timing belt B Timing belt D
MB3
500 ± 50g
Timing belt C 9 ± 1mm
Tensioner
MB2 FR1H6035.EPS
FR1H6036.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.11 Replacing the Rubber Rollers

(2)
Housing x2
No adjustments need be made after inspection. E-ring x2
Roller bearing x2
(2) Remove the E-rings that secure the rubber roller left-hand timing belt pulleys or hous-
ings.
(3) Remove the rubber roller right-hand gears. FR
ON
T
“3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume
(4) Remove the right- and left-hand housings and springs.
(4) Roller bearing x8
“3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume (2) (4) Housing x8
(5) As regards a rubber roller with a changeover guide, remove the spring mounting Timing belt pulley x5
E-ring x5 (4) Spring x5
screws (sems M3x16 x2) and changeover guide retaining screws (BR M4x20 x2).
(6) Remove the rubber rollers. (5)
Spring
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure. Sems M3x16
Spacer
(6)
Changeover guide attached rubber roller x1
BR M4x20 x2
Spacer x2
(6) Rubber roller x9

(5)
Spring
Sems M3x16
Spacer
T
ON
FR
(4) Roller bearing x10

(4)
(4) Housing x8 Housing x2
(4) Spring x5 E-ring x2
(3) Gear x10 FR1H6043.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CNF1-CNF9, and CNF11).

6. Erasure Conveyor
(3) Remove the two erasure conveyor mounting screws (BR M4x8).
This section describes the procedures for removing and installing the erasure conveyor and ◆ NOTE ◆
the procedures for inspecting and replacing the erasure conveyor parts in need of periodic When pulling out the erasure conveyor, exercise care so that the disconnected connec-
replacement. tors and cables are not caught. Also, position the cables in a gap between the bracket
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the following procedures are prepared on the presump- and frame to prevent them from being caught.
tion that the following covers are removed.
• Exposure unit front cover (4) Pull out the erasure conveyor.
(3)
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover HHS Label #2 BR M4x8
CNF8 (2)
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” Claw
CNF2
CNF9 CNF1
6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor CNF4
CNF5
◆ NOTE ◆ CNF6
Before removing the erasure conveyor, use the M-Utility to move an IP out of the erasure CNF7
conveyor or manually rotate the conveyor roller gear to advance an IP to the path changeover CNF11 CNF3
conveyor. When the power turns OFF, an IP usually lies astride the boundary between the
erasure conveyor and path changeover conveyor. Claw
Gap
(4)
Erasure conveyor
■ Pulling Out and Pushing In the Erasure Conveyor T (3) BR M4x8
ON
(1) Remove the cover bracket. FR FR1H1621.EPS
To push in the erasure conveyor, reverse the above steps.

Erasure conveyor ◆ NOTE ◆
To push in erasure conveyor, depress the upper and lower rail claws on the rear.
HHS Label #2
T (1)
ON
FR Cover bracket FR1H4025.EPS
Sems M3x6

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor ■ Removing and Installing the Lamp Assembly
(1) Pull out the erasure conveyor. (1) Pull out the erasure conveyor.
“■ Pulling Out and Pushing In the Erasure Conveyor” “■ Pulling Out and Pushing In the Erasure Conveyor”
(2) While depressing the rear rail claws (one each in the upper and lower sections), (2) Remove the two lamp assembly mounting screws.
separate the erasure conveyor from the railing. (3) Open the lamp assembly by rotating it about its claws.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Erasure conveyor
The timing belt, motor, fan, and other component parts of the erasure conveyor can be replaced after
erasure conveyor disassembly.
HHS Label #2 (3)

Claw
(2) BR M4x8
Claws
ONT
FR
(2) BR M4x8
(3) Lamp assembly FR1H1622.EPS
Claw (4) Remove the CNF8, CNF9, and CNF11 from the bracket.
To facilitate removal, you may loosen the two bracket retaining screws and remove the
Erasure conveyor bracket.
ON
T (5) Cut the tie that secures the CNF8 and CNF9.
FR FR1H6037.EPS
(6) Route the CNF8 and CNF9 through the hole in the side plate.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. (7) Lift the lamp assembly up and out.
◆ NOTE ◆ ◆ NOTE ◆
To achieve erasure conveyor reassembly, fit the erasure conveyor onto the railing while Move the removed lamp assembly out of the way and lay it on its side. If it is leaned
depressing the upper and lower rail claws on the rear. against anything, it may topple to damage its lamps.
Erasure conveyor
(6) Hole
(5) Tie
(4) CNF8
(4) CNF9
(7)
Lamp assembly
(4) CNF11
T Bracket
ON
FR
FR1H1625.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
6.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Entry IP Sensor 6.3 XXXXX
(SF1)
If sensor SF1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly
installed one.
■ Inspection Procedure
“2.4 Inspecting the Sensors”
To check the SF1 open/close status, disconnect the SF1 with the connector left connected
and then block the SF1 light path with a piece of paper or other light shield.
(1) Remove the cover bracket.
Erasure conveyor
HHS Label #2
T (1)
ON
FR Cover bracket FR1H4025.EPS
Sems M3x6
(2) Remove sensor SF1.

This requires removing two screws.
(3) Disconnect the connector (SF1) and then replace sensor SF1.
Spacer
(2)
SF1
Sems M3x6 x2
(3)
Connector
(SF1)
Erasure conveyor
T
ON
FR FR1H6120.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
6.4 Replacing the Thermostatic Switch (TSWF1/TSWF3/TSWF6) 6.5 Replacing the Temperature Control Switch (TSWF2/TSWF8)

(1) Pull out the erasure conveyor. (1) Pull out the erasure conveyor.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Pulling Out and Pushing In “6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Pulling Out and Pushing In
the Erasure Conveyor” the Erasure Conveyor”
(2) Disconnect the FASTON terminals (TSWF1 NC and COM terminals, TSWF3 NC and (2) Open the lamp assembly.
COM terminals, or TSWF6 NC and COM terminals). “6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing
(3) Remove the TSWF1, TSWF3, or TSWF6. the Lamp Assembly”
(3) Lift the associated filter up and out of its position.
TSWF3 NC When replacing the TSWF2, remove the filter on the erasure conveyor side. For
Washer TSWF3
Sems M3x6 x2
TSWF8 replacement, remove the filter on the lamp assembly side.
TSWF3 COM (4) Remove the erasure lamp that is located in front of the TSWF2 or TSWF8.
TSWF1 NC Level the erasure lamp to disengage it from the leaf spring and then pull it out of the
socket.
TSWF1
Sems M3x6 x2
TSWF1 COM CAUTION

Do not touch the erasure lamps immediately after the machine is stopped, because
you may suffer a burn due to their high temperature.
Erasure
TSWF6 COM conveyor
TSWF6 NC
T
TSWF6 ON
FR
Sems M3x6 x2
FR1H6117.EPS
(3) Filter
(3) Filter
◆ NOTE ◆ Erasure conveyor
When installing the thermostatic switch, ensure that the cable is not positioned in the
TSWF8
IP conveyance path. If the cable is in the IP conveyance path, an IP jam occurs. TSWF2
Top view (2)
Cable BR M4x8 x2
TSWF3 TSWF1
(2)
Lamp assembly
IP conveyance path side IP conveyance path side T
ON
FR
(4)
Erasure lamp
TSWF6 Leaf spring
OK NG FR1H6193.EPS
Socket
FR 1H6 526 .EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(5) Remove the leaf spring that retains the TSWF2 or TSWF8. 6.6 Replacing the Initialization Temperature Control Switch
◆ NOTE ◆ (TSWF5)
Exercise care not to deform the leaf spring.
(6) Disconnect the FASTON terminals (TSWF2 NC and COM terminals or TSWF8 NC and
COM terminals). ■ Replacement Procedure
(7) Remove the TSWF2 or TSWF8. (1) Pull out the erasure conveyor.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Pulling Out and Pushing In
Lamp assembly the Erasure Conveyor”
Erasure conveyor
(2) Open the lamp assembly.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing
the Lamp Assembly”
(3) Lift the filter up and out.
(4) Remove the two central erasure lamps.
Slant the erasure lamps to disengage them from the leaf springs and then pull them
out of the sockets.
T
ON
FR
CAUTION
When installing the filter, position its bottom bend inside the erasure conveyor. If not,
an IP jam may occur.
Leaf spring
(5) Remove the TSWF5.
Sems M3x6 x2
Leaf spring
(6) Disconnect the FASTON terminals (TSWF5 NC and COM).
Sems M3x6 x2
TSWF8 COM
TSWF5 NC
TSWF2 COM
Washer
Washer
TSWF8 Washer Spacer
TSWF8
Sems M3x6 x2 Sems M3x6 x2
TSWF8 NC TSWF5
Sems M3x16 x2
TSWF2 NC
FR1H6116.EPS
TSWF5 COM
T
ON
FR
CAUTION Erasure conveyor
FR1H6118.EPS
When installing the filter, position its bottom bend inside the erasure conveyor or lamp
assembly. If this step is not completed, an IP jam may occur.
CAUTION
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the filter, position its bottom bend inside the erasure conveyor. If not,
After TSWF2/TSWF8 installation, make sure that the lamp is in contact with the
an IP jam may occur.
TSWF2/TSWF8.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
6.7 Replacing the Illumination Failure Sensors (LSDN1-LSDN8) 6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-
LAMP8)
If any erasure lamp is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the
■ Replacement Procedure newly installed one.
If an illumination failure sensor (LSDN1-LSDN8) abnormality occurs, replace the power
supply unit (JPS-7). CAUTION
“13.2 Replacing the JPS-7” Do not touch the erasure lamps immediately after the machine is stopped, because you may
suffer a burn due to their high temperature.
6.8 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MF1)
No adjustments need be made after replacement. ■ Inspection Procedure
■ Replacement Procedure “2.4 Inspecting the Sensors, ■ Details of Inspection Procedures, ● Starting the M-
(1) Remove the lamp assembly. Utility”
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing the (2) Sequentially choose “4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY” and “1. ERASURE LAMP TEST”.
Lamp Assembly” ➮ The display then shows an erasure lamp number and test result.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE If any erasure lamp is abnormal, replace it.
You can replace the MF1 even if the lamp assembly is open (without being removed). However, (3) Exit the M-Utility.
if you open the lamp assembly with the erasure conveyor removed, the lamp assembly may
topple because of imbalance. ■ Replacement Procedure
(1) Pull out the erasure conveyor.
(2) Depress the rail claws and remove the erasure conveyor. “6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Pulling Out and Pushing In
(3) Cut the two cable ties. the Erasure Conveyor”
(4) Disconnect the connector (CNMF1). (2) Open the lamp assembly.
(5) Remove motor MF1. “6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing
This requires removing two screws. the Lamp Assembly”
(6) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MF1. (3) Lift the associated filter up and out of its position.
When replacing an erasure lamp between LAMP1 and LAMP4, remove the filter on the
erasure conveyor side. To replace an erasure lamp between LAMP5 and LAMP8,
remove the filter on the lamp assembly side.
(6) E-ring
(3) Filter
(3) Filter
(4) CNMF1 Erasure conveyor
(5)
T
MF1 ON
FR (2)
Sems M4x10 x2 BR M4x8 x2
(3) Ties Erasure conveyor
FR1H6139.EPS
White
reflection
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure. plate White
(2)
reflection
◆ NOTE ◆ Lamp assembly plate
T
ON
When installing the MF1, engage the timing belt pulley with the timing belt. FR
FR1H1616.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Remove the erasure lamp. 6.10 Replacing the Erasure Cooling Fans (FANF1-FANF4,
Slant the erasure lamps to disengage them from the leaf springs and then pull them
out of the sockets.
FANH6-FANH8)
White reflection plate
Erasure conveyor ■ FANF1-FANF4 Replacement Procedure
(1) Remove the erasure conveyor.
Lamp assembly
White reflection plate

“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor”
(2) Remove the two fan mounting screws.
(3) Disconnect the fan connector.
(4) Replace the fan (FANF1-FANF4).
T
ON Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
FR
Erasure lamp
Connector
Leaf
spring
FAN F1 – 4
Sems M3x20 x2 each
Socket
FR1H4010.EPS

Erasure conveyor
CAUTIONS T
ON
FR
• When installing the erasure lamps, do not deform the leaf springs by spreading them
out. FR1H6119.EPS
• When installing the filter, position its bottom bend inside the erasure conveyor. If not,
an IP jam may occur. ◆ NOTE ◆
Ensure that the connectors and cables are not positioned rearward of the bracket. If
they are positioned in such a manner, they will be caught by the frame when you return
the erasure conveyor to the machine.
Filter
Filter
Erasure conveyor
Erasure
filter
Lamp assembly
T
ON
FR FR1H1618.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ FANH6-FANH8 Replacement Procedure 6.11 Replacing the Erasure Conveyor Timing Belts
(1) Remove the following covers.
• Exposure unit front cover No adjustments need be made after replacement.
(1) Remove the lamp assembly.
(2) Remove the two FANH6-FANH8 mounting screws.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing the
(3) Disconnect the FANH6-FANH8 connectors. Lamp Assembly”
(4) Replace the FANH6-FANH8.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
You can replace the MF1 even if the lamp assembly is open (without being removed). However,
if you open the lamp assembly with the erasure conveyor removed, the lamp assembly may
topple because of imbalance.
(3)
Connector (2) Depress the rail claws and remove the erasure conveyor.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Pulling Out and Pushing In
the Erasure Conveyor”
(4)
FANH8 (3) Remove the tensioner and then timing belt A.
(4) Remove the MF1.
(5) Remove timing belt B.
T Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
ON
FR
(2) (4) MF1
Sems M3x20 x2 Sems M4x10 x2
(3) Stay
(3) Roller bearing
HHS Label #2
(2) Tensioner
T
(5)
ON Timing belt B
FR FR1H6074.EPS
(3)
◆ NOTE ◆ Sems FR
ON
When installing the FANH6 through FANH8, make sure that their connectors and M4x25 T
T
cables are not positioned rearward of the FANH6 through FANH8. If they are ON Erasure
FR
positioned in such a manner, the connectors or cables come into contact with the (3) Timing belt A conveyor
FR1H6121.EPS
blades, so that the FANH6-8 stop rotating.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
6.12 Replacing the Rubber Rollers 6.13 Replacing the Sockets

■ Replacement Procedure ■ Replacement Procedure (Erasure Conveyor (Front) Side)

(1) Remove the erasure conveyor. (1) Remove the four erasure lamps on the erasure conveyor side.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor” “6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-LAMP8)”
(2) Remove the left-hand E-ring and then the timing belt pulley. (2) Remove the bracket.
(3) Remove the two gears, two housings, one spring, and two roller bearings from the (3) Remove fans FANF1 to FANF4.
right-hand side. (4) Unscrew the sockets.
“3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume (5) Remove the CNF7 and then the sockets.
(4) Remove the bracket. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
(5) Pull the rubber rollers out of the right-hand hole.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure. Bracket
Sems M3x6 x6
Timing belt
(2)
Timing belt FANF1 – FANF4
pulley Sems M3x20 x2 each
Spring Nut plate
Housing
Roller bearing
CNF7
(4)
Bracket
BR M4x8 x4 Erasure conveyor
(3) Roller bearing
(3) Housing T
ON
(3) Spring FR
(5) Rubber roller Socket x4
(3) Gear Sems M3x10 x1 each FR1H6044.EPS
T
ON
FR
FR1H6045.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure (Lamp Assembly (Back) Side) BLANK PAGE

(1) Remove the four erasure lamps on the lamp assembly side.
“6.9 Inspecting and Replacing the Erasure Lamps (LAMP1-LAMP8)”
(2) Remove the lamp assembly from the erasure conveyor.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor, ■ Removing and Installing the
Lamp Assembly”
(3) Remove the intake duct from the lamp assembly.
(4) Remove the screws from the four sockets.
(5) Remove the four sockets.
Lamp assembly
BR M4x8 x2
(3) Intake duct
Sems M3x6 x4
CNF8, 9
(4), (5)
CNF11 Socket x4
Sems M3x6 x2 each
FR1H1623.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(5) Pull out the scanner unit.

7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit
■ Pullout Procedure
(3) BR M4x8 x2
CAUTION (2) CNZ12, 17
(2) HHS Label #2
When servicing a board, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not CNZ11, 15
(4)
grounded, the static buildup on your body may damage electronic parts on the board. Light-shielding
bracket
(2) CNZ13, 18 Screw x2
◆ NOTES ◆ (2) CNZ3
(2) CNZ16
(2)FGZ5
(2)
When pulling out the scanner unit, exercise care so that the disconnected connectors and HHS Label #2 (2) CND1 PMT08C CN2
cables are not caught.
(2) PMR08C
CN2
• Exposure unit front cover (2) CNZ1, 2
CND2 (2)
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover FG FG
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover CNZ4

(3) BR M4x8 x2
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CNZ11 to CNZ13, CNZ15, CNZ17, and CNZ18, and
PMR08C CN2, CND1, CNZ1 to CNZ3, and CNZ16, and PMT08C CN2, CND2, and
CNZ4) and ground wire (FGZ5).
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The CND2 and CNZ4 can be removed with increased ease when you slightly pull out the
scanner unit in step (5).
(5) Scanner unit
(3) Remove the four screws that secure the scanner unit.
(4) Lower the light-shielding bracket of the before-erasure conveyor. ON
T
FR Claws
FR4H1624.EPS
Loosen two screws and then lower the light-shielding bracket.
■ Pushing-in Procedure
To push in the scanner unit, reverse the pullout procedure.
◆ NOTES ◆
• When putting the scanner unit back in its position, push it inward while depressing the two
rail claws.
• Push the light-shielding bracket against the upper end, otherwise light-shielding inad-
equacy results.
• When tightening the scanner unit retaining screws, ensure that they secure the PMT08C
and PMR08C board cable terminals (FG) as well. If the cable terminals are not properly
secured, an imaging failure may occur.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Starting and Exiting the M-Utility

8. Scanning Optics Unit
Since the instructions set forth in this section frequently prompt you to start and exit the M-
Utility, the details of the procedures for starting and exiting the M-Utility are not given in
8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width individual procedure descriptions.
Make main scanning direction format adjustments in the order indicated below. Perform the following procedures whenever they have to be completed.
(1) Initializing the machine shipment control format data

● Starting the M-Utility
(2) Entering the read width adjustment value and read start position adjustment value
(3) Verifying the adjustment results
If the adjustment results are abnormal or the adjustments need be made with increased
accuracy, fine-tune the format. After completion of format fine adjustment, verify the adjust-
ment results again. • Console main switch and sub-switch
(2) Touch the U-Utility button.
CAUTION ➮ The U-Utility screen opens.
After completion of read start position and read width adjustments, back up the scanner (3) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the U-Utility screen.
shipment control data.
➮ The M-Utility starts.
Routine screen U-Utility screen
DELETE UNPROCESSED
REOUTPUT IMAGE SET DATE/TIME
IMAGE
USER UTILITY
QUIT
IP 5501
U-Utility button : Area to be touched
M-Utility screen
0. QUIT
A B C
3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY D E F
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
4 5 6
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
>
0 . SP
DEL BS ENT
Caps
IP 5501
FR4B4020.EPS
● Exiting the M-Utility

Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” until you exit the M-Utility.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Initializing the Machine Shipment Control Format Data (4) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “6. FORMAT”, and “3. PIXEL ADJUST”.
The machine shipment control format data must be initialized after format-related setting (5) Enter the read start position adjustment value and then press the [ENT] key.
changes or scanning optics unit or its internal parts replacement. Be sure to enter the associated numerical value that is indicated on the label attached
(1) Start the M-Utility. to a lateral surface of the new scanning optics unit.
“■ Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” ➮ The read start position is then adjusted.
(2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “6. FORMAT”, “1. DEFAULT”, and “1. (6) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”, and “3.
PIXEL AND FREQ”. SAVE FORMAT DATA”.
➮ The machine shipment control format data is then initialized. ➮ The adjusted read width data and read start position data are then saved on the
hard disk.
■ Entering the Read Width Adjustment Value and Read Start Position Adjustment
Value ■ Verifying the Adjustment Results
FREQ Have on hand two 150 mm steel rules, and measure their outside dimensions.
(-) (+) Enter the read width adjustment (1) With the steel rules placed on the exposure unit front cover, expose the entire IP
value (which is expressed as surface to about 1mR of radiation.
a percent to specify the increase/
decrease in the current read width). (2) Using “Sensitivity” on the test menu of the console, record an image and generate it.
(3) Run the following checks on the resultant output film.
• Measure the dimensions of the steel rule image. Check that the image length error
in the main scanning direction does not differ from the following correction value by
more than ±1 mm.
Correction value = 150 (mm) x (1 + 23.5/d)
(-) (+) d (mm) = distance between X-ray tube and exposure unit front cover
Enter the read start position adjustment value (which is
obtained by converting an output image dimensional • Check that the right and left white blank portions of the image are not greater than 2
PIXEL
value to its IP surface equivalent) by specifying mm as measured on the IP surface.
the number of pixels (1 pixel = 0.1 mm).
FR1B8015.EPS
(4) Conclude the read width and read start position adjustment process.
(1) Start the M-Utility. The procedures set forth under “■ Fine-Tuning the Read Width and Read Start
“■ Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” Position” must be performed only when the output film is abnormal or the adjustment
results are outside the specified range.
(2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “6. FORMAT”, and “2. FREQ ADJUST”.
(3) Enter the read width adjustment value and then press the [ENT] key.
Be sure to enter the associated numerical value that is indicated on the label attached
to a lateral surface of the new scanning optics unit.
➮ The read width is then adjusted.
Scanning optics unit Measurement value of reading width

(scanning length)
839Yxxxx
No.
Value of read start position

(number of invalid pixels)
Serial No. FR1H6046.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Fine-Tuning the Read Width and Read Start Position” 8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections
The procedures for fine-tuning the read width and read start position are described below.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
After completion of read width and read start position fine adjustments, proceed as directed
under “■ Verifying the Adjustment Results”. The shading/sensitivity correction function includes the capability to provide reflectance variation
compensation of individual polygon mirror faces of the scanning optics unit.
◆ NOTE ◆
After completion of adjustments, be sure to save data onto the hard disk by sequentially Shading and sensitivity corrections must be made in the order indicated below.
choosing “MAINTENANCE UTILITY”, “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”,
and “3. SAVE FORMAT DATA”. [1] Photo-timer (optional) and grid removal
[2] Shading correction data recording initial setup
[3] IP entire surface exposure
● Adjusting the read width [4] IP reading in erasure mode
(1) Start the M-Utility. [5] Shading and sensitivity corrections
[6] Correction result verification
“■ Starting and Exiting the M-Utility”
[7] Photo-timer (optional) and grid installation
(2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “6. FORMAT”, and “2. FREQ ADJUST”.
If the correction results are abnormal or an increased degree of sensitivity correction accu-
(3) Enter the correction value and then press the [ENT] key.
racy is called for, make [8] Machine shipment control sensitivity correction. After machine
The input data values are as follows. shipment control sensitivity correction, excute [6] Correction result verification again.
• Increasing the current read width by N% (0 < N ≤ 5) (for image enlargement)
• Decreasing the current read width by N% (-5 < N ≤ 0) (for image reduction) CAUTION
After completion of shading and sensitivity corrections, back up scanner machine shipment
● Adjusting the read start position control data.

For shading and sensitivity corrections, use the following jigs, tools, and external hookup
“■ Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” devices.
(2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “6. FORMAT”, and “3. PIXEL ADJUST”. • IP (clean and free from flaws)
(3) Enter the correction value. • X-ray source
The input data values are as follows. Note that 10 pixels correspond to a length of 1 • Dosimeter (for measuring the amount of radiation used for IP entire surface expo-
mm as measured on the IP surface. sure)
• Increasing the current number of invalid pixels by N pixels (0 < N ≤ 999) • ULP or LPII
Value N: Moves the image leftward with reference to the image border. [1] Photo-timer (Optional) and Grid Removal
• Decreasing the current number of invalid pixels by N pixels (0 < N ≤ 999) Before making shading/sensitivity corrections, remove the photo-timer and grid from the IP
Value -N: Moves the image rightward with reference to the image border. positioning unit.
“4.11 Removing and Installing the Carbon Plate”
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The MP (number of invalid pixels) value N must be set so that the corrected value is within the [2] Shading Correction Data Recording Initial Setup
range of 40 to 190. Therefore, if the MP value is 150, the value N can be up to 30 for increase (1) Start the M-Utility.
or up to 90 for decrease. To confirm the MP value, use a menu that appears when you sequen-
tially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”, and “4. DISPLAY DATA”. “8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Starting and Exiting the
M-Utility”
If the selected setting is outside the specified range, an error occurs. If an error (2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY”, and “1.
occurs, check whether the procedures have been properly executed and the parts are REC MODE”.
correctly connected. ➮ The machine is then placed in a mode for shading correction data recording.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The REC MODE is effective for only one reading operation.
(3) Exit the M-Utility to return to the routine mode.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
[3] IP Entire Surface Exposure (1) Start the M-Utility.

(1) Select the 17x17 or 17x14 (Landscape) IP size selection key for the machine. “8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Starting and Exiting the
M-Utility”
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
(2) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY”, and “2.
If a key other than the 17 x 17 key or 17 x 14 key is selected, the message "The data is re- CALCULATION”.
corded with incorrect size" appears on the display.
(3) Choose one menu option between 1 and 4.
You should normally choose “1. SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY”. You can
(2) Expose the entire IP surface to 0.5 to 9.99 mR (recommended value: 1 mR) of radia-
choose one menu option between 2 and 4 depending on the purpose.
tion.
• If sensitivity correction is not performed
Measure the amount of radiation with a dosimeter. Also, set the tube voltage to 80 kV. 2. SHADING AND POLYGON
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE Uses the default data for shading correction and makes polygon and sensitivity
The X-ray radiation amount is the one that prevails at the IP center. However, the dosimeter corrections in the usual manner.
cannot be positioned at the IP center at the time of entire IP surface exposure. Therefore, • When making polygon corrections only
measure the amounts of radiation at the IP center and in the IP periphery beforehand to 3. POLYGON ONLY
calculate the ratio between them, and then determine the correction dose value according to
• When making sensitivity corrections only
the calculated ratio.
4. SENSITIVITY ONLY
(4) When menu option 1, or 4 is chosen, enter the corrected dose value. In the other
(3) Determine the correction dose value.
situations, skip to the next step.
Round the dosimeter reading (in mR) to two decimal places and note it down. (5) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”, “1. SAVE
[4] IP Reading in Erasure Mode SHADING AND POLYGON DATA”.
➮ The corrected shading and polygon data are then saved onto the hard disk.
Immediately after IP entire surface exposure, press the IP erasure key on the console to
initiate IP conveyance. (6) After completion of sensitivity correction, choose “2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA”.
➮ The corrected sensitivity data is then stored on the hard disk.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
(7) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY”, “3. SHAD-
When peripheral equipment is connected to the machine, you may perform a normal reading ING AND POLYGON CORRECTION”, and “2. ON”.
conveyance operation.
➮ The shading data then becomes effective.
[5] Shading and Sensitivity Corrections
◆ NOTE ◆
If a shading correction limit is exceeded, an error occurs. When such an error occurs, perform
one of the following remedial procedures.
• If the screen contains the following white blank portion, fine-tune the number of invalid pixels.
“8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Removing and
Installing the Lamp Assembly”
FR1H6048.EPS
• Check the X-ray exposure and radiation field for abnormalities.

• Check whether the light-collecting guide is improperly positioned or soiled.
“9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
[6] Correction Result Verification (2) Start the M-Utility.

“8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Starting and Exiting the
● Dual-surface light gathering check M-Utility”
(1) Expose the entire IP surface to 0.5 to 9.99 mR of radiation. (3) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY” and “11. BOTH ADDITIONAL”.
Measure the amount of radiation with a dosimeter. Also, set the tube voltage to 80 kV. (4) Choose “1. FRONT ONLY”.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ➮ The system is then set for front-surface light gathering only.
The X-ray radiation amount is the one that prevails at the IP center. However, the dosimeter If you choose “2. BACK ONLY”, the system is set for back-surface light gathering only.
cannot be positioned at the IP center at the time of entire IP surface exposure. Therefore, (5) Exit the M-Utility and return to the routine mode.
measure the amounts of radiation at the IP center and in the IP periphery beforehand to
calculate the difference between them, and then determine the correction dose value according (6) Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation.
to the calculated difference. (7) Using “Sensitivity” on the console’s test menu, record an image and generate it.
(2) Determine the correction dose value. (8) Repeat steps (2) through (7) for back-surface light gathering.
Note down the value. (9) Run the following checks on the output films derived from front-surface light gathering
(3) Using “Sensitivity” on the test menu of the console, record an image and generate it. and back-surface light gathering.
(4) Run the following checks on the output film. • Check that the steel rule is imaged.
• Check that the shading in the main scanning direction is corrected. • Check that the S value prevailing on the film surface is within the following range.
• Check that the polygon surfaces do not vary in the subscanning direction. 182 ≤ S value x correction dose value ≤ 220
• Check that the S value on the film is within the following range. If any image abnormality is encountered, locate and eliminate the cause.
182 ≤ S value x correction dose value ≤ 220 “11. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
(10) Verify the film output and then remove the IP that was used for shading corrections.
● Single-surface light gathering check
“2.1 Removing, Loading, Inspecting, and Cleaning the IPs”
Perform the following steps to conduct light gathering for one surface at a time (front and (11) Conclude the shading and sensitivity correction process.
back surfaces) and check that the resulting output film is normal.
If the S value is outside the range specified above or if the sensitivity needs to be
◆ NOTE ◆ corrected with higher accuracy, perform the procedure set forth under “[8] Machine
Even if a single-surface light-gathering process is abnormal, no associated error occurs in Shipment Control Sensitivity Correction”.
the shading/sensitivity correction process. After shading/sensitivity corrections, therefore, be
sure to run a single-surface light-gathering check. [7] Photo-timer (Optional) and Grid Installation
Mount the photo-timer and grid in the IP positioning unit.
(1) Attach a steel rule to the exposure unit front cover.
The steel rule must be positioned outside the 10" x 12" area on the exposure unit front
cover.
10" x 12" area
Attach
Steel rule
FR1H6017.EP

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
[8] Machine Shipment Control Sensitivity Correction BLANK PAGE

◆ NOTE ◆
When making machine shipment control sensitivity corrections to adjust the sensitivity differ-
ences among a number of readers, use the same IP. It is also necessary to make sure before-
hand that the dosage does not vary when a number of exposures are made at the same output
level. If the dosage varies, you cannot make machine shipment control sensitivity corrections.
(1) Expose the entire IP surface to 0.5 to 9.99 mR of radiation.

(3) Verify the film output and then take out the IP that was used for shading correction.
(4) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY”, and “4.
SENSITIVITY DATA”.
(5) Enter the current value and then the desired correction value.
➮ The correction value is then set.
(6) Generate a film output to finalize the correction result.
(7) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”, and “2. SAVE
SENSITIVITY DATA”.
➮ The corrected sensitivity data is then saved onto the hard disk.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit (5) Note down the main scanning length data and invalid pixel data that are written on the
lateral label on the new scanning optics unit.
This main scanning length data and invalid pixel data will be used to adjust the main
CAUTIONS scanning direction format.
• Do not remove the scanning optics unit cover. (6) Remove the polygon driver cover and disconnect the ground wire (FG).
• Handle the scanning optics unit gently, exercising care not to shock it. (7) Disconnect the connectors (polygon driver board connectors POL-DRV-CN1 and
• Never put your finger into the emission port in the bottom of the scanning optics unit. CNZ14).
• When removing or installing the scanning optics unit, exercise care not to drop screws into
the subscanning unit. Loosely retain the polygon driver cover that was removed in Step (6).
• When servicing a board, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not (8) Remove the four screws that secure the scanning optics unit.
grounded, the static buildup on your body may damage electronic parts on the board. (9) Disconnect the ground wire (FGZ4).
Leave the ground wire screw attached to the scanning optics unit.
■ Removal Procedure (10) Gently take out the scanning optics unit while exercising care not to shock it.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. To remove the scanning optics unit, lift it upward and then move it rearward.
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” (9) FGZ4
Sems M3x6
CAUTIONS
• Do not disconnect LDD08C board connectors CN2, CN3 and CN4. If they are
disconnected, the LD protection feature does not work so that the LD may become
defective.
• Do not touch the printed wiring patterns or ICs on the LDD08C board.
(8), (10)
(2) Disconnect connector LDD08C CN1. Scanning optics unit
BR M5x20 x2
(3) Remove the three special screws that secure the light source unit. Special screw Ø10x69 x2
(4) Gently remove the light source unit while exercising care not to shock it.
To remove the scanning optics unit, lift it upward and then move it rearward.
T
ON (6) FG, screw
FR
Light (3)
source Special screw Scanner unit
unit Ø10x69 x2
HHS Label #2
(7) POL-DRV-CN1
Guides
(7) CNZ14
(3)
Special screw
Ø10x69
(6)
Polygon driver cover
Scanning BR M4x8
optics unit
T
ON FR4H6014.EPS
FR Scanner unit
HHS Label #2
CN4 CN3 CN2
Light
source
unit LDD08C board
(2) [Pullout] CN1
FR1H6013.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Installation Procedure ■ Verification after Scanning Optics Unit Replacement

◆ NOTES ◆ (1) Install all covers.
• When installing the light source unit, set its guides in position and then properly position it by (2) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below.
pressing it against the scanning optics unit positioning pins. • Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
• When installing the scanning optics unit, turn the four screws finger-tight and properly position
it by aligning it with the two positioning pins of the subscanning unit.
• When the scanning optics unit is supplied as a service part, it does not contain the light • Console main switch and sub-switch
source unit. When replacing the scanning optics unit, transfer the existing light source unit to Verify that the machine normally starts up.
the newly installed scanning optics unit.
(3) Adjust the main scanning direction format.
“8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width”
(1) Install the scanning optics unit by reversing its removal procedure.
(4) Make shading and sensitivity corrections.
“8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections”
POL-DRV-CN1 (5) Generate an image output to check for scanner control abnormalities.
Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation. Using “Sensitivity” on the test
CNZ14 menu, record an image and generate it. Check the resulting film image for scanner
Positioning Positioning control abnormalities such as a format discrepancy or shading problem detrimental to
pin pin diagnostics.
Press
Press
HHS Label #2
T
ON
FR FR1H6015.EPS
(2) Install the light source unit by reversing its removal procedure.
Light source unit
Press the light

source unit Guides
against the
positioning pins
Positioning pin Positioning pin

Press
Light source unit left-right

positioning is accomplished
by lodging the positioning pin
in the V-shaped groove.
Positioning pin
FR1H6016.EPS
(3) Complete the verification procedure that is to be performed after scanning optics unit
replacement.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit (6) With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switch
(SH1).
If the covers are removed, the interlock feature works to prevent the laser from turning
■ Inspecting the LDD08C Board ON. Therefore, you have to block the SH1 light path with tape or other light shield.
Inspect the SCN08C board before inspecting the LDD08A board.
“8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board” CAUTION
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON
CAUTIONS the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged.
• Do not disconnect LDD08C board connectors CN2, CN3 and CN4. If they are disconnected,
the LD protection feature does not work so that the LD may become defective. (7) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below.
• Handle the LDD08C board gently while exercising care not to shock the scanning optics unit. • Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
• When replacing the light source unit or servicing the boards, be sure to ground your body with • Machine main body circuit breaker
a wristband. If your body is not grounded, the static electricity built up on your body may • Console main switch and sub-switch
damage electronic parts on boards.
• When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the ➮ The console panel reads “HV-OFF”.
machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. (8) Touch the U-Utility button.
➮ The U-Utility screen opens.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (9) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the console panel.
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” ➮ The M-Utility starts.
(2) Make sure that LDD08C board connectors CN1 to CN4 are locked. (10) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “3. LASER”, and “2. ON”.
If they are not locked, properly connect and lock them. • When the process normally ends
(3) Push the scanner unit into its position by reversing its pullout procedure. The LDD08C board is normal as far as the machine normally starts up.
(4) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board. • When the process abnormally ends (the LD down error or LD warning error occurs)
Remove one mounting screw and pull out the SCN08C board. Replace the light source unit.
S1HVO (11) Turn OFF the machine.
N
(12) Turn ON the high-voltage switch.
(13) Remove the tape or other light shield from the SH1.
OFF position
S1 SCN08C board
SCR08C board
C94 CN1 C33

FR1H6002.EPS
(5) Make sure that SCN08C board connector CN1 is locked.

If it is not locked, properly connect and lock it.
CAUTION
When connecting connector CN1, do not touch capacitor C33 or C94.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure (5) Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.

◆ NOTE ◆
CAUTIONS
When installing the light source unit, set its guides in position and then properly posi-
• Do not disconnect LDD08C board connectors CN2, CN3 and CN4. If they are disconnected, tion it by pressing it against the two scanning optics unit positioning pins.
the LD protection feature does not work so that the LD may become defective.
Light source unit
• Handle the light source unit gently while exercising care not to shock it.
• When replacing the light source unit or servicing the boards, be sure to ground your body with
a wristband. If your body is not grounded, the static electricity built up on your body may Press the light
damage electronic parts on boards. source unit Guides
against the
positioning pins
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” Positioning pin Positioning pin
Press
(2) Disconnect LDD08C board connector CN1.
Light source unit left-right
(3) Remove the three special screws that secure the light source unit. positioning is accomplished
by lodging the positioning pin
(4) Gently remove the light source unit. in the V-shaped groove.
To remove the light source unit, lift it upward and then move it rearward.
Positioning pin
Light (3) FR1H6016.EPS
source Special screw

unit Ø10x69 x2 (6) Complete the verification procedure that is to be performed after light source unit
Guides replacement.
■ Verification after Light Source Unit Replacement

(3)
Special screw CAUTION
Ø10x69
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the ma-
chine with any cover removed or incompletely closed, you may become exposed to laser
radiation.
T
ON
FR Scanner unit (1) Turn ON the machine.
HHS Label #2
Verify that the machine normally starts up.
CN4 CN3 CN2
If the machine does not normally start up, run the self-diagnostic check program that is
Light offered by the scanner utility.
source
unit LDD08C board (2) Check for improper image performance.
“3.2 Checking for Image Problems” in Preventive Maintenance Volume
(2) [Pullout] CN1
FR1H6013.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly (5) Check that polygon driver board connector POL-DRV-CN1 and SCN08C board con-
nector CN3 are properly locked.
If the polygon assembly is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the If they are not locked, properly connect and lock them.
newly installed one.
CAUTIONS POL-DRV-CN1
• Do not touch the printed wiring patterns or ICs on boards.
• To ensure that no dust enters the scanning optics unit, you should perform scanning optics
unit cover removal in a room that is not dusty. If you do not perform any servicing procedure
while the scanning optics unit is uncovered, place clear film over the scanning optics unit or
take other appropriate measures to avoid dust entry. Scanning optics unit
• When performing any procedure with the scanning optics unit uncovered, wear a mask so as
not to inadvertently spit on the inner parts.
• Handle the scanning optics unit gently while exercising care not to shock it.
• When servicing boards, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not
grounded, the static electricity built up on your body may damage electronic parts on boards.
• Never touch the optical lenses or mirrors.
■ Checking for Polygon Assembly Abnormalities HHS Label #2
● No error should occur during polygon self-diagnostic checkout.

The self-diagnostic check is automatically executed when the machine is initialized
upon startup. FR1H6049.EPS
(6) With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switch
● No image abnormalities should be encountered when an image is read.
(SH1).
Read an IP onto which a scale has been projected, and check for image abnormalities If the covers are removed, the interlock feature works to prevent the laser from turning
such as jitter, instabilities, and irregularities.Also, check that error 2542 (polygon ON. Therefore, you have to block the SH1 light path with tape or other light shield.
abnormality 2) does not occur during image reading.
CAUTION
■ Checking for the Necessity for Polygon Assembly Replacement
the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged.
• Exposure unit front cover (7) Start the M-Utility.
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover “2.4 Inspecting the Sensors, ■ Details of Inspection Procedures, ● Starting the M-
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover Utility”
(3) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board. (8) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “2. POLYGON”, and “2. ON”.
“2.2 Turning the High-voltage Switch OFF and ON”
(4) Inspect the SCN08C board.
“8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(9) Check whether the D13 (POLLOCK) on the SCN08C board is illuminated. ■ Replacement Procedure
• When the D13 is illuminated
Turn the polygon OFF and then back ON. When the D13 remains illuminated without
CAUTIONS
regard to the polygon ON/OFF status, the polygon assembly is normal. If the D13 is • Do not disconnect LDD08C board connectors CN2, CN3 and CN4. If they are disconnected,
extinguished when the polygon is turned ON, it is conceivable that the polygon the LD protection feature does not work so that the LD may become defective.
assembly may be defective. In such an instance, replace the polygon assembly. • When servicing boards, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not
• When the D13 is extinguished
• To ensure that no dust enters the scanning optics unit, you should perform scanning optics
It is conceivable that the polygon assembly may be defective. Therefore, replace the unit cover removal in a room that is not dusty. If you do not perform any servicing procedure
polygon assembly. while the scanning optics unit is uncovered, place clear film over the scanning optics unit or
take other appropriate measures to avoid dust entry.
SCN08C board
(1) Remove the scanning optics unit.
D13
“8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit”
SCR08C board
(2) Remove the scanning optics unit cover.
(3) Remove the polygon cover.
(4) Remove the polygon driver retaining screws (M3x6 double-sems, x2).
FR1H6005.EPS (5) Remove the polygon retaining screws (M3x10 double-sems, x4).
(6) Peel the dustproof sponge away from the cable outlet, lift the dustproof rubber belt,
(10) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “2. POLYGON”, and “1. OFF”
and remove the partitioning plate.
➮ The D13 on the SCN08C board goes off.
(7) Cut the filter retaining tie and then remove the filter.
(13) Remove the tape or other light shield from the SH1.
(14) Turn ON the high-voltage switch on the SCN08C board.
(15) Install all covers.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(8) Replace the polygon assembly. (9) Achieve installation by reversing the removal procedure.
Remove the polygon assembly by moving it between the dustproof rubber belt lifted in
step (6) and the scanning optics unit. Also, remove the polygon driver with its shield CAUTION
case attached.
Do not touch the polygon mirror surface.
(2) Sems M3x16
(2) Scanning optics unit cover

◆ NOTES ◆
Sems M3x6 x6 • When installing the polygon spacer, pay attention to its orientation. Ensure that the
thin end faces outward.
• When installing the polygon assembly, ensure that it is properly oriented. When the
assembly is viewed from above, the narrower edge must face outward.
(2) Sems M3x12
(10) Complete the verification procedure that is to be performed after polygon assembly
replacement.
Polygon assembly positioning orientation
The narrower edge
must be positioned Spacer ■ Verification after Polygon Assembly Replacement
Cable here. Spacer (short)
T (1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
O (long)
P (3) “2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON”
Polygon cover
Sems M3x10 x2 (2) Install all covers.
Polygon mirror
surface (3) Turn ON the machine.
(5) “8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections”
Polygon assembly
(Observe the correct (5) Generate an image output to check for scanner control abnormalities.
(4) positioning orientation.)
Polygon driver Double-sems M3x12 x4 If any abnormality exists, perform the adjustment step below.
Double-sems M3x6 x2
(7) Polygon mirror surface “8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width”
Tie
Polygon spacer
Thick Thin
Filter
P
TO
(6) Partitioning
block Rubber
belt
FR4H6001.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08A Board (8) Check that SCN08C board connector CN2 is locked.
If the connector is not locked, properly connect and lock it.
Before inspecting the SYN08A board, complete the inspection of LDD08C board, polygon (9) Return the SCN08C board to the rack and secure it by tightening its retaining screws.
assembly, and SCN08C board.
(10) Install the machine covers.
“8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit”, “8.5 Inspecting and Replacing
the Polygon Assembly”, “8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board”
CAUTIONS M-Utility”
• Do not disconnect LDD08C board connectors CN2, CN3 and CN4. If they are disconnected, (12) Choose “9. HV OFF”.
the LD protection feature does not work so that the LD may become defective. The high-voltage switch (software switch) then turns OFF, changing the “9. HV OFF”
• Do not touch the printed wiring patterns or ICs on the LDD08C board. indication to “9. HV ON”.
• When servicing boards, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not (13) Turn OFF the machine.
• Handle the scanning optics unit gently while exercising care not to shock it. (14) Unscrew and remove the SCN08C board.
• After the scanning optics unit is uncovered, exercise care to avoid dust buildup. (15) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
• When performing any procedure with the scanning optics unit uncovered, wear a mask so as (16) With tapes or the like, block the light paths of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
not to inadvertently spit on the inner parts. and SH2).
• Never touch the optical lenses or mirrors.
(17) Turn ON the machine.
Verify that the operation panel reads “HV-OFF”.
■ Inspection Procedure (18) Start the M-Utility.
If the SYN08A board is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the (19) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “3. LASER”, and “2. ON”.
newly installed one.
(20) Check whether the D14 on the SCR08C board blinks at rapid intervals.
• When the D14 is blinking at rapid intervals, turn OFF the LASER system and then
“8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit” restart the machine. When the machine normally starts up, the SYN08A board is
(2) Remove the scanning optics unit cover. normal. If the machine does not normally start up, replace the SYN08A assembly.
(3) Check that SYN08A board connector CN1 is locked. • When the D14 is extinguished or not blinking at rapid intervals, replace the SYN08A
assembly.
If the connector is not locked, properly connect and lock it.
SCN08C board
D14
SYN08A board SCR08C board
CN1
FR1H6006.EPS
Scanning optics unit (21) After completion of inspection, turn OFF the machine and turn ON the high-voltage
FR1H6011.EPS switch (S1) on the SCN08C board.
(22) Remove the tapes or other light shields from the laser safety interlock switches.
(4) Install the scanning optics unit cover. (23) Install all covers.
(5) Install the scanning optics unit and light source unit.
(24) Start the M-Utility and turn ON the high-voltage switch (software switch).
“8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit”
(6) Push the scanner unit into its position.
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit”
(7) Remove the board retaining screw and pull out the SCN08C board

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure ■ Verification after SYN08A Assembly Replacement

After replacement, be sure to inspect the SCN08C/SCR08C board. (1) Install all covers.
“8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C board” (2) Turn ON the machine.
(1) Gently remove the scanning optics unit. Verify that the machine normally starts up.
“8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit” (3) Generate an image output to check for scanner control abnormalities.
(2) Remove the scanning optics unit cover. Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation. Using “Sensitivity” on the test
(3) Remove the SYN08A assembly. menu, record an image and generate it. Check the resulting film image for scanner
control abnormalities such as a format discrepancy or shading problem detrimental to
Keep track of the spacers that are positioned beneath the SYN08A assembly. diagnostics.
(4) Disconnect SYN08A board connector CN1. If any abnormality exists, perform the adjustment step below.
(5) Replace the SYN08A assembly. (4) Adjust the main scanning direction format.
SYN08A board
CN1

FR1H6019.EPS
(6) Install the SYN08A assembly by reversing its removal procedure.

◆ NOTES ◆
• When installing the SYN08A assembly, properly position it by pressing it against the
reference surface of the positioning bracket.
• Use the existing spacers for the newly installed assembly.
Reference
Positioning bracket surface
SYN08A assembly

FR1H6020.EPS
(7) Complete the verification procedure that is to be performed after SYN08A assembly
replacement.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08C/SCR08C Board (8) Measure the voltages between the following SCN08C board test pins (related to
connector cables and power supply unit).
The SCN08C/SCR08C board provide scanner control. • Between TP1 (VCC) and TP2 (GND): + 5V ± 0.25V
Since this board does not have a memory for storing scanner control parameter data, there • Between TP4 (+15AS) and TP28 (ASG): + 15V ± 0.75V
is no need to perform parameter setup or DIP switch setup after replacement. • Between TP8 (-15AS) and TP28 (ASG) - 15V ± 0.75V
• Between TP3 (+24PS) and TP38 (PGND): + 24V ± 1.2V
CAUTION
If the measured voltages are outside the specified ranges, check the connector cables
When servicing boards, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not and power supply unit. If the connector cables and power supply unit are normal,
grounded, the static electricity built up on your body may damage electronic parts on boards. replace the SCN08C board.
TP1 TP7 TP29 TP4

TP28 TP8 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP2 TP1 TP2 TP8 TP28 TP5 TP27
SCN08C board
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover TP43
TP41 SCR08C board
(3) Remove the board retaining screws (BR M4x8 x1) and pull out the SCN08C/SCR08C
board. NFB1
(4) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1).
S1HVO
N TP38
TP3
FR1H6009.EPS
(9) Measure the voltages between the following SCN08C board test pins (related to the
OFF position SCN boards).
• Between TP5 (+5AS) and TP28 (ASG): + 5V ± 0.25V
S1 SCN08C board • Between TP27 (+5AS2) and TP28 (ASG): + 5V ± 0.25V
• Between TP7 (-5AS) and TP28 (ASG): - 5V ± 0.25V
SCR08C board • Between TP29 (-5AS2) and TP28 (ASG): - 5V ± 0.25V
F1 If the measured voltages are outside the specified ranges, replace the SCN08C board.
(10) Measure the voltages between the following SCR08C board test pins (related to
connector cables and power supply unit).
F2 • Between TP1 (VCC) and TP2 (GND): +5 V±0.25 V
F5 F8
F7 F1 F4 • Between TP4 (+15AS) and TP28 (ASG): +15 V±0.75 V
F10 F3
F6 F9 FR1H6007.EPS • Between TP8 (-15AS) and TP28 (ASG): -15 V±0.75 V
(5) Check the fuses (F1 through F10) on the SCN08C board and the fuse (F1) on the If the measured voltages are outside the specified ranges, check the connector cables
SCR08C board. and power supply unit. If the connector connections between the SCN and SCR
boards are normal, replace the SCR08C board.
(6) With tapes or the like, block the light paths of the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
and SH2).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(11) Measure the voltages between the following SCR08C board test pins (related to the (9) Remove the three stays from the old SNC08C board and attach them to the new
SCR board). board.
• Between TP5 (+5AS) and TP28 (ASG): +5 V±0.25 V (10) Set the new SCN08C board on its mounting bracket.
• Between TP7 (-5AS) and TP28 (ASG): -5 V±0.25 V (11) Mount the SCR08C board on the SNC08C board.
If the measured voltages are outside the specified ranges, replace the SCR08C board. Completely connect the connectors on the SCN and SCR boards.
• Between TP43 (IMGVCC) and TP41 (IMGGND): +5 V±0.50 V (12) Connect connectors SCN08C CN1 to CN9, 12 and SCN08C CN1 to CN6.
If the measured voltage is outside the specified range, check the connector cables, Properly connect the connectors and ensure that they are locked into their positions.
power supply unit (JPS-7), and BSP08A NFB. If they are normal, replace the SCR08C
board.
CAUTIONS
• When connecting SCN08C board connector CN1, do not touch capacitor C33 or C94
(13) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board. on the SCN08C board.
(14) Return the SCN08C/SCR08C board to the machine and secure it with the its retaining • When connecting SCR08C board connector CN4, do not touch capacitor C33 or C94
screws. on the SCR08C board.
(15) Remove the tapes or other light shields from the laser safety interlock switches (SH1
and SH2). N
S1HVO

(2) Remove the following covers in order named. OFF position
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover S1 SCN08C board
(3) Pull out the SCN08C/SCR08C board. This requires removing one board retaining
screw (one M4x8 BR screw). SCR08C board
(4) Disconnect connectors SCN08C CN1 to CN9 and CN12 and SCR08C CN1 to CN6. F1
(5) Remove the SCR08C board mounting screws (three M3x8 double-sems screws) and
then separate the SCR08C board from the SCN08C board.
When the SCR08C board is to be replaced with a new one, check the fuse on the new F5 F8 F2
F7 F1 F4
SCR08C board. F3
F10
“20.18 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type” F6 F9 FR1H6010.EPS
(6) Remove the SCN08C mounting screws (six M4x8 BR screws) and then take the
SCN08C board away from its mounting bracket. (13) Return the SCN08C board to the machine and secure it with its retaining screws.
SCN08C board
CN8
(16) Check for improper image performance.
CN12 CN3 SCR08C board “3.2 Checking for Image Problems” in the “Preventive Maintenance” volume
CN6
CN7 CN5 CN4 CN2 CN1
CN2 CN1 CN6 CN5

CN3 CN4
CN9 FR1H6516.EPS
(7) Make sure that the high-voltage switch (S1) on the new SCN08C board is placed in the
ON position.
(8) Check the fuses (F1 through F10) on the new SCN08C board.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9. Subscanning Unit 9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
(PMT08C Side)
9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide
CAUTIONS (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
• When servicing the light-collecting guide, wear gloves. If you do not wear gloves, you may “7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit”
soil the light-collecting guide. (2) Remove the before-erasure conveyor.
• Never touch the incidence surface of the light-collecting guide even if you wear gloves. “11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor”
• To prevent the light-collecting guide from being damaged, exercise care not to bring it into
contact with neighboring parts. (3) Remove the light-collecting guide duct cover.
• Wear a mask so as not to spit on the light-collecting guide surface. (4) Remove the bracket.
Light-collecting guide assembly Light-collecting guide assembly
(5) Rotate the handle clockwise.
(PMT08C) (PMR08C) This causes the chuck to open, unclamping the light-collecting guide.
Be sure to rotate the handle fully clockwise.
(6) Disconnect the PMT08C CN1 and CN4.
(7) Gently remove the light-collecting guide assembly while exercising care not to bring it
into contact with neighboring units.
Incidence surface
(3) Light-collecting guide duct cover
Incidence surface (7)
FR4B4006.EPS
(3) assembly
Loosen
Truss BR M4x10
(6)CN1
(3) BR M4x8
(6)CN4
(5) Rotate handle
(4)
Bracket
Truss M4x10 x2
T
ON
FR
HHS Label #2 FR4H6038.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Installation Procedure (7) Complete the “● Common procedure to be performed after light-collecting guide
assembly installation”.
Verify that the following conditions exist.
• The scanner unit is pulled out.
• The before-erasure conveyor and light-collecting guide duct cover are removed. assembly
(PMT08C)
• The chuck is fully open.
● Reinstalling the light-collecting guide assembly after its removal

All you have to do is properly position the light-collecting guide assembly.
(1) Gently mount the light-collecting guide assembly in the subscanning unit while exercis-
ing care not to bring it into contact with neighboring units. HHS Label #2
(2) With the light-collecting guide incidence surface brought into contact with the
subscanning unit supports (a and b), rotate the handle counterclockwise.
➮ This causes the chuck to secure the light-collecting guide assembly. ON
T
FR
Ensure that the light-collecting guide assembly is fixed securely by the chuck.
(3) Bring the light-collecting guide assembly into contact with the straight pin. Chuck
Support Handle
(4) Complete the “● Common procedure to be performed after light-collecting guide Straight pin
assembly installation”. a
● Replacing the light-collecting guide assembly with a new one b

Light-collecting
It is necessary to adjust the pressure bracket position. guide assembly
(1) Loosen pressure bracket screws A and B.

(2) Gently mount the light-collecting guide assembly in the subscanning unit while exercis-
ing care not to bring it into contact with neighboring units. c d
(3) With the light-collecting guide incidence surface brought into contact with the Screw A
Stay
subscanning unit supports (a and b), rotate the handle counterclockwise.
➮ This causes the chuck to secure the light-collecting guide assembly.
Screw B
Ensure that the light-collecting guide assembly is fixed securely by the chuck. Pressure bracket
(4) With the light-collecting guide assembly brought into contact with the stay (c), tighten FR1H1601.EPS
screw A. ● Common procedure to be performed after light-collecting guide assembly

When the light-collecting guide assembly is brought into contact with the stay (c) (c: 0 installation
to 0.5 mm), there must be a gap in d.
(5) Slide the pressure bracket until it comes into contact with the light-collecting guide (1) Connect the connectors (PMT08C CN1 and CN4).
assembly (d), and then tighten screw B. (2) Install the bracket.
(6) Bring the light-collecting guide assembly into contact with the straight pin. (3) Install the light-collecting guide duct cover.
(4) Install the before-erasure conveyor.
“11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor”
(5) Put the scanner unit back in its position.
(6) Complete the adjustment procedure to be performed after light-collecting guide assem-
bly installation.
“9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly ■ Installation Procedure
(PMR08C Side) To install the light-collecting guide assembly, reverse its removal procedure.
◆ NOTES ◆
■ Removal Procedure • When installing the light-collecting guide assembly, gently mount it in the subscanning unit
while exercising care not to bring it into contact with neighboring units.
• When installing the light-collecting guide, engage the light-collecting guide assembly right-
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” hand hook with the subscanning unit shaft.
(2) Remove the light-shielding cover.
(3) Remove the three mounting screws from the scanner after-reading conveyor.
Hook
You do not have to disconnect the scanner after-reading conveyor connectors (CNMD2
and CND3).
(4) Shift the scanner after-reading conveyor all the way forward (by 2 to 3 mm).
Shaft
(2)
Loosen screw x2
BR M4x8 HHS Label #2
(2) Light-collecting guide

Light-shielding cover HHS Label #2 assembly
BR M4x8 x2 T
(PMR08C) ON Subscanning unit
FR
PMR08C CN4
PMR08C CN1 FR4H6076.EPS
• Properly position the scanner after-reading conveyor by pressing it against the subscanning
T unit (rear and right-hand sides).
ON
FR
Subscanning unit
(4) After-reading
scanning conveyor (3) BR M4x8 x3 After light-collecting guide assembly installation, you have to perform the post-installation
FR4B9110.EPS
adjustment procedure for the light-collecting guide.
(5) Disconnect the connectors (PMR08C CN1 and CN4). “9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide”
(6) Remove the rear (left-hand) screw that secures the light-collecting guide.
(7) Shift the light-collecting guide assembly to the left and then gently remove it while
exercising care not to bring it into contact with neighboring units.
Hook
(6) Shaft
HHS Label #2
(6)
BR M4x8
(7)
assembly
(PMR08C) T
ON Subscanning unit
FR
(5) PMR08C CN4

(5) PMR08C CN1 FR4H6075.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.1.3 Inspecting the Light-Collecting Guide 9.1.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide
(1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side). (1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly. Place it on a sheet or the like in such a
“9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMR08C manner that its light-collecting surface is not in contact with the sheet or the like.
Side) “9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMT08C
Check the incidence surface of the light-collecting guide assembly on the PMT08C Side)”, ”9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
side by viewing it through the section from which the PMR08C side light-collecting (PMR08C Side)”
guide assembly was removed. (2) To clean the back-surface light-collecting guide assembly, remove the covers.
(2) With a blower, remove dust from the light-collecting guide. To remove the upper cover, move it in the direction of the arrow.
(3) Check that the light-collecting guide is not soiled or scratched. Cover (upper)
• If the guide is soiled:

With a lens cleaner moistened with ethanol, clean the light-collecting guide.
“9.1.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide”
• If the light-collecting guide incidence surface has a scratch wider than 0.8 mm: Back-surface light-collecting
guide assembly
Generate an image output to check that no image irregularities are caused by the
scratch.
“9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide”
Cover (lower)
Sems M3x8 (black) x3
FR4H9078.EPS
(3) Fold three thicknesses of lens cleaning paper into two, dampen the paper with ethanol,
and wipe the entire light-collecting guide clean.
CAUTIONS
• The light-collecting guide must be always wiped at a constant sped and in a single
direction.
• Do not wipe the photomultiplier adhesion surface.
• If the lens cleaning paper is soiled, replace it with a new one.
(4) Fold five thicknesses of lens cleaning paper into two, and wipe the light-collecting
guide dry.
After the light-collecting guide is wiped dry, check that it is uniformly wiped.
5 mm approx.
PMT08C/PMR08C board Cleaning range
Socket section
Photomultiplier
bonding surface
FR1H1105.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(5) Make sure that the PMT08C/PMR08C board socket section is pushed into the light- 9.1.5 Adjusting the Light-Collecting Guide
collecting guide socket section with the PMT08C/PMR08C board paralleled to the light-
collecting guide socket section. (1) Install all covers.
If any problem exists, push the PMT08C/PMR08C board assembly into its position (2) Turn ON the machine.
while holding down the light-collecting guide, and then adjust the PMT08C/PMR08C
board and light-collecting guide socket section positions.
(3) Generate an image output to check for scanner control abnormalities.
CAUTIONS Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation. Using “Sensitivity” on the test
menu, record an image and generate it. Check the resulting film image for scanner
• When installing the light-collecting guide assembly, wear gloves. The assembly may control abnormalities such as a format discrepancy or shading problem detrimental to
become soiled if you install it with bare hands. diagnostics.
• Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light-collecting guide.
If any abnormality exists, perform the adjustment procedure below.
Parallel Not parallel
Light-collecting guide assembly
Socket
PMT08C/PMR08C board
OK NG
FR1H1106.EPS
(6) Install the light-collecting guide assembly.

“9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMT08C
Side)”, ”9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
(PMR08C Side)”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE BLANK PAGE

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08C/PMR08C Board (1) Check the SCN08C and PHV08C board.
“8.7 Inspecting and Replacing the SCN08B/SCR08C Board”, “9.3 Inspecting and
Replacing the PHV08C Board”
CAUTIONS When the SCN08C or PHV08C board is normal, perform steps (2) and beyond.
• When servicing the light-collecting guide assembly, wear gloves. If you do not wear gloves, If the SCN08C or PHV08C board is abnormal, replace the SCN08C or PHV08C board.
you may soil the light-collecting guide.
• Never touch the incidence surface of the light-collecting guide even if you wear gloves. (2) Make sure that the SCN08C board connectors (CN5 and CN6) are locked.
• To prevent the light-collecting guide from being damaged, exercise care not to bring it into (3) Measure the voltage between the PMT08C/PMR08C board terminals.
contact with neighboring parts. Between PMTH and GNA: +2 to 3 V
• Wear a mask so as not to spit on the light-collecting guide surface.
(4) PMTH
PMT08C/PMR08C
Light-collecting guide assembly Light-collecting guide assembly
(PMT08C) (PMR08C)
board
CN2
GNA
Incidence surface
Incidence surface
FR4B4006.EPS
• When servicing boards, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not assembly
FR1H1606.EPS
(SH1).
CAUTION (6) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below.
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the ma- • Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
chine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. • Machine circuit breaker
The PMT08C/PMR08C board must be checked after the SCN08C and PHV08C boards are (7) Touch the U-Utility button.
checked. If any abnormality is found during the check, replace the PMT08C/PMR08C board.
(8) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the U-Utility screen.
(9) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “10. VIRTUAL IMAGE”, and “2. LOG
AMP”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(10) Measure the voltage between the PMT08C/PMR08C board terminals. ■ Replacement Procedure
Between PMTH and GNA: -0.5 to +0.5 V (1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly.
(8) “9.1.1 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMT08C
PMTH
PMT08C/PMR08C
Side)”, “9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly
board (PMR08C Side)”
CN2
(2) Remove the four mounting screws (sems M3x6).
(3) Remove the three spacers and nut.
GNA (4) Remove the bracket.
Light-collecting guide assembly
(2) Sems M3x6 x4

(3) Spacer x3
(3) Nut
Light-collecting guide PMT08C board
assembly
(4)
FR1H1607.EPS Bracket
(11) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “10. VIRTUAL IMAGE”, and “4. ROU-
TINE”.
CAUTION
After inspection, be sure to choose SCANNER UTILITY, VIRTUAL IMAGE, and ROU- FR1H6050.EPS
TINE in sequence to return the scanner to its initial state. If the scanner is not restored (5) Attach the bracket to the new PMT08C board.
to its initial state, the resulting image output will be low in contrast.
◆ NOTE ◆
Do not forget to tighten the nut that is used to secure the PMT08C board. If the nut is
left loose, abnormal images (irregular rings) may arise.
(14) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) on the SCN08C board. (6) Secure the PMT08C board with the three spacers and the nut that were removed in
(15) Remove the tape from the SH1. step (3).
(7) Install the light-collecting guide assembly.
“9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.3 Inspecting and Replacing the PHV08C Board (4) Disconnect the PHV08C board connectors (CN6 and CN7).
CAUTIONS
CAUTION
• Do not touch the printed wiring patterns or ICs on the PHV08C board.
• When servicing a board, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON
grounded, the static buildup on your body may damage electronic parts on the board. the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged.
The PHV08C board must be checked after the SCN08C board and machine power supply (6) With tape or the like, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switch (SH1).
(JPS-7) are checked. (7) Turn ON the machine.
(8) Measure voltages with tester probes brought into contact with the following PHV08C
■ Inspection procedure board check pins.
(1) Turn OFF the machine. 8-1) Check that the voltage between TP13 (+15 A) and TP7 (GNA) is +15 V±0.75 V.
(2) Remove the following covers in order named. 8-2) Check that the voltage between TP14 (-15 A) and TP7 (GNA) is -15 V±0.75 V.
• Exposure unit front cover 8-3) Check that the voltage between TP3 (+12 V) and TP7 (GNA) is +12 V±0.6 V.
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover 8-4) Check that the voltage between TP4 (-12 V) and TP7 (GNA) is -12 V±0.6 V.
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover 8-5) Check that the voltage between TP15 (+15VH) and TP1 (HG) is +15 V±0.75 V.
(3) Remove the four screws (countersunk M3x4) that secure the PHV08C board shielding • If measured voltage 8-1, 8-2, or 8-5 is abnormal
plate.
➮ Replace the cable. If the abnormality cannot be eliminated by replacing the cable,
◆ NOTE ◆ replace the PHV08C board.
When you remove the shielding plate, unscrew it while supporting it by hand. If you do • If measured voltage 8-3 or 8-4 is abnormal
not support it, it falls. ➮ Replace the PHV08C board.
CN4 CN1
TP10 TP14
TP9
PHV08C board TP13
CN3 TP4 TP2 CN2
TP3 TP8 TP5
CN5 TP7 TP6 TP15 TP1
TP11
TP12
CN7 CN6
T
ON
FR HHS Label #2 FR4H6081.EPS
(9) Touch the U-Utility button.

(10) Sequentially touch the left- and right-hand lower corners of the console panel.
T HHS Label #2 (3) Shielding plate
ON (11) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “5. HV DATA”, and “1. FRONT”.
FR
(3) Countersunk screw M3x4 x4 FR1H6081.EPS
(12) Enter a high-voltage setting of 250.
➮ The high voltage is then set to -250 V.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(13) Apply tester probes to PHV08C board check pins TP11 (HV1/196) and TP1 (HG) and ■ Replacement Procedure
measure the voltage.
➮ Between TP11 (HV1/196) and TP1 (HG): -1.25±0.10 V • Exposure unit front cover
If the measured voltage is outside the range specified above, replace the PHV08C • Exposure unit right-hand side cover
board.
(14) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “5. HV DATA”, and “2. BACK”.
(15) Enter a high-voltage setting of 250.
(2) Remove the four screws (countersunk M3x4) that secure the PHV08C board shielding
➮ The high voltage is then set to -250 V.
plate.
(16) Apply tester probes to PHV08C board check pins TP12 (HV2/196) and TP6 (HG) and
measure the voltage.
◆ NOTE ◆
➮ Between TP12 (HV2/196) and TP6 (HG): -1.25±0.1 V When you remove the shielding plate, unscrew it while supporting it by hand. If you do
not support it, it falls.
If the measured voltage is outside the range specified above, replace the PHV08C
board.
(3) Disconnect the PHV08C board connectors (CN1-CN7).
(4) Remove the four spacers that secure the PHV08C board.
(18) Remove the tape or other material that has been used to block the light path of the
laser safety interlock switch (SH1). CN4 CN1
(3)
(19) Connect the connectors (CN6 and CN7) to the PHV08C board.
(20) Secure the PHV08C board shielding plate with the four screws.
CN3 CN2
PHV08C board
CN5
(5) PHV08C board

CN7 CN6
(4) Spacer x4
T HHS Label #2 (2) Shielding plate

ON
FR
(2) Countersunk M3x4 x4 FR1H6083.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
When removing the spacers, support the PHV08C board by hand. If you do not
support it, it falls.
(5) Replace the PHV08C board.

(6) Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light-Collecting Mirror ■ Replacement Procedure

CAUTIONS
(2) Remove the before-erasure conveyor.
• When servicing the light-collecting mirror, wear gloves. If you do not wear gloves, you may
soil the light-collecting mirror. “11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor”
• Never touch the reflection face of the light-collecting mirror even if you wear gloves. (3) Remove the two light-collecting guide assemblies (PMT08C side and PMR08C side).
• To prevent the light-collecting mirror from being damaged, exercise care not to bring it into
contact with neighboring parts.
• Wear a mask so as not to inadvertently spit on the light-collecting mirror.
(PMR08C Side)”
■ Inspection Procedure “8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit”
(1) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side). (5) Remove the light-shielding plate.
“9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMR08C (6) Remove the right-hand side arm screw to free the arm.
Side) Free the arm and raise the roller bearing to provide a path for light-collecting mirror
(2) From the front end, look into the subscanning unit to check that the light-collecting removal.
mirror reflection face is not soiled or scratched.
Light-shielding plate
Light-collecting BR M4x8 x2
mirror
Reflection
face
HHS Label #2
Arm
BR M4x16
T NT
ON Scanner unit O
FR FR
HHS Label #2
FR1H6080.EPS Scanner unit FR1H6051.EPS
• If the light-collecting mirror is soiled

With a lens cleaner moistened with ethanol, clean the light-collecting mirror.
• If the light-collecting mirror reflection face is scratched
Output an image to check whether it is free from scratch-induced irregularities.
“■ Adjustment Procedure”
If irregularities are encountered, make shading/sensitivity corrections. If shading/
sensitivity corrections do not help, replace the light-collecting mirror.
“8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections”, “■ Replacement Procedure”
(3) Reinstall the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side) by reversing the removal
steps.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(7) Remove the shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipe (upper). (11) Remove the light-collecting mirror from the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate.
Locate the two screw holes in the shafts. Insert an Allen wrench into the holes and (12) Replace the light-collecting mirror.
remove the two screws. (13) Installing a new light-collecting mirror by reversing the removal steps.
Allen wrench
CAUTION
When installing the two shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipes, do not excessively
Shaft
tighten their screws. Overtightening deforms the shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipes.
After completion of replacement, perform the adjustment procedure indicated below.

“■ Adjustment Procedure”
Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached pipe Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached guide plate
HHS Label #2 Light-collecting mirror Sems M3x6 x4 (black)
(7) Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached pipe
Sems M3x6 x2
T
ON
FR
ONT
FR
Scanner unit
FR4H6053.EPS
FR4H6079.EPS
(8) Disconnect the SZ1 connector. ■ Adjustment Procedure

(9) Remove the two mounting screws from the light-collecting mirror. (1) Install all covers.
(10) Remove the light-collecting mirror. (2) Turn ON the machine.
Light-collecting mirror Verify that the machine normally starts up.
BR M4x8 x2
(3) Generate an image output to check for scanner control abnormalities.
Expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation. Using “Sensitivity” on the test
SZ1 menu, record an image and generate it. Check the resulting film image for scanner
control abnormalities such as a format discrepancy or shading problem detrimental to
diagnostics.
If any abnormality exists, perform the adjustment procedure below.
HHS Label #2
O NT
FR
Scanner unit
FR1H6052.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.5 Inspecting and Replacing the IP Leading-Edge Sensor (4) Check that SCN08C board connector CN4 is connected.
Remove the one SCN08C board mounting screw, take out the board, and perform this
(SZ1/SED08C) check. If the connector is not connected, properly connect it.
If sensor SZ1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly (5) Turn OFF the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1).
installed one. S1HVO
N
CAUTION
chine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged.
OFF position
■ Inspection Procedure to Be Performed Upon Abnormality Occurrence
S1 SCN08C board
◆ NOTE ◆
Before inspecting the SED08C board, verify that the following components normally function. D15
• SCN08C board SCR08C board
• LDD08C assembly
“8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit, ■ Inspecting the LDD08C
Board”
• Polygon assembly
“8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly” CN4 NFB8 FR1H6064.EPS
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (SH1).
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” (7) Turn OFF the light for the machine room. If extraneous light enters through windows,
close curtains to darken the room.
(2) Check that SED08C board connector SZ1 is connected.
If the connector is not connected, properly connect it.
When pushing the scanner unit into its position, check that connector CNZ11 is con-
nected. If it is not connected, properly connect it. (9) Start the M-Utility.
“8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width, ■ Starting and Exiting the
M-Utility”
(10) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “3. LASER”, and “2. ON”.
(11) From the M-Utility main menu, sequentially choose “3. TEST MODE”, “2. AUTO
MODE”, and “3. SECONDARY ERASURE”. Enter an IP conveyance count.
(12) Return to the routine mode.
➮ IP conveyance occurs.
Check whether the SCR08C board D15 status is as indicated below during IP convey-
ance.
• When an IP does not pass the SED08C board position: The D15 remains extin-
guished.
• When an IP passes the SED08C board position: The D15 lights.
(13) If the D15 was found abnormal in step (12), replace the SED08C board (SZ1).
“■ Replacement Procedure”
If the D15 was found normal in step (12), continue to perform steps (15) and beyond.
(14) Sequentially choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY”, “3. LASER”, and “1. OFF”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(15) Reset the machine to check for abnormalities during its startup process (self-diagnos- ■ Replacement Procedure
tic check sequence).
• When no abnormality is encountered: Inspect the other functions. “7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit”
• When an abnormality is encountered: Replace the SED08C board. (2) Disconnect connector SZ1.
(3) Remove the SZ1 and its bracket as an assembly and replace it.
SZ1 (2) Connector
(17) Turn ON the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1). (3)
Bracket
(18) Remove the tape or other light shield from the SH1. Sems M3x6 x2 (black)
HHS Label #2
T Scanner unit
ON
FR
FR1H6054.EPS
■ Verification after Replacement

(1) Run a self-diagnostic check on the machine.
Run either of the following self-diagnostic checks to verify that no error occurs.
• Turn ON the machine to check whether it normally starts up.
Self-diagnostic checkout is automatically performed at startup.
• Start the M-Utility. Choose “5. SCANNER UTILITY” and “9. DIAGNOSTIC” in se-
quence to check for abnormality occurrence.
“3.2 Checking for Image Problems” in Preventive Maintenance Volume
Verify that no scanner control abnormality exists.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.6 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Grip Release 9.7 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Reading IP Sensor
Home Position Sensor (SZ2) (SZ3)
If sensor SZ2 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly If sensor SZ3 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly

To check the SZ3 open/close status, disconnect the SZ3 with the connector left connected
■ Replacement Procedure and then block the SZ3 light path with a piece of paper or other light shield.
• Exposure unit front cover ■ Replacement Procedure
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover (1) Remove the following covers.
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover • Exposure unit front cover
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” • Exposure unit right-hand side cover
(2) Remove the SZ2 and its bracket as an assembly. • Exposure unit right-hand inner cover
(3) Separate the SZ2 from its bracket. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
“3. New Parts with Better Serviceability” in the “Machine Description” volume (2) Remove the SZ3 and its bracket as an assembly.
(4) Disconnect the connector (SZ2). (3) Disconnect the connector (SZ3).
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. (4) Separate the SZ3 from its bracket.
(4)
Connector
(SZ2)
(2) (2)
Bracket
Bracket
Sems M3x6 x2
Sems M3x6
Spacer
(4)
SZ3
(3) Sems M3x6 x2
SZ2
(3) Connector
(SZ3)
HHS Label #2
Scanner unit FR1H6127.EPS
HHS Label #2
Scanner unit FR1H6126.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ■ Replacement Procedure
No adjustments need be made after replacement. “7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit”
(2) Remove the transparent cover.
(3) Remove the spring to free the tensioner.
(4) Remove the Kapton® belt.
(5) Disconnect the connectors (MZ1 CN1 to CN3).
(6) Remove motor MZ1.
(7) Adjust the new MZ1 DIP switch setup for the old MZ1, which was removed in step (6).
(3) Turn OFF the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1).
(2)
Transparent cover
CAUTION
BR M4x8 x2
the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. ON
T
FR
(SH1).
(5) Turn ON the power. (5), (6)
MZ1
Connector (CN1-3)
(7) Sequentially choose “6. MECHANICAL UTILITY”, “2. ACTUATOR”, “2. DRIVE”, and “2. BR M4x8 x5
FFM”.
(8) Set the FFM rotation direction and speed in sequence.
➮ Verify that the drive shaft rotates.
(9) Sequentially choose “6. MECHANICAL UTILITY”, “2. ACTUATOR”, “3. STOP”, and “2. Tensioner
FFM”. (3) Spring
➮ The drive shaft stops.
(4) Kapton® belt
T
ON
FR Scanner unit

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.9 Replacing the Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) 9.10 Inspecting and Replacing the Rubber Belt
No adjustments need be made after replacement. If the rubber belt is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly
installed one.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. ■ Inspection Procedure
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” (1) Remove the following covers.
(2) Remove the light-shielding bracket. • Exposure unit front cover
(3) Disconnect the connector (CNMZ2). • Exposure unit right-hand side cover
Remove the connector from the stay bracket. • Exposure unit right-hand inner cover
(4) Remove motor MZ2. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
(5) Remove the timing belt pulley from MZ2. (2) Rotate the drive shaft (lower one) to check whether the rubber belt is soiled or
scratched.
If it is soiled, clean it with a damp cloth. If it is scratched, replace it.
(2)
Loosen screw x2
(1) Remove the right-hand side arm screw.
(2) Remove the rubber belt by rotating it while pulling its center.
HHS Label #2
Arm
(2)
HHS Label #2 (1)
Light-shielding cover
BR M4x16
BR M4x8 x2
Scanner unit
T
ON
FR (2) Rubber belt
(4)
MZ2 ON
T
Hex socket head bolt M4x10 x2 FR
Driving shaft Scanner unit FR1H6058.EPS
(3)
CNMZ2
(3) Install a new rubber belt.
(4) Attach the screw to the arm and return the arm to its original position.
(5) (6) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below.
Timing belt pulley
E-ring • Machine main body circuit breaker
Stay bracket • Console main switch and sub-switch
FR1H6125.EPS
(7) Inspect the FFM (motor MZ1) to verify that it normally rotates.
“9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1)”
“3.2 Checking for Image Problems” in the “Preventive Maintenance” volume

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.11 Replacing the Timing Belt 9.12 Inspecting and Replacing the Kapton® Belt, Tensioner, and
Flywheel
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. ■ Inspection Procedure
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
(2) Remove the right-hand side arm screw. “7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit”
(3) Remove the light-shielding bracket. (2) Remove the transparent cover.
(4) Remove the MZ2. Any dust on the transparent cover must be removed with a blower.
(5) Remove the timing belt. (3) Check whether the Kapton® belt, tensioner, and flywheel are soiled or scratched.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. If any item is soiled, wipe it clean with a cloth dampened with ethanol. If any item is
scratched, replace it with a new one.
(3)
Loosen screw x2
T
ON
HHS Label #2 FR
HHS Label #2
(3)
Light-shielding cover (2)
BR M4x8 x2 Transparent
cover
BR M4x8 x2
Scanner unit
(3) Flywheel
T
(3) Kapton® belt
ON (3) Tensioner
FR
(3) Pulley
Arm
HHS Label #2
(2)
BR M4x16 T
ON
FR Scanner unit FR1H6059.EPS
(4) Install the transparent cover and scanner unit in their original positions.
(4) MZ2 (5) Timing belt
Hex socket head bolt (5) Install all covers.
M4x10 x2 (6) Turn ON the machine.
(7) Inspect the MZ1.
T
ON
FR Verify that the motor normally rotates.
Scanner unit
FR1H6057.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure (8) Turn ON the machine.

◆ NOTES ◆ (9) Inspect motor MZ1.
®
• When installing the Kapton belt, orient it so that the arrow marked on its surface points to the Verify that the motor normally rotates.
subscanning unit. “9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor (MZ1)”
• The arrow mark on the Kapton® belt surface fades away with time. To prevent the currently (10) Check for improper image performance.
used Kapton® belt from being improperly oriented, you can write an arrow mark on its surface
with a marker or the like. “3.2 Checking for Image Problems” in the “Preventive Maintenance” volume
• After Kapton® belt installation, rotate the flywheel to make sure that the Kapton® belt does not
leave the pulley.

(2) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side).
“9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMR08C
Side)”
(3) Remove the transparent cover.
(4) Remove the spring to free the tensioner.
(5) Remove the Kapton® belt.
(6) Remove the tensioner.
(7) Remove the flywheel.
Insert an Allen wrench into the hole in the lower front rubber roller shaft to remove the
flywheel nut.
Accomplish installation by reversing steps (1) through (7).
T
ON
FR
(3)
Transparent cover
BR M4x8 x2
(6)
Tensioner
E-ring
(5)
(4) Spring Kapton® belt
(7)
Flywheel
Nut
T
ON
FR Scanner unit

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.13 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Unit Rubber ■ Subscanning Unit Rear Rubber Roller Replacement Procedure
Rollers (1) Pull out the scanner unit.
■ Inspection Procedure (2) Remove the before-erasure conveyor.
(3) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMT08C/PMR08C side).
Side)”
(PMR08C Side)”
(3) From the front end, look into the subscanning unit to check that the rubber rollers are
not soiled or damaged. (4) Remove the light source unit.
If the rubber rollers are soiled, clean them with a damp cloth. If they are damaged, “8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit”
replace them. (5) Remove the scanning optics unit.
■ Subscanning Unit Front Rubber Roller Replacement Procedure “8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit”
(1) Pull out the scanner unit. (6) Remove the light-tight plate.
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” (7) Remove the right- and left-hand braces to free the braces.
(2) Remove the transparent cover. (8) Remove the upper and lower rubber rollers.
To remove the upper rubber roller only, take it out from above.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When removing the driven shaft only, it is not necessary to remove the transparent cover and
flywheel. (6)
Light-tight plate
BR M4x8 x2
(7)
“9.1.2 Removing and Installing the Light-Collecting Guide Assembly (PMR08C Brace
Side)” Spring
(4) Remove the flywheel.

“9.12 Inspecting and Replacing the Kapton® Belt, Tensioner, and Flywheel”
(5) Remove the rubber belt.
“9.10 Inspecting and Replacing the Rubber Belt”
(6) Remove the two shaft support retaining screws each from the upper and lower rubber (8)
rollers. Rubber roller
(7) Pull out the upper and lower rubber rollers from the right-hand side plate of the
subscanning unit.
Scanner unit
HHS Label #2
HHS Label #2 T
ON
FR Scanner unit FR1H6062.EPS

(7)
Rubber roller (driven shaft) (10) Inspect motor MZ1.
T
ON Verify that the motor normally rotates.
FR
Wave washer
(7)
Rubber roller (driving shaft)
(6)
BR M4x8
FR1H6061.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9.14 Replacing the Subscanning Unit Guide (6) Remove the before-erasure conveyor.
(7) Remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMT08C side).
“3.10a Replacing the Shock-Absorber-Cloth-Attached Guide Plates, Pipes, and Bracket in Side)”
the Subscanning Unit” in the “Preventive Maintenance” volume
(8) Locate the right- and left-hand vibration-proof rubbers on the rear of the subscanning
9.15 Replacing the Vibration-Proof Rubbers unit. Replace them one at a time.
When replacing the vibration-proof rubbers, slightly lift the subscanning unit.
◆ NOTES ◆
• If any vibration-proof rubber needs to be replaced, replace all the four vibration-proof rubbers HHS Label #2
at the same time.
Subscanning unit
• The vibration-proof rubbers should be removed and installed, one at a time.
■ Replacement Procedure FR
ON
T
Side)”
(3) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
“10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor”
(4) Remove the connector mounting bracket.
(8) (8)
(5) Locate the right- and left-hand vibration-proof rubbers on the front of the subscanning Vibration-proof rubber Vibration-proof rubber
BR M5x15 BR M5x15
unit. Replace them one at a time. Hex socket head bolt M4x8 x2 Hex socket head bolt M4x8 x2
Spacer x2 Spacer x2
When replacing the vibration-proof rubbers, slightly lift the subscanning unit.
FR1H6522.EPS
(9) Make sure that the end faces of the three subscanning unit feet are flush with the tray
end face.
Subscanning unit If not, loosen the four vibration-proof rubber screws to ensure that the above-
mentioned end faces are flush with each other.
HHS Label #2
Subscanning unit
HHS Label #2
Flush
Foot
Tray
Vibration-proof rubber
(4)
(5) Connector FR1H6518.EPS
Vibration-proof rubber mounting bracket

(5) BR M4x8 x2 (10) Reinstall the removed units and light-collecting guide assembly by reversing the
BR M5x15
Vibration-proof rubber
Hex socket head bolt M4x8 x2 removal steps.
BR M5x15
Spacer x2
Hex socket head bolt M4x8 x2
Spacer x2
FR1H6521.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(3) Remove the light-collecting guide support bracket.

10. Scanner After-Reading Conveyor
(4) Disconnect the connectors (CNMD2 and CND3).
This section describes the procedures for removing and installing the scanner after-reading (5) Remove the two screws.
conveyor and the procedures for inspecting and replacing the scanner after-reading con- (6) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
veyor parts in need of periodic replacement.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the following procedures are prepared on the presump-
tion that the following covers are removed.
10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading (3)

Conveyor support bracket
BR M4x8 x2
HHS Label #2
Side)” (5)
BR M4x8
Scanner unit
(6)
Scanner after- (5)
reading conveyor BR M4x8
(5) (4)CND3
(4)CNMD2
BR M4x8 FR4H6140.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the scanner after-reading conveyor, screw it down while pressing it
against the rear end and left-hand end.
Top view
Scanner after-reading
conveyor Subscanning unit
FRONT
FR1H6063.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.2 Inspecting and Replacing the After-Reading IP Sensor ■ Replacement Procedure

(SD1) (1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
If sensor SD1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly (2) Disconnect the connector (SD1).
installed one.
(3) Remove sensor SD1.
■ Inspection Procedure Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
(SH1) so that you can conduct an inspection (turn ON the power) while the machine is
uncovered.
(3) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
(2)
“10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor” Connector
(4) Remove the SD1 with the connector (SD1) left connected. Spacer (SD1)
(5) With the SD1 removed, install the scanner after-reading conveyor. (3)
SD1
Ensure that the SD1 is viewable through the subscanning unit hole. Sems M3x6 x2
CAUTION
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON Scanner after-reading conveyor
the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. FR1H6131.EPS
(7) Place the machine REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position.

(8) Start the console.
(9) Turn ON the distribution switchboard and then the machine. While the console panel
shows a software version number, sequentially touch the lower left and lower right
corners of the console panel.
(10) Sequentially choose “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY” and “1. INITIALIZE”.
➮ The machine mechanism is then initialized.
(11) Sequentially choose “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY”, “3. SENSOR”, and “3. MONITOR
ALL”.
➮ The sensor number monitoring list appears.
(12) With a piece of paper or the like, block the SD1 light path to check that the following
messages appear.
When the SD1 light path is blocked: SD1 - - - > Close
When the SD1 light path is unblocked: SD1 - - - > Open
(13) Repeat step (12) two or three times to check that the correct messages appear.
If a message display failure or other abnormality occurs, replace the SD1.
➮ The M-Utility exits.
(16) Return the removed SD1 to its original position.
(17) Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the REMOTE position.
(18) Turn ON the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1).
(19) Remove the tape from the SH1.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.3 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Release Home Position ■ Replacement Procedure
Sensor (SD2) (1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
If sensor SD2 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly (2) Disconnect the connector (SD2).
installed one.
(3) Remove sensor SD2.
■ Inspection Procedure ◆ NOTE ◆
(1) Turn ON the machine. Do not remove the sensor mounting bracket. If you remove it, you have to make
adjustments.
➮ The machine is then initialized.
(2) The M-Utility starts.
ALL”. (2)
Connector
➮ The sensor number monitoring list appears. (SD2)
Check that the SD2 status is “1”.
(4) Sequentially choose “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY”, “4. UNIT”, “5. AFTER-READING
GRIP”, “3. RELEASE”, and “1. YES”.
Mounting
➮ The grip roller is then released so that the SD2 actuator leaves the SD2. bracket
(5) Choose “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY”, “3. SENSOR”, and “3. MONITOR ALL” again in (3) SD2
sequence.
Verify that the SD2 status is changed to “0”.
If any abnormality is encountered in steps (3) through (5), replace the SD2.
➮ The M-Utility exits. Scanner after-reading conveyor FR1H6129.EPS9

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.4 Replacing the IP Conveyance Motor (MD1) 10.5 Replacing the Grip Release Motor (MD2)

(1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor. (1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
“10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor” “10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor”
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNMD1). (2) Remove the connector (CNMD2) from the bracket.
(3) Cut the cable tie. (3) Cut the cable ties.
(4) Remove motor MD1. (4) Remove motor MD2.
(5) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MD1. (5) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace motor MD2.
When installing the MD2, ensure that the gears are in mesh.
Timing belt
(5) E-ring (5) E-ring (4)
(3) Ties MD2
(5)
Hex socket head bolt M4x10 x2
Gear
(3) Ties
(2)CNMD1
(4)
MD1
BR M4x12 x2
(2) CNMD2
Scanner after-reading conveyor Bracket
FR1H6128.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
• Be sure that the installed MD1 presses the roller bearing.
MD1
Roller bearing Scanner after-reading conveyor
FR1H6130.EPS
FR1H6180.EPS
• When installing the MD1, engage the timing belt pulley with the timing belt.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.6 Replacing and Adjusting the Scanner After-Reading 10.7 Replacing the Rubber Rollers
Conveyor Timing Belt
After replacement, be sure to adjust the timing belt.
■ Replacement Procedure (1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor.
(1) Remove the scanner after-reading conveyor. “10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor”
“10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor” (2) Remove the timing belt.
(2) Remove the timing belt pulley. (3) Take the left-hand E-ring away from the rubber roller. Remove the timing belt pulley,
roller bearing, and shaft support.
(3) Replace the timing belt.
(3) Washer
(3) Shaft support
(3) Roller bearing

(3) E-ring
(2) Roller bearing

(2) Roller bearing
(2) TIming belt pulley FR
ON
Tensioner (2) Timing belt pulley T
(2)
BR M4x30
(2) BR M4x30
(3) Timing belt
FR1H6146.EPS (2) Timing belt FR1H6156.EPS
(4) Remove the right-hand rubber roller pressure arm.

■ Adjustment Procedure (5) Remove the rubber roller.
(1) Place the grip roller in the grip position (“down” position). (6) Remove the E-ring, shaft support, and roller bearing to replace the rubber roller.
(2) Measure the timing belt tension. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.
When the belt is depressed with a load of 500 g, the resulting belt displacement must
be 8 ± 2 mm. (4)
Rubber roller pressure arm
(3) Reposition the tensioner as needed until the timing belt tension is as specified above. BR M4x12 x2
Spacer
Timing belt
Grip roller 500g

8 ± 2mm (5) Rubber roller
T
ON
FR
Scanner after-reading
Tensioner
conveyor
BR M4x30 Washer
Adjust FR1H6143.EPS
(6) Roller bearing

(6) Shaft support
(6) E-ring
FR1H6157.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 MC 11 - 1 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 MC 11 - 2
11. Before-Erasure Conveyor
This section describes the procedures for removing and installing the before-erasure con- ◆ NOTE ◆
veyor and the procedures for inspecting and replacing the before-erasure conveyor parts in When installing the before-erasure conveyor, lodge a dowel in the elongated hole in the
need of periodic replacement. before-erasure conveyor. Screw the before-erasure conveyor down while pressing it forward
and against the positioning hex socket head bolt.
11.1 Removing and Installing the Before-Erasure Conveyor
Mounting bracket x2
BR M4x8 x2
(2) Disconnect the connector (CNE1).
CNE1
(3) Remove the two mounting brackets. This requires removing two screws.
(4) Remove the before-erasure conveyor by moving it rearward while exercising care not Before-erasure
to bump it against the light-collecting guide. conveyor
(3) HHS Label #2

Mounting bracket x2
BR M4x8 x2
T
ON
FR
Top view Mounting

(2) CNE1 bracket
(4)
Before-erasure
conveyor Before-erasure
FRONT Subscanning unit conveyor
HHS Label #2
Dowel
Elongated hole
ON
T Mounting
FR bracket
Positioning hex socket head bolt
FR1H4038.EPS
FR1H6142.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
11.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Before-Erasure Entry IP ■ Replacement Procedure

Sensor (SE1) (1) Remove the before-erasure conveyor.
If sensor SE1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly (2) Remove sensor SE1.
installed one.
(3) Disconnect the connector (SE1).
■ Inspection Procedure (4) Replace sensor SE1.
(1) With tape or other light shield, block the light path of the laser safety interlock switch Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
(SH1) so that you can conduct an inspection (turn ON the power) while the machine is
uncovered.
(4) Remove the SE1 with the connector (SE1) left connected.
(5) With the SE1 removed, install the before-erasure conveyor. (3)
Connector
Ensure that the SE1 is visible. Spacer (SE1)
(6) Push the scanner unit into its position. (2) SE1
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” Sems M3x6 x2
Before-erasure
conveyor FR1H6135.EPS
CAUTION
(7) Place the machine REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position.

(8) Start the console.
(9) Turn ON the distribution switchboard and then the machine. While the console panel
shows a software version number, sequentially touch the lower left and lower right
corners of the console panel.
(10) Sequentially choose “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY” and “1. INITIALIZE”.
➮ The machine mechanism is then initialized.
ALL”.
(12) With a piece of paper or the like, block the SE1 light path to check that the following
messages appear.
When the SE1 light path is blocked: SE1 - - -> Close
When the SE1 light path is unblocked: SE1 - - -> Open
(13) Repeat step (11) two or three times to check that the correct messages appear.
If a message display failure or other abnormality occurs, replace the SD1.
➮ The M-Utility exits.
(16) Return the removed SE1 to its original position.
(17) Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the REMOTE position.
(18) Turn ON the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1).
(19) Remove the tape from the SH1.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12. Enclosure
12.1 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch • Exposure unit front cover
(SH1) • Exposure unit right-hand side cover

If switch SH1 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
installed one.
(2) Remove the SH1 and its bracket as an assembly.
■ Inspection Procedure (3) Disconnect the connector (SH1).
The SH1 detects the actuator on the exposure unit right-hand inner cover. (4) Remove the SH1.
When inspecting the SH1, check that an error occurs when the exposure unit right-hand Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
inner cover is removed and that no error occurs when the cover is installed.
(3) Connector (SH1)
“2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON”
(4)
SH1
CAUTION Sems M3x6 x2
(2)
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON Bracket
the machine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. Sems M3x6 x2
(2) With the exposure unit right-hand inner cover removed, turn ON the power in the order
indicated below.
HHS Label #2
• Machine circuit breaker
➮ Verify that the following error messages appear on the console.
0553 Leading end detection error (cover open)
0552 Start point detection error (cover open)
(3) Turn OFF the machine circuit breaker.
FR1H6040.EPS
(4) Install the exposure unit right-hand inner cover.
(5) Turn ON the machine circuit breaker.
➮ Verify that the machine normally starts up.
(7) Remove the exposure unit right-hand inner cover and turn ON the SCN08C board
high-voltage switch (S1).
(8) Install the following covers in order named.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.2 Inspecting and Replacing the Laser Safety Interlock Switch ■ Replacement Procedure
(SH2) (1) Remove the exposure unit top cover.
If switch SH2 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the newly (2) Remove the SH2 and its bracket as an assembly.
installed one.
(3) Disconnect the connector (SH2).
■ Inspection Procedure (4) Remove the SH2.
The SH2 detects the actuator on the exposure unit top cover. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
When inspecting the SH2, check that an error occurs when the exposure unit top cover is
removed and that no error occurs when the cover is installed. HHS Label #2
(1) Turn OFF the SCN08C board high-voltage switch (S1). (2)
“2.2 Turning the High-Voltage Switch OFF and ON” Bracket
Sems M3x6x 2
CAUTION
(2) Install the exposure unit right-hand inner cover.

(4)
(3) With the exposure unit top cover removed, turn ON the power in the order indicated SH2
below. Sems M3x6x 2
• Distribution switchboard circuit breaker (3) Connector (SH2)

➮ Verify that the following error messages appear on the console.
0553 Leading end detection error (cover open)
FR1H6041.EPS
0552 Start point detection error (cover open)
(4) Turn OFF the machine circuit breaker.
(5) Install the exposure unit top cover.
➮ Verify that the machine normally starts up.
(8) Remove the exposure unit right-hand inner cover and turn ON the SCN08C board
high-voltage switch (S1).
(9) Install the following covers in order named.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.3 XXXXX 12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent
Prevention Interlock Switches (MSH1-MSH4)
If switches MSH1 through MSH4 are found abnormal during inspection, replace them and
then conduct an inspection again.
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to raise the exposure/reader unit to its uppermost
position.
◆ NOTE ◆
For inspection purposes, use both the elevation panel switch and up-down foot switch
(optional) to elevate the exposure/reader unit.
(2) While lowering the exposure/reader unit toward the lowermost position, press safety
switch cover area 1 to check that the exposure/reader unit comes to a stop with the
elevation panel switch LED coming on.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) above using each of safety switch cover area 2 and exposure
unit bottom cover areas 3 and 4.
(1) Uppermost position
Elevation panel switch
Up-down foot switch
(2) Lowermost position
FR1H1602.EPS

FR
ON
T
Safety switch cover
2
1 LED
4 The LED comes on when
the safety switch turns ON.
Exposure unit bottom cover 3 FR1H1603.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.

◆ NOTE ◆
● Replacing the MSH1/MSH2
The movable bracket must be properly fit between the MSH1/MSH2 and mounting
(1) Remove the exposure unit bottom cover. bracket. If not, the safety switch may fail to function.
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” MSH1, 2
(2) Remove the movable bracket.
The movable bracket is hooked onto the right- and left-hand mounting brackets. Movable bracket
Therefore, pull it forward and out while lifting it up.
(3) Remove the mounting bracket for the right-hand interlock switch (MSH1) or left-hand
interlock switch (MSH2). Mounting bracket
FR1H6147.EPS
(4) Remove the MSH1 or MSH2.
(5) Disconnect the FASTON terminals (MSH1 COM and NC/MSH2 COM and NC).
● Replacing the MSH3/MSH4
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
(2) Remove the bracket.
(3) Remove the MSH3 or MSH4 mounting screws (2 places).
(4) Disconnect the MSH3 or MSH4 FASTON terminals (MSH3/MSH4 COM and MSH3/
T
MSH4 NC).
ON
FR (5) Remove the MSH3 or MSH4.
Exposure unit front cover
(5) MSH2 NC
(5) MSH2 COM
(4) MSH2
Sems M3x16 x2
(3) Mounting bracket

BR M4x8 x2 MSH3
(5) MSH1 NC
(5) MSH1 COM (2) BR M4x8
(2) Movable bracket (3)

MSH4
Nut bracket
(3) Mounting bracket
BR M4x8 x2
(4) MSH1 (2) Bracket
Sems M3x16 x2
FR1H6137.EPS
(4)MSH3, 4 COM
(4)MSH3, 4 NC
(3), (5)
MSH3, 4
Sems M3x16 x2
(2) BR M4x8
FR1H6100.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. 12.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Handle Interference
◆ NOTE ◆ Prevention Interlock Switch (MSH5)
When installing the MSH3/MSH4, ensure that the nut bracket is flush with the bracket
and that the bracket is flush with the leaf spring. If the MSH5 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then conduct an inspection
again.
Nut bracket
Bracket
Interlock switch MSH5 stops an exposure/reader unit or grip handle vertical motion when it
detects the magnetic force of the magnet attached to the grip handle. When inspecting the
Flush MSH5, move the grip handle or exposure/reader unit up and down to check that they stop at
positions at which they do not interfere with each other .
(1) Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position.
Top view
(3) Press the exposure/reader unit elevation switch or grip handle up-down switch to
check that the grip handle and exposure/reader unit stop at positions at which they do
not interfere with each other.
Bracket Flush SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE

Leaf spring If you press the exposure/reader unit up-down switch after pressing the interlock button, the
FR1H6102.EPS grip handle moves up or down in coordination with the exposure/reader unit up-down switch.
Grip handle
Magnet
Grip handle Interlock

up-down switch button
MSH5
Exposure/
reader unit
up-down switch
Exposure/
reader unit
FR1H1604.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacement Procedure (2) Turn OFF the machine.

(3) Remove the MSH5 mounting bracket.
CAUTIONS (4) Remove the two MSH5 mounting screws.
• Since a part at a high place needs to be replaced, furnish a steady stool that will not rotate or (5) Pull out the MSH5 connection cable and then disconnect its two terminals (COM and
wobble. NC).
• When you stand on a stool to perform any procedure, keep your balance and exercise care
not to fall down from the stool. (6) Replace the MSH5.
(1) Place the grip handle and exposure/reader unit in their uppermost positions. Exposure/reader unit cover
Ensure that the MSH5 is positioned above the elevation unit.
Grip handle
(3)
MSH5 Mounting screw
BR M4x8 x2
Elevation unit
(5)
MSH5 NC (black)
Exposure/
Sems M3x6
reader unit
(5)
MSH5 COM (red)
Sems M3x6
(6) MSH5
(4) Sems M3x8 x2
FR1H6514.EPS
FR
ON
T
FR1H6515.EPS
After completion of MSH5 replacement, be sure to inspect the MSH5.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.6 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Grip Handle ■ Replacement Procedure
Upper-/Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSH6/MSH7) (1) Remove the elevation unit front cover.
If switch MSH6/MSH7 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then conduct an (2) Remove the MSH6/MSH7 and bracket as an assembly.
inspection again.
Free the cable clamp or tie and then pull the MSH6/MSH7 out of the elevation assem-
bly.
(3) Remove the MSH6/MSH7.
(1) Remove the elevation unit front cover.
(4) Disconnect the terminal and then replace the MSH6/MSH7.
Ensure that the elevation unit front cover cable connector is left connected. MSH6 replacement
(2) Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position. Elevation unit
(4) Place the exposure/reader unit at its lowermost position.
Bracket
Pan-head
(5) Place the grip handle up-down switch in the upper position to raise the grip handle. M3x10 x2
MSH6
Check that the grip handle ascent comes to a stop when the actuator (height adjust- MSH6
ment member) turns OFF the MSH6. BR M3x12 x2
(6) Place the grip handle up-down switch in the lower position to lower the grip handle.
Check that the grip handle descent comes to a stop when the actuator turns OFF the
MSH7.
MSH7
Grip handle
Terminal
Elevation unit front cover Actuator Cable

clamp
FR
0.2–0.3mm ON
T
Grip handle
up-down switch MSH6 The up-down reversal of the above-indicated mounting
direction applies to the MSH7.
FR1H6510.EPS

After completion of installation, inspect the MSH6/MSH7.
Actuator
MSH7
FR
0.2–0.3mm
ONT
FR1H1612.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/ ■ Replacement Procedure
Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSH8/MSH9) (1) When replacing the MSH8, remove the elevation unit left-hand side cover. When
replacing the MSH9, remove the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover.
If switch MSH8/MSH9 is found abnormal during inspection, replace it and then inspect the “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
newly installed one. (2) Remove the MSH8/MSH9.
(3) Disconnect the connector (MSH8/MSH9).
(1) When inspecting the MSH8, remove the elevation unit left-hand side cover. When
inspecting the MSH9, remove the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover.
(2) Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position. (2)
MSH8
(3) Turn ON the machine circuit breaker. Sems M3x14 x2
(4) Press the elevation panel switch to move the exposure/reader unit up and down. Elavation unit
Check that the exposure/reader unit vertical motion comes to a stop when the actuator T
turns OFF the MSH8/MSH9. ON
FR
(3)
Connector
Actuator
(MSH8)
MSH8
Elevation unit
(3)
Elevation panel Connector
switch (MSH9)
T
FR ON
ON FR
T
(2)
MSH9
MSH9 Sems M3x14 x2
FR1H6065.EPS
(4) Accomplish installation by reversing the removal procedure.

Actuator
FR
ON (5) While conducting an inspection, check the distance between the base and lifting frame.
T
FR1H1614.EPS
Perform distance checkout in both the uppermost and lowermost positions.
Lifting frame
Uppermost position
1120 ± 3mm
Lowermost
position 376 ± 3mm
Base FR1H1613.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.8 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH1) 12.9 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH3)
CAUTION ■ Replacement Procedure

When servicing a board, be sure to ground your body with a wristband. If your body is not (1) Remove the controller cover.
grounded, the static buildup on your body may damage electronic parts on the board. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
(2) Disconnect the connector (MTH08B/E CN29).
■ Replacement Procedure (3) Remove the two mounting screws.
(1) Remove the following covers. (4) Remove the FANH3.
• Exposure unit front cover Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps.
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover After completion of installation, turn ON the power to verify the direction of an air current.
(2) Remove the following boards from the exposure unit. Elevation unit (2)
• SNS08B board Connector
(CN29)
Remove the one mounting screws and disconnect connectors (CN1 to CN6, CN8,
CN10 and CN11).
• SCN08C board
Remove the one mounting screws and disconnect connectors (SCN08C CN1 to (3), (4)
CN9, and CN12, SCR08C CN1 to CN6). FANH3
WI
BR M4x30 x2 ND
(3) Remove the FANH1 and its bracket as an assembly. Guard
Loosen the two screws and then lift the bracket up and out.
FR
O NT
(4) Disconnect the connector (FANH1).
(5) Remove the bracket and replace the FANH1. FR
O NT
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. FR1H6067.EPS
After completion of installation, turn ON the power to verify the direction of an air current.
(3) Loosen
BR screw x2
WI
ND
T
ON
FR
HHS Label #2 (4) Connector Guard
(FANH1)
(5) Bracket
Sems M4x52 x2
(5) FANH1
(5) Nut
FR1H6066.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.10 Replacing the Board Cooling Fan (FANH4) 12.11 Replacing the Grid Handle Drive Motor (MH2)
■ Replacement Procedure (1) Remove the grip handle elevation assembly.
(1) Remove the controller cover. “12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation Assembly”
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” ◆ NOTE ◆
(2) Disconnect the connector. Ensure that the removed elevation assembly is laid on its side.
(4) Remove the FANH4. (2) Cut the cable tie.
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. (3) Disconnect the terminals from the capacitor.
After completion of installation, turn ON the power to verify the direction of an air current. (4) Remove the four mounting hex socket head bolts.
(5) While removing the timing belt, demount the MH2.
(6) Remove the timing belt pulley and then replace the MH2.
JPS-3
Elevation assembly
(Laid on its side)
(4), (5)
MH2
Hex socket head bolt (2) Cable tie
(2) Connector M5x25 x4
ND
(6) Setscrew
WI (3), (4)
FANH4
Sems M3x30 x4 (6) Timing belt
pulley
FR1H6068.EPS
(4) Nut x4
(3)
Terminals
Capacitor
(5) Timing belt

FR1H6511.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. 12.12 XXXXX

◆ NOTE ◆
• When installing the timing belt, ensure that the setscrew comes into contact with the flat-
machined surface of the motor shaft.
MH2
Setscrew
Timing belt
pulley
Setscrew
Flat-
machined
surface
Timing belt Motor shaft

pulley
FR1H6512.EPS
• When installing the MH2, fix it in a position at which the timing belt is taut.
MH2
Timing belt
FR1H6513.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Exposure unit rear cover

Claws
(1) Remove the filter cover from the exposure unit rear cover.
Filter
The filter cover is retained by a magnet. Remove the filter cover by moving it in the Exposure unit cover
opening direction. rear cover
Controller
(2) Remove the air filter from the inside of the filter cover.
cover
(3) Mount a new air filter on the filter cover.
Magnets
Push the air filter properly into the four corners of the filter cover.
(4) Attach the filter cover to the exposure unit rear cover.
Lodge the filter cover claws in the holes in the exposure unit rear cover. Air filter
● Controller cover
Exposure unit right-hand side cover
(1) Remove the two louvers from the controller cover.
You should remove the louvers while lifting them.
(2) Remove the air filter from the inside of the louver.
Pull the air filter up and out.
Claws
(3) Attach a new air filter to each louver.
(4) Attach each louver to the controller cover. Filter
cover
Lodge the louver claws in the holes in the controller cover. T
ON
FR
● Exposure unit right-hand side cover Air filter
(1) Remove the filter cover from the exposure unit right-hand side cover. Air filter
The filter cover is retained by a magnet. Remove the filter cover by moving it in the
opening direction. Magnets
(2) Remove the air filter from the inside of the filter cover. Louver
FR1H4006.EPS

(4) Attach the filter cover to the exposure unit right-hand side cover.
Lodge the filter cover claws in the holes in the exposure unit right-hand side cover.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation (5) Loosen the screws on the top of the elevation unit.
(6) Disconnect the two connectors (CNMSH6/MSH7 and CNMH2).
Assembly
(7) Remove the decorative cover and elevation assembly.
(5)
■ Removal Procedure Elevation unit Loosen screw x2
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit and grip handle in
the lowermost position.
(2) Remove the elevation unit front cover. (7)
Decorative cover
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” Sems M3x6 x2
(3) When replacing the elevation assembly, remove the magnet attachment bracket from
the elevation assembly.
When you intend to reinstall the elevation assembly after its removal, you do not have
to remove the magnet attachment bracket. (7)
Elevation assembly
(4) Remove the grip handle. BR M6x12 x6
(4)
Grip handle
Countersunk M5x12 x2
Elevation unit
FR
ON
T
(6) CNMSH6, 7
(6) CNMH2
FR1H6426.EPS
(3)
Magnet attachment
bracket
Sems M3x6 x2
FR
ON
T
FR1H6425.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Installation Procedure (9) Move the grip handle up and down to perform the following checks.
If the elevation assembly has been removed, mount it in the elevation unit by performing the
following steps. CAUTION
(1) Make sure that the exposure/reader unit is at its lowermost position. Perform the following up-down operation checks with due care. If they are conducted
If not, press the elevation panel switch to place the unit in the lowermost position. carelessly, the grip handle may bump against the ceiling or exposure/reader unit and
become damaged.
(2) Loosen the two screws on the top of the elevation unit.
If you do not loosen the two screws, they will obstruct the installation of a decorative
cover. • Check that the elevation arm-to-elevation unit clearance for the front side is equal to
that for the rear side.
(3) Mount the elevation assembly and a new decorative cover on the elevation unit.
If the clearances are not the same, turn OFF the power, loosen the elevation assembly
◆ NOTES ◆ retaining bracket screws, and adjust the elevation assembly position in the front-rear
• When installing the decorative cover, position it in the groove in the elevation unit. direction.
• The elevation assembly must be mounted while it is pressed against the right-hand
end. Clearance
Elevation unit FR
ON
(4) Connect the two connectors (CNMSH6/MSH7 and CNMH2). T
(5) Install the grip handle.

(6) Tighten the screws that were loosened in step (2).
Elevation
assembly
retaining
bracket
Screw x4
FR1H6427.EPS
• Check that the grip handle does not come into contact with the exposure/reader unit.
Check whether the grip handle interference prevention interlock switch (MSH5)
mounted in the exposure/reader unit normally functions.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
• Check that the grip handle properly stops at the uppermost position and lowermost ■ Adjusting the Grip Handle
position.
• If the grip handle is not leveled, level it by adjusting the leveling screw.
After completion of leveling, apply screw-locking bond to the leveling screw.
CAUTION
The uppermost position for the newly installed grip handle is 2400 mm high. However,
if the ceiling height is less than 2400 mm, do not lift the grip handle up to the upper-
most position. In such an instance, you should also adjust the height of the grip
handle.
“■ Adjusting the Grip Handle Height”
Uppermost Level the grip
position handle. Leveling screw
Grip handle
2400 mm
FR1H6429.EPS
• If the grip handle hinge is too tight or loose, remove the bolster joint end washer from
the hinge and then adjust the two setscrews.
When the hinge is too tight - - -> Loosen the setscrews.
When the hinge is too loose - - -> Tighten the setscrews.
FR1H6428.EPS
Setscrews
Bolster joint end washer

Countersunk M4x8
FR1H1615.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Adjusting the Grip Handle Height 12.15 Inspecting and Replacing the Emergency Stop Switch
If the ceiling is positioned lower than the grip handle uppermost position (2400 mm high), (ESH1)
lower the grip handle uppermost position.
To lower the grip handle uppermost position, perform the following steps. If you encounter any abnormality during an ESH1 inspection, replace the ESH1 and then
(1) Lift the grip handle until the height adjustment member is visible from the elevation inspect the newly installed ESH1.
assembly window.
(2) Remove the height adjustment member. ■ Inspection Procedure
While the exposure/reader unit moves up and down, press the emergency stop switch to
◆ NOTE ◆
check that the unit comes to a stop.
Do not drop the height adjustment member or its screws into the elevation assembly.
Emergency stop switch
(3) Lower the grip handle. Mount the height adjustment member using appropriate holes.
Elevation unit
Height adjustment
member holes
Elevation unit FR
ON
T
Height
adjustment
member
Truss M4x8 x2
FR
O NT
FR1H6084.EPS
Microswitch
(1) Remove the elevation unit left-hand side cover.
(2) Remove the ESH1 and its bracket as an assembly.
FR1H6430.EPS
(3) Disconnect the two terminals.
(4) Move the grip handle up and down to make sure that it stops at the new uppermost
(3) Terminal (yellow)
position (the height adjustment member turns ON the microswitch). Sems M3x8
N T
RO (square washer attached)
(5) Install the elevation unit front cover. F
(3) Terminal (white)
Sems M3x8
(square washer attached)
ESH1
(2) Bracket
BR M5x10 x2
FR1H6085.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Depress the white button on the ESH1 to remove Part A. 12.16 Replacing the Heat Sink
(5) Rotate Part B until it comes off.
(6) Remove Part C from the bracket.
(7) Replace the ESH1 (Parts A, B, and C).
(4) White button
(5) Part B “5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor”
(2) Remove the duct bracket.
(2)
Bracket
Duct bracket
BR M4x8 x10
(4) Part A
(6) Part C
T
ON
FR
Screw section
FR1H6086.EPS

◆ NOTES ◆
• When installing Part C, orient it so that its screw section faces down.
• When making terminal connections, connect the white cable to terminal 1 of Part A
and the yellow cable to terminal 2. After completion of terminal connection, close the
black cover of Part A.
FR1H6523.EPS
(3) Remove the screws (sems M4x8 x4).

Remove the screws at the four corners. Do not remove the six inner screws because
they secure the lower heat sink plate.
Terminal (yellow)
Top view
2
1 Terminal (white)
Black cover
Part A FR1H6087.EPS
(3)
Sems M4x8 x4
Heat sink
FRONT
FR1H6525.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Remove the heat sink. 12.17 XXXXX

(4)
Heat sink 12.18 XXXXX
T
ON
FR
FR1H6524.EPS

◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the duct bracket, position its notched end on the right-hand side (on
which the fan connector cables are wired).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Disconnect the TB3 and DC OUT1 cable/connector from the top of the JPS-3.
13. Power Supply Units
(5) Disconnect the rear power cable (TB1).
13.1 Replacing the JPS-3 (6) Disconnect the ground wire (FGG49).
(8) Remove power supply unit (JPS-3).
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. After completion of installation,
perform voltage checks.
WARNING
“■ Voltage Checks”
To avoid electric shock hazards, turn OFF the circuit breakers on the machine and distribution
switchboard before performing the procedure below.
(4) Transparent cover
Sems M3x6 x2
(1) Remove the controller cover.
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” Pan-head M4x8
(2) Disconnect the front connectors (AC OUT2, DC OUT2, 3, CN6, CN9, CN10, CN13, Bracket
and CN14). Sems M3x6
(3) Disconnect the rear connectors (AC OUT1, CN3, CN4, CN7, CN11, CN12, and CN15).
+5V
If the foot switch and the second unit are used, disconnect their connectors (CN5 and GND
CN8). TB3
DC OUT1
(2) JPS-3 front connectors (5) TB1
DC OUT2
AC OUT2
DC OUT3
(6)
FGG49
BR M4x8
CN13 CN9 CN6
CN10 (7), (8)
CN14 JPS-3
BR M4x8 x4
(3) JPS-3 rear connectors
FR1H6195.EPS
CN5
L1
TB1 L2
AC OUT1
AC OUT1 CN12
CN3
CN11
CN4 CN7
CN8 CN15
FR1H6190.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 13 - 1 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MC 13- 2

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Voltage Checks 13.2 Replacing the JPS-7

WARNING
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following precautions. ■ Replacement Procedure
• Do not touch the power supply terminals. (1) Remove the exposure unit bottom cover.
• When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probes (metal portions) of a tester. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
Make voltage measurements at the following points.
First loosen the two screws and then move the cover bracket forward and out.
If any measured voltage does not agree with the specified one, make necessary adjustments
(3) Disconnect the connectors (DC OUT1 to OUT6, and OUT8, CN1, CN4, and CN6, AC
by rotating the associated voltage adjustment trimmer.
IN1, and AC OUT1, 2).
Measurement point Specified value Adjustment trimmer
(4) Remove the two mounting screws.
Between MTH08B/E board terminals TB1-1 and TB1-3 +5.1V+0
-0.1 JPS3 +5V ADJ.
Between HDD CNJ2 connector pins 1 and 2 +12V±0.4 JPS3 +12V ADJ.
(5) Remove power supply unit (JPS-7).
Between JPS-3 fan connector pin 2 and CN12 connector pin 2 +24V±0.5 JPS3 +24V ADJ. Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. After completion of installation,
perform voltage checks.
“■ Voltage Checks”
1
2
TB1 3
4
MTH08B board
T
ON
FR
(4), (5)
JPS-7
BR M4x8 x2
T
ON
FR
HDD/FDD rear view
CNJ1 CNJ2
1 2 3 4
HDD
FDD
Cover bracket
Truss M4x8 x2
(3) JPS-7
JPS-3 front view JPS-3 rear view
ACOUT2
4 8 DCOUT4 CN6
DCOUT8
+5V ADJ. DCOUT1
1 Fan 1 5 DCOUT3
2
+12V ADJ. connector 2 4
1 3 DCOUT5 DCOUT6
+24V ADJ. ACOUT1
+15V +15VH +15VA -15VA +5V +24V
1 ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ACIN1
2
CN4 CN1
DCOUT2
FR1H6136.EPS
CN12
FR1H6088.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Voltage Checks
DRV08B board (DC+24V, DC+5V check) SNS08B board (DC +5 V check)
WARNING
CN3 CN2
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following precautions. CN8
• Do not touch the power supply terminals. 0V
• When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probes (metal portions) of a tester. CN5
0V
24V1 CN2
NFB2
CN1 5V
CAUTION 5V CN4
When removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the
Make voltage measurements at the following points.

SCN08C/SCR08C board
If any measured voltage does not agree with the specified one, make necessary
adjustments by rotating the associated voltage adjustment trimmer. TP1 TP7 TP29 TP4
Measurement point Specified value Adjustment trimmer TP28 TP8 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP2 TP1 TP2 TP8 TP28 TP5 TP27
• Between DRV08B board check pins 24V and 0V +24V±1.0V JPS-7+24V ADJ.
• Between SNS08B board check pins +5VS and 0V +5V±0.1V JPS-7+5V ADJ.
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP43 and TP41 +4.50V – +5.50V SCN08C board
and between SCR08C board check pins TP43 and TP41 +4.50V – +5.50V JPS-3+5V ADJ. TP43
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP1 and TP2 +5V±0.1V TP41 SCR08C board
and between SCR08C board check pins TP1 and TP2 +5V±0.1V JPS-7+5V ADJ.
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP4 and TP28 +15V±0.5V
and between SCR08C board check pins TP4 and TP28 +15V±0.5V JPS-7+15VA ADJ.
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP8 and TP28 -15V±0.5V TP38
and between SCR08C board check pins TP8 and TP28 -15V±0.5V JPS-7-15VA ADJ.
TP3
• Between SCN08C board check pins TP3 and TP38 +24V±1.0V JPS-7+24V ADJ.
• Between JPS-7 DCOUT5-1 and DCOUT5-3 (the “1” side must be plus (+) +15V±0.5V JPS-7+15V ADJ.
• Between JPS-7 DCOUT4-1 and DCOUT4-2 (the “1” side must be plus (+) +15V±0.5V JPS-7+15VH ADJ. JPS-7 (DC+15V check)
◆ NOTE ◆ JPS-7
DCOUT3 ACOUT2
When making adjustments with the JPS-3 +5V ADJ. trimmer, ensure that a voltage of +5.1 V 4 8 CN6
1 3 DCOUT8
DCOUT1
(±0, -0.1 V) is present between TB1 terminal block pins 1 and 3 on the MTH08B board. 1 5 DCOUT4
2 4
1 3 DCOUT5 DCOUT6
ACOUT1
+15V +15VH +15VA -15VA +5V +24V
ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. ACIN1
CN4 CN1
DCOUT2
FR1H6527.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
13.3 Replacing the JPS-3 Fuses ■ Replacement Procedure (F1 of DC Unit)
The following table shows the fuses installed in the elevation unit power supply (JPS-3). WARNING
To avoid electrical shock hazard, turn OFF the distribution switchboard circuit breaker before
Section Name Rated voltage Rated current Remarks
performing the procedure below.
Elevation unit board F1 250 V, 1 A For elevation unit cooling fan

DC unit F1 250 V, 2.5 A For JPS-3 AC input
(1) Remove the JPS-3.
Insulating F1 250 V, 8 A For elevation unit hydraulic pump, “13.1 Replacing the JPS-3”
transformer solenoid valve, grip handle AC (2) Remove the JPS-3 front cover.
motor, and solenoid brake
F2 250 V, 2.5 A
(3) Replace the F1 of the DC unit.
Sequence unit F1 250 V, 2 A Accomplish reassembly by reversing the preceding steps.
F2 250 V, 2 A
JPS-3
■ Replacement Procedure (Except for DC Unit Fuse F1)

F1
WARNING
Cover
To avoid electrical shock hazard, turn OFF the distribution switchboard circuit breaker before DC unit
Sems M3x6 x7

(2) Remove the JPS-3 cover.
(3) Replace the fuse. Pan-head M4x8
Accomplish reassembly by reversing the above steps.
Insulating transformer Countersunk

M3x4 x2
Sems M4x8
Sequence unit
F1 Sems M4x8 x2 FR1H6501.EPS
F2 F1
F2
Elevation
unit F1
board
JPS-3 cover
Countersunk M3x4 x14
FR1H6500.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
13.4 Replacing the JPS-7 Fuses ■ Replacement Procedure

The following table lists the fuses in the power supply (JPS-7), which is positioned toward the “13.2 Replacing the JPS-7”
exposure/reader unit.
(2) Remove the JPS-7 top cover.
Section Name Rated voltage and current Remarks
Unit 1 main board F1 250 V, 15 A For JPS-7 AC input
Unit 2 main board F2 250 V, 1 A For FFM power supply (+5 V)
F3 250 V, 3.15 A For SCN08C board power supply (+24 V)
For SCN08C board cooling fan
For JPS-7 fan
F4 250 V, 2 A For erasure unit cooling fan power supply (+24 V)
F5 250 V, 1 A For erasure unit internal thermostatic switch
F6-F9 250 V, 6.3 A For DRV08B board (+24 V) power supply (2)
Fluorescent lamp (55 W) inverter Top cover
Sems M3x6 x12
F1 250 V, 20 A For erasure lamp (55 W) inverter power supply (+24 V)
F2 250 V, 4 A For inverter protection
Fluorescent lamp (36 W) inverter
F1 250 V, 20 A For erasure lamp (36 W) inverter power supply (+24 V)
F2 250 V, 4 A For inverter protection
JPS-7
FR1H6502.EPS
(3) Replace the fuses.

• Replacing fluorescent lamp (55 W/36 W) inverter fuses F1 and F2
Replace fuses F1 and F2.
(3)
F2 (3)
F1 (3)
F2
(3)
F1
(36W)
(55W)
JPS-7
FR1H6528.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
• Replacing main board fuses F1 through F9 of units 1 and 2 13.5 Replacing the Power Supply Unit (JPS-7) Fans
Remove the fluorescent lamp (36W) inverter board and fluorescent lamp (55W)
inverter board, before replacing the F1 through F9. The JPS-7 has three fans (FAN1, FAN2, FAN3, FAN4, and FAN5). No adjustments need to
be made after they are replaced.
(36W) ACOUT2 Sems M3x8
Double-sems M3x6 x9
ACOUT3 Cable clamp
Stay “13.2 Replacing the JPS-7”
CN1 (2) Remove the fan mounting screws.
(55W)
Double-sems M3x6 x8 (3) Disconnect the fan connectors.
(4) Replace the fans.
CN2
Accomplish reassembly by reversing the preceding steps.
CN14 ACOUT3
ACOUT2
Unit 3 main board CN1 JPS-7 JPS-7
Double-sems M3x6 x6
Transparent filter FAN3

CN2
FAN2
F1
FAN4 FR
ON T
CN5 F4 T ON
FR
F5 FAN1
FAN5
(3)
Connector
FAN1: DCOUT16
Unit 1 main board
FAN2: DCOUT12
Unit 2 main board F9 FAN3: DCOUT17
F8
F3 F7
JPS-7 F6
F2
FR1H6519.EPS
Accomplish reassembly by reversing the preceding steps.

◆ NOTE ◆
Ensure that the unit 3 main body connector (CN14) and fluorescent lamp (36 W)
inverter board connector (CN2) are routed through the filter through hole and the cut. (2),(4)
(3) Connector FAN1,2,3
(2), (4)
Sems M3x30 x4
FAN4, 5
Sems M3x20 x4
FR1H6503.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Replacing the HDD

14. HDD
◆ NOTES ◆
14.1 Replacing the HDD • When handling the HDD, do not shock it.
• When removing and installing the HDD, do not use a magnet screwdriver.
■ Setting the HDD (1) Remove the controller unit cover.

Short-pin settings for each HDD are illustrated below. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
<For 850S0121> (2) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
Hard disk drive bottom view
◆ NOTE ◆
J5
TE When installing the cable retaining bracket, make sure that the spiral tube and cable tie
for the HDD connecting cable do not lie beneath the cable retaining bracket. Also
check to ensure that the cable retaining bracket does not interfere with the edge guard.
(3) Pull out the HDD connecting cable from the HDD connectors (CNJ1 and CNJ2).
(2) #2 [Remove]
Cable retaining bracket
FRONT
(3) #2 [Cut] Cable tie

Cable tie
FR1H6078.EPS Fan mounting bracket
<For 850S0080, 850S0085> FDD connecting cable Spiral tube

Hard disk drive bottom view
Edge guard
TERM PWR
SCSI TERM
TRGT INIT
34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
FRONT
HDD connecting cable

<For 850Y0112>
HDD bottom
Controller rack
J2
(3) [Pullout]
TP2
TE
#1 Connectors (CNJ1, 2)
(2) #1 [Loosen] Screw x2
FR8H3000.EPS
J6
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
FRONT
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
FR4H6089.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Remove the fan together with the bracket. (5) Remove the PC connecting cable.
◆ NOTE ◆ (6) Remove the disk drive assembly.
When installing the fan mounting bracket, use care not to pinch the FDD connecting (7) Remove the HDD.
cable.
Also check to ensure that the fan mounting bracket does not interfere with the edge
guard.
Fan (FANH10)
Fan mounting bracket
ND #2 [Remove] Controller rack

WI Cable clamp
#3 [Loosen] #1 [Pullout]
Screw x2 Connector (CN28)
FDD connecting cable
T FR
ON ON
FR T
MTH08B/E board
Disk drive assembly
(7) [Remove]
HDD Sems M4x8 x4
Fan mounting bracket FAN cable (6) #1 [Loosen]
FDD
Screw x4
PC connecting cable
(5) #1 [Remove] Screw x2
Cable clamp (5) #2 [Remove] BRM 4x8
(6) #2 [Pullout] Connector (CNJ1, 2) FDD rear view
HDD
CNJ2 CNJ1
FDD
FR8H3021.EPS
Edge guard
(8) Check the settings of the new HDD to be replaced.
“■ Setting the HDD”
FDD connecting cable HDD connecting cable
(9) Install the new HDD.
FR8H3020.EPS For installation, reverse the removal steps.
(10) Format the HDD and reinstall the software.
“18.2 Formatting Hard Disk” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
“18.1 Installing the Software (Application)” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
(11) Turn ON the power and verify that the machine starts up normally.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
14.2 Replacing the HDD (ST318416N/WED4550-003/WED9100- ● SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112) ● HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW (850Y0117)
003) 364S0006 356N8875B

364S0006
119Y0054A
356N8875B
356N9020
119Y0054A
◆ NOTES ◆
• When handling the HDD, do not shock it.
113Y1661A
This section describes the procedures for replacing the old-type HDD with a new one ON
T 850Y0112 850Y0117
FR
(DK32DJ-18MW). 356N8876
356N9024
The installation procedures are identical, although the removal procedures are different. 898Y0862
MTH08B/E board
SEAGATE/ST318416N (850Y0112)
350N2675
PART NAME PART No. QTY. 350N2190B
HDD 850Y0112 1
Bracket 356N8876 1
Bracket 356N8875B 1
*Fan (FANH10) 119Y0054A 1 ● Western Digital/WED4550-003 (850S0080)

HITACHI/DK32DJ-18MW (850Y0117) ● Western Digital/WED9100-003 (850S0085)
*Guard 364S0006 1
PART NAME PART No. QTY. (850S0080/850S0085)
Cover 350N2190B 1
Cable 136Y7197A 1 HDD 850Y0117 1
Cable 136Y7198A 1 Bracket - 356N9024 1
*Bracket - 356N8875B 1
Western Digital/WED4550-003 (850S0080)
*Fan (FANH10) - 119Y0054A 1
PART NAME PART No. QTY.
356N7461E
*Guard - 364S0006 1
HDD 850S0080 1
MTH08B/E board
Bracket - 356N9020 1
Bracket 356N7461E 1 898Y0862
CNN08B (Kit) - 113Y1661A 1
Cover 350N2190B 1 350N2190B
Cover - 350N2675 1
Cable 136Y7197A 1
Screw (6-32UNC) - 301N7000 4
Cable 136Y7198A 1
Cord clamp - 316S1160 1
Western Digital/WED9100-003 (850S0085) FR8H3001.EPS
Cable 136Y8638A 1
PART NAME PART No. QTY. 136Y8709A
Cable 136Y8639A 1
HDD 850S0085 1
*: Reusable parts
Bracket 356N7461E 1
Cover 350N2190B 1
Cable 136Y7197A 1
Cable 136Y7198A 1
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
• Consumable parts are not listed in the table above. For more detail, see the relevant
procedures.
• Reusable parts include mounting screws, in addition to those marked by *. Those
reusable parts may be reused when replacing the HDD with a new one (DK32DJ-
18MW); however, new parts contained in the kit should be used instead.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Removal (for WED4550-003/WED9100-003) ■ Removal (for ST318416N)

◆ NOTES ◆ (1) Remove the controller unit cover.
• When handling the HDD, do not shock it. “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
• When removing and installing the HDD, do not use a magnet screwdriver. (2) Remove the fan together with the bracket.
(1) Remove the controller unit cover. Fan (FANH10)

“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” Fan mounting bracket
ND
WI
(2) Disconnect the PC connecting cable.
(The PC connecting cable will be reused.) #2 [Remove]
Cable clamp
(3) Remove the disk drive assembly. #3 [Loosen] #1 [Pullout]
T Screw x2 Connector (CN28)
(4) Remove the HDD and FDD. FR
ON
(The FDD will be reused.)

ND
WI T
ON
FR
Disk drive assembly

MTH08B/E board
Controller HDD (4) [Remove]

(3)
rack Sems M4x8 x8
#1 [Loosen]
Screw x4
FR8H3002.EPS
FDD
PC connecting cable (3) Disconnect the PC connecting cable.
(2)
Cable clamp #2 [Remove] (The PC connecting cable will be reused.)
Screw x2
(2) #1 [Pullout] (4) Remove the disk drive assembly.
FR
ON CPU90E CN10 (2) #3 [Remove] BRM 4x8
T
(5) Remove the HDD and FDD.
(3) #2 [Pullout] Connector (CNJ1, 2) HDD, FDD rear view
(The FDD will be reused.)
CNJ1 CNJ2
HDD
CNJ2 CNJ1
FDD
Disk drive assembly
FR8H3003.EPS
HDD (5) [Remove]

Controller (4) Sems M4x8 x8
rack #1 [Loosen]
Screw x2
FDD
PC connecting cable
(3)
Cable clamp #2 [Remove]
Screw x2
FR
(3) #1 [Pullout]
ON
T CPU90E CN10 (3) #4 [Remove] BRM 4x8
(4) #2 [Pullout] Connector (CNJ1, 2) HDD, FDD rear view

CNJ1 CNJ2
HDD
CNJ2 CNJ1
FDD
FR8H3003.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(6) Disconnect the HDD connecting cables. ■ Installation Procedure
(1) Attach the fan (119Y0054A) and guard (364S0006) to the bracket (356N8875B).
◆ NOTES ◆
CN22
• Check the fan (FANH10) mounting orientation.
CN25 The fan (FANH10) has the air flow direction and FAN rotation direction marks. As it is
mounted correctly, the fan cable runs from above.
• Check the guard mounting orientation.
If it is mounted incorrectly, the fan blades may be damaged.
[Attach] Fan FANH10 Bracket

NT BR M4x35 x2 (119Y0054A) (356N8875B)
ON
T FRO
FR
Guard
Cable (364S0006)
#1 [Cut] Insulock tie Bracket
MTH08B/E board
ND
CN25 CN22 Guard WI
Fan
FR8H3005.EPS
(2) Attach the four screws (301S3000412) and cable clamp (316S1160) to the HDD
bracket (356N9024).
[Attach]
#2 [Pullout] Screw (301S3000412) x4
Cable x2
Cable clamp
(316S1160)
FR8H3004.EPS
FR8H3006.EPS
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The cable clamp should be positioned at the root of the screw head.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(3) Attach the CNN08B board (113Y1661A) to the HDD connecting cable (136Y8709A). (5) Install the FDD.
Connector, large CNN08B board (6) Check the settings of the HDD (850Y0117).
(for connector CNJ2) (113Y1661A) “14.1 Replacing the HDD, ■ Setting the HDD”
(7) Install the HDD (850Y0117).
◆ NOTE ◆
Spiral tube
50-pin end When installing the HDD, pay attention to the threaded holes of the bracket. For the
68-pin end
threaded holes that should not be used, see the illustration below.
50pin
HDD end HDD (850Y0117)

(136Y8709A)
50pin Connector, small

(for connector CN25)
(7) [Attach]
MTH08B/E board end FR8H3008.EPS
New screw
(301N7000) x4
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES FDD

• To attach the CNN08B board to the cable, align the 50-pin connector end of the Bracket
CNN08B board to the cable end. Its 68-pin connector end is intended for the HDD.
• The cable has two 50-pin connectors. When attaching the CNN08B board, make Threaded holes that
sure that the cable is wrapped with a spiral tube and that the larger connector is should not be used
intended for the connector CNJ2 end of the HDD.
(5) [Attach] (7)
(4) Attach the PC connecting cable to the new HDD bracket (356N9024). New screw M3x6
(308S3420306) x4
◆ NOTE ◆ FR8H3007.EPS
Use care not to drop the PC cable retaining screws onto the board or into the power
supply unit.
HDD bracket
(356N9024)
PC connecting cable
Cable clamp
#2 [Attach] #1 [Attach]
BR M4x8 Screw (308S0201) x2
FR8H3009.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(8) Connect the HDD connecting cable (136Y8709A) to the connectors (CN22, 25) of the (11) Attach edge guards of 145 mm (318N1090), 65 mm (318N1091), and 35 mm
MTH08B/E board. (318N1092).
◆ NOTE ◆ ◆ NOTE ◆
Secure the cable in place by use of an Insulock tie, so that the cable does not contact When attaching the edge guards, make sure that the fan mounting bracket
the memory board. (356N8875B) does not interfere with the cable retaining bracket (356N9020).
[Attach] Fan mounting Cable retaining

CN22 Edge guard of 145 mm bracket position bracket position
(318N1090)
CN25 CNN08B
board [Attach]
Edge guard of 65 mm
(318N1091)
T (136Y8709A)
ON
FR
T
RON [Attach]
#1 [Secure] F Edge guard of 35 mm
Insulock tie (318N1092)
MTH08B/E board
CN25 CN22
Memory T
board ON
FR
[Connect] MTH08B/E board

HDD connecting FR8H3012.EPS
cable (136Y8709A) (12) Connect the FDD connecting cable to the FDD connectors (CNJ1, 2).
FDD rear view
FR8H3010.EPS
HDD
(9) Temporarily screw down the disk drive assembly. CNJ2 CNJ1
FDD
(10) Connect the PC connecting cable to the connector (CN10) of the CPU90E board.
FR8H3013.EPS
◆NOTE ◆
(13) Connect the HDD connecting cable (136Y8709A), to which the CNN08B board
When putting the disk drive assembly into the controller unit, use care to avoid contact
(113Y1661A) has been attached, to the connectors (CNJ1, 2) of the HDD.
with the parts mounted on the board.
(136Y8709A)
Disk drive assembly
Controller HDD
(9) [Temporarily
rack
Tighten]
HDD
Screw x4
FDD
Controller rack CNJ2
FDD
(10) [Connect]
CPU90E CN10 CNN08B
CNJ1
FR8H3014.EPS
FR
ON
PC connecting cable
T
FR8H3011.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(14) Attach the cable retaining bracket (356N9020). (17) Install the controller cover.
Loosen the screws that have temporarily attached the disk drive assembly, and tighten “3. Removing and Installing the Covers”
them together with the cable retaining bracket.
◆ NOTE ◆
◆ NOTES ◆ Make sure that the wiring of the cables connected does not interfere with the controller
• Make sure that the spiral tube and cable tie for the HDD connecting cable do no lie cover.
beneath the cable retaining bracket.
• Check to ensure that the cable retaining bracket does not interfere with the edge
(18) Replace the FDD cover with a new one (350N2675).
guard.
#2 [Attach]
Cable retaining bracket Elevation
(356N9020) unit
Cable clamp
FDD FDD cover
(350N2675)
#1 Cable tie
Spiral tube #1 [Loosen]/#3 [Secure] Screw

Pan-head M3x6 x2
Edge guard
Controller rack
Cable retaining bracket #2 [Replace]
#1 [Loosen]/#3 [Secure] Screw x2 FR Pan-head M3x6 x2 Louver
(301S3000412) ON
FR8H3015.EPS T
FR8H3017.EPS
(15) Attach the fan (119Y0054A) together with the bracket.

Loosen the screws that have temporarily attached the disk drive assembly, and tighten SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
them together with the fan mounting bracket. The old FDD cover is a non-hole type, while the new FDD cover is a holed type.
(16) Secure the HDD connecting cable (136Y8709A).
The fan cable should be secured, together with the HDD connecting cable, by the (19) Format the HDD and reinstall the software.
cable clamp. “18.2 Formatting Hard Disk” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
◆ NOTES ◆ “18.1 Installing the Software (Application)” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
• When attaching the fan mounting bracket, use care not to pinch the FDD connecting (20) Turn ON the power and verify that the machine starts up normally.
cable.
• Make sure that the fan mounting bracket does not interfere with the edge guard.
(15)
Fan (FANH10)
#2 [Attach]
Fan mounting bracket Fan mounting bracket FAN cable
ND
WI (15) (16) [Secure]
(15) #5 [Secure] Cable tie
#1 [Loosen]/ Cable clamp
#3 [Secure] (15)
Screw x2 #4 [Connect]
Connector (CN28)
FDD connecting
cable Edge
guard
T
ON
FR HDD connecting
FDD connecting cable cable
MTH08B/E board
FR8H3016.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
14.3 Replacing the HDD Cooling Fan (FANH10) (5) Replace the fan (FANH10).
For installation, reverse the removal steps.
■ Replacement Procedure ◆ NOTES ◆
(1) Remove the controller unit cover. • Check the fan (FANH10) mounting orientation.
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” The fan (FANH10) has the air flow direction and FAN rotation direction marks. As it is
mounted correctly, the fan cable runs from above.
(2) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
• Check the guard mounting orientation.
◆ NOTE ◆ If it is mounted incorrectly, the fan blades may be damaged.
When installing the cable retaining bracket, make sure that the spiral tube and cable tie
for the HDD connecting cable do not lie beneath the cable retaining bracket. Also
BR M4x35, x2 Fan FANH10 Bracket
(3) Pull out the HDD connecting cable from the HDD connectors (CNJ1 and CNJ2). Cable Guard
Bracket
(2) #2 [Remove]
(3) #2 [Cut] Cable tie

Cable tie
ND
Guard WI
FDD connecting cable

Fan
Spiral tube
Edge guard
FR8H3024.EPS
(6) Turn ON the power, and check the direction of an air flow generated by the fan
(FANH10).
Controller rack
(3) [Pullout]
#1 Connectors (CNJ1, 2)
(2) #1 [Loosen] Screw x2
FR8H3000.EPS
(4) Remove the fan together with the bracket.

◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the fan mounting bracket, use care not to pinch the FDD connecting
cable.
guard.
Fan (FANH10)
Fan mounting bracket FAN cable
ND
WI
#2 [Remove]
Cable clamp
#3 [Loosen]
#1 [Pullout]
Screw x2
Connector (CN28)
FDD connecting
cable Edge
guard
O NT
FR HDD connecting
FDD connecting cable cable
MTH08B/E board
FR8H3022.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Remove the fan together with the bracket.
15. FDD
◆ NOTE ◆
15.1 Replacing the FDD When installing the fan mounting bracket, use care not to pinch the FDD connecting
cable.
■ Setting the FDD guard.
The FDD short-pin settings are illustrated below.
Fan (FANH10)
● For 850S0088/850S0089 Fan mounting bracket FAN cable
ND
WI
#2 [Remove]
Cable clamp
#3 [Loosen]
FDD #1 [Pullout]
Screw x2
Connector (CN28)
FR8H3018.EPS
FDD connecting
cable Edge
■ Replacing the FDD guard
NT
F RO HDD connecting
◆ NOTES ◆ FDD connecting cable cable
MTH08B/E board
• When handling the HDD, do not shock it. FR8H3022.EPS
(5) Remove the PC connecting cable.
(1) Remove the controller unit cover. (6) Remove the disk drive assembly.
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” (7) Remove the HDD and FDD.
(2) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
Disk drive assembly
◆ NOTE ◆ (7) [Remove]
HDD Sems M4x8 x8
When installing the cable retaining bracket, make sure that the spiral tube and cable tie (6)
Controller
for the HDD connecting cable do not lie beneath the cable retaining bracket. Also rack
#1 [Loosen] FDD
Screw x4
PC connecting cable
(5) #1 [Remove] Screw x2
(3) Pull out the HDD connecting cable from the HDD connectors (CNJ1 and CNJ2). Cable clamp (5) #2 [Remove] BRM 4x8
(6) #2 [Pullout] Connector (CNJ1, 2) FDD rear view
Fan mounting bracket (2) #2 [Remove]
Cable retaining bracket FR HDD
ON CNJ2 CNJ1
T FDD
(3) #2 [Cut]
FR8H3023.EPS
Cable tie
Cable tie
(8) Check the settings of the new FDD to be replaced.
“■ Setting the FDD”
(9) Install the new FDD.
Spiral tube For installation, reverse the removal steps.
Edge guard
(10) Turn ON the power and verify that the machine starts up normally.
Controller rack
FDD connecting cable HDD connecting cable

(3) [Pullout]
(2) #1 [Loosen] Screw x2 #1 Connectors (CNJ1, 2)
FR8H3019.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
16. Removing and Installing the Control Rack
(2) Disconnect all connectors from the TLB08A board.
(3) Disconnect the following connectors.
• Floppy disk drive connectors CN1 and CN2
• MTH08B/E board connectors CN20 and CN21
• XPC08A board connectors CN3 to CN7
• CPU90E board connectors CN6, CN8, CN10, and CN18
• BPS08A board connectors CN3 to CN5
• JPS-3 connectors TB3 and DC OUT1
(4) Free the NK clamps and ties that are attached to the control rack.
(5) Remove the two mounting screws and loosen them.
(6) Remove the control rack.
Slide the rack forward and out of its position.
(3) Transparent cover

Sems M3x6 x2
Pan-head M4x8
Bracket (5) Loosen screw x2

Sems M3x6
+5V
GND
TB3
DC OUT1
JPS-3
(5), (6)
Controller rack
(3) NK clamp BR M4x8 x2
BR M4x8
(4) Ties
FR1H6191.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(6) Insert the maintenance pins into the holes in the elevation unit frame.
17. Elevation Unit
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure The maintenance pin is normally bound to the valve assembly with a tie.
–#2043
CAUTION Elevation panel switch
When disconnecting the hydraulic piping, be sure to complete the following procedure to pre-
vent the oil from scattering.
Exposure/reader
unit
Machine circuit breaker
Distribution switchboard circuit breaker Tie
Valve assembly
Elevation unit front cover (Leave the cable connected. Remove the screws only.)
Maintenance pin
Controller cover
#2044–
Distribution switchboard circuit breaker Pin
T
Machine circuit breaker ON
FR
Hole
(5) Press the elevation panel switch to position the exposure/reader unit about 550 mm
above the floor surface.
Tie
Valve assembly
Elevation panel switch Maintenance pin

FR4H6071.EPS
(7) Press the elevation panel switch to lower the exposure/reader unit until it comes into
contact with the pins.
Up-down foot
switch CAUTION
To relieve the hydraulic pressure within the piping, hold down the descent button of the
550 mm approx. elevation panel switch for a period of 20 to 30 seconds.
FR1H6070.EPS

Machine circuit breaker
Distribution switchboard circuit breaker

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
17.2 Pulling Out the Pump Assemblies (4) Disconnect the joint between the solenoid valve and high-pressure hose.
◆ NOTE ◆
WARNING When disconnecting the high-pressure hose, rotate the hose screw with the nipple
securely fixed. If the nipple is not secured, it warps to incur oil leakage.
To avoid electrical shock hazard, turn OFF the distribution switchboard circuit breaker before
–#2043
(1) Relieve the hydraulic pressure.
High-pressure
“17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure” hose
(2) Cut the ties that bundle the connector cables. Direction of
screw rotation
(3) Disconnect the connectors (fan connector and motor pump junction connector).
(3) Fan connector
(2) Tie
Valve assembly
FR4H6183.EPS
NK clamp
BR M4x10
#2044–
Washer x2
(2) Tie
High-pressure
hose
Direction of
(3) Junction connector screw rotation
(2) Tie
FR4H6189.EPS
Tunk Valve assembly FR4H9070.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(5) Disconnect the low-pressure hose from the inlet (IN) of the motor pump. 17.3 Replacing the Elevation Drive Cooling Fan (FANH5)
◆ NOTE ◆
Plug the disconnected low-pressure hose, otherwise oil leakage occurs. ■ Replacement Procedure
(1) Pull out the pump assembly.
Hose band “17.2 Pulling Out the Pump Assembly”
Motor pump (2) Remove the FANH5.
This requires removing four screws.
(2)
Low-pressure FANH5
hose
Sems M3x42 x4
FR1H6184.EPS
Motor pump
Guard
(7) Pull the pump assembly leftward and out.
Motor pump
Fan
Pump assembly
FR4H6177.EPS
(6), (7)
Pump assembly
BR M5x10 x4
FR4H6176.EPS
Accomplish reassembly by reversing the pullout steps.

After the pump assembly is returned to its original position, perform oil level and ascent/
descent speed checks.
“3.11 Checking the Oil Tank Oil Level and Hydraulic Hoses”, “17.10 Checking the
Descent Speed”, and “17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed” in the “Preventive
Maintenance” volume.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
17.4 Pulling Out the Valve Assembly (6) Pull out the valve assembly.
–#2043
“17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure” (5) High-pressure hose
(5)
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CN1-CN4). High-
(5) Low-pressure hose pressure
(3) Cut the tie that bundles the connector cables. hose
Screw
Nipple
Hose
band (4)
Valve assembly
(5) BR M5x10 x3
Low-
pressure
hose
FR4H6178.EPS
(2) CN1-4
#2044– (5) Low-pressure hose
(5) High-pressure hose
(5)
High-
pressure
hose
Valve assembly
(3) Tie Screw
FR4H6194.EPS
Hose Nipple
band
(5)
Low-
(4) Remove the three mounting screws. pressure (4)
hose Valve assembly
(5) Disconnect the four hoses. BR M5x10 x3
◆ NOTE ◆
When disconnecting the high-pressure hose, rotate the hose screw with the nipple
FR4H9071.EPS
securely fixed. If the nipple is not secured, it warps to incur oil leakage.
Accomplish installation by reversing the pullout steps.
◆ NOTES ◆
• Ensure that no dirt or dust enters the hose inlets.
• After high-pressure hose installation, make sure that the high-pressure hose joint is
fully tightened. Also, touch the joint area to check for oil leaks.
• Any spilt oil must be wiped off.
After completion of installation, perform oil level and ascent/descent speed checks.
“3.11 Checking the Oil Tank Oil Level and Hydraulic Hoses”, “17.10 Checking the
Descent Speed”, and “17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed” in the “Preventive
Maintenance” volume.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
17.5 Replacing the Valve Coils 17.6 Checking for Oil Leaks
If the oil tank oil level is lower than the “min” line marking on the reference label while the
■ Replacement Procedure exposure/reader unit is at its lowermost position, it is conceivable that there may be oil leaks.
(1) Pull out the valve assembly. In such an instance, perform the following procedure to check for oil leaks (hydraulic hoses).
“17.4 Pulling Out the Valve Assembly”
(2) Remove the two valve coils.
–#2043 Elevation unit front cover
Controller cover
Elevation unit left-hand side cover
(2) Perform the following checks on the hydraulic hoses and the associated piping.
• Checking for torn, deformed, or otherwise abnormal hydraulic hoses
• Checking the hydraulic hose joints for oil seepage
• Checking the hydraulic hose piping for abnormalities
Valve coil x2
Screw x2 Pump assembly
Valve assembly FR4H6179.EPS
#2044–
High-
pressure
hose
FR4H6181.EPS
Valve coil x2
Screw x2
Valve assembly FR4H9072.EPS

After installation, perform ascent/descent speed checkout.
“17.10 Checking the Descent Speed”, “17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
–#2043 17.7 Replacing the Elevation Drive Hydraulic Pump Motor (MH1)
High- ■ Replacement Procedure

pressure (1) Pull out the pump assembly.
hose
“17.2 Pulling Out the Pump Assembly”
(2) Disconnect the ground wire.
Ground wire
Motor pump
Valve assembly
FR
ON
T
#2044–
High-
pressure
hose
FR1H6185.EPS
(3) Remove the capacitor.

“17.8 Replacing the Capacitor”
(4) Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the pump assembly.
(5) Remove MH1.
Valve assembly
FR4H9073.EPS
T
ON
FR (5)
MH1
High-
pressure
hose
Down safety
valve
(4) Nut x3
FR1H6186.EPS
FR1H6182.EPS
(3) Install the removed covers.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Accomplish installation by reversing the removal steps. 17.8 Replacing the Capacitor
◆ NOTES ◆
• When installing the high-pressure hose, ensure that the O-ring (rubber ring) and WARNING
spacer are properly positioned in the high-pressure hose inlet.
• Ensure that no dirt or dust enters the inlet. To avoid electrical shock hazard, turn OFF the distribution switchboard circuit breaker before
After completion of installation, perform ascent/descent speed checkout.
“17.10 Checking the Descent Speed”, “17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed” ■ Replacement Procedure
Controller cover
(2) Remove the capacitor from the case.
(3) Remove the rubber cap.
(4) Disconnect the lead wire.
(5) Remove the capacitor.
Rubber cap
Lead wire
Case
Capacitor
FR4H6187.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
17.9 Replacing the TLB08A Board 17.10 Checking the Descent Speed
◆ NOTE ◆
WARNING
When making adjustments to increase the descent speed, ensure that the time required for the
To avoid electric shock hazards, turn OFF the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard descent from the highest position to the lowest is about 30 seconds. If the descent speed is too
before performing the procedure set forth below. high, the down safety valve may easily actuate to inhibit the descent.
If the down safety valve actuates to prevent the exposure/reader unit from descending, you
should first lift it. This causes the down safety valve to reset and allows the exposure/reader
■ Replacement Procedure unit to descend.
■ Items Used
Controller cover
• Stopwatch
• Wrench, 13 mm (for locknut)
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CN1 to CN4).
• Wrench, 8 mm (for valve screw)
(3) If the X-ray controller connection cable and X-ray tube interlock connection cable are
connected to the TB1, disconnect them.
(4) If the X-ray tube interlock connection cable is connected to the TB2, TB3, or TB4,
disconnect it.
(5) Remove the TLB08A board. This requires removing two screws and two push-fit
retainers.
Sems M3x6 Push-fit

retainer
CN3
CN2
CN4 TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TLB08A board CN1
T
ON
FR FR1H6072.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Inspection Procedure 17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed

(2) Press the elevation panel switch to raise the exposure/reader unit to its uppermost
■ Items Used
position.
Stopwatch
(3) With a stopwatch, measure the time required for the exposure/reader unit to reach the
lowermost position.
(4) Check that the measured time is within the specified range (reference values) indi-
cated below. (1) Turn ON the power.
Acceptable range: 27 to 41 seconds (2) Press the elevation panel switch to lower the exposure/reader unit to its lowermost
position.
• If the measured time is shorter than specified
(3) With a stopwatch, measure the time required for the exposure/reader unit to reach the
Loosen the flow regulating valve locknut and rotate the valve screw in the tightening uppermost position.
direction. After completion of adjustment, tighten the locknut.
(4) Check that the measured time is within the specified range (reference values) indi-
• If the measured time is longer than specified cated below.
Loosen the flow regulating valve locknut and rotate the valve screw in the loosening Oil temperature 13 to 32°C (60 Hz)
direction. After completion of adjustment, tighten the locknut.
Requirements 20.7 to 31.0 sec
◆ NOTE ◆
Oil temperature 13 to 32°C (50 Hz)
After completion of adjustment, fully tighten the locknut to prevent the screw from
becoming loose. Requirements 25.8 to 38.8 sec
If the measured time is outside the specified range, the probable causes are as fol-
(5) If the measured time is outside the specified range, adjust the valve screw and then lows:
repeat steps (2) and (4) until satisfied. • Solenoid valve clogged with dirt
–#2043 Loosen • Relief valve clogged with dirt
Locknut
• Oil leakage
• Improperly adjusted relief valve
(5) If the measured time is outside the specified range, investigate the problem cause and
Rotate in tightening take an appropriate remedial action.
direction Screw
(Decreases the
descent speed.)
T Rotate in loosening
ON
FR direction Screw
(Increases the
descent speed.)
Valve assembly
#2044–
Loosen
Locknut
Rotate in tightening
direction Screw
(Decreases the
descent speed.)
T
ON
FR
Rotate in loosening
direction Screw
(Increases the
descent speed.)
Valve assembly
FR4H6198.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
17.12 Replacing the Cylinder ■ Removal Procedure

◆ NOTES ◆
■ Items Used • Since the cylinder is heavy, be sure to remove it with an assistant.
• The parts removed during cylinder replacement must be properly stored because they will be
The following jigs and tools are used for cylinder replacement. used for cylinder installation.
• Maintenance pins
• 6mm screw (removal screw) x2 (1) Lower the exposure/reader unit to its lowermost position and then remove the end pin
• Oil drain hose nut.
• Bucket Do not remove the end pin now.
• Piping sealant (sealing tape)
• Cleaning bottle
• Large-size wrench (ø 27)
For cylinder replacement, perform the following procedures in order named.
“■ Pre-replacement Procedure”
“■ Removal Procedure”
“■ Installation Procedure”
“■ Post-replacement Procedure”
■ Pre-replacement Procedure
(1) If the optional grip handle is installed, remove it.
(1) Nut
“12.14 Removing and Installing the Grip Handle Elevation Assembly”
(2) Lift the exposure/reader unit to its uppermost position.
(3) Remove the following covers. FR4H7011.EPS
• Elevation unit left-hand side cover

◆ NOTE ◆
• Elevation unit front cover
When removing the nut, exercise care not to bend the shutter by giving it a strong
• Controller cover push. If the shutter parallelism is impaired, an abnormal sound is generated when the
• Elevation unit right-hand side bottom cover exposure/reader unit ascends and descends.
• Exposure unit bottom cover
“3. Removing and Installing the Covers” (2) Relieve the hydraulic pressure.
“17.1 Checking the Ascent Speed”
(3) Turn OFF the circuit breakers on the machine and distribution switchboard.
(4) Remove the end pin.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(5) While pressing the top of the cylinder by hand, remove the two pins. (8) Position the rod in the cylinder.
◆ NOTE ◆
When disconnecting the hoses, provide against oil spillage.
Cylinder
T
ON
FR
FR
ON
T
(5) Hose
(6) Disconnect the Hylon hose. (9) Loosen the two setscrews on the block.
While holding down the joint, remove the Hylon hose. (10) Attach the two removal screws to the two pins in the front and rear.
◆ NOTE ◆
Firmly press down on the joint to prevent it from rotating together with the down safety Cylinder
valve. T
ON
FR
(7) Disconnect the hose. Pin
(10) Removal screw

(6) Hylon hose FR
(7) Hose ON
T
(9) Setscrew
Rotate with a wrench.
(10) Removal screw

Joint (9) Setscrew
(Secure the joint with a wrench
to prevent it from turning.) FR4H6150.EPS
(11) While holding the cylinder with your hand, have your assistant move the two pins
Cylinder outward.
FR4H6154.EPS
Ensure that the pins are not completely removed.
(11) Pin
(11) Pin
Cylinder
FR4H6151.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(12) Pull out the cylinder from the left-hand side of the elevation unit. ■ Installation Procedure
(12) ◆ NOTE ◆
Cylinder
Since the cylinder is heavy, be sure to install it with an assistant.
(1) Attach the block to a new cylinder.

(2) From the left-hand side of the elevation unit, insert the new cylinder into its position.
(3) While the cylinder is supported by an assistant, insert the end pin, and secure the end
pin with the nut.
(4) Connect the Hylon hose.
◆ NOTE ◆
Firmly press down on the joint to prevent it from rotating together with the down safety
valve.
(5) Check that the down safety valve hose is not twisted.
If it is twisted, reconnect the hose.
FR4H6196.EPS
Cylinder
(13) Loosen the setscrews.
(14) Attach the removal screws to the pins.
(15) While pressing the top of the cylinder by hand, pull out the pins, and then remove the
block. Hylon hose
(16) Replace the cylinder.
Rotate with a wrench.
Joint
(13) Setscrew
(Secure the joint with a wrench
Pin to prevent it from turning.)
Down safety valve
(14) Removal pin FR4H6155.EPS
(15) Block
(15) Pin
Cylinder
Cylinder
FR4H6152.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(6) Attach the hose nipples to the top and bottom of the cylinder. ■ Post-replacement Procedure
◆ NOTE ◆ (1) Turn ON the power.
Check that the hoses protruding beyond the hose end are not twisted or slack. If the (2) Press the elevation panel switch to raise the exposure/reader unit.
hoses are twisted or slack, reconnect them to the hose nipple. The exposure/reader unit must be raised to a height at which the maintenance pins are
no longer loaded by the exposure/reader unit.
(3) Remove the pins from the elevation unit.
Cylinder (4) Lower the exposure/reader unit to its lowermost position.
NT FR (5) Remove the sponge (air filter) from the oil tank.
O ON
FR T
(6) With the cleaning bottle or the like, pour the oil (about 500 ml) into the oil tank.
The oil must be added until the oil surface is positioned between the “max” and “min”
oil level reference lines.
(6) Hose
Sponge
(air filter)
(6) Hose
T Cleaning bottle
ON
FR
Oil tank
x
ma
FR4H6153.EPS min
◆ NOTE ◆
Oil level reference
Try to pull the hose to check that it is firmly secured. If the hose comes off, repeat line marks FR4H6073.EPS
steps (4) to (6).
◆ NOTE ◆
Accomplish installation by reversing the “■ Removal Procedure.” If the oil level is below the reference line marking, a later oil level decrease may pro-
duce an air lock in the hydraulic circuit, thereby emitting an abnormal sound or result-
ing in the exposure/reader unit’s inability to reach the uppermost position.
(7) While observing the oil level in the oil tank, lift the exposure/reader unit to its upper-
most position.
◆ NOTE ◆
Effect oil replenishment before the oil tank is emptied of oil.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
WARNING
While the elevation upper-limit interlock switch is disabled, exercise due caution be-
cause safety is not assured during an up-down operation.
(8) Remove the elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH8).

Leave the MSH8 connector connected.
“12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/Lower-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH8/MSH9)”
(9) Expel air out of the hose.
Performing an ascent operation expels air from the hose.
(10) Install the elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH8).
“12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/Lower-Limit
(11) Turn OFF the power.
(12) Set the oil tank sponge (air filter) in position.
(14) Allow the exposure/reader unit to perform its up/down operations five or six times.
Check for abnormalities such as an abnormal sound or odor.
(15) Lower the exposure/reader unit to its lowermost position (lower-limit microswitch
position).
(16) Check that the oil level is between the “max”and “min” reference line marks on the oil
tank.
If the oil surface is not positioned between the “max” and “min” oil level reference lines,
remove the oil tank sponge and add oil as needed.
(17) Install all the covers that were removed.
(18) Allow the exposure/reader unit to perform its up/down operations another five or six
times.
Check for abnormalities such as an abnormal sound or odor.
(19) Inspect the patient protection descent prevention switches
“12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock
Switches (MSH1-MSH4)”
(20) Perform ascent/descent speed checkout.
“17.10 Checking the Descent Speed”, “17.11 Checking the Ascent Speed”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Adjustment Procedure
18. Adjustment Procedure for the Gonad Protector
Shaft 1 Shaft 2
This section describes the tightening adjustments for each arm of the gonad protector.
■ Shaft Structure
(4) [Adjust] (4) [Adjust]

Nut (M6) Nut (M6)
(3) [Remove]/ (3) [Remove]/

(5) [Tighten] Spacer (5) [Tighten] Spacer
(1) [Remove]/ (2) [Remove]/(6) [Tighten] (1) [Remove]/ (2) [Remove]/(6) [Tighten]
(8) [Attach] Cap Setscrew (M5x6) (8) [Attach] Cap Setscrew (M5x6)
* Screw locking agent * Screw locking agent
FR8H6015.EPS
(1) Remove the cap.

Adjustment unnecessary (2) Remove the setscrew (M5x6).
(3) Remove the spacer.
(4) Adjust the nut (M6).
• To make the arm rotation tighter: Tighten the nut.
• To make the arm rotation looser: Loosen the nut.
(5) Attach the spacer.
Shaft 1 Shaft 2 Tighten it all the way.
Second arm
(6) Apply the screw locking agent to the setscrew (M5x6) to secure it in place.
Tighten it all the way.
319N0913B First arm

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
356N6523G
POM (φ6xφ15xt5) Recommended tightening torque: 2.2 Nm (22 Kgcm)
SUS (φ6xφ15xt1) POM (φ6xφ15xt1)
SUS (φ6xφ15xt1)
SUS (φ6xφ15xt1) Second arm
(7) Move the arm to check the tightening.
POM (φ6xφ15xt1) SUS (φ6xφ15xt1)
POM (φ6xφ15xt1) If the adjustment is insufficient, repeat from step (2) again.
SUS (φ6xφ15xt1)
SW6 SUS (φ6xφ15xt1) (8) Attach the cap.
SW6
M6 nut M6 nut
Spacer Spacer
Setscrew (M5x6) Setscrew (M5x6)
Cap Cap
FR8H6010.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
19. Tools Thin-blade screwdriver Phillips stubby screwdriver

Reference type: NO.110-4 Reference type: NO.135-4
19.1 Standard Tools Reference manufacturer: PB Reference manufacturer: PB
◆ NOTE ◆ Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been inspected and Remarks: Remarks:
calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been in-
spected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. FR1H1779.EPS FR1H1780.EPS
Adjustable wrench 150mm Nippers 150mm Thin-blade stubby screwdriver High-frequency screwdriver
Reference type: NO.195-2 Reference type: D-29
Reference type: W-120 Reference type: N-25
Reference manufacturer: PB Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
HOZAN
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks: Remarks:
Jeweler's screwdriver set Combination box-open-end wrench (5.5mm)

Long-nose pliers 150mm Pliers 150mm
Reference type: NO.146 Reference type: M41-5.5
Reference type: P-22 Reference type: JP-200
Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: KTC
ENGINEER
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks: Remarks:
Water pump pliers Tweezers 125mm Combination box-open-end wrench (7mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (8mm)
Reference type: P-87 Reference type: M41-7 Reference type: M41-8
Reference type: P-245
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: KTC Reference manufacturer: KTC
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

Remarks:
Phillips screwdriver No. 1 Phillips screw driver No. 2 Combination box-open-end wrench (10mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (13mm)
Reference type: M41-10 Reference type: M41-13
Reference type: NO.6300-1 Reference type: NO.6300-2
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: KTC Reference manufacturer: KTC
VESSEL VESSEL
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks: Remarks:

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Allen wrench set Midget ratchet set Steel tape measure (5.5 m) Soldering iron (30W)
Reference type: BLX-9 Reference type: 7331 Type: WS5005 Reference type: Dash15
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:

Manufacturer: NEOLOCK
Boudhus CHAPMAN HAKKO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
FR1H1723.EPS FR1H1724.EPS FR4H1733.EPS FR1H1734.EPS
Digital tester Crimp pliers Solder Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment
Type: FLUKE77 Reference type: P-73 Reference type: NO.66 Reference type: US140
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:

Manufacturer: FLUKE HOZAN HAKKO EDSYN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1
Inspection and
calibration required
Wire stripper Scissors Adapter plug Penlight

Reference type: P-95 Reference type: — Reference type: 999-1 Reference type: BF-318
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:

HOZAN Any commercially available one HAKKO MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Cutter Calipers Loupe Blower

Reference type: — Reference type: JUMBO
Type: N-15 Reference type: 10X
Manufacturer: Mitutoyo Reference manufacturer: PEAK HURRICANE
Any commercially available one
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Inspection required Remarks: Remarks:

A block gauge for use in
inspection requires calibration.
FR1H1740.EPS
FR1H1729.EPS FR4H1730.EPS FR1H1739.EPS
Steel rule (150mm) Steel rule (300mm) Cloth Wristband

Type: Type C Type: Type C Reference type: — Reference type: –
Manufacturer: YAMAYO Manufacturer: YAMAYO Reference manufacturer: — Reference manufacturer: –
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Inspection required Inspection required

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Push-pull gauge Dosimeter Maintenance pin (stopper)

Type: — Type: Reference type: 332N0597
Manufacturer: — Manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: For 1kg. Remarks: Remarks:

Calibration required Used, for instance, to relieve
Inspection and calibration the hydraulic pressure from the
required elevation unit.
FR4H1830.EPS FR4H1875.EPS Refer to: "17.1" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment
of Parts" Volume
FR4H9074.EPS
19.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments

19.3 Special Consumables
◆ NOTE ◆
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been inspected and Electrical tape Cable tie
calibrated.
Reference type: 33+ Reference type: PLT1M
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been in-
spected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. Reference manufacturer: 3M Reference manufacturer:
KITAGAWA KOGYO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 50
Vacuum cleaner Ethanol Remarks: Remarks:

Reference type: — Reference type: —
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: —
Any commercially available one FR1H1745.EPS FR1H1746.EPS
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Cable tie Cable tie

Reference type: PLT1.5M Reference type: PLT2M

FR1H1743.EPS FR1H1742.EPS KITAGAWA KOGYO KITAGAWA KOGYO
Qty.: 50 Qty.: 50
Kim Wipe (dustless paper) Maintenance PC Remarks: Remarks:

Reference type: S-200 Reference type:

Jujo kimberley FR1H1747.EPS FR1H1748.EPS
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Loktite Lubricant

PC running on the Windows 95
or Windows NT platform Reference type: Reference type:
*** 601 rod end grease
Refer to: "3.1" in the "Maintenance Utility" volume, "Appendix 13.1" Reference manufacturer:
FR1H1744.EPS in the "Installation" volume RYOWA
FR1H1760.EPS Qty.:
Qty.: 1
Remarks:
Allen wrench Shorting connector Remarks: *** 601 430ml
Reference type: Reference type: 136Y6759
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Used to tighten or loosen the Used to disable the elevation
grip handle retaining hex interlock during cover removal.
socket head bolt.
Refer to: "Appendix 8" in the "Installation" volume Refer to: "2.3" in the "Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of
Parts" volume, "3.5" in the "Preventive Maintenance"
FR1H1761.EPS volume, "6.4" in the "Installation" volume
FR1H1785.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
19.4 Semi-Standard Tools BLANK PAGE
Semi-standard tools are tools that are not needed normally, but improve ease of servicing
when available.
Box driver (7 mm) Box driver (8 mm)

Reference type: D-50 (2757) Reference type: D-50 (2758)
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
IC clip IC clip
Reference type: TC-16 Reference type: TC-24
Reference manufacturer: 3M Reference manufacturer: 3M
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Magnetized Phillips screwdriver

Reference type:
Qty.: 1
Remarks:
FR1H1763.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20. Boards 20.2 MTH08B Board
20.1 Board Arrangement Diagrams CAUTION

When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
The locations of the machine’s PC boards are as indicated below.
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
parts mounted on the board.
HHS Label #2
DRV08B
LDD08C
PNL08B SCN08C/SCR08C ■ MTH08B board
SNS08B CN25
PNL08A CN30 F5 F4 CN26 CN23 F1
SYN08A
SWT08B CN22
Polygon driver (POL-DRV) CN28
CN27 CN18
PMT08C CN17
TLB08A
CN16
CN15 CN19
CN14
CN13
T
ON CN12
FR CN11
CN10
PHV08C CN8
PMR08C F2
HHS Label #2 CN9
CN6 CN20
CN7
CN5
SWT08B CN4 CN3
CN29
LAN90B/D CN2 CN1 F3
No. Fuse ratings
T F1-F5
ON 125V/2A CN21
FR
CPU90F F4 125V/5A
ETH90F
CN24
DMC08A FR1H7004.EPS
MTH08B/E or
HCP08A
◆ NOTE ◆
XPC08A
After MTH08B board replacement, check that the voltage between MTH08B board terminal
block (TB1) pins 1 and 3 is ± 5.1 V+0
-0.05 . If the voltage is outside the specified range, adjust it by
IMG08B/H rotating the JPS-3 voltage adjustment trimmer (+5V ADJ.).
MMC90A IMG08A
or
DIM08A
■ Fuse Checking Method
BSP08A
IMG07B
CPU90E
VGA90E
FR1H1770.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.3 MTH08E Board 20.4 CPU90E Board
CAUTION CAUTIONS
• After the CPU90E board is replaced, clear the contents of the backup memory and set the
date and time.
“2.5 Clearing Backup Memory”, “2.6 Setting Date and Time”
• When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to
■ MTH08E Board electric parts mounted on the board.
CN25
• If the lithium cell is drained, replace the board as a whole.
CN30
CN26 CN23 CN22 • The old board replaced should be sent back to the Parts Center (factory).
F5 F6
F1 • Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replaced only with the same or equip-
ment type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
CN27 CN18 CN28
CN17
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
CN16
CN15 CN19 The CR-IR344 uses the IP conveyance count for laser life management purposes.
CN14 The machine records the number of IP conveyance cycles in the memory mounted on the CPU90E
CN13
board. Replacing the CPU90E board with a new one clears the conveyance count to zero. Therefore,
CN12
CN11 when you replace the CPU90E board with a new one, you must use “11. SYSTEM UTILITY” to restore e
CN10 count that has been recorded in the old board.
CN8
Before replacing the CPU90E board, be sure to use the U-Utility to note the conveyance count that is
recorded in the board.
CN9
CN6 CN20 “APPENDIX 1. 11. SYSTEM UTILITY: CONVEYANCE COUNT SETUP” in the
CN7 “Maintenance Utility” volume.
CN5
CN4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN3 ■ Setting CPU90E Board
F2
CN29 S1 S7 S2
CN2 CN1
OFF position OFF position OFF position
CN21
S1 S1 setup F3 CN24
ON position 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
bit Description Setup ON position ON position ON position
SDRAM type selection CN2 CN1
1, 2 OFF
OFF (both bits): 128MB SDRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DIMM CL use
OFF position 3 OFF
OFF: Not used F4
Refresh cycle setting
No. Fuse ratings 4 OFF VGA90E
OFF: 4K refresh
F1-F3 125V/2A
DIMM use
F5 125V/4A 5, 6 OFF
OFF: Not used F3
F6 125V/5A
DIMM size selection
7 ON
ON: 64MW F2
8 Undefined OFF
FR8H6007.EPS
F1
◆ NOTE ◆ S5 S6
After MTH08E board replacement, check that the voltage between MTH08E board terminal No. Fuse ratings STRAIGHT CROSS RS-422 RS-232C
position
block (TB1) pins 1 and 3 is ± 5.1 V-0.1
+0
. If the voltage is outside the specified range, adjust it by F1-F3 125V/1A position position position
rotating the JPS-3 voltage adjustment trimmer (+5V ADJ.). F4 125V/2A
FR1B4030.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Setting Switch 20.5 IMG07B Board

Switch Function Factory Setup at
setup installation
CAUTION
General-purpose setup switch. ON Installation
S1 The software reads the setting of this switch. S-12 only style dependent When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
1) S2-1 and S2-2 (to be set up in the same manner)
OFF ON
Performs battery backup function ON/OFF setup. parts mounted on the board.
2) S2-3
Turns ON or OFF the MTH08A NMI signal issuance
function. The OFF position must be selected because the OFF OFF
MTH08A does not currently have the NMI signal issuance
S2 function. ■ Setting IMG07B Board
3) S2-4
Turns ON or OFF the boot ROM write function. CN2 CN1
This function is not going to be used for the time being OFF OFF
because it is operative only when the flash EEPROM is
used as the boot ROM.
S3 Issues a manual reset. – –
S4 Issues a manual NMI. – –
Effects ID-Network line connection style STRAIGHT Installation
S5 position style dependent
(CROSS/STRAIGHT) changeover.
Effects IDT communication line signal level RS-422 Installation
S6 position style dependent
(RS-422/RS-232C) changeover.
Turns ON or OFF the power remote control function for
the IDT.
1) S7-1 and S7-2 (to be simultaneously set up) ON ON
Turns ON or OFF the IR-to-IDT power remote control
S7 function.
S1
2) S7-3 and S7-4 (to be simultaneously set up)
Turns ON or OFF the IDT-to-IR power remote control ON ON
F01
function.
AB E
23
CD
4 56
TR1H7001.EPS 789
■ Fuse Checking Method FR1B4031.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.6 IMG08A Board 20.7 IMG08B/H Board
CAUTION CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure
proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric proper grounding. If not, static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric
parts mounted on the board. parts mounted on the board.
■ Setting IMG08A Board ■ Setting IMG08B Board

CN2 CN1
Check that the S1 on the IMG08B board is set to "2".
CN2 CN1
CN6
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN3
S1
F01 S1
AB E
23
CD
4 56
789
F01
AB E
23
CD
4 56
FR1B4033.EPS
789
FR1B4066.EPS
■ Setting IMG08H Board

Check that the S1 on the IMG08H board is set to "2".
CN2 CN1
CN3
S1
F01
AB E
23
CD
4 56
789
FR4H9075.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.8 DMC08A Board 20.9 HCP08A Board
CAUTION CAUTION
■ Setting DMC08A Board ■ Setting HCP08A Board

CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
HCP08A board
CN3
CN4 CN5
JP1 JP2
S1 SW1
789
4 56
AB E
F01
CD
AB E
23
CD
23
4 56
F01
789
FR1B1107.EPS FR1B4039.EPS
Set to "0"

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.10 CPU90F Board 20.11 LAN90B/D Board
CAUTION CAUTION
◆ NOTE ◆ ◆ NOTES ◆
If the employed PC board version is N or later, upgrade the machine's software to version A01 ● To implement the LAN90B board, the following machine requirements should be met.
or later. The earlier software versions do not support the new LSI (replacement for the • Machine software version: A07 or later
discontinued one) on the daughterboard (ETH90F) for the CPU90F board. • Applicable shipment control number: #2110 or later
● To implement the LAN90D board, the following machine requirements should be met.
• Machine software version: A08 or later
• Applicable shipment control number: #8004, #8005, and #2001 through #2109
■ Setting CPU90F Board
Check that the CPU90F board is set up as indicated below:
■ Setting LAN90B/D Board
CNSI0 : No jumper is installed (open).
T1 and T2 : Pins 2 and 3 are shorted.
CN2 CN1
DIS1 : Switches 1, 3, and 4 are OFF. Switch 2 is ON.
DIS2 : All switches are OFF.
SW1 : "6". D10 100
D13 TX
Short pin
No short pin
(OPEN) D12 RX
3 S1
D11 FDP02 CN7 CN6
2
3 2 1 1
S2 S3
CN2 CN1 OFF position Switch for resetting
the LAN90 board
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
F1
CNSI0
ON position
Set to “6”. FR7H3836.EPS
ETH90F board T1
T4
No. Fuse ratings
F1 125V/1A F2
T2
F2 125V/3A
DIS1 DIS2 SW1

OFF position OFF position 789
4 56
AB E
CD
23
F01
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
ON position ON position FR1B4045.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.12 DRV08B Board 20.13 SNS08B Board
CAUTION CAUTION
■ DRV08B Board ■ SNS08B board

F1
CN5
F3 CN2 CN3 CN1 CN9
F2 CN8
CN6
CN3
CN11
CN9 F9
F7 CN5 T7 T3 T4 T5 T6
F8
CN10
F10 F2
CN2
CN4 F1
CN12 CN7
F6 CN1
No. Fuse rating
CN8 F4
F1-10 125V/3.5A
F5 CN6 CN7 T2
FR1H7002.EPS
CN10 T1
No. Fuse ratings
■ Fuse Checking Method CN11 CN12
F1 250V/5A T8
“20.18 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type” F2 250V/2A
FR1H7003.EPS
■ Short Plug Setting

Short pins 2 and 3 of T3 through T7 (interlock switching short plugs) and pins 1 and 2 of T8.
2 10 T1 and T2: Not shorted.
T5 1 3
T1 T3-T7: Pins 2 and 3 are shorted.
T8: Pins 1 and 2 are shorted.
1 9
2 10
T6 1 3
T2
1 9
T3 1 3 T7 1 3
T4 1 3 T8 1 2
FR1B1129.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.14 XXXXX 20.15 XPC08A Board
CAUTION
■ XPC08A board
CN2 CN1
F1
JP1
F2 F3
CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3
SW1
No. Fuse ratings

789
F1 125V/2A
4 56
AB E
CD
23
F2-F3 125V/1A F01
FR1B4036.EPS
■ Short Plug Setting

Short pins 2 and 3 of the JP1 (package ID shorting plug).
1 3 Short pins 2 and 3 (default setup).

JP1 FR1B1130.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.16 BSP08A Board 20.17 Other Boards

• LDD08C board
CAUTION “8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit”, “8.5 Inspecting and Replac-
ing the Polygonal Mirror Assembly”
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ensure • SCN08C/SCR08C board
No setup procedures need be performed for the following boards at the time of machine
installation or board replacement.
• LED08A board
■ BSP08A board
• PNL08A board
CN2 CN1 • SWT08B board
• SCR08C board
• TLB08A board
F1
CN5 CN3 CN4
No. Fuse rating ADDR

F1 125V/3A
789
4 56
AB E
CD
23
F01
FR1B4065.EPS


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
20.18 Checking Procedures by Fuse Type ● For detachable fuse
◆ NOTE ◆
● For no-fuse breaker (NFB) For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should be
measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the
The no-fuse breakers are to be shorted (ON) at factory prior to shipment and must be so at
measured value of the fuse.
installation. However, since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration during transit,
press all the no-fuse breaker buttons two or three times to ensure that they are depressed to
ON. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board is
mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse is 1 Ω or greater,
ON position OFF position it is likely that the fuse is blown.
FR8H2512.EPS In such an instance, if the fuse is a detachable type, remove the fuse from the board and check
whether the fuse is actually blown.
● For directly-mounted fuse
◆ NOTE ◆ (1) Remove the fuse from the board, and measure the resistance value across the fuse by
use of a tester.
For the tester, its probe resistance (resistance value at the time of probe shorting) should be
measured before measurement, and compensation should be made with respect to the If there is no continuity, it should be determined that the fuse is blown.
measured value of the fuse.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
You cannot accurately determine whether a fuse is blown or not while the associated board is
mounted in the machine. However, if the resistance value measured across the fuse is 1 Ω or greater,
it is likely that the fuse is blown.
In such an instance, if the fuse is a directly-mounted type, remove the board from the machine and
check whether the fuse is actually blown, using the its board alone. Fuse
FR8H2514.EPS
(1) Remove the board from the machine, and use a tester to measure the resistance value
across the fuse, with its board alone.
If the resulting resistance value is 100 Ω or greater, it should be determined that the
fuse is blown.
Fuse
Tester
FR8H2513.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
21. Checking Interlock
Inspect the following interlocks.
• Laser safety interlock switches (SH1 and SH2)
“12.1 Inspecting and Replacing Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH1)”
“12.2 Inspecting and Replacing Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH2)”
• Patient protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH1-MSH4)
“12.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock
Switches (MSH1-MSH4)”
• Grip handle interference prevention interlock switch (MSH5)
“12.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Grip Handle Interference Prevention Interlock
Switch (MSH5)”
• Grip handle upper-/lower-limit interlock switch (MSH6/MSH7)
“12.6 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Grip Handle Upper-/Lower-Limit
• Elevation upper-/lower-limit interlock switch (MSH8/MSH9)
“12.7 Inspecting, Replacing, and Adjusting the Elevation Upper-/Lower-Limit Interlock
Switch (MSH8/MSH9)”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Oil Properties
22. Hydraulic circuit diagram
Name: Mobil DTE24
Cylinder ISO viscosity grade: VG32
Color: 1.0 (ASTM)
Density: 0.869 (g/cm3, @15°C)
Flow point: -32.5 (°C)
Ignition point: 220 (°C)
Kinematic viscosity: 30.3 (mm2/s @40°C)
Down safety valve
5.34 (mm2/s @100°C)
Installed Load
220kgf ■ Safety Precautions for Use of Oil
! CAUTION ● The oil may cause eye irritation if accidental eye contact occurs. When handling the
oil, use protective goggles or the like to prevent eye contact.
Handling ● The oil may cause skin irritation if accidental skin contact occurs. When handling the
Throttle valve Precautions oil, use protective gloves or the like to prevent skin contact.
● Do not take the oil internally. (If swallowed, you will have diarrhea or vomit.)
● Keep the oil out of reach of children.
Solenoid valve
First Aid ● If accidental eye contact occurs, flush eyes with clean water for 15 minutes and call
a physician.
● If accidental skin contact occurs, wash with sufficient amounts of soap and water.
● If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Contact a physician immediately.
Relief valve Disposal of Comply with local ordinances or regulations regarding disposal of waste oil and
Waste Oil containers. Dispose of them properly in accordance with the local ordinances or
Solenoid valve and Containers regulations. If they are unknown, consult with your dealer for proper disposal.
Storage In order to prevent mixing with dust and moisture, keep the oil in a sealed condition
after use. Avoid direct sunlight and store it in a dark place.
FR1H1547.EPS
● Classification under Japan’s Fire Law: Mobil DTE24 belongs to Level 4 Oils under
Class 4 Hazardous Materials.
Check valve
18 18
Accumulator
Pump
Oil tank
Filter
FR4H7001.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Maintenance Utility (MU) Control Sheet MU - 1
Control Sheet
07/05/2001 01 Corrections (FM3073) MU-1, 6, 8, 17, 30, 33, 36-47,
47.1-47.4, 52, 53, 59, 62, 65, 69,
79, 80, 91, 98, 102-105, 116, 118,
119, 126, 128, MU_A1-1
08/30/2001 02 Support for “plus” MU-2, 6–15, 17, 24, 25, 30, 33,
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P (support for software version A05)

(FM3115)
34, 36, 39–41, 41.1–41.4, 42, 43,
45, 46, 50, 51, 53, 55, 56, 58–61,
64, 66, 71, 72, 110, 112, 113,
Service Manual 06/20/2003 03 Support for software version A09

122, 125, MU_A2-All pages
All pages
(FM4017)
Maintenance Utility (MU)
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MU - 11

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU 1 - 1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MU 1 - 2
BLANK PAGE
1. Functional Organization of Service Utility
The Service Utility consists of three functions: Maintenance Utility, Configuration Setting, and
Image Processing Parameter Adjustment.
■ Maintenance Utility
It provides functionality necessary for maintenance of the CR-IR348CL (machine), such as
display of error log, and mechanical and electrical operations.
The on-screen menus for the CR-IR348CL (hereinafter abbreviated as the "CL") or the
console panel (CR-IR344/343) can be opened by performing special procedures (not open
to users) to execute various functions.
The menu hierarchy of the Maintenance Utility varies depending on whether the machine is
in normal operation or otherwise (i.e., in the initialization sequence or in serous error).
■ Configuration Setting
It provides various functions required to set up and change configuration settings of the
machine.
Because reading and writing of files that can be edited on a personal computer (PC) is
supported, configuration setting may be performed on a PC running Windows 95. Setup can
be done efficiently by taking advantage of PC’s ease of use, when, for example, initial
configuration setting is done or multiple items are changed collectively.
Further, the CL screen or console panel (CR-IR344/343) can be used to perform
configuration setup (edit the configuration settings).
■ Image Processing Parameter Adjustment

It provides various functions required to set up and change image processing parameters.
A PC running Windows 95 may be connected on-line to the machine to rewrite various
image processing parameters.
Rewriting of image processing parameters that require repeated setting changes can be
implemented efficiently by registering several setting patterns in the PC, for example.
CR-IR Online PC
• Image Processing Parameter
• Maintenance Utility
Adjustment
3.5-inch FD
1.44MB DOS formatted
Online PC
• Configuration Setting
FR1H3001.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MU 1 - 1 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MU 1 - 2

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
2. Maintenance Utility Mode Transition Diagrams
The following diagrams show the mode transitions to the machine’s maintenance utility
(abbreviated M-Utility).
Transition caused by human

intervention
User operation
CL operation
by user Power-OFF state
Service engineer Breaker OFF Breaker ON

operation Powered state
System switch ON
Autonomous transition Initialization self-diagnostics
Boot
(without operation) display
Special touch Version

display
Window System stop key activated

Progress status
System switch OFF display display
Key activated or
corresponding operation
Console utility Routine

UTL key activated
Status
System switch OFF display
CLOSE key activated System down
Machine status Error
display
(during transition)
display
User utility UTL key

Root activated Machine status Window
display display display
System switch OFF Return key activated
Key activated or
Key activated corresponding
Window operation QUIT command Special
display number input (NOTE) touch
HD icon activated
Key activated
QUIT command Special touch
number input (NOTE) Return
key
Service utility activated Manual
HD list specification
Root display display
display
System switch OFF
System switch OFF

System shutdown System switch OFF
Process-in-
progress
display
Key activated
or corresponding
operation Window
display
(NOTE) Cautions regarding QUIT command number input:

• Upon transition from the version display, the mode cannot be exited.
• Upon transition from the user utility, the mode transitions to the user utility.
• Upon transition from the system down, the mode transitions to the system down. FR1H3018.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ When the Software Version Number Is Displayed during Initialization Process
3. Starting and Exiting the M-Utility
◆ NOTE ◆
3.1 Activating M-Utility To let the console panel display the initialized status of the CR-IR, it is necessary to start up the
console beforehand.
Once M-Utility is activated, the main menu of the M-Utility screen appears on the console
panel. Touch the lower left corner of the CR-IR348CL screen or console panel and then touch
M-Utility screen (main menu)
the lower right corner within 2 seconds.
➮ M-Utility starts.
0. QUIT
A B C
When the screen reads “STEP95”, nothing will be invoked even if you touch the
3. TEST MODE
console panel. In such an instance, reset the machine and wait until a software
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY D E F version number appears on the screen.
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY ● CL screen display
8. BACKUP MEMORY
4 5 6
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
12. SET ERASURE LAMP OFF
> 0 . SP
DEL BS ENT
Caps
FR1H3012.EPS
The following root display appears on the panel of the machine.

CR-IR status
display
SERVICE UTILITY : Location to be touched CR-IR software version FR3H3040.EPS
Exposure unable ● Console panel display (CR-IR344/343)

Software version
FR1H3019.EPS
Patient information
display
You can start the M-Utility in one of the following four ways.
• While a software version number is displayed in the initialization process
• While the routine screen is displayed Menu or
• While an error screen is displayed parameter display
• When the maintenance PC is used
CR-IR343 CR-IR343 status

Copyright (c) 1998 Fuji Photo Film Co.,Ltd
Software ID : 114Y543003 114Y5433004 display
Software vaersion : A00-01 A01-01
Selector button
: Location to be touched FR1H3010.EPS
• Panel display of machine
CR-IR348
Copyright (c) 2000 Fuji Photo Film Co.,Ltd
Software ID : 114Y5341003
Software version : A00 (Example: CR-IR348RU)
Software version
FR1H3011.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ When the Routine Screen Is Displayed ■ When an Error Screen Is Displayed
(1) Press the U-Utility button. Touch the lower corner of the CR-IR status display and then touch the lower right
➮ The display switches to the U-Utility screen. corner within 2 seconds.
(2) Touch the lower left corner of the U-Utility screen and then touch the lower right corner ● CL screen display
within 2 seconds.
➮ The M-Utility screen opens.
● CL screen display
Routine screen U-Utility screen
U-Utility button
Area to be touched FR3H3041.EPS XXXXX SYSTEM DOWN
CR-IR status XXXX XXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXX
display
● Console panel display (CR-IR344/343)
Routine screen U-Utility screen : Location to be touched FR3H3042.EPS
● Console panel display (CR-IR344/343)

DELETE UNPROCESSED
REOUTPUT IMAGE SET DATE/TIME
IMAGE
OUTPUT MULTI-
FRAME IMAGE
USER UTILITY
QUIT
IP 5501
U-Utility button : Area to be touched

FR1H3013.EPS
CR-IR status
display
: Location to be touched FR1H3014.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ When the Maintenance PC Is Used ● Connection procedures: Example where Hyper Terminal is used through
serial connection
● Tools required
◆ NOTE ◆
• Maintenance PC
When the Maintenance PC is used, make sure that the CR-IR348RU system has started up, no
OS: Windows 95 or later, Window NT matter whether it is in normal status or in error. Note, however, that any operation on the
The communication software (Hyperterminal) must be installed. maintenance PC should not be performed during conveyance.
• Connection cable (any commercially available product)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE If M-Utility has already been activated from the console, M-Utility cannot be activated from the
The internal wiring of the connection cable used should be as illustrated below. maintenance PC.
[Case 1] Straight type [Case 2] One-on-one wiring straight type

D-Sub 9-pin female D-Sub 25-pin male D-Sub 25-pin male/female D-Sub 25-pin male
❍ Connecting the PC
(PC side) (Machine side) (PC side) (Machine side)
(1) Remove the louver from the controller cover.
Pin NO. Pin NO. Pin NO. Pin NO.
(2) Remove the floppy disk drive cover.
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 Elevation unit PC connector
6 6 6 6
One-on-one
7 7 – cable –
8 8 22 22
9 – 23 23
20 24 24
22 25 25
Frame Frame Frame Frame
(2) Loosen screw
FR1H1325.EPS Pan M3x6 x2
(2)
FDD cover (1)
• If the employed machine is not equipped with the PC connector, use the jig cable FR
Sems M3x6 x2 Louver
ON
(136Y7251A) to connect the CPU90E board CN10 to the maintenance PC. T
FR1H1324.EPS
(3) Connect the connection cable to the PC.

(4) Connect the connection cable to the PC connector on the CR-IR348RU.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
❍ Activating M-Utility (4) Select “COM 1” and click on [OK].
➮ A “COM1 Properties” screen appears.
(1) Power ON the PC.
(5) Select the following connection conditions and click on [OK].
(2) Run Hyper Terminal.
Bits/sec : 9600bps
➮ The following “Connection Setup” screen appear.
Data bit : 8bits
Stop bit : 1bit
Flow control : None
(3) Type in any value (for example, “XUD1”) and click on [OK].
➮ The following “Connection Setup” screen appears.
➮ The Hyper Terminal screen appears.

(6) Press the [Enter] key on the keyboard.
➮ A prompt (“- >”) appears.
(7) Type in “mutl” and press [Enter].
➮ M-Utility menus appear.
❍ Exiting M-Utility
(1) Type in “0” in the root menu of M-Utility and press the [Enter] key.
➮ A prompt (“- >”) appears.
(2) Quit the Hyper Terminal.
(3) Power OFF the PC.
❍ Disconnecting the PC
Disconnect the PC in reverse order of the PC connection procedures.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● Limitations on M-Utility Functions with PC 3.2 Exiting M-Utility
If M-Utility is activated from the PC, the following commands cannot be used.
• 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING ■ Upon Translation to M-Utility from Error Screen Display While Routine Screen
• 3. TEST MODE To quit M-Utility, select “0. QUIT” while the main menu is displayed.
• 10. IP UTILITY: 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE ➮ You are then returned to the U-Utility screen or the error screen.
• 10. IP UTILITY: 4. USE OVER-EXPOSED-IP MODE ◆ NOTE ◆
Before powering OFF the machine in M-Utility mode, be sure to return to the main menu. If
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE you try to power OFF other than in the main menu, the machine may not power OFF.
For 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING, the following steps may be taken to substitute that command.
(1) Use the maintenance PC to activate M-Utility.
(2) Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the CR-IR348RU.
■ Upon Transition to M-Utility from Software Version Display during Initialization
(3) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “3. BACKUP”, and “2. CONFIGURATION DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the floppy disk. Sequence
• IRSET.ORG • IRSET.CFG Because “0. QUIT” is disabled, the machine should be reset.
• FILMFMT.ORG • FILMFMT.CFG
• IRSTATUS.ORG • IRSTATUS.CFG
(4) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “3. BACKUP”, and “3. NETWORK DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the floppy disk.
• EQUIP • DEVICE • HOSTS
• CODEDSTB • ROUTE • NETMASKS
• RMT_SW.CFG • DICOM
(5) Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive of the CR-IR348RU and put it into the floppy
disk drive of the PC.
If configuration data edited by a PC or other device is to be installed in the machine, ensure
that the installation destination machine agrees with the employed data generation device in
software version.
If they do not agree in software version, an error may occur in the installation process.
(6) Using an editor program running on the PC, edit the files.
(7) Remove from the floppy disk drive of the PC the floppy disk containing the edited files, and put
it back into the floppy disk drive of the CR-IR348RU.
(8) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “4. RESTORE”, and “2. CONFIGURATION DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the hard disk of the CR-IR348RU.
• IRSET • FILMFMT.CFG
• IRSTATUS.CFG
(9) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”, “4. RESTORE”, and “3. NETWORK DATA” in sequence.
➮ The following files are copied to the hard disk of the CR-IR348RU.
• EQUIP • DEVICE • HOSTS
• CODEDSTB • ROUTE • NETMASKS
• RMT_SW.CFG • DICOM
(10) Remove the floppy disk from the CR-IR348RU.
(11) Exit M-Utility on the PC.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4. Common Operating Procedures for M-Utility 4.3 Entering a Numerical Value

If, for instance, the selected menu invokes a motor operation, it is necessary to enter param-
The same selection and closing procedures apply to all the M-Utility menus. eters that specify the motor rotation direction and speed. While M-Utility is used, you can
enter numerical values by touching the virtual keyboard that is displayed on the right-hand
4.1 Selecting a menu side of the operation panel.
When selecting an M-Utility menu item, enter a menu item number or numerical value while ■ Changing the Displayed Virtual Keyboard
the “>” cursor is displayed, and then finalize your entry by touching the [ENT] key. Three different virtual keyboards are available. When you touch the or key, the display
➮ This opens the associated submenu or immediately executes the selected menu switches to the associated keyboard.
item and displays the result. Further, touching the [Caps] key effects keyboard changeover between upper- and lower-
case alphabetical letters.
4.2 Quitting a menu Virtual keyboard
0. QUIT
■ Selecting “QUIT” 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY
A B C
When you select “QUIT” on a menu, one of the following results follows. 3. TEST MODE
● When a menu item is displayed, the system returns to the upper-level menu. D E F
5. SCANNER UTILITY
● When the main menu is displayed, the system exits M-Utility and switches to U-Utility. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY 7 8 9
● The system stops the current menu execution (operation).
8. BACKUP MEMORY
● The system returns to the upper-level menu while continuing with the current menu execu- 9. HV OFF 4 5 6
tion (operation). 10. IP UTILITY
11.SYSTEM UTILITY
12.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF 1 2 3
>6
0.QUIT 0 . SP
1.MOTOR
2.ACTUATOR DEL BS ENT
3.SENSOR
4.UNIT
MU > 3
0.QUIT Caps
1.NUMBER
2.MONITOR
3.MONITOR ALL
MU:SEN > 3
FR1H3030.EPS
■ Correcting a Value with the [DEL] or [BS] Key

Characters entered after the “>” cursor can be deleted by touching the [DEL] or [BS] key.
• [DEL] key: Deletes all the entered characters at once.
• [BS] key: Deletes entered characters to the left, one at a time.
Note that the characters positioned before the “>” cursor cannot be deleted.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The use of the [DEL] and [BS] keys for the “2. CONFIGURATION SETTING” screen differs from that
for on-screen menus.
“7.1 Editing the Configuration Files”

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5. Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING : Views or changes the setup in the configuration file. [7.]
The menu hierarchy of M-Utility varies depending on whether the machine is in normal 0.QUIT
operation or otherwise (i.e., in the initialization sequence or in serious error).
1.SYSTEM : Defines the overall machine setup information. [7.2]
5.1 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility during Normal Operation 2.PRINT : Defines the setup information concerning the file output format. [7.3]
3.REMOTE SWITCH : Determines the intelligent hub remote switch ON/OFF status. [7.5]
During normal operation (Displayed upon transition from U-Utility), the menus shown below
may be used.
4.EQUIPMENT : Defines the setup information concerning connected equipment. [7.6]
■ Menu Hierarchy during Normal Operation 5.LOCAL INTERFACE : Defines the communication conditions for the serial line connection. [7.7]
This process need not be performed because the initial values are
MAINTENANCE UTILITY 0.QUIT to be used without being changed.
1.IDT
0.QUIT 2.LIF
3.DIF
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY : Displays, deletes, or saves error logs. [6.]
4.CSL : Not supported
0.QUIT
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE: Defines the setup information for network connection
and communication. [7.8]
1.LIST : Displays error logs on screen. [6.1]
7.HOSTS ADDRESS : Sets an address of network connection. [7.9]
0.QUIT
8.DISTRIBUTION : Sets a destination of network connection. [7.10]
1.ALL : Displays all the generated error messages in order from the newest to the oldest.
0.QUIT 9.ROUTING : Sets routing of network connection. [7.11]
1.ERROR : Displays serious errors only.
2.WARNING : Displays warning errors only. 10.NETMASKS : Sets a subnet mask of network connection. [7.12]
3.BOTH : Displays all errors.
11.DICOM : Base on DICOM. [7.13]
2.SUMMARY : Classifies the encountered errors by error code and shows the error
occurrence counts (4-digit readout). 3.TEST MODE : Performs setup for unattended conveyance and test processing. [8.]
0.QUIT
1.ERROR : Displays serious errors only. Used for IP conveyance checkout and other purposes.
2.WARNING : Displays warning errors only. 0.QUIT
3.BOTH : Displays all errors.
1.ROUTINE : Clears the setup defined by "2. AUTO MODE" and provides [8.1]
2.CLEAR : Deletes all error logs. [6.2] a setup appropriate for routine processing.
0.QUIT
2.AUTO MODE [8.2]
1.ERROR LOG
3.SAVE TO FD : Saves error log data and trace data on a floppy disk. [6.3] 0.QUIT
1.READING & ERASURE : Conveys in automatic conveyance mode to execute reading
0.QUIT and erasure. Saving of the image read to the hard disk and
1.ERROR LOG : Copies “ERROR” messages to the error0.log file and “WARNING” output processing are implemented.
messages to the errorx.log file. 2.PRIMARY ERASURE: Conveys in automatic conveyance mode to execute reading and
2.TRACE DATA : Copies logged error messages having an extension between 001 erasure. The image read is discarded after the amount of erasure
and 005 to a floppy disk. is checked.
3.IOT DATA : Saves the latest IO trace data in memory to a floppy disk. 3.SECONDARY ERASURE: Conveys in automatic conveyance mode to execute erasure
(Appears when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) alone.
4.NET WORK TRACE DATA : Saves to a floppy disk the trace data that is obtained
in the event of an error in the communication with the console 4. SET DELAYED AUTO RUN
display software. (AUTO RUN WITHOUT DELAY IS SET NOW.) (CR-IR348RU)
: Performs conveyance route setup so that
4.SAVE TO HD : Saves error log data on the hard disk. [6.4] the IPs pass the standby unit in the unattended
conveyance mode.
0.QUIT NOTE: The numbers within square brackets ([ ]) indicate the sections you should refer to. FR1H3003.EPS
1.ERROR LOG : Copies “ERROR” messages to the error0.log file and “WARNING”
messages to the errorx.log file.
NOTE: The numbers within square brackets ([ ]) indicate the sections you should refer to. FR1H3002.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY : Performs diagnostic checkout of erasure lamps, image memory, [9.] 5.HV DATA : Sets the photomultiplier application voltage variously for the front [10.5]
image processing boards, and other electrical system components. and back surfaces. The setting range is from 250 to 1000 V.
0.QUIT If you select a setting of 0, the OFF state prevails.
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility
1.ERASURE LAMP TEST : Checks whether the erasure lamps illuminated. mode and when you select the scanner utility menu upon the
[9.1]
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) occurrence of a serious error.)
0.QUIT
2.IMAGE MEMORY TEST : Checks the image memory capacity and conducts a marching test. [9.2] 1.FRONT : Photomultiplier for the front surface (CR-IR348RU/344).
2.BACK : Photomultiplier for the back surface (CR-IR348RU/344).
3.DSP TEST : Performs self-diagnostic checks of all the image processing boards installed in the machine. [9.3]
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) 6.FORMAT : Temporarily sets the IP read start position (PIXEL) and read width [10.6]
(FREQ). To save the settings to the hard disk, use "8. DATA MANAGEMENT".
4.LAN : Performs diagnostic checks of network-related items. [9.4] (This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.)
"8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width" in the "Checks, Replacement
0.QUIT and Adjustment of Parts" Volume
0.QUIT
1.ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS : Displays the Ethernet MAC addresses of the CPU90E
and CPU90F. 1.DEFAULT : Selects the default values for the read start position and read width.
2.PING : Executes ping by designating the LANC used (CPU90E or CPU90F) and the
0.QUIT
host name (or IP address) of its connected destination.
3.CPU90F DMA : Generates 1 Kbytes of monotonously increasing data with the CPU90F, 1.PIXEL AND FREQ
transfers it to the DMA, and reads it back to verify that the read data 2.PIXEL ONLY
matches the generated data. (Displayed upon transition from U-Utility) 3.FREQ ONLY
5.HDD : Performs diagnostic checkout of the hard disk drive. [9.5] 2.FREQ ADJUST (SR) : Adjusts the read width.
3.PIXEL ADJUST : Adjusts the read start position.
0.QUIT 4.FOR DESIGNER: (CR-IR348RU)
1.WRITE-READ VERIFY : Writes 1 Kbytes of monotonously increasing data onto the hard
disk, and reads it back to verify that the written data and read 0.QUIT
data agree with each other. 1.FREQ ADJUST (FR) : Adjusts the read width.
6.FDD : Performs diagnostic checkout of the floppy disk drive. [9.6]
7.SHADING/SENSITIVITY : Temporarily records, calculates, and sets shading/ [10.7]
sensitivity correction data to finalize it. To save the
0.QUIT finalized setup data to the hard disk, use "8. DATA MANAGEMENT".
1.WRITE-READ VERIFY : Writes 1 Kbytes of monotonously increasing data onto a floppy (If you switch from the U-Utility mode, the display shows HV DATA only.)
disk, and reads it back to verify that the written data and read "8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections" in Checks, Replacement
data agree with each other. 0.QUIT and Adjustment of Parts Volume
5.SCANNER UTILITY : Performs diagnostic checkout and setup of the main scanning system. [10.]
Used during inspection and after replacement of main scanning system 1.REC MODE : Makes the machine ready for shading correction data recording.
0.QUIT components.
2.CALCULATION : Calculates shading, polygon, or sensitivity correction data
(The CR-IR343 differs the menu number).
1.INITIALIZE : Loads main scanning system parameters and performs initial setup [10.1]
of the main scanning system. 0.QUIT
2.POLYGON : Rotates/stops the polygon independently. [10.2] 1.SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY
0.QUIT 2.SHADING AND POLYGON
1.OFF 3.POLYGON ONLY
2.ON 4.SENSITIVITY ONLY
3.LASER : Turns ON/OFF the laser system independently. [10.3] 3.SHADING / POLYGON CORRECTION : To make corrected data effective in the routine mode,
choose ON.
0.QUIT 0.QUIT
1.OFF 1.OFF
2.ON 2.ON
4.HV : Checks whether the high-voltage switch (software switch) normally turns ON/OFF. [10.4] 4.SENSITIVITY DATA : Provides machine shipment control sensitivity corrections
0.QUIT (e.g., for standardizing the sensitivities of two or more image readers).
1.OFF To save the correction value on the hard disk, use "8. DATA MANAGEMENT".
2.ON 5.HV DATA : Not used for marketed units.
6.PMT DATA : Not used for marketed units.


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
8.DATA MANAGEMENT : Displays or saves to the hard disk the setup data entered from [10.8]
"6. FORMAT" and "7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY". 6.MECHANICAL UTILITY : Monitors individual motor operations and sensor status. [11.]
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) Use this menu item for motor, sensor, and other component inspection.
0.QUIT 0.QUIT
1.SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA : Saves shading and polygon data (for both the 1.INITIALIZE : Loads conveyance parameters and effects initialization. [11.1]
front and back surfaces) on the hard disk. (This menu item is not shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.)
2.SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA : Saves sensitivity correction data (for both the front and back 2.MOTOR : Sets the drive parameters for pulse motors and runs a drive/stop test on them. [11.2]
surfaces) on the hard disk.
0.QUIT
3.SAVE FORMAT DATA : Saves format data (for both the front and back surfaces) on the
1.NUMBER
hard disk.
2.PARAMETER
4.DISPLAY DATA : Displays format and sensitivity machine shipment control data on screen
(NOTE 2). 3.DRIVE
5.LOAD FROM FD : Loads floppy disk data into the primary memory. 4.STOP
When you reset the machine, the loaded data disappears. 3.ACTUATOR : Runs a drive/stop test on erasure lamps and FFM. [11.3]
0.QUIT 0.QUIT
1.SHADING/POLYGON 1.NUMBER
2.SENSITIVITY 2.DRIVE
3.STOP
6.SAVE TO FD : Saves shading, polygon, and sensitivity data stored on the hard disk
to a floppy disk. 4.SENSOR : Monitors the sensor status. [11.4]
9.DIAGNOSTIC : Runs all the diagnostic checks. [10.9] You can monitor all sensors at a time or on an individual basis.
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) 0.QUIT
1.NUMBER
10.VIRTUAL IMAGE : Causes the scanner hardware to generate a virtual image signal [10.10] 2.MONITOR
and reads it to locate the problem cause. Before reading a virtual 3.MONITOR ALL
image, it is necessary to use "11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL"
to specify the surface to be read (front or back surface).
5.UNIT
(This menu item is shown when you switch from the U-Utility mode.) 0.QUIT
0.QUIT 1.IP POSITIONING UNIT : Performs operations associated with home positioning [11.5]
1.LIGHT : Generates a virtual LED light. (CR-IR348RU) of the exposure unit guide mechanism, movement
2.LOG AMP : Turns OFF the HV and generates an image signal at a constant output level. 0.QUIT to the setting position, and movement to the conveyance position.
3.SCN08 INPUT : Causes the SCN08 board to generate an image signal. 1.HOME POSITION
4.ROUTINE : Exits the virtual image signal generation mode and returns the machine 2.RELEASE1 TO RELEASE2
to the initial state. Be sure to execute this command after the use of the virtual 3.RELEASE2 TO SET
image signal generation mode. 4.SET TO RELEASE (CR-IR344/343)
11.BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL : Limits the light gathering operation to the front or back surface. 5.RELEASE1 TO SET 0.QUIT
When this menu item is set, it takes effect for one reading 6.SET TO RELEASE2 1.SET
operation only. Use this menu item when, for instance, you make 7.RELEASE2 TO SET RELEASE1 2.RELEASE
problem analyses with "10. VIRTUAL IMAGE" (CR-IR348RU/344).
0.QUIT 2.IP MOVING-UP UNIT1 : Performs home positioning and moving-up operations [11.6]
1.FRONT ONLY of the exposure unit IP moving-up mechanism.
0.QUIT
2.BACK ONLY
1.HOME POSITION
2.MOVING-UP
NOTE 1: The numbers within square brackets ([ ]) indicate the sections you should refer to.
NOTE 2: The meanings of the employed on-screen abbreviations are explained below. 3.IP MOVING-UP UNIT2 (CR-IR348RU): Places the exposure unit lift mechanism in the home [11.7]
position or moves it upward.
MP: Number of invalid pixels HVDATAO: Read HV value (front surface) 0.QUIT
TMP: Total number of invalid pixels HVDATAU: Read HV value (back surface) 1.HOME POSITION
TML: Total number of invalid lines (CR-IR348RU/344) 2.MOVING-UP
RCNT: Reference frequency division value PMTKO: PMT sensitivity coefficient
NCNT: Oscillation frequency setting (front surface) 4.BUCKY UNIT : Performs home positioning operation of the exposure unit bucky mechanism. [11.8]
RCNTF: Reference frequency division value (high-speed mode) PMTKU: PMT sensitivity coefficient 0.QUIT
(CR-IR348RU/344) (back surface) (CR-IR348RU/344) 1.HOME POSITION
NCNTF: Oscillation frequency setting (high-speed mode) SAIPO: IP sensitivity prevailing upon
(CR-IR348RU/344) sensitivity adjustment NOTE: The numbers within square brackets ([ ]) indicate the sections you should refer to. FR1H3007.EPS
1000frqadjF: High-speed mode fine-adjustment value (front surface)
(CR-IR348RU/344) SAIPU: IP sensitivity prevailing upon
HVCNTO: Central sensitivity HV value (front surface) sensitivity adjustment
HVCNTU: Central sensitivity HV value (back surface) (back surface) (CR-IR348RU/344)
(CR-IR348RU/344) Xe: Erasure level dose value
Z: Erasure level QL value
SMD: SHD/polygon correction mode
default value FR1H3006.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
5.SUBSCANNING GRIP : Performs home positioning, grip, and grip release operations [11.9]
of the subscanning grip mechanism. 8.BACKUP MEMORY : Initializes the backup memory. [13.]
0.QUIT
1.HOME POSITION 0.QUIT
2.GRIP 1.CLEAR
3.RELEASE
9.HV ON/OFF : Turns ON/OFF the high-voltage switch (software switch). [14.]
6.AFTER-READING GRIP : Performs home positioning, grip, and grip release operations [11.10] When performing a read operation with a cover open, be sure to
of the after-reading conveyance grip. turn OFF the high-voltage switch because the photomultiplier may become damaged.
0.QUIT
1.HOME POSITION 10.IP UTILITY : Displays IP information or sets up the IP removal/loading and overdose-degenerated [15.]
IP restoration operations.
2.GRIP 0.QUIT
3.RELEASE 1.DISPLAY : Displays the conveyance count, exposure count, and overexposure information about each IP.
2.SETTING : Enters an IP number, conveyance count, and exposure count for setup purposes.
7.SHUTTER UNIT (CR-IR348RU): Places the shutter mechanism in the home position [11.11] 3.LOAD/REMOVE MODE : Performs setup for IP removal/loading.
or opens/closes the shutter.
0.QUIT 4.USE OVEREXPOSED-IP MODE : Performs setup for processing overexposed IPs and overdose-degenerated IPs
1.HOME POSITION as normal IPs.
2.CLOSE 11.SYSTEM UTILITY (CR-IR348RU/344) : Sets the conveyance count in the CPU90E board. [16.]
3.OPEN
0.QUIT
7.FILE UTILITY : Saves parameter files to a floppy disk, load files from a floppy disk, or otherwise [12.] 1.SETTING SYSTEM CONVEYANCES COUNTS
manipulates files. Use this menu when, for instance, editing configuration data
on a personal computer or installing optional software. 12.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF/SET REGULAR ERASURE LAMP CONTROL
: Allows you to choose between the regular mode and no-erasure mode. The no-erasure mode should be selected to conduct
0.QUIT IP conveyance operations when the erasure lamps do not illuminate. [17.]
1.FORMAT FD : Formats a floppy disk according to the 1.44MB MS-DOS format. [12.1]
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION : Formats an image storage partition of the hard disk. [12.2]
3.BACKUP : Backs up various setup files on a floppy disk. [12.3]
5.2 Menu Hierarchy of M-Utility in Initialization Sequence or in
0.QUIT
1.SCANNER DATA : Saves the scanner setup files to a floppy disk. Serious Error
2.CONFIGURATION DATA : Saves the setup files (IRSET.CFG and FILFMT.CFG) onto a floppy disk.
3.NETWORK DATA : Saves network-related setup files (RMT_SW.CFG, EQUIP, DEVICE, HOSTS, During the initialization sequence or upon occurrence of serious error (i.e., when the mode
CONDEDSTB, ROUTE, NETMASKS, and Base on DICOM) onto a floppy disk.
switches from the error message displayed status to M-Utility), the basic menu structure is
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA : Saves image processing parameter files to a floppy disk.
the same as in normal operation, except some of the menus are omitted.
5.CSL MENU DATA : Not supported.
6.EDR PROCESSING DATA : Saves the EDR parameter files onto a floppy disk. For your reference, the upper menu hierarchy is shown below.
4.RESTORE : Restores various setup files from a floppy disk to the hard disk. [12.4]
0.QUIT
■ Menu Hierarchy in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error
1.SCANNER DATA: Reads the scanner setup files from a floppy disk to the hard disk.
2.CONFIGURATION DATA : Reads the setup file (IRSET.CFG, FILFMT.CFG)
MAINTENANCE UTILITY
from a floppy disk and writes them onto the hard disk.
3.NETWORK DATA : Reads the network-related setup files (RMT_SW.CFG, EQUIP, DEVICE, HOSTS, 0.QUIT (not displayed during initialization)
CONDEDSTB, ROUTE, NETMASKS, and Base on DICOM) from a floppy disk
and writes them onto the hard disk.
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA : Reads the image processing parameter files from a floppy disk and writes them
onto the hard disk. 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
5.CSL MENU DATA : Not supported.
6.EDR PROCESSING DATA : Reads the EDR parameter files from a floppy disk and writes them 3.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
onto the hard disk.
5.EDR DATA (Displayed upon transition from U-Utility) [12.5]
4.SCANNER UTILITY
0.QUIT
1.PARAMETER ONLY : Saves intermediate processing parameter files of EDR to a floppy disk. 5.MECHANICAL UTILITY
2.FULL : Saves to a floppy disk the EDR intermediate processing parameter files and EDR reduced image
data concerning images stored on the hard disk.
6.FILE UTILITY
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE : Reverts back to the immediately preceding version of system software. [12.6] 7.BACKUP MEMORY
7.EXECUTION : Loads a designated file from a floppy disk and executes it. [12.7]
Used for option file installation and other purposes. 8.HV OFF (not displayed upon the occurrence of a serious error)
9.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF
FR1H3009.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 2. SUMMARY: Displaying the Number of Error Occurrences by Error Code
6. 1. ERROR LOG UTILITY: Error Log Utility
The SUMMARY mode displays the generated error messages by grouping them according
to error codes.
The error log utility displays, deletes, or saves error logs. It also saves memorized trace
data to a floppy disk. An example of its display is shown below.
6.1 1. LIST: Displaying Error Log

| CODE DATE COUNT |
The content of the error log is displayed. | 081D 1998.04.16 14:36 0012 |
Two different display modes are selectable: “ALL” and “SUMMARY”. The “ALL” mode dis- | . |
plays all the generated error messages in chronological order. The “SUMMARY” mode | . |
displays the generated error messages by grouping them according to error codes.
| . |
■ 1. ALL: Displaying All Error Messages | 1722 1998.04.16 10:12 0006 |
The ALL mode displays all the generated error messages in chronological order. It lists the | 23E6 1998.04.16 09:58 0213 |
error messages in order from the newest to the oldest. The resulting on-screen information | 0.END 1.NEXT 2.BEFORE (DEFAULT=1) : |
consists of an error code, error occurrence date/time, and detailed error information.
An example of its display is shown below.
● Selection of error level
Select either of the following error levels to display the error log.
| CODE DATE | 1. ERROR (error levels 0 and 1)
| 081D 1998.04.16 14:36 | 2. WARNING (error levels 2 and 3)
| 11.E738.000002.8A0AC1.000000.000C19.8 | 3. BOTH (error levels 0 through 3)
| 000001.000009.00001B |
● Page flip
| . |
Type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key.
| . |
0. END (Exit the display function.)
| . |
1. NEXT (Display the next page.)
| 1722 1998.04.16 09:58 |
2. BEFORE (Display the previous page.)
| 85AA1319.05972166 |
| 0.END 1.NEXT 2.BEFORE (DEFAULT=1) : |
6.2 2. CLEAR: Clearing Error Log
Selecting “2. CLEAR” deletes all error logs.
● Selection of error level (1) Select “2. CLEAR” and “1. ERROR LOG” in sequence.
Select one of the following error levels to display an error log. ➮ The following message appears.
1. ERROR (error levels 0 and 1) ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL ERROR LOGS ?
2. WARNING (error levels 2 and 3) 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2):
3. BOTH (error levels 0 through 3) (2) Select “1. YES”.
➮ The following message appears, with all the error logs cleared.
● Page flip
ERROR LOGS ARE CLEARED.
Type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key. It should be noted when “2. NO” is selected, the menu is displayed without clearing the
0. END (Exit the display function.) error logs.
1. NEXT (Display the next page.)
2. BEFORE (Display the previous page.)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
6.3 3. SAVE TO FD: Saving Error Log to Floppy Disk

6.4 4. SAVE TO HD: Saving Error Log to HD
Selecting “3. SAVE TO FD” saves error log data and trace data to a floppy disk.
(1) Select “3. SAVE TO FD”. Selecting “4. SAVE TO HD” saves error logs to the hard disk.
➮ The following message is displayed. (1) Select “4. SAVE TO HD” and “1. ERROR LOG” in sequence.
➮ The following message is displayed.
0.QUIT (Exit the menu.)
1.ERROR LOG (Overwrite an error log file onto the floppy disk.) ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE ERROR LOGS TO THE HD?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
2.TRACE DATA (Causes the trace data with an extension between
“.001” and “.005” to overwrite existing data on a floppy
disk.) CAUTION
3.IOT DATA (Saves a file while assigning the current date/time as While a file is being saved, never power OFF the machine because the hard disk may
the filename and adding the extension “.IOT”.) be damaged.
4.NETWORK TRACE DATE (Saves to a floppy disk a trace data file that stores the
information about the communication with the console (2) Select “1. YES”.
display software.) ➮ When the saving is completed normally, the result is presented in the following format,
◆ NOTE ◆ with the menu displayed.
Use separate floppy disks for saving “2. TRACE DATA” and “4. NETWORK TRACE XXXXXXXXXX IS SAVED.
DATA”.
(XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.)
(2) Select the type of error log to be saved, using one of the numbers, 1 through 4.
➮ The following message is displayed.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE XXXXXX TO THE FD?
(The “XXXXXX” portion indicates the type of the error log to be saved.)
CAUTION
While a file is being saved, never power OFF the machine or press the FD eject button
because the floppy disk or floppy disk drive may be damaged.
(3) Put a floppy disk into the machine and select “1. YES”.
➮ The following message appears, with all the error logs saved to the floppy disk.
XXXX IS SAVED.
(XXXX represents the file name.)
➮ If all the files cannot be contained in a single floppy disk, the following message
appears.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
1. CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2):
Additionally, type in one of the following numbers and press the [ENT] key.
1.CONTINUE Continue to write the error log file to the floppy disk.
2.CANCEL Stop writing the error log file to the floppy disk.
➮ When the saving is completed normally, the result is presented in the following
format, with the menu displayed.
XXXXXXXXXX IS SAVED.
(XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7. 2. CONFIGURATION SETTING: Configuration 7.1 Editing Configuration File

Utility The editing procedure is detailed below using “1. SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)” as an example.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
In the configuration utility mode, the simplified screen editor on the console is used to refer-
• “#” at the beginning of a sentence means that the sentence is a comment, so the description
ence or edit configuration files. thereafter does not provide configuration setting. A comment describes remarks, such as explana-
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE tion about a setup item and choices of items.
• “↵” represents a carriage return.
The configuration files can also be installed after being edited on a PC in Windows 95 environment.
“3.1 Activating M-Utility ■ When the Maintenance PC Is Used” #
Comment # IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C
#
0. QUIT
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING Setup item FNT=0 D E F
A B C
3. TEST MODE
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY #1.FONT(LANGUAGE)
5. SCANNER UTILITY D E F # 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP / 7 8 9
7. FILE UTILITY
Comment # 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR /
8. BACKUP MEMORY
7 8 9 # 10:KOR
4 5 6
9. HV OFF # (7,10:Not Available)
10.IP UTILITY 4 5 6
11.SYSTEM UTILITY FR1H3024.EPS
12.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF
>2 1 2 3
0.QUIT
0 . SP
1.SYSTEM (1) Select “2. CONFIGURATION SETTING” and “1. SYSTEM”.
2.PRINT
3.REMOTE SWITCH DEL BS ENT ➮ The contents of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) are displayed.
4.EQUIPMENT
5.LOCAL INTERFACE
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE #
7.HOSTS ADDRESS # IRSET.ORG/CFG
8.DISTRIBUTION Caps A B C
9.ROUTING
#
10.NETMASKS
11.DICOM FNT=0 D E F
#1.FONT(LANGUAGE)
FR1H3022.EPS
# 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP /
7 8 9
# 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR /
■ Menu Hierarchy and Configuration Files # 10:KOR
# (7,10:Not Available) 4 5 6
2.CONFIGURATION SETTING : View or change the setup in the configuration file. IPS="172.16.0.1 "
#2.IP Address(CPU90E)(Length=15) 1 2 3
1.SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) : Defines overall setup information regarding the machine. [7.2] IPI="172.16.0.2 "
0 . SP
#3.IP Address(CPU90F)(Length=15)
2.PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) : Defines setup information related to the film output format. [7.3]
ILA=0 DEL BS ENT
3.REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) : Remote switch ON/OFF setting for the intelligent hub. [7.5] #4.IDT Network Port
4.EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) : Defines setup information related to equipment connected. [7.6] IRSET.CFG
5.LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) : Defines the communication conditions for the serial line [7.7] Caps
SAVE CANCEL
connection. This setup process need not be performed
because the initial setup values are to be used without being changed. FR1H3033.EPS
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE) : Defines setup information for network-connected [7.8]
communication.
7.HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS) : Sets up the address for network connection. [7.9]
8.DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB) : Sets up the distribution destination for network connection. [7.10]
9.ROUTING (ROUTE) : Sets up the routing for network connection. [7.11]
10.NETMASKS (NETMASKS) : Sets up the subnet mask for network connection. [7.12]
11.DICOM (Base on DICOM) : Sets the DICOM communications information. [7.13]
NOTE 1: Titles in parentheses denote file names to be edited.

NOTE 2: Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manual. FR1H1326.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(2) Touch the location to be edited. 7.2 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)
➮ The cursor appears at the location touched.
The cursor can be moved by touching the , , →
, or → key. It defines overall setup information regarding the machine.
→
→
(3) Using a virtual keyboard, edit it.
■ List of SYSTEM Setup Items
• Changing the virtual keyboard display mode
1.SYSTEM
Three different virtual keypads are available. When you touch the or key, the
1.FNT: FONT (LANGUAGE) 40.X0810C: X Ray Tube sychronized information 8x10 Center
display switches to the associated virtual keypad. Further, touching the [Caps] key
2.IPS: IP Address (CPU90E) (Length=15) 41.X1843T: X Ray Tube sychronized information 18x43 Top
effects keypad character display changeover between upper- and lower-case alpha-
3.IPI: IP Address (CPU90F) (Length=15) 42.X1843C: X Ray Tube sychronized information 18x43 Center
betical letters. 43.OXI: Check Over X ray
4.ILA: IDT Network Port
• Correcting a value with the [DEL] or [BS] key 5.SCD: System Code (Length=2) 44.IDT: System Type
6.SMJ: System Name (Length=6) 45.UID_STI: UID Issuance Type
[DEL] key: A character displayed to the right of the cursor is deleted whenever you
7.SID: System ID (Length=1) 46.DEF_DENSITY: Image Density Device Default
touch this key.
8.XRY: OverXray Flag 47.SRM: (not used)
[BS] key: A character displayed to the left of the cursor is deleted whenever you 9.U_MF: User UTL Multi-Flame Button Control 48.JSTFY: Right/Left justify of long character type
touch this key. 10.SS1: Screen Save Timer 49.HQ_FUNC: HQ Function Setting
11.ITV: Time put at each image store for accept 50.DRC_FUNC: DRC Function Setting
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE reprinting (E-IF) 51.SSS: Select Screen Save Display
If you edited the file incorrectly and it is difficult to undo the editing with the [DEL] or [BS] key, 12.CPS: The number of sheets of continues 52.DST_PADDING: Distribution Code Padding method
image store (E-IF)
press the [CANCEL] key and repeat from step (1) all over again. 53.UID: UID Issuance
13.IFT: Reserve
54.SCS: Select specific character to be set
14.PRO: Function Protect
55.PN_CS: CONVERSION OF PATIENT NAME
(4) Press the [SAVE] key. 15.SF1: Read Sensitivity Semi-h
56.PN_FDS: FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR
➮ The edited contents are saved to the HD. 16.SF2: Read Sensitivity High SINGLE BYTE REPRESENTATION
17.GRP: Film Sorting Group Code 57.PN_FDM: FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR
Virtual keyboard 18.PTR: FilmChar1/MenuName Start Pointer MULTI BYTE REPRESENTATION
19.UNQ: Film Sort Unique Code 58.PN_FCS1: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE
# BYTE REPRESENTATION
20.PCD: I/F Pixel Clock Rate for DMS
# IRSET.ORG/CFG A B C 59.PN_FCS2: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE
The cursor appears # 21.PCL: I/F Pixel Clock Rate for LP BYTE REPRESENTATION
at the location touched. 22.CIM: IP Size Code Setting 60.PN_FCS3: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE
FNT=0 D E F
23.EBK: EDR Backup Flag BYTE REPRESENTATION
#1.FONT(LANGUAGE)
24.EBA: EDR Backup Server Address (Length=15) 61.PN_FCS4: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE
# 0:JPN / 1:ENG / 2:GER / 3:FRN / 4:ESP /
7 8 9 BYTE REPRESENTATION
# 5:ITA / 6:SWE / 7:FIN / 8:DEN / 9:NOR / 25.EM1,2,3,4,5: EDR Backup Menu Code
# 10:KOR (Length=4) 62.PN_FCS5: FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE
# (7,10:Not Available) BYTE REPRESENTATION
4 5 6 26.UNL:Time to Clear Over-exposed IP
63.PN_FCM1: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI
IPS="172.16.0.1 " 27.IPE: Alart Interval for IP Erasure BYTE REPRESENTATION
#2.IP Address(CPU90E)(Length=15) 1 2 3 28.XRD: Beep Alarm upon shot Ready 64.PN_FCM2: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI
29.X1717T: X Ray Tube sychronized information BYTE REPRESENTATION
IPI="172.16.0.2 " 65.PN_FCM3: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI
0 . SP 17x17 Top
#3.IP Address(CPU90F)(Length=15) BYTE REPRESENTATION
30.X1717C: X Ray Tube sychronized information
ILA=0 17x17 Center 66.PN_FCM4: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI
DEL BS ENT BYTE REPRESENTATION
#4.IDT Network Port 31.X1417T: X Ray Tube sychronized information
14x17 Top 67.PN_FCM5: FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI
IRSET.CFG BYTE REPRESENTATION
14x17 Center 68.PN_DD: DICOM COMPONENT DELIMITER
SAVE CANCEL Caps
33.X1714T: X Ray Tube sychronized information 69.PN_DC: DICOM COMPOSITION
17x14 Top
FR1H3026.EPS 70.MON: Display Type on CRT monitor
17x14 Center 71.ENV: Equipment name for version display.(9 character)
(5) Back up the configuration file that has been set up. 72.FLMW: Film size confirm window open
35.X1414T: X Ray Tube sychronized information
“7.14 Backing Up Configuration File” 14x14 Top
73.EVE: Select whether a signal of shot-ready is output while
36.X1414C: X Ray Tube sychronized information IP evacuation operated by pushing of IP evacuation button.
(6) Press the RESET button. 14x14 Center
74.EVS: Select whether a signal of shot-ready is output while
37.X1012T: X Ray Tube sychronized information
➮ The machine is reset so that the file that has been set up is effective. IP evacuation operated by selecter button.
10x12 Top
38.X1012C: X Ray Tube sychronized information 75.DK_FILM: Print HQ Image on 14*14 film (14*14 Single format)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE 10x12 Center 76.DCL: Clear the distribution code when re-outputing a image.
If there is any other configuration item to be set up, do not press the RESET button. The 39.X0810T: X Ray Tube sychronized information 77.FCL: Put the filing switch off when re-outputing a image.
RESET button should be pressed after all the setups are finished. 8x10 Top 78.U_0810: User UTL 08*10 film Setting Button Control
FR1H3027.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ System Setup (Item Numbers 1-12) ◆ NOTES ◆
Item • Be sure to observe the LENGTH (digits) requirements specified for the following items. If a
Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number wrong LENGTH is used, the setup results in error, so that the machine may not operate
0: Japanese properly.
1: English 2.IPS: IP Address (CPU90E) (Length = 15, including a period (.))
2: German 3.IPI: IP Address (CPU90F) (Length = 15, including a period (.))
3: French
For parameter • Item SID
Font setup switching/language 4: Spanish 10, the use of
1 FNT 0 5: Italian the additional
Determines a specific value when several readers are available.
designation
6: Swedish software
7: Finnish is required.
8: Danish
9: Norwegian
10: Korean
Its IP address should be described in
fifteen digits stuffed to the left. LENGTH
2 IPS 172.16.0.1 IP address for standard LAN If the number of digits is less than 15,
(CPU90E) =15
space should be added to the end to
meet the 15-digit requirement.
• Its IP address should be described
in fifteen digits stuffed to the left.
If the number of digits is less than
15, space should be added to the LENGTH
3 IPI 172.16.0.2 IP address for LAN board (CPU90F) end to meet the 15-digit =15
requirement.
• Even if the CPU90F board is not
available as an option, be sure to
set its IP address.
4 ILA 1 Setup of destination to which ID-T 0: CPU90E

is connected 1: CPU90F
DB D1: CR-IR341 DA: CR-IR345

(Differs D2: CR-IR342 DB: CR-IR348RU Change
5 SCD Unit code (2 characters) prohibited.
depending on D8: CR-IR343
the system type) D9: CR-IR344
XU-D1 5000: CR-IR341 5502D: CR-IR345

(Differs 5000R: CR-IR342 XU-D1: CR-IR348RU Change
6 SMJ Unit character string (6 characters) 5501: CR-IR343 prohibited.
depending on
the system type) 5501D: CR-IR344
If two or more
image readers
exist within
the same
network, this
7 SID A Reader number A–Z
entry is useful
for setting
values
variously for
all of them.
0: LOG & MESSAGE

8 XRY 0 Overexposure handling 1: LOG ONLY Be careful of
2: NONE change.
0: OFF
9 U_MF 0 Multiframe key ON/OFF in UTL
1: ON
Screen saver timer setting 0 – 60 [min] Image
10 SS1 0
(variable in 1 minute increments) (0: screen saver disabled). monitor only*
11 ITV 30 Wait time for DMS E-I/F reoutput 0 – 60 [sec].

request interrupt
Consecutive storage process
12 CPS 5 count for DMS E-I/F reoutput 0 – 10 [times].
request interrupt
* : For console screen save function setup, use the maintenance mode of the console. TR1H3001.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ I/F Setup (Item Numbers 13-53) Item
Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number
Item Transfer destination IP address for the transmission

Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks 24 EBA Space of EDR backup data through a network. Transfer destination IP address LENGTH
number ("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx").
The transmission port is fixed at the CPU90E. = 15
Not used.
13 IFT 0 (change Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used LENGTH
I/F type – 25 EM1 Space
when EBK = 1. for menu code designation.
prohibited) =4
0: NONE Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used LENGTH
25 EM2 Space when EBK = 1. for menu code designation.
1: TS (Temporary subtraction) =4
2: ES (Energy subtraction) Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used
25 EM3 Space LENGTH
3: MS (Multilayer tomography) when EBK = 1. for menu code designation. =4
4: MX (Multi-integrated processing)
5: WS (Whole spine) Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used LENGTH
25 EM4 Space
when EBK = 1. for menu code designation. =4
6: PS (IVP)
Function image protect 7: TM (Tomography) Menu code for executing backup Four hexadecimal digits are used LENGTH
14 PRO 0 25 EM5 Space
(image protect with HIC) 8: TX (Temporary subtraction, when EBK = 1. for menu code designation. =4
overall processing)
9 : WX (Whole spine, overall 26 UNL 16 Time until overexposure condition is canceled. 0 – 99 (hour)
processing)
10 : EX (Energy subtraction, overall 27 IPE 8 Time until natural-radiation-fogging warning is issued 0 – 99 (hour)
processing)
28 XRD 1 Beep alert upon ready 0 : OFF. 1 : ON
11 : AS (Inter-image operation)
99 : ALL 29 X1717T "0040" X-ray tube setup value (wide, upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
Shifting in median sensitivity 1 No change 30 X1717C "4000" X-ray tube setup value (wide, center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
15 SF1 50 0 – 299 required.
(relatively high sensitivity)
31 X1417T "0010" X-ray tube setup value (14" x 17", upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
Shifting in median sensitivity 2 No change
16 SF2 100 0 – 299
(high sensitivity) required. 32 X1417C "1000" X-ray tube setup value (14" x 17", center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
0: space (10) 33 X1714T "0020"

X-ray tube setup value (landscape 14" x 17",
"0000"-"FFFF"
1: space (2) department name (8) upper reference)
2: department name (4) menu (6) X-ray tube setup value (landscape 14" x 17",
3: department name (4) film mark (6) 34 X1714C "2000" center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
Group information setup method Indent Refer to
17 GRP 0 4: unit code (1) space (9)
for sorting "Appendix 4"
5: space (4) MPM (4) space (2) 35 X1414T "0008" X-ray tube setup value (14" x 14", upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
in Installation
6: space (4) film mark (6) Volume
36 X1414C "0800" X-ray tube setup value (14" x 14", center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
7: department name (4) MPM (4)
space (2) 37 X1012T "0004" X-ray tube setup value (10" x 12", upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
Position of film mark or menu 38 X1012C "0400" X-ray tube setup value (10" x 12", center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
18 PTR 0 character string outputted with 0 – F (hexadecimal notation) Indent
GRP (valid when GRP = 2, 3, 6) 39 X0810T "0002" X-ray tube setup value (8" x 10", upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
40 X0810C "0200" X-ray tube setup value (8" x 10", center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
X-ray tube setup value

Unique information setup method 0: Space (10) 41 X1843T "0080" (18cm x 43cm, upper reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
19 UNQ 0 Indent
for sorting 1: patient ID number (10)
X-ray tube setup value
42 X1843C "8000" (18cm x 43cm, center reference) "0000"-"FFFF"
20 PCD 1 0: 1 µsec 43 OXI 1 Overexposure detection enabled/disabled 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Clock during DMS-I/F output
1: 2 µsec IDT connection type/CSL function incorporated type
44 IDT 1 1: IDT Unchangeable.
0: 1 µsec (< 60m) changeover.
21 PCL 0 Clock during LP-I/F output
1: 2 µsec (> 60m) TR1H3003.EPS
DMS output code selection when 0: Inch Not used.

22 CIM 0 "inch" and "metric" physical sizes (change
1: Metric
differ prohibited)
Selection of a menu to transmit 0: OFF (not transmitted)

23 EBK 0 EDR backup information to the IP 1: MENU (menu selected with
address that is set with EBA EM is selected)
2: Full (all menus)
TR1H3002.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
The item named "PRO" defines the screen types for which the HI-C unit screen protection
function is to be enabled.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Item ■ Detailed Descriptions of SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) Settings

number Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
Supplementary explanations of the entries in the “List of SYSTEM Settings” are given below.
0: <Tissue route>. Refer to the explanations as needed.
2 (instance identifier).
0. <image instance UID'>
1: <Tissue route>. When the QA-WS ● “2. IPS” (standard LAN address)
2 (instance identifier). connection is made
1. <examination number'> <Tissue route> =
2: <Tissue route>. 1.2.392.200036. This entry represents the IP address of the CPU90E board, which is the standard
2 (instance identifier). 9125 component of the RU. The preselected initial value is “172.16.0.1 ”( :
45 UID_STI 3 Examination instance 2.<examination date + modality (CR)>. If the <examination
<examination number'> date> cannot be denotes half-width space).
3: <Tissue route>. acquired, the date
2 (instance identifier). of acquisition When you use the RU while it is connected to a network, you must determine and
3. <examination date + modality (CR)>. is used.
<patient ID'> designate a unique IP address so that its duplicate is not found within the network.
4: <Tissue route>.
2 (instance identifier). Under normal conditions, however, the IP address is determined when the system
4. <examination date>.<patient ID'2>. configuration is finalized. Therefore, confirm the IP address that is assigned to the
<request service>
CPU90E board.
DEF_ Image processing density 0: Standard-density processing
46
DENSITY
0
device default 1: High-density processing Setup not required. ● “3. IPI” (LAN board address)
2 (CR-IR348RU) 0: Standard SP This entry represents the IP address of the CPU90F board, which is available as an
Be careful of
47 SRM or High-speed mode setup 1: Rapid SP change. option for use with the RU. The preselected initial value is “172.16.0.2 ”( :
0 (CR-IR344/343) 2: User UTL Select
denotes half-width space).
<Variable section>
0: left-justified; 1: right-justified When you use the RU while it is connected to a network, you must determine and
<Applicable to individual variable
section digits> Common to designate a unique IP address so that its duplicate is not found within the network.
00010000 Right-/left-justification definition a: patient ID; b: patient name; DMS output,
48 JATFY for long format CRT display, Under normal conditions, however, the IP address is determined when the system
00001111 c: exposure menu;
d: examination number; and FILM output.
configuration is finalized. Therefore, confirm the IP address that is assigned to the
e: department name (alphanumeric);
f-l: held in reserve (default: left-justified); CPU90F board.
m-p: held in reserve (default: right-justified)
Even if the CPU90F board is not configured, be sure to assign an IP address to it.
HQ_
49 1 HQ function setup 0: disabled; 1: enabled Not used.
FUNC ● “4. ILA” (ID acquisition target board selection)
DRC_ Choose either the value “0” or “1” (initial value) to specify the board whose ID informa-
50 1 DRC function setup 0: disabled; 1: enabled Not used.
FUNC
tion is to be acquired from the IDT.
0: Black Screen
51 SSS 0 Screen saver selection
1: Pictures
• “0” : CPU90E board
• “1 (initial value)” : CPU90F board
0: Pad with space to the head
(Ex." 1234") ● “7. SID” (image reader number)
1: Pad with zero to the head
52
DST_
2 Distribution code padding setup
(Ex."00001234") When you use two or more units of an image reader (FCR3000 or other FCR series
PADDING 2: Pad with space to the tail
(Ex."1234 ")
machine) within the same network, you have to assign a unique symbol (A-Z) to each
3: Pad with zero to the tail of them.
(Ex."12340000")
This symbol is used as the first digit of an image number. Therefore, you can tell
0: The number assigned by the IDT is
transmitted as is. The CR-IR348RU which image reader was used to generate particular image data.
does not assign any number to images
Study/Series information having no Study/Series information. ● “10. SS1” (screen save function timer)
53 UID 0
numbering setup 1: The number assigned by the IDT is
transmitted as is. The CR-IR348RU
This entry determines the time required for screen save function activation. The
assigns numbers to images having preselected initial value is “0”. The setting is variable in 1-minute increments between
no Study/Series information. 0 and 60. If a setting of “0” is employed, the screen save function does not work.
TR1H3004.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆ SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE

Be sure to observe the LENGTH (digits) requirements specified for the following items. If a The screen save function protects the image monitor from “burn in”. It turns OFF the screen
display when a preselected amount of time passes without any user operation.
wrong LENGTH is used, the setup results in error, so that the machine may not operate
properly.
24.EBA#EDR Backup Server Address (Length = 15, including a period (.))
25.EM1,2,3,4,5#EDR Backup Menu Code (Length = 4)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● “48. JSTFY” (right-/left-justification definition for long format) ■ DICOM Setup (Item Numbers 54-78)
This entry is effective when “1: YES” is chosen from “40. LTC” of PRINT
(FILMFMT.CFG) to select the use of long format. Item IDT
Item Initial value Setup description Remarks
numbers type
A 16-digit variable (0: left-justified; 1: right-justified) is to be set here. The 16 digits (a
Character code of special symbols 0: ISO-IR 6
through p) contain the definitions for a (patient ID), b (patient name), c (exposure 54 SCS 0 with UK/US language setting 1: ISO-IR 100
menu name), d (examination number), e (department name), and f through p (held in
Setting for converting patient
reserve). 55 PN_CS 0 0: Not converted
name components from FINP
to DICOM 1: Converted
By default, the first five digits are “00010”, which means that a (patient ID), b (patient
name), and c (exposure menu name) are left-justified, and that d (examination Setting of delimiter for patient 0: Space " "
number) is right-justified, and further that e (department name) is left-justified. name components in FINP 1: Caret "^"
56 PN_FDS 0 (patient name in languages other
2: Comma ","
● “53. UID” (Study/Series information numbering setting) than Japanese)
If the Study/Series information is not numbered on the IDT, or no numbering is per- Setting of delimiter for patient 0: Space " "
name components in FINP
formed, it is set to determine whether the Study/Series information is to be numbered 57 PN_FDM 0 (patient name in Japanese
1: Caret "^"
or not on the machine. language) 2: Comma ","
• “0” : Numbering is not performed on the machine. F: Family name

• “1 (default value)”: Numbering is performed on the machine (according to the format Setting of patient name G: Given name
PN_ components (for one component
58 "F" M: Middle name
that is set in “40. UID_STI”). FCS1 in FINP) P: Prefix name
If numbering is performed on the IDT, the Study/Series information numbered on the S: Suffix name
IDT is effective anyway. F: Family name
Setting of patient name G: Given name
PN_
59 "FG" components (for two components M: Middle name
FCS2 in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
PN_
60 "FGM" components M: Middle name
FCS3 (for three components in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
PN_ components
61 "FGMP" M: Middle name
FCS4 (for four components in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
PN_ components
62 "FGMPS" M: Middle name
FCS5 (for five components in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name
PN_ components M: Middle name
63 "F"
FCM1 (for one component in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
64 "FG"
FCM2 (for two components in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
F: Family name
65 "FGM"
FCM3 (for three components in FINP) P: Prefix name
S: Suffix name
TR1H3009.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Item ● “55. PN_CS” through “69. PN_DC”

number Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
The following settings are made regarding the patient name information for the image
F: Family name
Setting of multi-byte patient name G: Given name that is subject to DICOM output (Base on DICOM) to QA-WS or CR-IR348CL.
PN_
66 "FGMP" components M: Middle name
FCM4
(for four components in FINP) P: Prefix name
• Definition of components of the name (Family name, Given name, Middle name,
S: Suffix name Prefix, Suffix).
F: Family name • Delimiter between components
PN_
67 "FGMPS" components M: Middle name
FCM5
(for five components in FINP) P: Prefix name
<DICOM output with FINP input intact>
S: Suffix name
0: Space " "

• PN_CS=0
68 PN_DD 1 Setting of delimiter for patient
1: Caret "^" Name components and delimiters are not converted.
name components in DICOM
2: Comma ","
Settings for PN_FDS/PN_FDM/.../PN_DC are ignored.
F: Family name
G: Given name
Setting of patient name
69 PN_DC "FGMPS" M: Middle name
components in DICOM
P: Prefix name <Separated by delimiter when DICOM output is generated>
S: Suffix name
• PN_CS=1
70 MON 1 0: Type 1
CRT monitor display type
1: Type 2 Name components and delimiters are converted.
CR-IR348 Settings for PN_FDS/PN_FDM/.../PN_DC are effective. Cases where the setting for
(Differs Setting of machine type display
71 ENV depending on each of the items is at its initial value are described below.
switching
the system type)
Setting to determine whether to display a 0: No (output instruction is reserved • PN_FDS=0

72 FLMW 1 window that requests the user to replace without displaying a window)
the film tray, when DRY PIX is used 1: Yes (window displayed) Space is handled as a delimiter.
Setting to determine whether to output
the Shot-Ready signal to the X-ray tube 0: The Shot-Ready signal is outputted.
73 EVE 0
at the time of IP retreat upon activation 1: The Shot-Ready signal is not outputted. • PN_FDM=0
of the IP retreat key Full-width space is handled as a delimiter for a patient name in Kanji.
Setting to determine whether to output the 0: The Shot-Ready signal is outputted.
74 EVS 1 Shot-Ready signal to the X-ray tube at the 1: The Shot-Ready signal is not outputted.
time of IP retreat upon selector switching • PN_FCS1=“F”
Setting of whether to output HQ image in 0: DISABLE • PN_FCS2=“FG”
75 DK_FILM 0 single format to 14"x14" film 1: ENABLE
• PN_FCS3=“FGM”
Setting of whether to clear the • PN_FCS4=“FGMP”
0: NO
76 DCL 1 "distribution code" during image
1: YES (Clear the distribution code)
retransmission • PN_FCS5=“FGMPS”
Setting of whether to turn OFF the 0: NO PN_FCS1 through PN_FCS5 set components of a name (single-byte). If PN_FCS1
77 FCL 1 "filing designation" during image 1: YES
retransmission (Turn OFF the filing designation)
through PN_FCS5 are set as described above, they are defined as follows.
Setting of whether to display the

78 U_0810 0 reduction output setting button to 8"x10"
0: NO PN_FCS1: If there is only one component, it is interpreted as Family name. Assume
1: YES
film on the U-Utility menu screen that the patient name is “Fuji Taro”. Then, if only “Fuji” is entered, “Fuji” is
interpreted as Family name.
TR1H3010.EPS
PN_FCS2: If there are two components, they are interpreted as Family name and
Given name. Assume that the patient name is “Fuji Taro”. Then, if “Fuji
Taro” is entered, “Fuji” is interpreted as Family name and “Taro” as Given
name (when the delimiter is a half-width space).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
PN_FCS3: Assume that the patient name is “Rev. John M Smith Ph. D.”. Then, if ● “73. EVE” (Setting of Shot-Ready Signal Output)
“Smith John M” is entered, “Smith” is interpreted as Family name, “John”
as Given name, and “M” as Middle name (when the delimiter is a half- It sets to determine whether to output the Shot-Ready signal to the X-ray tube at the
width space). time of IP retreat upon activation of the “IP retreat” key on the console. When it is set
to “outputted (0)”, x-ray radiation may be bombarded, even at the time of IP retreat.
When the cassette exposure kit is used, it should be set to “outputted (0)”.
PN_FCS4: If there are four components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given
name, Middle name, and Prefix. Assume that the patient name is “Rev.
● “74. EVS” (Setting of Shot-Ready signal output)
John M Smith Ph. D.”. Then, if “Smith John M Rev. Ph. D.” is entered,
“Smith” is interpreted as Family name, “John” as Given name, “M” as By selector switching on the console, the IP of the built-in machine that is not selected
Middle name, and “Rev.” as Prefix (when the delimiter is a half-width by the selector is retreated. It sets to determine whether to output the Shot-Ready
space). signal to the X-ray tube of the built-in machine where the IP is retreated. If it is set to
PN_FCS5: If there are five components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given “outputted (0)”, X-ray radiation may be bombarded, even at the time of IP retreat.
name, Middle name, Prefix, and Suffix. Assume that the patient name is
“Rev. John M Smith Ph. D.”. Then, if “Smith John M Rev. Ph. D.” is en- ● "75. DK_FILM"
tered, “Smith” is interpreted as Family name, “John” as Given name, “M”
as Middle name, “Rev.” as Prefix, and “Ph. D.” as Suffix (when the delim- For a 14"x14" size high-resolution image, a 14"x14" film output can be generated.
iter is a half-width space).
● "76. DCL"
• PN_FCM1=“F” When the image is to be retransmitted from the reader side, the "distribution code" is
normally cleared. Not clearing it can be done.
• PN_FCM2=“FG”
• PN_FCM3=“FGM” ● "77. FCL"
• PN_FCM4=“FGMP” When the image is to be retransmitted from the reader side, "filing designation" is
• PN_FCM5=“FGMPS” normally turned OFF. Not turning it OFF can be done.
PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 set components of a name (double-byte). If
PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 are set as described above, they are defined as ● "78. U_0810"
follows.
The setup button to determine whether to permit reduction during 8"x10" film output
can be displayed on the U-Utility menu screen.
PN_FCM1: If there is only one component, it is interpreted as Family name.
PN_FCM2: If there are two components, they are interpreted as Family name and
Given name.
PN_FCM3: If there are three components, they are interpreted as Family name,
Given name, and Middle name.
PN_FCM4: If there are four components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given
name, Middle name, and Prefix.
PN_FCM5: If there are five components, they are interpreted as Family name, Given
name, Middle name, Prefix, and Suffix.
• PN_DD=1 [change prohibited]

It defines the delimiter for the patient name when DICOM output is generated.
• PN_DD=“FGMPS” [change prohibited]

It defines the arrangement of the components of the patient name when DICOM
output is generated.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.3 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) ■ Film Setup (Item Numbers 1-44)
Item
It defines setup information related to film output formats. number Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
0: NO
■ List of PRINT Setup Items 1 BF 1 IP barcode display switching.
1: YES
2.PRINT 0: NO
2 EF 1 EDR mode display switching.
1: YES
1.BF: Print barcode 27.CSX0: Character Area0 (Standard) horizontal size
28.CSY0: Character Area0 (Standard) vertical size 0: NO
2.EF: Print EDR mode 3 IF 1 Image condition display switching.
1: YES
3.IF: Print image process condition 29.CSX1: Character Area1 (Standard) horizontal size
4.CF: Print L, S, CS, SS, condition 30.CSY1: Character Area1 (Standard) vertical size 0: NO
4 CF 1 Correction item display switching.
1: YES
5.ET: Print shot day 31.CLX0: Character Area0 (Large) horizontal size
6.HN: Institution name (Max Length=60) 32.CLY0: Character Area0 (Large) vertical size 0: NO
5 ET 1 Exposure time display switching.
1: YES
7.HP: Japanese Institution name (Max Length=30) 33.CLX1: Character Area1 (Large) horizontal size
8.GF: Print set process 34.CLY1: Character Area1 (Large) vertical size FUJI FILM
6 HN Institution name. 60 Char
9.GJ: Print engineer ID 35.FD1417:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation HOSPITAL
10.MF: Print Menu 35.FD1714:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation 9578 8E6D
11.A1: Maximum age of monthly representation 35.FD1843:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation 8374 8343
12.A2: Maximum age of daily representation 35.FD0810:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation 838B 8380
9561 8940
13.TH: Trimming (manmo) 35.FD1008:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation
7 HP 8140 8140 Institution name in Kanji. S-JIS 30 Bytes (up to 15 Kanji
14.TE: Trimming (others) 35.FD1414:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field position & rotation 8140 8140 characters)
15.CL: Representation of date 36.FC1:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation 8140 8140
16.AB: Representation of age 36.FC2:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation 8140
(FUJI FILM
17.FR1: Print image frame 36.FC3:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation
HOSPITAL)
18.FR2: Print image frame 36.FC4:14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character fields position & rotation
Set processing information 0: NO
19.FR4: Print image frame 36.FC5:8*10 film character fields position & rotation 8 GF 1 display switching. 1: YES
20.CR: Print compression rate 36.FC6:8*10 film character fields position & rotation
Engineer information 0: NO
21.MM: Margin 37.EM: Print Energy-Subtraction Param./PEM Param. 9 GJ 0 display switching. Indent
1: YES
22.SG: Print standard Image on 14*17, 14*14 film like 38.IN: Print film char2/examination number
HQ Image Menu character string 0: NO
39.IM: Image area move to the top of 14*17 film. 10 MF 1 display switching.
23.HG: Size selection of 14*17, 14*14 film character 1: YES
(Only for 15*30, 35*35, 43*43)
(Single format) 40.LTC: Long type character format Upper-limit age in years for age
11 A1 7 0 – 99
24.OS: DR compression in reprint 41.FRSC: No print scale display in months.
25.RF: Print reverse mark 42.TN: Print operater or technologist's Name Upper-limit age in months for age
26.CE: Print 14*17, 14*14, 8*10 film character field 12 A2 0 display in days. 0 – 12
43.PS: Print pixel spacing[mm] (ex. :0.05->0.10)
44.RS: Requesting service characters.
HR IP image four-side cropping Change
13 TH 0.0 0.0 – 25.0 (mm)
FR1H3028.EPS amount (mammography) prohibited.
◆ NOTE ◆
ST IP image four-side cropping Change
14 TE 0
Be sure to observe the LENGTH (digits) requirements specified for the following items. If a amount (except for mammography) 0 – 25 (mm) prohibited.
wrong LENGTH is used, the setup results in error, so that the machine may not operate prop-
0: Japanese (H10.04.01)
erly. 1: ANSI Long (1998.APR.01)
• 6.HN: Institution name (Max Length = 60) 2: ANSI Short (1998.04.01)
• 7.HP: 2 byte code character (Japanese, Korean) Institution name (Max Length = 30) 15 CL 2 Date display format 3: American Long (APR.01.1998)
4: American Short (04.01.1998)
5: European Long (01.APR.1998)
6: European Short (01.04.1998)
0: AGE
16 AB 0 Age/birth date display switching.
1: Date of Birth
Image frame display changeover 0: NO
17 FR1 0
(1-image output) 1: YES

18 FR2 0
(2-differing-image left/right output) 1: YES

19 FR4 0
(4-image output) 1: YES
TR1H3005.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Item Item
Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks Item Initial value Setup description Parameters Remarks
number number
Image compression ratio display 0: NO XXXX:
20 CR 0 changeover for image re-output. Enabled when
1: YES
1234 2345 Position rotation designation outputting to
Area position rotation designation:
0: image information dependent 36 FC1 3456 4567 for specific MPM code 14"x17", 14"x14",
(default = transparent margin)
MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. B4, and 8"x10"
1: image information dependent 7890 8901
21 MM 0 Margin designation switching. film.
(default = black margin)
2: fixed to transparent margin XXXX: Enabled when
3: fixed to black margin 1234 2345 Position rotation designation outputting to
36 FC2 3456 4567 for specific MPM code 14"x17", 14"x14",
14" x 17"/14" x 14" LP 100% 0: NO MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. B4, and 8"x10"
22 SG 0 magnification output mode. 1: YES (Magnify) 7890 8901 film.
14" x 17"/14" x 14" 100% 0: Standard XXXX:
23 HG 0 Enabled when
magnification output character size. 1: Large 1234 2345 Position rotation designation Area position rotation designation: outputting to
DR compression enabled/disabled 0: Depending On Image Information "1" cannot 36 FC3 3456 4567 for specific MPM code 14"x17", 14"x14",
24 OS 0
1: Depending On System Setting
for reoutput. be used. 5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. B4, and 8"x10"
7890 8901 film.
0: NO
25 RF 2 Left/right character display reversal. 1: YES (""or"R-reverse") XXXX: Enabled when
2: YES ("AP"or"PA") 1234 2345 Position rotation designation outputting to
36 FC4 3456 4567 for specific MPM code 14"x17", 14"x14",
0: both displayed MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
5678 6789 (8 max.) areas. B4, and 8"x10"
Display selection for film character 1: only area 1 displayed
26 CE 0 7890 8901 film.
areas 1 and 2. 2: only area 2 displayed
3: not displayed
Position rotation designation Enabled only
14" x 17" 100% magnification output 36 FC5 0020:0317 for specific MPM code when outputting
27 CSX0 500 character display area 0 horizontal size 2 - 500 (0.1mm) (8 max.) areas. to 8"x10" film.
(standard)
Position rotation designation Enabled only
14" x 17" 100% magnification output
36 FC6 0020:?3?? for specific MPM code when outputting
28 CSY0 268 character display area 0 vertical size 2 - 268 (0.1mm) MPM1 MPM2 . . . MPM8
(8 max.) areas. to 8"x10" film.
(standard)
0: NO
14" x 17" 100% magnification output Ene.-Sub. information display
37 EM 2 1: YES (Ene.-Sub.)
29 CSX1 458 character display area 1 horizontal size 2 - 458 (0.1mm) changeover
(standard) 2: YES (PEM)
14" x 17" 100% magnification output Check for

30 CSY1 174 character display area 1 vertical size 2 - 230 (0.1mm) Examination number display 0: Film CHAR2 necessity to
(standard) 38 IN 0 changeover 1: examination number display this item
14" x 17" 100% magnification output
before it is set.
31 CLX0 980 character display area 0 horizontal size 2 - 980 (0.1mm)
(large) Movement of 14" x 17" (35cm x 0: NO (FCR9000 compatible)
39 IM 0 43cm) film output image position 1: YES (Shift to upper position)
14" x 17" 100% magnification output (15x43, 35x35, 43x43)
32 CLY0 268 character display area 0 vertical size 2 - 268 (0.1mm)
(large)
0: NO (Not used)
40 LTC 0 Use of long type format
14" x 17" 100% magnification output 1: YES (Used)
33 CLX1 668 character display area 1 horizontal size 2 - 668 (0.1mm)
(large) XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX Setting of MPM code for output Up to eight four-digit MPM codes A wildcard may
14" x 17" 100% magnification output 41 FRSC
34 CLY1 180 character display area 1 vertical size 2 - 236 (0.1mm) XXXX XXXX with frame/without ruler are set. be used.
(large) XXXX XXXX
FD Designation of position and rotation for

35 0010 areas 0 and 1 of 14" x 17" size 0: NO (Not used) Change
1417 42 TN 0 Display of the radiologist name
1: YES (Used) prohibited.
Designation of position and rotation for Four digits (abcd) are used to
FD areas 0 and 1 of landscape 14" x 17" designate the area position and Setting to enable/disable Pixel 0: Pixel Spacing print disabled
35 1131 43
1714 size rotation. PS 0
Spacing print output 1: Pixel Spacing print enabled
a = Area 0 position
FD Designation of position and rotation for 0: upper left, 1: upper right, Switching of font size for the
35 0010 2: lower left, 3: lower right 44 0: Normal
1843 areas 0 and 1 of 1843 size RS 0 requesting department name
b = Area 0 rotation 1: Large
FD Designation of position and rotation for 0: NO, 1: YES TR1H3007.EPS
35 0010 c = Area 1 position
0810 areas 0 and 1 of 8" x 10" size
0: upper left, 1: upper right,
FD Position rotation designation for 2: lower left, 3: lower right
35 1131 d = Area 1 rotation
1008 landscape 8" x 10" areas 0 and 1
0: NO, 1: YES
FD Designation of position and rotation for
35 0010
1414 areas 0 and 1 of 8" x 10" size
TR1H3006.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Detailed Descriptions of PRINT (FILM.CFG) Settings ● “38. IN” (examination number display)
Supplementary explanations of the entries in the “List of PRINT Settings” are given below. This entry specifies whether or not to display the examination number within an ID
Refer to the explanations as needed. card. Changes of this parameter setting are subject to the approval of the Service
Headquarters.
● “6. HN” (institution name)
● “40. LTC” (use of long type format)
This institution name is displayed when “2. FNT” of SYSTEM is set to other than “0” This entry is used to specify whether or not to use the long type format for film
(Japan). lettering. When you choose “1: YES”, the system uses the long type format so that
lettering right-/left-justification complies with the “48. JSTFY” entry for SYSTEM
● “7. HP” (institution name in kanji) (IRSET.CFG).
This institution name in kanji is displayed when “2. FNT” of SYSTEM is set to “0” ◆ SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ◆
(Japan). When entering a name in kanji, separate a Shift JIS code set of four digits The long type format is a function that increases the number of output characters to be deliv-
from each other. If the Shift JIS space code (8140) is entered 15 times for “7. HP” ered to the HI-C655QA, film, and main body panel. To use this function, you have to set the CL
(institution name in kanji), the institution name designated by the “6. HN” (institution for long character string output.
name) entry is displayed.
● “17. FR1” (1-image output image frame display) ● “41. FRSC” (setting of film output with frame/without ruler)
The frame is not displayed if the format is not thoroughly complied with. Used to determine whether to output film with frame/without ruler. It is set by the MPM
code.
● “18. FR2” (2-image or left/right independent image output)
Up to eight MPM codes may be set. However, if “without frame” is set in FRT1/FR2/
The frame is not displayed if the format is not thoroughly complied with. FR4, the resulting film output is without frame/without ruler.
● “21. MM” (margin designation changeover) Only when “with frame” is set in FRT1/FR2/FR4, the setting defined in FRSC is effec-
This entry specifies whether the margin is to be transparent or black. tive.
• 0: The margin is either transparent or black depending on the image information. If Setup example 1)
the image information does not specify the margin, a transparent margin results by FRSC= “0000 0200 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX”
default.
With MPM codes of 0000 and 0200 only, the film output is “with frame/without ruler”.
• 1: The margin is either transparent or black depending on the image information. If
the image information does not specify the margin, a black margin results by Setup example 2)
default. FRSC= “???? XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX”
• 2: A transparent margin results at all times. With all the MPM codes, the film output is “with frame/without ruler”.
• 3: A black margin results at all times. Setup example 3)
● “22. SG” (14"x17"/14"x14" LP magnification mode) FRSC= “020? XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX”
This entry specifies whether or not to enlarge the output to the 14"x17" LP size. With MPM codes of 0200-020F only, the film output is “with frame/without ruler”.
Changes of this parameter setting are subject to the approval of the Service Head-
quarters.
● “23.HG” (14"x17"/14"x14" 100% magnification output character size)
When you designate 0, the “27.CSX0” to “30.CSY1” range takes effect.
When you designate 1, the “31.CLX0” to “34.CLY1” range takes effect.
● “24. OS” (DR compression for re-output)
This entry specifies whether the use of the DR compression process for image re-
output is to be determined by the image information or machine setup.
● “25. RF” (left-right reversal display of characters)
When the value 1 is entered, the reversed R character is displayed if the image is
reversed left to right. When the value 2 is entered, either AP or PA is displayed for all
images in accordance with the employed radiographic machine and method.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Explanation about area indication ● Output Format of Area 0 and Area 1
There are two types of area (area 0 and area 1) indications as follows.
For areas 0 and 1, their output position and display position (rotational position) on each film
● Area 0 may be set.
The hospital name, patient name, sex, patient ID, age or birth date, exposure date, exposure Area indications for closely related ones of the FILM setup items are detailed below.
time, set processing information, and department name are indicated.
XXXXX Hospital name • Selection of area indication

XXXXX Patient name With item “26.CE”, indication of either area 0 or area 1 is selected.
[ X] 7901900000 2 Sex, patient ID, age • Designation of area size
XXXXX 1998. 10. 16 [ 10:00 ] Exposure date, exposure time For standard size: Designated with items 27.CSX0, 28.CSY0, 29.CSX1, and
30.CSY1
L->R***** ES 102-01 Set processing information
XXXXX -A000000 Department name CSX0 CSX1

FR1B5023.EPS
● Area 1 CSY0 Area 0 CSY1 Area 1

The IP number, EDR mode/menu code, system ID/image number, image condition, normal- FR1B5025.EPS
ization condition, correction item, engineer code, exposure bed information, and compres-
sion code are indicated. For large size: Designated with items 31.CLX0, 32.CLY0, 33.CLX1, and 34.CLY1.
Gradation processing
CLX0 CLX1
IP number
EDR mode
CLY0 Area 0 CLY1 Area 1
Menu code
System ID FR1B5026.EPS
Image number • How to set the area position and area rotation
Frequency processing Definition of area position and rotation
03012246 0200 0200 No
rotation
90°
Position Position rotation
1. 0G#1. 6-0. 20 4R0. 5 3V1. 0 1D-USM 0 1
2. 0 20000 *1. 0*1. 0 Correction term

80KV10mAs XX : 22 System sensitivity
Data compression code Film area of one frame Film area of one frame
Exposure table information
Latitude
FR1H1327.EPS
Position Position
2 3
Definition of position Definition of rotation

FR1B5027.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
• Setting procedures 7.4 Network-Related Setup Items
With items “36. FC1” through “36. FC4” of Film Setup, four types of area displays may
be set. For each of the types, up to eight MPM codes may be set. When a network connection is to be made, the following configuration utility setup data must
For image data with MPM code that is not set, it is displayed with the normal output be entered.
format (area 0 = position 0/no rotation, area 1 = position 1/no rotation). 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
0.QUIT
A “wildcard ?” may be used for one letter of a MPM code that may be set with items FC1
through FC4. “?” denotes any letter, from 0 to F. 1.SYSTEM
Example) “123?” ’ Represents a MPM code, from 1230 to 123F.
2.PRINT
Position/rotation definition MPM code (Up to eight codes may be set) 3.REMOTE SWITCH
0031 : 0123 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 789A 4.EQUIPMENT
5.LOCAL INTERFACE
90° rotation for area 1 (0: disabled, 1: enabled)
6.NETWORK HOST INTERFACE
Position of area 1 (0: upper left, 1: upper right, 2: lower left, 3: lower right)
90° rotation for area 0 (0: disabled, 1: enabled) 7.HOSTS ADDRESS
Position for area 0 (0: upper left, 1: upper right, 2: lower left, 3: lower right) 8.DISTRIBUTION
FR1B5028.EPS
9.ROUTING
Setup example)
10.NETMASKS
FC1=0031:0123 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 789A
Area 0 11.DICOM (Base on DICOM) FR1H3029.EPS
Area 1
Area 0 = position (0), rotation disabled (0)

Area 1 = position (3), 90° rotation enabled (1)
FR1B5029.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.5 REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) 7.6 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)

It sets remote switch ON/OFF of the intelligent hub. Since this setup item falls under the It sets to determine which HOST is requested to process filing function, display function,
“indent” category, it need not be set under normal conditions. print function, ID information acquisition function, and preview image display function.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ■ Format
Intelligent hubs: SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) compliant hubs.
Function HostName ( HostName • • • )
■ Format “ ” denotes a space.

● Function (function)
IP address, root, “parameter”
It sets either of the following.
• OD_FILE (Filing function)
● IP address (IP address) • DISPLAY (Display function)
• PRINT (Print function)
IP address that is set in the HOSTS file.
• IDT (ID information acquisition function)
“7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)”
For CR Console connection, be sure to set the following.
● “Parameter” • DISPLAY (Display function)
• IDT (ID information acquisition function)
• When ON “NOPK▲ 1000”
• When OFF “NOPK▲ 0000” ● HostName (host name)
“▲” denotes a space. A host that is responsible for the function specified by “Function (function)” may be set.
If multiple units are connected with “PRINT”, “OD_FILE”, and “DISPLAY”, the output
● Setup Example designation can be designated by user setting.
REMOTE SWITCH is set to ON. The number of hosts that may be set for one function is restricted as follows.
An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below. • IDT Only one
• PRINT LOCAL and one host name, or up to two host names
• Other Up to two
For CR Console connection, the host designation is restricted as follows.
| # |
• DISPLAY Only one
| #RMT_SW.CFG | • IDT Only one
| # | It should be noted that the setup for HostName (host name) is as follows.
| | • LOCAL
| [ON] | A host connected over an E-I/F or serial line. It is designated when direct connection
| #172.16.0.128,root,”NOPK 1000" | is to be established.
| | • LOCAL_S
| [OFF] | A host connected over an E-I/F or serial line. It is designated when direct connection
is to be established. Note, however, that high-resolution data transfer is not sup-
| #172.16.0.128,root,”NOPK 0000" |
ported.
| |
• LOCAL_R
| 172.16.0.128,root,”NOPK 1000" |
It is designated when print output is to be provided only during reoutput, without
generating printout during reading.
During reading, images are transferred only to the HIC/QA-WS, where image checks/
adjustments are performed, and then they are routed from the HIC/QA-WS, to the
CR-IR, and to the printer for reoutput.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
◆NOTE ◆ ■ Setup Example
No output can be generated directly to the printer from the CR-IR where “LOCAL_R” OD_FILE Network-connected to odf624.
setting is made. DISPLAY Network-connected to hic654 and hic655 (multiple connections).
PRINT LOCAL connection
• Host that is set in the HOSTS file
IDT Network-connected to idt4-1.
A network-connected host. It is designated when network connection is to be
established. An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below.
“7.9 HOST ADDRESS (HOSTS)”
| # |
| # EQUIP |
| # |
| # Function Host Name [Host Name]... |
| # |
| # Function = OD_FILE or DISPLAY or PRINT or IDT |
| # Host Name= HostName (Network:Hostname def. by hosts) |
| # or LOCAL (E-i/f:LP,DMS) |
| # or LOCAL_S (E-i/f:DMS;Only Std.Dens.Image) |
| # or LOCAL_R (E-i/f:LP;Only Reprint) |
| OD_FILE odf624 |
| DISPLAY hic654 hic655 |
| PRINT LOCAL |
| IDT idt4-1 |
■ Precaution When Used in Connection with the CR Console (CR-IR348CL)

The CR-IR is only connectable to the CR Console, so that only “DISPLAY” and “IDT” may be
described as function names in the configuration.
A setup example is presented below.
| # |
| # EQUIP |
| # |
| # |
| • |
| • |
| • |
| IDT CRxxxxxxx |
| DISPLAY CRxxxxxxx |
* CRxxxxxxxx: CL host name (xxxxxxxx: CL product number)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.7 LOCAL INTERFACE (INTERFACE) 7.8 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)

It defines the setup information for communication requirements over serial line connection. It defines functions, communication protocols, and transfer rates of each host. The host must
Since the initial value is to be used as is, there is no need to change the setting. always be a device that is locally connected or connected to a network.
■ Format
HostName:Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed]
● HostName (host name)

• Host name that is set in the HOSTS file.
● Attr (attribute)
One of the following should be designated. Multiple attributes can be designated by delimit-
ing them by “|”.
• PRINT Film output enabled
• HD_FILE Active file enabled
• DISPLAY Display function
• OD_FILE Archive file enabled
● Protocol ID (protocol identification number)

One of the following should be designated.
• 0001 DMSP
• 0100, 0110 FINP (Fuji integrated network protocol)
• 0200 DICOM (Base on DICOM)
If it is necessary to use the image process exclusive selection flag, you must set the protocol
identification number to 0100, 0110, or 0200.
● System code (system type code)

It is set in two hexadecimal digits. It may be omitted by entering “,”.
● Speed (transfer speed)

It is set in decimal notation. It may be omitted by entering “,”. When it is omitted, it is set to
“8”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Setup Example 7.9 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
● hic654 The IP addresses of all the hosts connected to the same network can be set. One host can
The display function (DISPLAY) and file activation capability (HD-FILE) attributes are set. be defined per line. You can use up to 127 lines for definition.
Further, the protocol is set to FINP. The model code and transfer speed entries are omitted.
■ Format
● hic655a
IP Addr Host Name
The display function (DISPLAY) and file activation capability (HD-FILE) attributes are set.
Further, the protocol is set to FINP. The model code and transfer speed entries are omitted.
An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below. “ ” denotes a space.
● IP Addr (IP address)

An IP address is set in the form of “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”, using numerals ranging from 0 to 255.
| # |
“xxx” denotes 0 through 255.
| # DEVICE |
| # | ◆ NOTES ◆
| # Host Name:Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed] | • Be sure to allocate one standard LAN (CPU90E) IP address and one LAN board (CPU90F/
LAN90B) IP address to each unit of the CR-IR.
| # Attr = PRINT or HD_FILE or DISPLAY or OD_FILE | Example) 172.16.0.1 fcr5501a ...CR-IR (CPU90E)
| # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) | 172.16.0.2 fcr5501a-1 ...CR-IR (CPU90F/LAN90B)
| # System code = Hex 2 figures | • Ensure that the standard LAN (CPU90E) IP address and LAN board (CPU90F) IP address
agree with the IP address settings for SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) setup item 2 “IPS” and setup
| # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) | item 3 “IPI”.
| hic654:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
| hic655a:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
● Host Name (host name)
A host name is set within 10 characters, using lowercase alphabets (a through z), numerals
(0 through 9), and hyphen (-).
◆ NOTES ◆
The CR-IR is only connectable to the CR Console, so that only “HD-FILE” and “DISPLAY”
• If any alphabet is used in a host name, be sure to use lowercase letters.
may be described as attribute names in the configuration. The protocol is set to DICOM, and
• The initial letter of a host name should always be a lowercase alphabet.
the settings for the system code and transfer speed are omitted.
A setup example is presented below.
| # |
| # DEVICE |
| # |
| # Host Name:Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed] |
| # Attr = PRINT or HD_FILE or DISPLAY or OD_FILE |
| # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) |
| # System code = Hex 2 figures |
| # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) |
| CRxxxxxxx:DISPLAY,0200,, |

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Setup Example 7.10 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
CR-IR343 2 units
IDT-IV 1 unit The network connection distribution destinations can be set. Use one line to define one
distribution code. You can use up to 128 lines for distribution code definition.
HI-C 3 units
An example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below. ■ Format
Code Host Name ( HostName • • • )

| # |
“ ” denotes a space.
| # HOSTS |
| # | ● Code (distribution destination code)
| # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
The distribution code consists of eight alphanumeric characters. In place of an alphanu-
| #(Available Character:’a’-’z’ ‘0’-’9' ‘-’[37chars]) | meric character, you can use “?”, which represents any single character.
| # IP Addr Host Name |
● Host Name (host name)
| 172.16.0.1 fcr5501 |
| 172.16.0.2 fcr5501-1 | Set the host names that are entered in the HOSTS file. You can set up to four host
names that are separated from each other with a space.
| 172.16.0.11 fcr5501a |
| 172.16.0.12 fcr5501a-1 |
| 172.16.0.21 idt4-1 | ■ Setup Example
| 172.16.0.101 hic654 | The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to set the distribution code
| 172.16.0.102 hic655a | AA0123??? for the HI-C.
| 172.16.0.103 hic655b |
| # |
| # Codedstb |
The CR-IR is only connectable to the CR Console, so that the host name (IP address) that
may be described in the configuration is only for itself and the CR Console. | # |
A setup example is presented below. | # Code Host Name [HostName]... |
| AA0123?? hic655a |
| # |
| # HOSTS |
| # |
■ Precaution When Used as CR Consle (CR-IR348CL) System
| # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
DISTRIBUTION is set only if multiple CR Console's are connected to the CR-IR.
| #(Available Character:'a'-'z' '0'-'9' '-'[37chars]) |
| # IP Addr Host Name | “Appendix 21. Procedures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL)” in the
“Installation” volume
| 172.16.0.1 fcr5501 |
| 172.16.0.2 fcr5501-n |
| 172.16.1.20 CRxxxxxxxx |
CR-IR default setup value

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.11 ROUTING (ROUTE) 7.12 NETMASKS (NETMASKS)

When using a router to establish the connection to another network, you have to set the When making a connection to another network, you have to set the associated network
network internal router address and other relevant network connection information as indi- number and subnet mask. The subnet mask determines the network number portion within
cated below. an IP address (“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (xxx: 0 to 255)).
■ Format
■ Format
Network netmask
(Dst-Addr | Dst-Network-Addr) (Router-Name | Router-Addr),,,,
● Network (network number)
● Dst-Addr | Dst-Network-Addr (transfer destination IP address or transfer
destination network IP address) Make this entry to specify the network number of a network to which the CR-IR is connected.
Specify the transfer destination IP address or transfer destination network IP address. ● netmask (subnet mask)
● Router-Name | Router-Addr (router name or router IP address) Make this entry to determine the network number portion within the IP address. Enter “1” for
the IP address bits to be used for the network number and “0” for the bits to be used for the
Specify the host name or IP address of the router (intermediary device). host number. For this entry, use the “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (xxx: decimal number between 0 and
255) format.
One of the following three network classes applies in accordance with the network number
portion.
Class A 255.0.0.0
Class B 255.255.0.0
Class C 255.255.255.0
The smaller the network number portion, the greater the available host number portion. (In
order of enlarging host number portion, the classes are C, B, and A.) Therefore, when the
network number portion is made smaller, a larger number of host addresses (IP addresses)
can be allocated to the same network (it is possible to construct a large-size network).
◆ NOTE ◆
Set the netmask for both the CPU90E and CPU90F/LAN90B. If the CPU90F/LAN90B does
not exist, the default netmask for the CPU90F is employed without regard to the setting.
■ Setup Example
Network 172.16.0.0
netmask 255.255.0.0
The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to enter the above settings.
| # |
| # Network masks database |
| # |
| # only non-default subnet masks need to be defined here |
| # |
| # Network netmask |
| 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0 CR-IR default setup value |

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.13 DICOM (Base on DICOM) ■ Setup Example

The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to enter the DICOM settings.
Perform DICOM setup for the CR-IR and CL.
■ Format
| # |
HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType],[CompType],[Timeout1],
[Timeout2],[DensityType] | # DICOM |
| # |
| # HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType], |
● HostName
| # [CompType],[Timeout1],[Timeout2],[DensityType] |
Enter the host name that is defined by HOSTS or DEVICE.
| # HostName = Host name defined by “hosts” & “device” |
● ServiceName | # ServiceName = “STORAGE_U” or “STORAGE_P” |
| # AEName = Application Entity Name defined by DICOM |
Set “STORAGE_U”, for the local machine and “STORAGE_P” for the CL.
| # (Max 16 ascii characters) |
● AEName | # PortNo. = TCP Port Number connected to |
Set the DICOM standard Application Entity name (consisting of up to 16 ASCII characters). | # Dicom application(100:default). |
| # SOPType = SOP Class Type |
● PortNo.
| # 1:Fuji Private,2:OEM Private |
Set the TCP port number that the Base-on-DICOM application uses.
| # CompType = Compression Type |
This entry is meaningless for the transmitting end. The default setting is “104”.
| # 0:No(Implicit little endian),1:JPEG |
● SOPType (SOP Class Type definition) | # Timeout1 = connect/recv command Timeout [sec](0:endless) |
Although two options are selectable (1: Fuji Private; 2: OEM Private), choose “1”. | # Timeout2 = Every Image Trans. Timeout [sec](0:endless) |
| # DensityType = Output Image Density |
● CompType (image data compression definition)
| # 0:Standard Density |
Although two options are selectable (0: no compression; 1: JPEG compression), choose “1”. | # 1:Standard Density or High Quality Density |
● Timeout1 | # Which Density is to be chosen depends on ID Information. |
| # ex) |
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for the TCP socket connect/recv command.
| # fcr5501-n ,STORAGE_U :DPR_DICOM,,2,1,100,600,1 |
● Timeout2 | # dest-1 ,STORAGE_P :DPR_DICOM,21760,2,1,100,600,1 |
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for one-image transfer. | fcrxud1-n,STORAGE_U:DICOM_ES,,1,1,100,600,1 |
| CRxxxxxxxx,STORAGE_P:DICOM_IIP,21760,1,1,100,600,1 |
● DensityType
Set the output density for each output destination unit. “1” should always be set.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.14 Backing Up Configuration File (4) Select “3. BACK UP”, “2. CONFIGURATION DATA” and “1. YES” in sequence.
The configuration file that has been set is backed up. FUT> 7
A B C
0.QUIT
CAUTIONS 1.FORMAT FD
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION D E F
3.BACK UP
• Never power OFF the machine or press the FD eject button during file saving. The FD or 4.RESTORE 7 8 9
FD drive may be damaged. 5.EDR DATA
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE
• Once a setup file is edited, be sure to reset the machine after exiting M-Utility. 7.EXECUTION
4 5 6
FUT> 3
1 2 3
(1) Insert a backup floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. 0.QUIT
1.SCANNER DATA 0 . SP
(2) Start the M-Utility. 2.CONFIGURATION DATA
3.NETWORK DATA
DEL BS ENT
“3.1 Activating M-Utility” 4.IMAGE PROCESSING DATA
5.CSL MENU DATA
(3) Select “7. FILE UTILITY”. 6.EDR PROCESSION DATA
FUT:RES>2
Caps
0. QUIT
2. CONFIGURATION SETTING A B C
3. TEST MODE FR1H3021.EPS
5. SCANNER UTILITY
D E F
➮ Of the setup files, the following files are saved to the floppy disk.
7. FILE UTILITY 7 8 9 • SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG, IRSET.ORG)
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF 4 5 6 • PRINT (FILFMT.CFG, FILFMT.ORG)
10. IP UTILITY
11. SYSTEM UTILITY
1 2 3
• IRSTATUS (IRSTATUS.CFG, IRSTATUS.ORG)
>7 ◆ NOTE ◆
0 . SP
0.QUIT The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the
1.FORMAT FD DEL BS ENT
2.FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION machine. Thus, if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP,
3.BACK UP the file cannot be read during RESTORE.
4.RESTORE
5.EDR DATA
Caps
6.PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE
7.EXECUTION When the file save operation is completed, the system returns to the menu screen.
FUT> 3
(5) Choose “3. NETWORK DATA” and “1. YES” in sequence.
FR1H3020.EPS ➮ The following setup files are then saved onto the floppy disk.
• EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
• NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)
• HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
• DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
• ROUTING (ROUTE)
• NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
• REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG)
• DICOM (DICOM)
◆ NOTE ◆
The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the
machine. Thus, if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP,
the file cannot be read during RESTORE.
(6) Select “0. QUIT” repeatedly.

➮ The screen returns to the U-Utility mode.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
7.15 Network-Related Setup Example ● NETMASKS (NETMASKS)

If the transfer destination CL is not within the same network, set the subnet mask. If the
An example of how to change the settings of the network-related configuration file is transfer destination CL is within the same network, there is no need to make this entry again.
presented below. Referring to this example, configuration file settings should be made as
appropriate for each system configuration. ● DICOM (Base on DICOM)
■ Setup Example 1: Connecting with the CR Console (CR-IR348CL) Perform DICOM setup for the RU and CL.
Setup for connection with the CR Console is made as follows.

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE | fcrxud1-n,STORAGE_U :DICOM_ES,,1,1,100,600,1 |
“CRxxxxxxxx” used in the setup example denotes the host name of the CL. For “xxxxxxxx”, the | CRxxxxxxxx,STORAGE_P :DICOM_IIp,21760,1,1,100,600,1 |
manufacture number of the CL is used.
● SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG)
• For “2. IPS” and “3. IPI”, set appropriate IP addresses.
• For “4. ILA”, choose “1” (1 = connection via CPU90F).
• For “45. UID_STI”, set an appropriate examination instance user ID.
• For “53. UID”, choose an appropriate numbering method.
● EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
Set the transfer destination CL host name (“CRxxxxxxxx”) as the DISPLAY attribute.
| # |
| IDT CRxxxxxxxx |
| DISPLAY CRxxxxxxxx |
● NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)

Set the host information about the transfer destination CL.
| # |
| CRxxxxxxxx:DISPLAY,0200,, |
● HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)

Set the IP address and host name of the local machine and transfer destination CL.
| # |
| 172.16.0.1 fcrxud1 |
| 172.16.0.2 fcrxud1-n |
| 172.16.1.20 CRxxxxxxxx |
● ROUTING (ROUTE)
If the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader is not within the same network, set the
IP address of the router that serves as the exit of the local network. If the destination image
reader is within the same network, this setting is not required.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Setup Example 2: Connecting the ID-T741 of the CR-IR344/343 ● NETWORK HOST INTERFACE (DEVICE)
• One unit of the IDT-IV is connected to the CPU90E board of the machine via a 10Base-T
hub.
| # |
• Connecting the OD-F624, HI-C654, and HI-C655 to the CPU90F board via a 10Base-T
hub. | # DEVICE |
• The machine and FL-IMD are connected to the E-i/f (IMG08A). | # |
• Making a temporary host connection (including virtual devices). | # Host Name:Attr|Attr,[Protocol ID],[System code],[Speed] |
The “Hostname” of each CR unit installed at a hospital, including the FCR5000R itself, | # Attr = PRINT or HD_FILE or DISPLAY or OD_FILE |
should be registered so that the configuration file can easily copied and restored to other | # Protocol ID = 0100(FINP) or 0110(FINP) or 0200(DICOM) |
units. | # System code = Hex 2 figures |
A example of description (bold faced) for the above setup is presented below. | # Speed = Dec [Kbytes/sec] (default 8Kbytes/sec) |
| hic654:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
● REMOTE SWITCH (RMT_SW.CFG) | hic655a:DISPLAY|HD_FILE,0100,, |
| # |
| #RMT_SW.CFG | ● HOST ADDRESS (HOSTS)
| # |
| 172.16.0.128,root,”NOPK 1000" | | # |
| # HOSTS |
| # |
● EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) | # Host Name = Max 10 characters |
| #(Available Character:’a’-’z’ ‘0’-’9' ‘-’[37chars]) |
| # IP Addr Host Name |
| # |
| 172.16.0.1 fcr5501 |
| # EQUIP |
| 172.16.0.2 fcr5501-1 |
| # |
| 172.16.0.11 fcr5501a |
| 172.16.0.12 fcr5501a-1 |
| 172.16.0.21 idt4-1 |
| # Host Name= HostName(Network:HostName def. by hosts) |
| 172.16.0.101 hic654 |
| # or LOCAL (E-i:LP,DMS) |
| 172.16.0.102 hic655a |
| # or LOCAL_S (E-i:DMS;Only Std.Dens.Image) |
| 172.16.0.103 hic655b |
| # or LOCAL_R (E-i:LP;Only Reprint) |
| OD_FILE odf624 |
| DISPLAY hic654 | ● DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
| PRINT LOCAL |
| IDT idt4-1 |
| # |
| # Codedstb |
| # |
| # Code Host Name [HostName]... |
| AA0123?? hic655a |

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
● NETMASKS (NETMASKS) ● HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
Set the IP address and host name of the local machine and transfer destination QA-WS.
| # |
| # | | # |
| # Network masks database | | 172.16.0.100 fcr5501n-1 |
| # | | 172.16.0.200 qa-ws1 |
| # only non-default subnet masks need to be defined here |
| # | ● ROUTING (ROUTE)
| # Network netmask | If the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader is not within the same network, set the
| 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0 | IP address of the router that serves as the exit of the local network. If the destination image
● NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
■ Setup Example 3: Connecting the QA-WS of the CR-IR344/343 If the transfer destination QA-WS is not within the same network, set the subnet mask. If the
For the QA-WS connection, perform the following setup procedures. transfer destination QA-WS is within the same network, there is no need to make this entry
again.
◆ NOTE ◆
● DICOM (Base on DICOM)
The HCP08A board (optional) and CPU90F board (optional) must be installed in the control
rack. Perform “Base on DICOM” setup for both the local machine and transfer destination QA-WS.
The format to be used is indicated below.
HostName,ServiceName:AEName,[PortNo.],[SOPType],[CompType],[Timeout1],
• For “2. IPS” and “3. IPI”, set appropriate IP addresses.
[Timeout2],[Density Type]
• For “45. UID_STI”, set an appropriate examination instance user ID.
● EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) • HostName
Set the transfer destination QA-WS host name (“qa-ws1”) as the DISPLAY attribute. Enter the host name that is defined by HOSTS or DEVICE.
To deliver the re-output from the QA-WS to the printer instead of directly delivering the • ServiceName
output from the image reader to the printer, set “LOCAL_R” as the PRINT attribute.
Set “STORAGE_U” for the local machine and “STORAGE_P” for the QA-WS.
• AEName
| # | Set the DICOM standard Application Entity name (consisting of up to 16 ASCII
| DISPLAY qa-ws1 | characters).
| PRINT LOCAL_R | • PortNo.
Set the TCP port number that the Base-on-DICOM application uses. This entry is
meaningless for the transmitting end. The default setting is “104”.
• SOPType (SOP Class Type definition)
Set the host information about the transfer destination QA-WS. Although two options are selectable (1: Fuji Private; 2: OEM Private), choose “1”.
• CompType (image data compression definition)
| # | Although two options are selectable (0: no compression; 1: JPEG compression),
choose “1”.
| qa-ws1:DISPLAY,0200,, |
• Timeout1
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for the TCP socket connect/recv command.
• Timeout2
Set the timeout time (in seconds) for one-image transfer.
• Density Type
Specify the output density for each output destination device. Be sure to select a
setting of “1”.
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
The following example (bolded entry portion) shows how to enter the above settings. ● ROUTING (ROUTE)
If the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader is not within the same network, set the
IP address of the router that serves as the exit of the local network. If the destination image
| # |
| # DICOM |
| # | ● NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
| # HostName,ServiceName:AEName, [PortNo.],[SOPType], |
| # [CompType],[Timeout1],[Timeout2], | If the transfer destination QA-WS is not within the same network, set the subnet mask. If the
| # [DensityType] | transfer destination QA-WS is within the same network, there is no need to make this entry
| # | again.
| fcr5501n-1,STORAGE_U :5501_DICOM,,1,1,100,600,1 |
| qa-ws1,STORAGE_P :hic655qa-scp,5045,1,1,100,600,1 |
■ Setup Example 4: Printer Output Setup for Each Network Connection

◆ NOTE ◆
The HCP08A board (optional) and CPU90F board (optional) must be installed in the control
rack.
Perform network-specific printer output setup as indicated below.
For “2. IPS” and “3. IPI”, set appropriate IP addresses.
● EQUIPMENT (EQUIP)
Set the transfer destination 5000 Series image reader host name as the PRINT attribute.
Note that only one 5000 Series image reader unit can be added.
| # |
| PRINT LOCAL fcr5000n-2 |

Set the host information about the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination.
| # |
| fcr5000n-2:PRINT,0100,, |
● HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)

Set the IP address of the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination.
| # |
| 172.16.0.100 fcr5000n-2 |

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Setting the conveyance route (CR-IR348RU)
8. 3. TEST MODE: Operation Setup
You can choose two different IP conveyance routes. One route passes through the standby
unit. The other route does not pass through the standby unit. The IP conveyance route
Use “3. TEST MODE” when, for instance, you perform operational checkout of the IP must be set up before selecting an operation mode. The default route does not pass
conveyance system.
through the standby unit.
After completion of conveyance operational checkout, you have to select “1: ROUTINE” to
place the machine in a state suitable for routine processing. ● Selecting the conveyance route that passes through the standby unit
(1) Choose “2. AUTO MODE”.
8.1 1. Routine: Setting Operation Mode of Routine Processing (2) Choose “4. SET DELAYED AUTO RUN (AUTO RUN WITHOUT DELAY IS SET
NOW.)”.
Selecting “1. ROUTINE” clears the setup defined by “2. AUTO MODE” and places the
machine in a state suitable for routine processing. This causes the system to select the conveyance route that passes through the
standby unit, and then display the following message:
Be sure to perform this setup before performing routine processing after “2. AUTO MODE” is
selected. DELAYED AUTO IS SET
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
8.2 2. AUTO MODE: Conveyance Test Operation Mode and When the conveyance route passing through the standby unit is selected, menu item No. 4
reads “4. SET AUTO RUN WITHOUT DELAY (DELAYED AUTO RUN IS SET NOW.)”.
Conveyance Route Setup
■ Setting the operation mode ■ Setup Example of Conveyance Test Operation Mode
When you set the operating mode and conveyance count and return to the routine process An example of how to set the operation mode for checking the mechanism of the IP convey-
mode, the machine performs an automatic IP conveyance operation a preselected number ance function is presented below.
of times. ◆ NOTE ◆
Three types of operation modes are available as follows. When “2. AUTO MODE” is selected, be sure to set the operation mode of routine processing
(1. ROUTINE) before executing the routine processing. If the routine processing is executed
● READING & ERASURE without this setting, operation error may result.
In this mode, the normal read sequence is performed to output an image and erase the
image on the IP. Use this mode when you intend to perform an IP conveyance function test (1) Select “3. TEST MODE”.
and image read function test simultaneously. (2) Select “2. AUTO MODE”.
● PRIMARY ERASURE ➮ The operation modes are displayed.
(3) Choose “4. SET DELAYED AUTO RUN (AUTO RUN WITHOUT DELAY IS SET NOW)”.
In this mode, an image read operation is performed to detect the IP surface dose. An IP (CR-IR348RU only)
erasure operation is then performed according to the detected dose. The read image will
not be outputted because the objective of this mode is to detect the amount of IP data to be ➮ This causes the system to select the conveyance route that passes through the
erased. Use this mode when you intend to erase the image from the conveyed IP and do standby unit, and then display the following message:
not have to perform an image read function test. DELAYED AUTO IS SET
(4) Select “3. SECONDARY ERASURE”.
● SECONDARY ERASURE
➮ A prompt asking you to enter the number of times appears.
In this mode, the reader unit conveyance operation is performed without reading an image, (5) Enter 5 (the number of times it is executed).
and the erasure unit conveyance operation is performed at high speed without regard to the
(6) Choose “0. QUIT” repeatedly until the system returns to the U-Utility screen.
IP dose. Use this mode when you merely intend to perform mechanical checkout of the IP
conveyance function. (7) Touch the “RETURN” button.
➮ The system then returns to the routine screen and performs the IP conveyance
operation the number of times specified in step (5).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
◆ NOTES ◆ ■ Typical Setup Procedure for Conducting a Conveyance Test in the ES Exposure
• Do not allow the machine to perform more than 2000 successive IP conveyance operations Mode (CR-IR348RU)
(unattended operations). If an IP conveyance operation is repeated more than 2000 times, The example below describes the setup procedure for conducting a conveyance test in the
the filter in the erasure conveyor may deform due to erasure lamp heat. same conveyance state as for ES exposure:
• If it is absolutely necessary to conduct more than 2000 successive IP conveyance
operations (unattended operations), complete the following steps to place the machine in ◆ NOTE ◆
the erasure lamp extinguishment mode. When “2. AUTO MODE” is chosen, be sure to complete operation mode setup (1. ROUTINE)
(1) Start the M-Utility. for the routine process before performing the routine process. If you start the routine
process without completing such a setup procedure, an operating error may occur.
(2) Insert a floppy disk into the machine's floppy disk drive.
(3) Sequentially choose “7. FILE UTILITY", “3. BACK UP”, and “2. CONFIGURATION
(1) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” until you are returned to the U-Utility screen.
DATA”.
(2) Touch the “Back” button to return to the user operation screen.
➮The “IRSTATUS.CFG” and other relevant files are then saved onto the floppy disk.
(3) From the CL user screen (examination reception), enter patient data.
(4) Remove the floppy disk from the machine's floppy disk drive. With a text editor, change
the “ERL” parameter value in the “IRSTATUS.CFG” file to “1”. (4) Select the ES exposure option from the exposure menu and then click the examination
start button.
ERL=0: Illuminates the erasure lamps. Enables the illumination failure detection
Patient data Exposure menu
function.
ERL=1: Keeps the erasure lamps extinguished. Disables the illumination failure
detection function.
(5) Have on hand the floppy disk that contains the edited “IRSTATUS.CFG” file. Insert this
floppy disk into the machine's floppy disk drive.
(6) Sequentially choose “7. FILE UTILITY”, “4. RESTORE”, and “2. CONFIGURATION
DATA”.
(7) Press the reset button on the machine to restart the machine.
After completion of the unattended operation, be sure to return the “ERL” parameter
value to “0” by performing Steps (1) through (7).
Examination
start button
FR8H3000.EPS

(6) Choose “3. TEST MODE”.
(7) Choose “2. AUTO MODE”.
➮ The system shows the operation modes.
(8) Choose “3. SECONDARY ERASURE”.
➮ The system prompts you to specify the execution count.
(9) Enter the number “5” (execution count).
(10) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” until you are returned to the U-Utility screen.
(11) Touch the “Back” button.
➮ The system returns to the routine screen and performs an IP conveyance operation
the number of times specified by the execution count entry in Step (9).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
9. 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY: Electrical Diagnostics 9.4 4. LAN: LAN Test
The ELECTRICAL UTILITY menu is used to check electrical components for abnormalities. ■ 1. ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS: Displays the MAC address of the CPU board.
It runs diagnostic checks on the following components.
For the CPU90E and CPU90F boards, their Ethernet MAC addresses are displayed.
• Erasure lamps
• Image memory ■ 2. PING: Initiates PING execution.
• Image processing board Runs a diagnostic check to determine whether the communication between a remote host
• Network and the LAN (CPU90E/CPU90F) of the machine can be established.
• Hard disk drive (1) Execute “2. ping”.
• Floppy disk drive ➮ The following message appears.
INPUT THE CONNECTED HOST-NAME OR IP ADDRESS:
9.1 1. ERASURE LAMP TEST: Erasure Lamp Turn-On Test Meaning: Enter the host name or IP address of the host connected.
You can check whether the erasure lamps light. When you execute this testing function, the
(2) Enter the host name or IP address of the host connected.
testing process is performed and terminated with the display showing erasure lamp numbers
and test results. ➮ If the CPU90F board has been installed in the machine, the following message
appears after input.
SELECT BOARD.
9.2 2. IMAGE MEMORY TEST: Image Memory Test
1.CPU90E 2.CPU90F :
This mode is used to test the image memory that is a shared portion of the memory, and Meaning: Select the board.
ends with its test result displayed. ➮ If the CPU90F board has not been installed in the machine, the following message
If an error is detected, the mode ends with the error-causing memory address indicated in X, appears.
Y coordinates on the memory. CPU90F BOARD HAS NOT MOUNTED.
Meaning: The CPU90F board is not available.
9.3 3. DSP TEST: Self Diagnostics of Image Processing Board
(3) Type in either “1” or “2”.
An image processing board is self-diagnosed, with the device name and diagnostic result
indicated for each board. If an error is detected, the mode continues with diagnostics of the ➮ A ping test is initiated, with the following message displayed.
next board, with the device name and error code displayed. PING TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
● Device name (device name of image processing board)
Meaning: A ping test is now being performed.
/dsp/lp1, /dsp/lp2, /dsp/hy1, /dsp/hy2, /dsp/hy3,
/dsp/dms, /dsp/scn, /dsp/hcp, /dsp/bs1, /dsp/bs2,
❍ lp1, lp2 : IMG08A
❍ hy1, hy2, hy3: IMG08B/H
❍ dms : DMC08A
❍ scn : IMG07B
❍ hcp : HCP08A
❍ bs1, bs2 : BSP08A
● Diagnostic result
❍ OK: Normal
❍ ERROR (ZZZZZZ): Abnormal
❍ NO EXISTENCE: DSP (board) is not available.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 3. CPU90F DMA: Performs a DMA transfer test. 9.6 6. FDD: FDD Test
Execute “3. CPU90F DMA”.
➮ Once the test is executed, the following message appears.
■ 1. WRITE-READ VERIFY: Performs a floppy disk write-read test.
DMA TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
It runs a diagnostic check to determine whether the floppy disk drive normally operates.
(1) Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the machine.
Meaning: A DMA test is now being performed.
(2) Execute “1. WRITE-READ VERIFY”.
➮ If the test fails in error, either of the following messages appears.
CPU90F BOARD HAS NOT MOUNTED.
FDD WRITE-READ VERIFY TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: The CPU90F board is not available.
DMA DEVICE OPEN ERROR. DEVICE = /dma/lan/in Meaning: FDD WRITE-READ VERIFY is now being executed.
Meaning: The DMS input device cannot be opened.
DMA DEVICE OPEN ERROR. DEVICE = /dma/lan/out ➮ If anything abnormal is found during FDD device initialization, the process is inter
Meaning: The DMS output device cannot be opened. rupted, with the following message displayed.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
9.5 5. HDD: HDD Test XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.
■ 1. WRITE-READ VERIFY: Performs a hard disk write-read test.

It runs a diagnostic check to determine whether the hard disk drive normally operates.
Execute “1. WRITE-READ VERIFY”.
HDD WRITE-READ VERIFY TEST IS IN PROGRESS.
Meaning: HDD WRITE-READ VERIFY is now being executed.
➮ If anything abnormal is found during HDD device initialization, the process is inter-
rupted, with the following message displayed.
XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10. 5. SCANNER UTILITY: Scanner Diagnostics and 10.3 3. LASER: Laser ON/OFF
Setting Selecting “3. LASER” turns ON the laser system independently. Use this menu for light
source and SYN08C board inspection.
Operating procedures for various menus for scanner diagnostics and setup are described. “8.4 Inspecting and Replacing the Light Source Unit” in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume, “8.6 Inspecting and Replacing the SYN08C Board” in the
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
10.1 1. INITIALIZE: Initial Setting of Main-Scan System
(1) Sequentially choose “3. LASER, 2. ON”.
Selecting “1. INITIALIZE” loads main scanning system parameters and initializes the main ➮ As the laser is turned ON, the following message appears.
scanning system. TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS.
Execute “1. INITIALIZE”. RESULT - OK
➮ The following message appears. Meaning: Laser turn-ON is now being performed.
SCANNER INITIALIZATION IS IN PROGRESS. ➮ If any abnormality is detected during execution, one of the following messages
RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR) appears.
Meaning: Scanner initial setting is now being performed. RESULT - LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT
Meaning: The laser power is insufficient.
10.2 2. POLYGON: Turning ON/OFF the Polygon
RESULT - LASER POWER ERROR
Selecting “2. POLYGON” operates the polygon independently. Use this menu for polygon Meaning: The laser power is faulty.
inspection.
“8.5 Inspecting and Replacing the Polygon Assembly” in the “Checks, Replacement RESULT - LASER POWER ERROR (COVER OPEN)
and Adjustment of Parts” volume Meaning: A laser abnormality is caused by the cover interlock.
(1) Sequentially choose “2. POLYGON” and “2. ON”. (2) Sequentially choose “3. LASER” and “1. OFF”.
➮ With the following message displayed, the polygon starts to rotate. ➮ With the following message displayed, the laser is turned OFF.
THE POLYGON IS TURNED ON. THE LASER IS TURNED OFF.
(2) Sequentially choose “2. POLYGON” and “1. OFF”.
➮ With the following message displayed, the polygon stops. 10.4 4. HV: Turning ON/OFF the HV Switch
THE POLYGON IS TURNED OFF.
Selecting “4. HV” allows you to check whether the HV switch normally turns ON/OFF.
(1) Sequentially choose “4. HV , 2. ON”.
➮ The following message appears, with the HV (software switch) turned ON.
TURNNING ON THE HV IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
Meaning: HV turn-ON is now being performed.
(2) Sequentially choose “4. HV, 1. OFF”.

➮ When the HV switch (software switch) is turned OFF, the following message ap-
pears.
THE HV IS TURNED OFF.
➮ If anything abnormal is found during execution, either of the following messages
appears.
RESULT - HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply failure
ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure
HV OFF Meaning: HV switch OFF

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.5 5. HV DATA: High-Voltage Setting 10.6 6. FORMAT: Setting the Read Start Position and Read
Width
The high-voltage application for the photomultiplier is set. With the both-side light-collecting
system, settings are made individually for both the front and back sides. It is used when
This menu temporarily sets the IP read start position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ).
checking the PMT08A or PHV08C board where the high-voltage power supply for the
However, it does not affect the settings stored on the hard disk. Therefore, you lose data
photomultiplier is mounted.
when you perform a reset.
“9.2 Inspecting and Replacing the PMT08A Board” (CR-IR343) or “9.3 Inspecting and
To save setup data on the hard disk, use “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”.
Replacing the PHV08C Board” (CR-IR348RU/344) in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume For the detailed procedures for read start position and read width adjustments, see Volume
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”.
(1) Select “5. HV DATA”.
“8.1 Adjusting the Read Start Position and Read Width” in the “Checks, Replacement
(2) Select “1. FRONT” (for front surface) or “2. BACK” (for back surface).
and Adjustment of Parts” volume
➮ The following message appears.
FREQ
INPUT HV VALUE. (–) (+) Enter the read width adjustment
250 - 1000 : value (which is expressed as
a percent to specify the increase/
Meaning: Make an HV value entry. decrease in the current read width).
(3) Enter the HV value within a range from 250 to 1000.
➮ If the HV value is entered outside the range from 250 to 1000, a prompt appears
asking you to enter the value again.
Once a value within the range from 250 to 1000 is set, the following message
appears, with HV turned ON.
SETTING INPUTED HV VALUE IS IN PROGRESS. (–) (+) Enter the read start position adjustment value (which is
Meaning: HV value setting is now being performed. obtained by converting an output image dimensional
PIXEL
value to its IP surface equivalent) by specifying
the number of pixels (1 pixel = 0.1 mm). FR1B8015.EPS
■ 1. DEFAULT: Sets the default values for the read start position and read width and
displays the result.
When you select “1. DEFAULT”, the system selects the default values for the read start
position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ). However, the system does not write setup data
onto the hard disk.
Execute “1. PIXEL AND FREQ”, “2. PIXEL ONLY”, or “3. FREQ ONLY”.
➮ When the execution is normally ended, the following message appears.
FORMAT DATA IS SET TO THE DEFAULT VALUE.
Meaning: The format data is set to the default values.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 2. FREQ ADJUST: Adjusts the read width. ■ 4. FOR DESIGNER:
The read width is adjusted. The setting will not be written onto the hard disk.
CAUTION
(1) Choose “2. FREQ ADJUST”.
Do not execute this menu item at the machine installation site. It should basically be used prior
to shipment.
INPUT MAIN SCAN LENGTH ADJUSTMENT VALUE
-5.00 - +5.00 :
(2) Enter a read width adjustment value between -5.00 and 5.00 (in percent).
Enter a percent value to specify the increase/decrease in the current read width. To
increase the read width, enter a plus (+) value. To decrease the read width, enter a
minus (-) value.
<Example>
Increasing the read width as measured on the output screen from 172 mm to 175 mm
(175 - 172)/172 x 100 ≈ 1.74
Thus, enter the value 1.74.
➮ The display shows the result.
RESULT - xxxxxxxxxx
The xxxxxxxxxx area shows the result (OK: normally ended; ERROR: abnormally
ended).
■ 3. PIXEL ADJUST: Adjusts the read start position.

When you select “3. PIXEL ADJUST”, the system adjusts the read start position. However,
the system does not save the setting on the hard disk.
(1) Choose “3. PIXEL ADJUST”.
INPUT INVALID PIXELS.
-999 - 999 :
(2) Enter a read start position adjustment value by specifying the number of pixels to be
moved (between -999 and 999).
Note that 10 pixels are equivalent to 1 mm as measured on the IP surface. To move
the read start position toward the right-hand end of the output screen, enter a plus (+)
value. For leftward movement, enter a minus (-) value.
<Example>
Moving the read start position of a 14"x17" two-image output 1 mm to the left is
equivalent to a 2 mm leftward shift on the IP surface because the reduction ratio is 1/2.
Therefore, enter the value -20.
➮ The display shows the result.
RESULT - xxxxxxxxxx
The xxxxxxxxxx area shows the result (OK: normally ended; ERROR: abnormally
ended).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.7 7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY: Setting Shading and Sensitivity (2) Enter the dosage value.
➮ The calculation of the correction data is initiated, with the following message dis-
Correction Data played.
The shading and sensitivity correction data is recorded, calculated, and set. Note, however, CALCULATION IS IN PROGRESS.
that because the setup value in the HD is not overwritten, the data so obtained is lost upon RESULT - OK (or RESULT - ERROR)
resetting. Meaning: Correction data calculation is now being performed.
To save the setup data on the hard disk, use “8. DATA MANAGEMENT”.
For the detailed descriptions of shading and sensitivity correction procedures, see the
● When sensitivity corrections are not to be made (The menu number differs
volume entitled “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”. depending on the system type)
“8.2 Shading and Sensitivity Corrections” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment 2.SHADING AND POLYGON or 3.POLYGON ONLY
of Parts” volume Execute “2. SHADING AND POLYGON”, or “3. POLYGON ONLY”.
➮ When the image size is as specified (17x17 or 17x14), the display shows the result.
■ 1. REC MODE: To Make Correction Data Recordable
Selecting “1. REC MODE” makes the machine ready for shading, polygon, and sensitivity
correction data recording. ➮ When the image size is other than the specified (17x17 or 17x14), the following
message appears.
(1) Execute “1. REC MODE”.
➮ The correction data is now recordable, with the following message displayed. THE DATA IS RECORDED WITH INCORRECT SIZE.
Meaning: The data is recorded in a size other than specified.
THE SPECIAL MODE TO RECORD ADJUSTMENT DATA IS SET.
Meaning: The correction data recording mode is set. ■ 3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION: To Apply Correction to Image
◆ NOTE ◆ When you choose ON, the corrected data takes effect in the routine mode.
The REC MODE (correction data recording) is effective for one reading operation. To Execute “3. SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION: 2. ON”.
repeat a correction data recording operation, execute “1. REC MODE” again.
➮ Once the shading/polygon correction mode is set to ON, the following message
appears.
(2) Perform an IP reading operation.
THE NORMAL MODE WITH SHADING & POLYGON CORRECTION IS SET.
➮ Correction data is then recorded.
Meaning: Shading/polygon correction mode is set to ON.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ➮ If the process ends in error, the following message appears.
<IP reading example>
With the 17 x 17 and 17 x 14 (landscape) sizes selected with IP selection keys, expose FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
the IP entire surface to about 1 mR of radiation and then perform an image reading XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.
operation in the erasure mode.
■ 4. SENSITIVITY DATA: To Enter S Value
Use this menu item for machine shipment control sensitivity corrections (e.g., for
■ 2.CALCULATION : To Calculate Correction Data standardizing the sensitivities of two or more image readers).
Selecting “2. CALCULATION” calculates shading, polygon, and sensitivity correction data. (1) Select “4. SENSITIVITY DATA”.
● When sensitivity corrections are to be made (The menu number differs depending ➮ A message asking you to enter the current S value appears.
on the system type) INPUT CURRENT S VALUE.
1 - 999 :
“1. SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY” or “4. SENSITIVITY ONLY”
(2) Enter the current S value within a range from 0 to 999.
(1) Choose “1. SHADING, POLYGON AND SENSITIVITY” or “4. SENSITIVITY ONLY”.
➮ A message asking you to enter a desired S value appears.
➮ When the specified image size (17x17) is selected, the following dosage value input
prompt appears. INPUT EXPECTED S VALUE.
1 - 999 :
INPUT DOSAGE VALUE.
0.50 - 9.99 : (3) Enter the desired S value within a range from 0 to 999.
The unit is in mR. ➮The calculation of set sensitivity correction value is initiated, with the following mes-
sage displayed.
INPUTTED S VALUE IS SET.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 5. HV DATA: Enters a sensitivity correction HV value. 10.8 8. DATA MANAGEMENT: Displaying Data Setup Values and
This command is not to be used in the market. Writing to HD
■ 6. PMT DATA: Enters a PMT sensitivity coefficient. Selecting “8. DATA MANAGEMENT” displays or saves to the hard disk the setup data
This command is not to be used in the market. entered from “6. FORMAT” and “7. SHADING/SENSITIVITY”.
■ 1. SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA: Saves shading and polygon data on the
hard disk.
Use this menu item when shading/polygon corrections have been made with “7. SHADING/
SENSITIVITY”. For the both-side light-collecting system, the data for both the front and back
sides is written onto the hard disk.
Execute “1. SAVE SHADING AND POLYGON DATA”.
➮ Once it is executed normally, the following message appears.
Meaning: The file XXXXXXXXXX is saved.
➮ If it ends in error, the following message appears.
■ 2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA: Saves sensitivity data on the hard disk.

Use this menu item when sensitivity corrections have been made with “7. SHADING/
SENSITIVITY”. For the both-side light-collecting system, the data for both the front and back
sides is written onto the hard disk.
Execute “2. SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA”.
■ 3. SAVE FORMAT DATA: Saves read start position and read width adjustment value
on the hard disk.
Use this menu item when the read start position or read width has been adjusted with “6.
FORMAT”.
Execute “3. SAVE FORMAT DATA”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 4. DISPLAY DATA: Displays format/sensitivity machine shipment control data in the ■ 5. LOAD FROM FD: Loads shading, polygon, and sensitivity data from a floppy into
form of a list. (The data count differs depending on the system type.) the memory.
When “4. DISPLAY DATA” is executed, the following message appears. Use this menu to load the data from a floppy disk that stores factory default data.
MP = XXXX TMP = XXXX TML = XXXX (1) Execute “5. LOAD FROM FD: 1. SHADING AND POLYGON/2. SENSITIVITY”.
RCNT = XXXX NCNT = XXXX RCNTF = XXXX ➮ The following message appears.
NCNTF = XXXX 1000frqadjF = XXXX
HVCNTO = XXXX HVCNTU = XXXX HVDATAO= XXXX PLEASE SET A FD.
HVDATAU = XXXX PMTKO = XXXX PMTKU = XXXX ARE YOU SURE TO LOAD SHADING/POYGON DATA FILES FROM THE FD?
SAPIO = XXXX SAIPU = XXXX Xe = XXXX 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
Z = XXXX SMD = XXXX Meaning: A floppy disk should be put into the floppy disk drive.
The meanings of displayed data are explained below. The “XXXX” portion represents a 1- to Are you sure to load the shading or polygon correction data from the floppy
4-digit decimal number. disk?
MP: Number of invalid pixels
TMP: Total number of invalid pixels (2) Insert a floppy disk into its drive and then choose “YES”.
TML: Total number of invalid lines ➮ When the files are loaded from the floppy disk, the following message appears.
RCNT: Reference frequency division value XXXXXXXXXX IS LOADED.
NCNT: Oscillation frequency setting ➮ If the process ends in error, the following message appears.
RCNT: Reference frequency division value (high-speed mode) FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
NCNTFZ: Oscillation frequency setting (high-speed mode) XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name.
1000frqadjF: High-speed mode fine-adjustment value
HVCNTO: Central sensitivity HV value (front surface) ■ 6. SAVE TO FD: Saves the shading, polygon, and sensitivity data stored on the hard
disk to a floppy disk.
HVCNTU: Central sensitivity HV value (back surface)
Use this menu item when you back up shading, polygon, and sensitivity data.
HVDATAO: Read HV value (front surface)
(1) Execute “6. SAVE TO FD”.
HVDATAU: Read HV value (back surface)
PMTKO: PMT sensitivity coefficient (front surface)
PMTKU: PMT sensitivity coefficient (back surface) PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE SHADING/POLYGON & SENSITIVITY DATA FILES
SAIPO: IP sensitivity prevailing upon sensitivity adjustment (front surface) FROM TO THE FD?
SAIPU: IP sensitivity prevailing upon sensitivity adjustment (back surface) 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
Xe: Erasure level dose value Meaning: Insert a floppy disk into its drive. Are you sure you want to save the shading,
Z: Erasure level QL value polygon, and sensitivity correction data onto the floppy disk?
SMD: SHD/polygon correction mode default value
(2) Insert a floppy disk into its drive and then enter the number “1”.
➮ When the files are saved onto the floppy disk, the following message appears.
➮ If abnormal termination occurs, the following message appears.
FILE I/O ERROR.(FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
10.9 9. DIAGNOSTIC: Executing Diagnostics Item 10.10 10. VIRTUAL IMAGE: Selecting the Image Signal Virtual
Generation Mode
This menu item runs a series of diagnostic checks on the scanner. If an error occurs during
the checks, the system indicates the error and continues with the checks.
When an image abnormality occurs, you can use a virtual read image to locate the cause of
Execute “9. DIAGNOSTIC”. abnormality. When you convey IPs with this menu item chosen, the machine reads a virtual
➮ If it is executed normally, the following message appears. image and outputs it onto a sheet of film. For the both-side light-collecting system, use “11.
BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL” to specify the side (either front or back) to be read, before
SCANNER DIAGNOSTIC IS IN PROGRESS. performing the virtual image reading.
RESULT - OK
◆ NOTES ◆
Meaning: Scanner self-diagnostics is now being performed.
• When you perform a virtual reading process, select the front or back IP surface from “11.
➮ If it ends in error, either of the following messages appears.
BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL”. Making such a selection enables you to determine whether
START POINT DETECTION ERROR Meaning: Start-point detection failure the image abnormality is attributable to the front or back surface.
EDGE DETECTION ERROR Meaning: Leading-edge detection failure “10.11 11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL: Addition Execution Control”
• To obtain a virtual read image, set “1. LIGHT”, “2. LOG AMP”, or “3. SCN08 INPUT”, return
HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply failure to the routine screen, and perform an IP read operation.
ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure • After completion of virtual reading, be sure to choose “4. ROUTINE” to exit the virtual
POLYGON MIRROR ERROR Meaning: Polygon failure reading mode.
• Identify the cause of image abnormality in accordance with a virtual image.
LASER POWER ERROR Meaning: Laser power failure “14. Making Analyses of Image Abnormalities” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
LASER POWER INSUFFICIENT Meaning: Insufficient laser power
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
• For PMT electrical input quasi-reading (LOGAMP), HV is forced to OFF. Thus, a “HV-OFF warning”
occurs when exiting M-Utility. However, it is not an error. So, press the CONFIRM button and pro-
ceed with the operation.
• In the PMT electrical input virtual reading (LOGAMP) mode, a signal entirely different from normal
X-ray image signals is entered as a virtual image signal. Under some image processing conditions,
therefore, slight fluctuations not detrimental to regular images may look like image irregularities.
Even when image irregularities occur in virtual reading, it does not always mean that they also occur
in the generation of regular X-ray images. Therefore, you should use this mode for the purpose of
checking whether an abnormality in a regular output image is reproduced in a virtual image.
• The IP conveyed should be completely erased. ID information and so forth should also be regis-
tered in a similar manner to the routine processing.
■ 1. LIGHT: Virtual image for LED virtual light incidence on photomultiplier (LED on
PMT board)
(1) Select “1. LIGHT”.
INPUT THE LED’S LUMINESCENCE QUANTITY.
1. EQUIVALENT TO 2-3[microR] (Equivalent to 0.2 – 0.3 mR)
2. EQUIVALENT TO 2-3[mR] (Equivalent to 2 – 3 mR)
1 - 2 :
Meaning: Enter the luminescence quantity of the LED.
(2) Enter a value between 1 and 2.

➮ The system sets the LED luminescence quantity and displays the following mes-
sage.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
Meaning: The quasi-reading mode is now set.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ 2. LOG AMP: Virtual image for applying constant-current input to board (PMT HV 10.11 11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL: Addition Execution Control
OFF)
Select “2. LOG AMP”. This menu item allows you to choose between IP front surface reading only and IP back
➮ The following message appears. surface reading only.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET. Use this menu item when you use “10. VIRTUAL IMAGE” to make image abnormality
analyses, one surface at a time.
(1) Choose “11. BOTH SIDES ADDITIONAL”.
■ 3. SCN08 INPUT: Virtual image derived from image signal generation by SCN08 (2) Choose “1. FRONT ONLY” or “2. BACK ONLY”.
board ➮ The following message appears on the display.
Select “3. SCN08 INPUT”. THE SPECIAL MODE TO PUT OUT ONLY FRONT (or BACK) DATA IS SET.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
■ 4. ROUTINE: Exiting the image signal virtual generation mode

Select “4. ROUTINE”.
THE NORMAL MODE WITHOUT VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET.
Meaning: The quasi-reading mode is now canceled.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 11 - 1 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MU 11 - 2
11. 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY: Mechanical 11.2 1. MOTOR: Operation Tests on Motor

Diagnostics Use this menu item for pulse motor inspection. (The motor number differs depending on the
system type.)
This menu is used to inspect the motors, sensors, and other components.
■ 1. NUMBER: Displays a list of pulse motor numbers.
Execute “1. NUMBER”.
11.1 INITIALIZE: Initializing the Motors, Actuators, and Sensors
➮ A list of pulse motor numbers is displayed as follows.
◆ NOTE ◆
[CR-IR348RU]
When you switch into the M-Utility mode from the initialized state or the state in which an error
message is displayed, be sure to execute “1. INITIALIZE”. If you do not execute INITIALIZE, 1.MA1 2.MA2 3.MA3 4.MA4 5.MB1
you cannot conduct tests because the motors, actuators, and sensors are not initialized. 6.MB2 7.MB3 8.MB4 9.MD1 10.MD2
11.MF1 12.MH3 13.MZ2
Execute “1. INITIALIZE”. [CR-IR344/343]
➮ The system initializes the motors, actuators, and sensors so that you can conduct 1:MA1 2:MA2 3:MA3 4:MB1 5:MB2
tests. 6:MB3 7:MD1 8:MD2 9:MF1 10:MZ2
■ 2. PARAMETER: Sets the drive parameters.

Maintenance utility motor drive default parameter list
Phase Direction Pulse HSPD LSPD UP DN Stop delay Stop Drive Excitation after
I/O Speed Symbol Name
excitation of rotation count (pps) (pps) (ms) (ms) (ms) method power stop delay
IP positioning
MA1 2-phase CW 653 1000 300 100 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PA11
unit guide open
MA2 2-phase CW 400 813 300 100 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PA21 IP lift
MA3 1-2 phase CCW 0 670 400 100 78 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PA31 Bucky drive
MA4 1-2 phase CW 0 407 100 100 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PA22 IP lift
MB1 2-phase CCW 0 1272 200 300 100 10 LIMIT HIGH OFF – PB11 IP conveyance
MB2 2-phase CCW 0 5088 800 300 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PB21 IP conveyance
MB3 2-phase CW 0 1910 200 300 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PB33 IP conveyance
MB4 2-phase CW 0 1272 200 300 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – – IP conveyance
After-reading
MD1 2-phase CCW 0 1908 300 300 100 100 LIMIT HIGH ON – PD11 conveyance
After-reading
MD2 2-phase CCW 113 500 500 63 63 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PD21 conveyance grip
ascent
Erasure
conveyance
MF1 2-phase CW 0 1910 400 300 100 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PF13 (overdose
degeneration)
MH3 2-phase CW 0 500 500 53 63 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PH11 Shutter close
Subscanning
MZ2 2-phase CCW 108 400 400 63 63 10 LIMIT HIGH ON – PZ21 grip ascent
V3 (=
standard-
MZ1 – CCW – – – – – – – – – speed – Reading
sub-
scanning)
TR1H3008.EPS
(1) Select “2. PARAMETER”.

INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR.
1 - 13 :
Meaning: Enter the number of motor.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 4
(2) Type in the number of motor from 1 through 13. (8) Type in the slew-down time.
➮ The following message appears. ➮ The following message appears.
INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION. INPUT THE POWER DOWN DELAY TIME.
1.CW 2.CCW (FIXED=X) 0 - 255 (FIXED=XXX) :
Meaning: Enter the rotation direction. Meaning: Enter the power-down delay time.
“X” denotes the rotation direction (either “1” or “2”) that is currently set. “XXX” denotes the power-down delay time that is currently set.
(3) Type in the rotation direction (either “1” or “2”). (9) Type in the power-down delay time.
INPUT THE TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES. INPUT THE MAGNETIC PHASE.
0 - XXXXXXX(FIXED=XXXXXXX) : 1. 2 PHASE 2.1-2 PHASE
3. W1-2 PHASE 4.2W1-2 PHASE
Meaning: Enter the total number of pulses.
(FIXED=X) :
“XXXXXXX” denotes the total number of pulses that is currently set.
Meaning: Enter the magnetic phase.
“X” denotes the value of magnetic phase (1: 2-phase magnetization, 2: 1-2-phase
(4) Type in the total number of pulses. magnetization, 3: W-1-2-phase magnetization, 4: 2W-1-2-phase magnetization) that is
➮ The following message appears. currently set.
INPUT THE HI-SPEED.
16 - 7200 (FIXED=XXXX) : (10) Type in the value of magnetic phase.
Meaning: Enter the high-speed value. ➮ The following message appears.
“XXXX” denotes the high-speed value that is currently set. INPUT THE MOVE AND STOP MODE.
1. HI-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
2. LOW-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
(5) Type in the high-speed value.
3. HI-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
➮ The following message appears. 4. LOW-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP AFTER DELAY
INPUT THE LOW-SPEED. 5. HI-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP
16 - 7200 (FIXED=XXXX) : 6. LOW-POWER/ENERGIZED STOP
7. HI-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP
Meaning: Enter the low-speed value.
8. LOW-POWER/DEENERGIZED STOP (FIXED=X) :
“XXXX” denotes the low-speed value that is currently set.
Meaning: Enter the move and stop mode.
1: High power driving/energized stop, with power-down delay
(6) Type in the low-speed value.
2: Low power driving/energized stop, with power-down delay
3: High power driving/deenergized stop, with power-down delay
INPUT THE SLEW UP TIME.
4: Low power driving/deenergized stop, with power-down delay
1000/LOW-SPEED - 3000 (FIXED=XXXX) :
5: High power driving/energized stop, without power-down delay
Meaning: Enter the slew-up time.
6: Low power driving/energized stop, without power-down delay
“XXXX” denotes the slew-up time that is currently set.
7: High power driving/deenergized stop, without power-down delay
8: Low power driving/deenergized stop, without power-down delay
(7) Type in the slew-up time.
(11) Type in the move/stop mode (“1” through “8”).
INPUT THE SLEW DOWN TIME.
1000/LOW-SPEED - 3000 (FIXED=XXXX) :
Meaning: Enter the slew-down time. INPUT THE STOP MODE.
1. HALT 2.LIMIT (FIXED=X) :
“XXXX” denotes the slew-down time that is currently set.
Meaning: Enter the stop mode.
“X” denotes the stop mode (1: HALT stop, 2: LIMIT stop) that is currently set.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 6
■ 3. DRIVE: To Drive Motor 11.3 2. ACTUATOR: Operation Tests on Erasure Lamp, FFM
(1) Select “3. DRIVE”.
➮ The following message appears. This menu item provides erasure lamp and FFM inspection. (The quantity of erasure lamps
differs depending on the system type.)
INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR.
1 - 13 : ■ 1. NUMBER: To List Up No. of Erasure Lamp, FFM Actuator
Meaning: Enter the number of motor. Execute “1. NUMBER”.
➮ A list of erasure lamps, FFM actuator is displayed as follows.
(2) Type in the number of motor.
1:LAMP1-8 2:FFM
➮ The motor is driven.
■ 2. DRIVE: To Drive Actuator
■ 4. STOP: To Stop Motor
(1) Select “2. DRIVE”.
(1) Select “4. STOP”.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR. 1 - 2 :
0:ALL MOTORS, 1 - 13 : Meaning: Enter the number of actuator.
Meaning: Enter the number of motor.
(2) Type in the number of actuator.
➮ When “LAMP1-8” is chosen, the erasure lamps should light (steps (3) and beyond
(2) Enter the number “0” or the motor number. are not to be performed). When “FFM” is chosen, the following message appears.
➮ The system stops the designated motor(s).
INPUT THE ROTATION DERECTION.
1.CW 2.CCW (FIXED=X)
Meaning: Enter the rotation direction.
"X" denotes the direction of rotation (either “1” or “2”) that is currently set.
(3) Type in the rotation direction (either “1” or “2”).
INPUT THE SPEED.
1. STANDARD SUBSCANNING
2. RAPID SUBSCANNING
3. CARRY OUT (FIXED=X) :
Meaning: Enter the rotation speed.
“X” denotes the rotation speed (1: standard subscanning, 2: fast subscanning, 3:
ejection) that is currently set.
(4) Enter the rotating speed.
➮ The FFM should rotate.
■ 3. STOP: To Stop Actuator

(1) Select “3. STOP”.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR.
0:ALL ACTUATORS,1 -2 :
Meaning: Enter the number of actuator.
(2) Type in the number of actuator.
➮ The actuator is stopped.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 8
11.4 3. SENSOR: Operation Tests on Sensors ■ 3. MONITOR ALL: To Monitor All Sensors
(1) Select “3. MONITOR ALL”.
This menu item provides sensor inspection. If any sensor status change is encountered, the ➮ A list indicating the numbers and status (0: OPEN, 1: CLOSE) of sensors are dis-
system emits a beep. If any abnormality is detected, a message appears on the display. played.
(The sensor number differs depending on the system type.)
[CR-IR348RU]
■ 1. NUMBER: To Display Sensor No. List SA1 - 4 : 0 1 1 1
Execute “1. NUMBER”. SB1 - 4 : 0 0 0 0
SD1 - 2 : 0 1
➮ A list of sensor numbers is displayed as follows. SE1 : 0
[CR-IR348RU] SF1 - 2 : 1 0
1.SA1 2.SA2 3.SA3 4.SA4 5.SB1 SZ2 - 3 : 0 0
6.SB2 7.SB3 8.SB4 9.SD1 10.SD2 SH3 : 0
11.SE1 12.SF1 13.SF2 14.SZ2 15.SZ3 THERR : 0
16.SH3 17.THERR 18.THON 19.THOFF THON : 0
20.LDSN1 21.LDSN2 22.LDSN3 23.LDSN4 THOFF : 1
24.LDSN5 25.LDSN6 26.LDSN7 22.LDSN8 LDSN1-8 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[CR-IR344] 0:QUIT
1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SB1 5:SB2 6:SB3 [CR-IR344]
7:SD1 8:SD2 9:SE1 10:SF1 11:SZ2
SA1 - 3 : 0 1 1
12:SZ3 13:TSWF5 14:TSWF6 15:LDSN1 16:LDSN2
SB1 - 3 : 0 0 0
17:LDSN3 18:LDSN4 19:LDSN5 20:LDSN6
SD1 - 2 : 0 1
21:LDSN7 22:LDSN8
SE1 : 0
[CR-IR343] SF1 : 1
1:SA1 2:SA2 3:SA3 4:SB1 5:SB2 6:SB3 SZ2 - 3 : 0 0
7:SD1 8:SD2 9:SE1 10:SF1 11:SZ2 TSWF5-6 : 0 0
12:SZ3 13:TSWF5 14:LDSN1 15:LDSN2 16:LDSN3 LDSN1-8 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17:LDSN4 0:QUIT
[CR-IR343]
■ 2. MONITOR: To Monitor Individual Sensor
SA1 - 3 : 0 1 1
(1) Select “2. MONITOR”.
SB1 - 3 : 0 0 0
➮ The following message appears. SD1 - 2 : 0 1
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR. SE1 : 0
1 - 27 : SF1 : 1
SZ2 - 3 : 0 0
Meaning: Enter the number of sensor. TSWF5 : 1
(2) Enter a sensor number (1-27) that was displayed upon “1. NUMBER” execution. LDSN1-4 : 0 0 0 0
➮Sensor monitoring starts. When the sensor status changes, either of the following 0:QUIT
messages appears. ➮ When the sensor status changes, the following message appears.
XXXXX - - - - > Close XXXXX - - - - > Close
XXXXX - - - - > Open XXXXX - - - - > Open
Meaning: Sensor XXXXX becomes OPEN. Meaning: Sensor XXXXX becomes OPEN.
Sensor XXXXX becomes CLOSE. Sensor XXXXX becomes CLOSE.
(3) Choose “0. QUIT”. (2) Select “0. QUIT”.
➮ Sensor monitoring comes to an end. ➮ The sensor monitoring is exited.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 10
11.5 4. UNIT: 1. IP POSITIONING UNIT: Operation Tests on BLANK PAGE

Exposure Unit Guide Mechanism
■ 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Exposure Unit Guide Mechanism
Execute “1. HOME POSITION”.
IP POSITIONING UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
■ 2. SET: To Move Exposure Unit Guide Mechanism to Conveyance Position

Execute “2. SET”.
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE TRAY IS IN THE HOME POSITION?
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) :
➮ When you choose “1” and the execution normally ends, the following message
appears.
MOVED TOWARD THE EXPOSURE POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
■ 3. RELEASE: To Move Exposure Unit Guide Mechanism to Set Position

Execute “3. RELEASE”.
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE TRAY IS IN THE EXPOSURE POSITION?
appears.
MOVED TOWARD THE HOME POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 12
11.6 4. UNIT: 2. IP MOVING-UP UNIT: Operation Tests on 11.8 4. UNIT : 3. BUCKY UNIT: Operation Tests on Exposure Unit
Exposure Unit IP Moving-Up Mechanism Bucky Mechanism
■ 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Exposure Unit Bucky Mechanism
■ 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Exposure Unit IP Moving-Up Mechanism
BUCKY UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
IP MOVING-UP UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS. RESULT - OK
RESULT - OK
■ 2. MOVING-UP: To Execute Moving-Up Operation 11.9 4. UNIT: 4. SUBSCANNING GRIP:

Execute “2. MOVING-UP”. Operation Tests on Subscanning Grip Mechanism
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE ASSEMBLY IS IN THE HOME POSITION? ■ 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of Subscanning Grip Mechanism
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : Execute “1. HOME POSITION”.
➮ When you choose “1” and the execution normally ends, the following message SUBSCANNING GRIP UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
appears. RESULT - OK
MOVED-UP IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK ■ 2. GRIP: To Execute Grip Operation of Subscanning Grip Mechanism
Execute “2. GRIP”.
11.7 XXXXX ➮ The following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE NIPPING ROLLER IS IN THE RELEASING
POSITION?
appears.
RESULT - OK
■ 3. RELEASE: To Release Grip Operation of Subscanning Grip Mechanism

ARE YOU SURE THAT THE NIPPING ROLLER IS IN THE HOME POSITION?
appears.
MOVED TOWARD THE NON-NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 11 - 14
11.10 4. UNIT: 5. AFTER-READING GRIP: Operation Tests on BLANK PAGE

After-Reading Conveyor Grip Mechanism
■ 1. HOME POSITION: To Locate HP of After-Reading Conveyor Grip Mechanism

AFTER-READING GRIP UNIT H.P. SETTING IS IN PROGRESS.
■ 2. GRIP: To Effect Grip Operation for After-Reading Conveyor Grip Mechanism

Execute “2. GRIP”.
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE NIPPING ROLLER IS IN THE RELEASING
POSITION?
appears.
RESULT - OK
➮ If it ends in error, “ERROR (XXXX)” appears. “XXXX” denotes an error code.
■ 3. RELEASE: To Release Grip Operation of After-Reading Conveyance Grip

Mechanism
ARE YOU SURE THAT THE NIPPING ROLLER IS IN THE HOME POSITION?
appears.
MOVED TOWARD THE RELEASING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS.
RESULT - OK
➮ If it ends in error, “ERROR (XXXX)” appears. “XXXX” denotes an error code.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 2
12. 7. FILE UTILITY: File Operation 12.2 2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION: Formatting HD Image
Storage Partition
This menu item provides file manipulation. It can be used, for instance, to edit configuration
data with a personal computer. To format the image storage partition of hard disk.
(1) Select “2. FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION”.
12.1 1. FORMAT FD: Formatting FD ➮ The following message appears.
ARE YOU SURE TO FORMAT THE IMAGE PARTITION ?
◆ NOTES ◆ 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
• Before formatting a floppy disk, make sure that it does not contain any necessary data. Meaning: Are you sure to format the image storage partition?
Once it is formatted, the data in the floppy disk is completely lost.
(2) Select “1”.
• If the floppy disk is “write-protected,” it should be “write-enabled” before putting it into the
floppy disk drive. Under the “write-protected” condition, the floppy disk cannot be format- ➮ Once it is formatted, the following message appears.
ted. FORMATTING THE IMAGE PARTITION IS COMPLETED.
Meaning: The image storage partition of the hard disk has been completely formatted.
To formatting FD.
(1) Select “1. FORMAT FD”.
➮ If the formatting ends in error, the following message appears.
FORMATTING THE IMAGE PARTITION IS INCOMPLETED.
PLEASE SET A FD. ARE YOU SURE TO FORMAT THE FD ?
Meaning: The HD image storage partition formatting failed.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to format the floppy
disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”.
➮ Once it is formatted, the following message appears.
FORMATTING THE FD IS COMPLETED.
Meaning: The floppy disk has been completely formatted.
➮ If the formatting ends in error, the following message appears.

FORMATTING THE FD IS INCOMPLETED.
Meaning: The floppy disk formatting failed.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 4
12.3 3. BACKUP: Backing Up Various Data The following files are saved onto floppy disks.
[CR-IR348RU/344]
This menu item is used to back up various setup files on a floppy disk. • SCN_ELVL.DAT • SCN_IFMT.DAT • SCN_INIT.DAT • SCN_ISEN.DAT
◆ NOTE ◆ • SCN_MAIN.DAT • SCN_POBH.POL • SCN_POBQ.POL • SCN_POBS.POL
When you read the configuration data in the local machine and install it in another machine, • SCN_POSH.POL • SCN_POSQ.POL • SCN_POSS.POL • SCN_PHBH.SHD
ensure that the source and destination machines agree in software version. An error may • SCN_SHBQ.SHD • SCN_SHBS.SHD • SCN_SHSH.SHD • SCN_SHSQ.SHD
occur during installation if they differ in software version.
• SCN_SHSS.SHD
[CR-IR343]
■ 1. SCANNER DATA: To Save Scanner Setup File to FD • SCN_ELVL.DAT • SCN_IFMT.DAT • SCN_INIT.DAT • SCN_MAIN.DAT
(1) Select “1. SCANNER DATA”. • SCN_POLY.POL • SCN_ISEN.DAT • SCN_SHDG.SHD
■ 2. CONFIGURATION DATA: To Save Machine Setup File to FD
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY SCANNER DATA FILES TO THE FD ? (1) Select “2. CONFIGURATION DATA”.
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : ➮ The following message appears.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the scanner PLEASE SET A FD.
data to the floppy disk? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CONFIGURATION FILES TO THE FD ?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”. 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
➮ Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the machine
are copied to the floppy disk. setup files to the floppy disk?
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. (2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. ➮ Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
. are copied to the floppy disk.
.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
.
.
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. .
.
➮ When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
➮ When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears.
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Swap it for another floppy disk.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
Swap the floppy disk, and select “1”. 1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
➮ Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk.
displayed.
➮ For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears. Replace the floppy disk, and select “1”.
➮ Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
displayed.
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
➮ For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
The following files are saved onto floppy disks.

• IRSET.CFG • IRSET.ORG
• FILMFMT.CFG • FILMFMT.ORG
• IRSTATUS.CFG • IRSTATUS.ORG
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 6
■ 3. NETWORK DATA: To Save Network-Related Setup File to FD ■ 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA: To Save Image Processing Parameter File to FD
(1) Select “3. NETWORK DATA”. (1) Select “4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA”.
PLEASE SET A FD. PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY NETWORK DATA FILES TO THE FD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY IMAGE PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the network Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the image
data to the floppy disk? processing parameters to the floppy disk?
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”. (2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”.
➮ Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files ➮ Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
are copied to the floppy disk. are copied to the floppy disk.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
. .
. .
. .
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
➮ When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears. ➮ When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE. THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE.
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) : 1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk. Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk.
Replace the floppy disk, and select “1”. Replace the floppy disk, and select “1”.
➮ Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is ➮ Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
displayed. displayed.
➮ For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears. ➮ For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
The following files are saved onto floppy disks. The following files are saved onto floppy disks.
• RMT_SW.CFG • EQUIP • HIPMENU.PRM • HIPUMN.PRM
• DEVICE • HOSTS • HIPMNRL.PRM • HP.PRM
• CODEDSTB • ROUTE • HIPOP.PRM • HPT.PRM
• HIPOPT.PRM • HPTU.PRM
• NETMASKS • DICOM
• HIPOPTU.PRM • HPU.PRM
• HIPOPU.PRM • PEM.PRM
• HIPSTD.PRM • PEMT.PRM
• HIPSTDU.PRM • PEMTU.PRM
• PEMU.PRM

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 8
■ 6. EDR PROCESSING DATA: To Save EDR Parameter File to FD 12.4 4. RESTORE: Restoring Various Data
(1) Select “6. EDR PROCESSING DATA”.
➮ The following message appears. This menu item is used to load various setup files from a floppy disk to the hard disk.
PLEASE SET A FD. ◆ NOTE ◆

ARE YOU SURE TO COPY EDR PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE FD ? When you read the configuration data in the local machine and install it in another machine,
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : ensure that the source and destination machines agree in software version. An error may
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the EDR occur during installation if they differ in software version.
parameters to the floppy disk?
■ 1. SCANNER DATA: Restoring Scanner Data from a Floppy Disk to the Hard Disk
(2) Put the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and select “1”.
(1) Select “1. SCANNER DATA”.
➮ Coping to the floppy disk is initiated, with the following messages displayed as files
are copied to the floppy disk. ➮ The following message appears.
XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. PLEASE SET A FD.

XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED. ARE YOU SURE TO COPY SCANNER DATAS TO THE HD ?
. 1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) :
. Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the scanner
. data to the hard disk?
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. (2) Select “1”.
➮ When the floppy disk becomes full, the following message appears. ➮ Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.
THE FD IS FULL. EXCHANGE OTHER ONE. XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
1.CONTINUE 2.CANCEL(DEFAULT=2) :
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
Meaning: The floppy disk is full. Replace it with another floppy disk.
➮ If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed.

Replace the floppy disk, and select “1”.
➮ Writing to the floppy disk continues, and once all the files are copied, the menu is
displayed. xxxxxxxxxx denotes the file name.
➮ For any file that cannot be written to the floppy disk, the following message appears. The following files are restored from the floppy disk to the hard disk.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) • SCN_IFMT.DAT • SCN_INIT.DAT
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. • SCN_POLY.POL • SCN_ISEN.DAT
• SCN_SHDG.SHD
The following files are restored from the floppy disk to the hard disk.
• IRMUMN.PRM • MPMUMN.PRM
• NNUMN.PRM

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 10
■ 2. CONFIGURATION DATA: To Read Machine Setup File form FD to HD ■ 3. NETWORK DATA: To Read Network-Related Setup File from FD to HD
(1) Select “2. CONFIGURATION DATA”. (1) Select “3. NETWORK DATA”.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY CONFIGURATION FILES TO THE HD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY NETWORK DATA FILES TO THE HD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the machine Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the
setup files to the hard disk? network data to the hard disk?
(2) Select “1”. (2) Select “1”.

➮ Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears. ➮ Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied. Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
➮ If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed. ➮ If the coping ends in error, the following message is displayed.
FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX) FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=XXXXXXXXXX)
XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name. XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name.
The following files are restored from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The following files are restored from the floppy disk to the hard disk.
• IRSET.CFG • FILMFMT.CFG • RMT_SW.CFG • EQUIP
• IRSTATUS.CFG • DEVICE • HOSTS
• CODEDSTB • ROUTE
• NETMASKS • DICOM

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 12
■ 4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA: To Read Image Processing Parameter File from FD to ■ 6. EDR PROCESSING DATA: Restoring EDR Parameter Files from a Floppy Disk to
HD the Hard Disk
(1) Select “4. IMAGE PROCESSING DATA”. (1) Select “6. EDR PROCESSING DATA”.
ARE YOU SURE TO COPY IMAGE PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE HD ? ARE YOU SURE TO COPY EDR PROCESSING DATA FILES TO THE HD ?
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to copy the EDR
image processing parameters to the hard disk? parameters to the hard disk?
(2) Select “1”. (2) Select “1”.

➮ Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears. ➮ Once the data is copied to the hard disk, the following message appears.

• IRMUMN.PRM • MPMUMN.PRM
• HIPOPTU.PRM • HIPOPU.PRM
• NNUMN.PRM • EDR.ABS
• HIPSTDU.PRM • HIPUMN.PRM
• HIPTU.PRM • HPU.PRM
There is no problem even when the following message appears after the restore.
• PEMTU.PRM • PEMU.PRM FILE I/O ERROR. (FILE=EDR.ABS)
EROOR CODE 380003

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 14
12.5 5. EDR DATA: Saving EDR Calculation to FD ■ 2. FULL (SAVE TO FD): To Save EDR Calculation and Image Data to FD
(1) Select “2. FULL”.
◆ NOTE ◆ ➮ A list of up to ten images stored in the HD is displayed according to the following
The following menus should not be used. format.
• 3. PARAMETER ONLY (SAVE TO HD) XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
• 4. FULL (SAVE TO HD) XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
• 5. DELETE EDR BACKUP ON HD .
.
.
■ 1. PARAMETER ONLY: To Save EDR Calculation to FD XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
(1) Select “1. PARAMETER ONLY (SAVE TO FD)”. 0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
➮ A list of up to ten images stored in the HD is displayed according to the following
format. Meanings of the items are as follows.
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ • XXX : Reference number (1 to 999)
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ • YYYY.MM.DD : Image exposure date
.
• ZZZZ : Image number (A001 to A999)
.
. It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
Meanings of the items are as follows. (2) Type in “1 through 10”, “11”, or “12” to select an image to be saved to a floppy disk
• XXX : Reference number (1 to 999) (i.e., an image for which EDR calculated value and image data are to be saved).
• YYYY.MM.DD : Image exposure date ➮ When either “1” through “10” is typed in, the following message appears.
• ZZZZ : Image number (A001 to A999) PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE EDR DATA FILES TO THE FD ?
It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on
whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to save both EDR
calculation and image data to the floppy disk?
(2) Type in “1 through 10”, “11”, or “12” to select an image to be saved to a floppy disk (i.e.,
an image for which EDR calculated value is to be saved).
(3) Select “1”.
➮ When either “1” through “10” is typed in, the following message appears.
➮ Once the data is copied to the floppy disk, the following message appears.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE EDR PARAMETER DATA FILES TO THE FD ? XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED.
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is copied.
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to save EDR calcu-
lation to the floppy disk?
(3) Select “1”.
➮ Once the data is copied to the floppy disk, the following message appears.


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 12 - 16
12.6 6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE: Reverting Back to 12.7 7. EXECUTION: Loading and Executing File
Previous Version of System Software
Use this file utility menu for option file installation and similar purposes.
(1) Select “6. PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE”. (1) Select “7. EXECUTION”.
➮ The following message appears. ➮ A list of up to ten files stored in the floppy disk is displayed according to the following
format.
ARE YOU SURE TO INSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION ?
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
Meaning: Are you sure to revert back to the previous version?
.
.
(2) Select “1”. .
XXX) YYYY.MM.DD:ZZZZ
➮ Once the system software reverts back to its immediately preceding version, the
following message appears. 0.END 1-10.SELECT 11.NEXT 12.BEFORE (DEFAULT=11) :
PREVIOUS VERSION SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED.

Meanings of the items are as follows.
Meaning: The system software reverts back to its previous version.
• XXX : Reference number (1 to 999)
• YYYY.MM.DD : Image exposure date
(3) Reset the machine.
• ZZZZ : Image number (A001 to A999)
It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on
whether the previous page and/or next page is available.
(2) Type in “1 through 10”, “11”, or “12” to select a file to be loaded.

➮ When either “1” through “10” is typed in, the following message appears.
PLEASE SET A FD.
ARE YOU SURE TO EXCUTE SELECTED FILE ?
1.YES 2.NO :
Meaning: Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Are you sure to execute the
selected file?
(3) Select “1”.

➮ Once the file is executed, the following message appears.
XXXXXXXXXX IS EXECUTED.
Meaning: XXXXXXXXXX is executed.
➮ If the execution ends in error, the following message is displayed.


06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 13 - 2
BLANK PAGE
13. 8. BACKUP MEMORY: Backing Up Memory
Use this menu item to delete the contents of the backup memories.
(1) Select “1. CLEAR”.
ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL THE BACKUP MEMORIES?
Meaning: Are you sure to initialize the backup memory?
(2) Select “1”.

➮ The backup memory is initialized, with the following message displayed.
BACKUP MEORIES ARE CLEARED.
Meaning: The backup memory is initialized.
The following files are cleared from the HD.

• IMG
Set processing information, image number generation information, HV ON/OFF
information
• IPH
IP position information and conveyance count
• DST
Output LP information (NET/LOCAL)
• JNL
Error log information
• LIF
Format frequency information
• MFC
Setup option information
◆ NOTE ◆
The backup memory will not be cleared unless the machine is reset.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 14 - 2
● Turning ON the HV
14. 9. HV ON/OFF: High-Voltage Switch (Software
While the HV switch is OFF, the title of menu No. 9 reads “HV ON”.
Switch) 0.QUIT
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
When you inspect the machine with an exposure/reader unit cover open, turn OFF this high- 2.CONFIGURATION SETTING
voltage switch. If the switch is left ON, the photomultiplier may become damaged.
3.TEST MODE
The high-voltage switch menu item is numbered 9. It reads “9. HV OFF” when the switch is 4.ELECTRICAL UTILITY
ON or “9. HV ON” when the switch is OFF. 5.SCANNER UTILITY
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
● Turning OFF the HV
7.FILE UTILITY
While the HV switch is ON, the title of menu No. 9 reads “HV OFF”. 8.BACKUP MEMORY
0.QUIT 9.HV ON
10.IP UTILITY
1.ERROR LOG UTILITY
11.SYSTEM UTILITY
2.CONFIGURATION SETTING 12.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF
3.TEST MODE >
4.ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5.SCANNER UTILITY (1) Select “9. HV ON”.
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY ➮ When the high-voltage switch is set to ON, the following message appears.
7.FILE UTILITY TURNNING ON THE HV IS IN PROGRESS.
8.BACKUP MEMORY RESULT - OK
9.HV OFF Meaning: The HV is now being turned ON.
10.IP UTILITY
11.SYSTEM UTILITY ➮ If any error occurs, either of the following messages is displayed.
12.SET ERASURE LAMP OFF HV ERROR Meaning: High-voltage power supply failure
> ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning: Analog power supply failure
HV OFF Meaning: HV switch OFF
(1) Select “9. HV OFF”.
➮ The high-voltage switch is set to OFF, with the following message displayed. (2) Select “0. QUIT”.
THE HV IS TURNED OFF.
(2) Select “0. QUIT”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 15 - 2
15. 10. IP UTILITY: IP Operation 15.4 4. USE OVEREXPOSURE-IP MODE: Setting Overexposure
Degeneration Cancel
This section explains about the procedures for displaying IP information, and performing
setup for IP removal/loading and for processing overexposed IPs for reuse. ◆ NOTE ◆
If you use a forcibly cleared IP, the image quality will be adversely affected due to its incom-
15.1 1. DISPLAY: Displaying IP Information plete erasure.
Execute “1. DISPLAY”. You can perform setup for subjecting overexposed IPs and overdose-degenerated IPs to
➮The number of conveyances, the number of exposures, and overexposure information are forced erasure for the purpose of restoring them to normal.
displayed for each IP according to the following format. When you return to the routine process mode after performing the above setup, the system
executes a process to restore overexposed/overdose-degenerated IPs to normal (by detect-
ing the radiation dosage and effecting erasure).
A BBBBBB CCCCCC D
(1) Execute “4. USE OVEREXPOSURE-IP MODE”.
Each of the items has the following meaning.
THE SPECIAL MODE FOR USING OVEREXPOSED IP’s IS SET.
•A : IP number (1 or 2)
(2) Choose “0. QUIT” repeatedly until the system returns to the U-Utility mode.
• BBBBBB : Number of conveyances (six decimal digits, from 000000 to 999999)
(3) Touch the “Back” key to return to the routine mode.
• CCCCCC : Number of exposures (six decimal digits, from 000000 to 999999)
➮ The erasure conveyance operation is then performed to recover overexposed/
•D : Overexposure information (0: Normal IP, 1: Overexposed IP, 2: Overexposure
overdose-degenerated IPs.
degenerated IP)
• When the number of target IPs = the number of IPs in the machine
The overexposed/overdose-degenerated IP recovery process is performed immedi-
Note that “IP No. CONVEYANCE EXPOSURE OVEREXPOSURE FLAG” is indicated in the
ately after the system returns to the routine process mode.
first line as the title.
• When the number of target IPs < the number of IPs in the machine
The overexposed/overdose-degenerated IP recovery process is performed immedi-
15.2 2. SETTING: Setting IP Information ately after the system returns to the routine process mode or when the target IPs are
set in the IP positioning unit.
(1) Choose “2. SETTING:.
INPUT THE NUMBER OF IP.
1-2:
INPUT THE NUMBER OF CONVEYANCE.
0-999999 (CURRENT=27):
INPUT THE NUMBER OF EXPOSURES.
0-999999 (CURRENT=9):
When the IP number is entered, the current setup value is displayed. You can exit this
by hitting the ENT key alone.
(2) Set the IP number, conveyance count, and exposure count.
15.3 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE: IP Change Setup

Perform setup for IP removal and loading. When you return to the routine mode after
completion of setup, the system executes the process for an IP change.
“2.1 Removing, Loading, Inspecting, and Cleaning the IPs” in the “Checks, Replacement
and Adjustment of Parts” volume

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 16 - 1 CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 16 - 2
BLANK PAGE
16. 11. SYSTEM UTILITY: Conveyance Count Setup
[Function of the CR-IR348RU/344]
This section explains about the procedure for recording a conveyance count in the CPU90E
board memory.
◆ SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ◆
The IP conveyance count is written in the memory on the CPU90E board. Therefore, when the
CPU90E board is replaced with a new one, the conveyance count is cleared to zero. After the
CPU90E board is replaced, therefore, you should use "11. SYSTEM UTILITY" to rewrite the convey-
ance count as needed to represent the count reached before replacement. Before CPU90E board
replacement, be sure to use the U-Utility to confirm the conveyance count that is recorded in the
CPU90E board to be replaced.
(1) Choose “1. SETTING SYSTEM CONVEYANCE COUNTS”.

➮ The following message appears on the display:
INPUT THE NUMBER OF SYSTEM CONVEYANCES.
0-999999 (CURRENT=69):
The current setup value is displayed. You can exit this by hitting the ENT key alone.
(2) Enter the conveyance count that is to be written into the CPU90E board.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 17 - 2
● Selecting the regular mode
17. 12. SET ERASURE LAMP OFF/SET REGULAR
While the no-erasure mode is chosen, menu item No. 12 reads “SET REGULAR
ERASURE LAMP CONTROL: No-Erasure Mode ERASURE LAMP CONTROL”.
Selection 0. QUIT
To perform IP conveyance operations when the erasure lamps fail to illuminate, select the
3. TEST MODE
no-erasure mode.
◆ SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ◆ 5. SCANNER UTILITY
When an erasure lamp illumination failure is detected, the IP conveyance operation stops when it 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
passes the erasure conveyor. This feature works to prevent image erasure before image reading. In 7. FILE UTILITY
this state, the unit cannot be pulled out due to the stopped IP position. However, when the no-erasure
mode is chosen, the IP conveyance operation is continuously performed without IP image erasure. 8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
● Selecting the no-erasure mode 11. SYSTEM UTILITY
Under normal conditions, menu item No. 12 reads “SET ERASURE LAMP OFF”. 12. SET REGULAR ERASURE LAMP CONTROL
0. QUIT >
1. ERROR LOG UTILITY (1) Choose “12. SET REGULAR ERASURE LAMP CONTROL”.
➮ The system selects the regular mode and menu item No. 12 reads “SET ERASURE
3. TEST MODE
LAMP OFF”.
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. FILE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
10. IP UTILITY
11. SYSTEM UTILITY
>
(1) Choose “12. SET ERASURE LAMP OFF”.
➮ The system then selects the no-erasure mode and menu item No. 12 reads “SET
REGULAR ERASURE LAMP CONTROL”.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 18 - 1 MU 18 - 2
(2) Insert the “INSTALL” system disk into the floppy disk drive.
18. Software Installation Procedures
CAUTION
The software is supplied on floppy disks (abbreviated FDs). If the hard disk has been
replaced, format it before installing the software. Do not erroneously interchange the “INSTALL” system disk and “FORMAT” system
disk. If you turn ON the machine with the “FORMAT” disk set in position, the system
■ Installation FDs automatically starts formatting the hard disk so that you will lose all the data that have
been saved on the hard disk.
All the installation FDs are DOS 1.44MB formatted, 3.5-inch floppy disks. Two system disks
are supplied in addition to data disks and console display disks. The number of data disks
varies with the software version. (3) Turn ON the machine and the console.
Before installing the software, check that the installation FDs are supplied as indicated in the ➮ The following messages appear on the console panel.
following list. Attaching to DMA device...done.
Attaching to <floppy> device...done.
Name Storage device Quantity Use
number Loading /fd0/VXWORKS.ST...43992 + 66184 + 29428
System disk Format 114Y5431001A 1 disk (1st disk of the 2-disk set) For hard disk formatting Starting at 0x1001000...
Install 114Y5431002A 1 disk (2nd disk of the 2-disk set) For installation The following messages appear and the software installation process starts.
Data disk APPL 114Y5341003A 7 disks (This number varies with For application software -> Install utility. Version A00.
[CR-IR348RU] the software version.)
114Y5434003A Attaching to <floppy> device...done.
[CR-IR344] Attaching to <SCSI> device...done.
114Y5433003A
[CR-IR343] Upon completion of SCSI device initialization, the following message appears.
Console display 114Y5433005A 3 disks For installation in the Insert data floppy disk.
[CR-IR348CL] console
114Y5433004A (4) Remove the “INSTALL” system disk, and insert data disk #1 into the floppy disk drive.
[ID-T741] ➮As indicated in the example below, messages appear to indicate that software files
TR1B9001.EPS
are copied to the hard disk.
Copy </fd0/bootrom.sys> To </sd0/TEMP/BOOTROM.SYS>
18.1 Installing the Software (Application) Copy </fd0/vxworks.st> To </sd0/TEMP/VXWORKS.ST>
Copy </fd0/version.dat> To </sd0/TEMP/VERSION.DAT>
■ Installing from the System Disks and Data Disks Copy </fd0/script.txt> To </sd0/TEMP/SCRIPT.TXT>
If the hard disk has been replaced, format it before installing the software. ......
“16.2 Formatting the hard disk” ......
Insert next data floppy disk.
Install the software (application) by sequentially inserting the “INSTALL” system disk and
data disks into the floppy disk drive in compliance with the message appearing on the (5) Insert the remaining data disks in numerical order.
console panel. ➮As indicated in the example below, messages appear to indicate that software files
If any error occurs during the installation process, start all over again. are copied to the hard disk.
(1) Make sure that the machine main body is OFF. Create </sd0/LOG/CORE.DMP>
If the power is ON, place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to turn OFF the ma- Create </sd0/LOG/IOT.001>
chine main body. Create </sd0/LOG/TCB.001>
Create </sd0/LOG/ISC.001>
......
......
Upon completion of log file initialization, the following message appears to indicate the
end of installation.
Install is complete.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 18 - 3 MU 18 - 4
■ List of install utility error messages error open directory: status= <********>
If an error occurs during installation, the install utility displays the following error messages. ➮ The directory was not found (the “********” portion is a detail code). The SCSI hard
When an error message appears, grasp its meaning, take proper remedial action, and disk drive is faulty.
resume the installation process. error create file:status= <********>
➮ The file could not be generated (the “********” portion is a detail code). The SCSI
Could not initialize DMA device. hard disk drive is faulty.
➮ An abnormality was detected during DMA device initialization. The MTH08B or error file size.
CPU90E board is faulty. ➮ The file size is illegal. The floppy disk is faulty.
Could not initialize floppy device.
➮ An abnormality was detected during floppy device initialization. The CPU90E board ■ Installing the Optional Software
is faulty. To install the optional software, execute “7. EXECUTION” of “7. FILE UTILITY”.
Cannot open </fd0/bootrom.sys>,please setting boot disk. “12.7 7. EXECUTION: Loading and Executing Files”
➮ The disk placed in the disk drive is not the installation system disk or the contents of
the disk are damaged. ■ Installing from the console display disk
Error loading file </fd0/bootrom.sys>
(1) Enter the maintenance mode of the console.
➮ The contents of the file named “bootrom.sys” are illegal.
"3.4 Installing the Message Display Software (Installing in CL's PC)" under "Proce-
Cannot open </fd0/VXWORKS.ST>,please setting boot disk.
dures for Connecting with CR Console (CR-IR348CL)" in "CR-IR341/342/343/345/
➮ The disk placed in the disk drive is not the installation system disk or the contents of 347/348 Common Service Manual"
the disk are damaged.
Error loading file </fd0/VXWORKS.ST> ■ Installing from the console display disk
➮ The contents of the file named “VXWORKS.ST” are illegal. [Connecting the ID-T741 of the CR-IR344/343]
Could not initialize SCSI device.
(1) Enter the maintenance mode of the console.
➮ The hard disk drive was not successfully mounted or formatted. The MTH08B
board, CPU90E board, or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty. “3.1.1 Entering the Maintenance Mode” in Volume “Installation” of FCR ID
Could not access HD device. Terminal/Console ID-T741 Service Manual
➮ The hard disk drive was not successfully accessed. The MTH08B or SCSI hard disk (2) From the “Maintenance Process” screen, press [Install Software].
drive is faulty. ➮ The “Installation Confirmation” dialog box opens.
error make directory:status= <********>
➮ The directory was not successfully made (the “********” portion is a detail code). The
SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
Cannot open <********>
➮ The file could not be opened (the “********” portion is a filename). The floppy disk or
SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
error copy file:status= <********> FR1B1313.EPS
➮ The file could not be coped (the “********” portion is a detail code). The floppy disk
(3) Insert the first floppy disk of the 114Y5433004A into the floppy disk drive.
or SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
error rename directory: status= <********> (4) Press [Yes].
➮ The directory name could not be changed (the “********” portion is a detail code). ➮ The installer starts.
The SCSI hard disk drive is faulty. (5) Follow the instructions appearing on the console to replace the inserted floppy disk
with the second one, and continue with the installation process.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 18 - 5 MU 18 - 6
18.2 Formatting the Hard Disk (4) Remove the “FORMAT” disk from the floppy disk drive.
(5) Place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to turn OFF the power.
■ Formatting Procedures ■ List of format utility error messages

The hard disk should be formatted only when a hard disk access error frequently occurs or If an error occurs during formatting, the format utility displays the following messages. When
the data on the hard disk is lost wholly or partly. an error message appears, grasp its meaning, take proper remedial action, and resume the
formatting process.
(1) Verify that the machine main body is OFF.
If the power is ON, place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to turn OFF the ma- Could not initialize DMA device.
chine main body. ➮ An abnormality was detected during DMA device initialization. The MTH08B or
(2) Insert the “FORMAT” disk into the floppy disk drive. CPU90E board is faulty.
Could not initialize floppy device.
CAUTION ➮ An abnormality was detected during floppy device initialization. The CPU90E board
If you change your mind and do not want to format the hard disk, remove the “FOR- is faulty.
MAT” disk from the floppy disk drive before doing anything. If you turn ON the ma- Cannot open </fd0/bootrom.sys>,please setting boot disk.
chine with the “FORMAT” disk inserted into the floppy disk drive, the system automati- ➮ The disk placed in the disk drive is not the formatting system disk or the contents of
cally initiates the hard disk formatting sequence without asking for the user’s confirma- the disk are damaged.
tion.
Error loading </fd0/bootrom.sys>
➮ The contents of the file named “bootrom.sys” are illegal.
(3) Turn ON the machine and the console.
Cannot open </fd0/VXWORKS.ST>,please setting boot disk.
➮ The following messages appear on the console panel.
➮ The disk placed in the disk drive is not the formatting system disk or the contents of
Attaching to DMA device... done.
the disk are damaged.
Attaching to <floppy> device... done.
Loading /fd0/VXWORKS.ST...439684 + 66180 + 29396 Error loading file </fd0/VXWORKS.ST>
Starting at 0x1001000... ➮ The contents of the file named “VXWORKS.ST” are illegal.
When format utility loading is completed, hard disk physical formatting starts.
Error 0007(********) : Can’t mount HDD.
Physical formatting usually takes 2 to 3 minutes. However, it may take 20 to 30
minutes depending on the employed hard disk. ➮ The hard disk drive was not successfully mounted or formatted (the “********” portion
-> HDD format utility. Version A00. is a detail code). The MTH08B board, CPU90E board, or SCSI hard disk drive is
...... faulty.
...... Error 0008(********) : Can’t open DOS partition.
Start formatting process.
➮ The DOS partition was not successfully opened (the “********” portion is a detail
Mount HDD and physical format.
code). The SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
The hard disk is partitioned so as to allocate 64 megabytes of hard disk space to the
DOS region and the remaining space to the image region.
Open DOS partition.
When partitioning ends, the following message appears to indicate that the hard disk is
completely partitioned.
***** Format is complete. *****
***** Please power off. *****

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MU 18 - 7 MU 18 - 8
Error 0009(%d) : Can’t format DOS partition. BLANK PAGE
➮ The DOS partition was not successfully opened. The SCSI hard disk drive is faulty.
=================================
+ Formatting is not complete. +
+ Please power off. +
=================================
➮ The format utility ended without completing the hard disk formatting process. This
message appears if error 0007 or 0008 occurs.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 19 - 2
● ETC
19. List of Software Files
IRSET.ORG Machine definition file (original)
19.1 SYSTEM Definition of machine status, etc. (setup value, default value described)
IRSET.CFG Machine setup file (user setup)
FILMFMT.ORG Format setup file (original)
■ SYSTEM
Definition of film character format (setup value, default value described)
BOOTROM.SYS Boot file
FILMFMT.CFG Format setup file (user setup)
SCRIPT.TXT Startup script
IRSTATUS.ORG Machine status-related item film (original)
VXWORKS.ST “OS, BSP”
Definition of items, such as IP conveyance mode
VERSION.DAT Version information definition file
IRSTATUS.CFG Machine status-related item file (user setup)
For application startup opening screen
EQUIP Connected unit candidate file
BRSES.ABS Main program file (CR-IR348RU)
Definition of connected unit (IDT or LP), etc.
BRS.ABS Main program file (CR-IR344/CR-IR343)
CODEDSTB Distribution code definition file
FFASC8.FNT ASCII fonts (8 dots)
HOSTS Connected host setup file
FFASCW8.FNT ASCII white fonts (8 dots)
Correspondence table between connected host name and IP address
DEVICE Device setup file
Correspondence table between host name and device connected to that
FFASCE8.FNT ASCII external fonts (8 dots)
host
FFRMN8.FNT CodePage850 (8 dots)
ROUTE Route setup file
Host name that has routing capability is described.
OPTION.001 Soft key
FFANK8.FNT JIS X0201 (half-width 8 dots)
Two different unsharp mask sizes
OPTION.005 Soft key
Fuji DICOM
FFKNJ16.FNT JIS X0208 (Kanji 16 dots)
OPTION.007 Soft key
FFKNJ24.FNT JIS X0208 (Kanji 24 dots)
Cassette exposure
OPTION.009 Soft key
IIP connection
OPTION.010 Soft key
Energy subtraction connection
NETMASKS Subnet mask file
Subnet mask per domain/host is described.
RMT_SW.CFG Remote power config file
Remote commands for the host applicable to remote power control are
described.
DICOM Base on DICOM connection information file
Connection requirements for the host applicable to Base on DICOM
connection are described.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 19 - 4
● IDM ● PNL
HIPMENU.PRM Standard image processing parameter file MESSAGES.JPN Display message definition file
Fuji standard menu data (image processing with same unsharp mask size) Message data indicated on the display (Japanese)
HIPUMN.PRM Standard image processing parameter file MESSAGES.ENG Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (English)
Institution-specific menu data
MESSAGES.ESP Display message definition file
HIPMNRL.PRM Standard image processing parameter file
Message data indicated on the display (Spanish)
Fuji standard menu data (image processing with independent unsharp
MESSAGES.FRN Display message definition file
mask sizes)
Message data indicated on the display (French)
HIPSTD.PRM Mask/frequency/gradation table
MESSAGES.GER Display message definition file
Fuji standard table (standard image processing table)
Message data indicated on the display (German)
HIPSTDU.PRM Mask/frequency/gradation table
MESSAGES.ITA Display message definition file
Institution-specific table (standard image processing table) Message data indicated on the display (Italian)
HIPOP.PRM Optional image processing parameter file MESSAGES.SWE Display message definition file
Fuji standard table Message data indicated on the display (Swedish)
HIPOPU.PRM Optional image processing parameter file MESSAGES.DEN Display message definition file
Institution-specific table Message data indicated on the display (Danish)
HIPOPT.PRM Optional mask filter table MESSAGES.NOR Display message definition file
Fuji standard table (optional image processing table) Message data indicated on the display (Norwegian)
HIPOPTU.PRM Optional mask filter table MESSAGES.FIN Display message definition file
Message data indicated on the display (Finnish)
Institution-specific table (optional image processing table)
ICONS.PNL Integration file for icons used on PNL
HP.PRM Hyper image processing parameter file
Multiple icon files are integrated into a single file.
Fuji standard table
● IPH
HPU.PRM Hyper image processing parameter file
PUL_PARA.FIL Pulse motor parameter definition file
Institution-specific table
Pulse motor parameters complying with the mechanical control specifi-
HPT.PRM Hyper mask filter table cation are defined.
Fuji standard table (hyper image processing table) IPH_TIME.FIL Conveyance timer file
HPTU.PRM Hyper mask filter table Timeout times complying with the mechanical control specification are
Institution-specific table (hyper image processing table) defined.
RETRYCNT.FIL Subscanning parameter file
PEM.PRM PEM processing parameter file
Conveyance parameters complying with the subscanning control speci-
Fuji standard table
fication
PEMU.PRM PEM processing parameter file ERASESP.FIL Erasure speed parameter
Institution-specific table Erasure speed parameter definition
PET.PRM PEM unsharp mask data table ● IMG
Fuji standard table (PEM processing table) CRT_FORM.DAT Monitor character format information
PETU.PRM PEM unsharp mask data table Referenced when CRT characters are created.
Institution-specific table (PEM processing table) IMG_SIZE.DAT Image processing pixel difinition
SELECT.PRM Image process selection flag DEL_TABL.FIL Erasure conveyance speed table determination file
SELECTU.PRM For table determination complying with the erasure control specification
HPG.PRM
HPGU.PRM
FINP100.PAT FINP100 dictionary file
FINP110.PAT FINP110 dictionary file

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 19 - 6
DEL_DEFN.FIL Erasure conveyance speed definition file ● LIF
Conveyance speed table complying with the erasure control specification LPLFMT0J.DAT B4 format file
CRT_TEST.DAT Test pattern file LPLFMT1J.DAT 14" x 17" format file
Test pattern data MCFFMT0J.BIN Film character format file
• EDR • MICRO
MPMPRM.PRM EDR standard parameter DSP10M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Parameters for each menu are defined. DSP10M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
IRMPRM.PRM EDR standard parameter DSP11M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Histogram parameters are defined. DSP11M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
MPMUMN.PRM EDR user parameter DSP20M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Menu parameter definition for specific institution DSP20M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
IRMUMN.PRM EDR user parameter
DSP21M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Histogram parameter definition for specific institution
NNPRM.PRM Standard neuro parameter
Standard parameter for neuro analysis
NNUMN.PRM Specific neuro parameter DSP30M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Specific parameter for neuro analysis DSP31M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
EDR.ABS EDR program DSP31M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
EDR software program ● DIF
• SCN SIOSETUP.DMS Data link layer setup parameter definition file
SCN_IFMT.DAT Format set data file Data link layer setup parameter for DMS (E-IF) connection
Data regarding set-specific format
• MICRO
SCN_MAIN.DAT Main-scan control data file
Data for controlling the optics, synchronization, image signal system,
light-collecting system DSP0M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
SCN_INIT.DAT Main-scan initial setup data file ● IIF
Scanner initial setup parameter SIOSETUP.IDT Data link layer setup parameter definition file
SCN_ISEN.DAT Sensitivity set data file Data link layer setup parameter for IDT (serial) connection
Data regarding set-specific sensitivity IDINF.DAT ID information default parameter file
SCN_ISEN.ORG Sensitivity set data file
Unattended conveyance default data
“Data regarding set-specific sensitivity (factory-default original, file name
written to the FD with UTL) ● HCP
SCN_SHDG.SHD Shading correction data file
Shading correction result • MICRO
SCN_SHDG.DEF Shading correction data file (default data) DSPHM1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
Shading correction result (for institution with poor tube conditions) DSPHM2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
SCN_SHDG.ORG
SCN_POLY.POL Polygon correction data file ● LAN
Polygon correction result LANCONT.ABS LAN board control program
SCN_ELVL.DAT Erasure level detection data file
Table for erasure dose detection ● BSP
BSP1M1J.S24 Image processing µ-program
• MICRO BSP1M2J.S24 Image processing µ-program
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
MU 19 - 8
19.2 LOG ■ DOT

SEPA.DAT DICOM delimiter definition
■ LOG ■ JUL
ERRLOG0.LOG Error log save file RESETERR.DAT Error automatic reset definition
Saved only to the FD in error log (level 0) maintenance utility.
ERRLOGX.LOG Error log save file
Saved only to the FD in error log (other than level 0) maintenance utility.
(The extension 999 is for analysis.)
ISC.000 ISC log save file
ISC log journal (extensions 001 to 005: normal logs; extensions 011 to
013: dumb logs; extension 999: for analysis).
SED_MFC.000 SED log save file (MFC)
SED log journal
SED_JNL.000 SED log save file (JNL)
SED log journal
SED_PNL.000 SED log save file (PNL)
SED log journal
SED_IPH.000 SED log save file (IPH)
SED log journal
SED_IMG.000 SED log save file (IMG)
SED log journal
SED_IIF.000 SED log save file (IIF)
SED log journal
SED_CSL.000 SED log save file (CSL)
SED log journal
SED_DST.000 SED log save file (DST)
SED log journal
SED_LIF.000 SED log save file (LIF)
SED log journal
SED_DIF.000 SED log save file (DIF)
SED log journal
SED_FOT.000 SED log save file (FOT)
SED log journal
SED_FIN.000 SED log save file (FIN)
SED log journal
SED_DOT.000 SED log save file (DOT)
SED log journal
IOT.000 IOT data
IOT data journal
SMCU_LIF.000 External unit communication log (serial LP)
External unit communication log journal
SMCU_DIF.000 External unit communication log (serial DMS)
SMCU_IIF.000 External unit communication log (serial IIF)

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
Service Parts List Control Sheet SP - 1
Control Sheet
07.10.2001 02 Correction（FM3114） All pages
03.10.2003 03 Correction（FM3950） All pages
CR-IR344/ CR-IR344P
Service Manual
Service Parts List（SP）
003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950
CR-IR344 Service Manual SP - 1
Service Parts List SP - 2 Service Parts List SP - 3
■ REF.NO. ■ Quantities of recommended spare parts

How to Use Service
REF. NO. is a parts number indicated in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in
Parts List Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts stock a certain quantity of parts according to
having different functions, they are clearly the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the parts,
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL as follows. For periodically replaced parts,
■ RANK NUMBER columns. hold them in stock separately.
● Handling RANK characters (parts that are Adjust the stock quantity of service parts
■ PART NUMBER
handled in a special manner during parts depending on the number of working units
operation, such as replacement) PART NUMBER is a code number that is (N).
unique to each parts.
It is assigned only to applicable parts. Quantity used in a single system : Q
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty
An alphabetic letter at the right-most position
R Must not be returned. Repairable
of the code number has the following mean- ❍ N=1
ing.
Q
Must be returned.
Not repairable Rank A = 1 + Q x 0.3
(We use for analysis.)
❍ For hardware Rank C = 1 + Q x 0.05
Must be returned.
(Consumable part. The alphabet denotes the version number of a Rank D = 1 + Q x 0.02
T Not repairable
Not applicable for free part. If parts have different version numbers, ❍ 2≤N≤10
of change.)
they are upward-compatible. Rank A = 2 + N x Q x 0.3
without
R, Q, T
Must not be returned. Not repairable ❍ For software Rank C = 2 + N x Q x 0.05
The alphabet denotes a difference in the Rank D = 1 + N x Q x 0.02
● Export regulation-applicable character specifications. Parts differing in the suffix are ❍ 11≤N≤300
(Parts without the following character are not compatible with each other. Although the Rank A = 3 + N x Q x 0.3
not controlled by Export regulation.) version is indicated by a number, it is omitted. Rank C = 3 + N x Q x 0.05
Character Significance Rank D = 3 + N x Q x 0.02
■ PART NAME
+ Parts applicable to export regulations.
PART NAME represents a general name of a ■ Precautions to be Observed When Re-
part. turning Parts in Need of Repair
● Fault RANK characters (which provide
reference for determining the recom- ■ QTY. When returning a component in need of
mended stock quantity) ❍ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in repair, pack it in the same manner as for the
each unit. supplied substitute, using the substitute
All parts are assigned either A through E.
packing materials.
❍ A parts with “-S” assigned to the end of the
Character Significance The use of different packing materials or
quantity represents a small part that is
A Consumable parts or parts that will be packing methods may incur damage to
replaced at short intervals. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a part
packed component during transit.
Parts that may become faulty accidentally is ordered in quantity of “1”, a pack con-
B
and have a relatively high failure rate. taining 50 pieces of that part is supplied.)
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF,
C but are expected to have a relatively high
failure rate.
■ REMARKS
D Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, The REMARKS column indicates a unique
but are expected to become faulty.
name of a part of its relevant information of
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis,
or parts that may be needed in case of note.
E unexpected accidents such as man-induced
damage. ■ SERIAL NUMBER
The units may contain different parts depend-
<The RANK guide>
ing on their shipment control number. SE-
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control
RANK characters, and Export regulation- number to which the relevant parts are appli-
applicable character are assigned in that cable. If the SERIAL NUMBER column is
order. blank, the parts are applicable to all the
Thus, at least one character or up to three relevant units.
characters are assigned in the RANK The shipment control number is represented
column. by lower four digits of seven-digit number
indicated on the ratings name plate.
003-352-03 003-352-03
CR-IR344 Service Manual SP - 2 CR-IR344 Service Manual SP - 3
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 4 サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 5
INDEX 01A INDEX 01B INDEX 02A INDEX 07A INDEX 07B INDEX 07C
● フレーム1 ● フレーム2 ● カバー1 ● 副走査部1 ● 副走査部2 ● 副走査部3
FRAME 1 FRAME 2 COVER 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 SUBSCANNING UNIT 3
INDEX 02B INDEX 02C INDEX 03A INDEX 07D INDEX 08A INDEX 08B
● カバー2 ● カバー3 ● カバー（昇降）1 ● 副走査部4 ● スキャナ後搬送部1 ● スキャナ後搬送部2
COVER 2 COVER 3 COVER (UP-DOWN) 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 SCANNER AFTER-READING SCANNER AFTER-READING
UNIT 1 UNIT 2
INDEX 03B INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 09 INDEX 10A INDEX 10B

● 昇降部リフタ ● 昇降部シャッタ ● 消去前搬送部 ● 消去搬送部1 ● 消去搬送部2
● カバー（昇降）2
UP-DOWN UNIT LIFTER UP-DOWN UNIT SHUTTER BEFORE-ERASURE ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2
COVER (UP-DOWN) 2
CONVEYOR
INDEX 06A INDEX 06B INDEX 06C INDEX 10C INDEX 11A INDEX 11B
● IPセット部1 ● IPセット部2 ● IPセット部3 ● 消去搬送部3 ● パス切替搬送部1 ● パス切替搬送部2
IP SET UNIT 1 IP SET UNIT 2 IP SET UNIT 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 1 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 2
FR1Z0001.EPS FR1Z0002.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 6 サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 7
INDEX 11C INDEX 11D INDEX 12 INDEX 16F INDEX 16G INDEX 16H
● パス切替搬送部3 ● パス切替搬送部4 ● 光学部 ● オプション6 ● オプション7 ● オプション8
PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 3 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 4 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT （電動つかまり棒） OPTION 7 （COMETフォトタイマ取付）
OPTION 6(GRIP HANDLE) OPTION 8
(COMET PHOTOTIMER
ATTACHMENT KIT)
INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15A INDEX 17 INDEX 18 INDEX 19

18
● 電装部 ● 電源部 ● 制御部1 ● ケーブル ● 接続図 ● 部品番号検索表
WIRING UNIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONTROLLER 1 CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
INDEX 15B INDEX 16A INDEX 16B INDEX 20 INDEX 21

● 制御部2 ● オプション1 ● オプション2（取手キット） ● ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 ● 消耗品一覧表
CONTROLLER 2 （カセッテホルダーキット） OPTION 2(HANDLE KIT) TABLE OF SCREWS / LIST OF QUICK WEARING
OPTION 1 WASHERS INDICATION PARTS
(CASSETTE HOLDER KIT) SYMBOLS
INDEX 16C INDEX 16D INDEX 16E ● INDEX内イラストの網がけ部分がパーツリストに相当する部分です。

● オプション3 ● オプション4 ● オプション5
（生殖腺保護具キット）（フォトタイマ取付キット） OPTION 5
OPTION 3(GENITAL GLAND OPTION 4(PHOTOTIMER ● The number in the shaded area in each unit that comes after INDEX
PROTECTOR) ATTACHMENT KIT) indicates the parts list section number. FR1Z0004.EPS
FR1Z0003.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
フレーム1 フレーム1
01A FRAME 1 FRAME 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
D 1 382N0939 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T14 x W8 x L425

FR1Z0005.EPS D 3 382N0938 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T14 x W8 x L360
2-B3x6 D 5 382N0937 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T14 x W8 x L495
E 6 345Y0175D 遮板 Cover 1
4
D 7 387N0098A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4
3 3-BR4x8 2-B3x6
スポンジテープ
D 8 382N0944A Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W8 x L860
6 D 9 382N1053 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W8 x L482
2 E 10 345N1362A 遮板 Cover 1
7
2-B3x6 E 11 345N1361A 遮板 Cover 1
5 E 12 316N0343 止め具 Clamp 1
9
8 E 13 316N0344B 止め具 Clamp 1
2-B3x6
D 14 382N0941B スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W8 x L440
D 15 382N0942B スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W8 x L790
BR4x8 7 スポンジテープ
12 2-BR4x8 D 16 382N0943B Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W8 x L625
1 3-BR4x8 5-B3x6
A 13 D 17 382N0946 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W8 x L388
5-B3x6 10
Z D 20 382N0956 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W8 x L111
D 21 382N1103A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W8 x L270
E 23 310N0528A ピン Pin 2
C 15 16 E 24 356N6348 ブラケット Bracket 1
D
E 25 345N1278A 遮板 Cover 1
23 BR4x8 Z D 26 382N0950 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T13 x W28 x L41
BR4x8 17
B3x6 E 28 345N1276C 遮板 Cover 1
18
2-BR4x8 D 29 382N0953A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T10 x W10 x L33
24 23 22 D 30 382N1095 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
21
DETAIL D
20 E 34 345N1363 遮板 Cover 1
19
D 35 387N0146A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 #2044 or later
B
21
2-B3x6
35
26 27 29
25 28 30
31 32 34
33
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C 32
FR4Z0006.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
フレーム2 フレーム2
01B FRAME 2 FRAME 2 01B
D 1 363N2067A ガイド Guide 2

7 D 2 382N0957 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T7 x W17 x L28.5
FR1Z0007.EPS E 3 356N6347A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 4 347S0098/0362 スペーサ Spacer 2
D 5 363N2044 ガイド Guide 2
D 6 362N0480A 受 Stopper 1
E 7 318N1062 グロメット Grommet 5
E 8 318N1063 グロメット Grommet 1
D 9 382N1314 リボン Ribbon 1 W15 x L652
E 10 356N6485B ブラケット Bracket 1
7 E 11 356N6699 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 12 365S0029 レール Rail 2 3307-26
29 E 13 356N6271C ブラケット Bracket 1
14 ***
5 8 9
15 ***
2-BR4x8
2-B3x6 7 D 16 382N0959 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T8 x W15 x L23.5
7
6 29 D 17 382N1099 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W10 x L41
29 D 19 382N0958 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T8 x W6.5 x L22
3 2-B3x6
5 E 20 345N1277A 遮板 Cover 1
1 C
B D 21 382N0955A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T10 x W12 x L54
D
Na4 SW4 D 23 382N0954A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T12 x W18 x L54
A 10
2-S4x20 E 24 345Y0212 遮板アセンブリ Cover Assembly 1
3-BR4x8 2 4-BR4x8
D 25 382N1098 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
1 11 D 26 382N1097 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
Na4
SW4 8-T4x6(3B*)
2-S4x20 E 27 345N1275A 遮板 Cover 1
4 43 2-BR4x8
D 28 382N0952A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
2-BR4x8
2-S4x8 39 E 29 401N0755B 押さえ板 Counter Plate 3
42 D 30 362Y0085A 受アセンブリ Stopper Assembly 1
6-B3x6 40 40
6-T4x6(3B*) E 31 356N6756A ブラケット Bracket 1
39
2-BR4x8 41 D 32 382N1093 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T8 x W15 x L44
9-T4x6(3B*) 44 2-BQ4x10
30 4-BR4x8
2-BR4x8 D 33 382N1094 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2 T16.5 x W7 x L15
6-B3x6 38 E 34 345N1279 遮板 Cover 1
12
E 35 356N6270A ブラケット Bracket 1
31
Na4 E 36 356N6268C ブラケット Bracket 1
2-BR4x8
2-BQ4x10 E 37 356N6273B ブラケット Bracket 1
13 37 E 38 356N6269B ブラケット Bracket 1
W4
SW4 平座金
12 6-T4x6(3B*) Q4x20 D 39 309N0050 Washer 2 φ4.1 x 1.5
E 40 356N6160 ブラケット Bracket 2
2-BR4x8 36 2-BR4x8
35 E 41 356N7445A ブラケット Bracket 1
17 23 2-B3x6 42 ***
18 26 E 43 356N8727 ブラケット Bracket 2 (R)
25
22 E 44 356N8715 ブラケット Bracket 1 (L)
27
16 20 34 ＊参考：図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
21 32
19 24 28 33
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C DETAIL D
FR1Z0008.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
カバー1 カバー1
02A COVER 1 COVER 1 02A
E 1 350Y1393A 左側面カバー Left - Hand Side Cover 1

E 2 350N2059A カバー Cover 10
FR1Z0009.EPS D 3 382N1102A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T15 x W10 x L805
10-T4x16 2 E 4 356N6124C ブラケット Bracket 1
1 D 5 128S0490/A スイッチ Switch 4
E 7 347N1511 スペーサ Spacer 2
D 8 388N1149 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2
5-T4x8
T4x10 E 12 356N6396A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 13 356N6103D ブラケット Bracket 1
E 14 356N6102C ブラケット Bracket 1
E 15 350N2211A 下面カバー Lower Cover 1
28 E 16 366N0053 アクチュエータ Actuator 2
26 E 17 347N0785 スペーサ Spacer 4 φ6 x 4
T4x10 D 18 388N5278 板バネ Flat Spring 2
25
D 19 305N0053 ナット Nut 2
27 3 E 20 356N6654 ブラケット Bracket 1
E 22 350Y1276B 安全SWカバー Cover 1
2-T4x12
24 E 23 317N1054A キャップ Cap 4
E 24 350Y1394 前カバー Front Cover 1
E 25 350Y1297A アゴ当てカバー Cover 1
E 26 350Y1274F/G カバー Cover 1
E 27 350Y1275A カバー Cover 2
4
E 28 351N0176 化粧板 Plate 1
23 2-BR4x8
23 2-B3x16
Z
Z
5 9
6 10
7 2-BR4x8 11
8 2-BR4x8
7
12
23 5
2-T4x8 8
13 2-B3x16
23
2-BR4x16
16 14
17 BR4x8
BR4x8
19 18
2-BR4x16 2-T4x16
5 16
21 17 BR4x8
2-B3x16 4-T4x16
2-B3x16 18
3-BR4x8
5 15
20
19
22 FR1Z0010.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
02B COVER 2 COVER 2 02B
E 1 350Y1299 背面カバー Rear Cover 1

1 FR1Z0011.EPS D 3 345N1280A ルーバ Louver 8
E 4 350Y1281D 背面カバー Rear Cover 1
E 5 316S3035 マグネットキャッチ Catch 4
2 3 E 6 360Y0075 ケース Case 1
8-T4x10
E 7 360N0348C ケース Case 1
4 A 8 376N0189B メカニカルフィルター Mechanical Filter 1
T4x12 6
3 E 12 350Y1423C 右側面内側カバー Right Inner Cover 1
5 D 15 350Y1392C 右側面カバー Right Cover 1
D 16 345N1394 ルーバ Louver 6
A 17 376N0190 メカニカルフィルター Mechanical Filter 1
A4x10
5 E 18 360N0349 ケース Case 1
25
C 19.1 845Y0067 パネル Panel 1 For Japan
T4x12
C 19.2 845Y0068 パネル Panel (Non Switch) 1 For Overseas
A4x10
25 E 20 356N6112E ブラケット Bracket 1
BR4x8 8 7 カバー
E 21 350N2209B Cover 1
25 E 22 356N6697B ブラケット Bracket 1
9 E 24 347N0732 スペーサ Spacer 1
E 25 347N0728 スペーサ Spacer 3 φ4 x 2.5
4-BR4x8
5
11
12 13
2-BR4x8 10
2-B3x6
14
2-BR4x8 4x4-A3x6 2-A3x6
15
8-BR4x8 T4x8
3-B3x10
16
17
2-BR4x8 18
16
23
24 BR4x12
2-BR4x8
T4x8 8-N3x4
22
2-B3x8
2-BR4x8
20
21
19
FR1Z0012.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
02C COVER 3 COVER 3 02C
E 1 350Y1298 上カバー Cover 1

D 2 345N1280A ルーバ Louver 4
FR1Z0013.EPS E 3 350Y1295F 天上面カバー Upper Cover 1
2 遮板
E 7 345Y0165B Cover 1
1
D 8.1 363N1892A ガイド Guide 2 #**** or earlier
2-BR4x16 ガイド
D 8.2 363N2295 Guide 2 #**** or later
18 4 E 9 345Y0213/0214 遮板 Cover 1
E 10 345Y0164C 遮板 Cover 1
17 4 3 E 11 345Y0163B 遮板 Cover 1
16 4-T4x8 E 12 345Y0166A 遮板 Cover 1
D 14 128S0771/0809 スイッチ Switch 1 MSH5
15
E 16 347N0707 スペーサ Spacer 4 φ3 x 6
D 17 387N0109B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
4 D 18 363N2051 ガイド Guide 1
14 5
＊363N2295（REF.NO.8.2）は、フィールドで加工する必要がある。
2-BR4x8
2-B3x6
2-BR4x8 ＊363N2295(REF.NO.8.2) needs to be modified in the field.
12
BR4x8
6
13 BR4x8
11
2-T4x12
7
10
2-BR4x10
A
8
8
2-BR4x16
9
DETAIL A
REF.18.2を取付けた後、
4-BR4x12 ツメを切り取る。
After REF.18.2 is installed,

the prongs shoud be cut off.
FR1Z0014.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
カバー（昇降）1 カバー（昇降）1
03A COVER (UP-DOWN) 1 COVER (UP-DOWN) 1 03A

E 2 350N7137B 正面カバー Front Cover 1
FR1Z0015.EPS E 3.1 405N2533A 銘板 Label 1
E 3.2 405N2883 銘板 Label 1
C 4 845Y0058B パネル Panel 1
C 5 845Y0067 パネル Panel 1
E 6 316S3015 マグネットキャッチ Catch 4
2-BR5x10 E 9 356N7452C ブラケット Bracket 1
6 2
7 6
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
FR1Z0016.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
カバー（昇降）2 カバー（昇降）2
03B COVER (UP-DOWN) 2 COVER (UP-DOWN) 2 03B
E 1 350N7149D 右目隠しカバー Cover 1

E 2 350N7143J 右上カバー Upper Right Cover 1
FR1Z0017.EPS E 3 350N7138D 右下前カバー Lower Right Front Cover 1
BR5x10 E 4 350N7139B カバー Cover 1
E 9 350N2136E カバー Cover 1
E 10 350N2670 カバー Cover 1
DETAIL B
D 11 345N7054A ルーバ Louver 3
20 A 12 376N0198A メカニカルフィルター Mechanical Filter 2
E 13 405N2340 銘板 Label 2
BR5x10
E 16 350Y1270K 制御部カバー Cover 1
T4x8 E 17 405N2508B 銘板 Label 1 For Overseas
9Pcs E 18 350N2221 左カバー Left Cover 1
A 4-T4x8 E 20 388N5703A 板バネ Flat Spring 9
18 E 21 128S0664 スイッチ Switch 1
2-BR4x8
E 22 405N2506 銘板 Label 1
17 6
6
19 7 2-BR4x8
2-T4x8 2-BR4x8
8
2-BR4x8
14 T4x8
16 8 3
5
T4x8
14
B 8-BR4x8
10
9
4
4-B3x6
14
11
T4x8 12 DETAIL A
23
T4x8
11
15 14
22
13
12
11
21
13 FR1Z0018.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
昇降部リフタ昇降部リフタ
04 UP-DOWN UNIT LIFTER UP-DOWN UNIT LIFTER 04
E 1 316N0365 止め具 Clamp 9

D 2 370N0250 ホース Hose 1 φ5 x L2200
FR1Z0019.EPS D 3 128S0257 スイッチ Switch 2 VX-016-1A3 ( MSH8, 9 )
D 4 378N0002 シリンダーセット Cylinder Set 1
D 5 374N0016 ダウンセーフティバルブ Down Safety Valve 1
D 6 370N0252 ホース Hose 1 φ5 x L850
D 7 370N0249 ホース Hose 1 φ7.5 x L400
1 止め具
E 8 316N2016 Clamp 2
1 D 9 359N0124 タンク Tank 1
2 A 10 899N0002 オイル Oil 1 MOBIL DTE24 For Japan
D 11 370N0251 ホース Hose 1 φ5 x L200
D 12.1 134Y0055 電磁弁アセンブリ Solenoid Valve Assembly 1 SVH1, 2 #2043 or earlier
A D 12.2 134Y0072 電磁弁アセンブリ Solenoid Valve Assembly 1 #2044 or later
D 13 372N0064 管継手 Joint 1
3 D 16 372N0063 管継手 Joint 1
6
4 D 17 372N0062 管継手 Joint 2
5 D 18 386N0622 アキュームレータ Accumulator 2
D 19 370N0254 高圧ホース Hi-pressure Hose 1 φ6 x L2000
D 20 119S1067 ファン Fan 1
D 21 110N0001 コンデンサ Condenser 1
D 22 133Y1014 電動ポンプ Pump 1 MH1
1
D 25 370N0253 高圧ホース Hi-pressure Hose 1 φ6 x L500
3
D 26 332N0597 ストッパ Stopper 1
26
22 25 7
8 9,10
8
23
A
24 11
1
B
21
18
20
19
17
12.1
18
16 15
1
17 12.2 16
B
1
15
14
14 13
13 FR4Z0020.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
昇降部シャッタ昇降部シャッタ
05 UP-DOWN UNIT SHUTTER UP-DOWN UNIT SHUTTER 05

FR1Z0021.EPS E 3 356N6936 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 6 363N7143B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 7 363N7145B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 8 398N7000A シャッタ Shutter 22
E 9 347N1542A スペーサ Spacer 2
E 10 347N7086C スペーサ Spacer 4
3 4-BR4x16
D 12 363N7147D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
5
D 13 363N7149D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
2-BR4x12 A4x10 D 15 363N7148D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
4
E 16 363N7146D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
A4x10 6 D 18 363N7144B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
1 D 19 363N7142B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
2 8 ＊参考：図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
2-BR4x12 2-BR4x8 9
T4x8(3B*)
18 10
2-BR4x8
8 7
9
T4x8(3B*) 11
10 T4x12(3B*)
1
2-BR4x12
11
T4x12(3B*)
1 2-B3x6
2-BR4x12 20
2-BR4x8 14
19
12
13
2-BR4x8
2-B3x6
17
15
16
FR1Z0022.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
IPセット部1 IPセット部1
06A IP SET UNIT 1 IP SET UNIT 1 06A

D 2 104N0044 フォトセンサ Photo Sencer 1 SA2
FR1Z0023.EPS E 3 319N3367A 軸 Shaft 1
E 4 346N1009 補助板 Reinforcement 1
E 5 335N0083A フランジ Flange 1
D 7 324N3121 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
2-B3x6 E 8 318N1042A ブッシュ Bush 1
1
D 9 323S3073 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1
3 Q4x16 タイミングベルト車
D 11 324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 1
W 6
A4x20 BR4x8 D 12 118SX164 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MA2
8
12 9 E 14.1 346N1012C 補助板 Reinforcement 1 #2051 or earlier
6-BR4x8 4
13 2-A4x10 5 E 14.2 346N1174 補助板 Reinforcement 1 #2052 or later
15 11
2-BR4x8 E 17 347S0063 スペーサ Spacer 4
2-BR4x8 E4
ころがり軸受 SC866ZZNRCS09/1
D 18 322SF061 Rolling Bearing 2
KQ1
10 E 19 319N3368 軸 Shaft 2
D 20 322SY067 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 80F-0403
16 E 21 341N0873B アーム Arm 1
BR4x8 E 22 347N0401 スペーサ Spacer 4 φ3 x 4
17 アーム
22 E 23 341N0872A Arm 2
2-BR4x8
B3x10 Q4x16 アーム
23 31 E 24 341N0870B Arm 2
B3x10
E6
20 BR4x16 19 E 26 347S0065 スペーサ Spacer 2
20
22 BR4x8 ブラケット
E3 26 E 28 356N6230B Bracket 1
24 17 W E 29 319N3366B 軸 Shaft 1
25 ブラケット
17 E 30 356N6229B Bracket 1
E 31 341N0871A アーム Arm 1
BR4x8 BR4x8
27B3x16 E 33 356N6144B ブラケット Bracket 1
30 18 E 34 346N1171 補助板 Reinforcement 2 #2052 or later
E4 19
＊参考 : 図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
BR4x8 2-WP4x4
17 (3B*) 21
20
E6 22
33 BR4x8
B3x16
27
28 E4 BR4x16 B3x10
29 26 23
25 E3
24
22 B3x10
20
32
FR1Z0024.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
06B IP SET UNIT 2 IP SET UNIT 2 06B
D 1 118YX180 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MA3

FR1Z0025.EPS E 3 356N6169A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 4 104N0044 フォトセンサ PhotoSencer 1 SA3
E 5 341N0874B アーム Arm 1
E 6 319N3371 軸 Shaft 1
1
D 7 322SF044 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 1 OJ-380331-702
2-B3x10 2-BR4x8
E 9 327N0036A ラック Rack 2
2
E 10 318N1042A ブッシュ Bush 4
B3x6
E 11 319N3466 軸 Shaft 2
2-B3x6 D 12 363N1958 ガイド Guide 4
2-WP3x4 3 E 14 314S0031 蝶番 Hinge 2
2-Q4x12 6 (3B*) 4
B3x16 E 15 356N6437A ブラケット Bracket 1
7
X 東芝フォトタイマー用
E 16.1 356N6435A ブラケット Bracket 1 /For TOSHIBA PHOTO
TIMER
10
9 日立/島津フォトタイ
マー用 /For
20 E 16.2 356N6486 ブラケット Bracket 1
19 HITACHI/SHIMADZU
PHOTO TIMER
D 17 322SF104 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2
21 8 E 18 355N0508D フレーム Frame 1
B3x10
2-BR4x12 22
9 D 19 363N1848A ガイド Guide 2
12
2-BR4x12 D 20 363N1847B ガイド Guide 2
20 D 21 *** グリッド Grid 1 Refer to Product Code

19 11
B3x10 10
12 11
X 12
2-BR4x8
13
12
18
17
2-B3x10
17
16
14
15
14
FR1Z0026.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
06C IP SET UNIT 3 IP SET UNIT 3 06C

E 2 318N1042A ブッシュ Bush 1
1 FR1Z0027.EPS D 3 324N3121 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
14 A4x20
30 Q4x16 2 E 4 316N0337 止め具 Clamp 1
S3x8(3B*) 3 E 5 319N3369B 軸 Shaft 1
BR4x8
4 E 6 347S0067 スペーサ Spacer 3
21
E 7 347S0099 スペーサ Spacer 3 103H7123-0642
S3x8(3B*) 6 5
D 8 324N3041E タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
19 12
21 D 9 118SX164 モータ Motor 1 MA1
S3x8(3B*) 補助板
E 10 346N1007B Reinforcement 1
B3x16
14 14 E 11 355Y0176A フレーム Frame 1
S3x8(3B*)
16 15 スペーサ
29 8 E 12 347N0721 Spacer 8 φ3 x 18
21 18 7 E 13 341N0909C アーム Arm 2
12 17 9 B3x6
S3x8(3B*) D 14 322SF104 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 8 FLAWBC5-10ZZA
2-WP4x4(3B*) 10
E 15 319N3574 軸 Shaft 4
3-BR4x8 11
19 E 16 347N0524 スペーサ Spacer 4 φ3 x 10
12 12
13 ころがり軸受 SC866ZZNRCS09/1
D 17 322SF061 Rolling Bearing 4
KQ1
B3x16
14 D 18 327N0037B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
14
16 15 20
29 15 D 19 388S2126 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 4
19
Z 12 2-WP4x4 E 20 356N6290C ブラケット Bracket 1
(3B*)
12
31 17 16 14 D 21 363N1844A ガイド Guide 6
21
S3x8(3B*)
17 2-WP4x4(3B*) S3x8(3B*) E 23 356N6168C ブラケット Bracket 1
12 D 24 104N0043 フォトセンサ Photo Sencer 1 SA1
13 21
2-BR4x8 E 25 319N3370 軸 Shaft 1
14
27 2-BR4x8 S3x8(3B*) 14 E 26 356N6226B ブラケット Bracket 1
32 15
26
12 16 S3x8(3B*) E 28 335N0082A フランジ Flange 1 SC866ZZNRCS/1KQ1
25
E 29 341N0895D アーム Arm 2
17 E6 Y S3x8(3B*)
21
23 D 31 363N1842C ガイド Guide 1
22 D 32 363N1843C ガイド Guide 1
33 2-BR4x8
22 E 33 346Y0066 補助板アセンブリ Reinforcement Assembly 1
B3x6 D 34 363N1938A ガイド Guide 3
2-BR4x8 E 35 346N1032B 補助板 Reinforcement 1
D 36 386Y0022 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3
37 E 37 346N1031B 補助板 Reinforcement 1
36 ＊参考 : 図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
2-B3x6 34
2-B3x6
36
BQ4x10
34
35
2-B3x6 Z
34
BQ4x10 FR1Z0028.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
副走査部1 副走査部1
07A SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 07A

D 2 363N2020C ガイド Guide 2
E 3 319N3402 軸 Shaft 4
45
FR1Z0029.EPS ガイド
3 D 4 363N2021A Guide 2
4 11.2 2-T4x6(3B*) D 5 388N1153 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2
BR4x20
5 44 BR4x8 ブラケット
E 6 356N6649 Bracket 1
BR4x20
2 E 7 363N2389 ガイド板 Guide Plate 2
43 46 45 E 8 363Y0318 ガイド板 Guide Plate 2
3 6
2-T4x6(3B*) 42 46
2-BR4x8 BR4x8 E 10 363N2025C ガイド板 Guide Plate 2
BR4x8 2-T4x6(3B*)
D 11.1 363Y0328 ガイド Guide 1 #2001 to
47 48 #2003, #2006
49 D 11.2 363Y0372A ガイド Guide 1 #2004/5,
2-BR4x12 7 12 4 #2007 or later
1 SW3 3 ブラケット
Q3x6
11.1 42 E 12 356N6648 Bracket 1
BR4x20 ブラケット
2 E 13 356N6646 Bracket 1
5 DETAIL A ピン
7 14 Q4x6 E 14 310N0618B Pin 2
BR4x25
BR4x20 SW4 D 15 382N1134 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T5 x W10 x L80
2-BR4x8 3 W4
2-T4x6(3B*)
BR4x8
13 E 17 382N1133A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T10 x W8 x L345
2-B3x6
2-BR4x12 2-BR4x8 E 18 382N1131 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2 T5 x W10 x L40
SW3
BR4x8 BR4x8 D 19 350N2201A カバー Cover 1
2-B3x6 10 Q3x6 D 20 382N1153A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2 T10 x W10 x L146
2-BR4x12 Z
BR4x25 E 21 350N2073A カバー Cover 1
8 9 15 Q4x6
2-B3x6 SW4 スポンジテープ
D 22 382N1008 Sponge Tape 1
19 16 W4 E 23 356N6306A ブラケット Bracket 1
2-B3x6 14 E 24 347N1196A スペーサ Spacer 1
18
BR4x8 10
41 D 25 113Y1038 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SZ3
BR4x8 20 17 D 26 322SF012 軸受 Bearing 2 FLW688ZZ
9
A 18 E 28 356N6719D ブラケット Bracket 1
20
26 2-BR4x8
E6 E 30 356N6718A ブラケット Bracket 1
Z
8-W5 E 32 356N6715C ブラケット Bracket 1
2-BR4x8 4-Na4 8-SW5 D 33 386Y0021 防振ゴム Vibration Proof Rubber 1 A set of four
(3B*) 8-Q5x12
E 34 347N1521 スペーサ Spacer 8 φ4 x 2.5
2-BR4x10 E 35 350N2074E カバー Cover 1
4-BR6x16 23 21 E 36 356N6154B ブラケット Bracket 1
22
2-B3x6 E 37 347S0194 スペーサ Spacer 4
37 24
(3B*) 25 D 38.1 363N1861A ガイド Guide 2 #2002 or earlier
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x10 D 38.2 363N2150 ガイド Guide 2 #2003 to #2005,
2-A3x8
(3B*) #2007 or later
35 2-BR4x8 スペーサ
34 E 39 347S0102 Spacer 4
26 Q4x25
34 38 37 29 D 40 363N1863 ガイド Guide 2
Na4
4-Na4 27 E 41 350N2082B カバー Cover 1
37 2-BR4x25
(3B*) 2-BR4x8 (3B*) E 42 356N6166C ブラケット Bracket 2
Na4
2-BR4x25 36 D 43 360N0345A ハウジング Housing 1
39 Q4x25
2-BR4x8
38 2-BR4x8 E 44 356N6165C ブラケット Bracket 1
50
2-BR4x25 D 45 388N2403 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2
40 37 34
E 46 347N0728 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 2.5
2-BR4x25
(3B*) 50 E 47 319Y1134 軸 Shaft 1
28 50
40 39 34 E 48 356N6164C ブラケット Bracket 1
33 30 D 49 360N0344 ハウジング Housing 1
32
31 2-BR4x8 FR4Z0030.EPS E 50 347N0711 スペーサ Spacer 5 φ3 x 8.5
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
07B SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 07B
D 1 341N0923 アーム Arm 2

E 2 319N3437 軸 Shaft 1
FR1Z0031.EPS D 3 309S0100 平座金 Washer 8 φ4 x 1
2-WP4x4(3B*) D 4 322SF010 軸受 Bearing 4 FLW686ZZ
D 5 341N0879C アーム Arm 2
E 6 319N3384A 軸 Shaft 2
1 2 D 7 341N0853D アーム Arm 2
2-WP4x4(3B*) E 8 319N3878 軸 Shaft 2
7 2-B3x12 9 ***
10 E 10 313N1179 ステー Stay 1
2-BR4x25
3 E 11 319N3580A 軸 Shaft 2
8
Q4x20 2-B3x12 4 D 12 341N0880A アーム Arm 1
25 5
2-B3x6 6
SW4 23 E 13 347S0182 スペーサ Spacer 1 φ8 x 2
38 39 2-WP4x4(3B*)
W4
3 E 14 347N0636 スペーサ Spacer 1 φ8 x 4
2-B3x6
24 E4 4 1 D 15 322SF012 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 1
B3x6 SW4 22 20 8
Q4x10 11 ブラケット
2-B3x6 12 E 16 356N7446B Bracket 1
27 23 3 13 E 17 347S0098/0362 スペーサ Spacer 2
1415
2-B3x6 4
B3x6 39 E4 16 E 18 319N3581A 軸 Shaft 1
43 3 17
22 40 11 18 19 ***
27 20 2-BR4x25
4 5 2-WP4x4(3B*) Y D 20 334N0049 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 4
6 17
7 E 21 401N0735B 押さえ板 Counter Plate 2
20 D 22 388N2404A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4
43
40 42 D 23 317N1033 キャップ Cap 4
E4
21 E 24 319N3394 軸 Shaft 2 #2044 or earlier
E4 23
E 25 319N3393 軸 Shaft 2
20 Q4x20 D 26 341N0877A アーム Arm 1 #2044 or earlier
41 22 23 D 27 322SF021 軸受 Bearing 4
W4 SW4
22 21 24 D 28 309N0050 平座金 Washer 4
25
26 CR 29 113Y1375C PHV08C PHV08C 1
SW4
27 Q4x10 E 30 350N2585A カバー Cover 1
B3x6
E 31 405N2572 銘板 Label 1
Q4x6 28 E 32 347S0264 スペーサ Spacer 4
SW4 #2045 or later
5-BR4x8 36
W4 2-BR4x8 4-BR4x8 E 33 347S0092/0357 スペーサ Spacer 4
45(右/Right) E4
Q4x6 2-BR4x8 25 E 34 356N6670B ブラケット Bracket 1
SW3 B3x6 46(左/Left)
SW4
W4 SW3
35 29 44 SW4
30 E 36 347S0102/0365 スペーサ Spacer 1
37 Q4x10
SW3 D 37 310N0617A ピン Pin 4
37 SW3 31 D 38 341N0878A アーム Arm 1 #2044 or earlier
Y E 39 401N0734B 押さえ板 Counter Plate 2
34 D 40 309S0025 波座金 Washer 2
33
D 41 334Y0075C ゴムローラアセンブリ Rubber Roller Assembly 1
D 42 334Y0074A ゴムローラアセンブリ Rubber Roller Assembly 1
32
5-BR4x8 4-S3x6(3B*) E 43 319N3487A 軸 Shaft 2
E 44 319N3645 軸 Shaft 2 #2045 or later
2-BR4x8
D 45 341N0952 アーム Arm 1 #2045 or later
FR4Z0032.EPS
D 46 341N0953 アーム Arm 1 #2045 or later
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
07C SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 07C
E 1 319N3435D 軸 Shaft 1
D 2 322SY055 軸受 Bearing 2
FR1Z0033.EPS
D 3 341N1021 アーム Arm 1
D 4 388N2222 バネ Spring 1
4 E 5 388N1073 バネ Spring 1
E6 5
6 D 6 322SF061 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 2
7
6 D 7 337N0044 ホイール Wheel 1
1 8
2 E6 9
3 Na8 DQ 9 118YX700/B モータ Motor 1 MZ1 ( FFM )
2 フライホイール
SW8 D 10 337N0057 Flywheel 1
W8
ベルト北辰工業
E 11 323N0033 Belt 1
52 /Hokushin Kogyo
D 12 113Y1566 SED08C SED08C 1 SZ1
10 D 13 363Y0406 ガイド Guide 1
5-BR4x8 51 2-B3x8
S4x8 D 14 602Y0119 集光ミラーアセンブリ Condensing Mirror Assembly 1
11 (3B*) 12
2-B3x6 E 15 356N8731 ブラケット Bracket 1
13 E 18 319N3533A 軸 Shaft 2
17 S3x6(3B*) D 19 388N1153 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2
18
20
21 D 21 322SY056 軸受 Bearing 4
22 14
21 E 22 347S0787 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ8 x 5.5
19 15 E 23 347S0298 スペーサ Spacer 4
2-B3x16
2-B3x6 集光ミラーアセンブリ
16 DQ 24 602Y0118 Condensing Mirror 1
23 S3x6(3B*)
E4 24 2-B3x16 D 25 363Y0337A ガイドアセンブリ Guide Assembly 1
2-B3x6 23 17 E 26 319N3534 軸 Shaft 1
27
18 D 27 322SF012 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 3
19
20 D 28 341N0881A アーム Arm 2
25 21 E 29 319N3399 軸 Shaft 4
22
26 21 D 30 322SF002 軸受 Bearing 2 W686ZZA
E4
BR3x16 D 32 341N0882 アーム Arm 1
29
30 BR3x16 D 33 322SF010 軸受 Bearing 2 FLW686ZZ
2-Q4x10 27
31 2-BR4x8
D 34 341N0883 アーム Arm 1
2-SW4
29 28 29 E 36 319N3535 軸 Shaft 2
49
50 Z 33 D 37 305N0014A ナット Nut 1
BR4x16
D 39 323N0017 ベルト Belt 1
B3x6 36
37 35 D 40 323S3065 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1
2-B3x10 29 E 41 356N7447C ブラケット Bracket 1
48 38 34 B4x14
33 D 42 318N1042A ブッシュ Bush 1
2-B3x8
B3x6 D 43 324N3121 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
E4
39 E 44 104N0044 フォトセンサ Photo Sencer 1 SZ2
46 47 B3x6 40
45
44
27
41
43 42
Q4x16 Z FR4Z0034.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
副走査部3
07C SUBSCANNING UNIT 3
BLANK PAGE
46.1 ***
#2001 to #2077,
D 46.2 363Y0393A ガイドアセンブリ Guide Assembly 1 #2081,#8004,
#8005
D 47 363N2053B ガイド Guide 1
D 48 363Y0342 ガイドアセンブリ Guide Assembly 1
D 50 118SX164 モータ Motor 1 MZ2
#2001 to #2077,
E 51 356N8381 ブラケット Bracket 1 #2081,#8004,
#8005
#2001 to #2077,
D 52 387N0147 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 #2081,#8004,
#8005
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
07D SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 07D
Light-Collecting Guide
DQ 1 606Y0035B 集光ガイドアセンブリ 1 Include REF.2, 3.
Assembly
FR1Z0035.EPS E 2 356N6163B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 4 347S0223 スペーサ Spacer 6
D 5 113Y1374A PMT08C PMT08C 1
E 6 350N2238B カバー Cover 2
2 32 E 8 347N1521 スペーサ Spacer 2
D 9 386S0013 防振ゴム Vibration Proof Rubber 1
2-T4x10 E 10 356N6595 ブラケット Bracket 1
5
E 11 356Y0176 ブラケット Bracket 1
6
2-BR3x4 3 E 13 356N7450C ブラケット Bracket 1
2-BR4x8
7 スペーサ
BR6x12 E 14 347S0100/0364 Spacer 2
E 15 310N0630A ピン Pin 1
4 E 16 356Y0254 ブラケット Bracket 1
2-BR4x8
9 D 18 113Y1445A PMR08C PMR08C 1
Light-Collecting Guide
DQ 19 606Y0039B 集光ガイドアセンブリ 1
Assembly
10
4-BR4x8 E 20 350N2407B カバー Cover 1
BR4x12 D 22 382N1342 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
SW4 11 12
23 2-BR4x8
14
21 BR4x8
13 スポンジテープ
24 D 24 382N1333 Sponge Tape 1
E 25 350Y1506 カバー Cover 1
BR4x8
26 E 26 350Y1507 カバー Cover 1
12
14 SW4 Light-Collecting Guide
DQ 27 606Y0057 集光ガイドアセンブリ 1
Assembly
BR4x8 15 BR4x12
19 BR4x8 BR4x10 Light-Collecting Guide

16 DQ 28 606Y0058 集光ガイドアセンブリ 1
Assembly
29
BR3x8
E 30 356Y0260 ブラケットアセンブリ Bracket Assembly 1
31 30
2-BR4x8
B3x8
23 E 32 360N0232A ケース Case 2
32
4
18
20
6
25 28
22
FR4Z0036.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
スキャナ後搬送部1 スキャナ後搬送部1
08A SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 1 SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 1 08A

E 2 347S0205 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 8
FR1Z0037.EPS E 3 319N3400A 軸 Shaft 6
D 4 322SY231 軸受 Bearing 6 DR-19-H6
D 7 113Y1039 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SD1
D 8 322SF002 軸受 Bearing 6 W686ZZA
E 9 319N3384A 軸 Shaft 2
E 10 319N3386B 軸 Shaft 2
D 11 334N2319 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 2
D 12 363N1856C ガイド Guide 2
E 13 347S0298 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ3 x 8
3
1 2 4
3
4
BR4x30
BR4x16 4
4 3
BR4x30 3
8 2
9
1
5
3
B3x35 4
13 10
2-BR4x25 6
4
B3x6 7
3
12
8 2-A3x8
B3x35 13
11
8 2-BR4x25 BR4x16
9
B3x6
8
10
12
8
11
8 FR1Z0038.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
スキャナ後搬送部2 スキャナ後搬送部2
08B SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 2 SCANNER AFTER-READING UNIT 2 08B
D 1 322SF050 軸受 Bearing 4 WBC8-14ZZA

D 2 334N3470A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
FR1Z0039.EPS
D 3 309S0101A 平座金 Washer 6 φ8 x 1
B3x8
D 4 322SF010 軸受 Bearing 4 FLW686ZZ
12 E 5 319N3384A 軸 Shaft 5
14 D 6 309S0100 平座金 Washer 4 φ4 x 1
13 14
E 7 341N0876A アーム Arm 2
E 8 347N0728 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 2.5
7 2-BR4x8
17 2-BR4x8 D 9 388N2401 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2
5 8 18 15
2-B3x6 6 E 10 347N0733 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 7
BR4x8 2-B3x6 E4 16 E 11 319N3387A 軸 Shaft 1
9 19 Q4x16
ブラケット
E 12 356N6150A Bracket 1
4 SW4
BR4x12 5 フォトセンサ
3 BR4x12 20 D 13 104N0044 Photo Sencer 1 SD2
10 11
WP4x4 E 14 313N0989A ステー Stay 2
(3B*) 平歯車
D 15 327N1101802B Spur Gear 1
Z 2-BQ4x10
1 D 16 118SX162 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 2 MD1, 2
2 21 ブラケット
8 E 17 356N6148B Bracket 1
BR4x8
9 7 E 18 356N6153A ブラケット Bracket 1
BR4x12 E 19 356N6149B ブラケット Bracket 1

BR4x12 D 21 327N0040A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
2-B3x6 E 22 319N3385A 軸 Shaft 1
4
WP4x4 D 23 322SF012 軸受 Bearing 4
5
22 (3B*) E 24 347S0205 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 8
E 25 341N0875A アーム Arm 2
2 D 26 329N0136 カム Cam 2
1
3 E 27 319N3389A 軸 Shaft 1
D 28 305N0014A ナット Nut 1
34 D 30 324N3718A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
32 D 31 323S3305 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 471-D3M-9
33
32 D 32 322SF017 軸受 Bearing 8 WA676ZZA
2-BQ4x10 D 33 324N3098A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 4
2-B3x6 E 34 319N3388 軸 Shaft 4
BR4x30
23 3 ＊参考 : 図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
DETAIL A 1
E6
2-BR4x12 23 3 Q4x20
A S4x12
A
25
16 26
4
A 23 29 27 5 24
3 Z
1 23
30 3
28
E4 26
Q4x20
S4x12
25
4
5 BR4x30
A
24
31 FR1Z0040.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
消去前搬送部消去前搬送部
09 BEFORE-ERASURE CONVEYOR BEFORE-ERASURE CONVEYOR 09
E 1 319N3431 軸 Shaft 6
D 2 322SY231 軸受 Bearing 6 DR-19-H6
9-B3x6
FR1Z0041.EPS E 3 345N1609 遮板 Cover 1
3 D 4 382N1002B スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
1 4 D 5 382N1004A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 6

5
2 6 D 6 382N1003A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
BR4x20 2 7 E 8 356N8701 ブラケット Bracket 1
BR4x20 1 9 S3x6 E 9 356N6346A ブラケット Bracket 1
12 10 (3B*)
2-B3x6 2-B3x6
D 11 382N1047 リボン Tape 2
8-B3x6 8 5
DETAIL A D 12 382N1045 リボン Tape 2
13
11 E 13 345N1610A 遮板 Cover 1
5 4-BR4x8 D 14 382N1005 リボン Tape 14
11 E 17 347N1196A スペーサ Spacer 1
D 18 113Y1039 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SE1
14 D 20 363N1858B ガイド Guide 2
21 ***
14 E 22 345Y0280 遮板 Cover 1
A
A D 23 382N1054 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
BR4x8 D 25 382N1007 リボン Tape 2
D 26 382N1006 リボン Tape 1
Z ガイド
31 32 15 D 27 363N1859 Guide 2
D 28 345Y0180 遮板 Cover 1
BR4x20
B3x8 E 29 356N6155B ブラケット Bracket 1
10 20 16
14 D 30 388N2402 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2
30 33 BR4x20 17 D 31 322SY129 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 80F-0405
19 14
29 18 E 32 356N6147A ブラケット Bracket 1
BR4x20 BR4x8
25 2-BR4x20 E 33 345N1296 遮板 Cover 1
B3x6 34 2-A3x6
BR4x35 14 E 34 356N6146A ブラケット Bracket 1
B3x8 20
10 31 D 35 363Y0319 ガイド Guide 1
2-BR4x20
B3x10 30 19
27 BR4x35 BR4x20
26 Z
28 25 22
Q3x6 6-B3x6
4-B3x6
27
B3x10
B3x6
24
23
FR1Z0042.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
消去搬送部1 消去搬送部1
10A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 10A
E 1 346N0998B 補助板 Reinforcement 1

D 2 345N1282C 仕切り板 Louver 1
FR1Z0043.EPS D 3 119Y1101 ファン Fan 4 FANF1~4
D 4 345N1285D 仕切り板 Louver 1
E 5 346N0994A 補助板 Reinforcement 4
D 6 115S0094 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 2 05EP-3253 (65℃/H)
2-A3x16 E 7 347N0524 スペーサ Spacer 4 φ3 x 10
1 D 10 407N0121A 反射板 Reflective Plate 1
B3x6
D 12 120Y0076A ソケットアセンブリ Socket Assembly 1
7 3 2
D 13 115S0117 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1 TSWF5
2-N3x6 (5003F 25℃ 4 UL UR)
8 7 2-B3x20 3 3-B3x6
D 14 305N0037 ナット Nut 2
9 6 2-B3x20
8 3 TSWF2
D 15 115S0116 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1
2-N3x6 2-B3x20 (5003F 75℃ 4 UL)
2-B3x6 3
6 2-B3x20 D 16 388N5259 バネ Spring 1
A 17 123S0027 蛍光ランプ Lamp 4 LAMP1~4
19 5 E 18 346N0997D 補助板 Reinforcement 4
17 5
2-BR4x8 E 19 603N0170F/G フィルター Filter 1
5 3-B3x6
17
18 Z 5
2-B3x6
2-BR4x8
17 4
2-B3x6
17
2-B3x6
2-B3x6
16
14
15
2-B3x6 9
14 10
B3x10 7
13
B3x10
2-B3x16
B3x10
12 B3x10
2-B3x6
2-B3x6
11
FR4Z0044.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
10B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 10B
D 1 323S3079 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 246-3M-9

D 2 322SF041 軸受 Bearing 2
FR1Z0045.EPS D 3 324N3095A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
4
2 E 4 319N3364 軸 Shaft 1
3 15 E 5 319N2940 軸 Shaft 1
2-A4x10
2 D 6 324N3098 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 2
B4x45
B4x30 D 8 324N3041E タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
5
7 D 9 319N3365 軸 Shaft 1
6
7 D 10 323S3262 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 312-3M-9
D 11 324N3038C タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
E4 8
7
6 D 13 360N0343 ハウジング Housing 4
7
D 14 322SF050 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 4 WBC8-14ZZA
D 15 118SX164 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MF1
B4x45 D 16 363N1838F ガイド Guide 4
14 E 17 346N0996A 補助板 Reinforcement 1
E6 13 D 18 327N1122415 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
12
D 19 113Y1038 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SF1
11 3-B3x6
10 E 20 347N1196A スペーサ Spacer 1
E 22 345N1284B 遮板 Cover 1
23 ***
16
3-B3x6 D 24 334Y3197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 25 334Y3198A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
3-B3x6
4-B3x6
16
2-B3x6
16 3-B3x6
17
14
25 13
12
2-B3x6
2-BR4x8
21 24
18
20 2-A3x6
19
22
21
FR1Z0046.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
10C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 10C
E 1 365S0030/0048 レール Rail 2 305A-23

FR1Z0047.EPS E 3 356N6422B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 4 345N1386 遮板 Cover 1
4-T4x6 (3B*) 2 3 E 5 347N0703 スペーサ Spacer 1
1 4
5
2-T4x6 D 10 382N1109A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
(3B*)
11 7 E 12 332N0496B ストッパ Stopper 2
E 13 316N0368B 止め具 Clamp 2
A 14 123S0028 蛍光ランプ Lamp 4
2-T4x6 1
(3B*) 2-T4x6 8 D 15 120Y0077A ソケットアセンブリ Socket Assembly 1
(3B*)
E 16 316N0369C 止め具 Clamp 2
D 17 115S0069 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1 (5003F 70℃ 4 UL)
12 4-T4x6
(3B*) 9 D 18 388N5259 バネ Spring 1
D 19 305N0037 ナット Nut 1
2-A3x16 D 20 382N1167 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T6 x W8 x L260
2-T4x6 E 21 369N0201A ダクト Duct 1
13 10
(3B*) E 22 369N0202A ダクト Duct 1
D 23 407N0120A 反射板 Reflective Plate 1
29
2-BR4x8 E 24 356N6680 ブラケット Bracket 1
13 スペーサ
E 26 347N0524 Spacer 2 φ3 x 10
2-BR4x8 D 27 115S0095 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1 05EP-3253 (70℃/M)
E 28 346N0997D 補助板 Reinforcement 4
E 29 603N0179D/E フィルター Filter 1
12
28 14
24 26
2-B3x6
25 14
28 2-B3x6
2-BR4x8 2-B3x6 14
2-SW3 28
23 2-W3 26 2-B3x6 14
27
22 25 2-B3x6
2-BR4x8
28 15
16 2-B3x6
4-B3x6
2-BR4x8
2-B3x6
2-BR4x8
2-B3x6
4-B3x6
16 2-B3x6
19 17
2-B3x6
2-BR4x8
2-SW3
18
2-W3
2-B3x6
21 20
FR1Z0048.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
パス切替搬送部1 パス切替搬送部1
11A PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 1 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 1 11A
D 1 387N0096A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2

1 FR1Z0049.EPS A 3 334N5021 ブラシローラ Brush Roller 1
A 4 334N5020 ブラシローラ Brush Roller 1
2
2-B3x6 E 6 316N0342D 止め具 Clamp 2
D 7 327N1121608 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 8 360N0351B ハウジング Housing 2
4 D 9 322SF050 軸受 Bearing 6 WBC8-14ZZA
6
E 10 347S0094/0359 スペーサ Spacer 2 SB6M3-20-F
2-BR4x8 2-B3x6 3 D 12 388N2419A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2
D 13 327N1124001A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
1 D 15 360N0127C ハウジング Housing 2
2-BR4x8
7 スペーサ
2 E 18 347N0524 Spacer 2 φ3 x 10
8
9 D 19 334N3469 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
E 20 334Y3194A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
10 4-BR4x8
11 5 E 21 322SF026 軸受 Bearing 2 FLAW678ZZA
12
SW3 E 22 334Y3193A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
12 D 23 363N1853B ガイド Guide 1
B3x12 11
B3x12 10 E 24 356N6145A ブラケット Bracket 1
Z
SW3
9
8
B3x8
13
17
18 E6
B3x16
BR4x20
15
16
9
19 Z 18
17 14
BR4x20
21
19
22 20
25
19
4-BR4x8 19
21
24
23
FR1Z0050.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
11B PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 2 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 2 11B
1 ***
E 2 334Y3190A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3
FR1Z0051.EPS E 3 334Y3191A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
D 4 322SF050 軸受 Bearing WBC8-14ZZA
D 5 360N0343 ハウジング Housing 8
D 6 388N2418 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4
3 E 8 334Y3192A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
3
2
8
5
6
7
4
4
5
6
4 7
5
4 6
5 7
6
7
FR1Z0052.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
11C PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 3 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 3 11C
D 1 118SX164 モータ Motor 2 MB1, 3

D 2 305N0014A ナット Nut 2
FR1Z0053.EPS D 3 118SX162 モータ Motor 1 MB2
E 5 319N2940 軸 Shaft 3
D 6 322SF017 軸受 Bearing 6 WA676ZZA
D 7 324N3098A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 3
D 8 322SF050 軸受 Bearing 10 WBC8-14ZZA
1
D 9 388N2418 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 5
2-A4x10 ハウジング
D 10 360N0343 Housing 8
D 11 324N3038C タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 5
D 12 323S3273 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 666-D3M-9
4 2
E 13 319N3364 軸 Shaft 1
E4
2 D 15 324N3095A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
5 D 16 323S3308 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 210-3M-9
6 8 2-A4x10
7 9 D 17 323S3224 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 276-3M-9
6 ハウジング
10 D 18 360N0127C Housing 2
BR4x30 8 1
11 9 D 19 323S3297 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 564-D3M-9
2-A4x10
10
11
E6 13
14
E6 15
14 E6
12
BR4x25 E6 18
16 E6 9
BR4x30 5 8
17 8
6 11 9
E4 4
7 10
6
11
E6 E4
BR4x30
4
5
6
7
6 8
9
E6 10
11
19 FR1Z0054.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
11D PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 4 PATH CHANGEOVER UNIT 4 11D

FR1Z0055.EPS D 3 363N1855A ガイド Guide 2
E 4 345N1345 遮板 Cover 1
3
D 6 113Y1038 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 3 SB1, 2, 3
2 3-BR4x20
E 8 313N1053 ステー Stay 1
2-BR4x20
2-BR4x20
2 3 E 10 319N3431 軸 Shaft 14
3-BR4x20
D 11 322SY231 ころがり軸受 Rolling Bearing 14
1 BR4x20
2-BR4x20
2
2-BR4x20 2
1
2-BR4x20
2-B3x6
A
Z
A A 5
A
7
6
A
A 2-A3x6
BR4x10 2-A3x6
9 7
6
BR4x10
10 8
11 9
BR4x20 11
BR4x20 10 7 2-A3x6
6
DETAIL A FR1Z0056.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
光学部光学部
12 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 12
E 1 319N3509A 軸 Shaft 1
D 2 332N0504 ストッパ Stopper 1
FR1Z0057.EPS C 3.1 124Y0048A LDアセンブリ LD Assembly 1 #2072 or earlier
BR4x12
C 3.2 124Y0053B/C LDアセンブリ LD Assembly 1 #2073 or later
E 4 308Y0007 特殊ネジ Screw 5
CR 5 839Y0028B 光学部 Scanning Optical Unit 1 Without REF.3
C 6 615Y7000A/B ポリゴンアセンブリ Polygonal Mirror Assembly 1
C 7 815Y7004 SYN08Aアセンブリ SYN08A Assembly 1
SW4
3 D 8 382N1014B スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
Q4x12 D 9 382N1120 Sponge Tape 1
2
E 12 138S0219 フィルター Filter 1
4
4
4
BR5x20
9 4
5
4
6
12
2-B3x8
11 10
BR5x20
2-B3x16
6-B3x6
FR4Z0058.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
電装部電装部
13 WIRING UNIT WIRING UNIT 13
CR 1 113Y7087E DRV08B DRV08B 1

FR1Z0059.EPS D 3 382N0961 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2 T8 x W10 x L255
1 DETAIL A DETAIL B D 5 382N1092 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
33 37 D 6 382N1107 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
E 7 356Y0173F ブラケット Bracket 1
3 35 39 D 9 113Y1038 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 2 SH1, 2

2 36 40 D 11 382N1323 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T10 x W25 x L316
2-B3x6
E 12 345N1395 遮板 Cover 1
4 A 11 D 13 382N1324 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 T10 x W25 x L321

12 D 15 119Y1101 ファン Fan 3
7
2-BR4x8 13 E 16 369N0205 ダクト Duct 1
B E 17 379N0097 放熱板 Radiator Plate 1
8-BR4x8
6 14 E 18 379N0098 放熱板 Radiator Plate 1
4-A4x12 15 E 19 356N6104A ブラケット Bracket 1
8 D 20 119Y1110 ファン Fan 1 FANH1
9 2-B3x6
E 21 364S0001 ガード Guard 1
3xB3x6
4-BR4x8
D 23 363S0013 ガイド Guide 8 GR-280S
3x2-B3x20
6-A4x12
17 E 25 352N0435A パネル Panel 1
CR 26 113Y7086F/G SNS08B SNS08B 1
CR 27 113Y1369E/F SCR08C SCR08C 1
9
CR 28 113Y1368G/H/J SCN08C SCN08C 1
2-B3x6 E 29 352N0436 パネル Panel 1
E 32 355N0541E フレーム Frame 1
21 D 35 382N1091 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
20
2-B3x6 E 38 356N6098B ブラケット Bracket 1
24 25 6-B3x6 スポンジテープ
23 26
23 D 40 382N1108 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2
F5 to 10（48V1A）
AT 41 137S1242 ヒューズ Fuse 6 J版以降/
J version or later
2-B3x6
32 6-BR4x8
23 F1 to 4（48V2A）
23 AT 42 137S1245 ヒューズ Fuse 4 J版以降/
J version or later
3-B3x8
31 BR4x8 F1（48V1A）
27, 43
AT 43 137S1242 ヒューズ Fuse 1 F版以降/
F version or later
28, 41, 42
2-B3x6
2-B3x6 29
30 BR4x8
FR1Z0060.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
電源部電源部
14 POWER SUPPLY UNIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT 14
1 BR4x12
D 1 309N0050 座金 Washer 2
E 2 347N0728 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 2.5
FR1Z0061.EPS D 3 119Y0024A ファン Fan 3
D 4 119Y0025 ファン Fan 2
CR 5 125N0106D 電源 Power Supply 1 JPS-7
BR4x12
AT 6 137S1024 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 15A
AT 7 137S1202 ヒューズ Fuse 2 250V 1A
1 ヒューズ
AT 8 137S1203 Fuse 1 250V 2A
AT 9 137S1205 ヒューズ Fuse 2 250V 20A
AT 10 137S1145 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 3.15A
AT 11 137S3037 ヒューズ Fuse 4 250V 6.3A
AT 12 137S1150 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 4A
26 E 13 350N2208A 背面ダクトカバー Cover 1
E 15 369N0190A ダクト Duct 1
E 16 350N2053C カバー Cover 1
E 18 319N3351A 軸 Shaft 2
D 19 322SY063 すべり軸受 Rolling Bearing 2 80F-0808
2 4-B3x30 E 24 356N6084B ブラケット Bracket 1
28
3 E 25 347N0728 スペーサ Spacer 2 φ4 x 2
2 4-B3x30 DETAIL A E 26 356N6692A ブラケット Bracket 1
3
4
13
4-B3x19 4
4-B3x19
25 5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
A
25
14
4-BR4x8
24 15
2-A4x8
21
BR4x8
18 23
19 2-BR4x8 16
22 2-T4x8
20
17
19
18 FR1Z0062.EPS
BR4x8
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
制御部1 制御部1
15A CONTROLLER 1 CONTROLLER 1 15A
2-BR4x8 C 1 113Y7092A TLB 08A TLB 08A 1
E 2 355N7057F フレーム Frame 1
FR1Z0063.EPS E 3 364S0005 ガード Guard 1 109-099C
D 4 119Y0703 ファン Fan 1 FANH4
1 REF.6.1とペア
CR 5.1 113Y1380G MTH08B MTH08B 1 #2109 or earlier
31 /together with REF.6.1
34
CR 5.2 113Y1556A MTH08E MTH08E 1 #5001 or later
32 33
32MW
C 6.1 113Y7015C MMC90A MMC90A 2 REF.5.1とペア #2109 or earlier
35 /together with REF.5.1
36 4 3 C 6.2 113Y1583A DIM08A DIM08A 2 #5001 or later

5,38,39,40,41 E 7 355N7058C フレーム Frame 1
32
BR4x10 2 CR 8.1 113Y7035M/N/P CPU90F CPU90F 1 Optional #**** or earlier
37 CPU90F代替
CR 8.2 113Y1682B LAN90D LAN90D 1 #8004,#8005,
/Substitute for
A #2001 to #2109
2-BR4x8 CPU90F
6
CR 8.3 113Y1584D LAN90B LAN90B 1 Optional #2110 or later
30 C 9 114Y5431204A BOOT ROM BOOT ROM 1 For CPU90F Optional
24,25,26,27,28,29 CR 10.1 113Y7040F/G DMC08A DMC08A 1 Optional

7 CR 10.2 113Y7041G/H HCP08A HCP08A 1 Optional
8 CR 11 113Y7090C XPC08A XPC08A 1
2-B3x6
9 CR 12.1 113Y7038E IMG08B IMG08B 1 Optional
23 CR 12.2 113Y1461E IMG08H IMG08H 1 Optional
10 CR 13 113Y7037G/H IMG08A IMG08A 1 Optional
CR 14 113Y1416C/D BSP08A BSP08A 1
CR 15 113Y7012D/E IMG07B IMG07B 1
CR 16 113Y7034G/H CPU90E CPU90E 1
11
4-BR4x8 C 17 114Y5431101A BOOT ROM BOOT ROM 1 For CPU90E
E 18 316S1190 止め具 Clamp 1 JPG-21G
22 E 19 350N7146C ダクトカバー Cover 1
21
E 20 356N7462G ブラケット Bracket 1
3-BR4x8 12 フレーム
E 21 355N0525D Frame 1
20 E 22 355N0526G フレーム Frame 1
3-BR4x8
D 23 119Y0024A ファン Fan 1
19 2-BR4x10
13 CR 24 125N0099D 電源 Power Supply 1 JPS-3
AT 25 137S1024 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 15A
AT 26 137S1201 ヒューズ Fuse 2 250V 2.5A
AT 27 137S1203 ヒューズ Fuse 2 250V 2A
2-T4x8 14 AT 28 137S1202 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 1A
AT 29 137S1204 ヒューズ Fuse 1 250V 8A
D 30 388N5703A 板バネ Flat Spring 6
18
＊REF No.8.2(LAN90D)：本ソフトバージョンがA08以降であること
15
＊REF No.8.3(LAN90B)：本ソフトバージョンがA07以降であること
＊REF No.8.2(LAN90D)：The version of software should be updated to A08 or later.
37 ＊REF No.8.3(LAN90B)：The version of software should be updated to A07 or later.
16
42
17
DETAIL A
FR1Z0064.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
制御部1
15A CONTROLLER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. BLANK PAGE
D 31 352N7157J カバー Cover 1
C 32 352N0388 パネル Panel 3
E 33 355N7056 フレーム Frame 1
E 34 316S0094 止め具 Clamp 2
E 35 355N7055G フレーム Frame 1
E 36 352N7156G カバー Cover 1
C 38 898Y0838 MTH08B代替キット HDD kit 1 MTH08E+DIM08A #2109 or earlier
ヒューズ 125V 2A ,For

AT 39 137S1086 Fuse 1 #5001 or later
MTH08E
ヒューズ 125V 4A, For

AT 40 137S1088 Fuse 1 #5001 or later
MTH08E
ヒューズ 125V 5A ,For

AT 41 137S1090 Fuse 1 #5001 or later
MTH08E
C 42.1 114Y5431025A FD (QA-WS接続) FD 1
C 42.2 114Y5433004A FD (CSL) FD 1 For console display
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
制御部2 制御部2
15B CONTROLLER 2 CONTROLLER 2 15B
E 1 352N7155G パネル Panel 1
E 2.1 356N7461E ブラケット Bracket 1 #2109 or earlier

FR1Z0063.EPS
E 2.2 356N9024 ブラケット Bracket 1 For 850Y0112/0117 #2110 or later

YD-702-6839D-
#2109 or earlier D 3 850S0088/0089 FDD FDD 1
021051C
2-BR4x8 C 4.1 114Y5431001A FD (System) FD (System) 1 For Formatting
C 4.2 114Y5431002A FD (System) FD (System) 1 For Installation
5.1 4.1 C 4.3 114Y5434003A FD (System) FD (System) 1 For Data
1 4.2 WED4550-003/
4.3 D 5.1 850S0080/0085 HDD HDD 1 WED9100-003 #2109 or earlier
(9.1GB)
SEAGATE:
D 5.2 850Y0112 HDD HDD 1 #2110 to #5000
ST318416N
HITACHI DK32-DJ-
D 5.3 850Y0117 HDD HDD 1 #5001 or later
3 18MW
E 6 356N8875B ブラケット Bracket 1 For 850Y0112/0117 #2110 or later
2.1
D 7 119Y0054A ファン Fan 1 For 850Y0112/0117 #2110 or later
D 8 364S0006 ガード Guard 1 For 850Y0112/0117 #2110 or later
E 9.1 898Y0817 HDD取付キット HDD kit 1 MTH08E+DIM08A #2110 to #5000

#2110 to #5000
E 9.2 898Y0862 HDD取付キット HDD kit 1 For 850Y0117
#5001 or later
without HDD
9.1 6 E 10 356N9020 ブラケット Bracket 1 For 850Y0117 #5001 or later
2-BR4x8
7 C 11 113Y1661A CNN08B CNN08B 1 For 850Y0117 #5001 or later
8
5.2 4.1
4.2
2-BR4x35 4.3
2.2
#5001 or later
2-T4x8
2-BR4x8
6
7 11
9.2 10
8
4.1
5.3
4.2
2-BR4x35
4.3
2.2
FR1Z0072.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション1（カセッテホルダーキット）オプション1（カセッテホルダーキット）
16A OPTION 1(CASSETTE HOLDER KIT) OPTION 1(CASSETTE HOLDER KIT) 16A
D 2 316S3100 キャッチ Catch 1
E 3 350Y1351A アゴ当てカバーアセンブリ Cover Assembly 1
1
E 8 355N0538A フレーム Frame 1
D 9 386S0077 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4
3 2
4 E 10 346N1060 補助板 Reinforcement 1
6 W4
E 11 306S1003008 タッピンネジ Screw 4 M3 x 8 sus
SW4
2-Na4 C 12 114Y5431027A FD FD 1 Before A01
E 13 350N2167C カバー Cover 1
5
13
6
14
11
10
11
7
9
12
8
FR1Z0065.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション2（取手キット）オプション2（取手キット）
16B OPTION 2(HANDLE KIT) OPTION 2(HANDLE KIT) 16B
D 1 340N0157C 取手 Handle 1
E 2 319N3555 軸 Shaft 2
E 3 319N3354A 軸 Shaft 2
D 4 340N0156C 取手 Handle 1
E 8 316N0344B 止め具 Clamp 1
5
D 11 388N5272C 板バネ Flat Spring 1
D 12 128Y0265D マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 2 MSH10, 11
D 13 388N5271B 板バネ Flat Spring 1
A 6 E 15 356N6607C ブラケット Bracket 1
E 16 319N3353B 軸 Shaft 2
E 17 319N3352B 軸 Shaft 2
E 18 362N0495A 受 Support 2
3
E 19 136Y6760C ケーブル Cable 1
1
7 B
3
2
C DETAIL C
4
DETAIL A DETAIL B
16
9 10
13 15
12
17
14
11
18
12
FR1Z0066.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション3（生殖腺保護具キット）オプション3（生殖腺保護具キット）
16C OPTION 3(GENITAL GLAND PROTECTOR) OPTION 3(GENITAL GLAND PROTECTOR) 16C
D 1 305N0052 ナット Nut 2
E 2 356Y0244 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 4 309N0063A 座金 Washer 1
D 5 309N0062 座金 Washer 9
E 6 341N0912A アーム Arm 2
D 8 350N2137B カバー Cover 1
E 9 388N2431B 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1
E 10 356N6523G ブラケット Bracket 1
E 14 341Y0313 アーム Arm 1
E 15 341N0914F アーム Arm 1
E 16 319N0913B 軸 Shaft 1
E 18 341Y0314 アーム Arm 1
E 19 341N0916B アーム Arm 1
E 20 317N1050B キャップ Cap 1
B5x12 E 21 364N0090 ガード Guard 1
3 D 22 350N2138B カバー Cover 1
WP4x6 4
(3B*) 2 5 Q8x35
SW8 E 24 356N6487D ブラケット Bracket 1
1 Q8x35 E 25 319N3683 軸 Shaft 1
SW8 8
5 7 E 26 319N3355A 軸 Shaft 1
5
5 E 28 319N3584C 軸 Shaft 1
30
5 2-T4x16 D 29 309N0061A 座金 Washer 1
29 5 D 30 309N0060 座金 Washer 1
9 5 Q8x35
7 5 SW8 31 ***
28 Q8x35 7
6 5 32 ***
26 SW8
2-T4x16 E 33 317N1058 キャップ Cap 2
27 10
W6 BR5x25 ＊参考：図中 (3B) はネジ固定剤です。/"3B" indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
SW6 BR5x8(10) 11
BR4x20 1
7 12
22
25 14
23 12
W8 15
24 11
12 SW6 W8
Na6(3B*)
13 WP4x16
21 W4
WP6x5(3B*) (3B*)
20 R4x10(3B*)
16
17
33 12
19 18
WP4x8(3B*)
12
11
SW6 12
Na6(3B*)
13
WP6x5(3B*)
33
FR4Z0067.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション4（フォトタイマ取付キット）オプション4（フォトタイマ取付キット）
16D OPTION 4(PHOTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) OPTION 4(PHOTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) 16D
E 2 316N0338A 止め具 Clamp 4
2 1
FR1Z0068.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション5 オプション5
16E OPTION 5 OPTION 5 16E
D 1.1 112Y0007 ポテンショメータ Potentiometer 1 TOSHIBA

D 1.2 112Y0008A ポテンショメータ Potentiometer 1 HITACHI
4 D 1.3 112Y0009A ポテンショメータ Potentiometer 1 SHIMADZU
3 E 3 320N0022A 継手 Joint 1
E 5 319N3515A 軸 Shaft 1
6 D 6 324N3104 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1

5 E 8 401N0134 押え板 Plate 1
E6
1 D 10 324N3041E タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
2-BR4x8 7 E 11 319N3516A 軸 Shaft 1
E 13 136Y7206C ケーブル Cable 1
BR4x8 2-BR4x8
8
12
2-BR4x8
2-B4x10
E5
10
BR4x8 11
FR1Z0069.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション6（電動つかまり棒）オプション6（電動つかまり棒）
16F OPTION 6(GRIP HANDLE) OPTION 6(GRIP HANDLE) 16F
E 1 350N7150D カバー Cover 1
D 2 845Y0069 パネル Panel 1 Japan
E 3 350Y1428 カバー Cover 1 Include REF.4.1
E 4.1 405N2554 銘板 Label 1 Japanese, English
E 4.2 405N2555 銘板 Label 1 German, French, etc.
E 4.3 405N2556 銘板 Label 1 Swedish, etc.

E 5 304S3761220 ボルト Bolt 2 M2 x 3
1 E 6 309S0227612 バネ座金 Spring Washer 2 M12
E 7 309S0127612 平座金 Washer 2 M12
E 8 405N2553 銘板 Label 1
DETAIL A E 9 340N0155A 取手 Grip Handle 1
D 10 845Y0069 パネル Panel 1
2 E 11 118YX215 モータ Motor 1
D 12 323N0036 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1
D 13 128N0061 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 2
3
2
4
5
6
7
5
6
7 9
C
10
13
11
DETAIL C
D
13
B
12
DETAIL D DETAIL B
FR1Z0070.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション7 オプション7
16G OPTION 7 OPTION 7 16G
D 1 128Y0266 フットスイッチ Foot Switch 1 For Japan
D 2 128Y0270 フットスイッチ Foot Switch 1 For Overseas
FR1Z0071.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
オプション8（COMETフォトタイマー取付）オプション8（COMETフォトタイマー取付）
16H OPTION 8(COMET PHOTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) OPTION 8(COMET PHOTOTIMER ATTACHMENT KIT) 16H
海外のみ / For Overseas E 1 350Y1275A カバー Cover 2
E 2 350Y1274F/G カバー Cover 1
E 10 382N1416 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1
E 11 363N2390 ガイド Guide 2
3
1
2
8 E 15 355N0658 フレーム Frame 1
5 E 16 316N0338A 止め具 Clamp 2
E 22 347S0321 スペーサ Spacer 4
20
7 22
A
16 21
19
17 18
14
12
11
A
15
23
13
FR4Z0080.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
ケーブル（1/3）ケーブル（2/3）
17 CABLE（1/3） CABLE（2/3） 17
CONNECTION CONNECTION
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
DIAGRAM DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y5031A ケーブル Cable 1 E 51 136Y6730A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9, 9/9
E 2 136Y6599B ケーブル Cable 1 Remote 5m 2/9 E 52 136Y6731A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9, 7/9
E 3 136Y6600B ケーブル Cable 1 Remote 15m 2/9 E 53 136Y6732A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9
E 5 136Y6602B ケーブル Cable 1 Remote 50m 2/9 E 55 136Y6734B ケーブル Cable 1 6/9
E 7 136Y6660B ケーブル Cable 1 6/9 E 57 136Y6736B ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 8 136Y6661B ケーブル Cable 1 6/9 E 58 136Y6737A ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 9 136Y6662A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9 E 59 136Y6738A ケーブル Cable 1 7/9, 9/9
E 11 136Y6671A ケーブル Cable 1 4/9 E 61 136Y6740A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 12 136Y6673C ケーブル Cable 1 2/9 E 62 136Y6741A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 13 136Y6675A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9 E 63 136Y6742C ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 17 136Y6680A ケーブル Cable 1 7/9 E 67 136Y6746B ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 9/9
E 26 136Y6705A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9 E 76 136Y7142D ケーブル Cable 1 6/9
E 29 136Y6708A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9 E 79 136Y7146B ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 32 136Y6711A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 5/9 E 82 136Y7150A ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 33 136Y6712A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 5/9 E 83 136Y7151C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 34 136Y6713A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 5/9 E 84 136Y7154B ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 35 136Y6714A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 5/9 E 85 136Y7155D ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 36 136Y6715B ケーブル Cable 1 3/9, 5/9 E 86 136Y7156B ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 43 136Y6722B ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 6/9 E 93 136Y7165A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 46 136Y6725E ケーブル Cable 1 5/9 E 96 136Y7173A ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 47 136Y6726B ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 9/9 E 97 136Y7177C ケーブル Cable 1 AC Cable 15m 2/9
E 48 136Y6727A ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 7/9 E 98 136Y7178C ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 49 136Y6728A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9, 7/9 E 99 136Y7179C ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 4/9
E 50 136Y6729A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9, 7/9 E 100 136Y7180E ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 3/9
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
ケーブル（3/3）
17 CABLE（3/3）
CONNECTION
BLANK PAGE
DIAGRAM
E 101 136Y7181E ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 3/9
E 102 136Y7182C ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 4/9
E 103 136Y7183D ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 4/9
E 104 136Y7189C ケーブル Cable 1 2/9, 5/9
E 105 136Y7190D ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 106 136Y7191A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 107 136Y7192B ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 108 136Y7193A ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 109 136Y7194B ケーブル Cable 1 2/9
E 110.1 136Y7197A ケーブル Cable 1 #2109 or earlier 3/9
E 110.2 136Y8638A ケーブル Cable 1 #2110 or later 3/9
E 111.1 136Y7198A ケーブル Cable 1 #2109 or earlier 3/9
E 111.2 136Y8639A ケーブル Cable 1 #2110 or later 3/9
E 112 136Y7199A ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 113 136Y7200A ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 114 136Y7201B ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 115 136Y7202C ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 116 136Y7203B ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 117 136Y7204A ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 118 136Y7205A ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 119 136Y7209B ケーブル Cable 1 4/9
E 120 136Y7212C ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 6/9
E 121 136Y7217C ケーブル Cable 1 5/9, 9/9
E 122 136Y7221C ケーブル Cable 1 6/9, 8/9
E 123 136Y7234C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9, 8/9
E 124 136Y7235C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9, 8/9
E 125 136Y7236A ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 126 136Y7237A ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 127 136Y7238A ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 128 136Y7243B ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 129 136Y7244B ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 130 136Y7249E ケーブル Cable 1 5/9
E 131 136Y8161A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 132 136Y8162B ケーブル Cable 1 6/9
E 133 136Y8163A ケーブル Cable 1 6/9
E 134 136Y8167A ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 135 136Y8047B ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 136 136Y7170B ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
Included in Socket
E 137 136Y6663B ケーブル Cable 1 Assembly(Part 6/9
NO.120Y0077A)
Included in Socket
E 138 136Y7145B ケーブル Cable 1 Assembly(Part 6/9
NO.120Y0076A)
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
TB1
AC OUT1 136Y6711 5 (AC200V)
分電盤 1 AC200V-L (JPS I/F) 3
1
003-352-03
(AC200V) 3 136Y6684 2 136Y7178 2 AC200V-N (AC200V)
136Y7177 1 1 FGG202 (CNH51経由JPS-7-ACIN1)
3 E
A
1 FGG23 (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) A
1
E E (JPS-3近傍の筐体)
(昇降部床面) (JPS-3近傍の筐体) JPS-3 CN15 136Y6712 5 (JPS I/F)
N.C FG
03.10.2003 FM3950
(JPS I/F) 3
海外仕様 125N009
9 FGG203 (CNH52経由JPS-7-CN4)
18
TB2
TB1 (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
1 L-COM
分電盤 1 L
1 2 L-240 CN7 136Y6713 5 (SWT08B)
(AC200∼240V) 3 2 N (SWT08B)
1 3 L-230 8
3 E (撮影部SW)
1 4 L-220 FGG204 (CNH53,59経由SWT08B-CN1)
136Y6673
5 L-208 (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
B FG B
1 6 L-200
CN11 136Y6714 5 (干渉防止)
E (MSH5) 2
(昇降部床面)
CN1 FGG205 (CNH54経由MSH5)
(EXTSW-H/L) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
CNH21
CN2 CN12 136Y7189 5 (患者保護)
(POW-H/L) (MSH1∼4) 2 136Y6675 2
FGG206 (CNH55経由MSH1∼4)
4 136Y7179 CN3 1
(CPU I/F) 1 (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
10 136Y6676
CNH22
C (CPU90E-CN6) FGG49 C
CN2
(JPS-3近傍の筐体)
接続図
136Y7137 2 SWT08B
136Y7138 136Y7190 FGG211 FGG212
136Y7139 (JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部正面柱) 113Y1424
136Y7140 CN6 CN1
(SWT08B)

136Y7141 8
IDT-IV (昇降部)
FGG207 FGG208
REMOT1 CN4
(IDT I/F) (JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部正面柱)
2
(J-IR SLAVE)
1
136Y7191
FGG210 CNMSH6/7 COM MSH6 NC
D (IDT筐体) CN10 D
(MSH6/7) 4 4 2
136Y6599
CR-IR343 136Y6600 COM MSH7 NC
136Y6601
CR-IR344 136Y6602
136Y6603 2
JPS-3 ( 2台目) 136Y7192
CNMH2
CN4 CN5 CN14 MH2
125N0099 2 (BRS I/F) (MH2) 5 5
FGG24 FGG25
捕まり棒(オプション) 340Y0031
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (JPS-3近傍の筐体)
E E
136Y7193
CN2 COM MSH8 NC
CN9
(MSH8/9) 4 4 2
3 136Y7180 TB3 COM MSH9 NC
4 (+5V)
(MTH08B-TB1) FGG27 2
(ﾗｯｸ床面) 136Y7194
CN1
3 136Y7181 DCOUT1 CN13 MH1
(+12V) (MH1)
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
F 4 9 3 3 F
(SVH1)
(MTH08B-CN27) FGG28 (SVH2) CN3
(ﾗｯｸ床面) (FANH5) SVH1
4 4 2
4 136Y7182 DCOUT2
4 (+5V/+24V)
SVH2
(PNL08A-CN1) FGG29
2
CN4
4 136Y7183 DCOUT3 FAN
(+5Vp) H5
2 2 2
G (PNL08B-CN101) FGG201 G
(昇降ﾕﾆｯﾄ) 831N0002
136Y6693
COM ESH1 NC
ACOUT2
(ESH1) 2
昇降ﾌｯﾄｽｲｯﾁ 128S0664
CN8
128Y0266(国内仕様) 4 (ﾌｯﾄSW)
128Y0270(海外仕様) 機種 5434 ユニット -
FGG26
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) 名称接続図補助名称 BRS-BD
H
(ｵﾌﾟｼｮﾝ) 対応コード - H
コード Rev.
ケーブルコードについて Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 94
の表示なき部分は H（筐体部）である 2
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0072EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MMC90A CN16 CN2 CPU90F ETH90F

CN17
003-352-03
LAN (DMS-LAN)/(IDT-LAN)
113Y7015 CN15 CN1 113Y7035
DIM08A 113Y7036
A CN17 857Y0357 A
113Y1583 MTH08B
MMC90A
CN18
03.10.2003 FM3950
113Y1380 CN14 CN2 DMC08AorHCP08A MTH08B:#2109 or earlier
113Y7015 CN3 (DMS/HIC)
CN18 MTH08E:#5001 or later
CN13 CN1 113Y7040
113Y7041
MTH08E LAN90B:#2110 or later
113Y1556 CN19 CN12 CN2 XPC08A 4 LAN90D:#8004, #8005,
B B
CN11 CN1 113Y7090 #2001 to #2109
Subtitute for
CPU90F
(制御ﾊﾞｽ) 5 136Y6715 CN20 CN10 CN2 IMG08B/(H)
52 CN3
(CNH56経由SCN08C-CN7) FGG36 FGG32 CN9 CN1
113Y7038
(昇降部床面) (ﾗｯｸ近傍の筐体) (113Y1461)
C C
CN21 CN8 CN2 IMG08A
CN3 (LP)
CN7 CN1 113Y7037

CN23 CN3 136Y6719 5 (表画像ﾊﾞｽ)
CN6 CN2
40
BSP08A FGG33 FGG37 (CNH57経由SCN08C-CN8)
D
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部床面) D
113Y1416
CN4 136Y6720 5 (裏画像ﾊﾞｽ)
CN26 50
FGG300 FGG301 (CNH508経由SCR08C-CN6)
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部床面)
CN5 CN1
CN5 136Y6721 5 (BSP電源)
2
2 136Y7180 TB1 FGG302 FGG303 (CNH509経由SCR08C-CN3)
4 (+5V) (JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部床面)
E E
(JPS-3-TB3) 1 CN4 CN2 IMG07B
FGG31
(ﾗｯｸ天板) CN3 CN1 113Y7012
2 136Y7181 CN27 CN2 CN2 CPU90E 4

4 (+12V)
(JPS-3-DCOUT1) CN1 CN1 113Y7034
857Y0361
F F
136Y7197/8638
CN22 CNJ1
119Y0054 FAN CN28
H10 (+12V) 50 HDD
2 136Y7198/8639
CN25 CNJ2
接続図
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
G 119Y0703 FAN CN29 G

H4 (+12V)
2
CN50 136Y6718 5 (電圧降下防止)
4
FGG34 FGG35 (CNH501経由SCN08C-CN12)
(ﾗｯｸ近傍の筐体) (昇降部床面)
機種 5434 ユニット -
名称接続図補助名称 BRS-BD
H 対応コード - H
18
コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 95
3
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0073.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(ｵﾌﾟｼｮﾝ)
136Y7199 136Y7206 (ﾎﾟﾃﾝｼｮﾒｰﾀ)
003-352-03
CNH31
A
CN3 CN3 CN1 112Y0007 A
50 50 3 3 112Y0008
TLB08A 112Y0009
136Y7200
03.10.2003 FM3950
113Y7092
XPC08A 3 CN4 CN4 CN2 136Y6716 5 (ﾌﾞｯｷｰ)
18
34 34 6
113Y7090 FGG401 (CNH58経由SNS08B-CN10)
(昇降部床面)
136Y6717
136Y7201
B TB1 (X線ｺﾝﾄﾛｰﾗ) B
CN5 CN102
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 FGG504 FGG505
4
TB2 (X線ｺﾝﾄﾛｰﾗ) (昇降部床面) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
FGG43 FGG44 (READY) (CALL ) (ERROR) (+5V表示)
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部正面柱)
TB3 (X線ｺﾝﾄﾛｰﾗ)
PNL08B
2 136Y7183 CN101 CN3 TB4 (X線ｺﾝﾄﾛｰﾗ)
2 113Y1393
(JPS-3-DCOUT3) FGG403
(昇降部正面柱)
C C
接続図
136Y7202
CN6 CN3
32 32

FGG45 FGG46 PNL08A
136Y7203
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部正面柱)
CN7 CN2 113Y7088
16 16
FGG47 FGG48
D
(JPS-3近傍の筐体) (昇降部正面柱) D
2 136Y7182 CN1
4
(JPS-3-DCOUT2) FGG402
(昇降部正面柱)
136Y7209
FGG41 FGG42
CN3 (MODEM) (昇降部正面柱) (ﾊﾟﾈﾙｹｰｽ)
E E
VGA90E CN4 (EXT VGA I/F)
113Y7083
CN7 (CRT I/F)
CN19 (CRT)
CN1
F F
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
CN3 CN5 (IDT I/F)
CN6 136Y7179 2
10
(JPS-3-CN3)
CN9 (NET-W I/F)
CPU90E 3 136Y6671
Service
113Y7034 CN10 Terminal
G (SERVICE) G
6 4 8 Connecter
FGG404 FGG405
CN11 (制御部床面) (FDD/HDDﾌﾞﾗｹｯﾄ)
CN15 (BDM I/F)

136Y7204
CN8 CNJ1 機種 5434 ユニット -
34 FDD 名称補助名称
136Y7205 接続図 BRS-BD
H 850S0086 対応コード - H
CN18 CNJ2
2 コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 96
4
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0074.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(ﾀﾞｸﾄ内の配線)
136Y6724
CNH54 COM MSH5 NC
(干渉防止) 2 136Y6714
003-352-03
128S0809
2 FGG54 2 FGG503 2
A (JPS-3-CN11) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) (背面ｹｰﾌﾞﾙﾌﾞﾗｹｯﾄ) A
136Y6725
CNH55 COM MSH2 NC
1
03.10.2003 FM3950
(患者保護) 2 136Y7189
128S0490
2 FGG55
1
(CNH21経由JPS-3-CN12) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) COM MSH1 NC
CNH51 128S0490
(AC200V) 2 136Y6711 136Y6722 6
136Y6677 136Y7249
3 FGG51 2 CNH507 CNH50 CNH50 COM MSH3 NC
(JPS-7-AC IN1) ※1
(JPS-3-AC OUT1) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) FGG59 1
B 128S0490 B
(ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
※2
CNH52 COM MSH4 NC
(JPS I/F) 2 136Y6712 136Y7212 6
128S0490
3 FGG52 3
(JPS-7-CN4)
(JPS-3-CN15) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
※１：標準
CNH56 ※２：ｵﾌﾟｼｮﾝ
(制御ﾊﾞｽ) 3 136Y6715 136Y7217 9
52 FGG56 52 136Y6760 136Y7249
(SCN08C-CN7) CNH50 CNH50
(MTH08B-CN20) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) COM MSH3 NC
CNH57 128S0490
C C
(表画像ﾊﾞｽ) 3 136Y6719 136Y6726 9
40 FGG57 40 COM MSH4 NC
(SCN08C-CN8)
(BSP08A-CN3) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) 128S0490
CNH58
(ﾌﾞｯｷｰ) 4 136Y6716 136Y6727 7

CNH502 MSH10
6 FGG58 6 COM NC
(SNS08B-CN10)
(TLB08A-CN2) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) 128Y0265
CNH501 2
CNH503
(電圧降下防止) 3 136Y6718 136Y6744 9 COM MSH11 NC
4 FGG501 4 128Y0265
D
(SCN08C-CN12) 2 D
(MTH08B-CN50) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
CNH508
(裏画像ﾊﾞｽ) 3 136Y6720 136Y6746 9
50 FGG510 50
(SCR08C-CN6)
(BSP08A-CN4) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) 136Y6678 136Y6757
CNH505 CNH506
CNH509 2
CN2
(BSP電源) 3 136Y6721 136Y6749 9
2 SWT08B
2 FGG511 2
(SCR08C-CN3) FGG506
(BSP08ACN5) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体)
136Y6723 (正面右側の筐体) 136Y6758 113Y1424
CNH53 CNH59
E (SWT08B) 2 136Y6713 CN1 E
8 FGG53 8 FGG502 8
(JPS-3-CN7) (ﾀﾞｸﾄ近傍の筐体) (正面右側の筐体)
(撮影部) (Aut)
A フォトタイマーについてツインフォトタイマー
（オプション） CNPOT
PMBOX 3 フォトタイマー
CNPOT （東芝）
F
PMBOX 3 F
(Aut)
シングルフォトタイマー CNPOT
（オプション） (撮影部) (Aut)
CNPOT 3
フォトタイマー ※フォトタイマーは (選択メーカの、中継線を使用） CNPOT フォトタイマー
PMBOX 3 （東芝）東芝、島津、日立、のいづれかを選択し（島津）
選択メーカの、中継線を接続する。 3
CNPOT
(Aut)
接続図
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
※フォトタイマーは CNPOT 3
東芝、島津、日立、のいづれかを選択しフォトタイマー
選択メーカの、中継線を接続する。 3 （島津）
G (選択メーカの、中継線を使用） CNPOT G
CNPOT 3 フォトタイマー
フォトタイマー CNPOT （日立）
3 （日立）
1 3
FGA3
1
(Aut筐体) FGA3
(Aut筐体)
フォトタイマーの配線について名称接続図補助名称 BRS-BD
１：フォトタイマーの配線については、現地サービスマンが行う。
18
２：フォトタイマーの配線は、選択メーカの中継線を使用。コード Rev.

Z24Y0005434 6
（）頁
SP - 97
5
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0075.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
機内 UNIT
CABLE HARNESS UNIT WIRINGS
136Y6733 136Y7142 TSWF1
003-352-03
CNF4 F TSWF1COM TSWF1NC
CN1 115S0094
A
5 136Y6722 AC IN1 A
(AC200V) 4 2 2 感熱ｽｲｯﾁ
2 1
(CNH51経由JPS-3-ACOUT1) 1 TSWF3
TSWF3COM TSWF3NC
JPS-7 115S0094
03.10.2003 FM3950
感熱ｽｲｯﾁ
125N0106
18
136Y6660 TSWF6
CNF8 F TSWF6COM TSWF6NC
5 136Y7212 CN4 115S0095
3 (JPS I/F) 2 2 2 感熱ｽｲｯﾁ
(CNH52経由JPS-3-CN15)
B B
7 136Y6728 CN6
(FIV I/F) 136Y6734 136Y7143 TSWF2
24 CNF5 F TSWF2COM TSWF2NO
(SNS08B-CN6,7)
DCOUT8 115S0116
(+24V) 4 2 2 2 温調ｽｲｯﾁ
1 136Y7144
1 CNF6 F CNFANF1
FAN 119Y1101
F1
2 2 2
CNFANF2
FAN 119Y1101
8 136Y7221 DCOUT1 F2
(+24V) 2 2
C 8 CNFANF3 C
(DRV08B-CN1) FAN 119Y1101
接続図
F3
2 2
CNFANF4
FAN 119Y1101
7 136Y6729 DCOUT2 F4
2 2

4 (+5V)
(SNS08B-CN4) 136Y6661 TSWF8
CNF9 F TSWF8COM TSWF8NO
115S0069
JPS-7 136Y8162
DCOUT3 2 2 2 2 温調ｽｲｯﾁ
136Y6664
9 136Y6730 DCOUT3 CNH60 H CNFANH6
8 8 8 (+5V/+-15V/+24V) FAN 119Y1101
D (SCN08C-CN9) H6 D
4 4 2 2
2 CNFANH7
FGH3 FAN 119Y1101
H7
(JPS-7近傍の筐体) 2 2
CNFANH8
FAN 119Y1101
JPS-7 136Y8163 H8
DCOUT4 2 2
9 136Y6747 DCOUT4 136Y6735 136Y7145
(+15V) CNF7 F
2 2 2
(CNZ16経由PHV08C-CN5) ACOUT1
(L1∼4) 12 11 10 9 8
1 12 12
136Y6663
E FGH4 136Y6751 1 1 1 1 8 E
CNF11 F
ACOUT2 1 TN
(L5∼8) 12 11 10 9 8 LAMP1
12 2
7 136Y6731 DCOUT5 1 1 1 1 8 3
4 (+15V+5V) 4 123S0027
(CNZ3経由MZ1-CN1) 1 TN
2 LAMP5
3 1 TN
4 123S0028 2 LAMP2
3
123S0027
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
F 4 F
1 TN
2 LAMP6
136Y6732
CNFANH1 3 1 TN
119Y1110 FAN DCOUT6 4 123S0028 2 LAMP3
H1 (+24V)
2 2 3
4 123S0027
1 TN
2 LAMP7
3 1 TN
4 123S0028 2 LAMP4
G 3 G
4 123S0027
1 TN
2 LAMP8
3
4 123S0028
コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 98
6
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0076.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
機内 UNIT
24 136Y6736 136Y7146
003-352-03
(a) (26) CNA1 A
SA1 104N0043
A
CN5 A
12 12 3
24 (4)
(b) (26) SA2 104N0044
3
03.10.2003 FM3950
(4)
SNS08B SA3 104N0044
3
113Y7086 136Y7147 (4)
CNB1 B
SB1 113Y1038
12 12 4
SB2 113Y1038
B B
4
SB3 113Y1038
4
136Y7148
CNF1 F
SF1 113Y1038
4 4 136Y7150 4
CND1 D
SD1 113Y1039
8 8 4
C C
SD2 104N0044
3
136Y6680 136Y7173 (4)
CNZ1 Z CNE1 E
SE1 113Y1039
12 12 4 4

SZ2 104N0044
3
CN9 (4)
(予備) SZ3 113Y1038
4
D TSWF5 D
136Y6745 136Y7151
CNF2 F
COM NO
CN11
(TSWF5) 115S0117
2 2 2 2
CN12
(TSWF5) 2
136Y6737 136Y6681
CNZ2 Z
E E
CN8 CN2 MZ1
(MZ1) 16 14 8
CN3
(FFM)
136Y6682
CNZ3 Z 6 118YX700
6 136Y6731 CN1
4 4 4 (+15V/+5V)
(JPS-7-DCOUT5)
CN1 136Y6738 9
F (HOST) F
50
(CNH91経由SCR08C-CN4)
CN2 136Y7234 8
(DRV I/F1) 60
(DRV08B-CN2)
CN3 136Y7235 8
接続図
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
(DRV I/F2) 40
(DRV08B-CN3)
G CN4 136Y6729 6 G
(+5V) 4
(JPS-7 DCOUT2)
CN6 136Y6728 6
(FIV I/F1) 12 24
(JPS-7-CN6)
CN7 機種ユニット
(FIV I/F2) 5434 -
12
CN10 136Y6727 5
18
(ﾌﾞｯｷｰ) 6
(CNH58経由TLB08A-CN2) コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 99
7
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0077.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
機内 UNIT
136Y7236 136Y7154
003-352-03
CNA2 A CNMA1
CN5 MA1 118SX164
A 6 6 6 6 A
136Y7237 136Y7155
CNA3 A CNMA2
03.10.2003 FM3950
DRV08B CN6 MA2 118SX164
18
12 12 6 6
113Y7087 CNMA3
136Y7156
MA3 118YX180
6 6
黒黒
FGA1 FGA2
B B
(Aﾕﾆｯﾄ側板) (トレイ)
136Y7157
B CNMB1
CN7 MB1 118SX164
12 6 6
CNMB3
MB3 118SX164
6 6
C C
接続図
136Y7158
B CNMB2
CN8 MB2 118SX162
6 6 6

136Y7238 136Y7159 136Y7160
CND2 D CND3 CNMD1
CN9 MD1 118SX162
6 24 12 12 6 6 6 6
D CNMD2 D
CN10 MD2 118SX162

6 6 6 6
136Y7161
CNF3 F CNMF1
CN11 MF1 118SX164
6 6 6 6 6
136Y7172 136Y6683
E CNZ4 Z CNZ5 CNMZ2 E
CN12 MZ2 118SX164

6 6 6 6 6 6
CN4
(未使用)
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
F F
CN1 - 136Y7221 6
(+24V) 8
(JPS-7-DCOUT1)
CN2 - 136Y7234 7
(SNS I/F1) 60
(SNS08B-CN2)
CN3 - 136Y7235 7
G (SNS I/F2) G
40
(SNS08B-CN3)
コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 100
8
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0078.EPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
機内 UNIT
003-352-03
136Y7243 136Y6702
CNZ11 Z
A
CN4 SZ1 (SED08C) A
3 3
113Y1373
SCN08C
03.10.2003 FM3950
113Y1368
136Y7174
LD1 LDA08B LD1
CN2
3 3 113Y1357 3 124N0016
LDD08C
B B
136Y7244 136Y7164 113Y1412 136Y7175
CNZ12 Z LD2 LDA08B LD2
5 136Y7217 - CN7 CN1 CN1 CN3
52 26 26 3 3 113Y1357 3 124N0016
(CNH56経由MTH08B-CN20)
136Y7168
CN1 PDA08A
5 136Y6726 - CN8 CN4
40 3 113Y1338
(CNH57経由BSP08A-CN3)
C C
136Y7171
5 136Y6744 - CN12
136Y6741 136Y7165 136Y7166
4 CNZ13 Z CNZ14 SYN08A
(CNH501経由MTH08B-CN50)
CN2 CN1
FGZ1 FGZ2

10 10 10 113Y1327 (ｽｷｬﾅ部台) (副走査側板)
136Y7170
D 136Y6742 136Y6703 FGZ4 D

CNZ15 Z FGZ3
POLDRV POL (光学定盤ｶﾊﾞｰ)
CN3 CN1 (副走査側板)
6 6 16
FGZ6
1
(副走査中継ﾌﾞﾗｹｯﾄ) 615Y7000
(ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ)
1
FGZ8 FGZ7 136Y8047
(副走査中継ﾌﾞﾗｹｯﾄ)
E 136Y6662 (副走査側板) E
6 136Y6730 - CN9 CN6 CN2

8 (+5V/+-15V/+24) 2 2
(JPS-7-DCOUT3) 136Y6739 136Y6704 136Y6707 PMT08C 136Y8167
CNZ17 Z
黒
CN5 CN1 CN2 CN1 113Y1374
.
34 34 20 136Y6708 FGZ12
PHV08C FGZ11
(基板止めﾈｼﾞ)
136Y6705 CN6 CN4 ( スキャナ筐体 )
CNZ16 Z
2
6 136Y6747 - CN5 113Y1375
2 2
F (JPS-7-DCOUT4) F
136Y6709
CN3 CN1
136Y6750 136Y6706 20 136Y6710 PMR08C 136Y8161
CNZ18 Z
黒
5 136Y6746 - CN6 CN1 CN4 CN7 CN4
.
50 14 14 2 113Y1445 FGZ10
(CNH508経由BSP08A-CN4) 136Y6740 FGZ9
SCR08C (基板止めﾈｼﾞ)
( スキャナ筐体 )
接続図
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
5 136Y6749 - CN3 CN2 CN2

2 113Y1369 2 2
(CNH509経由BSP08A-CN5)
G G
136Y6743 H
H CNH91 136Y6748
7 136Y6738 - CN4 CN5 SH1 113Y1038
50 50 8 4
(SNS08B-CN1)
SH2 113Y1038
4 機種ユニット
5434 -
18
コード Rev.
Z24Y0005434 6
頁
SP - 101
9
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FR4Z0079.EPS
部品番号検索表部品番号検索表
19 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE 19
PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO.
104N0043 06C-24 114Y5433004A 15A-42.2 136Y6599B 17-2 136Y6726B 17-47 136Y7161B 17-91 136Y8167A 17-134
104N0044 06A-2 114Y5434003A 15B-4.3 136Y6600B 17-3 136Y6727A 17-48 136Y7164B 17-92 136Y8638A 17-110 .2
104N0044 06B-4 115S0069 10C-17 136Y6601B 17-4 136Y6728A 17-49 136Y7165A 17-93 136Y8639A 17-111 .2
104N0044 07C-44 115S0094 10A-6 136Y6602B 17-5 136Y6729A 17-50 136Y7170B 17-136 137S1024 14-6
104N0044 08B-13 115S0095 10C-27 136Y6603B 17-6 136Y6730A 17-51 136Y7171A 17-94 137S1024 15A-25
110N0001 04-21 115S0116 10A-15 136Y6660B 17-7 136Y6731A 17-52 136Y7172B 17-95 137S1086 15A-39
112Y0007 16E-1.1 115S0117 10A-13 136Y6661B 17-8 136Y6732A 17-53 136Y7173A 17-96 137S1088 15A-40
112Y0008A 16E-1.2 118SX162 08B-16 136Y6662A 17-9 136Y6733A 17-54 136Y7177C 17-97 137S1090 15A-41
112Y0009A 16E-1.3 118SX162 11C-3 136Y6663B 17-137 136Y6734B 17-55 136Y7178C 17-98 137S1145 14-10
113Y1038 07A-25 118SX164 06A-12 136Y6664B 17-10 136Y6735A 17-56 136Y7179C 17-99 137S1150 14-12
113Y1038 10B-19 118SX164 06C-9 136Y6671A 17-11 136Y6736B 17-57 136Y7180E 17-100 137S1201 15A-26
113Y1038 11D-6 118SX164 07C-50 136Y6673C 17-12 136Y6737A 17-58 136Y7181E 17-101 137S1202 14-7
113Y1038 13-9 118SX164 10B-15 136Y6675A 17-13 136Y6738A 17-59 136Y7182C 17-102 137S1202 15A-28
113Y1039 08A-7 118SX164 11C-1 136Y6676A 17-14 136Y6739A 17-60 136Y7183D 17-103 137S1203 14-8
113Y1039 09-18 118YX180 06B-1 136Y6677A 17-15 136Y6740A 17-61 136Y7189C 17-104 137S1203 15A-27
113Y1368G/H/J 13-28 118YX215 16F-11 136Y6678A 17-16 136Y6741A 17-62 136Y7190D 17-105 137S1204 15A-29
113Y1369E/F 13-27 118YX700/B 07C-9 136Y6680A 17-17 136Y6742C 17-63 136Y7191A 17-106 137S1205 14-9
113Y1374A 07D-5 119S1067 04-20 136Y6681A 17-18 136Y6743A 17-64 136Y7192B 17-107 137S1242 13-41
113Y1375C 07B-29 119Y0024A 14-3 136Y6682A 17-19 136Y6744A 17-65 136Y7193A 17-108 137S1242 13-43
113Y1380G 15A-5.1 119Y0024A 15A-23 136Y6683A 17-20 136Y6745A 17-66 136Y7194B 17-109 137S1245 13-42
113Y1416C/D 15A-14 119Y0025 14-4 136Y6684B 17-21 136Y6746B 17-67 136Y7197A 17-110 .1 137S3037 14-11
113Y1445A 07D-18 119Y0054A 15B-7 136Y6693A 17-22 136Y6747A 17-68 136Y7198A 17-111 .1 138S0219 12-12
113Y1461E 15A-12.2 119Y0703 15A-4 136Y6702A 17-23 136Y6748A 17-69 136Y7199A 17-112 304S3761220 16F-5
113Y1556A 15A-5.2 119Y1101 10A-3 136Y6703C 17-24 136Y6749A 17-70 136Y7200A 17-113 305N0014A 07C-37
113Y1566 07C-12 119Y1101 13-15 136Y6704A 17-25 136Y6750A 17-71 136Y7201B 17-114 305N0014A 08B-28
113Y1583A 15A-6.2 119Y1110 13-20 136Y6705A 17-26 136Y6751A 17-72 136Y7202C 17-115 305N0014A 11C-2
113Y1584D 15A-8.3 120Y0076A 10A-12 136Y6706A 17-27 136Y6757A 17-73 136Y7203B 17-116 305N0037 10A-14
113Y1661A 15B-11 120Y0077A 10C-15 136Y6707A 17-28 136Y6758A 17-74 136Y7204A 17-117 305N0037 10C-19
113Y1682B 15A-8.2 123S0027 10A-17 136Y6708A 17-29 136Y6760C 16B-19 136Y7205A 17-118 305N0052 16C-1
113Y7012D/E 15A-15 123S0028 10C-14 136Y6709A 17-30 136Y6760C 17-75 136Y7206C 16E-13 305N0053 02A-19
113Y7015C 15A-6.1 124Y0048A 12-3.1 136Y6710C 17-31 136Y7142D 17-76 136Y7209B 17-119 306S1003008 16A-11
113Y7034G/H 15A-16 124Y0053B/C 12-3.2 136Y6711A 17-32 136Y7143C 17-77 136Y7212C 17-120 308Y0007 12-4
113Y7035M/N/P 15A-8.1 125N0099D 15A-24 136Y6712A 17-33 136Y7144A 17-78 136Y7217C 17-121 309N0050 01B-39
113Y7037G/H 15A-13 125N0106D 14-5 136Y6713A 17-34 136Y7145B 17-138 136Y7221C 17-122 309N0050 07B-28
113Y7038E 15A-12.1 128N0061 16F-13 136Y6714A 17-35 136Y7146B 17-79 136Y7234C 17-123 309N0050 14-1
113Y7040F/G 15A-10.1 128S0257 04-3 136Y6715B 17-36 136Y7147A 17-80 136Y7235C 17-124 309N0060 16C-30
113Y7041G/H 15A-10.2 128S0490/A 02A-5 136Y6716A 17-37 136Y7148A 17-81 136Y7236A 17-125 309N0061A 16C-29
113Y7086F/G 13-26 128S0664 03B-21 136Y6717A 17-38 136Y7150A 17-82 136Y7237A 17-126 309N0062 16C-5
113Y7087E 13-1 128S0771/0809 02C-14 136Y6718A 17-39 136Y7151C 17-83 136Y7238A 17-127 309N0063A 16C-4
113Y7090C 15A-11 128Y0265D 16B-12 136Y6719B 17-40 136Y7154B 17-84 136Y7243B 17-128 309N0064A 16C-11
113Y7092A 15A-1 128Y0266 16G-1 136Y6720B 17-41 136Y7155D 17-85 136Y7244B 17-129 309N0065A 16C-17
114Y5431001A 15B-4.1 128Y0270 16G-2 136Y6721A 17-42 136Y7156B 17-86 136Y7249E 17-130 309N0066A 16C-12
114Y5431002A 15B-4.2 133Y1014 04-22 136Y6722B 17-43 136Y7157B 17-87 136Y8047B 17-135 309S0025 07B-40
114Y5431025A 15A-42.1 134Y0055 04-12.1 136Y6723A 17-44 136Y7158B 17-88 136Y8161A 17-131 309S0100 07B-3
114Y5431027A 16A-12 134Y0072 04-12.2 136Y6724A 17-45 136Y7159B 17-89 136Y8162B 17-132 309S0100 08B-6
114Y5431101A 15A-17 136Y5031A 17-1 136Y6725E 17-46 136Y7160B 17-90 136Y8163A 17-133 309S0101A 08B-3
114Y5431204A 15A-9
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
309S0127612 16F-7 319N3354A 16B-3 322SF002 07C-30 323S3297 11C-19 334Y3192A 11B-8 345N1284B 10B-22
309S0227612 16F-6 319N3355A 16C-26 322SF002 08A-8 323S3305 08B-31 334Y3193A 11A-22 345N1285D 10A-4
310N0528A 01A-23 319N3364 10B-4 322SF010 07B-4 323S3308 11C-16 334Y3194A 11A-20 345N1296 09-33
310N0617A 07B-37 319N3364 11C-13 322SF010 07C-33 324N3038C 10B-11 334Y3197 10B-24 345N1345 11D-4
310N0618B 07A-14 319N3365 10B-9 322SF010 08B-4 324N3038C 11C-11 334Y3198A 10B-25 345N1361A 01A-11
310N0630A 07D-15 319N3366B 06A-29 322SF012 07A-26 324N3041E 06A-11 335N0082A 06C-28 345N1362A 01A-10
313N0989A 08B-14 319N3367A 06A-3 322SF012 07B-15 324N3041E 06C-8 335N0083A 06A-5 345N1363 01A-34
313N1053 11D-8 319N3368 06A-19 322SF012 07C-27 324N3041E 07C-38 337N0044 07C-7 345N1386 10C-4
313N1179 07B-10 319N3369B 06C-5 322SF012 08B-23 324N3041E 08B-29 337N0057 07C-10 345N1387A 10C-7
314S0031 06B-14 319N3370 06C-25 322SF017 08B-32 324N3041E 10B-8 340N0155A 16F-9 345N1394 02B-16
316N0337 06A-6 319N3371 06B-6 322SF017 10B-7 324N3041E 11C-4 340N0156C 16B-4 345N1395 13-12
316N0337 06C-4 319N3384A 07B-6 322SF017 11C-6 324N3041E 16E-10 340N0157C 16B-1 345N1543A 12-11
316N0338A 16D-2 319N3384A 08A-9 322SF021 07B-27 324N3095A 10B-3 341N0853D 07B-7 345N1609 09-3
316N0338A 16H-16 319N3384A 08B-5 322SF026 11A-21 324N3095A 11C-15 341N0870B 06A-24 345N1610A 09-13
316N0342D 11A-6 319N3385A 08B-22 322SF041 10B-2 324N3098 10B-6 341N0871A 06A-31 345N7054A 03B-11
316N0343 01A-12 319N3386B 08A-10 322SF041 11C-14 324N3098A 08B-33 341N0872A 06A-23 345Y0163B 02C-11
316N0343 16B-7 319N3387A 08B-11 322SF044 06B-7 324N3098A 11C-7 341N0873B 06A-21 345Y0164C 02C-10
316N0344B 01A-13 319N3388 08B-34 322SF050 08B-1 324N3104 16E-6 341N0874B 06B-5 345Y0165B 02C-7
316N0344B 16B-8 319N3389A 08B-27 322SF050 10B-14 324N3121 06A-7 341N0875A 08B-25 345Y0166A 02C-12
316N0345 11A-5 319N3393 07B-25 322SF050 11A-9 324N3121 06C-3 341N0876A 08B-7 345Y0175D 01A-6
316N0365 04-1 319N3394 07B-24 322SF050 11B-4 324N3121 07C-43 341N0877A 07B-26 345Y0180 09-28
316N0368B 10C-13 319N3399 07C-29 322SF050 11C-8 324N3718A 08B-30 341N0878A 07B-38 345Y0212 01B-24
316N0369C 10C-16 319N3400A 08A-3 322SF061 06A-18 327N0036A 06B-9 341N0879C 07B-5 345Y0213/0214 02C-9
316N0431 16H-17 319N3402 07A-3 322SF061 06C-17 327N0037B 06C-18 341N0880A 07B-12 345Y0280 09-22
316N2016 04-8 319N3431 09-1 322SF061 07C-6 327N0040A 08B-21 341N0881A 07C-28 346N0994A 10A-5
316S0094 15A-34 319N3431 11D-10 322SF104 06B-17 327N1101802B 08B-15 341N0882 07C-32 346N0996A 10B-17
316S1190 15A-18 319N3435D 07C-1 322SF104 06C-14 327N1106002 16E-4 341N0883 07C-34 346N0997D 10A-18
316S3015 03A-6 319N3437 07B-2 322SY055 07C-2 327N1121608 11A-7 341N0895D 06C-29 346N0997D 10C-28
316S3035 02B-5 319N3466 06B-11 322SY056 07C-21 327N1122415 10B-18 341N0909C 06C-13 346N0998B 10A-1
316S3100 16A-2 319N3487A 07B-43 322SY063 14-19 327N1122415 11A-14 341N0912A 16C-6 346N1005 06B-8
317N1033 07B-23 319N3509A 12-1 322SY067 06A-20 327N1122415 11B-7 341N0914F 16C-15 346N1007B 06C-10
317N1050B 16C-20 319N3515A 16E-5 322SY129 09-31 327N1124001A 11A-13 341N0916B 16C-19 346N1009 06A-4
317N1054A 02A-23 319N3516A 16E-11 322SY231 08A-4 329N0136 08B-26 341N0923 07B-1 346N1012C 06A-14.1
317N1058 16C-33 319N3533A 07C-18 322SY231 09-2 332N0496B 10C-12 341N0952 07B-45 346N1031B 06C-37
318N1042A 06A-8 319N3534 07C-26 322SY231 11D-11 332N0504 12-2 341N0953 07B-46 346N1032B 06C-35
318N1042A 06B-10 319N3535 07C-36 323N0017 07C-39 332N0597 04-26 341N1021 07C-3 346N1056A 16A-5
318N1042A 06C-2 319N3555 16B-2 323N0033 07C-11 334N0049 07B-20 341Y0313 16C-14 346N1057A 16A-4
318N1042A 07C-42 319N3574 06C-15 323N0036 16F-12 334N2319 08A-11 341Y0314 16C-18 346N1059 16A-7
318N1062 01B-7 319N3580A 07B-11 323S3065 07C-40 334N3469 11A-19 345N1275A 01B-27 346N1060 16A-10
318N1063 01B-8 319N3581A 07B-18 323S3073 06A-9 334N3470A 08B-2 345N1276C 01A-28 346N1171 06A-34
319N0913B 16C-16 319N3584C 16C-28 323S3073 06C-1 334N5020 11A-4 345N1277A 01B-20 346N1174 06A-14.2
319N2940 10B-5 319N3645 07B-44 323S3079 10B-1 334N5021 11A-3 345N1278A 01A-25 346N1241A 16H-4
319N2940 11C-5 319N3683 16C-25 323S3224 11C-17 334Y0074A 07B-42 345N1279 01B-34 346Y0066 06C-33
319N3351A 14-18 319N3878 07B-8 323S3262 10B-10 334Y0075C 07B-41 345N1280A 02B-3 347N0225 10A-8
319N3352B 16B-17 319Y1134 07A-47 323S3268 16E-7 334Y3190A 11B-2 345N1280A 02C-2 347N0225 10C-25
319N3353B 16B-16 320N0022A 16E-3 323S3273 11C-12 334Y3191A 11B-3 345N1282C 10A-2 347N0401 06A-22
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
347N0401 11A-11 347S0063 06A-17 350N2585A 07B-30 355N7056 15A-33 356N6153A 08B-18 356N6486 06B-16.2
347N0524 06A-27 347S0065 06A-26 350N2670 03B-10 355N7057F 15A-2 356N6154B 07A-36 356N6486 16D-3
347N0524 06C-16 347S0067 06C-6 350N7137B 03A-2 355N7058C 15A-7 356N6155B 09-29 356N6487D 16C-24
347N0524 10A-7 347S0092/0357 07B-33 350N7138D 03B-3 355Y0176A 06C-11 356N6156B 09-24 356N6493 06B-22
347N0524 10C-26 347S0094/0359 11A-10 350N7139B 03B-4 356N6084B 14-24 356N6157A 09-16 356N6494 06B-13
347N0524 11A-18 347S0098/0362 01B-4 350N7143J 03B-2 356N6087A 14-20 356N6158A 09-15 356N6523G 16C-10
347N0636 07B-14 347S0098/0362 07B-17 350N7146C 15A-19 356N6088A 14-17 356N6160 01B-40 356N6550A 16E-12
347N0636 07C-8 347S0099 06C-7 350N7149D 03B-1 356N6089A 14-21 356N6161A 09-7 356N6551A 16E-2
347N0703 10C-5 347S0100/0364 07D-14 350N7150D 16F-1 356N6090A 14-14 356N6162B 07D-3 356N6552A 16E-9
347N0704 07D-31 347S0102 07A-39 350Y1270K 03B-16 356N6092B 02A-9 356N6163B 07D-2 356N6553 03A-8
347N0707 02C-16 347S0102/0365 07B-36 350Y1274F/G 02A-26 356N6093A 02A-11 356N6164C 07A-48 356N6589 07C-35
347N0711 07A-50 347S0182 07B-13 350Y1274F/G 16H-2 356N6094D 13-22 356N6165C 07A-44 356N6590 07C-31
347N0721 06C-12 347S0194 07A-37 350Y1275A 02A-27 356N6095B 13-24 356N6166C 07A-42 356N6595 07D-10
347N0728 02B-25 347S0205 08A-2 350Y1275A 16A-6 356N6096A 14-22 356N6168C 06C-23 356N6606A 02C-13
347N0728 07A-46 347S0205 08B-24 350Y1275A 16H-1 356N6098B 13-38 356N6169A 06B-3 356N6607C 16B-15
347N0728 08B-8 347S0223 07D-4 350Y1276B 02A-22 356N6099B 13-34 356N6170A 06A-1 356N6608A 16B-9
347N0728 14-2 347S0264 07B-32 350Y1281D 02B-4 356N6101 14-23 356N6225B 06C-27 356N6609C 16B-14
347N0728 14-25 347S0298 07C-23 350Y1295F 02C-3 356N6102C 02A-14 356N6226B 06C-26 356N6610A 16B-10
347N0732 02B-24 347S0298 08A-13 350Y1297A 02A-25 356N6103D 02A-13 356N6229B 06A-30 356N6617 10C-6
347N0733 08B-10 347S0321 16H-22 350Y1297A 16H-3 356N6104A 13-19 356N6230B 06A-28 356N6632 16A-1
347N0742 11A-17 347S0787 07C-22 350Y1298 02C-1 356N6108B 02B-13 356N6231B 06A-15 356N6646 07A-13
347N0785 02A-17 350N2053C 14-16 350Y1299 02B-1 356N6110 13-10 356N6232B 06A-16 356N6647 07A-1
347N1196A 07A-24 350N2059A 02A-2 350Y1351A 16A-3 356N6111 13-8 356N6233C 06C-30 356N6648 07A-12
347N1196A 08A-6 350N2059A 02B-2 350Y1392C 02B-15 356N6112E 02B-20 356N6268C 01B-36 356N6649 07A-6
347N1196A 09-17 350N2059A 02C-4 350Y1393A 02A-1 356N6113C 13-31 356N6269B 01B-38 356N6651 07A-9
347N1196A 10B-20 350N2059A 03B-8 350Y1394 02A-24 356N6122 02C-6 356N6270A 01B-35 356N6653 02A-21
347N1196A 11D-7 350N2064B 11A-2 350Y1423C 02B-12 356N6123 02C-5 356N6271C 01B-13 356N6654 02A-20
347N1511 02A-7 350N2073A 07A-21 350Y1428 16F-3 356N6124C 02A-4 356N6273B 01B-37 356N6663 02C-15
347N1512A 16C-7 350N2074E 07A-35 350Y1506 07D-25 356N6130A 10A-9 356N6290C 06C-20 356N6669C 07B-35
347N1521 07A-34 350N2082B 07A-41 350Y1507 07D-26 356N6131A 10C-2 356N6292B 06C-22 356N6670B 07B-34
347N1521 07D-8 350N2097A 03B-19 351N0176 02A-28 356N6132A 10C-11 356N6306A 07A-23 356N6680 10C-24
347N1521 07D-12 350N2114A 03B-15 351N0176 16A-14 356N6133A 10C-8 356N6346A 09-9 356N6689B 13-14
347N1522 07C-17 350N2135A 03B-14 351N0176 16H-5 356N6134C 10C-9 356N6347A 01B-3 356N6690 14-28
347N1534 06A-25 350N2136E 03B-9 352N0388 15A-32 356N6136C 06A-13 356N6348 01A-24 356N6691C 14-27
347N1542A 05-9 350N2137B 16C-8 352N0435A 13-25 356N6137B 06A-10 356N6396A 02A-12 356N6692A 14-26
347N1554A 16C-3 350N2138B 16C-22 352N0436 13-29 356N6141B 06B-2 356N6397A 02A-6 356N6694D 02B-11
347N1555A 16C-13 350N2167C 16A-13 352N7155G 15B-1 356N6143B 06A-32 356N6405B 16B-6 356N6695B 02A-10
347N1578 16C-23 350N2201A 07A-19 352N7156G 15A-36 356N6144B 06A-33 356N6406A 16B-5 356N6696A 02B-14
347N1579 16C-27 350N2208A 14-13 352N7157J 15A-31 356N6145A 11A-24 356N6408 16D-4 356N6697B 02B-22
347N1756 16H-6 350N2209B 02B-21 355N0508D 06B-18 356N6146A 09-34 356N6422B 10C-3 356N6698B 02B-10
347N1757 16H-7 350N2211A 02A-15 355N0525D 15A-21 356N6147A 09-32 356N6435A 06B-16.1 356N6699 01B-11
347N1758 16H-8 350N2221 03B-18 355N0526G 15A-22 356N6148B 08B-17 356N6436 16D-1 356N6701 03B-23
347N1759 16H-9 350N2238B 07D-6 355N0538A 16A-8 356N6149B 08B-19 356N6437A 06B-15 356N6715C 07A-32
347N1791 16H-12 350N2407B 07D-20 355N0541E 13-32 356N6150A 08B-12 356N6464B 03B-5 356N6716A 08A-5
347N1796 07D-29 350N2409B 07D-21 355N0658 16H-15 356N6151B 08B-20 356N6465B 03B-7 356N6718A 07A-30
347N7086C 05-10 350N2503A 12-10 355N7055G 15A-35 356N6152C 08A-1 356N6485B 01B-10 356N6719D 07A-28
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
356N6720A 07A-31 356Y0254 07D-16 363N2051 02C-18 372N0058 04-23 382N1007 09-25 386Y0021 07A-33
356N6721A 07A-29 356Y0260 07D-30 363N2053B 07C-47 372N0062 04-17 382N1008 07A-22 386Y0022 06C-36
356N6751 07D-7 359N0124 04-9 363N2054B 07C-49 372N0063 04-16 382N1014B 12-8 387N0096A 11A-1
356N6752 07A-27 360N0127C 11A-15 363N2067A 01B-1 372N0064 04-13 382N1045 09-12 387N0098A 01A-7
356N6756A 01B-31 360N0127C 11C-18 363N2150 07A-38.2 372N0065 04-15 382N1047 09-11 387N0109B 02C-17
356N6760A 15A-37 360N0232A 07D-32 363N2295 02C-8.2 372N0068 04-24 382N1051 01A-32 387N0146A 01A-35
356N6778A 10A-11 360N0343 10B-13 363N2389 07A-7 374N0016 04-5 382N1052 01A-33 387N0147 07C-52
356N6873A 02B-23 360N0343 11B-5 363N2390 16H-11 376N0189B 02B-8 382N1053 01A-9 388N1073 07C-5
356N6936 05-3 360N0343 11C-10 363N7139A 05-4 376N0190 02B-17 382N1054 09-23 388N1149 02A-8
356N7445A 01B-41 360N0344 07A-49 363N7140A 05-5 376N0198A 03B-12 382N1086 11D-5 388N1153 07A-5
356N7446B 07B-16 360N0345A 07A-43 363N7141A 05-11 378N0002 04-4 382N1091 13-35 388N1153 07C-19
356N7447C 07C-41 360N0348C 02B-7 363N7142B 05-19 379N0097 13-17 382N1092 13-5 388N2222 07C-4
356N7448C 07C-45 360N0349 02B-18 363N7143B 05-6 379N0098 13-18 382N1093 01B-32 388N2401 08B-9
356N7450C 07D-13 360N0351B 11A-8 363N7144B 05-18 382N0936 01A-4 382N1094 01B-33 388N2402 09-30
356N7451A 03B-6 360Y0075 02B-6 363N7145B 05-7 382N0937 01A-5 382N1095 01A-30 388N2403 07A-45
356N7452C 03A-9 362N0480A 01B-6 363N7146D 05-16 382N0938 01A-3 382N1096 01B-22 388N2404A 07B-22
356N7454C 05-1 362N0495A 16B-18 363N7147D 05-12 382N0939 01A-1 382N1097 01B-26 388N2418 10B-12
356N7455B 05-2 362Y0085A 01B-30 363N7148D 05-15 382N0940 01A-2 382N1098 01B-25 388N2418 11A-16
356N7456D 05-20 363N1828 13-30 363N7149D 05-13 382N0941B 01A-14 382N1099 01B-17 388N2418 11B-6
356N7457A 05-17 363N1838F 10B-16 363S0013 13-23 382N0942B 01A-15 382N1100 01B-18 388N2418 11C-9
356N7460D 03A-1 363N1839 10B-21 363Y0318 07A-8 382N0943B 01A-16 382N1101 13-36 388N2419A 11A-12
356N7461E 15B-2.1 363N1842C 06C-31 363Y0319 09-35 382N0944A 01A-8 382N1102A 02A-3 388N2431B 16C-9
356N7462G 15A-20 363N1843C 06C-32 363Y0328 07A-11.1 382N0945 01A-18 382N1103A 01A-21 388N5259 10A-16
356N7463A 05-14 363N1844A 06C-21 363Y0337A 07C-25 382N0946 01A-17 382N1105 13-37 388N5259 10C-18
356N7464A 03A-7 363N1847B 06B-20 363Y0342 07C-48 382N0947 01A-19 382N1106 13-39 388N5271B 16B-13
356N8381 07C-51 363N1848A 06B-19 363Y0372A 07A-11.2 382N0948A 01A-22 382N1107 13-6 388N5272C 16B-11
356N8701 09-8 363N1851A 11D-1 363Y0393A 07C-46.2 382N0949A 01A-31 382N1108 13-40 388N5278 02A-18
356N8715 01B-44 363N1852B 11D-2 363Y0406 07C-13 382N0950 01A-26 382N1109A 10C-10 388N5703A 03B-20
356N8718 07C-20 363N1853B 11A-23 364N0090 16C-21 382N0951 01A-27 382N1120 12-9 388N5703A 15A-30
356N8727 01B-43 363N1854B 11A-25 364S0001 13-21 382N0952A 01B-28 382N1131 07A-18 388S2126 06C-19
356N8730 07C-16 363N1855A 11D-3 364S0005 15A-3 382N0953A 01A-29 382N1132 07A-16 398N7000A 05-8
356N8731 07C-15 363N1856C 08A-12 364S0006 15B-8 382N0954A 01B-23 382N1133A 07A-17 401N0134 16E-8
356N8866 16H-18 363N1857B 09-19 365S0029 01B-12 382N0955A 01B-21 382N1134 07A-15 401N0734B 07B-39
356N8867 16H-19 363N1858B 09-20 365S0030/0048 10C-1 382N0956 01A-20 382N1153A 07A-20 401N0735B 07B-21
356N8868 16H-20 363N1859 09-27 366N0053 02A-16 382N0957 01B-2 382N1167 10C-20 401N0755B 01B-29
356N8869 16H-21 363N1861A 07A-38.1 369N0190A 14-15 382N0958 01B-19 382N1209A 02B-9 405N2340 03B-13
356N8874 16H-23 363N1862 09-10 369N0201A 10C-21 382N0959 01B-16 382N1314 01B-9 405N2506 03B-22
356N8875B 15B-6 363N1863 07A-40 369N0202A 10C-22 382N0960 13-4 382N1323 13-11 405N2508B 03B-17
356N8894 16H-13 363N1892A 02C-8.1 369N0205 13-16 382N0961 13-3 382N1324 13-13 405N2533A 03A-3.1
356N8895 16H-14 363N1893A 11D-9 370N0249 04-7 382N0962A 13-2 382N1333 07D-24 405N2553 16F-8
356N8921 07D-17 363N1938A 06C-34 370N0250 04-2 382N0963 13-33 382N1342 07D-22 405N2554 16F-4.1
356N9020 15B-10 363N1958 06B-12 370N0251 04-11 382N1002B 09-4 382N1343 07D-23 405N2555 16F-4.2
356N9024 15B-2.2 363N2020C 07A-2 370N0252 04-6 382N1003A 09-6 382N1416 16H-10 405N2556 16F-4.3
356Y0173F 13-7 363N2021A 07A-4 370N0253 04-25 382N1004A 09-5 386N0622 04-18 405N2572 07B-31
356Y0176 07D-11 363N2025C 07A-10 370N0254 04-19 382N1005 09-14 386S0013 07D-9 405N2883 03A-3.2
356Y0244 16C-2 363N2044 01B-5 372N0052 04-14 382N1006 09-26 386S0077 16A-9 407N0120A 10C-23
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
部品番号検索表
19 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.- REF.NO. BLANK PAGE
407N0121A 10A-10
602Y0118 07C-24
602Y0119 07C-14
603N0170F/G 10A-19
603N0179D/E 10C-29
606Y0035B 07D-1
606Y0039B 07D-19
606Y0057 07D-27
606Y0058 07D-28
615Y7000A/B 12-6
815Y7004 12-7
839Y0028B 12-5
845Y0058B 03A-4
845Y0067 02B-19.1
845Y0067 03A-5
845Y0068 02B-19.2
845Y0069 16F-2
845Y0069 16F-10
850S0080/0085 15B-5.1
850S0088/0089 15B-3
850Y0112 15B-5.2
850Y0117 15B-5.3
898Y0817 15B-9.1
898Y0838 15A-38
898Y0862 15B-9.2
899N0002 04-10
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表消耗品一覧表
20 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS 21
Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols List Of Quick Wearing Parts
Symbol in the
Indicatio n dissassembly No. Part name Shape
No. Part name Size Shape
Symbols chart
(example)
1. 2. 3.
1 Fixing plug
1 Cross-recessed flat-head screw S S3x10 M3x10
1. 2. 2 Binding band
2 Cross-recessed truss-head screw T *T4x8 M4x8 Fixing plug Binding band N.K. clamp
3 N.K. clamp
Flat-head screw Truss-head screw 4. 5.
S
3 Cross-recessed pan-head screw
T
A A3x6 M3x6
with spring washer 4 Edging
3. 4.
Edging Edge saddle
5 Edge saddle
4 Cross-recessed pan-head screw B B3x16 M3x16 Pan -head screw with Pan-head screw with
with spring and plain washer spring washer spring and plain washers Parts2.EPS
A B
Cross-recessed hexagon-headed 5. 6.
5 screw with spring and plain BR BR4x25 M4x25
washers
Hexagon-headed screw Hexagon-headed bolt
with spring and plain washer Q
6 Hexagon-headed bolt Q Q3x20 M3x20 BR
7. 8.
7 Hexagon-Headed bolt with BQ BQ4x10 M4x10
spring and plain washers Hexagon-Headed bolt Plax
with spring and plain washer Ps
BQ
Nominal
8 Plax *1) Ps *Ps3x6 9. 10.
diameter 3x6
Hexagon-headed set
screw WP Hexagon nut
9 Hexagon-headed setscrew WP WP4x6 M4x6 Na
11. 12.
WP4x8 M4x8
(double-point)
Plain washer Spring washer
10 Hexagon nut Na Na3 M3 W SW
13.
11 Plain washer W W4 M4
12 Spring washer SW SW3 M3 E ring

E
13 E ring E E6 Nominal
diameter 6
*1) Plax: Tapping screw for plastic (equivalent to Category I tapping screw)
*: Stainless-made
: Painted black Parts1.EPS
003-352-03 003-352-03
03.10.2003 FM3950 03.10.2003 FM3950
Preventive Maintenance (PM) Control Sheet PM - 1
Control Sheet
07/05/2001 01 Corrections (FM3073) PM - 1, 2, 4, 5, 14, 26, 28, 30–37,
40, 41, 44–46, 55, 57
08/30/2001 02 Preventive maintenance items added PM - 2, 4, 37.1–37.4
(FM3115)
06/20/2003 03 Changes to intervals of preventive PM - 2–4, 6–8, 10, 13, 19, 23,
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P maintenance, addition to HHS Label

information, changes to reference section
24, 30–37, 37.1-37.4, 40, 41,
43–45, 50, 51, 54–55, 57, 58
numbers, corrections for mistypes
Service Manual (FM4017)
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 2 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 3
1. Preventive Maintenance Program List 2. Overview of Preventive Maintenance Programs

Reference
Time
Jigs/tools/measuring Periodic replacement
Performed at Various Intervals
Maintenance program Interval requirements
section instruments used parts
(min)
3.1 Checking the error log 0.25Y 10 min
■ Flowchart of Preventive Maintenance to Be Performed at 0.25 Y (3 Month) Intervals
3.2 Checking for image problems 0.25Y 15 min
Turning OFF the high-voltage switch The maintenance utility mode and user utility mode are hereinafter referred to as M-Utility
3.3 1Y 5 min
(software switch) and U-Utility, respectively.
3.4 Removing the IPs 0.25Y 5 min
3.5 Removing the covers 0.5Y START
20 min
Air filters
3.6 Replacing the air filters 2Y 10 min 376N0189B (x1) ● Checking the error log
376N0198A (x2)
Use M-Utility to check for error occurrences.
Greasing the IP positioning unit
3.7 carbon plate leaf spring and IP lift 2Y 5 min Grease
movable shaft ● Checking for image problems
Replacing the erasure lamps and Erasure lamps Uniformly expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR
3.8 cleaning the erasure filter and 2Y 30 min 123S0027 (x4) of radiation, and generate an image output using
reflection plates 123S0028 (x4)
the console's test menu. Check the output film image
Cleaning rollers for abnormalities.
3.9 Replacing the cleaning rollers 1Y 10 min 334N5020 (x1),
334N5021 (x1)
Inspecting the shock absorber cloths ● Removing the IPs
3.10 2Y 5 min
(POS50, #3922 textile) Use M-Utility to remove the IPs from the machine.
Shock-absorber-cloth-
Replacing the shock-absorber-cloth- attached guide plates,
3.10a attached guide plates, pipes, and 1Y 40 min ● Clearing the error log
pipes, and bracket
bracket in the subscanning unit 898Y0783 (x1) Use M-Utility to clear the error log.
Mobilux EP 0, grease-up
3.10b Increasing grease on the cylinder 1Y 20 min tool (899Y0246), and
sealing tape ● Cleaning the IP
Checking the oil tank oil level Clean the IPs with a dry cloth or gauze dampened
0.5Y 5 min Mobil DTE24 and
3.11 and hydraulic hoses with ethanol.
cleaning bottle
3.12 Checking the solenoid valves 2Y 10 min Shorting connector
3.13 Lubricating the rod end 2Y 5 min Lube 601 ● Loading the IPs
Use M-Utility to load the IPs into the machine.
3.14 Cleaning the rubber rollers 2Y 60 min
3.15 Inspecting the Kapton® belt 2Y 10 min
3.16 Inspecting the vibration-proof rubber 1Y 5 min ● Checking for image problems
Uniformly expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR
3.17 Installing and cleaning the covers 0.5Y 30 min of radiation, and generate an image output using the
3.18 Setting the date and time 0.5Y 5 min console's test menu. Check the output film image
for abnormalities.
3.19 Inspecting the interlocks 0.5Y 5 min
3.20 Clearing the error log 0.25Y 5 min
Turning ON the high-voltage switch END FR8H4053.EPS
3.21 1Y 10 min
(software switch)
3.22 Cleaning the IPs 0.25Y 5 min Gauze and ethanol
3.23 Loading the IPs 0.25Y 5 min
3.24 Checking for image problems 0.25Y 15 min
3.25 Checking for a motor-driven grip 0.5Y 10 min

handle inclination
TR4H4001.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 2 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 3

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Flowchart of Preventive Maintenance to Be Performed at 0.5 Y/1 Y/2 Y Intervals A
The maintenance utility mode and user utility mode are hereinafter referred to as the M-
Utility and U-Utility, respectively. <<Programs performed <<Programs performed <<Programs performed
at 0.5 Y intervals>> at 1 Y intervals>> at 2 Y intervals>>
START
● Checking the oil tank oil level and hydraulic hoses
Lower the exposure/reader unit to its lowermost position and check whether the oil tank oil level is between
the "max" and "min" labels. Also, check the hydraulic hoses and piping for oil leaks.
<<Programs performed <<Programs performed <<Programs performed
at 0.5 Y intervals>> at 1 Y intervals>> at 2 Y intervals>>
● Checking the solenoid valves
● Checking the error log When the exposure/reader unit
Use the M-Utility to check for errors. descends, check that a magnetic
force is generated in the solenoid
valve screw sections.
● Checking for image problems
Uniformly expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation, and generate an image output using the
console's test menu. Check the output film image for abnormalities. ● Lubricating the rod end
Remove the rod end pin from its
hole. Lubricate the hole.
● Turning OFF the high-voltage switch (software switch)
Turn OFF the high-voltage (software switch) with the M-Utility, and then
restart the machine. ● Cleaning the rubber rollers
Clean the rubber rollers in various
sections with a damp cloth.
● Removing the IPs
Use the M-Utility to remove the IPs from the machine.
● Inspecting the Kapton® belt
Check whether the Kapton® belt is
● Removing the covers soiled or scratched.
Remove covers as appropriate for the maintenance intervals.
● Inspecting the vibration-proof rubber

● Replacing the air filters Check for deteriorated vibration-proof rubber. Any deteriorated vibration-proof
Replace the air filters which are rubber must be replaced.
mounted on the exposure unit rear
cover and control unit cover.
● Installing and cleaning the covers
Install all the removed covers, check for missing cover mounting screws, and clean the covers with a damp cloth.
● Greasing the IP positioning unit carbon
plate leaf spring and IP lift movable shaft
Apply grease to the IP positioning unit ● Setting the date and time
carbon plate leaf spring and IP lift Check the date and time with the U-Utility.
movable shaft.
● Inspecting the interlocks
● Replacing the erasure lamps and cleaning • Check that the elevation operation is smoothly performed without generating any abnormal sound.
the erasure filter and reflection plates • Check that the exposure/reader unit comes to a stop without being significantly shocked.
• Replace the eight erasure lamps. • Check that the exposure/reader unit stops in the middle of its descent when you press any of the four areas of
• Clean the front and back of the erasure the safety switch cover and exposure unit bottom cover.
filter and reflection plates with a damp
cloth.
● Clearing the error log
Clear the error log with the M-Utility.
● Replacing the cleaning rollers
Replace the cleaning rollers in the path changeover conveyor.
● Turning ON the high-voltage switch (software switch)
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (software switch) with the M-Utility and then
● Checking the shock absorber cloths restart the machine.
(POS50, #3922 textile)
Check for peeled or frayed shock
absorber cloths on the IP positioning ● Cleaning the IPs
unit, before-erasure conveyor, and Clean the IPs with a dry cloth or gauze dampened with ethanol.
enclosure. Any peeled or frayed
shock absorber cloths must be
replaced. ● Loading the IPs
Use the M-Utility to load the IPs into the machine.
● Replacing the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plates, pipes, and bracket in ● Checking for image problems
the subscanning unit Uniformly expose the entire IP surface to about 1 mR of radiation, and generate an image output using the
Replace the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plates, pipes, and bracket in console's test menu. Check the output film image for abnormalities.
the subscanning unit.
● Checking for a motor-driven grip handle inclination

● Increase grease on the cylinder. Visually check that the motor-driven grip handle is in a horizontal position.
Inject grease to the cylinder.
A END

06.20.2003 FM4017 07.05.2001 FM3073
3. Details of Maintenance Procedures 3.2 Checking for Image Problems

0.25Y
The maintenance procedures to be performed are sequentially explained below.
The programs set forth in “1. Preventive Maintenance Program List”, are detailed below in
the order in which they must be performed. To indicate the intervals at which individual Perform the procedures (marked ■) in order named.
maintenance programs must be performed, the following symbols are used in this chapter.
Before initiating any maintenance operation, you should become familiar with the following ■ Checking for Irregularities, Sensitivity Inadequacies, and Density Problems
four symbols that indicate the maintenance program execution intervals.
CAUTION
Indicates a program that must be performed at 0.25 Y (3 month) intervals. Irregularity and sensitivity checks must be performed without using the grid or photo-timer
0.25Y (optional). If the grid and photo-timer (optional) are furnished, put them back in their original
positions and then check again for irregularities.
Indicates a program that must be performed at 0.5 Y (6 month) intervals. (1) Uniformly expose the entire IP surface to about 0.258 µC/kg (1 mR) of radiation. The
0.5Y
IP exposure conditions (reference values) are indicated below.
Distance: 1.8 m
Indicates a program that must be performed at 1 Y (1 year) intervals. Voltage: 80 kV
1Y Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 0.013 sec
Indicates a program that must be performed at 2 Y (2 year) intervals. (2) Using “Sensitivity” on the test menu of the console, record an image and generate it.
2Y (3) Check that the resulting output film and image monitor on-screen images are free from
irregularities.
If any irregularities are found, take an appropriate remedial action.
3.1 Checking the Error Log “11. Making Analyses of Abnormal Images” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
■ Maintenance Procedure (4) Check the sensitivity and density.
(1) Turn ON the power in the order indicated below. Check that the system sensitivity value indicated on the output film is approximately
Distribution switchboard circuit breaker 0.25Y 200 and that the film density value is approximately 1.2. Also, check that there is no
Machine main body circuit breaker density variation in the main scanning direction.
Console main switch and sub-switch If any abnormality is found, take an appropriate remedial action.
➮ The machine then starts up. “11. Making Analyses of Abnormal Images” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
(2) Touch the U-Utility button on the console panel.
(3) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the console panel.
➮ The M-Utility then starts.
(4) Sequentially choose “1. ERROR LOG UTILITY” and “1. LIST”.
(5) Specify the error log display mode.
Either of the following list formats can be selected to display the error log on screen.
• 1. ALL
When you choose “1. ERROR” (error messages only), “2. WARNING” (warning
messages only), or “3. BOTH” (both types of messages), the display lists the
generated error messages in order from the newest to the oldest. This option
displays all the occurrences of error messages even if the same error messages
were generated two or more times.
• 2. SUMMARY
When you choose “1. ERROR” (error messages only), “2. WARNING” (warning
messages only), or “3. BOTH” (both types of messages), the display lists the
generated error messages by grouping them according to error codes. This option
also displays error codes and error occurrence counts (4-digit).

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Checking for Jitters ■ Verifying the Exposure/Read Center

(1) Tape down 150 mm steel rules to the exposure unit front cover, and then expose them Check that the steel rule images on the output film obtained from “■ Checking for Jitters” are
to about 0.258 µC/kg (1 mR) of radiation. The IP exposure conditions (reference positioned at the read center.
values) are shown below. If any abnormality is found, take an appropriate remedial action.
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage: 80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 0.013 sec
Read center Read center
FR1B1026.EPS
Attach
Steel rules
Exposure center
FR1B1023.EPS
(3) Check that the frame and steel rule images on the resulting output film are jitter free.
If any jitter is found, take an appropriate remedial action.
“11. Making Analyses of Abnormal Images” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
FR1B8012.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
■ Checking the Output Characters A B A B

A
Check that the contents of film character format information entered from “2. CONFIGURA-
TION SETTING” of M-Utility are precisely indicated on the output film obtained in the “■
Image Image
Checking for Jitters” step. Image Image
If any character output abnormality is found, take an appropriate remedial action.
“11. Making Analyses of Abnormal Images” in the “Troubleshooting” volume
A Image Image
● Characters generated in normal two-image output mode
A B A B
Character display area A
a b cd ❍ Above the image area Image Image

a: Hospital name Image Image
(institution name)
b: IP number B
c: EDR mode and menu code
d: System ID and image number
Image Image B
❍ Below the image area
e: Image processing conditions 14"x17"/8"x10" four-image output Four-image output of a size 18x43 (long) two-image output (B4LP)
f: Exposure menu name FR1B1123.EPS other than 14"x17"/8"x10"
g: Standardization conditions FR1B1124.EPS FR1B1125.EPS
e s j k l n and amendments
f h: Engineer code and exposure A B A B
table information A B
i p u
g m i: Department name
h t q o r j: Patient ID
Character k: Patient name (kana)
In normal two-image output mode l: Patient name (kanji)
display area B
m: Exposure date and time
n: Film mark
o: Sex
p: Age or birth date
q: Image reduction ratio
Image Image Image
r: Set processing information
s: Left-right reversal mark ( R)
t: Data compression code
u: PEM information or
Ene.-Sub./superposition
information
FR1B1119.EPS
● Other image output patterns and character display areas

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The output characters indicated in the character display areas (A and B) are variously laid out de- 18x43 (long) two-image output 14"x17" one-image output
(14"x17"LP)
pending on the employed output pattern. FR1B1127.EPS
FR1B1126.EPS
A B A
A A B
Image
Image B Image
Image
A
Image
A B B Landscape 14" x 17" one-image output

FR1B1128.EPS
One-image output 14"x17" 100% magnification output Pantomo two-image output

FR1B1120.EPS FR1B1121.EPS FR1B1122.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
3.3 Turning OFF the High-voltage Switch (Software Switch) 3.4 Removing the IPs
0.25Y
Perform the following software setup procedure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch.
CAUTION
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
When handling an IP, observe the following precautions to avoid scratching or soiling it.
If you do not turn ON the power while a cover is open, there is no need to turn OFF the high-voltage
● IP handling precautions
switch.
Always use both hands to grasp the IP by its upper and lower carbon plates.
■ Maintenance Procedure Carbon plate

1Y Numerical Top Top
From the main menu of the M-Utility, choose “9. HV OFF”. marking
➮ The high-voltage switch (software switch) then turns OFF, changing the “9. HV OFF”
indication to the “9. HV ON” indication. Left Right
IP surface IP back
Taped
edge Taped
edge
Bottom Bottom
Carbon plate
<Holding an IP>
with both hands.
<Holding an IP for insertion <Holding an IP for insertion

With both hands, hold the IP in a Hold the IP in a vertical position

the upper carbon plate. of the upper carbon plate.
FR1B8008.EPS

• Handle an IP while exercising care not to bump it against the corner of a table or the
like.
• Do not stack IPs one on top of the other.
If an IP bumps against or falls down onto anything, be sure to subject it to visual
burred carbon plates, or scratched IP surface and back.

10.15.99 FM2600 06.20.2003 FM4017

CAUTIONS Open the right- and left-hand screw covers, remove the screws, and take off the chin
• When handling an IP, watch out for burrs on its carbon plates because you may be injured by support cover.
the burrs. Replace an IP if it is burred.
the CR-IR344, abnormal images are generated. Note the number marking to distinguish
Number marking
Screw cover
• For CR-IR343
FUJI ST J5 ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
IP surface
(J5 ▲ ▲ : lot name;
■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number) Chin support
cover
FUJI ST W ▲ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
(W ▲ ▲ ▲ : lot name;
■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number)
FR1B1901.EPS
FR1H4004.EPS
■ Maintenance Procedure (6) Remove the first IP from the IP positioning unit.
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in the lowermost (7) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key.
position.
RESETTING IP
(2) Start the M-Utility. INFO.key
REMAINING IP
If the M-Utility is already active, make sure that the M-Utility main menu screen is INFO.key
displayed.
1. 000017 000000 0
2. - - -
A B C
0.QUIT
1. DISPLAY D E F
FR1B8005.EPS
2. SETTING
IU > 3
(8) Remove the second IP from the IP positioning unit.
4 5 6
(9) Press the REMAINING IP INFO. key.
0.QUIT 1 2 3
1. DISPLAY ➮ You are automatically returned to the routine mode screen.
2. SETTING 0 . SP
Message 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE
DEL BS ENT
IU >
Caps
IP 5501
FR1B8011.EPS

➮ You are then returned to the routine mode.
shown below.

IP#1 or IP#1
FR4B8004.EPS
003-352-01
07.05.2001
06.20.2003 FM3073
FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
3.5 Removing the Covers ■ Maintenance Procedure

0.5Y
Console sub-switch and main switch
CAUTION
Machine main body circuit breaker
chine with any cover removed, the photomultiplier becomes damaged. Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
(2) If the side grip handles and genital gland protector are attached, remove them.
This step need not be performed for a maintenance that is performed at 0.5 year
intervals.
(2)
Side grin handle
BR M5x25 (Black) x2
BR M5x25
(2) BR M5x8
Side grin handle
BR M5x25 (Black) x2
(2)
Genital gland
protector Movable arm
assembly
FR1H3032.EPS

10.15.99 FM2600 10.15.99 FM2600
(3) Remove covers as appropriate for the maintenance intervals. Elevation unit
left-hand side cover
● For a maintenance performed at 0.5 year intervals Exposure unit top cover
• Elevation unit front cover (two M4x12 truss-head screws or two M4x16 truss-head
screws)
Remove the two screws from the top of the machine. Slightly lift the cover up and
out of its position. Since the cover is retained by a magnet, you have to remove the
cover with due force. HHS Label #2
You should also note that a cable is attached to the cover. Let the removed cover be
attracted by the elevation unit magnet to prevent it from toppling down. Controller cover
• Controller cover (four M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws and three M4x8 BR
screws)
Exposure unit right-hand
● For a maintenance performed at 1 or 2 year intervals inner cover
T
ON
• Elevation unit front cover and controller cover FR
• Elevation unit left-hand side cover (two M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws, one Exposure unit
M4x8 BR screw, and one M5x12 BR screw) right-hand side
cover
• Elevation unit lower right-hand side cover (five M4x10 truss-head screws, one M4x8
BR screw): Remove these screws only when performing a maintenance at 2 year
intervals.
Raise the exposure/reader unit until the cover mounting screws are removable.
Remove the five screws that secure the elevation unit upper right-hand side cover CNH59,
together with the lower one. Further, take off the elevation unit front cover, loosen CNH506
the one front screw, and remove the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover. Elevation unit
Elevation unit lower
◆ NOTE ◆ CNH50
front cover
right-hand side cover
When the grip handle (optional) is installed, remove its elevation assembly before Exposure unit front cover FR1H4005.EPS
removing the elevation unit lower right-hand side cover. ◆ NOTE ◆

If you disconnect the exposure unit front cover connector or right-hand side cover connector
• Exposure unit front cover (upper: two M4x12 truss-head screws; lower: two M4x8 (CNH50 or CNH506), the patient protection interlock works so that you cannot move the
truss-head screws) exposure/reader unit up or down.
Slightly displace the cover and then disconnect the connector (CNH50). If the exposure/reader unit needs to be moved up or down with the connectors disconnected,
• Exposure unit right-hand side cover (two M4x8 truss-head screws) disconnect the junction connector (CNH507) that is located next to the CNH50, and connect the
jig cable to the CNH507. The CNH507 and CNH50, to which the jig cable is not connected,
Disconnect the connector (CNH59, CNH506) and then slide the cover a bit rearward may be left disconnected.
and out of its position.
Remove the exposure unit front cover before exposure unit right-hand side cover
removal. In cover installation, the exposure unit right-hand side cover must be
installed prior to the exposure unit front cover.
• Exposure unit right-hand inner cover (seven M4x8 truss-head screws)
• Exposure unit top cover (four M4x8 cover-attached truss-head screws)

10.15.99 FM2600 06.20.2003 FM4017

2Y
■ Periodic Replacement Part Claws
Air filter
Filter
■ Maintenance Procedures Exposure unit
rear cover
cover
Controller
● Exposure unit rear cover cover
(1) Remove the filter cover from the exposure unit rear cover. Magnets
Note that the filter cover is attracted by magnets. Open the filter cover to remove it.
(2) Remove the air filter from the filter cover. Air filter
Exposure unit right-hand side cover
(4) Attach the filter cover to the exposure unit rear cover.
Lodge the filter cover claws in the holes in the exposure unit rear cover.
● Controller cover
(1) Remove the two louvers from the controller cover. Claws
You should remove the louvers while lifting them. Filter

(2) Remove the air filter from each louver. cover
T
Lift the air filter up and out. ON
FR
(3) Attach a new air filter to each louver. Air filter
(4) Attach each louver to the controller cover. Air filter

Lodge the louver claws in the holes in the controller cover.
Magnets
● Exposure unit right-hand side cover
Louver
FR1H4006.EPS
(1) Remove the filter cover from the exposure unit right-hand side cover.
Note that the filter cover is attracted by magnets. Open the filter cover to remove it.
(2) Remove the air filter from the filter cover.
(4) Attach the filter cover to the exposure unit right-hand side cover.
Lodge the filter cover claws in the holes in the exposure unit right-hand side cover.

10.15.99 FM2600 10.15.99 FM2600
3.7 Greasing the IP Positioning Unit Carbon Plate Leaf Spring 3.8 Replacing the Erasure Lamps and Cleaning the Erasure
and IP Lift Movable Shaft Filter and Reflection Plates
2Y
■ Item Used CAUTION
Grease 2Y Do not touch the erasure lamps immediately after the machine is stopped, because you may
suffer a burn due to their high temperature.
■ Maintenance Procedure
Apply an appropriate amount of grease to the IP lift movable shaft holes in the right- and left-
hand sides and the back surfaces of the carbon plate leaf springs of the IP positioning unit. ■ Periodic Replacement Part
Erasure lamp
IP positioning unit
Erasure conveyor
HHS Label #2
IP lift movable shaft holes
T (1)
ON
FR Cover bracket
Sems M3x6
FR1H4025.EPS
Back surfaces of
the carbon plate
(both sides)
FR1H4007.EPS

10.15.99 FM2600 06.20.2003 FM4017
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CNF1-CNF9, and CNF11). (7) Lift the two erasure filters up and out of their positions.
(3) Remove the two erasure conveyor mounting screws (BR M4x8).
◆ NOTE ◆
When pulling out the erasure conveyor, exercise care so that the disconnected
connectors and cables are not caught. Also, position the cables in a gap between the (7) Erasure filter
bracket and frame to prevent them from being caught.
(4) Pull out the erasure conveyor. Erasure conveyor
(7) Erasure filter

HHS Label #2 (3)
BR M4x8
CNF8 (2)
Claw
CNF2
CNF9 CNF1
CNF4
CNF5
CNF6
CNF7
CNF11 CNF3 T
ON
FR
Lamp assembly FR1H4009.EPS

Claw
Gap
(4)
(8) Remove the eight erasure lamps.
Erasure conveyor
T (3)BR M4x8 Level the erasure lamps to disengage them from the respective leaf springs, and then
ON pull the erasure lamps out of their sockets.
FR FR1H4008.EPS
(5) Remove the two lamp assembly retaining screws. White reflection plate
Erasure conveyor
(6) Open the lamp assembly.
Do not lift the lamp assembly because it would come off. Lamp assembly
Erasure conveyor White reflection plate
T
ON
FR
(5) BR M4x8
Erasure lamp
Leaf
spring
O NT
FR
(5) BR M4x8
(6) Lamp assembly FR1H4040.EPS
Socket
FR1H4010.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
(9) Wipe the erasure filter and white reflection plate with a moisten cloth. 3.9 Replacing the Cleaning Rollers
(10) Install eight new erasure lamps.
1Y
To accomplish installation, reverse the removal steps.
■ Periodic Replacement Part
Cleaning roller
CAUTION
When installing the erasure lamps, do not deform the leaf springs by spreading them ■ Maintenance procedure
out.
(1) Free the two braces.
Locate the two braces that secure the roller top cover. Free each brace by loosening
(11) Install the two erasure filters. its two screws.
CAUTION
To install the erasure filter, insert the bend at the bottom of the erasure filter into the
erasure conveyor. If not, an IP jam may occur.
Brace
Truss M4x8
(12) Close the lamp assembly and secure it with two screws.
(13) Push the erasure conveyor into its position.
While depressing the rail claws (one each at the upper and lower ends), push the
erasure conveyor into its position.
(11) Erasure filter Path changeover conveyor
FR1H4012.EPS
(2) Remove the roller top cover.

(13) (11) Erasure filter (3) Remove the cleaning roller assembly.
Claw
(4) Disassemble the cleaning roller assembly to remove the cleaning rollers.
Erasure conveyor
Separate the gears and housings from the cleaning roller assembly and then remove
(11) the cleaning rollers.
(5) Install the new cleaning rollers by reversing the removal steps.
Roller top cover

Erasure
filter Cleaning roller
(13) Claw
ONT
FR
Lamp assembly FR1H4011.EPS Shaft support
Housing
Path
(14) Secure the erasure conveyor with two mounting screws (BR M4x8). changeover Gear
Shaft support
(15) Connect the connectors (CNF1 to CNF9, and CNF11). conveyor
Housing
(16) Install the cover bracket. Gear
Retaining screw
FR1H4013.EPS

07.05.2001 FM3073 10.15.99 FM2600
3.10 Inspecting the Shock Absorber Cloths (POS50, #3922 (6) Install the carbon plate and grid in the reverse order of removal.
If the photo-timer is used, install it as well.
Textile) 2Y
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the carbon plate, ensure that the leaf springs beneath the carbon plate
■ Maintenance Procedures are positioned forward of the brackets.
● Inspecting the IP positioning unit shock absorber cloths
(1) If the photo-timer (twin timer) is installed, remove it.
Remove the four leaf springs and then the photo-timer.
When the Toshiba photo-timer is installed, cut the ties that secure the photo-timer
cable.
(2) Remove the two grid mounting guides.
(3) Remove the grid.
Remove the two screws and move the grid between the stopper brackets and out of Carbon plate
position.
Remove the twelve screws, lay the tray assembly flat, and take the carbon plate away Leaf spring
while releasing its bottom hooks. Bracket
(5) Check for peeled or frayed shock absorber cloths on the carbon plate and tray assem- FR1H4030.EPS
bly.
If any shock absorber cloth is peeled or frayed, replace the entire affected carbon plate
or tray assembly.
“4.10 Replacing the Tray Assembly” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts” volume
(4)
Carbon plate
(shock-absorber-
cloth-attached)
Sems M3x10 x12

(2)
Guide x 2 Stopper brackets
(shock-absorber-
cloth-attached)
(3)
Grid
Truss M3x6 x2
(1)
Leaf spring x4
Sems M3x6 x4
(1) Photo-timer
FR4H4014.EPS

07.05.2001 FM3073 10.15.99 FM2600
● Inspecting the before-erasure conveyor shock absorber cloths (5) Disconnect connector CNE1.
◆ NOTE ◆
(6) Mounting bracket x2
When pulling out the scanner unit, exercise care so that the disconnected connectors and BR M4x8 x2
cables are not caught.
(1) Disconnect connectors (CNZ11 to CNZ13 CNZ15, CNZ17, and CNZ18, PMR08C
CN2, CND1, CNZ1 to CNZ3, and CNZ16, PMT08C CN2, CND2, CNZ4) and remove
the ground wire (FGZ5).
(5)
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE CNE1
The CND2 and CNZ4 can be removed with increased ease when you pull the scanner unit (6)
slightly outward in step (4). Before-erasure
conveyor
(2) Remove the four screws that secure the scanner unit. HHS Label #2
(3) Lower the before-erasure conveyor light-shielding bracket.

T
Loosen the two screws and then lower the light-shielding bracket. ON
FR

FR1H4017.EPS
(7) Remove the bottom bracket from the before-erasure conveyor.

(8) Remove the IP entry bracket from the before-erasure conveyor.
(2) BR M4x8 x2 (9) Check for peeled or frayed shock absorber cloths on the bottom bracket and IP entry
(1) CNZ12, 17
(1) HHS Label #2
bracket.
CNZ11,15 If any shock absorber cloth is peeled or frayed, replace the entire affected bracket.
(3)
Light-shielding (10) Install the brackets in the reverse order of removal.
bracket
(1) CNZ13, 18 Screw x2
HHS Label #2 (1) CNZ3 (1)FGZ5
(1) CNZ16 (1)
(1) CND1 PMT08C CN2
(1) PMR08C
CN2
CND2 (1)
(1 )CNZ1, 2
FG FG
CNZ4
(2) BR M4x8 x2
(8)
IP entry bracket
Sems M3x6 x4
(4) Scanner unit
T (7)
ON Claws
FR FR4H4016.EPS
Bottom bracket
Sems M3x6 x6
FR1H4018.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(11) Install the before-erasure conveyor. 3.10a Replacing the Shock-Absorber-Cloth-Attached Guide
Lodge a dowel in the elongated hole in the before-erasure conveyor, and then install
the before-erasure conveyor by pushing it forward while pressing it against the posi-
Plates, Pipes, and Bracket in the Subscanning Unit
tioning hex socket head bolt.
Mounting bracket x2 ■ Periodic replacement parts
BR M4x8 x2
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plates A and B
1Y
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipes (upper and lower)
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached bracket
CNE1 ■ Maintenance Procedure

(1) Place the upper grip roller in the released position.
Before-erasure (2) Replace shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate A.
conveyor
(3) Return the upper grip roller to the grip position.
HHS Label #2
(2) Sems
M3x8 x2 Anti-static member
O NT
FR
(2) Sems
M3x6 x2
Top view Mounting
bracket
(2) [Replace] (1), (3)
Shock-absorber-cloth- Grip roller
Before- attached guide plate A
FRONT Subscanning unit erasure
conveyor Shock-
absorber-
Dowel
cloth-attached
Elongated hole guide plate A
Mounting
Positioning hex socket head bolt bracket
FR1H4019.EPS
● Inspecting the enclosure shock absorber cloths

(1) Remove the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate from the enclosure.
(2) Check for peeled or frayed shock absorber cloths.
HHS Label #2
If any shock absorber cloth is peeled or frayed, replace the entire affected guide plate.
(3) Install the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate.
T
ON
FR
Scanner unit
FR4H4029.EPS
HHS Label #2
Shock-absorber-cloth-
attached guide plate
BR M4x8 x2
FR4H4028.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(4) Replace shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate B. (5) Remove the light-shielding bracket.
CAUTIONS
• When servicing the light-collecting guide assembly, wear gloves. The assembly may become
Shock-absorber- soiled if you handle it with bare hands.
Scanner unit cloth-attached • Never touch the incidence surface of the light-collecting guide assembly even if you wear
guide plate B gloves.
(363Y0328 or 363Y0372)
BR M4x8 x2 • To prevent the light-collecting guide assembly from being damaged, exercise care not to bring
it into contact with neighboring parts.
• Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light-collecting guide surface.
T
ON
FR Light-collecting guide assembly
(PMR08C)
Stay
Bracket
Incidence surface
Stay
Bracket
FR4B4068.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide plate B, ensure that the distances (6) Gently remove the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side), exercising care not
a and b shown below are 14 ± 0.5 mm. to bring it into contact with neighboring units.
This requires disconnecting the connectors (PMR08C CN1 and CN4).
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached
guide plate B
(5)
Loosen screw x2 Hook
Stay a
bracket
(6) Shaft
b (5)
Stay
Light-shielding cover HHS Label #2
bracket
BR M4x8 x2
(6) BR M4x8
FR4H4033.EPS
(6) Light-collecting guide

assembly (PMR08C)
T Subscanning unit
ON
FR
(6) PMR08C CN4

(6) PMR08C CN1 FR4H4042.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(7) Remove the two shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide pipes. (8) Remove the two POM guides.
When removing the upper shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide pipe, insert an Allen (9) Replace the shock-absorber-cloth-attached guide bracket.
wrench into the screw holes in the shafts and remove the two screws.
Allen wrench
Shaft
Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached (9)
bracket
Loosen screw
Sems M3x6
T
ON
FR
HHS Label #2
Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached pipe
(7) Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached pipe
(upper)
Sems M3x6 x2
HHS Label #2
Scanner unit
T
ON (8) POM guide x2
FR (9) Shock-absorber-cloth-
Sems M3x6 x2 attached bracket
Sems M3x8 FR4H4041.EPS
Scanner unit
(7) Shock-absorber-
cloth-attached pipe (10) Replace the two shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipes and install the two POM guides
(bottom) in the reverse order of removal.
FR4H4020.EPS
Sems M3x10 x2
CAUTIONS
• When installing the two shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipes, exercise care to avoid
overtightening the screws. Screw overtightening deforms the shock-absorber-cloth-
attached pipes.
• When installing the two POM guides, provide a clearance of 1 mm (equivalent to a
single thickness of a 30 cm steel rule) between the POM guides and shock-absorber-
cloth-attached brackets.
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipe (upper)
POM guide
Shock-absorber-cloth-attached pipe (lower)

Shock-absorber-cloth-attached bracket
1mm
FR1H4050.EPS
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Return the scanner unit to its position after completion of vibration-proof rubber inspection.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 37.1 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 37.2
(11) Install the light-collecting guide assembly (PMR08C side) in the reverse order of 3.10b Increasing Grease on the Cylinder
removal.
(12) Install the light-shielding cover.
■ Items Used
Mobilux EP 0, grease-up tool (899Y0246), and sealing tape
1Y
“17.1 Relieving the Hydraulic Pressure” in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment” volume
(2) Remove the hose from the hose nipple.
(3) Remove the hose nipple from the cylinder.
(4) Remove the sealing tape attached to the screw portion of the hose nipple.
When it is to be replaced with a new hose nipple, the sealing tape need not be re-
moved. The old hose nipple removed should be disposed of.
(5) Remove the sealing tape attached to the threaded hole of the cylinder.
Type A (Fill about 1 cc of grease.)

Cylinder
(2)
Hose
(3)
Hose nipple
Screw portion
Threaded hole
Cylinder
Type B (Fill about 3 cc of grease.)

(2)
Hose
(3)
Hose nipple
Screw portion
Threaded hole
Cylinder
FR4H8000.EPS
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 37.1 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 37.2
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 37.3 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 PM - 37.4
(6) Fill the injector with grease, and inject grease all the way into the threaded hole of the BLANK PAGE
cylinder.
For type A of cylinder shape, fill about 1 cc of grease; for type B, about 3 cc.
(7) Wrap sealing tape several times around the screw portion of the hose nipple.
Make sure that the sealing tape wrapping direction is as illustrated below.
When it is replaced with a new hose nipple, it is unnecessary to wrap sealing tape
around it, since it is already wrapped.
Sealing tape
FR4H8001.EPS
(8) Install the hose nipple to the cylinder.

Make sure that the connection port of the hose always faces up.
(9) Connect the hose to the hose nipple.
(10) Move up the exposure/reading unit and remove the maintenance pin used at step (1).
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
The maintenance pin should be attached to the valve assembly with a tie.
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 37.3 003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual PM - 37.4
06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
3.11 Checking the Oil Tank Oil Level and Hydraulic Hoses (4) With the cleaning bottle, add oil until the oil tank oil level is positioned between the
“max” and “min” line marks on the reference label.
■ Items Used Sponge

(air filter)
Mobil DTE24 and cleaning bottle 0.5Y
■ Maintenance Procedure Cleaning bottle
● Checking the Oil Tank Oil Level

(1) Make sure that the exposure/reader unit is placed in its lowermost position. Oil tank
(2) Verify that the oil tank oil level is between the “max” and “min” line marks on the refer-
ence label. x
ma
min
If the oil level is not as specified above, perform steps (3) to (5) and beyond to add the
oil.
Oil level
reference line marks FR1H4027.EPS
(5) Install the sponge.
● Checking the hydraulic hoses

Run the following checks on the hydraulic hoses and the associated piping.
max
min
• Checking for torn, deformed, or otherwise abnormal hydraulic hoses
Oil label • Checking the hydraulic hose joints for oil seepage
reference
line marks • Checking the hydraulic hose piping for abnormalities
Oil tank
FR1H4026.EPS
(3) Remove the sponge.

◆ NOTE ◆
After oil addition, turn ON the machine and allow the exposure/reader unit to repeat its
full vertical stroke several times. Finally, place the unit in the lowermost position,
check that the oil level is between the max and min line marks on the reference label.
If the oil level is too low, add oil again.

10.15.99 FM2600 10.15.99 FM2600
3.12 Checking the Solenoid Valves 3.13 Lubricating the Rod End
2Y 2Y
■ Items Used ■ Item Used
Shorting connector Lube 601
■ Maintenance Procedure ■ Maintenance Procedure

(1) With pliers or the like, remove the rod end pin.
CAUTION
(2) Lubricate the hole from which the rod end pin was removed.
Before removing a cover, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If you turn ON the
(3) Install the rod end pin.
HHS Label #2
(1) If a shorting connector is not connected to the CNH507 connector, which is located in
the lower part of the exposure/reader unit, connect it.
If the exposure unit front cover connector is disconnected, the patient protection
descent prevention interlock actuates to inhibit the exposure/reader unit from
descending.
(2) Turn ON the circuit breakers on the distribution switch board and machine.
◆ NOTE ◆ Rod end pin
To turn ON the power with the machine uncovered, block the SH1 and SH2 light paths
with tapes or other light shields.
Hole
(3) When you press the elevation panel switch to lower the exposure/reader unit, apply a
wrench or other magnetic item to the solenoid valve screw section to check that it is
HHS Label #2
attracted by the screw section.
If the screw section does not attract the applied item, replace the solenoid valve
because it is defective.
“17.5 Replacing the Valve Coils” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts” volume FR1H4037.EPS
–#2043
Solenoid
valves
(3)
Screw section
O NT
FR
#2044–
Solenoid
valves
FR
O NT
O NT (2)
FR
Screw section
FR4H4039.EPS
(4) Disconnect the shorting connector.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
3.14 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers 3.15 Inspecting the Kapton® Belt
2Y 2Y
■ Maintenance Procedures ■ Maintenance Procedure
With a damp cloth, clean the rubber rollers in various units. (1) Remove the transparent cover (two M4x8 BR screws) from the scanner unit.
With a blower or the like, remove dust and other foreign matter from the transparent
● Path changeover conveyor, 10 rollers cover.
Remove the path changeover conveyor and then clean the rollers. (2) Check that the Kapton® belt, tensioner, and flywheel are not soiled or scratched.
“5.1 Removing and Installing the Path Changeover Conveyor” in the “Checks, Any soiled item must be wiped clean with a cloth dampened with ethanol. Any
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume scratched item must be replaced.
● Erasure conveyor, 2 rollers “9.12 Inspecting and Replacing the Kapton® Belt, Tensioner, and Flywheel” in the
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Remove the erasure conveyor and then clean the rollers.
“6.1 Removing and Installing the Erasure Conveyor” in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume T
ON
FR
● Subscanning unit, 4 rollers; scanner after-reading conveyor, 1 roller HHS Label #2
Pull out the scanner unit, remove the scanner after-reading conveyor, scanning optics unit,
and light-collecting guide assembly, and then clean the rollers.
“7. Pulling Out and Pushing In the Scanner Unit” in the “Checks, Replacement and
“10.1 Removing and Installing the Scanner After-Reading Conveyor” in the “Checks, Transparent
cover
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume BR M4x8 x2
“8.3 Removing and Installing the Scanning Optics Unit” in the “Checks, Replacement
Flywheel
and Adjustment of Parts” volume Kapton® belt
“9.1 Servicing the Light-Collecting Guide” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment Tensioner
of Parts” volume Pulley

HHS Label #2
B: Path changeover
: Rubber roller conveyor Scanner unit
T
ON
FR FR1H4022.EPS
(3) Install the transparent cover.

(4) Make sure that the MZ1 normally rotates.
“9.8 Inspecting and Replacing the Subscanning Motor MZ1” in the “Checks,
Z: Subscanning unit
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
F: Erasure conveyor (5) Turn OFF the machine.
D: Scanner
after-reading
conveyor
FR1H4021.EPS

10.15.99 FM2600 06.20.2003 FM4017
3.16 Inspecting the Vibration-proof Rubbers (3) Push the scanner unit into its position.
Push the scanner unit inward while depressing the two rail claws.
1Y
(4) Secure the scanner unit with four retaining screws.
(1) Pull out the scanner unit if it has not been pulled out.
◆ NOTE ◆
“3.10 Inspecting the shock absorber cloths (POS50, #3922 textile)”
When tightening the scanner unit retaining screws, ensure that they secure the
PMT08C and PMR08C board cable terminals (FG) as well. If the cable terminals
+1
(2) Check that the four vibration-proof rubbers are 20 mm high (the height can be
-3 are not properly secured, an imaging failure may occur.
determined by measuring the distance between the upper ends of the shrine-like
section and tray section). Also, note the measurements of all the four rubbers to check
that the difference between the maximum and minimum measurements is not greater (5) Lift the before-erasure conveyor light-shielding bracket.
than 2 mm. ◆ NOTE ◆
If any abnormality exists, replace the vibration-proof rubbers. Push the light-shielding bracket against the upper end, otherwise light-shielding
“9.15 Replacing the Vibration-Proof Rubbers” in the “Checks, Replacement and inadequacy results.
(6) Disconnect connectors (CNZ11 to CNZ13 and CNZ15, and CNZ18, SCR08C CNZ1,
SCN08C CN5, PMR08C CN2, CND1, CNZ1 to CNZ3, and CNZ16, PMT08C CN2,
CND2, CNZ4) and remove the ground wire (FGZ5).
3.17 Installing and Cleaning the Covers

0.5Y
HHS Label #2
CAUTION
Before installing the covers, make sure that the high-voltage switch on the SCN08A board is
ON.
(1) Install the covers.

T
ON To install the covers, reverse their removal procedures.
FR
◆ NOTE ◆
Scanner unit If the shorting connectors (dedicated jigs) have been connected to connector CNH507,
be sure to disconnect them. Also, properly make the CNH50 and CNH507
connections. If you do not properly perform these steps, the safety switches do not
operate.
• The distance between the
upper ends of the shrine-
like section and tray (2) Make sure that the covers are properly installed with no cover screws missing.
+1
section must be 20 -3 mm.
(3) With a moistened cloth, clean all the covers.
• The difference between

the maximum and
minimum values of the
four measurements must
be not greater than 2 mm.
Shrine-like section
upper end
Tray section
upper end
FR1H4023.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
3.18 Setting the Date and Time 3.19 Inspecting the Interlocks
0.5Y 0.5Y
■ Maintenance Procedure ■ Maintenance Procedures
● Inspecting the exposure unit upper- and lower-limit switches
Distribution switchboard circuit breaker
Machine main body circuit breaker (1) Press the elevation panel switch to lift the exposure/reader unit.
Console main switch and sub-switch (2) Perform the following checks.
(2) Touch the U-Utility button on the console panel. • Check that the elevation operation is smoothly performed without generating any
abnormal sound.
• Check that the exposure/reader unit stops at its uppermost and lowermost positions
(3) Touch “Date/time setup” in the U-Utility screen. without being significantly shocked.
➮ The date/time setup screen opens.
◆ NOTE ◆
Date/time setup key For exposure/reader unit elevation checkout purposes, use each of the elevation panel
U-Utility screen Date/time setup screen
switch and up-down foot switch (optional).
Set the new date and time
in the order of Year, Month,
7 8 9
DELETE UNPROCESSED
IMAGE
REOUTPUT IMAGE SET DATE/TIME Date and Time (military time)
Ex)April 1, 1997.10:15 AM Uppermost position
Input 9704011015 4 5 6
9704011015 1 2 3
0 . SP
- BS ENT
Elevation panel
switch
USER UTILITY SET DATE/TIME

QUIT QUIT
Up-down foot
IP IP 5501 switch
FR4B4056.EPS
Lowermost position
(4) From the keypad, enter the current date and time. FR1H1400.EPS
(5) After the date and time entry is made, finalize it by pressing the [ENT] key. ● Inspecting the patient protection descent prevention switches
➮ When you finalize your entry, the area below the input field reads “OK”.
(1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in its uppermost
If you make a wrong entry, press the [BS] (backspace) key to return to the character to position.
be corrected.
(2) While lowering the exposure/reader unit toward the lowermost position, press safety
(6) Repeatedly touch the “Back” button. switch cover area 1 to check that the exposure/reader unit comes to a stop with the
➮ The routine screen opens. elevation panel switch LED coming on.
Repeat steps (2) above using each of safety switch cover area and exposure unit
bottom cover areas 2 through 4.

FR
ONT
Safety switch
cover
2
1 LED
4 The LED comes on when
the safety switch turns ON.
Exposure unit 3 FR1B8010.EPS
bottom cover

07.05.2001 FM3073 10.15.99 FM2600
● Inspecting the emergency stop switch (2) Complete the following checks.
• Move the grip handle up and down to check that it properly stops at the uppermost
While the exposure/reader unit moves up and down, press the emergency stop switch to
and lowermost positions (the height adjustment member turns ON the interlock
check that the unit comes to a stop.
switch).
Emergency stop switch Grip handle
Elevation unit
Elevation unit
Height
adjustment
member
FR
ON
T
FR1H4043.EPS
● Inspecting the grip handle upper- and lower-limit switches and grip handle
interference prevention switch Interlock switch
FR
ON
T
Perform the following inspection procedure only in situations where the grip handle (optional)
is installed. FR1H4035.EPS
(1) Press the exposure/reader unit up-down switch and grip handle up-down switch on the
exposure unit right-hand side cover and elevation unit front cover to raise and lower • Check that the grip handle stops at a position at which the grip handle is not in contact
the exposure/reader unit and grip handle. with the exposure/reader unit.
Check whether the grip handle interference prevention interlock switch mounted in the
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE exposure/reader unit properly works.
When you press the exposure/reader unit up-down switch with the interlock button depressed,
Grip handle
the grip handle ascends and descends in coordination with the exposure/reader unit.
Grip handle
Elevation unit Exposure/

reader unit
Uppermost
position
Grip handle
up-down switch
Interlock
FR
button ON
T
Exposure/
reader unit
up-down switch Grip handle interference
prevention interlock switch
(elevation FR1H4036.EPS
panel switch)
Lowermost
position
FR1H4034.EPS

10.15.99 FM2600 10.15.99 FM2600
3.20 Clearing the Error Log 3.22 Cleaning the IPs

0.25Y
■ Maintenance Procedure CAUTION
(1) Touch the U-Utility button on the console panel. 0.25Y When handling an IP, observe the following precautions to avoid scratching or soiling it.
➮ The U-Utility screen opens. ● IP handling precautions
(2) Sequentially touch the lower left and lower right corners of the console panel. Always use both hands to grasp the IP by its upper and lower carbon plates.
Carbon plate
(3) Sequentially choose “1. ERROR LOG UTILITY” and “2. CLEAR”. Numerical Top Top
marking
(4) Choose “1. ERROR LOG”.
(5) Choose “1. YES”.
Left Right
➮ The entire error log is then deleted. IP surface IP back
Taped
edge Taped
3.21 Turning ON the High-voltage Switch (Software Switch) edge
Bottom Bottom
Carbon plate
1Y <Holding an IP>
■ Maintenance Procedure Grasp the carbon plates
with both hands.
From the M-Utility main menu, choose “9. HV ON”.
➮ The high-voltage switch (software switch) then turns ON, changing the “9. HV ON”
indication to the “9. HV OFF” indication.
<Holding an IP for insertion <Holding an IP for insertion

With both hands, hold the IP in a Hold the IP in a vertical position

the upper carbon plate. of the upper carbon plate.
FR1B8008.EPS

• Handle an IP while exercising care not to bump it against the corner of a table or
the like.
• Do not stack IPs one on top of the other.
If an IP bumps against or falls down onto anything, be sure to subject it to visual
burred carbon plates, or scratched IP surface and back.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
■ Items Used
CAUTIONS Gauze and dehydrated ethanol (C2H5OH: JIS First Grade or Superhigh Grade)
• When handling an IP, watch out for burrs on its carbon plates because you may be injured by
the burrs. Replace an IP if it is burred. ■ Maintenance Procedure
the CR-IR344, abnormal images are generated. Note the number marking to distinguish CAUTIONS
• Never use an eraser or a cleaning solvent other than the specified dehydrated ethanol. The
use of an improper substance may cause IP deterioration.
Number marking
• Do not frequently use dehydrated ethanol for IP cleaning because the IP edges may turn
• For CR-IR343 yellow.
FUJI ST J5 ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ • Do not apply any undue force to IPs when cleaning them. Excessive IP cleaning may incur IP
IP surface
(J5 ▲ ▲ : lot name; performance degradation. If you apply excessive force to the carbon plate edges, kink marks
■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number) may be generated.
FUJI ST W ▲ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■
• When cleaning the taped edges, do not apply an excessive amount of dehydrated ethanol to
(W ▲ ▲ ▲ : lot name; them. An excessive application of dehydrated ethanol may cause solution seepage into
■ ■ ■ ■ : lot internal serial number) taped edge joints and taped edge separation.
FR1B1901.EPS • The dehydrated ethanol to be used must be contained in a brown reagent bottle. After use,
the remaining dehydrated ethanol must be stored in a brown reagent bottle. The dehydrated
ethanol may oxidize depending on the storage condition.
• Exercise care not to press your fingernails against IPs or otherwise scratch them.
(1) Check whether the removed IPs are scratched. Perform the following checks.
• Carbon plate: Check for a burred or peeled carbon plate and peeled base.
• Taped edge: Check for a peeled base and kink marks.

from a crack
Separated fiber
layers
Whiskery fiber
protrusion
<Peeled base> <Kink marks>
Carbon plate or taped edge

peeled from the image
surface
Curved or linear
crease-like
deformation or streak
FR1B8009.EPS
003-352-01
07.05.2001
06.20.2003 FM3073
FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
(2) Check the image surfaces (IP surface and back) for scratches, smudges, cracks, and 3.23 Loading the IPs
kink marks.
0.25Y
If any abnormality is found when an IP is subjected to an image check, replace the IP.
(3) Perform IP cleaning in the order indicated below. ■ Maintenance Procedure
• Taped edge cleaning (1) Press the elevation panel switch to place the exposure/reader unit in the lowermost
position.
• IP surface and back (both sides) cleaning
(2) From the main menu of the M-Utility, sequentially choose “10. IP UTILITY” and “3.
LOAD/REMOVE MODE”.
➮ A message appears on the console to indicate that an IP change request is ap-
proved.
1. 000017 000000 0
2. - - -
A B C
0.QUIT
1. DISPLAY D E F
2. SETTING
Taped edge 4. USE OVEREXPOSED-IP MODE
IP surface or back FR1H4003.EPS
IU > 3
4 5 6
◆ NOTE ◆ 1 2 3
0.QUIT
When cleaning IPs, observe the following precautions. 1. DISPLAY
2. SETTING 0 . SP
• Clean the taped edges and then the IP surface and back. If you clean the taped Message 3. LOAD/REMOVE MODE
edges after IP surface and back cleaning, the IP surface and back may be soiled by 4. USE OVEREXPOSED-IP MODE
DEL BS ENT
IU >
dirt on the taped edges.
• To avoid bringing the IP surface and back into direct contact with a table or the like,
cover the table or the like with the sponge sheet that is packed together with IPs. Caps
Clean the sponge sheet before use. If the sponge sheet is not laid beneath IPs, the
IP surface and back may be scratched. IP 5501
• Wipe the IPs with dry gauze. If the IPs are not thoroughly cleaned by dry gauze, FR1B8011.EPS
wipe them with gauze moistened with a required minimum amount of dehydrated
ethanol. (3) Repeatedly choose “0. QUIT” to exit the M-Utility.
• Immediately after an IP is wiped with gauze moistened with dehydrated ethanol, ➮ You are then returned to the U-Utility.
gently wipe it with dry gauze and allow the IP surface and back to dry completely.
Especially, the taped edges should be wiped with dry gauze without delay because (4) Touch the “Back” key.
they are likely to peel if they are left wet. ➮ You are then returned to the routine mode.
(4) Check again for any scratch, soil, crack, or kink mark on the IP surface and back. shown below.
If any abnormality is found when an IP is subjected to an image check, clean the IP
again or replace it. CHANGING / CLEANING IP CHANGING / CLEANING IP
IP#1 or IP#1
FR4B8004.EPS
(5) Load the first IP into the IP positioning unit.

◆ NOTE ◆
Insert the IP with its number marking positioned forward.

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
(6) Press the RESETTING IP INFO. key. 3.24 Checking for Image Problems
RESETTING IP 0.25Y
INFO.key
REMAINING IP ■ Maintenance Procedure
INFO.key
“3.2 Checking for Image Problems”
3.25 Checking for a Motor-Driven Grip Handle Inclination

0.5Y
■ Maintenance procedure
FR1B8005.EPS Visually check that the motor-driven grip handle is in a horizontal position.
(7) Insert the second IP into the IP positioning unit. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
(8) Press the REMAINING IP INFO. key. If the grip handle is not in a horizontal position, level it by adjusting the leveling screw. After comple-
tion of leveling, apply screw-locking bond to the leveling screw.
➮ When the second IP is loaded, you are automatically returned to the routine mode
screen.
(9) Install the chin support cover. If the grip handle is not in a horizontal position, level it by adjusting the leveling screw. After
completion of leveling, apply screw-locking bond to the leveling screw.
Open the right- and left-hand screw covers, and then install the screws.
Level the grip handle.

Leveling screw
FR4H9077.EPS

10.15.99 FM2600 06.20.2003 FM4017
BLANK PAGE
4. XXXXX

06.20.2003 FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
Installation (IN) Control Sheet IN - 1
Control Sheet
07/05/2001 01 Corrections (FM3073) IN - 1-3, 5, 9, 18, 21, 23-25,
25.1-25.4, 26-33, 37, 38, 44, 46,
49, 55, 56, 59, 74, 77, 88, 89,
89.1-89.4, 92, 97-99,102, 105,
108, 109, 109.1-109.4, 110, 113,
CR-IR344/CR-IR344P 117, 117.1-117.4, 118-121, 132,

133, 133.1-133.4, 134-137, 140,
141, 143, 144, 152, 161-164, 166,
Service Manual 167, IN_A1-2, 3, 5-20, IN_A8-2,
4, IN_A13-1, 3, 10, IN_A14-1,
IN_A17-3, 5, 9, IN_A19-2
08/30/2001 02 Support for “plus” (FM3115) IN - 6, 8, 10, 11, 15.1–15.4, 16,
18, 19, 21, 24, 25, 25.1–25.8, 26,
27, 35, 36, 56–58, 74, 75, 93,
97–99, 105, 108, 110, 114, 152,
167, IN_A1-All pages, IN_A2-1,
Installation (IN) 7, 12–21, IN_A13-All pages,

IN_A21-All pages
06/20/2003 03 Addition of board/configuration/photo-timer IN - 4–6, 12–15, 15.1, 15.2, 17,
information; corrections for mistypes 18, 21, 25.1, 25.2, 25.3, 25.5,
(FM4017) 25.7, 25.8, 26, 27, 35–43,
43.1–43.4, 44–50, 57, 61, 73, 74,
76, 77, 77.1–77.4, 78–93,
99–109, 109.1–109.8, 110, 111,
142, 145, 157, 158, 162–164,
171,
IN_A2-5–8, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18–22,
IN_A4-3, 4,
IN_A6-1,
IN_A7-1, 16, 21–26,
IN_A9-1, 5, 6, IN–A10-1, 4
003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual IN - 1

06.20.2003 FM4017
CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A1 IN - 2 CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A1 IN - 3
■ How to Use Worksheet

1. How Installation Volume Is Organized
In the Installation Volume, the worksheets for taking notes of the configuration information
are provided in its appendixes.
In the Installation volume, the configuration information that should be checked prior to
installation, as well as the installation procedures, are described. Duplicate the attached worksheet and describe the configuration information in its copy with
reference to Chapters 2 and 3 of the Installation Volume.
■ Organization of Installation Volume Referring to the worksheet that provides the configuration information, perform the
procedures described in “Appendix 17. Setting Configuration File.”
In the Installation volume, its chapters are arranged along the flow of procedures, from
determination of specs to image output after installation. First machine Second and subsequent machines
In Chapters 2 through 4, descriptions are given which should be checked in advance on the
Copy Copy
t
assumption that they are read prior to installation of the machine.
ee
Appendix of
sh
k
or
W
t
ee
In Chapters 5 through 9, actual installation procedures are described in sequence. Installation
sh
k
or
Volume
W
Appendix 1 provides an original of worksheet, so that check items described in Chapters 2
through 4 should be filled in a copy of this worksheet. It is assumed in Chapters 5 through 9
that the installation procedures are performed with reference to the worksheet where
necessary items are described. The worksheet is used when configuration setting of
the machine is actually performed.
FR1B1253.EPS
Chapters To See Prior to Installation

When several units of the CR-IR344 are to be installed, the worksheet for the first machine
Chapter 2 Determination of System Configuration IN - 8
should be first filled out, and then it should be copied for the subsequent machines, so that
Chapter 3 Determination of Configuration Information IN - 16 item(s) to be changed may be red-penciled.
Chapter 4 Preparation of Installation Environment IN - 52
Chapters to See during Installation

Chapter 5 Unloading, Transfer, and Unpacking Procedures and Precautions IN - 60
Chapter 6 Installation Procedures IN - 70
Chapter 7 Connecting and Checking the Console IN - 114
Chapter 8 Settings on Units Interfaced IN - 154
Chapter 9 Final Adjustment/Checkout Procedures to Be Performed
at the End of Installation IN - 156
Worksheet to be Copied
Appendix 1 Worksheet for Determination of System Configuration IN_A1-1
Appendix 2 Worksheet for Determination of Configuration Information IN_A2-1
003-352-01 CR-IR344 Service Manual IN - 2 003-352-01 CR-IR344 Service Manual IN - 3

07.05.2001 FM3073 07.05.2001 FM3073
■ Work Flowcharts ● Chapters you should refer to during installation
● Chapters you should refer to before installation START A
START A 6.5 Removing the Clamps and Installing

5. Unloading, Transfer, and Unpacking the Separately Packed Items
Procedures and Precautions
1. How Installation Volume Is Organized 3.3 REMOTE SWITCH 6.5.1 Procedure to Be Performed
(RMT_SW.CFG) at the IP Positioning Unit
"Appendix 1. Worksheet for Determination 5.1 Unloading
of System Configuration" 6.5.2 Procedure to Be Performed
"Appendix 2. For Determination of 3.4 EQUIPMENT (EQUIP) at Scanner Unit
5.2 Transfer
Configuration Information"
3.5 LOCAL INTERFACE 6.5.3 Procedure to Be Performed
2. System Configuration (INTERFACE) 5.3 Unpacking at Erasure Conveyor
5.4 Temporary Placement Procedures 6.6 Setting and Installing the Boards
2.1 Connectable Peripherals 3.6 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE
(DEVICE)
"Appendix 14. Requirements Regarding 6.6.1 MTH08B Board
5.5 Checking the Items Supplied
Locally Obtained Parts "
3.7 HOSTS ADDRESS (HOSTS)
2.2 Information on Optional Boards 5.5.1 Machine main body 6.6.2 MTH08E Board
for CR-IR344 3.8 DISTRIBUTION (CODEDSTB)
5.5.2 Separately packed items 6.6.3 CPU90E Board
2.3 System Configuration Examples 3.9 ROUTING (ROUTE)
5.5.3 Options 6.6.4 IMG07B Board
2.3.1 Connecting the console to 3.10 NETMASKS (NETMASKS)
the CPU90E 6.6.5 BSP08A Board
6. Installation Procedures
3.11 List of Setup Items Related to
2.3.2 Connecting the console to Network and Setup Examples 6.6.6 MG08A Board
the CPU90F 6.1 Installation Procedure Overview
6.6.7 IMG08B/H Board
3. Determining the Configuration Information 4. Preparing the Installation Environment 6.2 Checking the Voltage and
Connecting the Power Supply
6.6.8 XPC08A Board
"Appendix 16. Network System Setup
Administration Sheet" 4.1 Machine Specifications 6.2.1 Removing the Controller
Cover 6.6.9 DMC08A Board or
"Appendix 17. Setting Configuration File"
4.2 Machine Relocation and Anchorage HCP08A Board (optional)
6.2.2 Setting the Power Supply
6.6.10 CPU90F Board
3.1 SYSTEM (IRSET.CFG) 4.3 Environmental Conditions 6.2.3 Connecting the Machine
Power Supply
6.6.11 LAN90B Board
3.1.1 List of SYSTEM Setup 4.4 Electrical Specifications
6.2.4 Running a Power Supply
Items (IRSET.CFG) Short-Circuit Check and
6.6.12 MMC90A Board or
4.5 Tool List Connecting to Distribution
DIM08A Board
3.1.2 SYSTEM Settings to Be Switchboard
Changed for Second and 4.6 Preliminary Work
Subsequent Units 6.2.5 Turning OFF the Battery 6.6.13 SNS08B Board and
Backup Switches of the SCN08C/SCR08C Board
CPU90E Board
3.2 PRINT (FILMFMT.CFG) END
6.7 Checking for REMOTE/LOCAL
6.3 Anchoring the Machine Switch
3.2.1 Setup Items of PRINT
(FILMFMT.CFG) "Appendix 20. Turntable" 6.8 Reinstalling the Covers
6.4 Removing the Covers

A FR1B1501.EPS
B FR4B1502.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
B C BLANK PAGE
7. Connecting and Checking the Console 8. Settings on Units Interfaced
7.1 Connecting the Console 8.1 Settings on DMS Unit
7.1.1 Installing the CR-IR344

and Console
9. Final Adjustment/Checkout Procedures
for the First Time to Be Performed at the End
of Installation
7.1.2 Introducing the CR-IR344
into the Existing System 9.1 Checking for Improper Elevation
"Appendix 3. Installing the Console
Bracket " 9.2 Checking for Improper IP
"Appendix 13. General Information Conveyance
about M-Utility"
"Appendix 21 Procedures for Connecting 9.3 Adjusting the Bucky Timer
with CR Console (CR-IR348CL)"
7.2 Checking for Improper Fan Operations 9.4 Checking the Interface Operation
7.3 Clearing the Backup Memory 9.5 Checking the Image Quality
and Adjusting the Imaging
Conditions
7.4 Setting the Date and Time
9.6 Confirming and Clearing the Error

7.5 Checking the Voltages Log during Setup
7.6 Installing the Options 9.7 Verifying the Machine Power OFF
Sequence
"Appendix 7. Installing the Photo-timer "
"Appendix 8. Installing the Grip Handle"
"Appendix 9. Installing the Side Grip 9.8 Cleaning the Covers
Handles"
"Appendix 10. Installing the Gonad
Protector"
END
"Appendix 11. Installing the Cassette
Exposure Kit"
"Appendix 12. Installing the Up-down
Foot Switch"
"Appendix 18. Installing the Optional
Software"
"Appendix 19. Adjusting the Exposure/
Reader Unit Descent Speed"
7.7 Connecting the X-Ray Switch Cable
"Appendix 4. Connecting the X-ray Tube

Interlock (Size)"
"Appendix 5. Connecting the X-ray Tube FR1B1503.EPS
Interlock (Up/Down)"
"Appendix 6. Supplementary Information
on X-ray Controller"
7.8 Cable Connection Diagram

06.20.2003 FM4017 10.15.99 FM2600
● Printers that can be network-connected

2. System Configuration
The following shows the model name and software version of the printer that can be
Peripheral devices such as a printer and the DMS can be network-connected to or directly network-connected and used to generate images.
connected to the CR-IR344 and CR-IR344P. To establish such connections, it is necessary Note that the CR-IR344 can print images via a network onto a printer that is connected to
to make cable connections with an interface board appropriate for the employed connection another unit of the CR-IR344.
style and define the configuration for both the CR-IR344 and its peripherals. Model name Software version
FN-PS551 A02 or later (A03 or later for MFP use; A04 or
2.1 Connectable Peripherals and Software Versions later for FINP connection)
Connection protocol: FINP
The peripherals that may be interfaced to the CR-IR344 and CR-IR344P, as well as their
◆ NOTE ◆
software versions, are described. Peripherals that are not listed here cannot be interfaced to
the CR-IR344 and CR-IR344P. If the printer connection to the CR-IR344 is changed from a local connection to a network
connection or vice versa, access the U-Utility’s printer selection menu and select the newly
■ CR-IR348CL Connectable to CR-IR344P employed printer.
The software version of the CR-IR348CL (hereinafter abbreviated as CL) that is connected
to the CR-IR344P is A02. ■ DMS Units Connectable to the CR-IR344
● DMS units that can be directly connected
■ Printers connectable to CR-IR344
The following shows the model numbers and software versions of the DMS units that can be
● Printers that can be directly connected directly connected to the CR-IR344 with an E-I/F board.
Model name Software version
The following shows the model names and software versions of the printers that can be
directly connected to the CR-IR344 through the use of an E-I/F board. OD-F613 Not supported
OD-F623 Not supported
Configuration “ULP” need not be set up because its setup is automatically performed by the
CR-IR344. OD-F614/624 D03 or F01 or later
Model name Software version HI-C652 Not supported
HI-G653 Not supported
CR-LP414/FL-IM2636 (Not supported now)
HI-C654 A12, B04, E05, F04, or G03 or later (17" x 17"
CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N CPU68J board: A05; IF68J board: A04
high-resolution images and 18 cm x 43 cm
(IF68J board: A05 unusable) standard/high-resolution images cannot be
CR-LP415/FL-IM2636II A07 stored. A13 or later for MFP use).
CR-LP416/FL-IM3543II A07 (IFM05C or IFM06D required for 18 cm x 43 HI-C655 A04 or later (A05 or later for MFP use)
cm image output) Connection protocol: E-I/F only
CR-LP417/FL-IMD A10 ● DMS units that can be network-connected
CR-DP L A04, B00 or later (B04 or later for 8"x10" film The following shows the model numbers and software versions of the DMS units that can be
output) network-connected to the CR-IR344 with a network I/F board. Note that the HI-C655 and
FM-DP2636 C05 or later OD-F614/624 are capable of handling increased-width images.
FM-DP3543 C01 or later Model name Software version
FL-IM3543 (Not supported now) OD-F614/624 A09 or later or Z00 or later (A11/Z02 or later for
FINP connection)
FL-IM3543N(MN) CPU68J board: A06; IF68J board: A04
HI-C654 A12, B04, E05, F04, or G03 or later (17" x 17"
(IF68J board: A06 unusable)
high-resolution images and 18 cm x 43 cm
DRY PIX100 A01 or later (B04 or later for 8"x10" film output) standard/high-resolution images cannot be
Connection protocol: E-I/F only stored. A13 or later for MFP use).
HI-C655 A04 or later (A05 or later for MFP use; A07 or
later for FINP connection)
HI-C655QA/QA-WS771 A03 or later
Connection protocol: FINP for OD-F614/624, HI-C654, and HI-C655;
FUJI-Private for HI-C655QA/QA-WS771

08.30.2001 FM3115 07.05.2001 FM3073
■ Relationship between CR-IR344P and CL 2.3 System Configuration Examples

● The CR-IR344P main body does not have a panel for console processing (exposure
menu, patient information input, and service utility). In addition, it incorporates merely This section explains about system configuration examples based on network connections.
basic functionality for image processing and communication control.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Therefore, it will be connected to its dedicated personal computer (CL) where necessary
processing is performed. A one-to-one network connection between the CR-IR344 and the console can be established without
a hub. Without a hub, the information transmission/reception along cables would be reversed.
● The CR-IR344P and CL are connected together by E-I/F (100BASE-TX port provided on Therefore, a cross cable should be used with the S5 on the CPU90E board placed in the STRAIGHT
the CPU90F board of the CR-IR344P) via a hub. position. (If a straight cable is used, the S5 should be placed in the CROSS position.)
● When the CR-IR344P is installed, one unit of the CL needs to be registered for that CR-
IR344P.
The CR-IR344 system configuration can be roughly divided into two types depending on
● One CL may register (operate) up to two units of the RU. whether the console is connected to the CPU90E board or CPU90F (HCP08A) board.
● By connecting the CL and CR-IR344P with a special interface cable, power ON/OFF of These two types can be subdivided depending on whether the DMS is connected to the
the CR-IR344P (remote power control) can be done from the CL. DMC08A board or CPU90F (HCP08A) board.
■ Relationship between CR-IR344 and console ● Patterns for connecting the console to the CPU90E
● The CR-IR344 main body does not have a panel for console processing (exposure menu, The console is connected to the CPU90E board via a network (10BASE-TE).
patient information input, and service utility). Therefore, the CR-IR344 is connected to the
• System configuration pattern (1)
IDT-IV so as to perform console processing with the IDT-IV (hereinafter referred to as the
console). To permit such console processing, the console must be registered in the CR- The DMS is connected to the DMC08A board.
IR344 with the console connected to the CR-IR344 at the time of installation. Note that • System configuration pattern (2)
only one console can be registered.
The DMS is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (100BASE-TX).
● A single unit of the console achieves console processing for up to two units of the CR-
IR344. ● Patterns for connecting the console to the CPU90F
● When the console contact output is connected to a networked unit of the CR-IR344 with a
contact cable, the CR-IR344 is turned ON and OFF by the console (remote power The console is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX).
control). • System configuration pattern (3)
The DMS is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (10BASE-T).
2.2 Information on Optional Boards for CR-IR344 • System configuration pattern (4)
The DMS is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (100BASE-TX). Since the
console can be connected to 10BASE-T only, the DMS-to-CPU90F connection is
■ IMG08B Board: Multi-frequency Processing (MFP) Board established via a 100M/10M bridge.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE • System configuration pattern (5)
The IMG08B board is not installed in units in which the IMG08H board is installed. The console and the DMS are both connected to the CPU90F board via a network.
The use of a 100M/10M switching hub makes it possible to exchange data with the
The part numbers and software versions for the board that is required for multi-frequency console in compliance with the 10BASE-T standard and exchange data with the DMS
processing are shown below. The board should always be used in the correspondence in compliance with the 100BASE-TX standard.
between the part number and software version specified below.
● Pattern where CR-IR348CL is connected to CPU90F
PART NO. Software version
113Y7038B A01 • System configuration pattern (6)
113Y7038E A02 or later The CR-IR348CL is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (100BASE-TX).
The multi-frequency processing function is automatically activated by installing the IMG08B
board. Thus, it is unnecessary to set this function in the configuration and so forth.
■ HCP08A Board: Compression/Decompression Board

Versions of the board and software required to provide film output for the read image data of
the CR-IR344 from the printer connected via the network to the HI-C655QA/QA-WS771 in
local connection mode are shown below.
Version of HCP08A board Software version
Version G or later A00 or later
08.30.2001 FM3115 08.30.2001 FM3115
2.3.1 Connecting the console to the CPU90E

CAUTION
Do not connect a telephone modular cable to the network port because both the devices and The console is connected to the CPU90E board via a network (10BASE-T).
telephone line may become defective.
Note that the network cable is called a “Category 5 LAN cable”, to which an 8-conductor ■ System configuration example (1)
modular connector is attached. The DMS is connected to the DMC08A board
◆ NOTE ◆ DMS
e.g.) OD-F614
It may be necessary to define the communication method for the devices to be
connected to a network. In most cases, they operate when the “Auto Negotiation”
option or default setting is employed. If they do not operate normally, however, adjust CR-IR344
the communication method setting in accordance with the table below: DMS DMC08A IMG08A PRINTER
e.g.) HI-C654 e.g.) FL-IM D
Applicable HUB Switch setting Communication method CPU90E
10BASE-T Half-duplex 10 Mbps, half-duplex
CPU90E board 10BASE- 10 Mbps, half-duplex

T/100BASE- 10 Mbps, half-duplex ID data HUB (10BASE-T) Remote power ON/OFF
TX (selectable) Auto-negotiation
10BASE-T Half-duplex 10 Mbps, half-duplex
10 Mbps, half-duplex 10 Mbps, half-duplex

IDT-IV IDT-IV IDT-IV IDT-IV IDT-IV IDT-IV
CPU90Fboard 10BASE- 100 Mbps, half-duplex 100 Mbps, half-duplex
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6
T/100BASE- Console
100 Mbps, half-duplex
TX (selectable) FR1B2001.EPS
Auto-negation
100 Mbps, half-duplex
(when ETH90H board used) ■ System configuration example (2)
TR1B2003.EPS The DMS is connected to the CPU90F/LAN90B board via a network (10BASE-T).
IDT-IV IDT-IV e.g.)

FM-DP3543
HUB (10BASE-T) CR-IR342

No.2
CPU90E
ID data
CPU90F & HCP08A
HI-C655
Image data
HUB
(100BASE-TX)
PRINTER Image data

ID data
FN-PS551
CPU90F & HCP08A
ID data
CR-IR344
HUB (10BASE-T)
No.1 CPU90E JPS-3
IDT-IV IDT-IV Remote power ON/OFF
Console FR1B2002.EPS

06.20.2003 FM4017 06.20.2003 FM4017
2.3.2 Connecting the console to the CPU90F ■ System configuration example (5)
The console and the DMS are both connected to the CPU90F/LAN90B board via a network.
The console is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX). The use of a 100M/10M switching hub makes it possible to exchange data with the console
in compliance with the 10BASE-T standard and exchange data with the DMS in compliance
■ System configuration example (3) with the 100BASE-TX standard.
The DMS is connected to the CPU90F board via a network (10BASE-T).
e.g.)
e.g.)
FM-DP3543
FM-DP3543
JPS-3 JPS-3
CR-IR344 CR-IR344
CPU90F & HCP08A

HI-C655 OD-F614 IDT-IV IDT-IV CPU90F & HCP08A
HI-C655 OD-F614
Image data Image data
ID data ID data
HUB (10BASE-T
or 100BASE-TX) 100M/10M switching HUB
Image data (100BASE-TX)
ROUTER IDT-IV Switching to 10M Image data
ID data
PRINTER ID data
CPU90F & HCP08A
FN-PS551 CPU90F & HCP08A
CR-IR344
PRINTER
IDT-IV IDT-IV e.g.) FL-IM D CR-IR344
JPS-3 IMG08A
Cons

CR-IR344 - 03E-FCR 5501D & 5501DPlus PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR-IR344 - 03E-FCR 5501D & 5501DPlus PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0.

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

The relationship between mR (milli-roentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

FCR® is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright© 1999-2003 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual 0.1

■ Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Steel rule (150mm) ❍ –

■ Notational Conventions Steel rule (300mm) ❍ –

● Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.

Used to indicate the section you should refer to.

■ Other General Precautions

■ Precautions for Optical Parts

2. Safety Against Laser Radiation BLANK PAGE

■ Precautions Against Laser Exposure

● Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure

● Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

CR-IR344 Service Manual – Contents

Machine Description (MD) 8. Mechanical Control Flows ........................................................................................... MD 8-1

1.3 Maintenance Space............................................................................................ MD 1-3 8.3 Utility Processing............................................................................................. MD 8-29

Troubleshooting (MT) 03C5 ............................................................................................................ MT 2-145

9. Power Supply Related Fuse Block Diagram .............................................................. MT 9-1

10. Startup Failure Analysis ............................................................................................ MT 10-1

13. Checking for Improper IP Conveyance .................................................................... MT 13-1

14. Machine Position Information ................................................................................... MT 14-1

20. Boards ......................................................................................................................... MC 20-1

22. Hydraulic circuit diagram .......................................................................................... MC 22-1

Maintenance Utility (MU) 8. 3. TEST MODE: Operation Setup ................................................................................. MU 8-1

Service Parts List (SP) 15B CONTROLLER 2 ....................................................................................................... SP-72

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

2. Overview of Preventive Maintenance Programs Performed at Various Intervals ...... PM-3

3. Details of Maintenance Procedures .............................................................................. PM-6

Appendix 5. Connecting the X-ray Tube Interlock (Up/Down) ............................................ IN_A5-1

● About Acrobat Reader <Installation Volume>

■ Organizational Differences from Preceding Manuals 9000 series CR-IR344 Remarks

9000 series CR-IR344 Remarks

Chapter A Installation Planning Installation volume:

Chapter F4 Mechanical Parts (Checks/

Checks, Adjustment, and Replacement Compiled as one “Checks,

Chapter Z3 I/O Layout Drawings Machine Description volume:

Chapter Z4 Covers and Units Removal Checks, Adjustment, and Replacement

Safety Labels EN60825-1: 1996

1. Laser Precaution Labels

■ Label Attachment Locations

● HHS Certification and Identification Label

MODEL CR-IR 344 MODEL CR-IR 344P

HHS certification and identification label

● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 1 Product Label 2. Labels

■ Label Attachment Locations

● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label

● Ratings Indication Label

FR4B1008.EPS ● Manufacturer Label

Stop betjening i mindst 9 minutter, når denne HHS Label#2

Exposure unit bottom cover FR1B1008.EPS

■ Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit BLANK PAGE

Scanning optics unit

Machine Description (MD)

003-352-03 CR-IR344 Service Manual MD - 1

1. Machine Components and Their Names 1.2 Component Names

Power supply unit